Association for Behavior Analysis International

The Association for Behavior Analysis International® (ABAI) is a nonprofit membership organization with the mission to contribute to the well-being of society by developing, enhancing, and supporting the growth and vitality of the science of behavior analysis through research, education, and practice.

Search

45th Annual Convention; Chicago, IL; 2019

CE by Type: BACB


 

Workshop #W1
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Ethical Considerations: What Every Behavior Analyst Should Know About Augmentative and Alternative Communication Decision-Making
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 3
Area: AUT/VBC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Catherine Horton, M.S.
CATHERINE HORTON (Pyramid Educational Consultants, Inc.), Andy Bondy (Pyramid Educational Consultants, Inc.)
Description: An overwhelming number of communication options exist for our learners with complex communication needs. Practitioners are not only faced with decisions related to the type of Augmentative and Alternative Communication (AAC) system, but are also tasked with choices related to the most effective teaching strategy. Behavior analysts must be familiar with the available options, critically review the current research and make informed recommendations; all while maintaining compliance with the BACB Professional and Ethical Compliance Code and working collaboratively with other members of the educational team. This presentation will review three current and popular approaches in the field including Aided Language Stimulation/Modeling, core vocabulary and presumed competence. Relevance to the Code will be explored and participants will be presented with related ethical dilemmas with proposed solutions. Participants will leave the training with a framework for analyzing new communicative approaches while maintaining positive, ethical team collaboration.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) State specific guidelines from the BACB Professional and Ethical Compliance Code in relation to AAC decision-making (2) Describe current popular approaches in the field of AAC, specifically including Aided Language Stimulation/Modeling; core vocabulary and presumed competence. (3) Describe strategies for working cooperatively with other educational team members.
Activities: Workshop objectives will be targeted via a balanced presentation of lecture, group discussion and analysis of videos demonstrating key concepts. Ethical scenarios will also be presented for small group discussion and problem-solving.
Audience: Intermediate
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): AAC, Core Vocabulary, Presumed Competence, Pyramid
 
Workshop #W2
CE Offered: BACB
Augmentative and Alternative Communication Intervention Strategies for Individuals With Autism
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 1
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Joseph Novak, Ed.D.
JOSEPH NOVAK (REED Academy; Kean University)
Description: AAC will be reviewed for its benefits for expressive and receptive language (Light et al., 1998). Research-based information is provided as it relates to how vocal speech development is affected by AAC (Olive et al., 2007). Communication modes, the range of communication systems (low tech to high tech), and brief information related to assessment are reviewed. Research on the efficacy of speech-generating devices for supporting communication needs of individuals with autism will be explicitly reviewed. Information regarding recommended prompts/prompt-fading procedures will be shared (Feeley & Jones, 2012). Steps for initiating intervention and selecting initial vocabulary are reviewed (Rosales, Stone, & Rehfeldt, 2009). Considerations for implementing FCT as it relates to AAC are reviewed (Carr & Durand, 1985). Addressing AAC needs for learners with partial vocal speech is addressed and a sample protocol is shared. AAC modeling techniques are reviewed in detail (Harris & Reichle, 2004). Additional strategies for common challenges with AAC intervention are discussed. Specific skill acquisition programs to target skills such as communicative repair will be shared.
Learning Objectives: 1) Participants will be able to describe the research to date on the use of speech-generating devices for individuals with autism. 2) Participants will be able to accurately describe the initial steps in implementing an AAC-based intervention as well as curricular goals to move beyond requesting. 3) Participants will be able to accurately describe various instructional strategies including language modeling and direct prompting. 4) Participants will be able to describe a protocol for supporting vocal speech for individuals who use SGDs as well as the rationale behind the techniques within the protocol.
Activities: - Instructional strategies include: lecture, discussion, small group breakout (as appropriate). - Workshop objectives will be met through a presentation of lecture, video, and group discussion. - Core content will be taught through lecture and video demonstrations of strategies will be provided as appropriate. - Supplemental materials for will be provided in order to support participant learning. - The format combines lecture and small group activities.
Audience: The target audience consists of BCBAs who may only have entry-level competence in the area of augmentative and alternative communication. Because collaboration with SLPs may not always be possible, it is important that BCBAs have a more thorough understanding of intervention strategies for individuals with autism who use AAC.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): AAC, Language Modeling, Picture-Based Communication, Speech-Generating Devices
 
Workshop #W3
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Using a Behavior Skills Training Model to Increase Fluency in Play-Based Discrete Trial Teaching
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: AUT/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: E Amanda DiGangi, Ph.D.
E AMANDA DIGANGI (Arizona State University), SAMUEL DIGANGI (Arizona State University)
Description: Working with toddlers and preschoolers can be tricky business. Young children often lack skills necessary to sit and attend for even short periods of time, making instructional control a critical issue. The authors will present a play-based approach to discrete trial teaching that follows the child’s lead and maximizes establishing operations to increase acquisition of a variety of skills and behavioral cusps. The presentation will demonstrate the approach using a Behavioral Skills Training model to build fluency. Participants will practice the approach in teams and use specific strategies to build and measure fluency with their teammates. Preliminary data on improved fluency using the BST model will also be presented. Participants will be provided fidelity sheets and fluency data sheets for use in their own practice. This workshop is for BCBAs/BCaBAs who supervise programming for young children with developmental disabilities, including autism. The target audience are those individuals who are responsible for training and supervision of front line therapy, early intervention, or preschool special education staff. The workshop will use videos, demonstration, and hands on practice.
Learning Objectives: At the end of this workshop, participants will be able to: 1. Compare and contrast a play-based approach to Discrete Trial Teaching (DTT) with more traditional "table time" approaches. 2. Describe in detail a Behavior Skills Training model for increasing fluency in play-based DTT for their staff. 3. Demonstrate increased fluency in play-based DTT through fidelity and timed scoring methods. 4. Collect data on fluency in play-based DTT across 5-minute data collection probes.
Activities: Workshop objectives will be met through a balanced presentation of lecture, discussion, demonstration, video examples, guided practice, and team practice, and fluency building exercises.
Audience: This workshop is for BCBAs and BCaBAs who supervise programming for young children with developmental disabilities, including autism. The target audience are those individuals who are responsible for training and supervision of front line therapy, early intervention, or preschool special education staff. It is expected that this audience will have advanced level knowledge of applied behavior analysis and some amount of experience in training and supervising staff.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): autism, early intervention, preschoolers, toddlers
 
Workshop #W4
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Ethical Approaches to Teaching Social Skills for Individuals Diagnosed With Autism Spectrum Disorder
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Alpine 1
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Joseph H. Cihon, M.A.
JUSTIN B. LEAF (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), JOSEPH H. CIHON (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), CHRISTINE MILNE-SEMINARA (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), JULIA FERGUSON (Autism Partnership Foundation)
Description: Autism spectrum disorder (ASD) is characterized by deficits in social skills, including, but not limited to, social communication, interaction, and reciprocity. To address these deficits, there are a myriad of social skills interventions available to the behavior analyst. Unfortunately, many of these interventions lack methodologically sound empirical support for their effectiveness, while others could be considered pseudoscientific and/or antiscientific. Behavior analysts who provide or oversee these interventions have an ethical obligation to select and provide effective intervention. Therefore, it is essential for behavior analysts to have a firm understanding of effective social skills interventions as well as the skills necessary to identify social skills interventions that lack empirical support and may be ineffective or harmful. The purpose of this workshop is to introduce practicing behavior analysts to the empirical evidence of several popular social skills interventions, provide examples of how to identify and research potentially pseudoscientific interventions, and outline the importance of understanding the evidence and identification of pseudoscientific interventions as it relates to ethical obligations to clients.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, the participants will be able to: 1. identify and describe several evidence-based social skills interventions for individuals diagnosed with ASD 2. identify and describe at least two commonly used social skills interventions for individuals diagnosed with ASD that lack empirical support or align closely to a pseudoscience 3. describe the ethical implications of using social skills interventions that lack empirical support
Activities: Workshop objectives will be met through a balance of presentation methods including, but not limited to, lecture, video observation, discussion, small group break out, target reading, and guided practice.
Audience: This workshop is intended for any behavior analysts providing social skills interventions for individuals diagnosed with ASD. Standardized competencies (e.g., BCBA) are suggested but not required.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): evidence based, pseudoscience, social skills
 
Workshop #W5
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Real Supervision: There’s No App for That
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Monte Rosa
Area: AUT/TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Jeremy H. Greenberg, Ph.D.
JEREMY H. GREENBERG (The Children's Institute of Hong Kong)
Description: This three-hour intensive workshop will include evidence-based teaching, learning, and supervision strategies ad tactics from the Applied Behavior Analysis research literature. The content is aimed at behavior analysts and supervisors who are charged with the supervision of RBTs, Board Certified Assisitant Behavior Analysis, and BCBAs working with students having various special education needs.
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will become literate in the The Learn Unit and supporting literature through Active Student Responding (ASR). 2. Participants will learn the rules included in the Data Decision Protocol (Keohane, 1997; Greer, 2002; Greenberg, 2007) through hands-on presentation and exercises. 3. Participants will learn about the TPRA procedure, supporting research, and practice data collection and IOA using video models.
Activities: 1. Instructional strategies include lecture, keynote presentation, review of related research literature in Applied Behavior Analysis 2. Practice using video models will be included for all participants. This will include a hands-on IOA practice.
Audience: Advanced behavior analysts, and supervisors of teachers working with students with special education needs.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): learn units, supervision, teacher training, TPRA
 
Workshop #W6
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP
Effective Toilet Training for Individuals With Autism and Developmental Disabilities: From Assessment to Treatment
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich G
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Frank R. Cicero, Ph.D.
FRANK R. CICERO (Seton Hall University)
Description: Current literature indicates that behavioral toileting methods continue to be effective for individuals with and without disabilities for both urination and bowel training. The current workshop will present the audience with empirically supported procedures for toilet training individuals on the autism spectrum using a variety of methods consistent with the principles of ABA. First, a brief review of the literature on toilet training will provide the audience with background information showing empirical support for behavioral principles and procedures. Seminal articles in the field of ABA will be discussed. Next, the presenter will discuss the importance of conducting an objective assessment of problem skill areas so that treatment procedures can be properly individualized and designed. Assessment procedures and functional hypotheses will be discussed targeting both urination and bowel movement accidents. Forms of data will include narrative ABC data, frequency counts and scatter plots. The details of a reinforcement-based urination training procedure will be presented. The audience will be presented with a task analysis for how to run the procedure and analyze treatment results. The presenter will then outline the details of assessment, treatment, data analysis and evaluation for bowel training. An emphasis will be placed on functional assessment for bowel accidents so that treatment can be tailored to function.
Learning Objectives: 1. Through this workshop, audience members will be able to conduct an assessment of toilet training issues and needs. 2. The audience members will be able to design and implement an effective urination training intervention. 3. The audience members will be able to design and implement an effective bowel training intervention. 4. The audience members will learn how to collect data for a toileting intervention in order to make useful data-based treatment decisions
Activities: Workshop activities will include didactic instruction by the presenter guided by a power point (which will be distributed as a hand out), discussion of distributed materials including assessment protocols, data sheets, task analyses and sample treatment plans, role plays of treatment strategies, group discussion and the answering of audience questions. Discussion of case examples will also be provided.
Audience: The workshop content will be at the intermediate level. Basic principles and procedures of applied behavior analysis will be described related to how they can be used in toilet training interventions, however the workshop is not designed to teach these basic principles and procedures for people who are unfamiliar with ABA.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): bowel training, toilet training, urination
 
Workshop #W7
CE Offered: BACB
Including Groups In a Client's Day-Scheduling Ideas and Teaching Staff to Become Effective Group Teachers
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 2
Area: AUT/OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Britany Melton, M.S.
BRITANY MELTON (Endicott College), JILL E. MCGRALE MAHER (Massachusetts Preparatory Academy for Children), IAN MELTON (Endicott College, Riverbend Behavioral Health), COURTNEY MAHER (Michigan State University), KRISTI WITKOWSKI (Strategic Behavior Solutions)
Description: While discrete trial instruction is an essential instructional model for students with autism spectrum disorder, there is a growing need for clients to become effective group learners. As a result, for students to learn effectively in groups, it is essential that teachers are skilled in providing group instruction. While many programs teach staff to be very skilled one-to-one instructors, very few teach the skills necessary to provide students with rapid skills development in group situations. Furthermore, scheduling groups that make sense in terms of client’s learning styles, treatment plan targets, and behavioral needs is not an easy task. This workshop will provide participants practical resources. Participants will be introduced to a comprehensive model to assess staff’s current group teaching skills, as well as a systematic method of designing, implementing, and evaluating programs to teach staff to teach groups of students. Skills acquired will be generalizable across all age groups as participants will review the process from development of the daily schedules to include groups, designing data collections systems, training staff, and evaluating progress.
Learning Objectives: • Identify guidelines for constructing groups • Discuss group teaching strategies using empirically based techniques and interventions • Develop data collection systems • Identify key components for staff training programs • Practice strategies for teaching staff to teach groups • Promote the use of best practice and ethical standards
Activities: Didactic instruction Role-play Development of staff training program Development of data collection procedures
Audience: Directors, supervisors and instructors for children with autism spectrum disorder and related disabilities
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Workshop #W8
CE Offered: BACB
Help Us Help You: Rapport Building and the Applied Setting
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Lugano
Area: CBM/OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Adrienne Hursh, M.A.
ADRIENNE HURSH (Pyles and Associates; The Chicago School), LIZZIE WONG (Pyles and Associates), SHAI MAOR (Pyles and Associates)
Description: In a field where human interaction is an essential component for effectively conducting interventions based on principles of behavior analysis, very rarely do we thoroughly discuss what it entails to establish good rapport. Studies have shown that having good rapport with families and staff helps to increase their cooperation with implementing our interventions. In addition, another study demonstrated that staff with bad rapport in a group home, did not start to see a decrease in their consumers problematic behaviors until after the staff started to implement components that lead to good rapport. That is not to say that good rapport alone is the only intervention needed, but it is an extremely important component that so very often gets overlooked.
Learning Objectives: 1) Identify behaviors associated with "rapport" 2)Discuss and implement components that help build rapport, in addition, to identifying behaviors that hinder rapport building 3) Discuss and implement behavior skills training to teach rapport building components
Activities: Workshop activities include lecture presentation, handout of lecture material, discussion, and small group activities.
Audience: This workshop is appropriate for those who work in a clinical setting with clients and for those who train others who work in a similar capacity.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): BST, Clinical, Rapport building, staff training
 
Workshop #W9
CE Offered: BACB
Managing Stress Using Mindfulness Meditation and Behavior Analytic Practices
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 3
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Robert Stromer, Ph.D.
ROBERT STROMER (George Brown College), ELISABETH KINNEY (Behavioral Learning and Leadership), CYNTHIA LONG (Square One)
Description: The ability to manage stress under ever-changing conditions is an essential skill set for the behavioral practitioner; and doing so may require retooling one’s self-care repertoire. For us, this meant adding mindfulness and meditative practices to better manage life’s stressors and address ongoing concerns of health and wellness. This approach resulted in improved ways of dealing with and replacing verbal behavior that often got in the way of relaxation. Therefore, this workshop is about supplementing one’s self-management and self-regulation skills to cope with life’s challenges and to reduce the likelihood of disabling emotional states such as stress, anxiety, and depression. The supplement skills come from empirically supported protocols on stress management and cognitive therapy – Mindfulness-Based Cognitive Therapy, Mindfulness-Based Stress Reduction, and Koru Mindfulness® – skills readily learned and generalized to real life. As a take-home practice, attendees learn a meditation called the Three-Minute Breathing Space. Participants also devise a post-workshop plan for relaxation training and everyday stress management. Follow-up teleconferences by the workshop instructors assist in attendees’ implementation of their plan. Practitioners in command of mindful self-care skills may enjoy their work more and be well equipped to teach others to do the same.
Learning Objectives: a) State potential benefits of mindfulness meditation as a supplement to one’s emotional self-regulation repertoire. b) Identify key skills common to mindfulness meditation and stress reduction (contexts, physical postures, breathing, self-instructions, etc.). c) Demonstrate the chair-supported sitting posture used during formal practice and the kinds of self-instructions that typify the Three-Minute Breathing Space.
Activities: In a large-group format, we introduce mindfulness meditation and describe its nature and relevant background and rationales for offering a workshop on it. We also provide guided opportunities to participate in several warm-up meditations. Then, during the bulk of the workshop, methods resembling aspects of behavioral skills training and interteaching (e.g., dyadic discussion, question-and-answer, feedback) enable meaningful practice opportunities in a pivotal meditation called the Three-Minute Breathing Space. Activities include the use of (a) demonstrations, (b) written rationales and scripts appropriate for the two roles rehearsed by pairs of attendees, teacher and meditative student, (c) dyadic rehearsal of scripted and unscripted guidance of the Breathing Space and evaluative discussions of experiences, and (d) informative feedback while the instructors oversee dyad rehearsals. Wrap-up activities address questions and comments from the entire group; and we assist attendees design a follow-up plan to investigate further the self-care skills targeted in the workshop. Afterwards, participants may contract with us to attend weekly teleconferences designed to assist in their implementation of mindfulness meditation practices.
Audience: The workshop is for all certified behavior analysts, those who already practice mindfulness meditation, and those with little or no experience in such practices.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Workshop #W10
CE Offered: BACB/QABA/NASP
Behavioral Relaxation: Training and Scale
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich E
Area: CBM/PCH; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Victoria Stout Kubal, M.S.
VICTORIA STOUT KUBAL (Madera County Behavioral Health Services)
Description: Relaxation techniques are an integral part of the successful treatment of those exhibiting anxiety-related, pain-related, and/or anger-related behaviors. The sooner a client learns relaxation and other types of self-control techniques, the safer his/her internal and external environments may become. In addition, due to limitations in funding, providers must often demonstrate that extensive treatment progress has been made within a relatively short period of time. Poppen’s (1998) Behavioral Relaxation Scale (BRS) is an assessment tool for measuring the progress of an individual demonstrating the 10 overt relaxed behaviors taught to criterion with Behavioral Relaxation Training (BRT). BRT can be an effective part of treatment for individuals with emotional/mental disorders, hyperactivity, schizophrenia, traumatic brain injury, physical limitations, and/or restricted cognitive/intellectual capabilities. This workshop will provide an opportunity to experience Poppen’s (1998) Upright Behavioral Relaxation Training (URT) by means of labeling, modeling, imitation, practice, and corrective feedback. Once workshop participants are proficient in demonstrating URT and can verbally describe these 10 relaxed behaviors and corresponding examples of unrelaxed behaviors, they will be taught how to assess URT using the BRS.
Learning Objectives: By the end of the workshop, each participant will be able to: •Position his/her own body in alignment with the 10 overt relaxed behaviors from Upright Behavioral Relaxation Training (URT). •Write a description of each of the 10 overt relaxed behaviors from URT in his/her own words and provide corresponding examples of unrelaxed behaviors. •Give another individual appropriate feedback so that the other individual can correct himself/herself according to the 10 URT postures. •Observe, record, and assess another individual’s performance of the 10 relaxed behaviors from URT by accurately using the Behavioral Relaxation Scale (BRS).
Activities: •Verbal Behavior: Listen to a presentation regarding the physiological effects of relaxation, the history of using relaxation training to treat psychological and physical disorders, and Poppen’s (1998) development of Behavioral Relaxation Training and the Behavioral Relaxation Scale. •Labeling and Modeling: View a live demonstration of the 10 postures included in Upright Behavioral Relaxation Training (URT). Each relaxed posture will be labeled, described topographically, and demonstrated physically. •Modeling and Imitation: Learn how to breathe diaphragmatically, then imitate the other 9 relaxed behaviors of URT while viewing an instructor as model. After each participant has proficiently demonstrated each posture separately, he/she will practice relaxing all 10 areas at the same time. •Feedback: Practice silently while the instructors are giving each participant individual corrective feedback. Later, workshop participants will form pairs and alternate practicing URT and giving each other corrective feedback. •Criterion Tests: Take URT Written Criterion Test; score one another’s criterion test. Take BRS Written Criterion Test; score one another’s criterion test. •Assessment: Behavioral Relaxation Scale (BRS) scoring methodology will be explained and demonstrated. All observers, including the instructor, will simultaneously score the BRS for the model.
Audience: The target audience for this workshop is comprised of practitioners who are certified by the Behavior Analyst Certification Board® at the Doctoral (BCBA-D®), Master’s (BCBA®), or Bachelor’s (BCaBA®) degree levels and who work with the following populations: clients with anxiety disorders, pain-related difficulties, or anger management problems; individuals who suffered a Traumatic Brain Injury; individuals diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder, Intellectual Disability, or other developmental disability; persons exhibiting hyperactive or repetitive behaviors; clients exhibiting Schizophrenic behaviors; and persons who experience an extreme amount of “stress.” Professionals with a strong interest in Behavioral Medicine, Clinical Behavior Analysis, Family and Child Therapy, and/or Health and Fitness Training will also benefit from attending this workshop.
Content Area: Methodology
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Mindfulness, Relaxation, Self-control, Stress management
 
Workshop #W11
CE Offered: PSY/BACB
Assessment and Treatment of Children With Emotional and Behavioral Disorders: Broadening the Lens
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 2
Area: CBM/DEV; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Jeannie A. Golden, Ph.D.
JEANNIE A. GOLDEN (East Carolina University)
Description: Traditional counselors view aberrant behaviors as symptoms of underlying constructs that are the reason for these behaviors, while behaviorists view these behaviors as serving an environmental function. FBA identifies the function of aberrant behaviors and acceptable replacement behaviors that serve the same function. Components that are often missing in the analysis of aberrant behaviors include: 1) motivating operations in the form of private events (thoughts and feelings); and 2) learning history with specific Sds for reinforcement or punishment. This workshop will deal with the following: disturbed attachment, callousness and lack of emotionality, oppositional and defiant behaviors, and anxiety and depression.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, participants will be able to: 1. Describe the symptoms of emotional/behavioral disorders as behaviors serving an environmental function 2. Describe the process of conducting FBAs with children with emotional/behavioral disorders 3. Describe the role of learning history in treating with children with emotional/behavioral disorders 4. Describe the role of motivating operations and discriminative stimuli in treating children with emotional/behavioral disorders 5. Describe how to develop and implement function-based treatments for children with emotional/behavioral disorders
Activities: Workshop objectives will be met using lecture, role-play, case presentations, discussion and small-group interaction.
Audience: Participants can include BCBAs, teachers, psychologists, psychiatrists, nurses, counselors, and social workers.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Workshop #W13
CE Offered: BACB/QABA
Diversity submission Delivering Effective Behavioral Services Across Communities: Culture as a Maintaining Variable
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich B
Area: CSS; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Michele R. Traub, Ph.D.
MICHELE R. TRAUB (St. Cloud State University)
Description: Behavior analysts are trained to evaluate the environmental variables affecting the behavioral repertoires of our clients, but we rarely apply such analyses to the families and communities of those clients. In an increasingly diverse, multicultural, and multinational world, the role of culture in shaping repertoires, expectations, priorities, and values cannot be ignored when developing treatment programs for clients and their caregivers. This workshop will define culture in operational terms, discuss its role as an environmental variable influencing behavior, and detail methods behavior analysts can employ to navigate complex issues of culture and community values while staying true to the scientific practices of behavior analysis. The impact of culture on ethical and professional practice, with specific reference to the BACB Professional & Ethical Compliance Code, will also be discussed.
Learning Objectives: Following this workshop, attendees will: 1. Be able to discuss and interpret cultural variables through a behavioral lens. 2. Identify common barriers to behavior-analytic service delivery across cultures and communities. 3. State behavioral methods of building rapport across cultures, incorporating familial and community values and goals into treatment planning, and developing culturally and ethically acceptable interventions for clients. 4. Discuss potential conflicts between cultural practices and the BACB Professional & Ethical Compliance Code and be able to resolve those conflicts effectively.
Activities: This workshop will include lecture, group discussion, small-group activities, and role play exercises.
Audience: This workshop is appropriate for BCaBAs and BCBAs working in diverse communities, practitioners and clinical directors serving a diverse clientele, and academics interested in increasing cultural competence in the field of behavior analysis.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): cultural competency, parent training, social validity
 
Workshop #W14
CE Offered: PSY/BACB — 
Ethics
Severe Behavior Problems: Functional Behavior Assessment, Behavior Support Plan, Behavioral Skills Training, Evaluation and Problem Solving
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 1
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Peter Sturmey, Ph.D.
PETER STURMEY (The Graduate Center and Queens College, City University of New York)
Description: Practitioners often work with individuals with severe behavior problems such as aggression, tantrums, self-injury, pica and rumination. Although graduate classes provide some basic training application to practice is challenging, even for experienced practitioners. The purpose of this workshop is to provide instruction and problem solving in developing, writing and using Functional Behavior Assessments (FBAs), Behavior Support Plans (BSPs), Behavioral Skills Training and solving common challenges in implementation. The workshop will: (a) describe the minimum components of a functional behavior assessment (FBA) and provide good and bad examples of FBAs and examples of indicated and contraindicated intervention strategies; (b) describe the common elements of adequate behavior support plan (BSP) based on the FBAs’ (c ) describe how to translate the FBA into an adequate BSP using evidence-based practices; present and illustrate the application of task analysis of a BSP; (d) describe the steps in Behavior Skills Training (BST) as applied to teaching replacement behaviors, other prevention strategies, and responding to the replacement and target behaviors; (5) describe solutions to common implementation problems; and (6) illustrate the application of peer support for practitioners.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the minimum components of a functional behavior assessment (FBA); (2) write a behavior support plan (BSP) based on the FBA; (3) Write a task analysis of a BSP; (4) Describe the steps in Behavior Skills Training (BST); and (5) state solutions to common implementation problems.
Activities: The workshop will use lecture-type and group presentations; discussions and applications to individual cases. Participants are encouraged to present their individual cases.
Audience: This is an intermediate-level workshop. Graduate students, practitioners, applied behavior analysts, teachers, school psychologists who are working with individuals with severe behavior problems, supervisors and administrators should participate.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Behavior Plan, Behavior Problems, Functional Assessment, Skills Training
 
Workshop #W15
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Hustle and Flow, Don't Let Yourself Go: Self-Care for the Behavior Analyst
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich F
Area: DDA/AAB; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Bobby Newman, Ph.D.
AMANDA NARRA (Proud Moments), ELIZABETH DRAGO (Proud Moments), BOBBY NEWMAN (Proud Moments)
Description: Self-care is enshrined in the ethical guidelines of several human service fields. Within ABA, there are ethical guidelines regarding caseloads that are related to how many clients can effectively be seen. Part of that relates to the resources available to the behavior analyst. Largely ignored, however, are issues of self-care and how stress can affect effective service delivery. The ethics of caseload, efficiency and techniques for managing self-care will be explored.
Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will describe BACB ethical guidelines related to caseload and service delivery. 2. Attendees will describe the effects of stress on the individual and their practice. 3. Attendees will learn and practice stress management techniques. 4. Attendees will learn self-management techniques related to work load and self-care. 5. Attendees will describe research regarding stress, "burnout," staff turnover and coping strategies.
Activities: This workshop will consist of a combination of lecture, guided group discussion, and specific exercises related to work/caseload, stress, "burnout," practitioner effectiveness and staff turnover. Video will be used to demonstrate core concepts.
Audience: The target audience is intermediate level behavior analysts.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Workshop #W16
CE Offered: PSY/BACB
Behavioral Analysis of Seizures
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 2
Area: DDA/EAB; Domain: Basic Research
CE Instructor: John C. Neill, Ph.D.
JOHN C. NEILL (Long Island University)
Description: Up to 50% of individuals with severe developmental disabilities have epilepsy. Remarkably, behavior analysts are often unaware how epilepsy impairs their client's ability to learn and remember contingencies of reinforcement. Individuals with epilepsy often have behavior disorders which can be exacerbated by seizures. These seizures could be managed better, and important new life skills could be acquired, if their behavior analyst knew more about epilepsy. This workshop will educate behavior analysts about epilepsy with a behavioral approach. A basic review of neuroanatomy, neurophysiology and molecular events responsible for seizures and seizure-induced impairments in learning and behavior will be provided. The etiology, genetics and classification of various seizure disorders will be reviewed. Behavioral research on several animal models of seizures will be related to human cases. A frequent problem for developmentally disabled clients is that they are improperly medicated for seizures. This could be avoided with EEG (electroencephalography), which is a crucial test for accurate diagnosis of epilepsy. Workshop participants will learn how to prepare a client for cooperating with the EEG, without sedation or anesthesia. Participants will learn how epileptic seizures change an individual's ability to operate on their environment. Conversely, the environment often modulates seizures. Behavior analysts will benefit their clients who have epilepsy by learning about how to describe, measure and control these relationships.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, the participant will be able to: 1. Define an epileptic seizure. 2. Describe some of the developmental and neurological events responsible for epileptic seizures. 3. Recognize the importance of measuring the effects of seizures on learning and behavior. 4. Objectively describe, count and time seizures in relation to environmental conditions. 5. Recognize the importance of reviewing a client's history to determine etiology, and its particular impact on behavioral progress. 6. Recognize the effects of the environment on epileptic seizures. 7. Know how to prepare a client for cooperating with EEG tests, without sedation or anesthesia. 8. Discriminate pseudoepileptic versus epileptic seizures. 8. Manage learning and behavior disorders effectively in clients with epilepsy. 9. Explain some recent research on epilepsy and behavior analysis. 10. Explain how the environment can decrease abnormal brain activity and seizures.
Activities: The workshop activities will include lecture, group discussion, video observation, and interactive activities to test knowledge (using Kahoot). Students will have access to videos, peer reviewed articles and chapters on Research Gate before the conference.
Audience: Clinical behavior analysts and experimental analysts with an interest in learning effective methods for analyzing seizures and their immediate and long term effects on intellectual functioning, everyday behavior and behavior disorders.
Content Area: Methodology
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): behavior disorders, epilepsy, intellectual disability, seizures
 
Workshop #W17
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Ethical Pragmatism: Skinner's Ethics of Helping People
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 3
Area: PCH/CSS; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Guy S. Bruce, Ed.D.
GUY S. BRUCE (Appealing Solutions, LLC), EDWARD M. FRAMER (Health Fitness Corporation, Inc.)
Description: Skinner's "ethical pragmatism" asks "What outcomes are in the best long-term interest of the client?" Once those outcomes have been identified, the next question is "What explanations and procedures will be the most useful in helping the client achieve those outcomes?" Although legal, statutory, and regulatory rules can be useful, the practitioner's first duty is always to act in the best long-term interest of the client. This workshop will provide a practical procedure for solving ethical problems, always with the goal of identifying and acting in the client's best interest.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) Describe Skinner's ethical pragmatism as an ethical problem-solving procedure. (2) Describe ethical dogmatism and contrast it with ethical pragmatism. (3) Solve ethical problems using Skinner's ethical pragmatism procedure.
Activities: Activities will include lecture, discussion, small group breakouts and targeted reading. Case studies of ethical problems will be provided for participant practice along with a problem-solving procedure based on Skinner's ethical pragmatism.
Audience: Practitioners of behavior analysis
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Ethics, Pragmatism, Skinner
 
Workshop #W18
CE Offered: BACB
Implementing Effective Competency-Based Parent and Caregiver Training
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Alpine 2
Area: TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Frances Nieves Serret, M.S.
FRANCES NIEVES SERRET (Advances Learning Center; Learn Behavioral), CASEY KANE (Advances Learning Center; Learn Behavioral), GINETTE WILSON BISHOP (Advances Learning Center; Learn Behavioral), KATHERINE A. JOHNSON (Advances Learning Center; Learn Behavioral)
Description: The importance of generalizing effective behavioral support strategies and techniques to parents and caregivers of clients with challenging behaviors is critical. As is providing an effective and successful training model for teaching parents and caregivers to implement these strategies with competence and fluency. This workshop will present a competency-based Parent/Caregiver Training model, components of which include a social validity rating scale, pre-test and post-test measures, lectures, role-plays, modeling, procedural integrity data collection, prompting guidelines, and performance feedback. Hands-on activities for each component will be included, along with strategies for individualization of both content and pacing, and for utilizing data-based programming decisions to ensure optimal success and effectiveness.
Learning Objectives: At the completion of the workshop, participants will be able to: 1. Develop and effectively implement individualized, competency-based parent training models 2. Design user-friendly programming for parents/caregivers. 3. Devise data collection systems to accurately record procedural integrity of parent/caregiver implementation of programming.
Activities: The format combines: - Lecture - Discussion - Small group activities
Audience: The intended audience includes: - BCBAs who design and implement parent/caregiver training - Teachers, SLPs, behavioral instructors, or therapists who implement parent/caregiver training under BCBA supervision. - Anyone interested in developing effective parent/caregiver training models for clients and their families.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Behavioral Interventions, Competency-Based Training, Parent Training, Social Validity
 
Workshop #W19
CE Offered: BACB
Five Minutes to Peace and Calm During the School Day
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Currents
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Mindy Miles, M.A.
MINDY MILES (Miles ABA Services, PLLC), Mona Fuluvaka (Miles ABA Services, PLLC), NICHOLE FEHER (Miles ABA Services, PLLC), HEATHER BERNSTEIN (Miles ABA Services, PLLC)
Description: This presentation will discuss how to teach school systems to create an improving set of conditions so that the student and the school personnel can have the success they desire. This presentation will cover the topics of how to teach how to predict the of success of a demand, how to modify the demands once it has been given based on precursors, what demand to give based on precursors, pairing difficult students, tricks and tips to solve an impending situation, teaching quick preference assessments, how to move the goal posts once the behavior has been stabilized and why all this matter in the classroom. This presentation includes forms and tools that can be used for teaching school personnel.
Learning Objectives: At the end of the workshop participants will be able to 1) Identify the components of the task analysis of learner behavior 2) determine present levels of a hypothetical learner 3) create a plan for teaching others how to work on the targets contained in the task analysis of learner behavior
Activities: This workshop will combine lecture, videos, discussions, guided practice to support the participant's learning of the objectives outlined.
Audience: The workshop would benefit those working in schools and other community settings where teaching of behavior analytic principles are being taught.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Behavior challenges, Teaching
 
Workshop #W20
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
The Ethics of Supervision
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich C
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Cheryl J. Davis, Ph.D.
CHERYL J. DAVIS (The Sage Colleges; SupervisorABA), DANA R. REINECKE (Capella University; SupervsiorABA)
Description: There are at least three levels of ethical consideration that should be addressed in any supervision relationship, including the supervision of BCBA candidates and ongoing supervision of BCaBAs and RBTs. One level concerns the relationship and actions between supervisor and supervisee, and another concerns the actions of the supervisee outside of supervision contact. Lastly, the supervisor must be prepared to teach the ethics of behavior analysis to the supervisee and ensure ongoing understanding of the Compliance Code. This workshop will explore all three levels, and provide information and active learning opportunities to develop supervisor skills in the ethics of supervision. Participants will analyze ethical dilemmas, develop potential solutions, and practice using Behavior Skills Training and Performance Feedback to implement these solutions. Case studies will be generated by participants to ensure that the most relevant issues are addressed. Participants should bring a paper or digital copy of the BACB Compliance Code to the workshop.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, participants will be able to: 1. describe ethical considerations in the supervisor/supervisee relationship and actions 2. describe ethical considerations in the supervisee’s behavior outside of direct supervision contact 3. describe strategies for teaching ethics in the field of behavior analysis to their supervisees 4. explain how a given supervision-related ethical dilemma is related to the compliance code and how to resolve the problem 5. use Behavior Skills Training to resolve an ethical dilemma in supervision 6. use Performance Feedback to address an ethical concern with a supervisee
Activities: Workshop objectives will be met through a balanced presentation of lecture, discussion, small group breakout, and guided practice.
Audience: The target audience is BACB supervisors who have completed an 8-hour supervision training.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): BACB supervision, Effective Supervision, Ethical supervision, Supervisory skills
 
Workshop #W21
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Training Technicians: Using Our Science to Teach New Providers
Thursday, May 23, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Third Floor, Bianco
Area: TBA/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Rachel L. White, Ph.D.
RACHEL L. WHITE (University of Alaska Anchorage; Good Behavior Beginnings)
Description: There is high demand for competent behavior technicians who can work effectively with children with autism. The Behavior Analysis Certification Board (BACB) offers a Registered Behavior Technician (RBT) credential as a way to identify competent behavior technicians. Although the RBT credential requires training and a competency assessment completed by a BCBA, the competency assessment lacks clear operational definitions and mastery criteria for each task. While the science of behavior has clearly demonstrated effective ways to teach individuals new skills, many BCBAs are struggling to create effective systems to train new providers. This workshop will use Behavior Skills Training (BST) to teach BCBAs how to create a provider training package that uses BST to teach the skills necessary for a new provider to pass a competency assessment. Participants will develop mastery criteria; create structured activities for practice and assessment; and streamline training for behavior technicians. This model has been used at the University of Alaska Anchorage in the Center for Human Development to train providers across the state, exclusively at a distance.
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will create mastery criteria for operationally defined competencies. 2. Participants will develop activities to allow structured practice and assessment of competencies. 3. Participants will outline a training package using BST to streamline training for behavior technicians. 4. Participants will review results of current training program in Alaska.
Activities: Using the BST model, workshop objectives will be met through lecture, modeling, video observation, guided practice, small and large group discussion, and individual feedback.
Audience: Intermediate/BCBA; BCBAs or BCaBAs who are responsible for training or supervising RBTs; Program or Clinical Directors interested in creating training systems.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): BST, competency, RBT, supervision
 
Workshop #W23
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Employee of the Month, the Compliment Sandwich, and Mandatory Fun: What Works When Supervising Direct Service Staff
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–11:00 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 1
Area: AUT/OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Diana Parry-Cruwys, Ph.D.
DIANA PARRY-CRUWYS (Regis College), JACQUELYN M. MACDONALD (Regis College), CATIA CIVIDINI-MOTTA CIVIDINI (University of South Florida)
Description: Challenges in supervising human services staff can include high turnover and emotional burnout. Recent research has helped to clarify how best to use performance management to provide training and feedback for direct service providers; however, logistical and environmental arrangements may continue to produce challenges in the proper implementation of these techniques. Those supervising direct service staff may also be considering how to incorporate reinforcement programs into their efforts toward staff retention. In this workshop, participants will review and practice strategies for training direct care staff and providing meaningful feedback. Additionally, recommendations on the use of reinforcement (both group and individual contingencies) will be reviewed and participants will have opportunities to devise potential reinforcement plans for their organizations based on current research.
Learning Objectives: • Participants will summarize evidence-based training practices for direct service staff. • Participants will practice providing effective feedback to direct service staff. • Participants will identify recommended reinforcement practices for effecting change and retaining staff in a human services setting.
Activities: The format of this workshop will include a review of the current research through lecture and video examples. Participants will also complete small group activities such as brainstorming, scenario review, and problem solving. Behavioral skills training will be used to teach participants to provide feedback according to best practice.
Audience: The target audience for this workshop is newer BCBAs (within the last 5 years) who are supervising RBTs and paraprofessionals.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Direct Service, Staff Training, Supervision
 
Workshop #W24
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
The Apprentice: An Innovative Approach to Meet the BACB’s Supervision Standards
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–11:00 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich E
Area: AUT/OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Breanne K. Hartley, Ph.D.
BREANNE K. HARTLEY (LittleStar ABA Therapy)
Description: Increased standards for supervision is needed for the betterment of the field. However, it is a challenge for organizations to meet these standards. Throughout the ages, experts in all trades have passed along their wisdom through apprenticeship opportunities. An apprenticeship model to mentor, educate, and train students on the science of human behavior will be discussed, including a summary of the model, typical supervision activities, and meeting schedules. In addition, the presentation will include billing considerations and general logistical issues associated within an apprenticeship model.
Learning Objectives: 1. Identify the key responsibilities in an apprenticeship model for BCBA supervisors 2. Identify the key responsibilities of the supervisees to gain fieldwork experience to become BCBA’s 3. Identify performance-based objectives relevant to what the supervisee will both experience and accomplish through the apprenticeship model
Activities: The workshop will include a combination of lecture, large group question asking as it relates to various supervision scenarios, and small group break-out discussions.
Audience: Intermediate audience. BCBAs who are new to supervising those pursuing board certification, and BCBAs and/or non-BCBAs who are leading ABA programs and looking for a better model in order to provide his/her employees with supervision strategies.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Workshop #W26
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Part 1: Writing and Reviewing an Ethical Intensive Behavior Program
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–11:00 AM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 2
Area: CBM/TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Karen R. Wagner, Ph.D.
KAREN R. WAGNER (Behavior Services of Brevard, Inc and TheBehaviorAnalyst.com), BETHANY DOWDING (Behavior Services of Brevard)
Description: This workshop is intended to advance skills relating to writing and reviewing Individual Behavior Plans for recipients with challenging behavior. Starting with provider self-evaluation regarding accepting a recipient, moving through authoring plans, and then reviewing those written by others, this is an active-participant workshop. Among topics to be covered; The "rules" in various areas for addressing dangerous and challenging behaviors, researching relevant legislation and policy obligations, determining agency policy for the use of restraint and/or restrictive procedures, and reviewing journals for efficacious interventions, will be covered. We will also review the ethical obligations of providing services to these difficult recipients, including the need for crisis management training when restraint "isn't used" in regular programming. Evaluating, training and supervising staff will be reviewed at length. Additionally, we will review obligations to the recipient, the family, the agency, and families who private pay. A peer-review system will be presented and evaluated by participants, as well as the need for experienced clinicians to have mentors of their own. Using a format for "old school" (non-computer generated) IBPs, and case studies, we will examine recommended components, organization, wordsmithing, effective data collection, and the importance of explicit, detailed, instructions. Attendance of Part 1 of this workshop includes 3 BACB supervision CE credits.
Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to identify behaviors that meet criterion for dangerous and challenging, intensive behaviors. Participants will be able to systematically format IBPs to allow consistency for all implementers, without software. Participants will be able to differentiate legal and ethical requirements when addressing intensive behaviors. Participants will be able to efficiently and effectively review IBPs for individuals with dangerous and challenging behavior. Participants will be able to give appropriate feedback to clinicians who are incorrectly authoring IBPs for intensive behaviors.
Activities: Workshop activities will include; lecture, participant self-evaluation, identification of policies and rules regarding restrictive procedures in various (participant) areas, using sample programs and videos to review, evaluate, and revise interventions.
Audience: This workshop is intended to inform experienced clinicians who are struggling with service provision for recipients with dangerous and challenging behavior, those BCBAs who are looking to refresh/expand their own behavioral repertoires, and those who find themselves supervising pre-certificants and established staff who are writing behavior plans for this challenging population.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): agency policy, Crisis Management, Ethics, Supervision
 
Workshop #W27
CE Offered: BACB
Functional Assessment Consultation Support in Schools
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–11:00 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich C
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Edward J. Daly, Ph.D.
EDWARD J. DALY (University of Nebraska-Lincoln)
Description: This workshop will present a model for conducting school-based consultation which embeds functional-assessment into the process. The consultation model incorporates innovations not commonly used in functional assessment (direct academic assessment, observations of active responding, reinforcer validation, performance-deficit analysis, brief experimental analysis). The model follows a sequence of problem validation, treatment validation, and treatment evaluation. Protocols for the consultative interviews and the assessments will be shared with participants. The assessments involve curriculum-based measures, classroom observations of active responding, preference assessment, reinforcer validation, and brief experimental analysis. Guidance will be given in terms of how to conceptualize, structure, and interpret the results to present the consultee with evidence-based treatment options for classroom application. Research and case examples will be presented to illustrate each step of the process.
Learning Objectives: This session will help participants 1. integrate interview, observational data, basic skill assessment data, work samples, preference assessments, performance-deficit analyses, and brief functional analyses into the consultation process; 2. guide consultees in a strategic and structured decision-making process that prioritizes improving academic performance; 3. support teacher implementation of empirically derived treatments through antecedent control strategies and performance feedback; and 4. evaluate the results within cases to produce recommendations for future programming and across cases to examine the effectiveness of their own consultative services
Activities: The format combines lecture, guided practice with skill objectives, and group discussion.
Audience: This workshop is intended for an intermediate-level audience; that is, individuals who have skills in identifying principles of behavior, functional assessment (including descriptive assessment, preference assessment, and functional analysis), and who wish to learn how to apply them efficiently in the schools in a way that meets the typical concerns and priorities of school-based professionals.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): academic intervention, behavioral intervention, Consultation, functional assessment
 
Workshop #W28
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Behavioral Leadership
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–11:00 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Natalie A. Parks, Ph.D.
NATALIE A. PARKS (Behavior Leader), ADAM E. VENTURA (Behavior Leader), ERICA CROWLEY (Invo-Progressus)
Description: Leadership is set of skills that effectively energizes followers to accomplish the mission of the company in an ethical manner. Unfortunately, many leaders are promoted due to their excellent technical skills without being provided any specific training in the skills of leadership. Behavior analysts have the specific skills necessary to motivate others, teach new skills, and maintain behavior over time; however, applying these skills organizationally can be difficult. Several questions emerge including: What is leadership in behavior analysis? Why is it important? Who can be a leader? and How do you shape the behavior of a behavior analysis leader? This workshop will discuss the Leadership in Behavior Analysis (LIBA) model and provide an outline for the ideal behavior analysis leadership formula so that you can achieve a high level of prominence within our field, establish a long-lasting positive legacy for everyone in your organization, and grow your organization.
Learning Objectives: 1. State the different components of the Leadership in Behavior Analysis (LIBA) model. 2. Complete the LIBA assessment and identify current leadership skills. 3. Conceptually analyze leadership in behavior analysis. 4. State how to write a vision, mission, and values that align with the BACB Code of Professional Conduct. 5. Pinpoint strategies and behaviors that will lead to best performance in followers. 6. Identify how to create a performance management system.
Activities: 1. Instructional Strategies Include: lecture, discussion, and completion of practice activities and assessments. 2. Workshop objectives will be met through completion of practice activities, completion of worksheets and assessments, feedback from presenters, and group discussion.
Audience: Behavior Analysts (BCBAs, BCBA-Ds, BCaBAs)
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Ethical Cultures, Leadership, Performance Management, Vision Mission
 
Workshop #W29
CE Offered: BACB
Train the Trainer: Skills for Behavioral Staff Working With Caregivers
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–11:00 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich B
Area: OBM/TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Janet L. Montgomery, M.S.
JANET L. MONTGOMERY (ABA Technologies/Florida Tech), EVETTE A. BERARDI-COX (ABA Technologies; Florida Tech)
Description: While behavior practitioners are specifically trained in applying behavioral principles with client behavior, they often need additional training to train caregivers to apply these same principles with their children. This behavioral staff training workshop will provide tools for staff to provide to caregivers, consisting of specific behavioral skills and strategies based on Glenn Latham’s work, The Power of Positive Parenting (1994). This staff training includes common parenting problems, how to avoid them, and two caregiver tools. Attendees will participate in small groups while learning evidence-based skills. Participants will practice identifying applicable tools to scenarios. The workshop will be taught via lecture and Behavior Skills Training. This workshop is based on the Behavior Analysis Services Program which was funded by yearly grants in the Florida Child Welfare system from 2001 – 2008 with the lead author as one of the curriculum contributors.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) Teach caregivers to identify common caregiver behaviors that result in ineffective outcomes. (2) Describe and teach the first two foundational behavioral caregiver tools taught in caregiver training sessions. (3) Given a scenario, be able to identify the specific caregiver behavioral tool that applies. (4) Implement the behavior skill training strategies used to train caregivers.
Activities: The workshop will include a lecture with presentation slides followed by specific skill instruction, modeling, rehearsal, and feedback with active individual participation in small groups. Supplemental handouts including skill checklists will also be provided.
Audience: Intermediate
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): caregiver training, parent training, parenting tools, staff training
 
Workshop #W30
CE Offered: BACB
Behavior Analytic Social Skills Group Assessment and Skill Development
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Alpine 1
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Laura Squiccimara, M.S.
LAURA SQUICCIMARA (Advances Learning Center; LEARN Behavioral), CATHERINE RUSSO (Advances Learning Center; LEARN Behavioral), HAZEL BAKER (Advances Learning Center; LEARN Behavioral), GINETTE WILSON BISHOP (Advances Learning Center; LEARN Behavioral), KATHERINE A. JOHNSON (Advances Learning Center; LEARN Behavioral)
Description: Teaching social skills in a group setting requires a multitude of skills: assessment of appropriate social skills, assigning clients to appropriate groups, planning prompting and reinforcement for a large caseload, staff training for targeted social skills support, and programming activities that are conducive to supporting social skills. This workshop will prepare participants to choose the best social skills assessment tools available, efficiently place students into groups conducive to optimal service delivery, individualize programming across a large caseload of learners, track skill development across semesters, train staff to implement skill acquisition procedures in a small-group setting, and assess staff’s procedural integrity and reliability of program implementation for a group of students.
Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to: 1. Choose assessment tools that are appropriate to students and settings. 2. Develop attainable social objectives for varied student profiles. 3. Identify common objectives or overlapping supporting activities to group students into effective learning clusters. 4. Program individualized prompt levels and reinforcement schedules while running an instructional activity with several students. 5. Facilitate activities that teach body language, conversation, independent, pretend, and cooperative play, social conventions, and perspective-taking. 6. Create systems to collect data on multiple students simultaneously and graph student data in a standardized and flexible way. 7. Take procedural integrity and reliability measures on social skills group leaders.
Activities: This workshop will alternate between lecture and hands-on activities. Participants will work in groups and individually to practice components of the outcome skills and receive feedback on their work products.
Audience: The intended audience includes: BCBAs who train staff to run social skills groups, Public school ABA professionals whose students participate in group social skills support, ABA professionals currently running social skills groups or wishing to run them in the future, Program directors planning to introduce or develop social skills groups at their practice
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): assessment, generalization, pragmatics, social skills
 
Workshop #W31
CE Offered: BACB
Successful Inclusion Practices for Students With Autism Spectrum Disorder
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich A
Area: AUT/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Sonja R. de Boer, Ph.D.
SONJA R. DE BOER (Remi Vista, Inc.)
Description: With widespread and effective early intervention for children with autism spectrum disorders (ASD) occurring, more and more children with ASD are also now being included in general education classrooms. But, educators, school administrators and behavior analysts are still struggling to figure out how to effectively educate and support these children in the general education classrooms. Thus, many children with ASD are not meeting their goals and objectives and struggle with maladaptive behaviors (e.g. disruptive behavior, off-task behavior) which result in pulling them out of the general education classroom. Many of these difficulties are due to the lack of preparation and ongoing coaching for the educators, school administrators and behavior analysts. This presenter/author will discuss the key components contributing to the success of inclusion of children with ASD, including the instructional and behavioral methods which must be considered and utilized with children with ASD in the general education environment. This training is taken from the presenter's book Successful Inclusion for Students with Autism: Creating a Complete, Effective ASD Inclusion Program. These strategies and techniques are ABA-based and include many checklists, data sheets, forms and handouts to use immediately upon return to your school or work place.
Learning Objectives: Therefore, as it concerns each child with ASD, with no regard to race, age, level of ability or amount of inclusion time he or she might be receiving in the general education classroom, each participant will depart from this workshop with the ability to: 1. describe the key components contributing to the success of an inclusion program; 2. utilize specific forms and checklists to ensure appropriate implementation of specific inclusion program components and implementation of strategies; 3. utilize specific data collection and evaluation methods for analyzing a student's progress and effectiveness of instructional and behavioral methods being utilized with a student; and 4. utilize a specific annual evaluation tool to analyze the effectiveness of an inclusion program.
Activities: Each participant will receive a booklet of checklists, forms, data collection sheets and specific handouts to use throughout the inclusion process. The workshop format is centered around the use of these tools to guide professionals through the inclusion process, thus workshop objectives are met through lecture, discussion, video demonstration of specific strategies and guided practice with forms, checklists and data collections tools through video observation.
Audience: Educational Professionals (teachers, inclusion facilitators, administrators, school psychologists) and Behavior Analysts (BCBA, BCaBA, RBT) working with students with ASD in both special education and general education school environments.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): autism, general education, inclusion
 
Workshop #W32
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
BITES®: A Behavioral InTEgrated with Speech Approach to Feeding Therapy
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich G
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Laura J. Seiverling, Ph.D.
LAURA J. SEIVERLING (Ball State University), ELISE JUSKO (St Mary's Hospital for Children)
Description: Pediatric feeding problems are complex and often require a multi-disciplinary approach to assessment and treatment. The Behavioral InTEgrated with Speech approach, known as BITES, focuses specifically on how speech-language pathologists (SLPS) and Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBAs) can work together to assess feeding problems and develop interventions for them. With over 30 years of combined experience in the field of pediatric feeding disorders, Laura Seiverling, Psychologist and BCBA-D, and Elise Jusko, CCC-SLP, will draw from their own experiences working on a multidisciplinary feeding team together and will provide an overview of how cross-discipline collaboration between SLPs and BCBAs can look when it comes to both assessment and treatment of food selectivity, chewing, packing, rapid eating, tongue thrusts, dysphagia, food overstuffing, choking phobias, and self-feeding difficulties. Case examples will be provided for each of the feeding problems discussed. In addition, the presenters will review the various factors that may lead to a feeding problem and will provide an overview of typical feeding development. Content has peer reviewed, published support beyond those publications and other types of communications devoted primarily to the promotion of the approach.
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will be able to describe typical feeding development 2. Participants will be able to identify the role of various disciplines involved in multidisciplinary feeding evaluations. 3. Participants will be able to identify common medical and environmental factors that may lead to a feeding problem. 4. Participants will learn the role of both SLPs and BCBAs in the BITES approach to assessment and intervention of pediatric feeding disorders. 5. Participants will learn how to collect baseline data and determine a starting point for feeding interventions. They will also learn how to collect data on various mealtime behaviors, graph child mealtime behavior, and how to write task-analyzed feeding protocols. 6. Participants will learn how to use behavioral skills training to train caregivers to implement feeding interventions.
Activities: Instructional strategies include: Lecture, video, small group activities, case examples, discussion, and role-play.
Audience: This workshop is appropriate for BCBAs and SLPs interested in learning more about feeding interventions and interdisciplinary collaboration.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): feeding intervention, interdisciplinary collaboration
 
Workshop #W34
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP
Providing Appropriate and Effective Sexual Education for Individuals With Autism Spectrum Disorder and Developmental Disabilities Through the Use of Behavior Analytic Assessment and Instruction
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 1
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Frank R. Cicero, Ph.D.
FRANK R. CICERO (Seton Hall University), SORAH STEIN (Partnership for Behavior Change)
Description: Treatment of sexual behavior is often difficult for behavior analysts to discuss however it is a topic that will be an issue for many individuals with autism and other developmental disabilities. Issues vary however are often related to deficits in social skills. ABA treatments can be effective in promoting appropriate behaviors of a sexual topography. This workshop will focus on ABA strategies useful for individuals with developmental disabilities including individuals on the autism spectrum. The workshop will begin with an overview of general issues regarding sexuality development as related to individuals with developmental disabilities. Consistent with ethical standards, a brief overview of the physiology of human sexual behavior will be provided so that behavior analysts can identify situations where medical issues may be present. We will then address problem sexual behavior through functional assessment and discuss replacement treatments based on function. We will then move into more specific topics which could be included within an ABA sexual education curriculum. Treatment strategies will include reinforcement-based shaping, video modeling, task analyses, picture activity schedules, scripts and script fading, and social stories. Empirically supported literature and data will be presented where applicable and available. Topics related to ethics and consent will be discussed.
Learning Objectives: 1. At the conclusion of the workshop, participants will be able to state common issues experienced by people with developmental disabilities and ASD as related to appropriate and problem behaviors of a sexual topography, 2. At the conclusion of the workshop, participants will be able to develop 2-3 teaching programs for skill acquisition of sexual behaviors using techniques and theories consistent with applied behavior analysis, 3. At the conclusion of the workshop, participants will be able to conduct a functional assessment of problem behavior as it relates to sexual expression and develop a behavior intervention plan based on the function, 4. At the conclusion of the workshop, participants will be able to list considerations associated with consent.
Activities: The workshop will consist of the following activities: 1. Didactic instruction by the presenters, 2. Group discussion, 3. Presentation and review of teaching materials, 4. Role play and practice of presented teaching procedures where applicable, 5. Sharing and discussion of research data
Audience: The current workshop content is geared towards the following audience: 1. Intermediate and advanced behavior analysts who have a desire to learn how to apply behavioral principles and teaching methods to the subject of sexual behavior. 2. Educators and related service professionals who have an advanced behavioral background and work with individuals with developmental issues that have needs in the area of sexual behavior.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): sex education, sexual behavior
 
Workshop #W35
CE Offered: BACB
Utilizing the Pretend Play and Language Assessment and Curriculum to Teach Play and Language Skills
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 1
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Nancy J. Champlin, M.S.
NANCY J. CHAMPLIN (ACI Learning Centers), MELISSA SCHISSLER (ACI Learning Centers)
Description: Play is imperative to a child's development and is identified as one of the core deficits in children diagnosed with autism, often described as lacking in symbolic qualities and flexibility (Jarr & Eldevik, 2007). Evidence-based play interventions can positively impact future communication and language skills, cognitive functioning, as well as social interactions for individuals with autism and other developmental delays. Play should be an integral part of a child’s programming because of its importance to the child’s overall development (Wilburn, 2011). The purpose of this workshop is to train participants on how to utilize the Pretend Play and Language Assessment and Curriculum (PPLAC) to systematically assess and teach pretend play and language skills to children ages 2-7. The PPLAC is a behaviorally-based curriculum formulated from the typical developmental sequence of play and language and utilized to establish and expand a child's pretend play repertoire. The five elements of play including agent, object, category of play, advanced play, and the essential skills to sociodramatic play are identified and separated into teachable components. Data collected from research supporting the efficacy of the PPLAC as an effective assessment and curriculum will be presented.
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will analyze the play actions and vocalizations of typically developing children during independent and sociodramatic play opportunities 2. Participants will assess the play and language skills of a child from a video example and create appropriate goals 3. Participants will demonstrate implementation of targets from each Stage in the Pretend Play and Language Assessment and Curriculum 4. Participants will demonstrate collecting and analyzing data for each Stage of play in the Pretend Play and Language Assessment and Curriculum 5. Participants will demonstrate initiating play, positioning appropriately, effective prompting, and providing feedback following a play opportunity
Activities: Workshop objectives will be met by alternating between didactic instruction, discussion, video modeling, and small group activities such as role play and practicing data collection. Participants will be provided with spiral bound workbooks including presentation notes and sample data sheets.
Audience: BCBA, BCaBA
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Language development, Pretend Play, Sociodramatic play
 
Workshop #W37
CE Offered: BACB
What About Us?: Simple, Evidence-Based Practices for Middle and High School Students With Autism to Reduce Disruptive Behavior
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Third Floor, Bianco
Area: AUT/TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Laura Kenneally, Ed.D.
LAURA KENNEALLY (Advance Learning Center)
Description: Many middle and high school aged students with autism engage in a range of disruptive behavior, which severely limit their abilities to participate in typical family, school, and community activities. This workshop details several successful data-based case studies of public middle and high school students who learned to manage their disruptive behavior. These cases include decreasing aggression, self-injury, to near zero levels and maintaining for years. In addition, we will discuss toilet training a 15 year old.
Learning Objectives: The simple evidence-based interventions will be described using video, hands on activities, and a step-by-step visual manual in order to help parents, special educators, and BCBAs to enact these methods with their students quickly and easily. Participants are encouraged to bring their own cases to work in small groups to create strategies to use in their work settings.
Activities: The simple evidence-based interventions will be described using video, hands on activities, and a step-by-step visual manual in order to help parents, special educators, and BCBAs to enact these methods with their students quickly and easily. Participants are encouraged to bring their own cases to work in small groups to create strategies to use in their work settings.
Audience: special educators, and BCBAs, administrators
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Workshop #W39
CE Offered: PSY/BACB
Implementing Azrin and Foxx's Rapid Toilet Training Protocol in Your Applied Behavior Analysis Program
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Alpine 2
Area: DDA/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Amanda Keating, Psy.D.
AMANDA KEATING (University of South Florida)
Description: While many children achieve successful toileting without intervention, others need additional support. Dr. Nathan H. Azrin and Dr. Richard M. Foxx published a variety of studies on toilet training typically developing children as well as children and adults with developmental delays. During this workshop, Azrin and Foxx’s Rapid Toilet Training method will be discussed and demonstrated in detail. The research to date will be reviewed including modified and abbreviated protocols. Within the workshop, participants will be provided child readiness tests, teaching protocols, and error correction methods. Sample data sheets and fidelity protocols will also be supplied. Attendees will walk away with everything they need to incorporate Rapid Toilet Training (RTT) into their applied behavior analytic practice.
Learning Objectives: 1. Identify readiness test components for RTT. 2. Demonstrate the teaching protocol. 3. Describe the RTT training phases with associated activities and time frames. 4. Demonstrate the error correction protocol. 5. Describe modifications that can be made to the RTT for children with autism or developmental disabilities.
Activities: Instructional strategies include: lecture, demonstration, small group breakout, and behavioral skills training.
Audience: This workshop is intended for business owners or direct service providers who are seeking to implement RTT within their service delivery. The direct service components require a knowledge of ABA methods as well as prompt fading to a degree beyond basic knowledge.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Toilet Training
 
Workshop #W40
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Part 1: Organizational Performance Engineering to Improve Client Outcomes
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Currents
Area: OBM/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Guy S. Bruce, Ed.D.
GUY S. BRUCE (Appealing Solutions, LLC)
Description: Do you work as a program designer, staff trainer, supervisor, or director of an agency that provides services to clients with learning difficulties? Are you satisfied with your clients' progress? Behavior analysis developed a powerful technology for helping people, but too many clients don't receive the benefits. Why not? The easy answer is that employees don't do what they are told. But the employees’ performance, just like their clients’ performance, is a product of their environment. Do employees have the resources, training, and management necessary to help their clients achieve their goals? What about their supervisors? What about their directors? Organizations are groups of individuals who must work together to provide their clients with the outcomes they want. The failure of clients to make adequate progress is not usually an individual employee performance problem, but a performance problem at the system process, and individual levels of the organization. This workshop will provide you with a set of tools to pinpoint organizational performance problems, analyze their causes, recommend the best solutions, solve the problems by designing and implementing solutions that might include more efficient resources, training, and management practices, and evaluate their effectiveness, efficiency, and return on investment. Please note: attendees must register for both part 1 and part 2 of this workshop.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, participants will be able to: (1) Define desired client results and necessary performance, then measure and evaluate current client results, performance, and progress, using measures of frequency, celeration and celeration efficiency; (2) Define desired staff performance at the system, process, and individual levels, measure and evaluate current staff performance at each level; (3) Perform a data based analysis of staff performance problems to identify their causes; (4) Recommend solutions to performance problems with the best return on investment; (5) Design and implement those solutions, which may include staff resources, training and management; (6) Evaluate the effectiveness, efficiency, and return on investment of those solutions.
Activities: This workshop provides a variety of training aids including case studies, practice cards, practice exercises, project worksheets, job aids, and computer-based charting software.
Audience: Do you work as a program designer, staff trainer, supervisor, or director of an agency that provides services to clients with learning difficulties? Are you satisfied with your clients’ progress? This workshop will teach you how to improve the performance of your organization so that every client will make efficient progress.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): celeration efficiency, cross-functional process, organizational performance, pragmatism
 
Workshop #W41
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Beyond the Black and White: Ethics in Human Services
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 2
Area: TBA/DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Ann B Beirne, M.A.
ANN B BEIRNE (Global Autism Project)
Description: The field of behavior analysis continues to grow in response to the need for high-quality services, as does the need for training in responsible practice. In a world that grows increasingly morally complex, how can behavior analysts maintain a high standard of ethics and what does “ethical responsibility” mean? In this live, in person workshop, we describe the expectations of ethical practice in behavior analysis and address the challenges of maintaining high standards for ethical behavior in a world where the “right” answers to our ethical questions may be elusive. Drawing upon over 20 years of clinical experience around the world, this workshop will encourage you to ask better questions rather than looking for simple answers. We’ll discuss: “Levels of goodness”: what does “goodness” really mean? Relative and absolute ethics, and when the use of each is appropriate Professionalism as an objectively defined response class: how to engage in it and how to recognize it in others How to engage in ethical practice with colleagues and families
Learning Objectives: Identify “levels of goodness” Define relative and absolute ethics The Professional and Ethical Compliance Code® as task analysis Describe the case for absolutism Describe the case for relativism Identify challenges of ethical practice with clients and families Identify ways to meet and overcome these challenges Identify challenges of ethical practices as individuals and with colleagues
Activities: Lecture Discussion Active student responding
Audience: Intermediate: BCBAs and BCaBAs
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): ethics, human services, professionalism
 
Workshop #W42
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Simplivise Training: Training the Trainer on How to Simplify Training and Supervision Through the Use of Evidenced-Based Training Strategies
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Arosa
Area: TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Yendri Diaz, M.A.
YENDRI DIAZ (Skillometry Inc.)
Description: Recently, the number of behavior analysts in our field has increased significantly. However, as an unintended side effect, many practitioners are receiving less frequent and lower quality training and supervision. Moreover, training and supervision programs tend to be cumbersome and do not incorporate evidenced-based practices often times resulting in ineffective application of behavioral services. Establishing effective training and supervision protocol within an ABA practice is critical to its success. This workshop is designed to develop more effective trainers and supervisors within ABA organizations across learning environments. This workshop will demonstrate how to incorporate Behavioral Skills Training (BST), Precision Teaching (PT), and digital technology into a simplified training and supervision program that develops and maintains critical skills for effective ABA services. The workshop will cover training and supervision in online and in-person environments. The workshop will consist of three phases: Phase one will include an instructional design segment where attendees will learn how to create an evidenced-based training program. The second phase will involve teaching attendees how to train and supervise staff utilizing a unique blend of BST, PT, and digital technology. Lastly, the workshop will prepare attendees to maintain skill repertoires through simplified supervision and digital technology.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, participants will be able to: 1. Identify and define evidence-based training and supervision strategies 2. Develop an outline for training and supervision content using evidence-based strategies 3. Identify and set goals for trainers, supervisors, and their learners 4. Identify how to measure quality and effectiveness of their training and supervision 5. Plan for maintenance of skills through supervision
Activities: Activities: Workshop objectives will be met using behavioral skills training through the following activities: 1. Instructor presentation and group discussion 2. Individual and small group guided practice 3. Individual and small group competency building exercises
Audience: Audience: Workshop target audience is ABA Clinical and Training Managers, Supervisors, and BCBAs
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Workshop #W44
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Developments in Relational Frame Theory: Implications for Clinical Behavior Analysis
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich F
Area: VBC/CBM; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Dermot Barnes-Holmes, Ph.D.
DERMOT BARNES-HOLMES (Ghent University), YVONNE BARNES-HOLMES (Ghent University), CIARA MCENTEGGART (Ghent University)
Description: The workshop emerges from what is currently the largest single grant awarded for RFT-focused research. The overarching aim of the workshop will be to build and strengthen the much-needed links between basic experimental models of human psychological suffering and their treatment, on the one hand, and the theoretical and conceptual analyses that are emerging from mindfulness-based cognitive-behaviour therapies, such as ACT, on the other hand. The workshop will be divided into 3 parts. Part 1 will involve an introduction to RFT, focusing on its basic concepts and how it provides a bottom-up account of human language and cognition, with a particular focus on how it explains human psychological suffering. Part 2 will examine “cutting-edge” developments in RFT, focusing on the Hyper-Dimensional Multi-Level (HDML) framework for analyzing the dynamics of arbitrarily applicable relational responding (AARR). Part 3 will illustrate how RFT, and in particular the HDML framework, may be used to facilitate links between basic experimental models of human psychological suffering and their treatment in Clinical Behavior Analysis.
Learning Objectives: • Attendees will be able to list and explain the basic concepts in RFT, and to give examples of how RFT has been used to help explain particular instances of human psychological suffering. • Attendees will be able to describe “cutting-edge” developments in RFT, especially the Hyper-Dimensional Multi-Level (HDML) framework. • Attendees will be able to provide examples of how RFT and the HDML framework can help in the behavioral assessment and treatment of psychological suffering.
Activities: Lecture, discussion, small group breakout
Audience: The target audience will have basic training in behavior analysis
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): RFT
 
Workshop #W45
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
Assessment to Intervention With the Verbal Behavior Stimulus Control Ratio Equation
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Lugano
Area: VBC/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: L L Mason, Ph.D.
ALONZO ALFREDO ANDREWS (The University of Texas at San Antonio), L L MASON (Univ of Texas at San Antonio)
Description: Skinner (1957) writes, "It is my belief that something like the present analysis reduces the total vocabulary needed for a scientific account." In many ways, then, this seems to me to be a better way of talking about verbal behavior" (p. 456). Language is a much sought after, yet elusive subject matter for scientific investigation. Skinner (1957) proposed that language fell within the scope of a science of behavior, and was therefore open to functional analysis and interpretation. Over the past 60 years, much has been done to further the scientific explanation, prediction, and control of verbal behavior as a function of environmental variables. This workshop provides a hands-on approach to conducting the Verbal Behavior Stimulus Control Ratio Equation (SCoRE), and analyzing the results of this assessment for developing individualized treatment plans for individuals with autism and other language disorders. Specifically, we describe language as a continuous variable, and explain procedures for assessing and remediating verbal behavior deficits. The procedures described in this workshop are empirically supported (Lerman et al., 2005; Mason & Andrews, 2014), and conceptually systematic with a behavior-analytic approach to language assessment and intervention (Mason & Andrews, 2018).
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the strength of verbal operants in relation to one another; (2) conduct a verbal operant analysis; (3) develop individualized treatment objectives from a stimulus control ratio; and (4) demonstrate the process for transferring stimulus control across verbal operants.
Activities: Workshop objectives will be met through a balanced presentation of lecture, video modeling, role-playing, and workbook demonstrations. Core content will be taught through lecture and video demonstrations of strategies will be provided. Guided notes will be provided in order to support participant learning.
Audience: This workshop is geared towards Board Certified Behavior Analysts, Board Certified Assistant Behavior Analysts, Registered Behavior Technicians, special education teachers, school psychologists, speech language pathologists, and other professionals who provide direct services to strengthen the language of children with autism.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): control ratios, referent-based instruction, VB SCoRE, verbal behavior
 
Workshop #W45A
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Providing Behavior Analytic Interventions in a Trauma-Informed Environment: Enhancing Supervision, Assessment and Risk Analysis
Friday, May 24, 2019
8:00 AM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Geneva
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Teresa Camille Kolu, Ph.D.
TERESA CAMILLE KOLU (Cusp Emergence)
Description: Behavior analysts are increasingly tasked with providing or supervising "trauma-informed behavior support", with persons with severe aversive histories and backgrounds. These conditions require effective systems support, collaboration and risk documentation and analysis, as well as the rigorous application of behavior analysis in a setting often unfamiliar with it. Behavior analysts attempting to expand their boundaries of competence may find themselves having violated our field’s own Professional and Ethical Compliance Code, if not familiar with the important ethical and legal standards specific to this sensitive population. Workshop participants will be supported using a variety of tools and practices firmly rooted in the literature, to create their own package of “trauma-informed” resources upon leaving the workshop. Participants will practice in a variety of ways including applying roleplay, modeling, and feedback to realistic scenarios and case studies, applicable across settings from collaborations with social services and educational settings to clinical, medical, and mental health environments. Strategies and tools will be demonstrated for supervisor level behavior analysts interested in taking these resources immediately into their practice settings, enhancing their supervision, risk analysis, assessment documentation, and treatment.
Learning Objectives: 1. State factors that help determine whether a client with "traumatic background" is within our boundary of competence, related to their repertoire, needs, and risks 2. Provide examples operationalizing and translating terms used in trauma informed teams, to insure appropriate collaboration and communication with non behavioral team members 3. State ethical components of effective supervision, documentation, assessment and treatment for cases involving significant adverse experiences, consistent with the Professional and Ethical Compliance Code
Activities: Instructional strategies include lecture, tool demonstration, guided practice, roleplay, and group discussion.
Audience: Advanced
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): aversive conditioning, ethics, supervision, trauma-informed
 
Workshop #W46
CE Offered: PSY/BACB — 
Ethics
Standing up for Science: Ethical Challenges and Opportunities for Behavior Analysts in the Autism Community
Friday, May 24, 2019
12:00 PM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich C
Area: AUT/CSS; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: David A. Celiberti, Ph.D.
DAVID A. CELIBERTI (Association for Science in Autism Treatment)
Description: There are literally hundreds of interventions for autism, although the vast majority of these lack any scientific support. Unfortunately, approaches that are not grounded in science prevail in many schools and centers, fringe treatments are afforded widespread media coverage distracting consumers and separating individuals with autism from science-based intervention such as ABA, and the internet is filled with misinformation and unsubstantiated claims. This presents ethical challenges and opportunities for behavior analysts. Science and scientific methods are not only relevant to discussions surrounding autism treatment selection but should serve as the foundation upon which treatments should be chosen, implemented, and evaluated. This workshop will highlight the role that behavior analysts can play in helping consumers, consultees, supervisees and other colleagues choose interventions, implement those interventions with high degrees of fidelity and transparency, as well as in objectively evaluating outcomes. Strategies for promoting science and the scientific method in both practice and in communication will be discussed throughout the workshop.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: 1. identify and describe red flags in autism treatment, common media misrepresentations and diverse perspectives on treatment selection and explain the ethical concerns that result; 2. demonstrate a broader conceptualization of how the tenets of applied behavior analysis can be both a model and a framework for delivering science-based education and treatment regardless of discipline and highlight the implications conceptually and procedurally; 3. describe challenges for behavior analysts related to interdisciplinary collaboration, consumer education, and interacting with members of the media community and describe strategies for avoiding or reducing the impact of these challenges; 4. identify specific and sustainable contributions that can be made to promote science in the treatment of autism across disciplines, within interactions with the media community and consumers
Activities: Instructional strategies will include lecture, small group exercises, and follow up feedback and discussion. Original source material from the media will be incorporated in the exercises.
Audience: The workshop level is intermediate but would be suitable for behavior analytic teaching faculty, BCBAs involved in supervision and consultation, as well as BCBAs working with multi-disciplinary teams.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Workshop #W47
CE Offered: BACB
Diversity submission Improving Work Culture: Happier Staff and a More Productive Organization
Friday, May 24, 2019
12:00 PM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich E
Area: AUT/OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Jill E. McGrale Maher, M.A.
JILL E. MCGRALE MAHER (Massachusetts Preparatory Academy for Children), COURTNEY MAHER (Michigan State University), BRITANY MELTON (Endicott College), IAN MELTON (Endicott College, Riverbend Behavioral Health)
Description: A great workplace culture can appear to be rare–and creating one is elusive and near impossible for some organizations. People are often frustrated by their culture, many describing their workplace as being dominated by negative and toxic personalities, with underhanded and manipulative infighting that stifles work production, retention, and overall happiness of staff. The literature to date focuses in the areas of improving work safety (DeJoy, 2005), organizational change (Meyer, et al, 2002; Smirclch, 1983) and effective leadership (Geller, 2015; Krapfl, 2015), with minimal practical guides for managers or organizations for how to define, measure, and improve work culture in a systematic fashion (Reid, 2016) in applied settings. This workshop will provide practical and easy to implement strategies to improve culture.
Learning Objectives: Participants will: 1. Define work an exemplary work culture 2. Discuss why a “healthy” work culture is important 3. Define and identify at least 3 ways to improve work culture both organizationally and clinically 4. Identify specific training and supports required for Behavior Analysts and Supervisors 5. Operationally define a minimum of 3 specific staff and client behaviors that collectively yield improved work culture 6. Define and measure staff happiness 7. Discuss outcomes of staff happiness 8. Identify 3 “take homes”
Activities: Instructional strategies include: lecture, discussion, small group breakouts
Audience: Supervisors, BCBAs, and Administrators of agencies, organizations, schools providing services to clients with autism spectrum disorder and other developmental disorders.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Workshop #W48
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Part 2: Writing and Reviewing an Ethical Intensive Behavior Program
Friday, May 24, 2019
12:00 PM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 2
Area: CBM/TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Karen R. Wagner, Ph.D.
KAREN R. WAGNER (Behavior Services of Brevard, Inc and TheBehaviorAnalyst.com), BETHANY DOWDING (Behavior Services of Brevard)
Description: This workshop is intended to advance skills relating to writing and reviewing Individual Behavior Plans for recipients with challenging behavior. Starting with provider self-evaluation regarding accepting a recipient, moving through authoring plans, and then reviewing those written by others, this is an active-participant workshop. Among topics to be covered; The "rules" in various areas for addressing dangerous and challenging behaviors, researching relevant legislation and policy obligations, determining agency policy for the use of restraint and/or restrictive procedures, and reviewing journals for efficacious interventions, will be covered. We will also review the ethical obligations of providing services to these difficult recipients, including the need for crisis management training when restraint "isn't used" in regular programming. Evaluating, training and supervising staff will be reviewed at length. Additionally, we will review obligations to the recipient, the family, the agency, and families who private pay. A peer-review system will be presented and evaluated by participants, as well as the need for experienced clinicians to have mentors of their own. Using a format for "old school" (non-computer generated) IBPs, and case studies, we will examine recommended components, organization, wordsmithing, effective data collection, and the importance of explicit, detailed, instructions.Attendance of Part 2 of this workshop includes 3 BACB ethics CE credits.
Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to identify behaviors that meet criterion for dangerous and challenging, intensive behaviors. Participants will be able to systematically format IBPs to allow consistency for all implementers, without software. Participants will be able to differentiate legal and ethical requirements when addressing intensive behaviors. Participants will be able to efficiently and effectively review IBPs for individuals with dangerous and challenging behavior. Participants will be able to give appropriate feedback to clinicians who are incorrectly authoring IBPs for intensive behaviors.
Activities: Workshop activities will include; lecture, participant self-evaluation, identification of policies and rules regarding restrictive procedures in various (participant) areas, using sample programs and videos to review, evaluate, and revise interventions.
Audience: This workshop is intended to inform experienced clinicians who are struggling with service provision for recipients with dangerous and challenging behavior, those BCBAs who are looking to refresh/expand their own behavioral repertoires, and those who find themselves supervising pre-certificants and established staff who are writing behavior plans for this challenging population.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Advanced
 
Workshop #W49
CE Offered: BACB
Improving Applied Behavior Analysis Services With Functional Analytic Psychotherapy: Creating Meaningful Relationships With Stakeholders
Friday, May 24, 2019
12:00 PM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Monte Rosa
Area: CBM/VBC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Yors A. Garcia, Ph.D.
YORS A. GARCIA (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), AMANDA M MARTINEZ (University of Nevada, Reno)
Description: ABA has developed well-grounded procedures to improve individual’s lives. One recurrent difficulty when providing ABA services is the ability to increase treatment adherence, working with intense emotional responses, and dealing with issues that have been traditionally outside of the behavior-analytic domain such as compassion, mindfulness, clinical-client relationship and acceptance. Functional Analytic Psychotherapy (FAP) is a behavioral-analytic therapy that focuses on improving interpersonal functioning and social connection. FAP assumes relationships are bidirectional and dynamic; and therefore, listener’s and speaker’s behavior need to be approached to create a meaningful and collaborative interaction. In this order, FAP utilizes behavioral procedures such as shaping, modeling, and discrimination training to promote emotional tacting, interpersonal manding, and effective discrimination of interpersonal repertoires. This workshop seeks to teach ABA providers how to use FAP procedures. For example, identify clinically relevant behaviors, notice how their own interpersonal repertoires affect their relationship with clients, evoke problem behaviors and improvements in-session, and reinforce stakeholders interpersonal behaviors with the aim of improving therapeutic outcomes and treatment adherence.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, participants will be able to: (1) Describe personal’ and stakeholders’ interpersonal behaviors that aid to improve treatment adherence, (2) Apply behavior-analytic procedures to improve interpersonal behaviors and build collaborative relationships with stakeholders, (3) Combine behavior-analytic and FAP procedures to maximize clinical outcomes in parents, staff, and children, (4) Demonstrate in vivo how to implement the skills learned in the workshop with clients.
Activities: Workshop activities will include lecture, demonstration, experiential exercises, role-play, and discussion. Participants will be provided with copies of powerpoint slides, exercises, and a list of suggested readings.
Audience: Participants should include behavior analysts, psychologists, mental health professionals, social workers, counselors, administrators, teachers, and direct care staff.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): FAP, Functional Assessment, Therapeutic Relationship, Verbal Behavior
 
Workshop #W50
CE Offered: PSY/BACB — 
Ethics
Risk-Benefit Analysis of Treatments for Severe Problem Behaviors
Friday, May 24, 2019
12:00 PM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich B
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Nathan Blenkush, Ph.D.
NATHAN BLENKUSH (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), DYLAN PALMER (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center and Simmons College), Joseph Tacosik (Judge Rotenberg Education Center), JASON CODERRE (The Judge Rotenberg Educational Center)
Description: Behavior analysts are often part of multidisciplinary teams that treat patients with severe problem behaviors that are refractory to typical interventions. Professionals within and between disciplines do not always agree on the most appropriate treatment approach for a given person. However, there is general agreement that those providing treatment should provide the most effective and least restrictive interventions available. Unfortunately, risk perception and bias sometimes influence decision making to the detriment of the person receiving treatment. Here, we review decision analysis tools that may help inform decisions made by behavior analysts and interdisciplinary teams when treating severe problem behaviors. We review ethical, legal, and regulatory policies that must be considered in relation to treating people with severe problem behaviors.
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will be able to describe the elements of at least two decision analysis tools associated with treatment selection. 2. Participants will identify at least three potential fallacies or biases associated with risk and clinical decision making. 3. Participants will evaluate at least two treatments using a risk benefit approach.
Activities: The format combines lecture, application of decision analysis, and group discussion.
Audience: Behavior analysts, psychologists, and other professionals who are often confronted with people who emit severe problem behaviors refractory to typical interventions.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): Decision analysis, Risk Perception, Treatment evaluation
 
Workshop #W51
CE Offered: PSY/BACB
Improving Postive Classroom Behavior Support Through Applied Behavior Analysis
Friday, May 24, 2019
12:00 PM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 1
Area: EDC/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Robert F. Putnam, Ph.D.
ROBERT F. PUTNAM (May Institute), WHITNEY L. KLEINERT (May Institute)
Description: This workshop will provide behavior analysts a review of the research on evidenced based practices in classwide behavior support (Simonsen & Fairbanks, Briesch, Myers, & Sugai, 2008; Simonsen et al., 2015; Reinke, Herman & Sprick, 2011). These practices include: 1) antecedent practices (physical layout, classroom expectations, behavioral routines, teaching expectations and routines, precorrections, active supervision); 2) instructional management (opportunities to respond), 3) reinforcement practices (contingent behavioral-specific praise, group contingencies, and token economies, behavioral contracts) and consequence (planning ignoring, explicit reprimands, differential reinforcement, response cost and timeout). The workshop will go over the use of classwide functional assessment as a method to systematically evaluate the classroom environment to design and implement effective classroom-wide behavioral support practices. Once the environment is assessed, the model incorporates both indirect (i.e., lecture, written training materials) and direct (i.e., modeling, performance feedback) instruction. Finally, participants will learn how teachers participate in a data-based decision-making process to establish more effective practices, procedures, and interactions with students. Data (Swain-Bradway et al., 2017) will be presented supporting the need for a comprehensive training method that includes both direct instruction and performance feedback for teachers to implement classroom-wide behavior support practices with integrity.
Learning Objectives: Participants will learn how to: 1) apply functional assessment strategies to the selection and implementation of effective classroom-wide practices; 2) use evidence-based methods used to train teachers in evidenced based classroom-wide behavior support practices; 3) a data-based decision process used with teachers to modify classroom behavior support practices, and; 4) instructional and behavior support practices that establish more effective interactions between teachers and students and increase on task behavior.
Activities: Sample workshop activities include: Instructional strategies include lecture, discussion and small group breakout Workshop objectives will be met through a balanced presentation of lecture, guided practices of the use of a number of assessment instruments and classroom behavior support form. Participants will have an opportunity to engage in discussions with other behavior analysts, analyze sample data, draw conclusions about relevant classroom-wide interventions, and role play the direct instruction (e.g., performance feedback) provided to teachers.
Audience: Behavior analysts who provide training and consultation to school teachers or other educational paraprofessionals
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Workshop #W52
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Lead Like a Champion
Friday, May 24, 2019
12:00 PM–3:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Natalie A. Parks, Ph.D.
NATALIE A. PARKS (Behavior Leader), ADAM E. VENTURA (Behavior Leader), ERICA CROWLEY (Invo-Progressus)
Description: Even with the best planning and structure, there are times that things go wrong. Correct diagnosis of performance problems is essential to identifying the right solution. Additionally, feedback, although a natural part of our existence that helps to shape and maintain our daily behavior, is a very commonly used intervention for performance in a variety of different settings from for-profit and non-profit corporations to institutions of higher learning. However, the definition, form, and function of feedback have been widely disputed throughout the years despite a regular propensity for its use. This workshop will provide the steps to follow when diagnosing performance problems and examine some past and current organizational behavior management (OBM) literature on feedback. It will propose a new operational definition for feedback from a behavior analytic perspective. Furthermore, we will discuss why feedback is important and how to deliver AND accept feedback effectively and ethically.
Learning Objectives: 1. Learners will state the steps to follow when diagnosing performance problems. 2. Learners will identify at least one strategy that can be used for each type of performance problem. 3. Learners will identify the definition of feedback. 4. Learners will state why the use of feedback is important. 5. Learners will implement feedback effectively and ethically. 6. Learners will accept feedback effectively.
Activities: 1. Instructional strategies include: lecture, discussion, practice and feedback 2. Workshop objectives will be met through a balance of lecture, discussion, completion of activities, practice, feedback and coaching of skills discussed.
Audience: Behavior Analysts (BCBAs, BCBA-Ds, BCaBAs)
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Ethical Culture, Feedback, Leadership, Performance Diagnostics
 
Workshop #W53
CE Offered: BACB
Integrating Students With Autism Spectrum Disorder Into Inclusion Settings
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich B
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Sarah Weddle, Ph.D.
SARAH WEDDLE (May Institute), WHITNEY L. KLEINERT (May Institute), GAIGE JOHNSON (May Institute)
Description: Inclusion is seemly ideal for students with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) due to increased access to (a) the general education curriculum and (b) social interactions with neurotypical peers. There is also pressure to educate students in the least restrictive environment as required by the Education for All Handicapped Children Act (1975; Public Law 94-142). Educators cite challenges with selecting the least restrictive setting due to the wide variability in the presentation of the core deficits of social interaction, communication, and restrictive/repetitive behavior, and the extent to which each core deficit interferes with learning. At the onset of school placement decisions (e.g., inclusion, general education, or substantially separate settings), school administrators commonly ask behavior analysts how to (a) identify candidates for inclusion, (b) successfully transition these students into an inclusion setting, and (c) ensure the student’s success is maintained once in a less restrictive setting. The purpose of this workshop is to provide a model for school-based behavior analysts to gather relevant information and generate inclusion plans using exemplar data. Attendees will also review empirically-based interventions, rooted in applied behavior analysis, for students with ASD (National Autism Center, 2015; Wong et al., 2015) to promote communication, social interaction, and academic success.
Learning Objectives: • Attendees will practice using initial screening criteria to identify potential candidates for inclusion. • Attendees will complete an Inclusion Readiness Checklist created by the first author using exemplar data to determine the extent to which a student’s core deficit of ASD interferes with expected classroom behavior. • Attendees will review exemplar data to complete an Inclusion Action Plan created by the first author for how to systematically fade-in or transition students into a less intrusive setting. • Attendees will review how to monitor relevant behavioral progress in inclusion settings to ensure continued success is maintained in the inclusion setting. • Attendees will identify how to monitor relevant academic progress in inclusion settings. • Attendees will review empirically-supported interventions for students with ASD in the context of school-based settings and how to promote treatment integrity and ensure feasibility.
Activities: Instructional strategies will include lecture, discussion, small group break out, and completion of checklists and planning matrices using multiple exemplars. The presenters will begin by reviewing relevant background and the core deficits of ASD as well as the impact of those deficits on classroom behavior. Initial exercises will require attendees to use basic screening criteria to determine candidates for inclusion. The presenters would like to include at least three case examples in which the first examplar is modeled. The second examplar will be completed in group with presenters providing partial assistance. The third exemplar will be done in break out groups, but independence will be encouraged. Participants will then be asked to review case exemplars which will serve as the content of the group discussion. The presenters will embed empirically-supported intervention and methodology into the didactic portions and the case examples so attendees have the opportunity to apply the content.
Audience: school-based behavior analysts
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): autism, inclusion, intervention, schools
 
Workshop #W54
CE Offered: BACB
Ecological Assessments in School Settings: Creating Quality Transitions for Learners With Autism Spectrum Disorder and Complex Learning Needs
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich C
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Amanda Laprime, Ph.D.
AMANDA LAPRIME (The Center for Children with Special Needs; Northeastern University), NICHOLE COLLINS (The Center for Children with Special Needs), KIMBERLY MARSHALL (The Center for Children with Special Needs; Endicott College), JESSICA ROHRER (The Center for Children with Special Needs; Endicott College), SHAUNESSY M. EGAN (The Center for Children with Special Needs)
Description: Transitions are an essential part of a child’s development into adulthood. Throughout their educational careers, individuals with autism and other developmental disabilities transition into new environments numerous times. Despite the regularity of educational transitions, the majority of practicing behavior analysts do not conduct comprehensive assessments to plan for successful transitions (Dente & Cohles, 2012). In addition, these transitions are often not designed well in advance of their execution. Ecological assessments involve the comprehensive process of identifying key behavioral requisites for a receiving environment across domains (i.e., social behaviors, academic behaviors, communicative behaviors), while simultaneously assessing an individual’s current repertoire across each of these areas. Ecological assessments allow behavior analysts, in conjunction with educational teams, to plan for successful transitions while focusing on independence and meaningful inclusion. Attendees will be introduced to a model for assessing expectations across domains in a receiving environment and utilizing this assessment to guide the development of recommendations for skill acquisition. Planning for independence will be embedded within each aspect of the assessment process. Attendees will be taught general assessment strategies, as well as methods to apply across specific transitions (e.g., transitions to kindergarten, middle school, high school, and post-secondary settings). Additionally, we will teach attendees how to design effective, skill-based treatments prior to a transition that will allow a student to be included in their receiving environment in meaningful ways. Audience members will leave the workshop with a model ecological assessment, graphic organizers for structuring assessments, sample data sheets, and model lesson plans for skill acquisition targets.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, participants will be able to: (1) Describe the process of a comprehensive ecological assessment; (2) Identify targets for observation in receiving educational environments; (3) Define and quantify barriers to successful transition and inclusion; (4) Develop recommendations for skill based treatments based on the results of an individual assessment; and (5) Compare different approaches to ecological assessments across the educational lifespan (e.g., transition to kindergarten, middle school, high school, and post-secondary settings).
Activities: Lecture, discussion, small group breakout, and material development.
Audience: The target audience for this workshop will be behavior analysts who provide consultation to educational programs for learners with significant academic, behavioral, and social learning needs.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Advanced
 
Workshop #W55
CE Offered: BACB
Understanding Barriers for Parental Adherence: Using Systematic Analysis Methods to Improve Fidelity of Caregivers
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich A
Area: AUT/TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Kathleen McCabe-Odri, Ed.D.
KATHLEEN MCCABE-ODRI (Partners In Learning, Inc.), ADRIENNE RIZZO (Partners in Learning), SAMARIA JUANANDRES (Partners in Learning, Inc), Melanie Erwinski (Partners in Learning, Inc.), Erica Ballard (Partners in Learning, Inc), JENNIFER CORNELY (Partners in Learning, Inc.)
Description: Moore, 2010, defined parental adherence as “abiding by the medical or behavioral treatment recommendations given by a trained individual both in the presence and absence of this clinical oversight.” Research shows that parental involvement within a child’s intervention has significant positive results regardless of whether the child is diagnosed with a disability; however, parents of those with ASD typically have more roles and responsibilities than other parents (Cho, 2008). Additionally, variables such as finances, perceived support, maternal stress, knowledge of treatment and spousal agreement contribute to or undermine self-efficacy (Allen & Warzak, 2000; Dillenburger et al., 2004; Hastings & Symes, 2002). These obstacles often present significant barriers to behavior analysis in a consultative or trainer role with parents or caregivers, thus limiting overall access to effective interventions when therapists are not present. Also, most parent training studies involve maternal participation (Schultz, Schmidt, & Stichter, 2011), yet fathers have shown to be critical to treatment success, often providing interactions based on a “higher level language model and more imaginative and realistic forms of play” (Flippin & Crais, 2011). This workshop reviews current research on parental adherence challenges as well as offers researched-based methods to help improve fidelity via varied training models.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of this workshop, attendees will be able to: 1) describe research-based functional analysis of parental non-adherence variables 2) identify potential barriers for parental adherence and design interventions to reduce challenges 3) utilize presented methods to effectively measure and increase fidelity with caregivers
Activities: Workshop objectives will be met through a balanced presentation of review of current literature, presentation of case studies addressing adherence with caregivers, and group discussion of participants experiences with non-adherence. Content will be taught through lecture and video demonstrations of strategies and sample data sheets will be provided. Supplemental materials for analysis of barriers will be shared in order to support participant learning.
Audience: BCBAs, staff and parent trainers, program supervisors
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Workshop #W56
CE Offered: BACB
Parenting Tools: How to Develop and Implement Competency-Based Parent Trainings
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Geneva
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Elizabeth C. Nulty, Ph.D.
ELIZABETH C. NULTY (Center for Children with Special Needs), PATRICIA A. FITZSIMONS (Institute of Professional Practice, Inc.), ADRIANNA O. ZAMBRZYCKA (Institute of Professional Practice)
Description: This workshop is for clinicians who would like to refine their parenting training curriculums regardless of population. Parenting Tools is based on the work of Dr. Glenn Latham who used behavioral strategies to teach parents proactive parenting skills and to avoid reactive strategies including common parenting traps. The workshop takes the Parenting Tools that Dr. Latham recommends to families and combines them with behavioral skills training to ensure that parents can effectively generalize the skills with their children. Participants will learn how to develop an effective parent training using behavioral skills training for parent training by participating in training based on this model. Participants should bring a laptop to the workshop as they will have an opportunity to develop their own parent training based on Parenting Tools while incorporating the steps of behavioral skills training. Participants will receive feedback on their parent training from the workshop presenters and their peers.
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will be able to identify steps to each of the Parenting Tools as developed by Dr. Latham. 2. Participates will be able to list all of the common parenting traps as developed by Dr. Latham. 3. Participants will be able to list all of the steps to behavioral skills training in order to create competency-based parent training. 4. Participates will be able to list 2 parent training programs that used the Parenting Tools curriculum combined with behavioral skills training. 5. Participants will create a parent training that includes the components of Parenting Tools curriculum and behavioral skills training.
Activities: This workshop includes lecture, sample training, and guided practice and feedback to participants on development of a training.
Audience: This workshop is for anyone who trains parents.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): BST, parent training, Parenting, training
 
Workshop #W57
CE Offered: PSY/BACB — 
Ethics
Help for BCBAs With Challenging Ethical Dilemmas: Avoiding Multiple Relationships, Confidentiality, and Limits to Confidentiality
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 1
Area: CBM/CSS; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Jeannie A. Golden, Ph.D.
JEANNIE A. GOLDEN (East Carolina University)
Description: Similar to psychologists and other helping professionals, BCBAs have several ethical responsibilities including: avoiding multiple relationships, confidentiality and limits to confidentiality when someone is at-risk for hurting themselves or others or being hurt by others. Although BCBAs may be aware of what these ethical responsibilities are, they may not have had the training to deal with these complicated and sometimes threatening situations. The workshop presenter is a licensed psychologist in addition to a BCBA-D and has had much experience supervising professionals, including BCBAs, who are faced with these daunting situations. This workshop will provide BCBAs and other professionals knowledge of and practice with handling these situations. Workshop participants can bring real or hypothetical ethical dilemmas to process, as well as hear about case scenarios and participate in roleplay situations. Behavior Skills Training (BST), which is an evidence-based procedure recommended for use in supervision, will be used to aid participants in becoming more skilled and confident in handling these challenging ethical dilemmas. Participants will be provided with specific tools that might be helpful in solving challenging ethical dilemmas (problem solving model, fidelity checklists, safety assessment form) and given information on how to use these tools.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, participants will be able to: 1. Describe the reasons why ethical dilemmas of avoiding multiple relationships, confidentiality and limits to confidentiality when someone is at-risk for hurting themselves or others or being hurt by others are so challenging 2. Describe the problem-solving process for dealing with challenging ethical dilemmas and how it was used in specific case scenarios 3. Describe the use of Behavior Skills Training (BST), including instructions, modeling, rehearsal and feedback, to aid participants in becoming more skilled and confident in handling these challenging ethical dilemmas 4. Describe the use of specific tools that might be helpful in solving challenging ethical dilemmas (problem solving model, fidelity checklists, safety assessment form)
Activities: Workshop objectives will be met through lecture, discussion, role play, small group interaction, and case scenarios
Audience: BCBAs, psychologists, psychiatrists, teachers, counselors, nurses, social workers
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Workshop #W58
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP
Behavioral Mindfulness: Toward a Behavioral Definition of Mindfulness and Using Approximations to Gain Greater Mindful Awareness
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 1
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Mark R. Clingan, Ed.D.
MARK R. CLINGAN (West Virginia University - Center for Excellence in Disabilities, Retired), JOHN E. HUMPHREY (Retired)
Description: For centuries various esoteric and religious practices have developed contemplative techniques to more effectively deal with life. These practices have helped a number of people to cope with and work on problems. Yet, these practices have often been done in haphazard ways with limited results. Behavioral mindfulness provides a starting point for defining what is meant by mindfulness. It establishes learning goals, and training procedures to make the salient features of mindful awareness work for a broader audience. In a sense, this is “East meets West.” Both the mindfulness and the Behavior Analytic approaches have somethings to offer and the combination may have a synergistic improvement over past practices. In this workshop, participants will learn a definition of mindfulness that comports to the views of radical behaviorism. They will practice various meditative techniques and learn procedures to help generalize mindful awareness into daily activities. Participants will learn how verbal behavior and private events can be used to help steer them to more composure and to be more effective in their interactions with their environments.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of this workshop the participants will be able to: 1. List two benefits that they can gain from practicing mindful awareness. 2. Define mindful awareness from a behavioral perspective. 3. Identify that they have experienced mindful awareness for one breath. 4. Identify that they have experienced mindful awareness for three consecutive breaths. 5. Demonstrate the appropriate execution of a mindful pause. 6. List two benefits that they can gain from a daily practice of meditation. 7. Tell the main goal when practicing mindful meditation. 8. List three factors that indicate they are meditating correctly. 9. During a practice meditation, identify that they have done one of the three behaviors that indicate they were doing meditation correctly. 10. Demonstrate the correct execution of three different meditative practices. 11. Explain how private events fit within the casual relations of important emotional and behavioral reactions. 12. Describe a way to improve behavioral outcomes using the analysis of private events. 13. Define a shepherd thought. 14. Given a role play scenario demonstrate the appropriate use of a shepherd thought. 15. List three situations where they will practice using a shepherd thought. 16. Tell how mindful awareness can help them be more effective in daily activities. 17. List three situations in which they will practice developing more mindful awareness. 18. Write a verbal commitment to use a data sheet to collect data on mindful awareness practices for the next month.
Activities: During a brief lecture, participants will fill out worksheets that list key points about behavioral mindfulness and methods of achieving it. Interspersed with the lecture will be small discussion groups where participants will describe their understanding of the material with an emphasis on highlighting experiences in their lives that exemplify the presented information. An emphasis is placed on practicing a number of meditative procedures that facilitate learning mindful awareness. A number of brief exercises will be described and rehearsed that can help generalize mindful awareness to daily activities. The workshop will end with a group discussion of the ideas, principles, practices, and ways to cultivate more frequent and more in-depth mindful awareness in the participant’s lives. Participants will be given access to the instructor’s YouTube videos for more practice in behavioral mindfulness.
Audience: This workshop is designed for: 1. all certified behavior analysts who are interested in developing a greater understanding of mindfulness procedures from a radical behavior perspective. 2. Behavior analysts who wish to increase their capacity for and frequency of responding with mindful awareness. 3. Behavior analysts who work with individuals who may benefit from practices that increase calm attention to important features of their current environments.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Mindfulness, Self-management
 
Workshop #W59
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Diversity submission Cultural Diversity and the Behavior Analyst: Addressing Ethical and Practice Efficiency Concerns
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 1
Area: CSS/DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Bobby Newman, Ph.D.
DAMALI ALEXANDER (Proud Moments), CHANIE RUBIN (Proud Moments), BOBBY NEWMAN (Proud Moments)
Description: Behavior analysts are charged by our ethical code to be aware of, and to adjust behavior, according to cultural norms. Many behavior analysts are unaware of many key issues in cultural understanding, however. This workshop will provide a framework and practice in decision-making in keeping with cultural norm sensitivity.
Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will accurately describe and adhere to relevant portions of the BACB ethics code regarding cultural diveristy. 2. Attendees will describe culturally dominant and non-privilege factors. 2. Attendees will use appropriate language and treatment plans when addressing clients and families. 3. Attendees will discriminate clinical situations they should take on and should refer.
Activities: The workshop is a mixture of lecture, media viewing and exploration, participation exercises and group experiences.
Audience: The target audience is intermediate level behavior analysts.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Workshop #W60
CE Offered: BACB
Behavior Analysis and Workplace Well-Being: Re-Thinking the Way We Work and Live
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich F
Area: CSS/OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Gianna Biscontini, M.Ed.
GIANNA BISCONTINI (W3RKWELL), ALEXANDRA FRANCES KOPACK (W3RKWELL), Malerie Gest (W3RKWELL), Miguel Flores (W3RKWELL)
Description: Burnout, high turnover rates, heavy clinical loads, long working hours and other stress-evoking workplace variables are becoming a scar on the field of clinical behavior analysis, detracting potential practitioners from entering and advancing the field while also resulting in illness and other high costs for businesses serving populations in need. Moreover, the need and desire for behavior analysts to expand upon their skill sets to serve other populations is greater than ever. The purpose of this workshop is to combine the evidence-based research from behavior analysis and OBM with rigorous studies on workplace health and data from organizational psychology to: 1) translate research from outside our field into behavior analytic terms, 2) offer behavior-based retention and productivity solutions to those in management, supervisory or director positions, 3) expose behavior analysts to novel topics and 4) discuss ways in which the field of clinical behavior analysis might become more productive and protective over the health of its practitioners. Content has peer-reviewed, published support beyond those publications and other types of communications devoted primarily to the promotion of the approach. This topic is innovative in its application but well-founded in its science. Framing outside content within the principles of behavior analysis provides a familiar setting for behavior analysts tasked with mission-crticial roles such as growing employees, teams and businesses. Risks involved are low; the potential benefits of collaboration and learning far outweigh any unlikely, undesired consequences. Content is limited to this workshop and should be considered a starting point from which teams and agencies can further analyze and build upon behavior-based solutions in their own companies.
Learning Objectives: Participants will assemble an operational definition of workplace wellbeing and a health-centric workplace. Participants will develop data collection systems and analyze common three-term contingencies that evoke stress-related behaviors in the workplace. Participants will define potential replacement behaviors and/or environmental modifications to increase retention, productivity and discretionary effort.
Activities: Workshop objective will be met through a combination of video, small group discussions, lecture and individual worksheets that accumulate content for a synthesized action plan.
Audience: Intermediate
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Leadership, Performance Management, Self-care, Wellness
 
Workshop #W62
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Using a Functional Analysis Risk Assessment Decision Tool in Applied Settings
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 3
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Neil Deochand, Ph.D.
NEIL DEOCHAND (University of Cincinnati), REBECCA RENEE ELDRIDGE (Western Michigan University)
Description: Risk-benefit analyses are used to weight the side-effects, restrictiveness, and potential harms of procedures against their potential benefits before proceeding. Despite behavior analysts reporting that functional analyses are the most informative assessment to develop effective treatment plans, many experience barriers to utilizing this assessment in practice (Oliver, Pratt, & Normand, 2015; Roscoe, Phillips, Kelly, Farber, & Dube, 2015). Since safety recommendations for the functional analysis are scattered in the research literature it may lead to over-estimating the risk of this procedure (Wiskirchen, Deochand, & Peterson, 2017). Therefore, developing clearer guidelines and clinical decision making tools regarding when to proceed with such a procedure is an ethical mandate. This workshop covers integrating safety precautions in functional analyses, provides attendees with an automated tool which can help train supervisees essential decision making skills of when to proceed with a functional analysis, and consider alternative experimental procedures that can be used in practice.
Learning Objectives: 1. Learn to create a written document outlining safety precautions used in functional analyses 2. Use an automated tool to train supervisees considerations to reducing risk prior to proceeding with functional analyses 3. Consider when reliability and validity of results are impacted by safety precautions, idiosyncratic or combined functions, and issues surrounding heavily medicated individuals. 4. Develop strategies to minimize false positives and or false negatives in functional analysis treatment conditions.
Activities: Lecture on safety recommendations used in the research literature Discussion regarding current safety precautions used in practice Present hypothetical case scenarios to breakout groups Use tool to assist decision making and training supervisees regarding risks of proceeding with a functional analysis
Audience: Board Certified Behavior Analysts that use functional analyses
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): decision tools, functional analysis, risk assessment, safety precautions
 
Workshop #W63
CE Offered: BACB
Moving From 1:1 to Small-Group Instruction
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich E
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Patrick E. McGreevy, Ph.D.
PATRICK E. MCGREEVY (Patrick McGreevy and Associates), TROY FRY (Patrick McGreevy and Associates)
Description: Discrete trial instruction, a hallmark of behavior analysis, typically includes the teaching of one skill at a time to one learner at a time (1:1 instruction). Dr. McGreevy will describe and demonstrate the teaching of mands, waiting and accepting no after exhibiting mands, transitions, listener responses, and tolerating skills to each of two learners at the same time. This demonstration will include the following activities: (1) managing physical proximity, (2) contriving and capturing motivating operations, (3) effecting stimulus control transfer through errorless prompting and prompt-fading, (4) fading continuous schedules of artificial consequences, like tokens and praise, and providing intermittent schedules of naturally-occurring consequences, (5) using first opportunity of the day probe data to record small increments of learner progress, and (6) teaching to fluency, rather than percent correct. Members of the audience will be required to actively participate in this demonstration.
Learning Objectives: 1- Participants will describe all six activities included in the demonstration 2- Participants will perform three activities included in the demonstration 3- Participants will describe how this demonstration was different from most discrete trial instruction
Activities: Members of the audience will be required to actively participate in the demonstrations provided by Dr. McGreevy.
Audience: Workshop level: intermediate; participants should already have several years of experience with 1:1 discrete trial instruction.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): 1:1 instruction, Group instruction
 
Workshop #W66
CE Offered: BACB
The Good Behavior Game: A Simple Best-Practice Procedure for Transforming Class-Wide Student Behavior
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 2
Area: EDC/CSS; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: P. Raymond Joslyn, Ph.D.
P. RAYMOND JOSLYN (Berry College), EMILY GROVES (University of South Wales)
Description: The Good Behavior Game (GBG) is a well-established classroom management procedure that has been studied in our field for nearly 50 years. Extensive empirical research supports its use in reducing problem behavior (e.g., disruption) and increasing appropriate behavior (e.g., staying on task, positive peer interactions) in classrooms. The GBG is effective across school settings (e.g., mainstream, special education, alternative schools) and student age groups (e.g., preschool through high school and college), flexible and customizable, and easy to implement. However, despite the overwhelming evidence in its favor, many teachers are simply unaware of the intervention and the benefits it could bring to their classrooms. The goal of this workshop is to disseminate this best-practice procedure to those who need it most. Attendees will be able to implement the GBG, train school staff (e.g., teachers, paraprofessionals), and troubleshoot to overcome implementation barriers. The presenters will share tips from their experience for getting teacher and student buy in and discuss their own peer-reviewed research on the GBG, which includes extending the GBG to schools for children with emotional and behavioral disorders and delinquency, adapting the GBG to individual classrooms, methods for quickly and efficiently training teachers, and variations that reduce implementation effort.
Learning Objectives: Attendees will be able to: 1) Discuss the current and past research supporting the use of the Good Behavior Game 2) Describe the key components of the Good Behavior Game and be able to implement the procedure 3) Describe variations of the Good Behavior Game and contexts in which they are appropriate 4) Discuss methods for training teachers and overcoming barriers to implementing the Good Behavior Game
Activities: Workshop objectives will be taught through lecture, demonstration, group discussion, and small group breakout. Supplemental materials summarizing core content and troubleshooting will be provided.
Audience: This workshop is primarily intended for school-based practitioners (e.g., BCBAs, school psychologists) and teachers (e.g., elementary, middle, high school, special education) who want to learn about evidence-based classroom behavior management.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): challenging behavior, classroom management, group contingency, teacher training
 
Workshop #W67
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Essential Elements of Behavior Support Plans: What Are They, Who Decided These? Are They In Plans?
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich G
Area: EDC/TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Teresa A. Rodgers, Ph.D.
TERESA A. RODGERS (Missouri Department of Mental Health Division of Developmental Disabilities), RITA M COOPER (Missouri Department of Mental Health/Division of Developmental Disabilities), LUCAS EVANS (Missouri Department of Mental Health/Division of Developmental Disabilities), RHIANNON MARIE EVANS (The Chicago School and Missouri Department of Mental Health/Division of Developmental Disabilities), MELANTHA WITHERSPOON (Missouri Department of Mental Health/Division of Developmental Disabilities)
Description: Do you wonder if your plans are the best they could be? Would it be helpful to know the best practice elements of behavior plans? Many state funding agencies have requirements for behavior change plans including necessary elements, templates and review processes. A surprising finding from Missouri Division of Developmental Disabilities is that most of the plans developed by behavioral service providers do not include many of the elements. We will discuss requirements of several states, the BACB task list and Compliance Code. We will be sharing data regarding common elements present and missing in behavior support plans written in by behavioral service providers in Missouri. Attendees will learn best practice and ethical standards for behavior support plans and practice evaluating their own and sample behavior support plans. The intended outcome is that attendees will improve that quality of behavior plans. It is strongly suggested that participants bring a redacted, sample behavior support plan that they have written. Content has obtained credibility, as demonstrated by the involvement of the broader practice, education, and science communities in studying applying practices described.
Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will review a checklist of necessary elements for behavior support plan to meet best practice, ethical standards, and improved quality of life for individuals served. 2. Attendees will identify how the checklist aligns with compliance code, task list, applied literature, and state service requirements and regulations. 3. Attendees will use the checklist to identify present and missing elements on a sample BSP. 4. Attendees will identify present and missing elements of their own BSPs. 5. Attendees will discuss barriers to including critical elements into behavior support plans.
Activities: Instructional strategies will include lecture, discussion, active participation, and small group breakout. Workshop objectives will be met through lecture, group discussion, frequent responding through web-based application, and group activity involving reviewing sample plans.
Audience: The target audience includes new practitioners who would like to develop effective formats for intervention plans as well as intermediate practitioners who are struggling with requirements from funders and effectiveness of plans.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Effective practice, Intervention Plans,
 
Workshop #W68
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Conversations: The Only Performance Improvement Intervention You Will Ever Need
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 2
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Nicole Gravina, Ph.D.
JOHN AUSTIN (Reaching Results), NICOLE GRAVINA (University of Florida)
Description: In this interactive workshop, attendees will learn how to effectively lead and manage employees through frequent, brief conversations. In short conversations, leaders have the opportunity to develop rapport, agree on expectations, sample work, assess, and deliver feedback and reinforcement. Getting better at having effective and strategic conversations can reduce the need for add-on intervention plans. During the workshop, attendees will explore the facets of effective conversations and how they enable behavior change and employee development. Research and case study data will be shared to support each facet. Attendees should bring 2-3 examples of recent conversations with employees as well as one business result they wish to change. Attendees will leave with an action plan for having better conversations with employees and for improving their selected business result.
Learning Objectives: Attendees will be able to describe the facets of effective conversations Attendees will be able to describe the performance improvement intervention elements that can be embedded into short conversations Attendees will develop an action plan for improving their conversations with employees Attendees will develop an action plan for influencing a business result
Activities: Instructional strategies include: Lecture, discussion, small group break outs, creating action plans
Audience: Business owners, directors, and supervisors
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): feedback, OBM, staff management, supervision
 
Workshop #W69
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Part Two: Organizational Performance Engineering to Improve Client Outcomes
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Currents
Area: OBM/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Guy S. Bruce, Ed.D.
GUY S. BRUCE (Appealing Solutions, LLC)
Description: Do you work as a program designer, staff trainer, supervisor, or director of an agency that provides services to clients with learning difficulties? Are you satisfied with your clients' progress? Behavior analysis developed a powerful technology for helping people, but too many clients don't receive the benefits. Why not? The easy answer is that employees don't do what they are told. But the employees’ performance, just like their clients’ performance, is a product of their environment. Do employees have the resources, training, and management necessary to help their clients achieve their goals? What about their supervisors? What about their directors? Organizations are groups of individuals who must work together to provide their clients with the outcomes they want. The failure of clients to make adequate progress is not usually an individual employee performance problem, but a performance problem at the system process, and individual levels of the organization. This workshop will provide you with a set of tools to pinpoint organizational performance problems, analyze their causes, recommend the best solutions, solve the problems by designing and implementing solutions that might include more efficient resources, training, and management practices, and evaluate their effectiveness, efficiency, and return on investment. Please note: attendees must register for both part 1 and part 2 of this workshop.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, participants will be able to: (1) Define desired client results and necessary performance, then measure and evaluate current client results, performance, and progress, using measures of frequency, celeration and celeration efficiency; (2) Define desired staff performance at the system, process, and individual levels, measure and evaluate current staff performance at each level; (3) Perform a data based analysis of staff performance problems to identify their causes; (4) Recommend solutions to performance problems with the best return on investment; (5) Design and implement those solutions, which may include staff resources, training and management; (6) Evaluate the effectiveness, efficiency, and return on investment of those solutions.
Activities: This workshop provides a variety of training aids including case studies, practice cards, practice exercises, project worksheets, job aids, and computer-based charting software.
Audience: Do you work as a program designer, staff trainer, supervisor, or director of an agency that provides services to clients with learning difficulties? Are you satisfied with your clients’ progress? This workshop will teach you how to improve the performance of your organization so that every client will make efficient progress.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Basic
 
Workshop #W70
CE Offered: PSY/BACB — 
Ethics
Solving Ethical Dilemmas in the Practice of Applied Behavior Analysis
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: PCH/DEV; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Weihe Huang, Ph.D.
WEIHE HUANG (Creating Behavioral + Educational Momentum), KARRE WILLIAMS (CBEM)
Description: This workshop is designed to increase participants’ ability to ethically practice applied behavior analysis (ABA) by describing the characteristics of ethical dilemmas, discussing Guidelines for Responsible Conduct, and introducing an ethical decision making model. This approach incorporates codes of ethics for behavior analysts and ethical reasoning strategies. When making ethical decisions, many behavior analysts tend to believe that these decisions are solely based on the analysis of objective data and relevant evidences. However, in reality the decision-making process is also influenced by behavior analysts’ values, as well as societal values including those of services recipients. Behavior analysts often encounter ethical dilemmas when these values conflict. In facing ethical dilemmas, behavior analysts need codes of professional conduct and ethically sound strategies to reach reasonable and practical resolutions. The Guidelines for Responsible Conduct for Behavior Analysts is helpful in many situations. In some cases, however, ethical dilemmas cannot be resolved by appealing to the existing guidelines or regulations. Part of this workshop is aimed at providing applied behavior analysts with ethical reasoning strategies in the event that the Guidelines for Responsible Conduct alone are insufficient. These strategies are based on the relevant experience of the presenters and the available literature in the field of behavior analysis and related areas. The emphasis of the discussion will be on the application of Guidelines for Responsible Conduct for Behavior Analysts and the Ethical Decision Making Model to various clinical settings, including natural homes, residential facilities, day programs, and educational programs.
Learning Objectives: - List and describe at least five core ethical principles in the field of Applied Behavior Analysis. For example, participants will be able to select and define a core ethical principle from a group of 4 mixed rues/principles. ? - Identify and describe some most common ethical dilemmas faced by behavior analysts. For example, participants will be able to discriminate among ethical dilemmas, clinical problems, and administrative issues by selecting the correct one from a group of 4 different challenging situations.? - Demonstrate a working knowledge in the Guidelines for Responsible Conduct for Behavior Analysts by being able to identify appropriate guideline(s) that could address a particular ethical issue. - Identify, define, and explain problem-solving strategies in a variety of ethical situations. For example, participants will be able to perform the Six-Step Ethical Decision Making Model and generalize the learned skill in different scenarios by completing at least 80 % of the required steps described in the ethical decision making model for different ethical dilemmas.
Activities: Activities: This workshop will use cases both provided by the presenters and generated by participants to illustrate the implementation of Guidelines for Responsible Conduct for Behavior Analysts and the steps in the Ethical Decision Making Model. Participants of this workshop will be encouraged to (1) identify their values and to associate these values with primary ethical principles; (2) recognize the characteristics of ethical dilemmas in the field of ABA; and (3) apply codes in Guidelines for Responsible Conduct and six steps specified in the Ethical Decision Making Model to cases that involve ethical dilemmas.
Audience: Board certified behavior analysts, Licensed psychologists, Licensed therapists, Licensed clinical social workers
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Workshop #W71
CE Offered: BACB
Preparing High Quality Graphs for Publication and Presentation: Constructing Features of Effective Data Displays
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 2
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Sydney J Berkman, M.S.
SYDNEY J BERKMAN (New England Center for Children; Western New England University), CORMAC MACMANUS (New England Center for Children; Western New England University), ANDREW NUZZOLILLI (Western New England University)
Description: Behavior analysts rely on visual inspection of data to make clinical decisions. It follows that mastery of graphing technology and aesthetic conventions are helpful for behavior analysts in clinical practice and research. Although behavior analysts are likely to receive instruction during graduate and practicum experiences on visual analysis, less instructional time may be dedicated to creating and editing graphs, especially to a degree that meets the high standards of publication or presentation. In this workshop, participants will learn about general aesthetic and practical considerations in the creation of publication and presentation quality graphics with an emphasis on troubleshooting unclear or cluttered displays. Participants will then have opportunities to create publication or presentation quality graphs. We will conclude with a discussion of the advantages and disadvantages of different graphing software for creating single-subject design graphs.
Learning Objectives: Participants will describe elements of publication quality single-subject design graphs. Participants will describe and demonstrate strategies for making graphs clearer/cleaner including troubleshooting clutters graphs. Participants will create publication- and presentation-quality graphs during the workshop. Participants will describe advantages and disadvantages of Excel, Prism, & SigmaPlot for single-subject design graphing.
Activities: Workshop objectives will be met through a balanced presentation of lecture, video observation, guided practice (i.e., BST), and small group breakout. Supplementary materials including sample graphs, a copy of the presentation, guidelines for high-quality graphing, and links to additional resources will be provided to attendees as printed handouts.
Audience: BCBAs and BCBA-Ds looking to refine their graphing skills to create high-quality graphs for publication and presentation.
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): graphing, presenting, publishing, software
 
Workshop #W73
CE Offered: BACB
Ignite Your Audience: How to Really Present Presentations Like a Real Presenter (Really!)
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Third Floor, Bianco
Area: TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Corey L. Robertson, M.S.
COREY L. ROBERTSON (ABA Tech / Florida Tech)
Description: Presenting information to a variety of audiences is an integral part of the professional’s role in dissemination of our science and practice (BACB, 2014). Yet, as Friman (2014) reports, “apparently, the front of the room contains stimuli so aversive that, when queried, many people report fearing it more than death itself. “ Even when professionals do brave the front of the room, they may not achieve their objectives- for a variety of reasons, ranging from the quality and format of their materials to the presentation of those materials. In this three-hour WORKshop, participants will learn how to tell their story and use technology ethically and effectively to ensure their audiences achieve the learning objectives and walk away inspired! Following a brief period of lecture and demonstration, participants will develop a 5-minute presentation using these guidelines with support from the instructor and peers, deliver this presentation, and receive supportive feedback. Note: A laptop or tablet with Microsoft PowerPoint or Apple Keynote installed is required, and some prior experience with presentation software is preferred. Additionally, participants may have a specific topic or data to present, but this is not required.
Learning Objectives: 1. Cite elements from the BACB Professional and Ethical Compliance Code regarding Responsibility to the Profession and Public statements. 2. Recognize the key elements of “The hero’s journey”, and use these elements in a presentation 3. Define and use elements of contrast in public speaking. 4. Develop slides using thematic elements, using media with appropriate licensing to refrain from copyright or trademark infringement. 6. Present to peers in a dynamic and engaging manner.
Activities: The format includes a demonstration of concepts and skills, the opportunity to practice them in developing and presenting a short presentation, with feedback from the workshop author and peer audience.
Audience: Undergraduate or graduate students, professors, researchers, and practitioners who wish to present more effectively at conferences to peers or in the community to a general audience
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Dissemination, Presenting, Professionalism
 
Workshop #W75
CE Offered: BACB
"Eyes Up Front" Teaching Generative Attending Skills Across the Spectrum
Friday, May 24, 2019
4:00 PM–7:00 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 3
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Richard E. Laitinen, Ph.D.
RICHARD E. LAITINEN (Personalized Accelerated Learning Systems (PALS)), GLADYS WILLIAMS (CIEL, SPAIN), SARA POLGAR (David Gregory School)
Description: This tendency toward attending to a limited subset of environmental events predictive of contingencies of reinforcement--shown to occur both within and across sensory modalities is a potential defining characteristic of children labeled as having autism. Limited attending capacities restrict the type and range of sensory modalities that may come control responding (cf, Brown & Bebko, 2012). In response to this, ABA researchers such as Holth (2005) and Pelaez (2009) have come to more sharply focus on the identification and remediation of deficits and delays in the acquisition of simple and complex attending, joint attending and social referencing competencies. Important to today’s workshop is that “attentional” deficits are remedial and that early attentional capacities and competencies are critical to both learning and further attentional development over the life-span of the individual.
Learning Objectives: 1. Contingently analyze attending behaviors 2. Identify component/composite relations 3. Design conditioning contingencies to affect attending as a valued response
Activities: Combined lecture, discussion, and small group break out.
Audience: Intermediate
Content Area: Practice
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Generative Instruction, Joint Attention, Visual Regard, Visual Tracking
 
Special Event #13
CE Offered: BACB
Opening Event and Society for the Advancement of Behavior Analysis Award Ceremony
Saturday, May 25, 2019
8:00 AM–9:20 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom A-F
Instruction Level: Basic
Chair: Michael J. Dougher (University of New Mexico)
CE Instructor: Michael J. Dougher, Ph.D.
 

SABA Award for Distinguished Service to Behavior Analysis: Kurt Salzinger: The Consummate Behaviorist in the Lab and at Home

Abstract:

This award will be accepted by Dr. Salzinger's wife, Deanna Chitayat.

 
KURT SALZINGER (Hofstra University)
 
Kurt Salzinger was born in Vienna, Austria in 1929; at 11 he fled the Nazis. Arriving in New York City in 1938, he attended the Bronx High School of Science, NYU, and Columbia University, where he received his Ph.D. in Psychology. As a committed behaviorist, Dr. Salzinger held positions at the New York State Psychiatric Institute, Poly- technic University, the National Science Foundation, the American Psychological Association (APA), and Hofstra University. He was President of the New York Academy of Sciences where he initiated dialog with the Soviet Academy of Sciences. He was Executive Director of Science at the APA, among other roles, as well as President of the Association of Behavior Analysis and the Eastern Psychological Association. He wrote 14 books and 200 journal articles, and his work continues to be cited widely.
 

SABA Award for Scientific Translation: The Translational Science of Health Behavior Change: A Recruitment Call For Scientists

Abstract:

The health problems that result from our own behavior will increasingly become among the most important challenges to health. For example, alarming increases are already being observed in addiction, obesity, and medication non-adherence. However, efforts to improve these conditions and disorders are hindered by the poor efficacy of most of our treatments. This lack of efficacy, I would argue, results from insufficient understanding of the controlling variables. This is a unique opportunity for those interested in basic science and the underlying theory to make important contributions as translational researchers. I will illustrate these unique opportunities with the application of behavioral economics to important health behaviors.

 
WARREN BICKEL (Virginia Tech Carilion Research Institute and Department of Psychology, Virginia Tech)
 

Dr. Warren Bickel joined the Virginia Tech Carilion Research Institute in 2011 and serves as Director of the Addiction Recovery Research Center and Co-Director of the Center for Transformative Research on Health Behaviors. In recognition of his extraordinary contributions to research and scholarship achievements, Dr. Bickel was recently awarded the Virginia Tech Carilion Behavioral Health Research Endowed Professorship. He has taught and led research programs at the Albert Einstein College of Medicine, the University of Vermont, and the University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences.  NIH has funded Dr. Bickel’s work continuously since 1987. Dr. Bickel is an accomplished scholar and researcher whose accolades include receipt of the 2011 APA International Don Hake Translational Research Distinguished Contributions to Basic Research Award and the 2012 Brady-Schuster Award for Outstanding Behavioral Science Research in Psychopharmacology and Substance Abuse, Division 28 of the American Psychological Association.  Dr. Bickel was honored to be the recipient of the 2016 Nathan B. Eddy Award from the College on Problems of Drug Dependence. Dr. Bickel was Editor of the journal, Experimental and Clinical Psychopharmacology, has co-edited five books, and has published over 400 papers and chapters. Dr. Bickel’s work is frequently cited and receives national and international recognition.

 

SABA Award for International Dissemination: Changing the World Through Behavior Analysis: An Exemplary Process of ABA Dissemination in Civil Society and among Governmental/Political Institutions

Abstract:

To make the exhortation "change the world with behavior analysis" a concrete reality, we need the behavior analyst figure to be known, well-estimated and respected by civil society and governmental institutions. At the beginning, we tried to get this approaching the insiders (especially psychologists and educators) to convince them of the goodness of our scientific and evidence-based approach, in order to increase the number of professionals.

Past failures. Unfortunately, to achieve this result we chose to act mainly in universities and public schools, through the publication and spread of experimental research articles and books addressed to psychologists and educators, not to mention all the presentations in congresses and conferences. In time this strategy turned out to be ineffective. In fact, in many countries still nowadays, despite thousands of debates and explanations, only few patients with special needs benefit from ABA treatments, as well as only few companies benefit from performance management, as well as only few hospitals benefit from behavior-based safety, and so on. To demonstrate this, in several countries still there is no law about, or in favor of, behavioral technologies.

A new successful strategy. Starting from the late ‘90s, a small group of ABA practitioners and scientists changed approach in order to get better results in the spread of behavior analysis. They chose to teach ABA to final users rather than to intermediaries (psychologists and educators) and so they started introducing ABA to new categories of professionals as dentists, managers, engineers, medical doctors and industrial safety consultants. The principles and methods of marketing were used to involve new professional categories and, in this way, always more users started to ask to the politicians for more behavior analysis.This unusual strategy demonstrated to be astonishingly better than the previous one. In recent years, in fact, politicians that used to be deaf to the effectiveness proofs brought about by behavior analysts started to care and to pay attention to the demands of professional categories (made by citizens and then voters). Many final users are now demanding for more ABA in their work environment. About this, a list of the actions required to replicate our experience will be presented.

The “ultimate strategy”. Even if the aforementioned marketing-of-a-science tactics are powerful, a faster and more comprehensive strategy it’s in place currently. Our present aim is to influence the state laws writing process in order to change the behaviors of all the stakeholders at the same time. State laws are in fact nothing but conditional statements that, specifying an antecedent, a behavior to be performed, and a consequence (usually a punishment for non-compliance), with the help of prominent judges and politicians could boost a national-level ABA capillary dissemination. Results of this last strategy application will be presented too.

 
FABIO TOSOLIN (A.A.R.B.A. - Association for the Advancement of Radical Behavior Analysis)
 

Fabio Tosolin is the behavior analyst and consultant that since the ‘80s has been introducing, spreading and applying Behavior Analysis and Organizational Behavior Management (OBM) principles both in Italy and Europe. In 1985, he founded his own consulting company, FT&A, that is specialized in Performance Management, Learning Technologies and Behavior-Based Safety (B-BS), for the last of which he’s also a referent of European level. His company counts hundreds of PM and B-BS processes implemented in plants and construction sites in Italy and around the world. He is currently professor of Human Factor in HSEQ Management at the Safety Engineering Master’s Degree course, Faculty of Industrial Processes, at Polytechnic of Milano and president of the Italian Associate Chapter of ABAI, made of both the oldest and largest Italian Behavior Analysis Scientific Societies (AARBA and AIAMC). Since 2003 he’s also chair of the European Scientific Conference on OBM, PM & B-BS, held by AARBA.

 

SABA Award for Enduring Programmatic Contributions in Behavior Analysis: Oregon Research Institute

Abstract:

Founded in 1960, Oregon Research Institute (ORI) is a non-profit, independent, behavioral sciences research center with an international reputation as a leader in research to help people lead healthier lives. ORI scientists embody the belief that the solutions to many of society’s most pressing health and social issues lie in our ability to understand and influence human behavior. ORI researchers apply fundamental behavior analysis and behavior change principles to develop and scientifically evaluate evidence-based interventions to promote health and wellbeing and to prevent and/or treat important behavioral health problems. ORI’s research focuses on (a) promoting healthy child development through interventions to improve parenting skills in at-risk families, improve school environments and instructional practices, and improve peer environments in and outside of school; (b) promoting psychological health through interventions to prevent and treat depression and eating disorders; (c) promoting physical health through interventions to improve diet and exercise throughout the lifespan and to reduce obesity; (d) preventing and treating substance abuse, through interventions focused on nicotine, alcohol, opioids, marijuana, and other drugs, and (e) implementing and disseminating evidence-based behavioral interventions into real-world settings, such as schools, healthcare settings, service agencies, whole communities, and public policy. ORI is funded by research grants from the National Institutes of Health and Institute on Education Sciences, and has 43 scientists and 50 active research projects. ORI is committed to scientific freedom and scientific excellence and provides a collegial and supportive research community for early career scientists and seasoned researchers alike.

 
CAROL METZLER (Oregon Research Institute)
 

Carol Metzler, Ph.D., received her Ph.D. in Clinical Psychology from the University of Oregon. Dr. Metzler is a Senior Scientist and the Science Director at Oregon Research Institute in Eugene, Oregon. As a scientist at ORI, she conducts research on parenting practices and child development, and evaluates the efficacy of family interventions for reducing or preventing behavior problems in children. She is particularly interested in research on promoting a public health framework for improving parenting practices and in evaluating the effects of delivering parenting information through non-clinical technology-based approaches. She is currently involved in projects to develop and evaluate technology-based approaches to providing parents of young children with parenting education and support, through video and the internet, and to integrate these parenting programs into pediatric primary care. In addition, Dr. Metzler is also engaged in efforts to summarize what is known about evidence-based programs for children and families and to investigate how these programs can be effectively moved into practice through better integration of science, practice, and policy. As Science Director at ORI, Dr. Metzler works to build awareness of the research done at ORI, build collaborative partnerships between ORI and other research and practice entities, recruit new scientists to ORI, and ensure that ORI continues to provide an optimally supportive environment for world-class behavioral research.

 
 
 
Symposium #15
CE Offered: BACB/QABA/NASP
Strategies for Teaching Executive Function Skills to Children and Adolescents With Autism
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom A
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Adel C. Najdowski (Pepperdine University)
CE Instructor: Adel C. Najdowski, Ph.D.
Abstract:

In cognitive and developmental psychology, executive function refers to repertoires related to goal-directed behavior such as attention, inhibition, working memory, flexibility, emotional self-regulation, problem solving, organization, planning, and time management; and skills deficits in these areas have been attributed to the frontal cortex of the brain. From a behavioral perspective, all executive functions involve behaviors which should be able to be strengthened using behavioral principles of learning. For example, according to Skinner, self-control involves two repertoires of behavior: (a) the controlled self, involving normal, ongoing behavior and (b) the controlling self, involving behavior one has learned to control normal behavior. Children with autism have been documented to display deficits in executive function skills. This symposium presents recent research related to teaching executive function skills to children and adolescents with autism. The first paper presents the effects of a treatment package on teaching planning skills. The second paper evaluates procedures for teaching adolescents with beginning time management skills, such as making, following, and adjusting their personal schedules. The final paper presents data investigating the effects of procedures for teaching problem-solving skills.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): executive function, planning, problem solving, time management
Target Audience:

BCBAs and other certified or licensed professionals

Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will be able to identify behavioral strategies for teaching planning skills to individuals with autism. 2. Attendees will be able to identify behavioral strategies for teaching time management skills to individuals with autism. 3. Attendees will be able to identify behavioral strategies for teaching problem solving skills to individuals with autism.
 

Addressing Executive Functioning Deficits: Teaching Planning Skills to Adolescents With Autism

VALERIE R. ROGERS (The ABRITE Organization), M. Fernanda Welsh (The ABRITE Organization), Sara O'Brien (The ABRITE Organization), Adel C. Najdowski (Pepperdine University)
Abstract:

It has been demonstrated that many individuals with autism present with significant deficits as it relates to various executive functioning skills. Difficulties with planning in particular have been well documented in the literature; however, little research exists seeking to remedy such deficits in the behavioral repertoire of learners with autism. With the use of a nonconcurrent multiple baseline across participants design, the current paper examines the acquisition of planning skills with adolescents with autism. Participants with little to no planning abilities were taught to identify a desired outcome in relation to a given activity, the steps and materials needed to complete the given activity, his or her progress toward completion of the plan, and to subsequently complete the plan and specified activity across multiple exemplars. Results indicate the acquisition of planning skills by the participants and will be discussed in terms of the utility of the present procedures within research-practitioner settings. Suggestions for future research and interventions for individuals with autism will be provided.

 

Teaching Beginning Time Management Skills to Adolescents With Autism: Making, Following, and Adjusting Schedules

M. FERNANDA WELSH (The ABRITE Organization), Adel C. Najdowski (Pepperdine University), Randi Medeiros (The ABRITE Organization), Jesse Andrew Fullen (Pepperdine University)
Abstract:

A dearth of research exists for teaching adolescents with autism to engage in beginning time management skills. This study used a nonconcurrent multiple baseline across participants design to evaluate the effects of a treatment package consisting of multiple exemplar training, error correction, self-monitoring, and reinforcement for teaching adolescents with autism to make and follow schedules. Results from the first two participants demonstrated that they learned to make, adjust, and follow schedules. During posttraining, performance levels remained high even when various components of the treatment package were removed.

 

Bump Inspector: Teaching Problem-Solving Skills to Children With Autism

ERIN SILVERMAN (University of Southern California), Jonathan J. Tarbox (University of Southern California; FirstSteps for Kids)
Abstract:

This study evaluated the effect of the “Bump Inspector” Treatment Package on conflict resolution skills in children with Autism Spectrum Disorder. Three children diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder, ages 6 and 7, were selected for this study due to prior reports of conflict resolution difficulty and deficits involving flexibility. For this study, a multiple baseline design across participants was used to determine if the intervention increased conflict resolution skills and corresponding actions. Results from the one participant showed completed thus far show that the “Bump Inspector” Treatment Package increased conflict resolution skills in the participant. Findings from the social validity questionnaire revealed that parents of this participant saw clear increases in conflict resolution skills and corresponding action behaviors and that the child seemed to have more courage and independence in the scenarios requiring flexibility.

 
 
Symposium #16
CE Offered: BACB
The High-Probability Instructional Sequence: A Comparison of Procedural Variables
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom B
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Adam Carter (Brock University)
Discussant: Mitch Fryling (California State University, Los Angeles)
CE Instructor: Kimberley L. M. Zonneveld, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The high-probability (high-p) instructional sequence involves the presentation of high-p instructions followed by the presentation of a low-probability (low-p) instruction. Researchers have used this procedure to increase compliance across a variety of behaviours, including academic skills, social skills, medical tasks, and food acceptance. Given the broad applicability of this procedure, it is important to identify the procedural variables within the high-p instructional sequence that produce the most meaningful outcomes. The first presentation will compare 2 iterations of the high-p instructional sequence, high-p with a preferred food on a spoon and high-p with an empty spoon, to increase food consumption. The second presentation will (a) compare the effectiveness ofpraise versus edibles as the consequence for compliance with high-p instructions and (b) determine if the number of high-p instructions can be faded from 3 to fewer instructions. Both papers will be discussed within the context of clinical implications and suggestions for future research.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Graduate students

Teachers and coaches

Behavior Analysts

Learning Objectives:
  1. Describe the variables of the high-probability instructional sequence that influence the effectiveness.
  2. Describe the application of the high-probability instructional sequence to increase food consumption
  3. Describe the application of the high-probability instructional sequence within a multicomponent treatment package.
 

Comparing the High-Probability Instructional Sequence With and Without Food to Increase Food Consumption in Children

(Applied Research)
NANCY LEATHEN (Brock University), Kimberley L. M. Zonneveld (Brock University)
Abstract:

Food selectivity is defined as a child or youth refusing to eat a sufficient variety of foods based on type, texture, or other dimensions (e.g., colour, packaging). It can have a substantial negative impact on family stress, child nutrition and health, and can lead to inappropriate mealtime behaviours. The high-probability (high-p) instructional sequence is a non-intrusive procedure that involves the presentation of three high-p instructions followed by the presentation of one low-probability instruction. To date, only eight studies – with mixed findings – have examined the effectiveness of the high-p instructional sequence to increase young children's consumption of food. Therefore, the purpose of this study is to compare the effectiveness and efficiency of two iterations of the high-p instructional sequence, high-p with a preferred food on a spoon and high-p with an empty spoon, to increase food consumption in two children with autism spectrum disorder and food selectivity using a multielement design within a reversal design.

 

Analyzing Consequences Within the High-Probability Request Sequence for a Child Diagnosed With CHARGE Syndrome

(Applied Research)
CALEB DAVIS (Simmons College), Judah B. Axe (Simmons University)
Abstract:

To replicate and extend previous research on the high probability request sequence, the first research question was: What are the effects of praise versus edibles as the consequence for responses to high-p requests? In a reversal design with a child with CHARGE Syndrome, there was initial but not sustained experimental control demonstrating higher responding with edibles compared to praise. The second research question was: To what extent can high-p requests be faded from 3 to fewer per low-p request? After demonstrating experimental control with 3 high-p requests, an attempt to fade to 2 high-p requests failed. In a final analysis, experimental control was demonstrated by providing varied reinforcement in the form of videos identified in presession preference assessments. In 20% of sessions, IOA was a mean of 99.1% for high-p requests (range, 93.3% to 100%) and 100% for low-p requests. Results are discussed in terms of continually assessing motivating operations.

 
 
Symposium #17
CE Offered: BACB/QABA/NASP
Strategies for Teaching Perspective-Taking Skills to Children With Autism Spectrum Disorders
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom C
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Megan Michelle St. Clair (Halo Behavioral Health)
CE Instructor: Megan Michelle St. Clair, M.A.
Abstract:

This symposium presents recent research related to teaching perspective-taking skills to children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). The first paper analyzes the effects of in-vivo teaching procedures, multiple exemplar training, and a visual perspective teaching procedure in a multiple-probe across participants design to teach children with ASD, with limited language repertoires, to view the visual perspective of others. The second paper presents data on teaching children with ASD the perspective-taking skill of identifying what they and others know and do not know, and to explain how their knowledge was obtained or why it was not obtained via sensory perspective-taking (i.e., seeing, hearing, feeling, tasting, smelling, etc.), within a multiple baseline across participants design. The final paper evaluates the effects of video-based instruction on teaching a generalized problem solving strategy within and across false-belief categories for shared and differing perspective-taking with individuals with ASD in a multiple-probe across participants design.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): cognition, knowing, perspective taking, problem solving
Target Audience:

BCBAs and other certified or licensed professionals.

Learning Objectives: Learning Objective 1: At the conclusion of the first presentation, participants will be able to describe a visual perspective teaching procedure and an effective way to disseminate it. Learning Objective 2: At the conclusion of the second presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe behavior analytic perspective-taking research, to date, in the area of knowing and (2) identify an effective strategy for teaching perspective-taking skills related to identifying what oneself and others know and do not know, and to explain how their knowledge was obtained or why it was not obtained via the application of sensory perspective-taking. Learning Objective 3: At the conclusion of the third presentation, participants will be able to: (1) identify effective strategies for teaching perspective-taking skills and (2) define perspective taking from a behavior analytic perspective.
 

Establishing a Generalized Repertoire of Visual Perspective Taking Skills in Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

JEANNA SHERIDAN (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), Tina Sidener (Caldwell University), April N. Kisamore (Hunter College)
Abstract:

A prerequisite skill related to the development of perspective taking skills is recognizing that others may have access to different visual information, which is known as visual perspective taking (Howlin, Baron-Cohen, & Hadwin, 1999). There is limited behavior analytic research on methods to teach children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) visual perspective taking. The purpose of the present study was to analyze the effects of in-vivo teaching procedures, multiple exemplar training, and a visual perspective teaching procedure in a multiple-probe across participants design to teach children with ASD to view the perspective of others. Four experimenter-defined categories (i.e., line of sight, item appearance, array appearance, and item rotation) were used to teach perspective taking skills. The results demonstrated low levels of visual perspective taking in the baseline conditions with participants quickly demonstrating mastery criterion after intervention was introduced. Interobserver-agreement and procedure integrity data were taken on at least 50% of the sessions across all conditions and were 90% or better. This study contributed to the existing literature by providing more information on procedures for teaching visual perspective taking to children with ASD that have limited language repertoires.

 

Teaching Children With Autism to Identify That Sensing Leads to Knowing

Megan Michelle St. Clair (Halo Behavioral Health), Adel C. Najdowski (Pepperdine University), M. Fernanda Welsh (ABRITE), LAURI SIMCHONI (Halo Behavioral Health), Jesse Andrew Fullen (Pepperdine University)
Abstract:

Perspective-taking skills such as predicting the future behavior of others based upon their beliefs and creating false beliefs in others for the purpose of adaptive deceptive behaviors such as keeping secrets and surprises and bluffing during games requires one to be able to identify what information others know and do not know (e.g., she does not know we are having a surprise birthday party for her, so she thinks nobody remembers her birthday). The current study evaluated the effects of a multiple exemplar training package that included rules, error correction, and reinforcement on teaching children with autism to identify and explain information that is known and unknown to themselves and others based on each individual’s perspective across the five senses (i.e., she knows or does not know because she can or cannot see, taste, feel, hear, or smell the relevant stimulus). Results of this study thus far indicate that the treatment package was effective in teaching the first of three participants to identify known and unknown information of self and others, as well as how such knowledge was obtained or why it was not obtained. Furthermore, generalization across untrained stimuli and people was observed during posttraining.

 

Teaching Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder to Problem Solve Perspective Taking Tasks Using Video-Based Instruction

Catherine Taylor-Santa (Caldwell University), April N. Kisamore (Hunter College), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), Tina Sidener (Caldwell University), Linda A. LeBlanc (LeBlanc Behavioral Consulting LLC), MARYKATE MCKENNA (Hunter College)
Abstract:

The purpose of this study was to assess the effects of using video-based instruction to teach a generalized problem-solving strategy for perspective taking. Specifically, four participants with autism spectrum disorder were taught (a) a rule and when to use it to assist in the identification of shared or differing information and (b) to use that information to respond to perspective taking questions embedded in videos. Multiple exemplars of shared and differing perspective scenarios were used to promote differential responding to shared and differing perspective tasks, and generalized problem solving within and across false-belief categories (i.e., false identity, unexpected location, misidentified object). Responses were assessed during in-vivo probes of false-belief and shared-belief tasks. After learning the problem-solving strategy, all four participants responded correctly to trained and novel shared- and false-belief tasks. Strategy used generalized to within and across category video and in-vivo probes. Generalization was also observed in everyday contexts.

 
 
Symposium #18
CE Offered: BACB
Further Evaluations of Instructive Feedback for Learners With Autism Spectrum Disorder
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: AUT/VBC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Patricia Zemantic (University of Oregon)
CE Instructor: Christopher A. Tullis, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Instructive feedback (IF) is an effective strategy for increasing the efficiency of instruction. When presented within a discrete trial format, prompting and reinforcement are provided based on the learner’s response to primary targets, and no programmed consequences are provided based on the learner’s response to secondary targets. Several variations of IF have been evaluated in the literature and the effectiveness of these variations may relate to the underlying behavioral mechanisms that contribute to the effectiveness of IF. The studies in this symposium will examine the effectiveness of variations of IF and discuss how variations may relate to the mechanisms underlying the acquisition of targets exposed to IF. In the first study, Tullis and colleagues evaluated two arrangements of IF – one in which secondary targets were presented before a praise statement and one in which secondary targets were presented after a praise statement. Kopchak and colleagues examined two forms of IF. In one form, secondary targets and probes shared similar words. In the other form, secondary targets and probe questions did not share similar words. Zemantic and colleagues examined the effect of context by comparing the presentation of secondary targets in an instructional setting and a novel setting.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Instructive Feedback, Skill Acquisition, Verbal Behavior
Target Audience:

The content would be appropriate for practitioners to apply to clinical practice and graduate students.

 
A Comparison of Secondary Target Location in Instructive Feedback Procedures
CHRISTOPHER A. TULLIS (Georgia State University), Ashley Gibbs (Georgia State), Sarah Grace Hansen (Georgia State University), Maddie Butzer (Georgia State University)
Abstract: Instructive feedback (IF) is an effective strategy for increasing the efficiency of targeted instruction. Although effective, the mechanisms underlying the acquisition of secondary targets via IF are unknown. In the current investigation two forms of instructive feedback (IF) were compared to determine if indiscriminable contingencies were responsible, in part, for the acquisition of secondary targets during IF procedures. During teaching, IF stimuli were presented either before or after the praise statement for mastered tacts to two learners with autism spectrum disorder. Across both participants, IF before the praise statement resulted in faster acquisition of secondary targets that were maintained for 16–18 weeks post intervention. These results extend the IF literature by providing evidence that acquisition of secondary targets via IF may at least partially attributed to the occurrence of indiscriminable contingencies.
 

A Comparison of Secondary Targets Procedures to Teach Auditory Tacts to Children With Autism

Kayla Kopchak (Caldwell University), April N. Kisamore (Hunter College), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Regina A. Carroll (University of Nebraska Medical Center Munroe-Meyer Institute), MOLLY JOYCE (Hunter College)
Abstract:

Although typical discrete trial instruction procedures are effective for teaching tacts to children with autism, they are often time consuming. Using a secondary targets procedure can help increase instructional efficiency. The purpose of the current study was to compare the effects of two variations of a secondary targets procedure on the acquisition of auditory tacts by children with autism. In one variation of the procedure, the secondary target expansion phrase and the probe question contained shared features (i.e., similar words). In the other variation, the secondary target expansion phrase and the probe question did not contain shared features (i.e., no similar words). In addition, the emergence of listener and speaker categorization were evaluated. All three participants learned to correctly tact the auditory stimuli (i.e., the primary targets). Participant 1 responded correctly to probe questions for only the shared features condition. Participant 2 responded correctly to probe questions for both the shared features and no shared features conditions. Participant 3 did not respond correctly to probe questions for either of the conditions. Listener categorization scores were higher than baseline levels for all participants following tact training. Speaker categorization scores were higher than baseline levels for Participants 1 and 2.

 

Instructive Feedback During High and Low Demand Contexts for Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

PATRICIA ZEMANTIC (University of Oregon), Tracy Jane Raulston (Penn State), Christine Drew (University of Oregon), Mat C Luehring (University of Oregon), Hannah Barton (University of Oregon), Buket Erturk (University of Oregon), Shaji Haq (Center for Behavioral Sciences, Inc.)
Abstract:

Instructive feedback involves including extra stimuli (i.e., secondary targets) within instructional trials in order to increase the efficiency of instruction. No programmed consequences are provided based on the learners’ response to secondary targets. A number of behavioral mechanisms may play a role in the effectiveness and efficiency of instructive feedback, including the context. The current study evaluated the effect of context on the acquisition of secondary targets taught through instructive feedback in an instructional (high demand) and novel (low demand) context for two children with autism spectrum disorder. Both participants acquired secondary targets when presented in a high demand context when presented with primary targets. However, in the absence of primary targets, the low demand context was more effective and efficient for one participant, whereas the high demand context was more effective and efficient for the other participant. Both participants demonstrated generalized responding to novel therapists and untrained Wh-questions. Responding also maintained during probes conducted 2- and 4- weeks post mastery. Future directions for research and clinical applications of instructive feedback procedures are discussed.

 
 
Invited Paper Session #19
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP

Teaching Safety Skills to Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom EF
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Elif Tekin-Iftar, Ph.D.
Chair: Nicole Heal (Margaret Murphy Center for Children)
ELIF TEKIN-IFTAR (Anadolu University)

Elif Tekin Iftar, Ph.D, is a professor in Special Education at Anadolu University in Turkey. Dr. Tekin-Iftar received her Ph.D. degree in 1999 from Anadolu University. During her doctorate studies she received a scholarship from Turkish Academy of Sciences and pursued part of her doctoral education at University of Kentucky. Dr. Tekin-Iftar received her full professorship in 2009. She served as a director of Research Institute for the Handicapped in Anadolu University between 2007-2014. Her current research and clinical interest include the behavioral treatment of children with autism spectrum disorder and developmental disabilities, single case experimental research methods, and professional development. Dr. Tekin-Iftar received Distinguished Young Scientist Award and Scholarship from Turkish Academy of Sciences in 2003. Dr. Tekin-Iftar has published over 25 international peer-reviewed journal articles, over 20 book chapters, coauthored a book, and served as editors in three books named as Single Case Research Methods in Educational and Behavioral Sciences, Applied Behavior Analysis, and Educating Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder. Her research has been published in Exceptional Children, Journal of Autism and Developmental Disabilities, Journal of Special Education, Research in Developmental Disabilities, and Autism. Dr. Tekin-Iftar currently serves on the editorial board for Exceptional Children. Dr. Tekin-Iftar teaches research methods in education, applied behavior analysis and single case experimental designs at graduate levels. She served as supervisors for many doctoral students in Turkey. She founded Association for Behavior Analysis Turkey (ABATurkey) Chapter as an affiliation of Association for the Behavior Analysis International and she serves as president of ABA Turkey. She founded a graduate program entitled as “Applied Behavior Analysis in Autism” which is the first and only program in its kind in Turkey. She received a postdoctoral scholarship from The Scientific and Research Council of Turkey and visited University of North Caroline in Charlotte for a year. She is the mother of two daughters.

Abstract:

“Safety skills” is an umbrella term consisting of a wide variety of skills. Research has shown that all children have the risk of being injured perhaps fatally because of the intentional and unintentional accidents. Children with autism spectrum disorder face two or three times the risk of injury or abuse compared with those of their same age peers. Ensuring children’s safety is, and should always be, a concern for parents, teachers, and society. However, it is well-documented that teaching safety skills to children with autism spectrum disorder is often neglected both clinically and experimentally. In a relatively new study, it is indicated that (a) although parents and teachers found safety skills instruction important and necessary, they use natural occurrences as teaching opportunities and prevention behaviors rather than providing systematic instruction and (b) neither parents nor teachers have enough knowledge and experience for teaching safety skills (Sirin & Tekin-Iftar, 2016). However, research has shown that when taught systematically, children with autism spectrum disorder could acquire safety skills and perform them over time and across persons and settings. During the presentation, Turkish parents and teachers’ opinions about teaching safety skills to children with autism spectrum disorder and a series of research studies investigating the effectiveness of prompting strategies, videomodelling, and Social Stories in teaching safety skills will be shared with the audience. Implications of these research studies will be discussed.

Target Audience:

Behavior analysts; Psychologists; Special education teachers; Graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the opinions of parents and teachers about safety skills instruction; (2) identify instructional procedures for teaching safety skills to children with autism spectrum disorder; (3) describe the outcomes of research designed to teach safety skills to children with autism spectrum disorder; and (4) describe the implications of research designed to teach safety skills to children with autism spectrum disorder.
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #20
CE Offered: BACB/QABA/NASP

Pain Willingness and Commitment to Valued Living in Chronic Pain

Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Jeannie A. Golden, Ph.D.
Chair: Amy Murrell (University of North Texas)
KEVIN VOWLES (University of New Mexico)
Kevin completed his Ph.D. in clinical psychology at West Virginia University in 2004 and post-doctoral fellowship at the University of Virginia the following year. From 2005 to 2012, he held joint positions in academia and with the National Health Service in the United Kingdom. He has been on faculty in the Department of Psychology at the University of New Mexico since 2012, where he is currently an Associate Professor. His clinical and academic activities have focused on the assessment and effective rehabilitation of individuals with chronic pain. He has published over 80 scientific articles in these areas since 2002, with recent work concentrating on identifying the characteristics of effective treatment and differentiating problematic from non-problematic opioid and alcohol use in those with chronic pain.
Abstract:

Behavioral treatments for chronic pain have amassed an impressive and progressive record of success. As with any area of clinical science, challenges and shortcomings have also been identified. These include difficulties in maintaining clinical effectiveness from clinical trials into large scale implementation efforts, unclear identification of specific intervention components that are clearly linked to improved adaptive outcomes, and lack of clarity with regard to the necessary and active ingredients of effective treatment. Overall, these problems highlight the practical difficulty of translating research into practice. They also helpfully illuminate several potential avenues for improvement, including the need for: (1) a precise delineation of what constitutes treatment success and differentiates it from treatment failure, (2) lucidity in the specification of processes by which treatment is hypothesized to work followed by explicit tests of these hypotheses, and (3) methods to promote the generalization and continuance of within-treatment adaptive behavioral changes to the non-treatment environment. This presentation will describe Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) as one potential model that can aid in helpfully progressing down these avenues. In particular, the potential for augmenting patient behavior that displays an open, accepting, and non-struggling response to pain will be highlighted, as this area perhaps differs most markedly from other approaches where a primary focus may be on better management of pain and distress. Furthermore, the importance of identifying important and meaningful areas of living to pursue with pain present will be evaluated, as this has the potential to naturally promote generalization and longevity of treatment gains. Based on the data presented, it seems feasible for individuals with complex and potentially disabling pain to respond to that pain with acceptance and willingness, choose important areas of living that are of personal relevance, and take effective action to improve quality of life. Importantly, these responses are possible when pain is low, but crucially also when pain is elevated or even at its maximum.

Target Audience:

Clinicians and researchers working with chronic physical health conditions or who are interested in such conditions.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of this presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the relevance of behavioral approaches to the treatment of chronic pain; (2) identify key strengths of this literature and some of the key shortcomings; (3) explain the key treatment processes of the ACT model, the data supporting them, and their applicability to chronic pain treatments; (4) describe treatment outcomes for ACT in relation to both single-subject and within-group data.
 
 
Symposium #21
CE Offered: BACB
Get Up and Move!: Fusing Behavior Analysis and Technology to Increase Physical Activity
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 3/4
Area: CBM/CSS; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Kathryn M. Kestner (West Virginia University)
Discussant: Andrew Bulla (Georgia Southern University - Armstrong )
CE Instructor: Kathryn M. Kestner, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Physical activity is a key factor in numerous important health outcomes; however, research reveals a concerning worldwide trend of physical inactivity (Guthold, Stevens, Riley & Bull, 2018). The World Health Organization (WHO; 2018) estimates that physical inactivity contributes to 3.2 million deaths per year, making it the fourth leading risk factor for mortality. Despite well-publicized recommendations from health organizations (e.g., WHO, Centers for Disease Control) and an increase in access to fitness-related technology (e.g., fitness trackers), these trends of sedentary behavior have not improved since 2001, and more than one in four adults worldwide fail to meet recommended levels of activity (Guthold et al., 2018). On a positive note, advances in technology present an opportunity for behavior analysts to extend behavior-change techniques to an important health-related behavior. Presenters from three different research labs will share outcomes from behavioral interventions employing goal-setting, incentives, and technology for increasing physical activity in adults.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): goal-setting, incentives, physical activity, technology
Target Audience:

The target audience for this symposium is behavior analysts who are researchers or practitioners and are interested in using technology to facilitate interventions with health-related target behavior and/or are interested in using incentive-based interventions for increasing physical activity.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the social significance of physical activity; (2) explain how technology can be used as an intervention component and data-collection method for interventions to increase physical activity; (3) summarize the components of at least one research-supported intervention for increasing physical activity.
 

Examining the Effects of a Fitbit® Treatment Package on the Physical Activity Level and Quality of Life Indices for Adults With Disabilities

KIMBERLY PECK (Western Michigan University), Jessica E. Frieder (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

Globally, only 25% of adults engage in enough regular physical activity (PA) for overall wellness (World Health Organization, 2018). Despite the substantial health benefits of PA, populations with intellectual disabilities (ID) are substantially inactive, even more so than their typically-developing peers. Recent research suggests approximately 90% of adults with disabilities are not active enough (Oviedo et. al, 2017; Ptomey et al., 2017). In consideration of these findings, the goal of the current study was to use a treatment package to increase the daily PA of adults with ID living in community-based settings. The treatment package included a Fitbit® to measure and monitor overall PA, goal-setting, one-on-one “coaching” sessions, and incentives contingent on meeting a pre-established physical activity goal. Due to the extreme sedentary nature of adults with ID, physical health benefits (e.g., weight loss, decreased blood pressure, lower heart rate) from increased PA may take an extended period of time to manifest. As such, any potential increases in quality of life (e.g., affect, mood, preference) that may occur in the meantime will also be measured. Findings of this study, recommendations for ongoing interventions, applications to other settings, and limitations will be discussed.

 

Effectiveness of Contingency Management to Promote Physical Activity in Adults

Jennifer M Owsiany (West Virginia University), KATHRYN M. KESTNER (West Virginia University), Kacey Finch (West Virginia University)
Abstract:

Physically inactive adults are at a greater risk of developing noncommunicable diseases (e.g., stroke, cancer, coronary heart disease, type 2 diabetes) and premature death compared to their physically active peers. Consequently, physical inactivity is one of the leading causes of death worldwide. Previous research has investigated the use of contingency management interventions (e.g., contracts, lotteries) to increase physical activity in adults. In the current study, we randomly assigned participants to one of three groups (i.e., contingency management, noncontingent reinforcement, or self-monitoring). Participants wore Fitbit® Alta HR fitness trackers, which provided data on various indicators of increased physical activity, such as calorie burn, steps, and active minutes. The goal of the current study was to further investigate the use of contingency management interventions to increase physical activity in adults.

 
 
Symposium #22
CE Offered: BACB
Gamifying Climate Change: Making Sustainability Fun
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Fairmont, B2, Imperial Ballroom
Area: CSS; Domain: Theory
Chair: Jonathan Kimball (The Ohio State University)
CE Instructor: Susan M. Schneider, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Gamification is the application of game elements, such as points and competitions, to real life - and behavior analysts did it for years without thinking of it in this manner. When video games became immensely popular, gamification reached whole new scholarly levels as well. Some behavior analysis principles have long been incorporated, and that continues to be the case. Compared to health and education, sustainability gamification is more recent, but just as critical. What can behavior analysts working in sustainability learn from the current state of the field of gamification? What can we contribute? In this symposium, we survey the field, examine some sustainability examples, offer suggestions, and provide perspective on gamification in the context of other sustainability/climate change initiatives.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): climate change, gamification, sustainability
Target Audience:

Behavior analysts at all levels

 
Conservation Clue: Help Us Gamify This Green Behavior Game
WILLIAM L. HEWARD (The Ohio State University), Jonathan W. Kimball (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: Predictable “if-then” behavior-reward contingencies can increase eco- friendly behavior (e.g., “If you ride the bus to work on Wednesdays, then you get a token for a free ride.”). If the presence or absence of the contingency is easily discriminated, however, responding in the contingency’s absence is unlikely (“It’s Thursday—I think I’ll drive.”). Indiscriminable contingencies (IC) offer one way to prevent this problem. ICs have helped young children share toys, select healthy snacks, and stay on task; secondary students maintain improved levels of academic productivity; and adult vocational trainees respond appropriately to feedback from co-workers and supervisors (references available upon request). These studies suggest that the occurrence of sustainable practices (e.g., walking/biking, recycling, unplugging) can be increased by making effective if-then contingencies indiscriminable across responses and environments (e.g., home, work, community). We will describe Conservation Clue, a multidimensional variation of the classic board game that features indiscriminable contingencies. Conservation Clue provides participants with a radically different and enticing “if-then” contingency: If you cannot tell which of several green behaviors, performed exactly where or when, will produce a reward, then the best strategy to optimize reinforcement is to act green in every way, everywhere, all the time.
 
Perspectives on Behavior Analysis, Gamification, and Sustainability
SUSAN M. SCHNEIDER (Root Solutions), Zachary H. Morford (Zuce Technologies)
Abstract: Behavior analysis has always been part of both gamification and sustainability - but generally a small part. How can we up our game, so to speak? Making sacrifices fun is a tall order, but we’ve succeeded in other areas. How can we learn from these examples? Beyond our continuing contributions to gamification lie other questions: Is it likely to be a significant part of sustainable behavior change? Or, given our limited numbers, should we concentrate instead on more traditional behavior analysis interventions, and the incorporation of more behavior analysis into mainstream sustainability? This talk will attempt to summarize the current status of behavior analysis in the much larger interdisciplinary effort supporting behavior change against climate change. How are we behavior analysts doing? How can we do more? Audience suggestions will be welcome.
 
 
Symposium #23
CE Offered: BACB
Transporting the Competing Stimulus Assessment Into Schools and Educational Settings
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom C
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Adam S. Warman (The Faison Center)
Discussant: Jonathan Schmidt (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
CE Instructor: Adam S. Warman, M.Ed.
Abstract:

Competing Stimulus Assessments (CSA) have been used across a number of client populations, behavioral functions, and topographies of problem behavior. The growing body of research, however, has localized most applications and demonstrations of related treatment effectiveness to intensive service delivery settings. As is the case with other behavioral technologies, CSAs should be further examined in settings such homes, community venues, and schools. Such demonstrations may be useful in enhancing the external validity of the CSA and ensuring they can be carried out accurately and efficiently. Utilizing established methodology, we carried out CSAs with multiple adolescents with development disabilities attending a private school for individuals with specialized education needs. Across participants, target behaviors encompassed multiple functions and topographies. CSA procedures were successfully implemented in the educational setting and within the confines of the students’ daily school schedule. Results also included successful identification of competing stimuli for the participants; furthermore, decreased rates of problem behavior followed treatment. Procedures and results will be further discussed in the context of CSA innovations and behavioral assessment treatment transportability.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): automatic reinforcement, competing stimuli, functional assessment, problem behavior
Target Audience:

The target audiences for this talk include practitioners who serve individuals with developmental disabilities in home, community, or school settings; and researchers who are focused on or who are interested in focusing on examining assessment and treatment procedures outside of intensive, more controlled settings.

 
Assessment and Treatment of Aggressive Behavior Maintained by Access to Physical Attention
ELI T. NEWCOMB (The Faison Center), John Adam Wright (The Faison Center), Jennifer Graboyes Camblin (The Faison Center)
Abstract: This presentation will share methodology and data reported from a published case conference (Newcomb, Wright, & Camblin, 2018), as well as lay groundwork for practical considerations and procedural flexibility necessitated by a school setting. Aggression maintained by access to physical attention was examined using two preparations of a functional analysis, after which additional assessment was carried out to identify stimuli that competed with problem behavior. The participant was a 13-year-old boy diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder, who attended a private specialized education facility due to underdeveloped communication skills and problem behavior. At the time of the study his aggression had become more prevalent, unpredictable, and elevated in intensity. Following assessment, a noncontingent reinforcement (NCR) intervention using competing stimuli was implemented to reduce rates of Ted’s increasingly unmanageable aggression. Results indicated that implementation of the NCR intervention was followed by decreased rates, more predictable patterns, and diminished intensity of aggressive behavior.
 

Assessment of Competing Stimuli for the Treatment of Behavior Interfering With School Activities and Services

Jennifer Graboyes Camblin (The Faison Center), Olivia Coppes Culbertson (The Faison Center), Kathryn Herndon (The Faison Center), Paul Christopher Liberante (The Faison Center), Kathryn Littlejohn (The Faison Center), NICHOLAS VANDERBURG (The Faison School), John Adam Wright (The Faison Center), Eli T. Newcomb (The Faison Center)
Abstract:

Many individuals with developmental disabilities experience deficits with communication and social function to such an extent that treatment and services focus heavily communication training. Individuals with developmental disabilities also often experience greater behavioral dysfunction than other populations, which can produce behavior that interferes with skills training, home life, and school activities (Gurney, McPheeters, & Davis, 2006; Dekker, Koot, Ende, & Verhulst, 2002). Due to the extent it interfered with skills training and posed health complications, problem behavior (mouthing, rumination, pica, and motor stereotypy) maintained by automatic reinforcement was assessed for 4 individuals with autism and intellectual disabilities. Competing stimulus assessments were conducted and revealed multiple stimuli that competed with problem behavior, after which related treatment was devised and carried out by educational staff (teachers and teacher assistants) during each participant’s school day. The training of educational staff on assessment and intervention rationale, treatment implementation, and data collection are also discussed.

 
 
Symposium #24
CE Offered: BACB
Advances in Preference and Reinforcer Assessment Research
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Richard B. Graff (May Institute; Western New England University)
CE Instructor: Richard B. Graff, Ph.D.
Abstract: Behavior analysts have developed a rich technology of reinforcer identification; the studies in this symposium seek to add to this knowledge base. In Study 1, preference assessments were conducted with edibles, leisure activities, and social consequences with five individuals with developmental disabilities. Then, high-preference items from each category were combined and evaluated in additional assessments, and significant displacement effects were seen (edibles displaced leisure items, and both edibles and leisure items displaced social stimuli). In Study 2, the efficacy and efficiency of pictorial and video preference assessments were compared with four individuals with developmental disabilities. For three participants, both assessments identified the same highest-preference item, but pictorial assessments were faster to conduct for all participants, making the pictorial assessments more efficient. In Study 3, the interaction and effects of reinforcer arrangements (distributed and accumulated reinforcement) and technology level (high-tech and low-tech) on preference and reinforcer efficacy was evaluated with three children with autism. The results indicated that participants responded at higher rates when reinforcers were provided in an accumulated arrangement regardless of technology level. Participants also preferred to work for reinforcers provided in accumulated arrangements. Taken together, these studies move behavior analysts towards a more complete technology of reinforcer identification.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Displacement, Preference Assessment, Reinforcer Arrangements
Target Audience: Behavior analyst practitioners who work with individuals with autism and developmental and intellectual disabilities.
Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to describe how displacement affects preference hierarchies. Participants will be able to describe the benefits and limitations of using pictorial and video preference assessments. Participants will be able to describe how reinforcer arrangements and the technology level of stimuli affect reinforcer efficacy.
 
The Effects of Category and Choice on Preference
JESSICA GUTFLEISH (New England Center for Children; Western New England University), Allen J. Karsina (New England Center for Children; Western New England University), Diannelys Rojas (New England Center for Children; Western new England University), Hallie Glassman (New England Center for Children; Simmons College), Meaghan Griffin (New England Center for Children; Simmons College), Emily McGrail (New England Center for Children; Simmons College)
Abstract: Behavior analysts must exercise caution when including stimuli from different categories on preference assessments, since some categories of stimuli displace others in a preference hierarchy. In Study 1, paired-stimulus (PS) preference assessments were conducted with five individuals with developmental disabilities to identify high-preference edibles, leisure items, and social stimuli. The two highest-preference items from each category were then assessed in a series of “combined-category” assessments. The results indicated that, when combined on the same assessment, edibles displaced leisure items, and both edibles and leisure items displaced social stimuli. In Study 2, 8-item PS assessments were conducted with pictures that depicted the following options: choice of three high-preference edibles, choice of three high-preference leisure items, choice of three high-preference social consequences, choice of the top-ranked item from each category, three no-choice options (the most preferred edible, leisure item, or social consequence), and a control (no consequence). For all participants, access to an item from the highest-preference category was a more reliable predictor of preference than access to choice. Subsequent progressive ratio reinforcer assessments demonstrated that the most-preferred option on the choice assessment was associated with the highest response rates on reinforcer assessments. Interobserver agreement was above 98% on all dependent measures.
 
Comparing the Use of Video and Pictorial Stimuli in Paired Stimulus Preference Assessments
ELIZABETH HARLAN (New England Center for Children; Western New England University), Richard B. Graff (May Institute; Western New England University)
Abstract: Some researchers have speculated that video-based assessments may be more effective than pictorial assessments for identifying preferences for activities. Since previous studies have not directly compared the results of video and pictorial assessments, there is no data to evaluate the effectiveness and efficiency of video versus pictorial assessments. In this study, four individuals with developmental disabilities participated in 8-item tangible, pictorial, and video paired-stimulus preference assessments, using toys as stimuli. The duration to complete each modality of preference assessment was measured, and Spearman rank-order correlation coefficients were calculated to determine the degree of correspondence between assessment modalities. Reinforcer assessments were conducted to verify if high-preference stimuli functioned as reinforcers. For three participants, pictorial and video assessments identified the same top-ranked item and reinforcer assessments indicated that those items functioned as reinforcers. For the 4th participant, there was little correspondence across modalities. Pictorial assessments were faster to conduct for all participants. These results do not support previous speculations that video-based assessments may be more advantageous than pictorial assessments, since for three of four participants, pictorial and video assessments were equally effective, but pictorial assessments were more efficient. Mean interobserver agreement was above 97% for preference and reinforcer assessments.
 
Examining Effects of Technology Level and Reinforcer Arrangements on Preference and Efficacy
AUDREY N. HOFFMANN (Utah State University; Northern Vermont University-Johnson), Anna Brady (Utah State University; Erskine College), Tyra Paige Sellers (Utah State University; Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
Abstract: Identifying the ways in which reinforcers function optimally is an important consideration for behavioral research. Preference for reinforcers, and how effective reinforcers are, may change depending upon several factors. Two important factors to consider are how reinforcers are arranged and the technology level of the reinforcers used. Reinforcers can be delivered following every response in a distributed manner or they can be delivered following several responses in an accumulated manner. Additionally, leisure items used as reinforcers can be classified according to technology level, for example high- and low-tech items. The purpose of this study was to examine the interaction and effects of reinforcer arrangements (i.e., distributed reinforcement and accumulated reinforcement) and technology level of items (i.e., high-tech and low-tech) on preference and reinforcer efficacy with three children with autism. Participants selected a preferred high- and low-tech item and engaged in academic tasks to earn the items in either accumulated or distributed arrangements. Overall participants responded at higher rates when reinforcers were provided in an accumulated arrangement regardless of whether a high-tech or low-tech item was provided. Participants also preferred to work for reinforcers provided in accumulated arrangements. Interobserver agreement was above 90% on all dependent variables.
 
 
Invited Paper Session #25
CE Offered: BACB

Preparing for a New Role: The School-Based Consultant

Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Fairmont, Third Level, Crystal
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Edward Daly, Ph.D.
Chair: Scott P. Ardoin (UGA Center for Autism and Behavioral Education Research)
EDWARD DALY (University of Nebraska-Lincoln)
Edward J. Daly III, BCBA-D, conducts research on functional assessment methods. He has co-authored numerous chapters and journal articles on this topic. Dr. Daly is Professor of Educational (School) Psychology at the University of Nebraska-Lincoln, where he teaches course work in Applied Behavior Analysis, school-based consultation, and single-case experimental designs.
Abstract:

As schools witness what behavior analysts are capable of doing, they are hiring behavior analysts in increasing numbers to help develop and evaluation interventions with students experiencing behavior and academic problems. In some cases, behavior analysts are delivering direct services, a professional role for which they are well prepared. In a lot of cases, however, schools are calling on behavior analysts to serve as consultants, which is a new role for many of us. A consultant serves in an indirect role by trying to help someone else (e.g., a teacher) help a third party (the student). A consultant typically has no authority over the consultee, but must engage the consultee in such a way that their combined efforts empower the teacher to improve students’ academic achievement and behavioral self-control. The purpose of this presentation will be to help behavior analysts adapt their assessment and instruction/intervention skills to a school-based consultative role. I will present research-based strategies for (a) how to efficiently embed functional assessment principles and practices in the consultation process, and (b) manage the contingencies under which teachers are operating to maximize effectiveness.

Target Audience:

Behavior analysts practicing in schools

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) guide teacher consultees in a strategic, efficient, and structured decision-making process that prioritizes improving academic performance; (2) integrate observational data, basic skill assessment data, work samples, and performance-deficit analyses into the functional assessment process; (3) support teacher implementation of empirically derived treatments through antecedent control strategies and performance feedback.
 
 
Invited Tutorial #27
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
SQAB Tutorial: Using the Past to Predict the Future
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: SCI; Domain: Basic Research
PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP CE Offered. CE Instructor: Sarah Cowie, Ph.D.
Chair: Michael C. Davison (University of Auckland)
Presenting Authors: : SARAH COWIE (The University of Auckland)
Abstract:

Behavior analysis is on the cusp of a major change in the way we think about our most fundamental process: Reinforcement. Whereas the law of effect stipulates that reinforcers control behavior because of their special function in increasing a behavior’s strength, an alternative approach casts reinforcers as stimuli with current value to the organism, but no unique function in changing behavior. Under this approach, behavior is controlled by relations between stimuli, depending on the affordances and dispositions of the organism. This tutorial explores some of the data that has led us to change the way we understand control by current environmental conditions. First, the tutorial examines some of the evidence for prospective control, when reinforcers are absent, or temporally distant, or when reinforcer effects are inconsistent with strengthening. Next, I explore how quantitative models can provide a testable explanation of control by the likely future, as extrapolated from the past. Finally, the tutorial considers the implications of a shift from understanding control in terms of retrospective response-reinforcer pairings to prospection on the basis of the perceived structure of the environment, and argues that in conjunction with quantitative models, prospective control need not invoke an inner organism.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

This talk is aimed at behavior analysts interested in new ways to measure and describe apparently changes in behavior, and/or in new approaches to understanding how reinforcers affect behavior.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) discuss a prospective-control approach to understanding the transaction between behavior and environment, and why this approach might be advantageous in research and practice; (2) discuss some ways to use quantitative models to provide a simple description of apparently complex behaviour; (3) discuss a quantitative model that asserts that behavior comes under control of relations between stimuli (including brief stimuli like reinforcers and behaviors).
 
SARAH COWIE (The University of Auckland)

Sarah Cowie obtained her Ph.D. in 2014 at the University of Auckland, under the supervision of Professor Michael Davison and Dr. Douglas Elliffe. Since graduating with her Ph.D., Sarah’s research has explored how past experience translates into control by the present and the likely future.

Keyword(s): discrimination, prospection, quantitative modeling, reinforcement
 
 
Symposium #28
CE Offered: BACB
Teaching Complex Verbal Behavior to Individuals With Different Ability Levels
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Fairmont, Second Level, International Ballroom
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Ashley Briggs Greer (The Faison School)
CE Instructor: Ashley Briggs Greer, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The papers in this symposium are about teaching complex verbal behavior to individuals with various ability levels. The first paper presents an instructional program aimed at teaching children with autism to understand metaphors. The second paper describes teaching children to mand for information via observational learning. The third paper involves teaching applied behavior analysis to non-ABA professionals.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

ABA practitioners, graduate students, non-ABA professionals, academic researchers (applied researchers)

 

Teaching Children With Autism to Understand Metaphors

GABRIELLE T. LEE (Western University), Sheng Xu (Chongqing Normal University), Huiling Zou (Hainan Normal University), Lina Gilic (State University of New York at Old Westbury), Michelle Lee (Michigan State University)
Abstract:

The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effects of an instruction on the acquisition and generalization of metaphor understanding for children with autism spectrum disorder. Three students (two boys, one girl, 5 to 8 years old) participated in this study. A combination of a multiple probe design across two behaviors and three participants was used. The metaphors were categorized by topography: the metaphors involving physical features and the metaphors involving abstract properties. The instruction consisted of intraverbal training with picture prompts. The results indicated that the instruction was effective to establish the acquisition and generalization of metaphor understanding for the two students who completed the entire study. They also maintained the acquired metaphors up to 2 months following the completion of the instruction.

 
Teaching Preschoolers to Mand for Information
JEANNEMARIE SPECKMAN-KILROE (Fred S. Keller School), Lin Du (Teachers College Columbia University), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Graduate School of Arts and Sciences)
Abstract: The current research investigated whether students would emit mands for information as a function of observing of peers mand information (ask questions) about unfamiliar stimuli. We recruited preschool students with and without disabilities between the ages and 3 and 5 to participate in four different activities. These activities were designed to create opportunities for the students to mand information about unfamiliar pictures and objects. For students who did not emit mands for information, we use a multiple probe design across participants to test the effects of a Peer-Mediated Motivating Operation procedure (PMOP) on the emission of mands for information. In the first experiment, the participants observed the peers ask questions (e.g. What is that?”), receive information from the experimenter, and receive praise and tokens contingent on asking a question. The results show that PMOP increased the number of questions for participants outside of the training sessions in a return to baseline condition. In the second experiment, all conditions remained the same except that question asking only resulted in the inquired information. Results are discussed in terms of where the reinforcement exists for asking questions about unfamiliar things in one’s environment, and whether this truly measures the “need to know”.
 
Testing the Effectiveness of Teacher Training Lectures
LIN DU (Teachers College, Columbia University), Ginger Harms (Fred S. Keller School), Susan Buttigieg (Manhattanville College)
Abstract: Fred S. Keller School is a behavior analytic EI program and preschool for children with and without developmental disabilities from 18 mon to 5 years old. At Keller school, we provided weekly professional training lecture series for our teachers, teacher assistants, and related service providers. The 30 plus lectures covered chapters in Applied Behavior Analysis textbooks (i.e., Cooper, Heron, & Heward, 2007; Greer, 2002; Greer & Ross, 2008) and verbal behavior developmental interventions (protocols) (i.e., auditory matching protocol, face conditioning protocol, voice conditioning protocol). The pre- and post-probes were presented in single-choice questions on Google form. The participants were asked to complete the questions on their smartphones or computers. Those who reached criterion in the first post-probe earned 10 bonus points that they could redeem for backup reinforcers (i.e., come to work late, leave work early, gift cards). We used a delayed pre- and post-intervention design across lecture series. The results so far were promising in that the weekly teacher training lectures improved teacher responses pertaining to behavior analysis.
 
 
Symposium #29
CE Offered: BACB
Explorations of Derived Relational Responding and the PEAK Relational Training System to Training Staff and Advanced Conversational Skills
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD North
Area: VBC; Domain: Translational
Chair: Shravya Srinivas Sanagala (ASU MS ABA program)
CE Instructor: Seth W. Whiting, Ph.D.
Abstract: The present symposium will highlight recent efforts using the PEAK Relational Training System to promote more efficacious training and the use of BST couched to facilitate higher order development of verbal language in individuals with autism diagnoses. The ways in which these training advancements move the science of behavior analysis along will be discussed, and the specific implications as to how PEAK serves as a catalyst for said advancements is addressed.
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): BST, PEAK, RFT, Social Skills
Target Audience: The target audience includes students, practitioners, researchers or faculty of behavior analysis or closely related field.
Learning Objectives: 1. evidence supporting derived relational responding as an operant with individuals with and w/out autism 2. behavior analytic assessment procedures couched in derived relational responding specific to language acquisition 3. modifications to current/existing assessment methodologies in service of efficacy of parent and staff training 4. Implications of derived relational responding and language acquisition on intelligence
 
Standardization of the PEAK Relational Training System Pre-Assessments and Implementation Fidelity
(Service Delivery)
AYLA SCHMICK (Southern Illinois University), Caleb Stanley (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Calculating standardized scores enable clinicians to accurately compare the examinee’s performance against his or her peers and helps provide a more comprehensive assessment and guide to programming. The current study sought to assess the performance of a normative sample to create standardized scores for all four PEAK Relational Training Pre-Assessments (PEAK-DT-PA, PEAK-G-PA, PEAK-E-PA, and PEAK-T-PA). 300 typically developing participants ranging from the ages of 4 to 18 participated in the study. The statistical average of the participants performance on all four pre-assessment and total PEAK score was calculated and then used to create different performance levels based on the standard deviation. Implementation fidelity of the standardized PEAK Pre-Assessment Flip Books was also evaluated during the current study and resulted in 95% implementation fidelity across 60% of assessments conducted.
 
Best Practice Strategies for Implementing PEAK in Messy Environments
(Theory)
MARY GRACE CAVALIERE (Saint Louis University), Alyssa N. Wilson (Saint Louis University)
Abstract: Promoting Emergence of Advanced Knowledge Relational Training System (PEAK; Dixon, 2014, 2015ab, 2016) includes four volumes of direct curriculum instruction: Direct Training, Generalization, Equivalence, and Transformation. Emerging research on PEAK highlights the curriculum’s effectiveness at increasing new skills across academic, emotional, and daily living repertoires. For example, previous research has shown PEAK correlates with IQ and has high convergent validity with expressive and receptive language tests, has high inter-rater reliability, and results in larger treatment gains than treatment as usual. Research has also shown behavioral skills training as an effective modality to train implementation of PEAK. While promising, dissemination efforts have primarily focused on research-driven environments; therefore, providing minimal guidelines for clinicians working in ‘messy’ or uncontrollable environments. Further, little information is available for clinicians on best practice approaches when switching from current programing to a new curriculum. Therefore, the current symposium will discuss the top five lessons learned from implementing PEAK in clinical practice and ‘messy’ environments. Lessons will include dispelling clinical lore around derived relational responding; best practice approaches to enhance cultural change; considerations for using organizational behavior management strategies to ensure staff buy-in; arranging supportive environments to reduce implementation drift; and generalization and maintenance strategies.
 

Using Behavioral Skills Training Within PEAK-DT to Establish Extended Conversational Exchanges in an Adolescent With Autism

(Applied Research)
SETH W. WHITING (Central Michigan University), Naomi Evans (Central Michigan University)
Abstract:

The PEAK-DT curriculum utilizes discrete trial teaching methods to establish a wide variety of basic and verbal skills, but these methods may not be required to teach skills with more advanced learners or to target sporadic missing skills. The purpose of the present study was to examine the effects of a behavioral skills training procedure on extended social interactions which combined skill targets across six PEAK-DT programs.During baseline, a 14 year old boy diagnosed with autism attempted to start a conversation (1), tell a joke (2), and engage in conversations to get to know someone better (3) and talk about what he and a partner were doing (4), completing few steps in each interaction type.Administered sequentially across interaction types, a behavioral skills training intervention consisting of instructions, video modeling, feedback, and rehearsal produced steady acquisition, mastery, and maintenance of all four interaction types.The results demonstrated mastery of responses in PEAK-DT programs 1A- Eye Contact, 6B- Greetings and Farewells, 13O- Intermediate Intraverbals, 14M- Advanced Intraverbals, 14T- Verbal Report: Tacting Behavior, and 14Y- Telling a Joke, suggesting that behavioral skills training may be useful in training sporadic missing skills.

 
 
Symposium #31
CE Offered: BACB
Technologies Effective in Evoking Speech in Non-Vocal Children With Autism
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Lobby Level, Plaza Ballroom AB
Area: AUT/VBC; Domain: Translational
Chair: Smita Awasthi (Behavior Momentum India)
Discussant: Per Holth (OsloMet -- Oslo Metropolitan University)
CE Instructor: Smita Awasthi, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Nearly a quarter of individuals with a diagnosis of autism, remain non vocal-verbal even after 8 years of age (Lord, Risi, & Pickles, 2004; Wodka, Mathy & Kalb, 2013) and those with speech impairments and minimal verbal skills have less favorable outcomes in life (Anderson,2007). A 6-year 8 months study (2010-2016) with children with autism (n=126) was successful in inducing 7 first instances of speech in 105 (83%) of the participants, Awasthi (2017), using Mand and Intraverbal Training procedures. Drawn from this large cohort study, the first 3 studies in this symposium offer newer perspectives on the technologies that minimize the number of children remaining non-vocal, and reviews its effect on older non-vocal children. Details on the form of 734 first speech instances as words and syllables are also discussed. The fourth study, building upon previous research from behavioral sciences and Speech Language Pathology literature Presents video self-monitoring to improve procedural integrity in speech production training.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Intraverbal Training, Mand Trainiing, Speech Production, Video Self-monitoring
Target Audience:

Behavior Analysts and Speech Language Pathologists

Learning Objectives: 1. Mand Training protocols to induce speech production in non-vocal children with autism 2. Intraverbal training protocols to induce speech production in non-vocal children with autism 3. Classifying forms of speech and planning additional interventions based on form of speech data 4. Improving treatment integrity in training speech production using video modelling
 

The Role of Sign Mand Training and Intraverbal Training in Inducing First Instances of Speech in 126 Children With Autism

(Applied Research)
SMITA AWASTHI (Behavior Momentum India), Karola Dillenburger (Queen's University Belfast)
Abstract:

The current study spanning 6 years and 8 months, reviews the technologies developed for the emergence of speech in non-vocal children with autism and examines the effectiveness of sign mand training and intraverbal training and the role of stimulus stimulus pairing and motivating operations in inducing first instances of speech in non-vocal children on the autism spectrum. A total of 126 non-vocal children between the ages 1.4 years to 13.5 years participated in 4 experiments that used delayed non-concurrent multiple baseline design across subjects. The technologies were effective in inducing first instances of speech in 83% participants. The time to vocalization, vocals across operants, type of vocal emergence, age of vocalization and the relative successes of the technologies used are explored.

 

An Analysis of First 735 Speech Instances in 105 Children With Autism

(Applied Research)
SRIDHAR ARAVAMUDHAN (Behavior Momentum India), Smita Awasthi (Behavior Momentum India), Karola Dillenburger (Queen's University Belfast)
Abstract:

A 6-year 8 months study (2010-2016) with children with autism (n=126) was successful in inducing 7 first instances of speech in 105 (83%) of the participants (Awasthi, 2017). This retrospective study examines a) the form of speech emergence (syllables, word approximations, words) in this large cohort and b) the form of emergence under different stimulus conditions. A total 735 first instances of speech were recorded (first 7 vocals of each participant). Of these, initial vocals emerged as words in 341 instances (46%) and as word approximations or syllables in 394 (54%). When speech emerged as mands, 66% were words and only 34% were word approximations or syllables. The percentages were 57% and 43% respectively for intraverbal fill ins. With part echoic-part mands, only 19% were words and 81% were word approximations or syllables. Sounds that started with /b/, /m/, /p/, /c / /k/ and /o/ accounted for 54% of the first instances of speech. These results suggest a pattern of speech emergence in children with a diagnosis of autism undergoing behavioral interventions for speech emergence. Identifying, recording and classifying the type of emergence could help with clinical decision making for further interventions and serve as a starting point for new lines of research.

 

Inducing First Instances of Speech in Older Children With Autism Using Mand and Intraverbal Training

(Applied Research)
RAZIA ALI (Behavior Momentum India), Smita Awasthi (Behavior Momentum India), Karola Dillenburger (Queen's University Belfast)
Abstract:

Non-vocal-verbal children with Autism, aged between 1.8 years to 13.5 years participated in a large cohort study (n=126) spanning 6 years and 8 months, that was successful in inducing first instances of speech using mand and intraverbal training procedures in 105 (83%) participants, Awasthi (2017). Of these, 7 were older children with autism (8y 2m to 13y 5m). Of these 6 acquired first instances of speech while 1 left the study thirty weeks into intervention. Vocals emerged for 3 with mand training alone, 2 with delayed addition of intraverbal training and for 1 with simultaneous introduction of both. Of the 6 who were successful, the first speech instance emerged within 30 days of intervention with 4 but took more than 150 days with 2 others. The mean days to acquisition of all 7 instances of speech was 181 days (range 58 days to 359 days) taking an average of 25 days/ vocal. A recast of their data in 2 non-concurrent, delayed, MBL graph format confirms the effectiveness of these interventions in inducing first instances of speech in older non-vocal children with autism.

 
Using Video Self-Monitoring to Promote Staff Performance and Procedural Integrity: Applications to Speech Production Training
(Applied Research)
LINA M. SLIM-TOPDJIAN (ASAP - A Step Ahead Program, LLC), Lina M. Slim-Topdjian (ASAP - A Step Ahead Program, LLC), Tamara S. Kasper (The Center for Autism Treatment)
Abstract: Interprofessional collaboration to improve procedural integrity of speech production for learners with autism with limited vocal repertoires is essential to effective and efficient intervention programming (Brodhead, 2015; Cardon, 2017; Cox, 2012; Garbacz, et al., 2016; Griffin, 2017). It is within the scope of practice of speech-language pathologists (SLP) to assess and develop interventions addressing speech production (ASHA.org). An interprofessional collaborative approach to intervention between speech-language pathologists and behavior analysts will enhance staff performance during speech production training and promote effective learner outcome. This presentation examines the effectiveness of a Staff Training Procedure (STP), consisting of Video Self-Monitoring (VSM), Performance Feedback (PF) and Reflection (R) on sustained and generalized teacher performance and Procedural Integrity, on two Dependent Variables – application of the Learn Unit (LU) and Rate of Effective Instruction (ROI). Results are in support of the literature (DiGennaro-Reed et al., 2010; Gartmeier et al., 2008; Greer et al., 2008; Jansen et al., 2008; LeBlanc et al. 2005; Lerman, et al., 2008; Pelletier et al., 2010) that VSM and PF may enhance teacher/therapist performance and sustainability of procedural integrity. VSM and PF may be an effective skill acquisition procedure to implement during speech production training to improve procedural integrity.
 
 
Symposium #32
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Applications of Contingency Management to Promote Healthy Behavior Change
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Alpine 1/2
Area: BPN/EAB; Domain: Translational
Chair: August F. Holtyn (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
Discussant: Shrinidhi Subramaniam (California State University, Stanislaus)
CE Instructor: Shrinidhi Subramaniam, Ph.D.
Abstract: Many chronic health conditions could be prevented, delayed, or improved through healthy behavior change. However, promoting and maintaining health behaviors can be challenging, particularly when reinforcement for an unhealthy choice (e.g., drug use) is available immediately and benefits of a healthy choice (e.g., drug abstinence) are delayed. Contingency management interventions, which arrange for the direct and immediate reinforcement of therapeutically important target behaviors, have been highly effective in promoting a wide range of health behaviors in diverse populations. The presentations delivered in this symposium will cover recent applications of contingency management in the treatment of chronic health problems. Specific topics will include treatment of opioid and cocaine use disorder in chronically unemployed adults, use of a smartphone-based approach to promote adherence to antiretroviral medications in people living with HIV, examination of individual differences in response to treatment for cocaine use disorder, and evaluation of cardiac rehabilitation participation and hospital utilization among low-income cardiac patients. In sum, this symposium offers an overview of interventions that apply behavior analytic principles to promote healthy behavior change.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): contingency management, health, incentives
Target Audience: Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the symposium, participants will be able to: (1) describe how operant conditioning can be used to promote therapeutic behavior change; (2) identify key features of contingency management interventions; (3) discuss recent applications of contingency management to promote healthy behavior change.
 
A Long-Term Treatment for Drug Addiction and Unemployment: Interim Results
(Applied Research)
AUGUST F. HOLTYN (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Kenneth Silverman (Johns Hopkins University)
Abstract: Poverty, unemployment, and drug addiction are co-occurring problems. This ongoing study is evaluating whether abstinence-contingent wage supplements can promote drug abstinence and employment in chronically unemployed adults with opioid use disorder. In Phase 1 (3 months), participants can earn up to $200/week for engaging in job-skills training. To promote drug abstinence, participants must provide opiate- and cocaine-negative urine samples to maintain maximum pay. In Phase 2 (1 year), participants are randomly assigned to receive Individual Placement and Support (IPS) supported employment (IPS Only) or IPS with abstinence-contingent wage supplements (IPS + ACWS). Participants in the IPS + ACWS group can earn up to $320/week for maintaining opiate- and cocaine-abstinence and for seeking and maintaining employment. Participants complete assessments every 30 days throughout Phases 1 and 2. Interim results show that participants in the IPS + ACWS group provided significantly more opiate- and cocaine-negative urine samples, and were significantly more likely to gain employment than participants in the IPS Only group. This intervention could be an effective long-term treatment for drug addiction and unemployment.
 
Increasing Adherence to Life-Saving Medicine with Contingencies and Technology
(Applied Research)
HAILY TRAXLER (Western Michigan University), Amanda Devoto (Western Michigan University), David William Sottile (Western Michigan University), Anthony DeFulio (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Antiretroviral therapy (ART) improves life expectancy and quality of life for individuals living with HIV. ART adherence of >95% drastically decreases the likelihood of transmission to others, but many people with a history of drug use do not maintain this level of adherence. The purpose of this study was to develop a mobile contingency management (CM) intervention for promoting medication adherence in people with a history of drug use. Fifty participants with a history of opioid or cocaine use were enrolled in the study for six months and randomly assigned to either a control (n=25) or treatment (n=25) group. Treatment group participants received a smartphone loaded with a CM intervention app that allowed for (1) direct observation of medication consumption through video selfies, (2) easy tracking of incentive earnings, (3) easy access to adherence-related resources, and (4) a dosing reminder texting system. The proportion of individuals who achieved 95% adherence increased over time in the treatment group and decreased over time in the control group, and was significantly different in the final study month (55% vs. 19%; p=0.015). Usage data showed high levels of intervention engagement and correct usage, and self-reports showed a high level of intervention acceptability.
 

Baseline Characteristics and Initial Abstinence During Contingency Management Among Methadone Patients With Cocaine Use Disorder

(Applied Research)
MAGGIE SWEENEY (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Tanyaradzwa Chikosi (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Tyrone Scales (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Kelly Dunn (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Maxine Stitzer (Behavioral Pharmacology Research Unit)
Abstract:

Contingency management (CM) promotes drug abstinence using monetary incentives contingent upon drug negative urine samples, but only about half or fewer of substance users exposed to CM respond by initiating abstinence. Thus, there is a need to understand individual differences in abstinence initiation. We are conducting a randomized, placebo-controlled trial evaluating whether the medication bupropion (Wellbutrin®) enhances response to CM for cocaine abstinence among methadone patients with cocaine use disorders. Data collection for the effects of medication is ongoing, but we have conducted preliminary analyses to determine whether individuals who initiate early abstinence differ systematically from individuals who fail to initiate early abstinence. Thus far, 25% of the sample achieved six consecutive cocaine-negative urines within the first six weeks of CM (i.e., prior to randomization; early abstainers). Early abstainers were not distinguishable from other participants according to cocaine use disorder severity, demographics, or performance on neurocognitive assessments. Early abstainers showed significantly greater proportion of cocaine-negative urine samples post-randomization relative to those who did not initiate early abstinence. These data emphasize that considerable and persistent differences exist in response to CM. In addition, cocaine use disorder severity, demographics, and other baseline characteristics may be insufficient to predict early abstinence during CM.

 

Increasing Cardiac Rehabilitation Participation Among Medicaid Enrollees: Effects on Hospital Utilization

(Applied Research)
DIANN GAALEMA (University of Vermont), Eline van den Broek-Altenburg (University of Vermont), Stephen T. Higgins (University of Vermont), Phillip Ades (University of Vermont)
Abstract:

Attendance at cardiac rehabilitation significantly reduces the risk of morbidity and mortality following a cardiac event. However, certain populations of patients, such as lower-socioeconomic status patients, are unlikely to attend or complete the recommended course of rehabilitation. In a clinical trial, 130 participants were randomized to either usual care control or to earn incentives on an escalating schedule for completing up to 36 outpatient rehabilitation sessions. Incentivized participants completed significantly more sessions of cardiac rehabilitation and were twice as likely to complete the program. In this secondary analysis of the trial, we estimated the impact of the intervention on ED, Inpatient and Outpatient expenditures, number of visits and length of stay (LOS). Group differences were evaluated 12 months after patients’ qualifying event. Expenditures were modeled using a two-part model (TPM), since we expected that the probability of incurring any expenditure was independent of the amount of expenditure; number of visits and LOS were modeled by using negative binomial regressions. Models controlled for sociodemographic factors, smoking status, and severity of illness. Preliminary results indicate that the intervention group had, compared to the control group, lower mean expenditures for ED and outpatient, but not inpatient services.

 
 
Symposium #33
CE Offered: BACB
Evaluation of Antecedent-Based Manipulations in Applied Behavior-Analytic Feeding Interventions
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 1/2
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Bethany Hansen (Munroe Meyer Institute )
Discussant: Melanie H. Bachmeyer (University of North Carolina Wilmington)
CE Instructor: Bethany Hansen, Ph.D.
Abstract: Feeding disorders can range in severity and can negatively impact a child’s nutrition and growth (Piazza, & Carroll-Hernandez, 2004). Various factors (e.g., complex medical histories, oral motor deficits) can contribute to the development and maintenance of feeding difficulties. ABA-based interventions have the most empirical support for the assessment and treatment of pediatric feeding disorders (Volkert & Piazza, 2012). These ABA-based interventions include antecedent manipulations, such as demand fading (Dolezal, 2006) and utensil manipulation (Wilkin et al., 2014), and consequence-based strategies, such as escape extinction (Bachmeyer et al., 2009). The purpose of the current symposium is to present four studies which investigate a variety of antecedent manipulations as treatment for feeding disorders. The first will compare the effects of three utensil manipulations (i.e., upright-spoon, Nuk, flipped-spoon) and evaluated their effects on oral-motor skills. The second will investigate whether an alternative bite placement can compensate for oral motor deficits and will review effective interventions for increasing lip closure during feeding. The third will evaluate demand fading across several dimensions (i.e., bite placement, bolus size, bite quantity) with and without escape extinction. The fourth will examine whether food preferences change over the course of intervention and discuss implications as possible antecedent manipulations.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): antecedent manipulation, escape extinction, feeding, oral motor
Target Audience: Clinicians Researchers Students
Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will be able to identify at least 3 different dimensions that demand fading can occur across. 2. Attendees will be able to discuss at least one treatment aimed to improve lip closure. 3. Attendees will be able to identify at least 3 utensil manipulations that can be used as antecedent strategies.
 

Further Evaluation of Utensil Manipulation During Initial Treatment of Pediatric Feeding Disorders

VIVIAN F IBANEZ (University of Florida), Kerri P. Peters (University of Florida), Jovanie St. Paul (University of Florida; Florida Autism Center), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
Abstract:

Children with feeding disorders may pack or expel food when they lack the oral-motor skills, the motivation, or both to swallow. Utensil manipulation such as presenting bites on the tongue with a Nuk or flipped spoon is a treatment that researchers generally implement after these behaviors emerge. One exception is Wilkins et al., (2014) because they implemented utensil manipulation during initial treatment of pediatric feeding disorders. In the current study, we extended previous utensil-manipulation studies by comparing the effects of (a) upright-spoon presentation; (b) Nuk presentation; and (c) flipped-spoon presentation on 2 product measures of swallowing, 15- and 30-s mouth clean, and expulsion during the initial treatment of feeding disorders with 5 children. We also monitored lip closure during upright-spoon presentation and following bite deposit in all conditions to evaluate whether utensil manipulation corresponded with improvements in this oral-motor skill. Nuk presentation produced the highest levels of 15-s mouth clean and the lowest rates of expels relative to upright-spoon presentation and flipped-spoon presentation across children. We discuss the data in terms of potential reasons why utensil manipulation improved feeding behavior and how measures of oral-motor skills might predict the necessity of utensil manipulation during initial treatment.

 
An Examination of Food Preferences Before and After Treatment for a Pediatric Feeding Disorder
JASON R. ZELENY (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Cathleen C. Piazza (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Valerie M. Volkert (Marcus Autism Center; Emory School of Medicine), Vivian F Ibanez (University of Florida), Jaime Crowley (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Caitlin A. Kirkwood (Center for Pediatric Behavioral Health, University of North Carolina Wilmington)
Abstract: Exposure to noxious stimuli in the context of eating results in avoidance behavior in nonhuman animals (Garcia & Kellog, 1966), which may be the same mechanism by which feeding disorders develop in children. However, little is known about the food preferences of children with a feeding disorder and medical diagnoses. Therefore, we set out to identify whether intervention for the feeding disorder results in changes in preferences for foods as a function of exposure. In the current investigation, we evaluated whether the food preferences of children with feeding disorders changed over the course of intervention. We conducted repeated free- and random-choice preference assessments with foods to which we either exposed or did not expose children with a feeding disorder and medical diagnoses during clinical treatment. Responding was relatively equivalent for exposure and nonexposure foods throughout the preference assessments, suggesting that preferences for foods did not change due to exposure during treatment.
 

Demand Fading Across Dimensions With and Without Escape Extinction in the Treatment of Pediatric Feeding Disorders

CHEYENNE DANIEL (University of North Carolina Wilmington; Center for Pediatric Behavioral Health), Melanie H. Bachmeyer (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Caitlin A. Kirkwood (Center for Pediatric Behavioral Health; University of North Carolina Wilmington), Connor Sheehan (University of North Carolina Wilmington; Center for Pediatric Behavioral Health), Erika Winnie (University of North Carolina Wilmington; Center for Pediatric Behavioral Health )
Abstract:

Previous literature supports the use of demand fading in conjunction with differential reinforcement of alternative behavior to increase food consumption and mitigate potential emotional responding often observed in escape extinction of inappropriate mealtime behavior (Dolezal, 2006). However, demand fading can occur across many dimensions (e.g., bite placement, bolus size, bite quantity; Kerwin Ahearn, Eicher, & Burd, 1995; Knox, Rue, Wildenger, Lamb, & Luiselli, 2012; Penrod, Gardella, & Fernand, 2012). It is unclear which dimension is the most effective and efficient to fade along to increase consumption and decrease inappropriate mealtime behavior. We used a combined multielement and reversal design to assess the effects of demand fading across bite placement and bolus size plus differential reinforcement of alternative behavior, with and without escape extinction, on compliance and inappropriate mealtime behavior. So far, results indicated that compliance increased across both demand fading dimensions only after we added escape extinction. Initial rates of inappropriate mealtime behavior were lower across both demand fading dimensions with escape extinction compared to escape extinction alone, suggesting that demand fading can help attenuate some potential side effects of escape extinction. Implications of incorporating demand fading into escape extinction are discussed.

 

Increasing Lip Closure and Decreasing Biting on the Spoon in a Child With Autism and 100% Gastrostomy Tube Dependency

HOLLY M NEY (Clinic 4 Kidz), Meeta R. Patel (Clinic 4 Kidz)
Abstract:

The clinical significance of lip closure as it relates to pediatric feeding disorders has not yet been empirically evaluated. From an oral motor perspective, in typically developing infants, lip closure helps to keep food within the mouth, and the skill becomes more efficient as the child develops (Carruth & Skinner, 2002). Unfortunately, this behavior does not always emerge in children with feeding disorders, as they do not follow an age-typical eating progression. This may result in an “open mouth posture” when depositing food. It is unclear whether this behavior is actually an avoidance response or a result of limited oral motor skills. For children with limited oral motor capabilities, this may also result in higher levels of expulsion and/or packing (Wilkins et al., 2014; Sharp, Harker, & Jaquess, 2010). Previous researchers have demonstrated that antecedent manipulations such as an alternative bite placement on the middle of the tongue may compensate for these deficits (Girolami, Boscoe, & Roscoe, 2007). However, bite placement alone does not necessarily address the issue of poor lip closure. Therefore, increasing lip closure may be an alternative antecedent manipulation that may also compensate for a lack of oral motor capabilities. In the current study, we successfully increased lip closure and decreased biting on the spoon in a 6-year old boy with a feeding disorder using physical guidance and fading. As a result of this manipulation, we were able to increase oral intake and decrease tube feedings.

 
 
Symposium #34
CE Offered: BACB
Equivalence Class Formation and Errorless Learning: Theory and Application
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom A
Area: DDA/EAB; Domain: Translational
Chair: Russell W. Maguire (Simmons College)
Discussant: Julian C. Leslie (Ulster University)
CE Instructor: Julian C. Leslie, Ph.D.
Abstract:

This symposium will address advanced topics in the stimulus control of behavior in the experimental and applied domains. All presentations, two experimental and two applied, investigated how a variety of stimulus conditions impacted the formation of stimulus classes under. The first presentation manipulated the physical properties of stimuli to form generalized equivalence classes (money equivalences) to induce new applied repertoires (purchasing skills) that emerged in novel settings. The second presentation compared contingent and non-contingent reinforcement during errorless instruction and determined that the influence of a “hidden contingency” accounted for errorless learning in the absence of contingent reinforcement. The third presentation evaluated different training modalities on the subsequent formation of equivalence classes. The results suggested that stimulus control topography coherence theory may require revision. Finally, the fourth presentation investigated whether or not prompts used during training entered into equivalence classes and expanded those classes. The results indicated that class-specific prompts became members of relevant classes and could be used to efficiently expand those classes. The outcomes of these studies are discussed in terms of the development of novel forms of stimulus control and improving the efficacy of instruction of complex behavior.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Errorless Instruction, Stimulus Equivalence
Target Audience:

Graduate students conducting research in the areas of complex stimulus control and derived relational responding; Individuals designing instruction for children with and without autism and developmental disabilities,

Learning Objectives: 1. Describe the defining properties of stimulus equivalence; 2. Define stimulus control topography coherence theory; 3. Explain how stimulus equivalence and stimulus control topography coherence theory can be applied to instruction.
 
Using A Generalized Equivalence Class Strategy to Teach Functional Money Skills
(Applied Research)
MEGAN BREAULT (Realizing Children's Strengths Learning Center; Simmons University), Russell W. Maguire (Simmons College), Christina M. King (Realizing Children's Strengths Learning Center; Simmons University), Colleen Yorlets (Realizing Children's Strengths, Behavioral & Educational Consulting; Simmons University)
Abstract: A generalized equivalence class is demonstrated when reflexive, symmetrical, and transitive relations emerge among stimuli that are perceptually disparate, and others that are perceptually similar to the members of the base equivalence class. In this study, a participant with autism learned to match coins (B) and items to be purchased (C) and to price tags (A). After three-member classes were established, tests determined whether untrained but physically similar items (C’) entered into the established class, thus expanding the class beyond the original three members. While equivalence classes formed, we found incomplete inclusion of the novel, physically similar items (C’). A second systematic replication will seek to produce complete inclusion of the novel but physically similar items (C’) into the established classes by systematically manipulating those physical properties. The results of these studies are discussed in terms of procedures that may yield a variety of generalized equivalence classes (i.e., minimally, partially and fully elaborated).
 
Learning in Stimulus Fading by Response-Contingent Reinforcement and by Response-Contingent Stimulus Change
(Basic Research)
MARGOT BERTOLINO (University of Lille), Vinca Riviere (University of Lille), Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: This experiment explored the influence of the reinforcement contingency on the acquisition of all discriminations in a stimulus fading (SF) protocol by studying two conditions. In the stimulus fading condition (SF) contingent reinforcement was used throughout the SF protocol. In the yoked control condition (YC) non-contingent reinforcers were presented through the protocol. In both protocols, a participant had to learn up to eight increasing difficult discriminations arrayed along a dimension of luminance difference. All eight discriminations were acquired by 18 of 20 in the SF protocol and 2 of 20 in the YC protocol. Of the 18 in the YC protocol who did not learn all eight discriminations, many of intervening discriminations were acquired even though no contingency of reinforcement was active. When errors were considered, very few occurred during the SF protocol (errorless learning) while many more occurred during the YC protocol. Thus, while the contingency of reinforcement played a significant role in learning in stimulus fading, a “hidden” contingency– response produced stimulus change - was responsible for the learning of the discriminations in the absence of the contingency of reinforcement, and non-contingent reinforcement impeded the acquisition of the discriminations. Since response-produced stimulus change is present in all fading protocols, it could also influence discrimination learning in fading, regardless of procedural variation. Finally, failures in stimulus fading might also define a participant’s differential threshold for luminance differences.
 

Training Modality and Equivalence Class Formation: A Test Of Stimulus Control Topography Coherence Theory

(Basic Research)
Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York), DEBRA PAONE (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center)
Abstract:

This experiment explored how training influenced the formation of 3-node 5-member equivalence classes during the simultaneous protocol. The baseline relations were established concurrently (CONC) or serially (SER) on a trial and error basis, or serially and “errorlessly” with a constructed response matching to sample procedure (CRMTS). After training, test blocks were administered to measure class formation. Test blocks trials contained all baseline relations and probes for symmetry, transitivity, and equivalence. The error percentages while acquiring the baseline relations were highest during concurrent training, lower during serial training, and lowest during constructed response training. Yet, similar percentages of participants formed classes in each training condition. Thus, the likelihood of equivalence class formation under the simultaneous protocol was not influenced by training modality or prevalence of errors during baseline acquisition. In addition, transient stimulus control topographies that emerged during training did not subsequently resurge during testing, thus, their resurgence did not account for failed class formation. Because the error and resurgence findings were not consistent with stimulus control topography coherence theory, it might have to be revised to accommodate to the data reported in this experiment.

 
The Inclusion of Prompts in Equivalence Classes
(Applied Research)
SIMONE VILAS BOAS PALMER (Simmons College and Crossroads School), Russell W. Maguire (Simmons College), Karen M. Lionello-DeNolf (Assumption College), Paula Ribeiro Braga Kenyon (Trumpet Behavioral Health)
Abstract: Sidman (2000) posited that equivalence relations may include all elements of a conditional discrimination (e.g., sample and comparison stimuli, responses, and reinforcers). Research has verified this outcome. However, establishing conditional discriminations may involve the use of supplementary stimuli, called prompts, to occasion the correct responding. To date the question of whether or not prompts may enter into the relevant equivalence class has not be answered. Experiment 1 taught graduate students visual-visual matching-to-sample relations with arbitrary stimuli. Initially, the S+ stimulus on each trial was highlighted using a class-specific prompt (e.g., colors: class 1 = blue; class 2 = red; class 3 = yellow). Contingent on correct responding the prompt was systematically faded until six conditional discriminations were acquired, in the absence of the color prompt (A1-B1; A2-B2; A3-B3; A1-C1; A2-C2; and A3-C3). Following this training, testing documented the formation of 3-three member equivalence classes. Identity matching-to-sample training was then conducted, again using the color prompts (D-D). Subsequent testing revealed that the class-specific prompts (colors) became members of relevant equivalence class, established during training and testing and expanded the classes to four members. Implications for teaching students with developmental disabilities and increased efficacy of instruction are discussed.
 
 
Symposium #36
CE Offered: BACB
Advances in Discounting Methods, Understanding, and Analytic Techniques
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich E-G
Area: EAB/BPN; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: David J. Cox (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
Discussant: Suzanne H. Mitchell (Oregon Health & Science University)
CE Instructor: David J. Cox, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Delay and probability discounting refer to the devaluation of an outcome as a function of the delay or probability with which the outcome occurs. Discounting rates inform researchers how people make decisions and have been shown to differ between individuals with unhealthy patterns of behavior and control groups. But, everyday choices are not devoid of context and many questions remain about what choice is sensitive to across contexts. This series of talks examines how discounting can be influenced by one’s previous history and current state of access to the commodity under consideration. In addition, these talks highlight novel discounting methodology and data analytic approaches that may allow researchers to better understand what discounting looks like across different groups. Populations discussed will be women with food insecurities, MTurk participants, and the classic undergraduate student. Topics discussed will be amount/delay sensitivity to alcohol; how the size of one’s bank account and intermixing gains and losses influences discounting; and classic population comparisons in discounting rates. Together, the talks that comprise this symposium highlight advances in: methods for measuring discounting, group differences in discounting, and analytic techniques to understand discounting.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): behavioral economics, behavioral pharmacology, delay discounting, probability discounting
Target Audience:

Graduate students in behavior analysis; Behavior analysts working in feeding; behavior analysts working with substance abuse populations

Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to describe the standard methodology for producing discounting data. Participants will be able to describe how discounting differs between clinical and non-clinical populations. Participants will be able to describe how methods for gathering and analyzing data can influence discounting outcomes.
 

Delay and Probability Discounting for Food and Money Differs in Women With Food Insecurity

LUIS RODRIGUEZ (Idaho State University), Erin B. Rasmussen (Idaho State University), Dante Kyne-Rucker (Idaho State University), Maria Wong (Idaho State University), Katie Martin (Idaho State University)
Abstract:

Food insecurity, or inconsistent access to foods that meet nutritional needs, has been linked to delay discounting for money, a behavioral measure of impulsivity. The purpose of the present study was to examine differences in delay and probability discounting for food and money outcomes in women with varying levels of food insecurity. Ninety-two women were recruited from a community sample. Participants completed delay and probability discounting tasks for food and money, food security measures, and measures of demographic and health-related variables. Results revealed that food insecure individuals showed significantly higher rates of delay discounting for both food and money compared to food secure individuals. No significant differences were found with probability discounting. These results indicate food insecure individuals are relatively more impulsive for food and money than those of food secure status but not necessarily different in risk-taking. In addition, impulsive behavior may be an underlying mechanism of obesity-related health outcomes in food insecure populations.

 
Gain-Loss Sequence Effects and Asymmetry in Delay and Probability Discounting
GIDEON NAUDE (University of Kansas), Allyson R Salzer (University of Kansas), Derek D. Reed (University of Kansas)
Abstract: The sign effect is a well-documented phenomenon that describes the tendency for individuals to differentially discount gains and losses. In the present investigation, we examined the effects of temporal sequencing on delayed and probabilistic monetary gains and losses to determine whether differences occurred when either gains or losses were assessed first, following a loss, or following a gain. Participants (N = 486) recruited from Amazon Mechanical Turk completed either two delay or two probability discounting assessments, counterbalanced across temporal and sign sequences. Regression suggested sequence significantly impacted rates of discounting for delayed and probabilistic gains and modulated magnitude effects across both gains and losses. These results add to the growing literature on gain-loss asymmetry and may inform methods of gathering delay and probability discounting data.
 

On the Differential Discounting of Money and Alcohol in College Students: Effects of Reward Magnitude and Delay

STEFANIE S. STANCATO (University of Kansas), Ale Carrillo (The University of Kansas), David P. Jarmolowicz (The University of Kansas)
Abstract:

Heavy alcohol use on college campuses is a major concern, as it can result in academic problems, assault, alcohol use disorders, and death. One hallmark of excessive drinking is elevated discounting rates of alcohol compared to money. Differences in discounting rates could be due to differences in sensitivity to magnitude of rewards and/or delay. Recent analytic techniques may provide a better understanding of these behavioral mechanisms, and their effects on choice. We used the multilevel modeling technique to evaluate discounting of alcohol and money with undergraduate college students. This approach examines group and individual discounting rates simultaneously using a multilevel logistic regression and nonlinear models. It has been recommended for use, as it is sensitive to magnitudes of reward and relative delay, which are considered separate contributors to choice. We found subjects had differential sensitivity to reward magnitude and delay when discounting of alcohol compared to money. Findings suggest these analytic techniques may lead to the enhanced understanding of these behavioral processes needed to successfully target and decrease alcohol consumption on college campuses.

 

Effects of Economic Context in Discounting

MOLLY A BARLOW (University of Florida), David Cox (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Jesse Dallery (University of Florida)
Abstract:

Previous studies have investigated how drastic changes to income influence delay discounting (e.g. Bickel et al., 2016). Additionally, while researchers have investigated how choices change as a function of the absolute magnitude of an outcome (e.g. Green et al., 1999), no studies have investigated how choices change as a function of magnitude relative to the amount in a participant’s bank. We investigated how endowing participants with a bank of varying amounts influenced choice within delay discounting tasks. 60 undergraduate psychology students completed 4 delay discounting tasks. Each task presented one of two different amounts for the delayed choice alternative (i.e., $3000 and $500,000). In addition, each task presented one of two relative bank amounts (i.e., 1/4 or 4 times the delayed amount). Discounting of the delayed amount was significantly greater when the bank amount was smaller than the delayed amount (e.g. $750 bank; $3,000 delayed amount) only in the small delayed amount ($3,000) condition. When the delayed outcome magnitude was large ($500,000), the bank amount did not have a statistically significant effect on discounting. Our results suggest contrived economic context influences participants’ choices under conditions in which an outcome is delayed.

 
 
Symposium #37
CE Offered: BACB
Storytelling Intervention Promotes Academic Language Skills and Inclusion: A Verbal Behavior Analysis and Applied Research
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: EDC/VBC; Domain: Translational
Chair: Trina Spencer (University of South Florida)
Discussant: Tina Marie Covington (Anderson Center for Autism)
CE Instructor: Trina Spencer, Ph.D.
Abstract: Academic language, which strongly predicts academic achievement, is defined as the language used in school to acquire and use knowledge (Nagy & Townsend, 2012). Insufficient academic language skills of children with disabilities or at risk of reading failure limit their access to general education and inclusive opportunities. There is a paucity of research investigating interventions that promote the acquisition and normalization of language beyond basic verbal operants. Oral narrative intervention is a promising approach to teaching diverse learners higher level academic language skills, including complex vocabulary, inferencing, syntax and grammar, and writing. Through oral storytelling children with disabilities can receive academically-focused instruction alongside their peers. The purpose of this symposium is to provide a conceptual analysis, multiple empirical examples, and a review of extant literature on storytelling interventions with children with autism. Practitioners will receive recommendations for teaching advanced verbal behavior through fun, interactive, and meaningful storytelling activities that increase opportunities for academic and social engagement.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): education, inclusion, storytelling, verbal behavior
Target Audience: Speech and language pathologists, educators (general and special education, reading specialists), behavior analysts
 
Beyond Elementary Verbal Operants: A Conceptual Analysis of Storytelling
(Theory)
TRINA SPENCER (University of South Florida)
Abstract: Narratives are causally related events told or retold in temporal order (Cohn, 1999; Prince, 1982). They are critically important for social and academic development of children, especially those with language related disabilities. Telling or retelling a story is considered a verbal operant response. Therefore, Skinner’s analysis of verbal behavior applies to narratives. However, the size of the unit is much larger than what is typically understood by elementary verbal operants and narratives are standardly under multiple control related to tacts, intraverbals, and sometimes mands and echoics. What is less understood is the autoclitic framework involved in the structure of stories and the linguistic structures (e.g., grammar) of the sentences used to tell stories. Nonetheless, these structures are indeed functional (Palmer, 2007). In this paper, a verbal behavior analysis will be offered for complex and large units of verbal behavior known as narratives. Implications of a verbal behavior analysis of storytelling for teaching children with language related disabilities will be presented with particular attention to procedures for establishing and transferring stimulus control of storytelling and for enhancing response and stimulus generalization that results in generative and normalized academic and social communication of diverse children with language related disabilities (e.g., autism).
 
Storytelling Intervention Improves Vocabulary and Inferencing: An Inclusive Approach
(Applied Research)
ANNA GARCIA (University of South Florida), Trina Spencer (University of South Florida)
Abstract: Two of the most important components of language and reading comprehension are vocabulary and narrative skills (Griffin et al., 2004). The purpose of this study was to examine the effect of vocabulary instruction embedded in narrative language intervention on children’s ability to retell stories and infer the meaning of contextually supported vocabulary words. Participants included 22 first grade students who presented with limited or impaired language skills. A small group (3-4 children) narrative language intervention with embedded vocabulary instruction was delivered four days a week for 30 minutes. Intervention sessions involved visually supported storytelling activities and promoting the use of less-common words while retelling personally-themed stories. Intervention effects were examined using a small-scale randomized control group design with an embedded repeated acquisition design across 12 weeks of intervention. Statistically significant differences were observed at posttest on narrative language skills [t(20) = 3.62, p > .001, d = 1.54] and inferential word learning measures [t(20) = 2.77, p = .01, d = 1.18]. Repeated acquisition graphs (see sample graphs) show 12 weekly demonstrations of targeted vocabulary acquisition for each of the 11 students in the treatment group, resulting in 121 replications of experimental effect.
 
Oral Storytelling Intervention Improves Writing and Access to Peers
(Applied Research)
Trina Spencer (University of South Florida), MEGAN ERIN SULLIVAN SULLIVAN KIRBY (University of South Florida)
Abstract: This study examined the extent to which oral language instruction using narratives can impact students’ writing skills. Following multiple baseline design conventions to demonstrate an experimental effect, three groups of first grade students experienced staggered baseline and intervention phases. During the intervention condition, groups received six sessions of small group narrative instruction over two weeks. Outside of oral narrative instruction, students were asked to write their own stories, forming the dependent variable across baseline, intervention, and maintenance conditions. Written stories were analyzed for story structure and language complexity using a simple narrative scoring flow chart. Corresponding to the onset of oral narrative instruction, students showed meaningful improvements in story writing, which maintained for several weeks. Results suggest that narrative instruction delivered exclusively in an oral modality has a robust and durable effect on students’ writing, which may be more efficient than addressing writing skills directly. Additionally, improvements in story writing were notable for one student receiving special education services, resulting in increased time spent in the general education classroom and access to grade-level peers. One important implication of a socially valid and flexible narrative intervention is enhanced inclusion of children with language related disabilities in general education and with peers.
 

Review of Storytelling Intervention Studies Involving Children With Autism

(Theory)
MALLAMY IDALIT CAMARGO PENA (University of South Florida), Anna Garcia (University of South Florida), Trina Spencer (University of South Florida)
Abstract:

Children with autism have deficits in language, communication, social interaction, and perspective taking skills. Storytelling integrates this cluster of skills as it requires an understanding of narrative structure, the use of complex sentences, and it naturally occurs in social contexts. For example, narratives have been used to teach children with autism to tell personal experience narratives (Favot et al., 2018), increase the complexity of the sentences used to tell stories (Petersen et al., 2016), and to take another’s perspective (Gillam et al., 2015). We will present a summary of the currently available data-based research that used storytelling activities to teach various skills to children with autism, many of which are published in non-behavior analytic journals. The results of the systematic review will be discussed while giving special attention to the specific teaching procedures used to promote storytelling, the dependable variables (e.g., social skills, academic skills, perspective taking, and communication skills), and the methodological rigor used to investigate the effect of the intervention. Implications will be discussed as they pertain to academic and social programming for children with autism and directions for future behavior analytic research.

 
 
Symposium #39
CE Offered: BACB
Applications of Behavior Analytic Training Methods
Saturday, May 25, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Rouge
Area: TBA/OBM; Domain: Translational
Chair: Alyssa Miller (Melmark)
Discussant: Stephanie Gerow (Baylor University)
CE Instructor: Stephanie Gerow, M.S.
Abstract:

Applied behavior analysis is concerned with improving or solving socially relevant problems (Baer, Wolf, & Risley, 1968; Fisher, Groff, & Roane, 2011). A socially relevant problem for service organizations and training institutions is ensuring employees and trainees acquire minimum competency to meet job expectations and to be eligible for employment. The purpose of this symposium is to provide examples of behavior analytic training applications in applied and university settings. The first paper provides an example of how behavior analytic training strategies were incorporated into a state mandated medication administration training. The number of organizational medication errors, number of opportunities to pass a written exam, and number of opportunities to pass a competency exam were examined to determine training outcomes. The second paper provides an example of an organizational training to improve outcomes of a functional behavior assessment. The third paper provides an example of university supported training for special educators to conduct trial-based functional analyses and develop function-based supports. The fourth paper provides an example of training for university students learning to conduct functional analyses.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Organizational Decision-Making, Teaching, Training
Target Audience:

Practitioners, educators, and administrators who design and implement employee and university training programs specific to behavior analysis.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of this event participants will describe behavior analytic training strategies, describe the application of behavior analytic training strategies to meet multiple training needs, and describe how the discussed training strategies might support training they are involved with.
 

Effects of Behavior Analytic Training Strategies on a State Mandated Medication Administration Training

(Applied Research)
MEAGHAN CHIRINOS (Melmark, PA), Jennifer Ruane (Melmark, PA), Alyssa Miller (Melmark), Shawn P. Quigley (Melmark, PA), Julianne Brechbeil (Melmark, PA), Nikolaos Tsolakidis (Melmark, PA), Hillary Viola (Melmark, PA)
Abstract:

Melmark is a multi-state human service provider with premier private special education schools, professional development, training, and research centers. Training at Melmark is designed to increase the professional skills of employees, which in turn increases life outcomes for the individuals we support. Melmark trains based upon the principles of competency based instruction, performance-based instruction (Brethower & Smalley, 1998) and behavioral skills training (BST; Reid, Rollyson & Parsons, 2012). The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effects of added material (i.e., 8-hours of video-based instruction), increased opportunities to respond during the training (i.e., fluency-timings, guided notes), and behavior skills training. Additionally, employees observing competency of the medication administration process were retrained using principles of fluency-based methods, active student responding, and behavior skills training. The outcomes of the trainings are discussed in light of medication errors, testing, as well as initial and maintenance observations. Impact on the organization will also be discussed.

 
Antecedent and Consequence Information and Accurate Identification of Function by Direct Service Staff
(Service Delivery)
SUSAN A. RAPOZA-HOULE (Beacon ABA Services), Paulo Guilhardi (Beacon ABA Services, Inc.), Robert K. Ross (Beacon ABA Services)
Abstract: The goal of the present study is to identify whether irrelevant stimuli affect the accurate identification of function by observers with limited experience in Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA). Eighteen participants were presented with video segments representing antecedent, behavior, and one of two consequences (either hand-over-hand prompting or removal of materials). While the actions shown in the videos did not vary, additional information irrelevant to the determination of function varied based on subtitles added to each segment. Participants were asked to hypothesize function at the conclusion of each of the 16 videos presented (4 in each condition). Participants’ hypotheses were used to determine whether and how surrounding information affects perception of function for staff with less than one year of experience in ABA. Results indicate when antecedent and consequence combinations depicted in the video segments are consistent, accuracy in identifying function is high. When the combinations are inconsistent, accuracy rates decrease, suggesting that the decrement may be based upon irrelevant surrounding information rather than relevant consequent stimulus changes.
 
Supporting Preschool Teachers to Conduct Trial-Based Functional Analysis and Function-Based Interventions
(Applied Research)
Mandy J. Rispoli (Purdue University), MARIE DAVID (Purdue University), Emily Gregori (Purdue University)
Abstract: Young children with disabilities often require intensive, individualized support for challenging behaviors. Yet early childhood teachers are often undertrained or under supported in addressing challenging behaviors. As a result, classroom teachers may not be familiar with evidence-based practices for assessing and treating challenging behavior. In this two part study we evaluated a professional development curriculum based on behavioral skills training and practice-based coaching on early childhood special education teachers’ implementation of trial-based functional analysis and function-based intervention. We utilized a multiple-baseline design across teacher-student dyads to assess the effects of the model on teacher assessment and intervention fidelity and on child challenging behavior. Results showed improvement in teachers’ fidelity and concurrent decreases in child challenging behavior. Implications for practice and recommendations for future research are discussed.
 

Training Students to Conduct Trial-Based Latency Functional Analyses Using Behavior Skills Training and TAGTeach

(Applied Research)
Maggie Pavone (Lindenwood University), KELLY HANTAK (Lindenwood University)
Abstract:

This study explored methods for training behavior analysis students to conduct functional analyses. Students (n=5) in a behavior analysis graduate program were first taught to conduct one condition of a trial-based latency functional analysis using three 30-minute sessions including instruction, modeling, rehearsal, and feedback. Performance following training was significantly better than baseline measures, however the criterion for competency was not met for all participants. Students (n=3) that did not demonstrate competency with the behavioral skills training alone were then provided 3 additional 10 minute training sessions using TAGTeach methodology. This additional training was sufficient for all students to attain competency. The same treatment integrity checklist used during training was then used to check for generalization in the students’ applied settings. All students (n=5) performed at mastery criterion under applied settings. Results indicate that behavioral skills training combined with TAGTeach training may be an effective way of training graduate students to conduct complex behavior analytic analyses.

 
 
Symposium #41
CE Offered: BACB
Applications of Applied Behavior Analysis to Health and Physical Fitness
Saturday, May 25, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 3/4
Area: CBM/CSS; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Erin Lusby-Donovan (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
CE Instructor: James Moore, Ph.D.
Abstract: Research has demonstrated the potential of applying behavior principles into health and physical fitness in many different ways (Allison and Allyon, 1980; Luiselli, Woods, & Reed, 2011). Further behavior analytic research should be conducted to assess effectiveness, accessibility, and satisfaction in human performance interventions (Luiselli, Woods, & Reed). Almost 40 years ago, Allison and Allyon (1980) asserted that “exploratory research in the area of the application of behavioral procedures to sport and physical education has been scarce.” Although the application of behavioral procedures to sports has increased over the decades, the specific use of behavioral procedures to improve a variety of skills and safety remains scarce. This symposium will present three novel applications of behavior analysis to various issues in health and physical fitness.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): health, physical fitness, sports
Target Audience: Behavior Analysts, graduate students, academic faculty
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will review past applications of behavior analysis to health and physical fitness 2. Participants will learn new applications of behavior analysis to health and physical fitness, such as weightlifting and soccer. 2. Participants will discuss implications to further expanding the role of behavior analysis in health and physical fitness.
 
Comparing Forward and Backward Chaining in Teaching Olympic Weightlifting
James Moore (Canopy Children's Solutions), BREANNA NEWBORNE (Canopy Children's Solutions), Laura Quintero (Mississippi State University)
Abstract: The popularity of Olympic-style weightlifting in fitness routines is growing, but participating in these exercises with improper technique places lifters at increased risk for injury. Fitness training professionals have developed multiple teaching strategies, but have not subjected these strategies to systematic evaluation, particularly with novice lifters. Two strategies recommended by professional training organizations are akin to forward and backward chaining, which have been shown effective at teaching other novel, complex behaviors. The present study compared these forward- and backward-chaining-like strategies to teach novice lifters “the clean” and “the snatch,” two Olympic weightlifting movements frequently incorporated into high-intensity training programs. Participants performed lifts taught with forward chaining more accurately than lifts taught with backward chaining.
 
Reducing Risk of Head Injury in Youth Soccer: An Extension of Behavioral Skills Training for Heading
LAURA QUINTERO (Mississippi State University), James Moore (Canopy Children's Solutions)
Abstract: Recently, concerns regarding sport-related concussions have increased within the research literature, the media, and popular culture. One source of potential soccer-related concussions involved the purposeful striking of the ball with one’s head (i.e. heading). There is currently limited research on an effective teaching method to improve safe heading technique. In the current student, Behavior Skills Training was evaluated as a method to teach correct heading techniques to youth soccer players. Results indicated that BST increased the percentage of correct steps for each player based on a task analysis of heading. Based on social validity questionnaires administered to players and the coach, BST was rated as an acceptable form of training. After the final training session, experienced coaches evaluated video recordings of baseline and training sessions for each player and rated each player as having improved from baseline to training.
 

The Effects of Self-Monitoring, Peer-Monitoring, and Peer Yoked Contingency on Physical Activity in Adults

AMANDA M AUSTIN (ARROW Health and Wellness), Erin Lusby-Donovan (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Jennifer Weber (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract:

Physical activity is one of the most critical actions Americans can take to improve overall health. Despite the wide range of health benefits physical activity can provide, it is estimated that more than 60% of U.S. adults do not reach the recommended amount of weekly physical activity and 25% do not engage in any physical activity. Effective intervention is needed to increase physical activity in U.S. adults. This study examines the effects of self-monitoring, peer-monitoring, and peer yoked contingency on physical activity in adults. The study is currently in progress and results have not been determined at this time.

 
 
Symposium #42
CE Offered: BACB
Diversity submission Are Women Academics Receiving Fair Treatment in Behavior Analysis
Saturday, May 25, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Cuvee
Area: CSS/PCH; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Hugo Curiel (The University of Texas Rio Grande Valley)
Discussant: Heather M. McGee (Western Michigan University)
CE Instructor: Anita Li, M.S.
Abstract:

There has been growing interest in the representation of women and other minorities in the field of behavior analysis given the inception of the Women in Behavior Analysis conference and the special issue on Women in Behavior Analysis published in Behavior Analysis in Practice, an ABAI-affiliated journal. This symposium reports data regarding representation of women in academia within behavior analysis by examining research productivity and publicly available salaries. The first paper entitled, “Participation of Women in Behavior Analysis Research: Some Recent and Relevant Data,” reports an increasing trend of women publishing in major behavior analytic journals compared to historical data. The second paper, “The Gender Pay Gap for Behavior Analysis Faculty: It’s Big and Bad,” reports a shocking discrepancy amongst female and male professors employed at ABAI-accredited universities based in the United States relative to other disciplines. We discuss implications of these findings for women in academia and in the field of behavior analysis.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): academia, diversity, wage gap, women
Target Audience:

Professors, graduate students, instructors of behavior analysis, and supervisors of individuals pursuing behavior analytic certification

Learning Objectives: 1. Audience members will be able to report on historical figures on women's participation in research in applied behavior analysis. 2. Audience members will describe strategies to incorporate research in applied settings. 3. Audience members will describe strategies to reduce the wage gap and participation of women in both academia and practice.
 
Diversity submission Participation of Women in Behavior Analysis Research: Some Recent and Relevant Data
ANITA LI (Western Michigan University), Hugo Curiel (The University of Texas Rio Grande Valley), Joshua K. Pritchard (Factari), Alan D. Poling (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: An examination of article authorship and editorial board membership for six behavior-analytic journals from 2014-16 revealed that, compared to findings from prior years, women’s participation has increased substantially over time. This finding is heartening and continued efforts to ensure that everyone has the opportunity to succeed in, and be served by, behavior analysis are richly merited.
 
Diversity submission The Gender Pay Gap for Behavior Analysis Faculty: It’s Big and Bad
Anita Li (Western Michigan University), NICOLE GRAVINA (University of Florida), Joshua K. Pritchard (Factari), Alan D. Poling (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: We examined publicly available faculty salaries for men and women faculty members in 16 ABAI-accredited university programs. Overall, 50.6% of the 89 faculty members were women, although there were twice as many men as women at the full professor level. Our data suggest that ABAI-accredited training programs pay women less than men at all academic levels. Both in absolute terms and relative to the wage gap reported in other area of psychology, the difference in mean wages for women and men in our sample is enormous. This state of affairs is an embarrassment for our discipline and should distress all right-thinking behavior analysts. As individuals and as a collective, women have received unequal and unfair treatment for millennia. It’s time for a change.
 
 
Invited Paper Session #43
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP

Pain: An Update From the Applied Front--Conditioning and Measuring Behavior Still Matter

Saturday, May 25, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Frank Symons, Ph.D.
Chair: Kelly M. Schieltz (University of Iowa)
FRANK SYMONS (University of Minnesota)
Dr. Frank Symons is a Distinguished McKnight University Professor in Special Education and Educational Psychology at the University of Minnesota where he also serves as the Associate Dean for Research and Policy in the College of Education & Human Development. His research agenda positions him in the crossroads of interdisciplinary inquiry in behavioral disorders and neurodevelopmental disabilities. His specific focus has been on the behavioral mechanisms and pathophysiology underlying chronic self-injurious behavior occurring among individuals with neurodevelopmental disorders including Fragile X syndrome, Rett syndrome, autism, and intellectual disability. His work has also advanced by addressing issues specific to pain and intellectual and developmental disabilities. He holds current appointments in the Department of Educational Psychology and the Center for Neurobehavioral Development. Symons has been P.I. or a Co-Investigator on several NIH R series grants the majority involving bench and bedside/clinic components and their integration.
Abstract:

Pain is a classic or, perhaps, rather a modern scientific conundrum. It is, by definition, a subjective experience. One of the confusing or difficult problems comes about by reducing the experience to a singular objective entity that can be quantified. How and why this is done will be discussed in two ways. One in relation to contemporary accounts of basic pain research agendas and what seems like the (re)discovery of the brain and conditioning (respondent, operant) mechanisms. The other by placing the issue in the applied context of trying to reliably and validity measure pain experience in individuals with communicative difficulties associated with intellectual and developmental disabilities.

Target Audience:

Behavioral scientists; practitioners providing services to individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, attendees will be able to: (1) define pain; (2) describe the specific problem of the definition of pain for individuals with communication disabilities; (3) describe common features of non-verbal pain rating scales.
 
 
Invited Tutorial #44
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP
SQAB Tutorial: Multilevel Modeling for Single-Subject Designs and Model Fitting
Saturday, May 25, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: SCI; Domain: Basic Research
PSY/BACB/NASP CE Offered. CE Instructor: William DeHart, Ph.D.
Chair: Shawn Patrick Gilroy (Louisiana State University)
Presenting Authors: : WILLIAM DEHART (Virginia Tech Carilion Research Institute), JONATHAN FRIEDEL (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health)
Abstract:

Application of basic statistical measures (e.g., t-tests, ANOVA) to single-subject designs have been a source of conflict in Behavior Analysis because, in part, these tests aggregate behavioral variability across subjects and time, eliminating much of the data that behavior analysts find important. Multilevel modeling (MLM) is a statistical technique that addresses these concerns and is commonly used when data are naturally clustered (e.g., student clusters in classrooms, which are also clustered in various schools across a district). With MLM, the value of a statistical parameter for a specific case depends on the levels of the each cluster for that case. A single subject can serve as a cluster of data and, therefore, MLM can provide subject-by-subject predictions. In a single-subject or small-n design, statistical comparisons based on the IVs of interest are enhanced when the models have already accounted for intrasubject variability. In theoretical modeling of behavior, subject-by-subject model parameters can be obtained while simultaneously accounting for group-level patterns in the data. This tutorial will demonstrate using MLM to analyze experimental data from a single subject design and also to conduct subject level model fitting. The analyses will be conducted in R, a popular, free software package for statistical analyses.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Researchers, research-practitioners, students

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) enumerate some of the strengths and weakness of the R statistical software; (2) perform the basic steps of creating a multilevel model for experimental data; (3) perform the basic steps of creating a multilevel model for theoretical modeling.
 
WILLIAM DEHART (Virginia Tech Carilion Research Institute), JONATHAN FRIEDEL (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health)

Dr. DeHart received his B.A. and Ph.D. from Utah State University under the mentorship of Dr. Amy Odum. In July of 2017, he began his current position as a post-doctoral fellow with Dr. Warren Bickel at the Fralin Biomedical Research Institute at VTC. Dr. DeHart’s primary research interests include the behavioral economics of addiction and other health behaviors including cigarette smoking and obesity as well as the application of advanced statistical methods to behavioral data. His early research investigated novel methods of reducing impulsive choice using framing and financial education and his dissertation applied structural equation modeling to better understand the effects of delay length and outcome magnitude on delay discounting. His current research interests are twofold. First, he is interested in measuring the abuse liability of different risky products including tobacco cigarettes and e-cigarettes and how demand for those products can be changed using public-health narratives. Second, he is interested in understanding the relationship of delay discounting to various health behaviors. In this line, he has applied advanced statistical methods including structural equation modeling, machine learning algorithms, and mixed-effects modeling. Dr. DeHart’s work has been recognized by various popular media outlets including the Wall Street Journal and he currently serves on the editorial board for the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior.

Jonathan E. Friedel is a research psychologist in the Bioanalytics Branch at the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. As part of the Organizational and Behavioral Research Team, he works on several grant funded projects focused on worker safety in laboratory workers, distracted driving, and data analytics for organizations using behavior based safety. He is currently the primary investigator for a grant funded project designed to use behavioral economics to quantify the factors that affect safety-related decision making in small businesses. He obtained his PhD in experimental psychology from Utah State University where he focused on delay discounting and behavioral economics. He obtained a MS in Behavior Analysis from University of North Texas.  

Keyword(s): R, single-subject designs, statistics
 
 
Invited Paper Session #46
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP

Explaining Emergent Tact Control

Saturday, May 25, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom EF
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research
Instruction Level: Advanced
CE Instructor: Anna Petursdottir, Ph.D.
Chair: Sarah A. Lechago (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
ANNA PETURSDOTTIR (Texas Christian University)
Anna Ingeborg Petursdottir received her Ph.D. from Western Michigan University. She is currently an associate professor of psychology and chair of the psychology department at Texas Christian University (TCU), where she teaches courses and supervises doctoral students in Experimental Psychology. She also holds an appointment as a part-time lecturer at Reykjavik University. Anna is a previous editor of The Analysis of Verbal Behavior, a previous associate editor of JABA and a current associate editor of JEAB. She is president-elect of Division 25 of the American Psychological Association, a board member of the Society for the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, a member of the ABAI science board, and a past president of the Texas Association for Behavior Analysis. Anna’s research encompasses both basic and applied interests and focuses primarily on verbal behavior acquisition and the relationship between verbal behavior and derived stimulus relations.
Abstract:

Skinner (1957) defined the tact as a verbal response under the functional control of a nonverbal antecedent stimulus due to a history of generalized conditioned reinforcement. However, control by nonverbal stimuli over vocal verbal responses often emerges in the apparent absence of prior reinforcement. This phenomenon has been documented, for example, in research on on receptive-to-expressive generalization, stimulus pairing observation procedures, and instructive feedback, and it requires explanation in an operant account of language. It is commonly proposed that undocumented reinforcement of overt or covert echoic responses in the presence of the nonverbal stimulus plays a role in emergent tact control. In this presentation I will review research from my own lab and others that has addressed this hypothesis by measuring or manipulating the occurrence of echoic responses during learning trials. I will evaluate the extent to which the results support a functional role of echoic responding in emergent tact control and discuss alternative explanations of the phenomenon, including relational operants and stimulus correlation effects.

Target Audience:

Behavior analysts; scientists

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the proposed role of the echoic in emergent tact control; (2) discuss which findings do and do not support involvement of echoic responding in emergent tact control; (3) describe two alternative explanations of emergent tact control.
 
 
Symposium #47
CE Offered: BACB
Current Applications of Synthesized Reinforcement Contingencies to Improve Socially Important Behaviors
Saturday, May 25, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Cory Whelan (May Institute; Western New England University)
Discussant: Einar T. Ingvarsson (Virginia Institute of Autism)
CE Instructor: Einar T. Ingvarsson, M.A.
Abstract:

Research and practice related to function-based interventions for problem behavior have evolved significantly since behavior analysts began working with children with problem behavior. One example is the synthesis of establishing operations and reinforcers in both functional and treatment analyses. The current symposium will focus on examples of the effects of synthesized reinforcement contingencies, and will present data related to (a) efficient analysis and treatment processes conducted in a school setting, (b) the application of a skills-based treatment package without extinction to reduce severe problem behavior, (c) a treatment model in which children and/or parents are continuously provided the choice of participating in treatment or leaving the therapeutic context, and (d) training parents to teach their children functional life skills in an effort to minimize emerging problem behavior and prevent severe problem behavior.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): FCT, IISCA, parent training, synthesis
Target Audience:

Behavior analysis practitioners, researchers, and educators.

 
Interview-Informed Synthesized Contingency Analyses and Functional Communication Training: Replications in an Educational Setting
AMY KATE ROSENBLUM (May Institute), Cory Whelan (May Institute; Western New England University), Robin K. Landa (May Institute; Western New England University)
Abstract: Functional communication training (FCT) is an efficacious treatment used to decrease problem behavior and increase communication in children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). FCT involves reinforcing the emission of a functional communication response (FCR) while placing problem behavior on extinction (Carr & Durand, 1985). In the present study, a reversal design was used Interview-Informed Synthesized Contingency Analyses and Functional Communication Training: Replications in an Educational Setting to evaluate the utility of the interview-informed synthesized contingency analysis (IISCA; Hanley, Jin, Vanselow, & Hanratty, 2014) in the identification of functional reinforcers for problem behavior to be used in subsequent FCT. Participants were students enrolled in a private school for students with ASD who engaged in severe problem behavior. For all participants, the IISCA led to the identification of functional reinforcers, and FCT resulted in a decrease in problem behavior and an increase in the FCR.
 
An Evaluation of Differential Reinforcement Without Extinction to Decrease Severe Problem Behavior
LAURA A HANRATTY (Elms College), Alyssa Jean Clark (Elms College), Christopher Tamburrino (Elms College), Miranda Fogg (Elms College)
Abstract: Differential reinforcement of alternative behavior (DRA) is a common behavior change procedure used to increase a desirable behavior and simultaneously decrease a problematic behavior. This study expands on previous research by using differential reinforcement without extinction to teach communication responses, while decreasing severe problem behavior. In this study, three children between the ages of 4 and 12 years-old who were diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder were exposed to functional communication and tolerance response conditions. Contingent on communication responses longer, higher-quality reinforcement intervals were delivered, while problem behavior resulted in the delivery of shorter, lower-quality reinforcement intervals. Reinforcement intervals were faded in a response chaining condition in which the number and difficulty of demands were increased. Communication responses, as well as compliance with adult lead instruction resulted in higher quality and longer reinforcement intervals, while problem behavior resulted in shorter, lower quality reinforcement intervals. The results showed that differential reinforcement without extinction was successful in decreasing severe problem behavior of aggression and disruptive behaviors, while increasing communication skills and compliance for all three children.
 
An Enhanced Choice Model for Minimizing Collateral Effects of Extinction in the Assessment and Treatment of Problem Behavior
ADITHYAN RAJARAMAN (Western New England University), Gregory P. Hanley (Western New England University), Holly Gover (Western New England University), John E. Staubitz (Vanderbilt University Medical Center, TRIAD), Johanna Staubitz (Vanderbilt University), Kathleen Simcoe (Vanderbilt University Medical Center), Rachel Metras (Western New England University)
Abstract: In an attempt to develop and maintain a therapeutic relationship by minimizing extinction side and after-effects, we systematically replicated the progressive skill-based intervention process described by Hanley, Jin, Vanselow, and Hanratty (2014) within an enhanced choice model. In the enhanced choice model, participants were offered the choice to: (a) enter the context where typical treatment procedures were implemented (b) enter a “hangout” context in which the evocative conditions of the treatment context were never present, or (c) leave the therapeutic context altogether. These options were simultaneously and continuously available to participant for the duration of the treatment process. In this model, procedural extinction for PB was programmed in the treatment context, but extinction side- and after effects were avoided as participants could always choose to go “hangout” or to leave entirely. We provide measures on participant performance (e.g., problem behavior and targeted life skills), choices made within the therapeutic process, duration of intervention processes, and social validity of the procedures and outcomes.
 
Balance: A Home-Based Parent Training Program
KELSEY RUPPEL (Western New England University), Gregory P. Hanley (Western New England University), Adithyan Rajaraman (Western New England University), Robin K. Landa (Western New England University)
Abstract: Small group and class-wide teaching of particular social skills like functional communication, delay toleration, and compliance has been shown to both prevent and reduce existing problem behavior in typically developing preschoolers. Researchers have also demonstrated that a similar skills-based treatment designed from a functional analysis reduces the severe problem behavior of children with autism in clinics and schools. We will evaluate a similar skills-based program when implemented in the home with parents as the interventionists for their children with autism. Following an interview of parents to identify their child’s preferred and non-preferred activities, parents will be taught how to first play with their child and then taught how to develop the skills of functional communication, delay tolerance, and compliance. We will evaluate whether the program, as delivered in-home by parents, reduces problem behavior and increases functionally relevant skills. We will also report on parents’ acceptability of the program and its general effects.
 
 
Symposium #48
CE Offered: BACB
Evaluating and Improving Skill-Building Programs for Children and Adolescents Diagnosed With Autism
Saturday, May 25, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom B
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Julia Iannaccone (City University of New York Graduate Center; Queens College)
Discussant: Amanda Karsten (Western Michigan University)
CE Instructor: Amanda Karsten, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Many individuals diagnosed with autism demonstrate deficits in verbal, academic, and imitation skills. Various programs have been developed to improve these skills; however, it is important to ensure that these programs are effective, socially valid, and produce generalizable repertoires. Study 1 reviewed the literature on teaching imitation in 20 studies with a total of 166 participants with autism. The authors found that contingent imitation may improve skills adjacent to imitation including language, play, and joint attention. Study 2 addressed the adaptive skill of using a debit card with adolescents. After using multiple exemplars, the participants generalized the skill to the community over a four week period. Study 3 evaluated a recently developed error correction program for discrete trial instruction that involved losing opportunities to earn more-preferred items following a mistake. Not only was the program found to efficiently improve mastery of targeted tasks, it was also preferred by participants and caregivers. Instructor error during discrete trial instruction, such as delays to reinforcer delivery, can also impact skill acquisition of the student. In Study 4, the authors systematically manipulated different delays to reinforcement across multiple reinforcer classes to evaluate the effects of programmed treatment integrity failure. These studies provide evidence for multiple programs that can be used to build skills for those diagnosed with autism.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): contingent imitation, Discrete trial, error correction, generalized repertoire
Target Audience:

BCBAs, BCBA-Ds, BCaBAs, licensed psychologists, and other behavior analytic providers who need to learn different techniques for skill-building with clients diagnosed with autism.

 

A Review of Research Using Contingent Imitation to Teach Imitation Skills to Children With Autism Spectrum Disorders

(Applied Research)
LESLIE QUIROZ (Caldwell University), Tina Sidener (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Meghan Deshais (University of Florida, Caldwell University), David C. Palmer (Smith College)
Abstract:

Imitation training is a critical component of early intensive behavioral intervention (EIBI) programs for children with autism. While extensive research has informed procedures for teaching imitation under tight instructional control, there are not comparable empirically-derived procedures for teaching imitation in the natural environment. Contingent imitation (i.e., the instructor imitating the child’s behavior) is a naturalistic strategy incorporated in reciprocal imitation training (RIT). The present review evaluated the literature using contingent imitation to teach imitation in children with autism across 20 studies, published across 14 journals, with a total of 166 participants with autism. Effects reported include increases to imitation (i.e., vocal, motor, object), language, play behaviors, and joint attention. A nonoverlapping points (NAP) treatment analysis indicated this research has produced variable effect sizes. However, more research is warranted, and directions for future research on contingent imitation are discussed. This review will apply a conceptual analysis of generalized imitative repertoires to its discussion of whether contingent imitation may facilitate skill acquisition and influence motivating variables.

 

Teaching Adolescents With Autism Spectrum Disorder a Generalized Repertoire of Using a Debit Card

(Applied Research)
EILEEN MARY MILATA (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Chata A. Dickson (New England Center for Children)
Abstract:

Individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) demonstrate deficits in performing generalized responses that occur in natural environments. Previous research has discussed the importance of teaching adaptive skills to adolescents with ASD that generalize to the natural environment to increase independence throughout adulthood. To address such deficits, Horner and colleagues (1982) recommended using general-case analysis strategies to identify the full range of stimulus variations and required responses; then creating multiple teaching exemplars that facilitate for generalization of the target skill. To date, general-case analysis and multiple exemplar training have not been used to teach individuals with ASD to use a chip debit card. Therefore, the purpose of the study was to address limitations of previous studies that did not implement generalization strategies to teach adolescents with ASD adaptive skills. A multiple-probe design was used to demonstrate skill acquisition across teaching and generalization probe exemplars for three adolescents with ASD. Pre- and posttest probes were conducted at stores in the natural environment to assess generalized responding. All participants acquired the target skill following video modeling and multiple exemplar training, generalized their responding to the natural environment and maintained their responding during a four-week posttest probe.

 
Comprehensive Evaluation of the Losing Little, Gaining More Error Correction Program
(Applied Research)
SOPHIA MA (Queens College), Joshua Jessel (Queens College), Joanna Spartinos (Queens College), Adriana Arline Villanueva (Queens College), Kimberly Shamoun (Behavioral Intervention Psychological Services PC)
Abstract: We conducted this study to evaluate a recently developed form of error correction that incorporates rich-to-lean transitions following incorrect responses. This program has been termed Losing Little, Gaining More. We compared a traditional error correction procedure to the Losing Little, Gaining More program that included a transition to earning less preferred items during discrete-trial instructions. During traditional error correction, an incorrect response resulted in no reinforcement for a single trial but the participant still had the opportunity to earn more-preferred items during the following trials. During the Losing Little, Gaining More program an incorrect response resulted in no reinforcement for a single trial and the child lost the opportunity to earn more-preferred items during the following three trials (i.e., only less-preferred items were available). The Losing Little, Gaining More program often produced more efficient mastery of targeted tasks and was selected more often by the participants during a concurrent-chains preference analysis. The findings suggest that the aversive properties of rich-to-lean transitions might function to correct errors but did not affect preference for these procedures in the context of discrete trial instructions.
 
Further Evaluation of Treatment Integrity Errors During Discrete Trial Instruction: Assessing Errors Across Reinforcer Type
(Applied Research)
JACQUELYN N. MOLINA (Florida Institute of Technology), Yanerys Leon (Florida Institute of Technology), Kaitlynn Gokey (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: Previous research has demonstrated that treatment integrity can impact treatment effectiveness during discrete trial training (DTT). Additionally, researchers have shown that integrity errors are fairly common even among highly trained clinicians. Carroll et al., 2013 evaluated implementation of DTT by 9 trained staff and showed that although some parts of the discrete trial were implemented with a high degree of integrity (e.g., establishes ready behavior), the reinforcement component was only implemented as planned on 20% of trials (i.e., delivered within 5 s of a correct response). This is especially troubling as even short delays can decrease the rate of skill acquisition (Majdalany et al., 2016). One potential limitation of Carroll et al. is that reinforcer deliveries were scored as correct or incorrect based on arbitrary criteria (5 s). Additionally, all classes of tangible reinforcement were collapsed into one measure (food, toys). However, recent research suggests that different classes of reinforcers may be differentially sensitive to delays (Leon et al., 2016). Therefore, the purpose of this study was to systematically replicate Study 1 of Carroll et al. (2013) and extend that line of research by evaluating obtained delays to reinforcer delivery during DTT by reinforcer class (i.e., tokens, food, toys).
 
 
Symposium #49
CE Offered: BACB
Translational Research on Conditional Discriminations
Saturday, May 25, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: AUT/EAB; Domain: Translational
Chair: Weizhi Wu (Florida Institute of Technology; The Scott Center for Autism Treatment)
Discussant: Tiffany Kodak (Marquette University)
CE Instructor: Tiffany Kodak, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Being able to do the right thing in the right context is an essential skill for every species. A fundamental learning process related to behaving appropriately is the capacity to engage in conditional discriminations. As with all forms of learning, many factors can influence conditional-discrimination performance. In this symposium, we will consider several variables influencing conditional-discrimination performance in pigeons and humans across both simple and conditional discriminations. The first presentation examined discrimination of the presence versus absence of prior reinforcement on the development of variable-response sequences in pigeons. The second presentation examined the effects of static versus dynamic samples during simple and conditional discriminations with humans. The third presentation examined the effects of comparison-set size on performance during auditory-visual conditional discriminations in children diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder. The final presentation examined the use of quantitative analyses to characterize error patterns during conditional discriminations in children diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Conditional discrimination, Reinforcement, Stimulus control, Translational research
Target Audience:

Practitioners, teachers, applied researchers, translational researchers, and basic researchers

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to describe how conditional discriminations: (1) are used to teach skills; (2) answer questions about behavioral processes; and (3) results in different types of errors
 
Past Behavior as a Stimulus: Differential Control of Operant Variability in Pigeons
(Basic Research)
RYAN J BECKER (Utah State University), Diana Perez (Utah State University), Haylee Downey (Utah State University), Amy Odum (Utah State University)
Abstract: The stochastic generation hypothesis proposes that animals trained to behave variably eventually emit random, unpredictable responses (Neuringer, 2004). The present molecular analysis challenges this hypothesis and suggests that animals’ responses under schedules of variability may come under conditional control of their recent behavior. We trained 10 pigeons to emit four pecks distributed across two keys (“left” and “right”) in a multiple lag 1 lag 8 schedule of reinforcement. The lag 1 component reinforced a four-peck sequence if it differed from the previous sequence, whereas the lag 8 component only reinforced a four-peck sequence if it differed from the previous eight sequences. Preliminary data analysis suggests that—for those pigeons that discriminate between the two variability components—the probability of initiating a four-peck sequence with a “left” peck is increased when the previous terminal peck was “left” and reinforced, but not when the previous terminal “left” peck was not reinforced. Non-reinforced terminal pecks drive the probability of initiating a sequence with that same peck towards .5. Thus, these results suggest that pigeons’ moment-by-moment responses in an operant variability paradigm are a function of not only scheduled variability contingencies, but also their recently (non)reinforced behavior.
 
Comparing the Use of Statically and Dynamically Positioned Stimuli in the Training of Simple and Conditional Discriminations
(Applied Research)
Samuel L. Morris (University of Florida), ELIANA M. PIZARRO (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
Abstract: Previous research has manipulated parameters of reinforcement, increased response effort, required an observing response, and altered array presentation as methods to alleviate biased responding. We hypothesized that utilizing dynamic stimuli (i.e., stimuli that moved continuously within each trial) may require attending and increase response effort, and therefore may reduce the occurrence and persistence of biased responding. In the current study we compared accuracy, bias, and rate of acquisition across repeated discriminations presented in static or dynamic formats. Seven subjects who were reported or observed to display position biases participated. The comparison was conducted with simple discriminations with all seven subjects. The dynamic format produced favorable outcomes for three subjects, made no difference for three subjects, and produced less favorable outcomes for one subject. Three subjects were included in a subsequent comparison with conditional discriminations. The dynamic format produced favorable outcomes for one subject, and there was no clear effect for two subjects.
 

An Evaluation of Stimulus Set Size During Conditional Discrimination for Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

(Applied Research)
Laura L. Grow (Garden Academy), BASAK TOPCUOGLU (Florida Institute of Technology), Sandhya Rajagopal (Florida Institute of Technology), Rebecca Fire (Florida Institute of Technology), Corina Jimenez-Gomez (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment, Florida Institute of Technology), Ivy M Chong (May Institute), Kacie M McGarry (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract:

When teaching auditory-visual conditional discriminations, some of the available teaching strategies (e.g., blocked-trials procedures, conditional-only method) vary by number of comparison stimuli present during training. Sidman (1987) argued that instructors should include more than two comparison stimuli during training to reduce the likelihood of false positive or false negative results. However, researchers have yet to evaluate the effects of comparison size on acquisition of auditory-visual conditional discriminations. This study compared the effectiveness and efficiency of teaching using sets of two, three, and four stimulus pairs, using an adapted alternating treatments design. Three children aged 3- and 6-years old, diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder, participated in the study. Experimenters taught 12 relations in each experimental condition. For one participant, the 3-array presentation was most efficient, and for the other participant, the 2-array presentation was most efficient. The results will be discussed in terms of clinical implications and directions for future research.

 
Quantitative Analysis of Discriminability and Bias During Conditional Discriminations
(Applied Research)
TIARA RAHADIAN PUTRI (Florida Institute of Technology; The Scott Center for Autism Treatment), Courtney Hannula (Florida Institute of Technology; The Scott Center for Autism Treatment), Weizhi Wu (Florida Institute of Technology; The Scott Center for Autism Treatment), Adam Thornton Brewer (Florida Institute of Technology), Blake A. Hutsell (Virginia Commonwealth University), Corina Jimenez-Gomez (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment, Florida Institute of Technology), Christopher A. Podlesnik (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: Children diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorders (ASD) make errors during discrimination training regardless of antecedent or consequent procedures implemented to decrease errors. These interventions are not guided by the source of errors. Two equations from Davison and Tustin’s (1978) framework can quantify errors due to bias (log b) and discriminability (log d). This framework categorized errors emitted by children diagnosed with ASD during a matching-to-sample task. The task was displayed on a touchscreen device in which touching a sample stimulus at the beginning of each trial resulted in the appearance of two comparison stimuli. Researchers delivered reinforcement for touching the matching comparison stimulus. More similar sample stimuli were introduced during Phase 2 while keeping the comparison stimuli the same which affected sample discriminability only with little effect on biases for two of three participants. This framework accurately categorized errors emitted by children with ASD when levels of difficulty between the sample stimuli were manipulated. Future research might be able to use these equations to better categorize errors children with ASD exhibit during conditional discriminations. Future research might also be able to improve teaching procedures by targeting interventions to mitigate or eliminate specific errors due to biases or reduced discriminability.
 
 
Symposium #50
CE Offered: BACB
Technology and Training: Advancements in Training Through Telehealth and Virtual Reality
Saturday, May 25, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom C
Area: AUT/CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Casey J. Clay (University of Missouri)
Discussant: david M. richman (Texas Tech University)
CE Instructor: Casey J. Clay, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Effective training procedures for caregivers of children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) are essential for effective treatment. Additionally, improving efficiency and ease of access to this training through technological advancements will lead to quicker access to effective treatment. This symposium includes applied research on training technologies involving telehealth and virtual reality to increase access to effective assessment and intervention for children with ASD. The first two studies involve the use of telehealth in behavior skills training (BST) with real-time instruction and feedback. The first study focuses on training preference assessment methodology for staff working with children with ASD. The second study focuses on training intervention to decrease disruptive sleep behavior skills in parents of children with ASD. The second two studies involve the use of virtual reality in training skill acquisition (i.e., discrete trial training) and behavior reduction (i.e., functional communication training) procedures to pre-service and in-service teachers working with children with ASD. Discussion of results from both telehealth and virtual reality training studies will follow.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Target audience includes practitioners, researchers, and graduate students working with children with autism spectrum disorders interested in understanding advancements in technology related to training.

Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will gain an understanding of Behavioral Skills Training. 2. Attendees will be able to describe advancements in technology related to training. 3. Attendees will be able to identify and describe effective components of training caregivers of individuals with ASD.
 

Training Parents via Telehealth to Decrease Sleep Disruptive Behaviors in Children With Autism

TAYLOR CUSTER (University of Houston Clear Lake), Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Christine Stiehl (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Kelsey Leadingham (University of Houston, Clear Lake)
Abstract:

Many children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) engage in sleep disruptive behavior (SDB). Previous studies have demonstrated the effectiveness of treatments for SDB, including positive bedtime routines, bedtime passes, faded bedtime, and extinction (Freeman, 2006; Vriend, Corkum, Moon, & Smith, 2011). When training parents to manage SDB, it may be important for the therapist to coach parents and provide feedback on their use of the procedures immediately prior to, during, and following the child’s bedtime. Having a therapist in the home at night may be intrusive for the family and impracticable for the therapist. Telehealth technologies would allow therapists to provide immediate coaching and feedback to parents and to collect procedural integrity data without having to be physically present in the home. In this study, therapists remotely delivered components of behavior skills training to teach parents to implement individualized, function-based treatments for three children with autism who engaged in SDB. All of the children engaged in less SDB and slept longer after the parents implemented the treatment with high integrity. Parents indicated that they were satisfied with the telehealth treatment services. These findings replicate and extend the literature on the efficacy of telehealth technologies to train parents.

 

An Evaluation of Real-Time Feedback Delivered via Telehealth: Training Staff to Conduct Preference Assessments

JANELLE AUSENHUS (Drake University), William J. Higgins (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
Abstract:

Effective, efficient, and accessible staff training procedures are needed to meet the service delivery demand for treating individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). Previous research using behavioral skills training (BST) to remotely train staff to conduct preference assessments has been found to be effective, but required up to 6-hours of trainer time per trainee (Higgins, Luczynski, Carroll, Fisher, & Mudford (2017). The purpose of the present study looked to evaluate the effectiveness of delivering a single component of BST, real-time feedback, via telehealth to train newly hired early intensive behavioral intervention (EIBI) staff to conduct multiple stimulus without replacement (MSWO) preference assessments. A nonconcurrent multiple-baseline- across-participants design showed that remote real-time feedback was associated with short training time and minimal sessions to achieve mastery. Generalization and maintenance probes indicated these skills were transferable to other preference assessment stimuli and learners diagnosed with ASD. Social validity ratings indicated that this was a socially acceptable training procedure.

 
Teaching Discrete Trial Training in a Virtual Reality Environment
BERGLIND SVEINBJORNSDOTTIR (Reykjavik University), Snorri Johannson (Reykjavik University), Julia Oddsdottir (Reykjavik University), Tinna Sigurdardottir (Reykjavik University), Gunnar Valdimarsson (Reykjavik University), Hannes Vilhjálmsson (Reykjavik University)
Abstract: Staff training is an essential component when implementing an effective behavior change procedure to children with autism and developmental disabilites. Unfortunately due to the lack of resources and time constraints many institutions or schools may not be able to sufficiently train staff. Virtual Reality is a viable alternative to train various skills. In a VR environment one can both actively practice skills as well as receive feedback while engaging in the activity. The purpose of the current study was to evaluate the effectiveness of a VR environment in training staff to implement steps in Discrete Trial Training (DTT). Participants were 4 teachers who worked at a school for children with disabilities. Performance was compared and evaluated after baseline, lecture, and VR training in a multiple baseline design across participants. All participants mastered the steps of DTT after VR training. This study is the first in examining the effectiveness of VR environment in training DTT skills. We discuss implications as well as future research in the area.
 

Virtual Reality Behavioral Skills Training for Behavioral Intervention With Individuals With Autism Spectrum Disorders

CASEY J. CLAY (University of Missouri), Brittany Schmitz (Thompson Center for Autism), SungWoo Kahng (Rutgers University), Bimal Balakrishnan (University of Missouri), James Hopfenblatt (University of Missouri)
Abstract:

Effective training procedures include Behavioral Skills Training (BST) involving written and verbal instructions, modeling of the skill, rehearsal of the skill, and feedback on the performance. This training typically involves hours of in vivo experience in which trainees and students with ASD are exposed to risk (e.g., behavioral issues such as aggression, errors in teaching performance). Including BST in a virtual reality (VR) context involving virtual individuals with ASD characteristics and behaviors, may be an effective training method that reduces risk. The purpose of this study was to examine if training students to do functional communication training (FCT) in a VR environment is effective. We trained 13 college students to implement FCT for attention and escape functions using a virtual reality environment. Preliminary results show that VR BST was effective at increasing correct steps performed of FCT to mastery criterion levels with all participants. Future researchers should examine generalization and maintenance of these procedures.

 
 
Symposium #51
CE Offered: BACB
Assessment and Treatment of Pediatric Feeding Disorders
Saturday, May 25, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom A
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Kelley L. Harrison (Trumpet Behavioral Health)
Discussant: Caitlin A. Kirkwood (Center for Pediatric Behavioral Health, University of North Carolina Wilmington)
CE Instructor: Kelley L. Harrison, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Pediatric feeding disorders range in severity from mild selectivity to complete refusal. If left untreated, pediatric feeding disorders can result in serious health ramifications including malnutrition, growth delays, and developmental delays. In this symposium, we will describe treatments for disordered feeding that involve differential reinforcement, simultaneous presentation plus nonremoval of the spoon (NRS), synthesized reinforcement, and a variation of the finger prompt. Harrison and colleagues will present a study on the evaluation of how to best select an effective reinforcer for the treatment of food selectivity. McHugh and colleagues will present a study comparing a commonly used occupational therapy treatment (food chaining) to an empirically supported behavioral treatment (simultaneous presentation plus NRS) for the treatment of food selectivity in children with autism spectrum disorder. Gover and colleagues will present an extension of the use of shaping with synthesized reinforcers and partial extinction in treatment of pediatric food selectivity. Rubio and colleagues will present a study evaluating the efficacy and acceptability of a variation of the finger prompt to food refusal in children with feeding disorders.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): feeding disorders
Target Audience:

Researchers and practitioners.

Learning Objectives: 1) Attendees will be able to describe reinforcer assessment strategies to identify a reinforcer most likely to increase acceptance of nonpreferred foods in treatment 2) Attendees will be able to identify and explain effective antecedent- and consequent-based interventions for feeding disorders 3) Attendees will be able to describe an assessment and treatment process to treat pediatric feeding disorders 4) Attendees will be able to identify future directions for research on pediatric feeding disorders
 

Evaluation of a Pre-Assessment to Identify Most Effective Reinforcer for Treatment of Food Selectivity

Jessica Juanico (Trumpet Behavioral Health), KELLEY HARRISON (Trumpet Behavioral Health)
Abstract:

Differential reinforcement of alternative behavior is a widely used procedure to increase consumption of nonpreferred foods in children with food selectivity (e.g., Allison et al., 2012; Anderson & McMillan, 2001; Kern & Marder, 1996; Najdowski, Wallace, Doney, & Ghezzi, 2003). However, the types of reinforcing stimuli used varies across studies, including edibles, tangibles, attention, or a combination of edibles, tangibles, and attention. The purpose of the current study was to evaluate the use of a progressive ratio reinforcer assessment to identify a reinforcer that will most effectively increase the acceptance of nonpreferred foods. First, we conducted a progressive ratio reinforcer assessment using an arbitrary task. Then, we evaluated the effects of differential reinforcement using an edible, a tangible, a type of attention, or a combination of the stimuli as the reinforcer. We compared the effects of each reinforcer to the outcome of the progressive ratio reinforcer assessment to determine if this assessment accurately predicts the most effective reinforcer to be used during treatment for individuals with food selectivity. Preliminary results suggest the progressive ratio reinforcer assessment predicted the most effective reinforcer to be used during differential reinforcement with food selectivity for one participant.

 

A Comparison of Modified Food Chaining and Simultaneous Presentation Plus Nonremoval of the Spoon to Treat Food Selectivity in Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

CATHERINE MCHUGH (Brock University), Kimberley L. M. Zonneveld (Brock University)
Abstract:

Feeding disorders can range from mild (e.g., food selectivity by taste or texture) to severe (e.g., total food refusal). If left untreated, feeding disorders can result in serious health ramifications, including malnutrition, growth delays, and developmental delays. Recent studies comparing commonly used occupational therapy (OT) treatments and empirically supported applied behavior analysis (ABA) treatments found that the ABA treatments were effective for all participants while the OT treatments were ineffective for all participants. We used a multielement design to compare a modified version of commonly used OT treatment, Food Chaining, and an empirically validated ABA treatment, simultaneous presentation plus nonremoval of the spoon, to treat the food selectivity of 2 children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). For both participants, consumption of the target foods only increased during the ABA-treatment condition. We subsequently faded the size of the preferred food within the simultaneous-presentation arrangement, moved to a sequential-presentation arrangement, and then thinned the schedule of reinforcement. We will discuss the results within the context of treatment implications, limitations, and suggestions for future research.

 

Extensions of Shaping With Synthesized Reinforcers and Partial Extinction in Treatment of Pediatric Food Selectivity

HOLLY GOVER (Western New England University), Gregory P. Hanley (Western New England University), Robin K. Landa (Western New England University)
Abstract:

Gover, Hanley, Marcus, Ruppel, and Landa (in prep) described an assessment and treatment process addressing the food selectivity of five children with and without developmental disabilities. The process involved (a) indirectly and directly assessing food preference and problem behavior associated with mealtimes and (b) incorporating assessment results into a treatment process that relied on differential and synthesized reinforcement of successive approximates to eating. This paper extends that research by evaluating the process across novel populations including a group of three typically developing siblings using a group contingency and a young boy with autism who engaged in total food refusal and relied on a g-tube. Implications for practitioners and areas for future research will be discussed.

 
Efficacy and Acceptability of a Finger Prompt Variation for the Treatment of Pediatric Food Refusal
EMILY KATE RUBIO (Georgia State University), Valerie M. Volkert (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University School of Medicine), William G. Sharp (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University School of Medicine)
Abstract: Children with feeding disorders do not consume enough food or liquid to meet their nutritional needs resulting in placement of feeding tubes in severe cases (Kerwin, 1999; Schwartz, 2000). Feeding difficulties are primarily diagnosed in children with complex medical histories and co-morbid developmental disabilities, autism spectrum disorder, and/or related neurological disorders. Children with feeding disorders engage in active and/or passive refusal behavior to escape or avoid eating. Escape extinction combined with reinforcement is a well-established intervention to treat food refusal. Physical guidance procedures (e.g., jaw prompt, finger prompt) have been shown to increase food acceptance and decrease inappropriate mealtime behavior when escape extinction alone is ineffective. The finger prompt (Borrero, Schlereth, Rubio, & Taylor, 2013) has been evaluated once in the literature to treat active food refusal and needs further examination. Therefore, the purpose of this study was to assess a variation of finger prompt procedure to treat active and/or passive food refusal and caregivers’ acceptability of it. Three children age 1 to 4 years admitted to an intensive feeding disorders program and their caregivers participated. Across all participants, the finger prompt was effective in increasing bite acceptance and decreasing or maintaining inappropriate behavior at low levels for these participants.
 
 
Symposium #52
CE Offered: BACB
Behavior Change for a Sustainable World: Four Research Projects
Saturday, May 25, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Fairmont, B2, Imperial Ballroom
Area: CSS/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: William L. Heward (The Ohio State University)
Discussant: Susan M. Schneider (Root Solutions)
CE Instructor: William L. Heward, Ed.D.
Abstract: For many climate scientists, the biggest challenge of global warming has shifted from proving it is real to getting people to change their behavior in response to it (Thompson, 2010; Werner, 2012). Even if all fossil fuel emissions ceased today, the Earth will continue warming for decades (Marcott, Shakun, Clark, & Mix, 2013). Successfully adapting to that reality will require massive changes in energy sources and use, transportation infrastructure, food production, ecosystem protection, and economic practices on a global scale far beyond the scale of behavior changes we can make now. But the collective impact of the behavior changes we make now can give society time to discover the technological fixes and implement the policy changes necessary to make carbon neutrality and truly sustainable society realities. For researchers and practitioners of a science devoted to understanding behavior and how to change it, helping people mitigate and adapt to climate change is a tremendous opportunity, challenge, and responsibility. This symposium will feature four studies using behavior analysis concepts and principles to promote sustainable practices/environmentally friendly behavior change.
Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience: Behavior analysts, teachers and students of behavior analysts.
Learning Objectives: 1. Describe how drivers can obtain real-time feedback on hard-accelerations and hard-braking behaviors. 2. Describe the experimental design and results of a treatment package that reduced idling by drivers picking up students at three schools. 3. Describe the behavior change project that reduced use of sunscreens containing toxic chemicals that harm coral reefs and the ocean eco-system.
 

Promoting Eco-Driving With Immediate Feedback

JAVID RAHAMAN (Rowan University), Bethany R. Raiff (Rowan University)
Abstract:

Driving gasoline powered cars contributes to greenhouse gas emissions and pollutants. This study used an ABAB reversal design to examine the effects of immediate feedback on non-ecofriendly driving behavior (i.e., hard braking, hard accelerating). An “Automatic” device was installed in each participant’s car to measure specific parameters of driving, including accelerating, braking, and fuel consumption. During the baseline condition participants received feedback after driving by logging in to the Automatic application on their smartphone. During the immediate condition participants received feedback from the “Automatic” device while driving. All three participants had an overall decrease in episodes of hard accelerations/hard brakes during the immediate feedback condition compared to the delayed feedback baseline condition.

 
Reducing Electricity Consumption in Commercial Printers
JESSICA DAY-WATKINS (Drexel University), Lauren K. Schnell (Hunter College), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University)
Abstract: Scientists in the field of applied behavior analysis have recommended that behavior analysts apply their attention to the field of sustainability (Heward and Chance, 2010). No sustainability study to date has been published on reductions in printer usage. There are a number of advantages to targeting this topography of energy consumption including reductions energy and paper as well as cost savings to the organization. Given the advantages in targeting commercial printers, this study used automated data collection technology to study reductions of energy consumption from commercial printers in two office suites using electronic feedback, incentives while adding antecedent strategies in the form of manipulating the onset of power saver mode. The data demonstrate that power-saving mode was effective in reducing kilowatt hour energy consumption across both office suites.
 

Enough With the Idling! Evaluation of a Treatment Package to Reduce Vehicle Idling at Three Schools in New Jersey

CORTNEY DEBIASE (Alpine Learning Group), Jaime DeQuinzio (Alpine Learning Group), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group)
Abstract:

Idling vehicles pollute the air around the vehicle and the exhaust can enter school buildings through air intakes, doors, and open windows. Children are especially vulnerable to vehicle emissions because of their developing lungs, smaller lung surface area, and higher inhalation rate. Emissions can lead to serious health conditions like asthma and allergies (US Environmental Protection Agency, 2003). Along with health conditions, idling vehicles also cause wasted fuel, wear and tear, and wasted money. Given these factors, we designed a study to decrease vehicle idling during school dismissal. We conducted a non-current multiple baseline design across three schools to evaluate the effects of a treatment package on the percentage of 10-s intervals during which vehicles were idling 15 minutes prior to dismissal. The treatment package consisted of providing drivers with a written policy and rationale along with verbal instructions as well as stimulus prompts in the form of “No Idling” signs placed on school grounds. Idling decreased across the three schools with the implementation of the treatment package, however data remained variable. The mean percentage of intervals scored with idling decreased from baseline to treatment. The importance of implementing behavior change for a sustainable world programs within schools will be discussed, as well as the challenges of such programs.

 

Increasing Use of Non-Oxybenzone Sunscreen

Naomi Tachera (Hawai'i Association for Behavior Analysis), AMANDA N. KELLY (BEHAVIORBABE (Hawaii))
Abstract:

Coral bleaching negatively impacts the biodiversity and functioning of reef systems and has become a worldwide phenomenon. Benzophenone-3 (BP-3; oxybenzone) contributes to coral bleaching, decline of coral growth and death (Downs et al., 2015). Oxybenzone is also harmful algae, fish and mammals. Oxybenzone is commonly found in sunscreen lotions to protect against the harmful effects of ultraviolet light. Danovaro et al. (2008) reports that 6-000-14,000 tons of sunscreen is discharged into the coral reefs each year. The level of oxybenzone concentration deemed toxic to Hawai?I’s coral reefs is 62 parts per trillion (PPT). Downs et al (2015) tested levels of 700+ PPT. Hawai?i has banned the use of sunscreens containing oxybenzone effective 2021. This presentation will describe a project with dual goals of educating people and getting them to switch to mineral-based, oxybenzone-free sunscreen. Because there were not enough brands that communicated or connected with Hawai?ian culture, I decided to develop my own mineral sunscreen. After two years I successfully obtained FDA approval for Ko?a (Hawai’ian word for coral) sunscreen. To date, I have traded more than 80 free 2-oz. samples of Ko?a sunscreen for more than 150 bottles of reef killing sunscreen. I also organize sunscreen drop offs to ensure the reef killing sunscreen goes to the state-run incinerator and never make its way to the ocean and landfills.

 
 
Symposium #53
CE Offered: BACB
An Evaluation of Individual and Synthesized Reinforcement Contingencies During the Assessment and Treatment of Destructive Behavior
Saturday, May 25, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom C
Area: DDA/EAB; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Katherine Brown (Munroe Meyer Institute)
Discussant: Wayne W. Fisher (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
CE Instructor: Wayne W. Fisher, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Functional-analysis methodology allows researchers and clinicians to identify the functional variables maintaining severe destructive behavior (e.g.., self-injurious behavior). Several researchers have expanded upon Iwata et al.’s (1982/1994) initial functional-analysis paper to improve the efficacy and efficiency of functional-analysis procedures, including combining individual consequences (e.g., escape to attention) within test and control conditions (i.e., synthesized contingency analysis) as opposed to the traditional approach of evaluating individual contingencies (e.g., escape alone, attention alone). Recently, Hanley et al. (2014) detailed an approach to developing and assessing destructive behavior known as interview-informed synthesized contingency analysis, which uses caregiver or other stakeholder report and observation to inform the test and control conditions within the synthesized contingency analysis. Though several studies have shown that such an approach can result in brief assessments and clinically significant treatment effects (e.g., Jessel et al. 2018; Rose & Beaulieu, 2018), other studies have highlighted possible limitations to the methodology, such as including potentially irrelevant reinforcers during assessment and treatment (Fisher et al., 2016; Greer et al., in press). This symposium collects applied and translational comparisons of individual and synthesized contingencies from different research groups to further evaluate the correspondence between the approaches, including the benefits and limitations of each strategy.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): functional analysis, functional assessment, IISCA, synthesized contingency
Target Audience:

The target audience for this symposium is comprised of researchers and clinicians who conduct functional analyses within their research and practice, or other behavior analysts who wish to learn about the potential benefits and and limitations of individual and synthesized contingency analyses.

Learning Objectives: Audience members will learn (1) the potential benefits and limitations of using individual contingencies during functional analysis, (2) the potential benefits and limitations of using synthesized contingencies during synthesized contingency analysis, and (3) information regarding the correspondence between the two methodologies.
 
A Comparison of Isolated and Synthesized Contingencies in Functional Analyses
KATHLEEN HOLEHAN (University of Kansas), Claudia L. Dozier (University of Kansas), Sara Camille Diaz de Villegas (University of Kansas), Rachel Jess (University of Kansas), Kelsey Shinnick (University of Kansas), Elizabeth Foley (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Since Iwata, Dorsey, Slifer, Bauman, and Richman (1982/1994) developed the first comprehensive functional analysis methodology, researchers have suggested various procedural modifications to increase the efficacy and efficiency of FAs (Beavers, Iwata, & Lerman, 2013). In a series of recent studies, Hanley and colleagues have evaluated the efficacy of a FA methodology termed the interview-informed synthesized contingency analysis (IISCA; e.g., Hanley, Jin, Vanselow, & Hanratty, 2014), which involves conducting (a) an open-ended interview to determine potential antecedents, consequences, and precursors to target problem behavior, (b) a brief observation based on the interview results, and (c) test and control conditions that involve synthesized contingencies (as determined by interview and observation). A limitation of this methodology is the necessity of synthesizing contingencies is unknown. We extended Fisher et al. (2016) and Slaton, Hanley, and Raferty (2017) by comparing the outcomes of FAs that involved isolated versus synthesized contingencies, then compared the effects of function-based interventions based on the outcomes for problem behavior of five children with intellectual and developmental disabilities. To date, results suggest that synthesized contingencies were not necessary to show discriminated responding for most participants, and function-based treatments based on isolated contingencies were effective for decreasing problem behavior.
 
Comparisons of Standardized and Interview-Informed Synthesized Reinforcement Contingencies Relative to Traditional Functional Analysis
ADAM M. BRIGGS (Eastern Michigan University), Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Daniel R. Mitteer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Wayne W. Fisher (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Andrew Sodawasser (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Abstract: We compared the functions of problem behavior identified by (a) a functional analysis (FA), (b) an interview-informed synthesized contingency analysis (IISCA) that was informed by the results of an open-ended interview and a structured observation, and (c) a standardized-synthesized contingency analysis (SSCA) in which we synthesized three common functions of problem behavior across 12 consecutive individuals. In doing so, we addressed questions about the necessity of synthesized contingency analysis for determining behavioral function and the utility of the assessments informing synthesis. Synthesized contingency analysis was necessary for 0 of the 12 participants to identify the variables maintaining problem behavior, replicating the findings of Fisher, Greer, Romani, Zangrillo, and Owen (2016). Error type (i.e., false positives, false negatives) and prevalence were similar across functions identified by the IISCA and those from the SSCA, calling into question the utility of the open-ended interview and the structured observation that informed the IISCA. We discuss the implications of these and other findings relative to the variables reinforcing problem behavior and FA methodology.
 
A Comparative Evaluation of Functional Analytic Methods
ELIZABETH MCKAY SANSING (University of North Texas), Karen A. Toussaint (University of North Texas), Crysta Perkins (University of North Texas), Maggie Nye (University of North Texas)
Abstract: An extensive amount of research in the functional analysis literature has demonstrated that problem behavior is often sensitive to single reinforcement contingencies. Nevertheless, there is a growing body of research that suggests that problem behavior is sensitive to unique combinations of individual reinforcement contingencies, referred to as a synthesized contingency. Researchers have conducted comparative analyses examining the correspondence between the two methods, but the results are mixed (Fisher et al., 2016; Slaton, Hanley, & Rafferty, 2017). Additional research is needed to compare the outcomes of each approach in order to provide clarity. The purpose of the current study was to further evaluate the use of two different functional analytic methods: the individual-contingency functional analysis (FA) and the interview-informed synthesized contingency analysis (IISCA). We compared the results of each analysis for five individuals who engaged in problem behavior. Results suggests that problem behavior was maintained by individual reinforcement contingencies for all five participants. In addition, we evaluated a subsequent function-based treatment that reduced problem behavior by 90% for all five individuals.
 

A Translational Evaluation of Potential Iatrogenic Effects of Single and Combined Contingencies During Functional Analyses

BILLIE RETZLAFF (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Wayne W. Fisher (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Jessica Akers (Baylor University), Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Abstract:

Recent research on the interview informed synthesized contingency analysis (IISCA) has extolled its benefits relative to traditional functional analysis (FA; e.g., efficiency; Slaton, Hanley, & Raftery, 2017) while other research has focused on its shortcomings (e.g., false-positive outcomes; Fisher, Greer, Romani, Zangrillo, & Owen, 2016). One limitation of prior comparisons is investigators could not ascertain with surety the true function(s) of the participants’ problem behavior for use as the criterion variable. We conducted a translational study to circumvent this limitation by training a specific function for a surrogate destructive behavior prior to conducting an FA and synthesized contingency analysis (SCA) of this response. The FA correctly identified the function of the target response in all six cases and produced no iatrogenic effects. The SCA produced differentiated results in all cases, and produced iatrogenic effects in three of six cases. We discuss these finding in terms the mechanisms that may promote iatrogenic effects.

 
 
Symposium #54
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Innovations in Organizational Behavior Management
Saturday, May 25, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Concourse Level, Michigan 1 A-C
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Byron J. Wine (The Faison Center and Florida Institute of Technology )
Discussant: Joshua K. Pritchard (Southern Illinois University)
CE Instructor: Joshua K. Pritchard, Ph.D.
Abstract:

As a sub-discipline of ABA Organizational Behavior Management (OBM) relies on applied research to drive new procedures and refine existing techniques. This symposium features data from four applied studies across a number of domains. Two presentations focus on different aspects of feedback: temporal location and building rapport. Another presentation will focus on a variation of token economies where guests provide tokens to employees. The last study examines a method using the principles of gamification to encourage professional development in line-level employees. Attendees of this symposium will be able to use the information presented to refine practice and generate new lines of research in OBM.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Practicing behavior analysts, researchers, and graduate students in OBM.

 
The Effects of Rapport Building on Performance and Discretionary Effort
SCOTT MICHAEL CURRY (Florida Institute of Technology), Nicole Gravina (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: A common concern among business professionals is building rapport in the workplace. However, limited research has systematically evaluated the effects of rapport on performance. The current study evaluated the effects of building rapport versus not building rapport on performance in an analogue setting. Results indicated that the rapport-building group completed more work than the non-rapport group.
 
On the Implementation of a Gamified Professional Development System for Direct Care Staff
JENNIFER GRABOYES CAMBLIN (The Faison School for Autism), Eli T. Newcomb (The Faison Center), Francesca Jones (The Faison Center), Byron J. Wine (The Faison Center)
Abstract: Many industries and professions rely heavily on entry level staff. In some settings, it is important to further develop these individuals after onboarding and initial training is complete. Gamification in the workplace involves the redesign of employee activities such that they resemble or draw from environmental contingencies used in game design. The purpose of this presentation is to provide a descriptive example of how a gamified model of professional development was implemented for a workforce of approximately 130 entry level, direct-care staff.
 
The Effects of Temporal Placement of Feedback on Performance With and Without Goals
CHRISTOPHER MORGAN (The Faison Center, Inc.), Byron J. Wine (The Faison Center)
Abstract: This presentation compares the effects of temporal placement of feedback, and presence or absence of stated goals, on skill acquisition. Four conditions were examined: feedback before performance with goals, feedback before performance without goals, feedback after performance with goals, and feedback after performance without goals. The results of this study found no statistically significant difference in performance across the four conditions.
 
Using a Guest-Delivered Token Economy to Increase Employee-Guest Interactions at a Zoo
CASSIE VERGASON (Florida Institute of Technology), Nicole Gravina (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: Interactions between employees and guests in a zoological facility can promote educational opportunities and improve guest satisfaction. The present study used a guest-delivered token economy to promote guest greetings by employees at a zoological facility. An ABAB design was used to evaluate the intervention and results showed increases of 35.3% and 45.0% in correct employee-guest interactions in each intervention phase compared to baseline, thus suggesting that a guest-delivered token economy is an effective way to improve guest greetings.
 
 
Symposium #56
CE Offered: BACB
Behavioral Interventions Without Escape Extinction in the Treatment of Food Selectivity
Saturday, May 25, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 1/2
Area: CBM/AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: Bryant C. Silbaugh (The University of Texas at San Antonio, Department of Interdisciplinary Learning and Teaching )
CE Instructor: Bryant C. Silbaugh, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Most pediatric feeding problems are maintained by negative reinforcement in the form of bite or meal termination. Nevertheless, escape extinction-based interventions have undesirable side effects (e.g., extinction-burst) which have motivated researchers to further develop and evaluate interventions that do not rely on escape extinction. The studies herein examined the evidence for the effects of the high-probability instructional sequence on feeding in children, and evaluated the effects of a full, hierarchically organized instructional sequence on generalized food consumption in a typically developing boy with food selectivity. In a final clinical case study, clinicians evaluated the effects of differential reinforcement of acceptance using high preferred foods on acceptance, gagging, and expulsion in both restricted- and free-operant arrangements for a boy with developmental delays. The evidence base for the high-probability instructional sequence suggests the intervention can improve feeding, but the authors call for further research to clarify when and for whom the intervention is effective. Delivering an instructional sequence in which the final step was consumption of a nonpreferred food, consumption of nonpreferred foods increased and the researchers observed generalization. In the clinical case study, differential reinforcement of acceptance with high preferred foods increased self-fed acceptance of nonpreferred foods and this improvement coincided with reductions in gagging and expulsion. These data will be discussed in the context of apparent trends in research on behavioral interventions for feeding problems over the last decade.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Feeding disorders, Food selectivity, High-probability sequence
Target Audience:

Researchers and practitioners focused on feeding interventions

Learning Objectives: (1) identify three behavioral interventions for food selectivity that do not involve escape extinction. (2) describe how differential reinforcement can be applied to increase acceptance in a free-operant arrangement without escape extinction. (3) discuss the evidence for the effects of the high-probability sequence on feeding in children with feeding disorders.
 

A Synthesis of Research on the Effects of the High-Probability Instructional Sequence in Children With Feeding Disorders

(Applied Research)
Gabriela Calderon (The University of Texas at San Antonio), BRYANT SILBAUGH (The University of Texas at San Antonio, Department of Interdisciplinary Learning and Teaching)
Abstract:

The high-probability (high-p) instructional sequence is an intervention commonly used to increase compliance. It involves delivering a series of requests with a high probability of compliance prior to the delivery of a request with a low probability of compliance. Researchers have evaluated whether the high-p sequence can increase compliance with low probability (low-p) mealtime demands to consume nonpreferred foods in children with pediatric feeding disorders, for example, by delivering multiple high-p mealtime demands to consume a preferred food prior to the delivery of a low-p mealtime demand (e.g., to consume a bite of a nonpreferred food). The effects of the high-p sequence have varied across studies, and a systematic synthesis of the literature to guide practice and further research is lacking. We conducted a systematic multistep search and identified seven studies that met inclusion criteria. We then extracted data on participant and study characteristics and compared the literature to the 2014 Council for Exceptional Children (CEC): Standards for Evidence-Based Practices in Special Education. Preliminary results suggest that (a) the high-probability instructional sequence can improve compliance with low-p mealtime demands in young children with feeding disorders but more research is needed to clarify when and for whom the intervention is likely to be effective, (b) additional research should examine the effects of the high-p on feeding in older children or adults with disabilities as more intrusive procedure such as escape extinction-based procedures become inappropriate, and (c) the evidence does not meet the CEC’s standards for an evidence-based practice.

 
Effects of a Full Instructional Sequence on Generalized Food Consumption
(Applied Research)
VARSOVIA HERNANDEZ ESLAVA ESLAVA (Universidad Veracruzana), Jonathan K Fernand (Aurora University)
Abstract: The purpose of the current study was to examine the effects of delivering a full- instructional sequence on generalized consumption of nonpreferred foods with similar properties to treatment foods. The participant was a 5-year-old, typically-developing child with a history of food selectivity. The participant was asked to complete each step of an instructional sequence in which the final step was consumption of a nonpreferred food. Praise was delivered after compliance to complete each step and a preferred food was delivered after compliance with the final step. The full- instructional sequence was effective in increasing consumption of nonpreferred foods and generalization was observed to nontarget foods with similar properties. The importance of evaluating reinforcer-based procedures to treat food selectivity will be discussed.
 

A Case Study in the Differential Reinforcement of Acceptance in a Boy With Developmental Delays and Food Selectivity During Restricted- And Free-Operant Arrangements

(Service Delivery)
MARIANA DE LOS SANTOS (Bloom Childrens Center), Bryant C. Silbaugh (The University of Texas at San Antonio, Department of Interdisciplinary Learning and Teaching)
Abstract:

Differential reinforcement of alternative behavior (DRA) with high-preferred food can improve feeding problems in children with autism and food selectivity. However, clinical case studies of the effects of DRA in the absence of escape extinction-based procedures such as the nonremoval of the spoon are limited, especially for free-operant feeding arrangements. The current clinical case study evaluated the effects of a Fixed-Ratio 1 schedule of DRA on acceptance of nonpreferred foods in a boy with developmental delays and food selectivity in clinic and home settings. We conducted the first treatment evaluation in a restricted operant arrangement targeting feeder-fed bites. We then incorporated mastered foods from the restricted operant arrangement into an evaluation of DRA for self-feeding in a free-operant arrangement. The results suggest that (a) DRA using high-preferred foods increased self-feeding of nonpreferred foods in a free-operant arrangement without escape extinction, (b) the effects generalized across foods, and (c) increased self-fed acceptance coincided with a reduction in expulsion and gagging.

 
 
Symposium #57
CE Offered: BACB
Evaluating and Increasing Physical Activity in Children
Saturday, May 25, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 3/4
Area: CBM/DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Lorraine A Becerra (Utah State University)
CE Instructor: Lorraine A Becerra, M.A.
Abstract: This symposium will highlight different methods to evaluate and increase physical activity engagement across children who are typically-developing or diagnosed with a disability. The first study determined the extent to which the Step it UP! game increased the number of steps taken by children in a physical-education (PE) class. The second study examined the use of photographic activity schedules to increase the percent of moderate-to-vigorous physical activity (MVPA) and number of different activities completed across two contexts for all participants. The final study explored factors that contributed to ineffective interventions aimed to increase physical activity for individuals with disabilities.
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): fitness, Good-Behavior Game, physical activity, physical education
Target Audience: Practitioners and researchers
Learning Objectives: 1. Describe recent advances in physical activity research. 2. State methods to measure and evaluate physical activity engagement. 3. Describe factors influencing the effectiveness physical activity interventions.
 
Using the Step it UP! Game to Increase Physical Activity During Physical-Education Classes
CARLA BURJI (University of the Pacific), Matthew P. Normand (University of the Pacific)
Abstract: The Step it UP! Game is an interdependent group reinforcement contingency based on the Good Behavior Game. We evaluated the effects of the Step it UP! Game on the number of steps taken by third-grade students during physical-education (PE) classes at a local public elementary school. We divided the class into two teams and awarded a “Step it UP! Champ” badge to the members of the team with the highest mean step totals at the end of each game. We used a reversal design to compare the mean number of steps taken while playing the game and during regular PE classes. Overall, participants took more steps while playing the game than they did during class periods without the game. When given the opportunity to choose playing the Step it UP! Game or having regular PE class during a follow-up session, 16 of 18 participants voted to play the game.
 

An Evaluation of Photographic Activity Schedules to Increase Moderate-to-Vigorous Physical Activity in Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

LORRAINE A BECERRA (Utah State University), Thomas S. Higbee (Utah State University), Mariana Vieira (Pontifícia Universidade Católica, São Paulo, Brazil), Azure Pellegrino (University of Kansas), Katelin Hobson (University of Washington Doctoral Student)
Abstract:

Obesity rates in children who live in the United States have increased 17% in the past few decades and affects approximately 1/3 of U.S. children (Ogden, Carroll, Kit, & Flegal, 2012). Occurrence of obesity in children with disabilities, including Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD), were found to be 40% higher than for children without disabilities (CDC, 2014; Hinckson et al. 2013; Curtin et al. 2010). Regular moderate-to-vigorous physical activity (MVPA) is likely to reduce many risks associated with obesity in children (U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 2012). The Observational System for Recording Physical Activity codes (OSRAC; Brown et al., 2009) was used to determine the lowest percent of MVPA across five different contexts (i.e., control, outdoor toys, indoor toys, empty field, fixed equipment) for three preschool children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Photographic activity schedules were used to increase the number of different activities completed and percent of MVPA in the two lowest responding contexts for all participants.

 
Interventions to Increase Physical Activity Don’t Always Work: What We Can Learn from Failure
DIEGO VALBUENA (University of South Florida), Bryon Miller (University of South Florida), Carolina Luque (University of South Florida), Raymond G. Miltenberger (University of South Florida)
Abstract: Research shows that various interventions such as self-monitoring, feedback, public posting, and rewards, are effective for increasing physical activity. However, research does not suggest the limits of these interventions nor the factors that may contribute to the ineffectiveness of interventions. In this paper, we describe four studies evaluating interventions implemented in schools or agencies serving adults with disabilities to increase physical activity in which interventions were not effective. We discuss these “treatment failures” and the factors that may have contributed to the failure. These factors include poor implementation fidelity, lack of administrative support from the school, issues with the individuals implementing the procedures, and the limitations of contingencies applied to daily steps. We conclude with recommendations for future research.
 
 
Symposium #59
CE Offered: BACB
Efforts to Improve Outcomes for Individuals With Intellectual Disabilities Through Behavior Analysis Applied to a State Service System
Saturday, May 25, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom A
Area: DDA/OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Melantha Witherspoon (Missouri Department of Mental Health/Division of Developmental Disabilities)
CE Instructor: Teresa A. Rodgers, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Missouri Division of Developmental Disabilities is addressing the shortage qualified behavior analysts, increasingly challenging behaviors and continued emphasis on positive, person-centered supports that improve quality of life through an organizational behavior management approach. Three systemic level interventions applying behavioral principles on a meta-level to a state system of services for intellectual disabilities will be discussed. These systemic interventions involve data, systems and practices to improve outcomes for individuals and services, especially Applied Behavior Analysis services across multiple providers, regions and situations. Thinking and applying behavior analysis on a meta-level is sometimes confusing and difficult, these projects utilize a public health, three tiered prevention model, and are demonstrating significant results. The projects involve prevention of crisis and problem behaviors through increasing implementation of strategies aimed at improving quality of life by service agencies, state level interventions that maximize limited skilled resources and evaluate easily available population data and variables, and the use of peer review to improve behavioral services at an individual level.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): organizational management, service systems,, system change
Target Audience:

Intermediate and Advanced behavior analysts involved in administration or management or who are interested in working at a governmental level.

Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will identify the three prevention levels of the public health model and how applied behavior analysis practice and principles can be utilized to address service issues. 2. Participants will be able to describe what a constructive peer review process is and how it can improve quality of services. 3. Participants will identify challenges to meta level data collection and analysis.
 

Prevention of Crisis and Problem Behaviors through Systemic Intervention: Missouri Tiered Supports

TERESA A. RODGERS (Missouri Department of Mental Health Division of Developmental Disabilities), Rhiannon Marie Evans (The Chicago School and Missouri Department of Mental Health/Division of Developmental Disabilities)
Abstract:

The public health model that emphasizes prevention and the overall health of a public rather than emphasizing the poor health of one, or poor health issues specifically. In contrast, traditional healthcare focuses on the health of one individual. The model addresses strategies and practices that maintain the health of the public and works to increase these as a primary prevention effort. We suggest that ABA tends to align with traditional healthcare in that a large effort in training new practitioners and in the provision of services focuses on deviant or problem behaviors rather than conditions necessary for healthy and desirable behaviors. The Missouri Division of Developmental Disabilities has adopted the public health model to focus on practices or services that result in higher quality of life for individuals and developing state level systems to promote and maintain these. Implementation science informs us as to the necessary efforts and conditions that change momentary interventions to “a way we do business”. Data for agencies adopting the process at a high degree of fidelity suggests that broad scope strategies can reduce behavior problems in the agency to a significant degree.

 

Identifying High-Risk Behavior: State Level Data Collection and Analysis and Intervention Strategies

LUCAS EVANS (Missouri Division of Developmental Disabilities)
Abstract:

State systems such as Developmental Disabilities and Intellectual Disabilities spend a significant portion of the allotted funding on relatively few individuals who have significant challenges and needs. Approaching this issue with the public health model is helpful in moving efforts towards large-scale interventions maximizing limited resources. These include efforts such as implementing systemic changes like improved data collection and analysis, sharing data strategically, targeted training, intensive review of restrictive strategies and peer review committees. Missouri’s process of behavioral system analysis and systemic interventions will be discussed and the data for the past two years will be shared.

 

Peer Review Committees as an Intervention to Improve Quality of Behavioral Services and Decrease High-Risk Outcomes

RITA M COOPER (Missouri Department of Mental Health/Division of Developmental Disabilities)
Abstract:

Peer review committees can effectively provide consultative feedback that both improves the behavior support for the person and quality of services in general. Missouri Division of Developmental Disabilities has a voluntary peer review committee. This process involves community behavior analysts reviewing plans and data using a standard checklist for individuals in high-risk categories. Data from this process includes the items on the checklist missed and post review changes in high-risk outcomes. Data for the checklist and commonly missing elements will be reviewed. The checklist items will be demonstrated as best practice standards referenced to ABA literature and BACB and state funding agency requirements. The data suggest that peer review improves both the plans and reduces the likelihood of an individual continuing to experience high-risk outcomes.

 
 
Symposium #60
CE Offered: BACB
Sources and Outcomes of Bi-Directional Naming
Saturday, May 25, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 1-3
Area: DEV/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Shahad Alsharif (Teacher College, Columbia University )
CE Instructor: Shahad Alsharif, M.A.
Abstract:

Bi-directional naming (BiN) is a verbal behavior cusp. Initially, listener and speaker behavior are acquired independently and BiN represents the joining of listener and speaker repertoires. In this symposium, three papers will discuss the sources and outcomes of BiN. The first two papers describe experiences that induce BiN. Hotchkiss, Karanian, and Fienup analyzed two intensities of a tact protocol and the effects on inducing BiN. Hawkins, Gautreaux, and Chiesa examined the effects of a history of multiple exemplar instruction on joint incidental BiN. The third paper examined the outcomes of a BiN repertoire. Longano, Harms, Wilczewski, and Ishikawa examined the acquisition of novel tacts under direct instruction and incidental learning conditions and found faster acquisition during incidental learning opportunities.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): bi-directional naming, naming, verbal cusps
Target Audience:

participants interested in learning about the sources and outcomes of bi-directional naming, or the joining of speaker and listener repertoires

Learning Objectives: 1. Define bi-directional naming 2. Identify experiences that induce bi-directional naming 3. Identify how to modify instruction for individuals with bi-directional naming
 
Parametric Analysis of the Intensive Tact Procotol to Induce Bi-Directional Naming
REBECCA HOTCHKISS (Teacher's College at Columbia University), Genevieve Karanian (Columbia University Teachers College), Daniel Mark Fienup (Columbia University Teachers College)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to conduct a parametric analysis of verbal behavior developmental protocols used to induce verbal behavioral cusps/capabilities, to determine the most efficient methods of implementing the protocols based on an individual’s present level of verbal behavioral functioning. A parametric analysis was conducted on the intensity of an Intensive Tact Instruction (ITI) protocol on the induction of Bidirectional Naming (BiN). The researcher matched the participants into dyads based on their similarity in BiN level and rate of learning to assess the effects of the full (100 learn unit) intensity and the accelerated (50 learn unit) intensity of the ITI protocol. Results found that students with higher BiN level and more cusps/capabilities demonstrated equivalent progress when given the accelerated ITI protocol compared to those who received the full ITI protocol. However, those with lower BiN levels and less verbal behavior development benefitted from the full ITI protocol.
 

Testing the Effects of Multiple Exemplar Instruction on the Induction of Joint Incidental Bidirectional Naming in Older Children and Young Adults Diagnosed With Autism

EMMA HAWKINS (Jigsaw CABAS School), Grant Gautreaux (Nicholls State University), Mecca Chiesa (University of Kent)
Abstract:

Joint Incidental Bidirectional Naming (Hawkins, Gautreaux, & Chiesa, 2018) is a subtype of Common Bidirectional Naming (Miguel, 2016). Joint Incidental Bidirectional Naming is defined as the emergence of both untaught listener behaviour and untaught speaker behaviour following an incidental language experience providing the names of novel items. No direct teaching is involved in the acquisition of the names of these novel items. We evaluated the effectiveness of Multiple Exemplar Instruction (MEI) on the induction of Joint Incidental Bidirectional Naming with a group of ten older children and young adults, aged 6-18 years, diagnosed with autism and a learning disability. A multiple probe design was used to test for the acquisition of Joint Incidental Bidirectional Naming. One participant acquired Joint Incidental Bidirectional Naming following the MEI procedure. Four participants met the criteria for Joint Incidental Bidirectional Naming prior to the MEI procedure being implemented. Five participants did not meet the criteria for Joint Incidental Bidirectional Naming post-MEI intervention. The potential of tests producing false negative scores and the effects of multiple testing were discussed. It was also suggested that additional prerequisite behavioural cusps may need to be present prior to implementing procedures to induce Joint Incidental Bidirectional Naming.

 

A Study of the Rate of Tact Acquisition Under Two Experimental Conditions: Direct Tact Instruction and Naming Experiences

Jennifer Longano (Fred S. Keller School), GINGER HARMS (Columbia University Teachers College), Joanna Wilczewski (Columbia University Teachers College), Nana Ishikawa (Columbia University Teachers College)
Abstract:

We investigated the rate of tact acquisition under two experimental conditions, direct tact instruction and the presentation of Naming experiences. Two experiments were conducted using ABAB design counterbalanced across nine participants. Under the direct tact instruction condition, instructors presented a picture, without a verbal antecedent, and delivered social praise contingent on correct responses and a correction procedure (prompting the correct response and representing the picture) contingent on incorrection response. During the naming experiences phases, the instructors presented the picture and said the name of the picture while the participants were attending to the picture. After, we conducted probes to determine if the participants acquired the tacts presented during the naming experiences. Results from both Experiments showed faster rates of acquisition under the naming experience conditions. Participants with Unilateral naming and/or Bidirectional Naming acquired language in the form of tacts at higher rates incidental, whereas, the participants who did not demonstrate Unilateral naming did not.

 
 
Symposium #63
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Applications and Extensions of Equivalence-Based Instruction
Saturday, May 25, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: EDC/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Leif Albright (Caldwell University)
CE Instructor: Leif Albright, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The three talks in this symposium describe studies in which equivalence-based instruction (EBI) was used to teach classes of animal features, food portion estimation, and verbal operant academic content. The first study was a replication and extension of O’Neill, Rehfeldt, Ninness, Muñoz, & Mellor (2015). Computer EBI was compared to studying from flash cards to teach Skinner’s verbal operants to college students. In the second study, which was an extension of prior studies in which EBI was used to teach portion estimation of food items, non-food items were used during training to increase portion-size estimation accuracy. Preferred and non-preferred foods were used to assess generalization of portion-size estimation accuracy. In the third study, which was a replication of Keintz, Miguel, Kao, and Finn (2011), EBI was used to teach three classes of animal features and to evaluate the emergence of visual-visual and auditory-visual relations and speaker behavior by children with autism spectrum disorder. Together, the three studies in this symposium extend the content domains and procedures that can be used to establish equivalence classes of relevant content.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): derived relations, equivalence, verbal behavior
Target Audience:

The target audience is practitioners who work with children with autism, and those who use equivalence-based instruction to teach socially relevant content.

 

Comparing Flash Cards and Stimulus Equivalence-Based Instruction to Teach Verbal Operants to College Students

Gayathiri Ramadoss (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), LEIF ALBRIGHT (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), April N. Kisamore (Hunter College), Tina Sidener (Caldwell University)
Abstract:

The present study compared the effects of computer-based stimulus equivalence-based instruction (EBI) to that of studying from flash cards to teach Skinner’s verbal operants. Ten undergraduate or graduate students enrolled in an introductory course in Applied Behavior Analysis served as participants. One group was exposed to EBI and a comparison group studied a set of flash cards with all the stimuli presorted into correct groups. Four classes of verbal operants (mand, tact, intraverbal, and echoic) were taught. Each class consisted of 4 stimulus members (name of the term, a colloquial definition, formal definition, and vignettes). Generalization of class-consistent responding was assessed for participants in both groups via a series of sorting tasks, written tests, and computer-based matching tests. Both IOA and treatment integrity data were at least 99%. The results of this study showed that participants of both the EBI group and the flash cards group formed classes across all testing formats. The results of this study did not align with past research in showing efficiency of EBI compared to studying pre-sorted flash cards in establishing academic skills with advanced learners. Overall the EBI group performed at a level that was 10-15% above that of the control group.

 

Equivalence-Based Instruction With Non-Food Items to Increase Portion-Size Estimation Accuracy

Brianna Regan (Caldwell University), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Ruth M. DeBar (Caldwell University), JACQUELINE CARROW (Caldwell University)
Abstract:

Researchers have previously taught individuals how to more accurately estimate portion-sizes of foods using equivalence-based instruction (EBI). The purpose of the current study was to evaluate whether non-food items could be used during training to increase portion-size estimation accuracy. Preferred and non-preferred foods were used to assess generalization of portion-size estimation accuracy. Foods were identified through an assessment and varied per participant. Two non-food items were used for training and one novel non-food item was used to assess for generalization of portion-size accuracy. Three classes of stimuli were taught using EBI (i.e., ¼ cup, ½ cup, and 1 cup). The members of each class were represented by portion-size measurement aids, amounts on paper plates, and measuring cups. All participants more accurately estimated each portion-size of non-food items after training sessions. Accurate estimation also generalized to preferred and non-preferred foods for all participants. IOA and procedural data were at least 99%.

 

Teaching Creature Features to Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder Using Equivalence-Based Instruction

LAUREN GRITENAS (Caldwell University), April N. Kisamore (Hunter College), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Peter F. Gerhardt (The EPIC School), Leif Albright (Caldwell University)
Abstract:

The purpose of this study was to replicate Keintz, Miguel, Kao, and Finn (2011) by evaluating the effects of EBI on emergence of visual-visual and auditory-visual relations and speaker behavior by children with autism spectrum disorder. We extended Keintz et al. by evaluating a many-to-one training structure, evaluating the emergence of auditory-auditory relations, and teaching language skills commonly targeted in early intensive behavioral intervention with early learners. Specifically, we taught three 4-member classes of stimuli: donkey (Class 1), seal (Class 2), and cricket (Class 3). Members of each class were the pictures of the creature (Stimulus A), creature’s spoken name (Stimulus B), sounds made by the creature (Stimulus C) and pictures of the creature’s habitats (Stimulus D). Results for all participants increased from low levels during baseline sessions to 86% or higher following EBI. Emergence of speaker behavior was also observed for all participants (i.e., tacts of pictures, tacts of sounds, intraverbals related to sounds and habitats, intraverbal fill-ins, echoics). Interobserver agreement for listener and speaker pretests across all three participants ranged from 94%-100%. Interobserver agreement for teaching relations and listener/speaker post-tests across all three participants was 100%. Percentage of correct implementation of the teaching/training procedures was 100%.

 
 
Symposium #64
CE Offered: BACB
Applying Behavior-Analytic Instructional Strategies in Higher Education Settings
Saturday, May 25, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Fairmont, Third Level, Crystal
Area: EDC/TBA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Megan D. Aclan (Aclan Behavioral Services)
CE Instructor: Megan D. Aclan, Ph.D.
Abstract:

This symposium includes three data-based presentations focused on applying behavior-analytic procedures in higher education settings. All presentations will focus on improving student performance in the classroom through the use of active teaching strategies and creative assignments. In the first presentation, Daniel Wagner will present a comparison of a novel assignment and a traditional assignment to increase undergraduate behavior analysis students’ performance on quizzes and their dissemination skills. Next, Christopher Le will present a comparison of preprinted and write-on response cards in an undergraduate applied behavior analysis course on exam scores, learning gains, and participation. Finally, Kendra Guinness will present an evaluation of the effects of a personalized system of instruction including self-paced tutorials comprised of instructions, video models, practice, and feedback on students’ accuracy in APA formatting. Each presentation will address implications for the behavior analytic teaching strategies in the classroom.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): higher education, instruction, response cards, teaching
Target Audience:

BCBAs, Faculty, Educators

 

Giving Away Our Science: Evaluating the Effectiveness of a Dissemination Assignment in an Undergraduate Behavior Analysis Course

DANIEL WAGNER (California State University, Northridge), Debra Berry Malmberg (California State University, Northridge), Megan D. Aclan (California State University, Northridge), Ashley Andersen (University of Nebraska Medical Center, Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Abstract:

Though many have argued that behavior analysts should be trained as behavioral translators, translating our science and technology to others in a way that disseminates what our field has to offer (Foxx, 1985, 1996; Lindsley, 1991; Morris, 1985; Reed, 2014; Schlinger, 2014), little research identifying how to teach such repertoires exists. In this study, we designed the Giving ABA Away assignment to begin to teach this dissemination repertoire to undergraduate students in behavior analysis. The purpose of this study was to determine the effects of this dissemination assignment, in which students were asked to describe a behavioral concept to a layperson audience, in comparison to a more traditional assignment. This study utilized a counterbalanced within groups design with pre- and post-assignment evaluations to assess student comprehension of the concepts and dissemination skills. Results showed positive effects of the dissemination assignment on student learning outcomes as compared to the traditional assignment. Implications for educators will be discussed.

 
A Comparison of Preprinted and Write-On Response Cards in Higher Education
Megan R. Heinicke (California State University, Sacramento), Catherine Copsey (California State University, Sacramento), Sharon Furtak (California State University, Sacramento), CHRISTOPHER LE (California State University, Sacramento)
Abstract: One pedagogical strategy for increasing student engagement is to incorporate active student responses, such as using response cards, within lecture-style teaching. To the authors’ knowledge, only two studies have compared response card types in higher education settings; however, these studies were translational and were conducted in a simulated classroom. This study compared the benefits of preprinted vs. write-on response cards in two undergraduate psychology courses using an alternating treatments design blocked by content unit. We compared both response card types to standard lecture control condition in Experiment 1 and a passive lecture control condition in Experiment 2. We examined the effects of response card type on students’ exam performance, learning gains (i.e., questions answered incorrectly in class then correctly on exams), retention scores, retention gains (i.e., learning gains maintained on a posttest), and in-class participation. Students also reported their preference for response card type using a satisfaction survey. Both response card conditions resulted in higher exam scores over standard and passive control conditions, and we found that write-on response cards produced significantly higher learning and retention gains across experiments. We offer recommendations for using response cards in higher education as well as expanding this line of research.
 

A Personalized System of Instruction for Teaching APA Formatting to Undergraduate Students

KENDRA GUINNESS (Regis College), Jacquelyn M. MacDonald (Regis College), Diana Parry-Cruwys (Regis College)
Abstract:

Formatting documents according the American Psychological Association (APA) guidelines is an essential but difficult skill for undergraduate psychology students. Undergraduate faculty report that their students make frequent APA formatting errors in a variety of domains including citations, quotations, and headers (Mandernach, Zafonte, & Taylor, 2016). The current study evaluated the effects of a personalized system of instruction (PSI) on the accuracy of APA formatting with undergraduate students using a multiple probe design across four units (title page, abstract, body, and references). Participants completed self-paced tutorials comprised of textual instructions, a video model, multiple practice opportunities, and immediate feedback. Results thus far indicate that after low to moderate levels of accuracy in baseline, accuracy rose to high levels immediately following training. Generalization was also measured by evaluating the APA formatting accuracy of actual lab reports the participants submitted in an introductory psychology class. Interobserver agreement was recorded for 33% of sessions (M = 89%; range, 73%-100%). Social validity with students and faculty will be discussed.

 
 
Invited Panel #66
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP
The Potential of Statistical Inference in Behavior Analysis: A Panel With Discussion
Saturday, May 25, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: SCI; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Derek Reed (The University of Kansas)
CE Instructor: Derek Reed, Ph.D.
Panelists: CHRISTOPHER FRANCK (Virginia Tech), SHAWN GILROY (Louisiana State University), AMY ODUM (Utah State University)
Abstract:

This panel will be a discussion of Dr. Jonathan Friedel and Dr. Brady DeHart’s SQAB Tutorial on the utility of statistics in behavior analysis.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe contemporary applications of statistical analyses in behavior analysis, (2) describe the research questions to be addressed by inferential statistics, and (3) describe the controversy of using statistical inference in behavior analysis.
CHRISTOPHER FRANCK (Virginia Tech)
Christopher Franck received his Ph.D. from the Department of Statistics at North Carolina State University in 2010 and is currently an Assistant Professor in the Department of Statistics at Virginia Tech. Dr. Franck's research interests include the statistical modeling of behavioral data, Bayesian inference with an emphasis in model selection, and spatial statistics.
SHAWN GILROY (Louisiana State University)
Dr. Shawn Gilroy is an Assistant Professor of Psychology at Louisiana State University. Dr. Gilroy received his PhD from Temple University, completing his predoctoral training at the Munroe-Meyer Institute and his postdoctoral training at the Kennedy-Krieger Institute. Prior to his post at Louisiana State University, Dr. Gilroy served as a Marie Sklodowska Curie international research fellow at the National University of Ireland, Galway. His work centers on the development and evaluation of evidence-based treatments using technology for children with developmental disorders and the translation of applied behavioral economic methods to clinical populations.
AMY ODUM (Utah State University)
Amy Odum is a Professor in the Department of Psychology at Utah State University. Her research interests are in basic behavioral phenomena, such as response persistence, sensitivity to delayed outcomes, conditional discriminations, and environmental influences on drug effects. Her work has been funded by the National Institute on Drug Abuse and the National Institute of Mental Health. She completed a post-doctoral fellowship at the University of Vermont’s Human Behavioral Pharmacology Laboratory after earning her Ph.D. and M.A. in Psychology, specializing in Behavior Analysis, from West Virginia University. She received a B.S. in Psychology from the University of Florida. Dr. Odum has been Associate Editor for the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior and President of the Society for the Experimental Analysis of Behavior and Division 25 of the American Psychological Association. She is a Fellow of ABAI and is currently Editor in Chief of the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior.
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #67
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

Translating Behavioral Observation Research to Intervention for Couples With Pain

Saturday, May 25, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Gabrielle T. Lee, Ph.D.
Chair: Gabrielle T. Lee (Western University)
ANNMARIE CANO (Wayne State University)
Annmarie Cano, Ph.D. is a Professor of Psychology at Wayne State University in Detroit (Michigan, USA). Dr. Cano conducts research on emotion regulation and intimacy processes in couples facing physical and mental health problems. Building on her basic research findings on empathic interaction, she has developed a mindfulness and acceptance intervention aimed at helping both partners improve their own emotion regulation and quality of life while also supporting their partners to do the same. As a first-generation college student and Latina, Dr. Cano is committed to supporting access, diversity, and inclusion in higher education and is conducting research in this domain as well. Dr. Cano has over 70 publications and has served as PI on grants from the National Institutes of Health. In 2016, she was elected Fellow of the American Psychological Association in two divisions (Society for Health Psychology and Society for Couple and Family Psychology). Dr. Cano has served the field as Associate Editor at Health Psychology and Journal of Family Psychology and currently sits on the editorial boards of American Psychologist and Journal of Pain. She earned her master’s and doctoral degrees in psychology from Stony Brook University and her bachelor’s degree in psychology from Princeton University.
Abstract:

Behavioral interventions for pain typically target individuals and when loved ones are involved, their roles are often conceptualized as information providers or reinforcers of pain behaviors. At the same time, a growing literature on supportive behaviors such as partner responsiveness, emotional validation, and empathy has suggested that interventions may be more effective if these types of behaviors are incorporated into treatment. Dr. Cano will provide an overview of correlational and experimental research on empathic behaviors in pain and describe a new intervention for couples that is based on this research. Evidence of intervention feasibility and acceptability will also be presented to describe the challenges of intervention development. Finally, Dr. Cano will share a set of lessons learned to inform work aimed at bridging the gap between basic behavioral and clinical intervention research.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: Pending.
 
 
Symposium #68
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Working With Practitioners in Mainland China: From Theory to Practice
Saturday, May 25, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Rouge
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Translational
Chair: Fan-Yu Lin (Robert Morris University)
CE Instructor: Dorothy Xuan Zhang, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The number of certified behavior analysts in mainland China is increasing at a drastic pace every year. Despite this growth, its nature of service delivery, the focus of target service recipients, and the presence of a comprehensive professional standards make behavior analysis a developing profession that is unlike others in China. In this critical phase of development, practitioners’ adherence to ethical and professional standards becomes an even more critical key for its future success. While it is important to understand the Professional and Ethical Compliance Code for Behavior Analysts, one must demonstrate the interpretation of this Code through everyday practice. In a country with a vast diversity in beliefs, customs, and other cultural variables, this interpretation may not be apparent at times. The central theme for this symposium is working with practitioners in mainland, China. From a theoretical perspective, the presenters will first illustrate the ethical challenges that behavior analysts may face while providing services in a variety of settings in China. The audience will then learn about two empirical studies that demonstrate the use of data-based decision making to guide practitioners’ service delivery in the context of direct teaching and supervision in mainland, China.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): China, Ethics, Service delivery, Supervision
Target Audience:

Undergraduate, graduate, or practitioners in the field of behavior analysis

 

Service Delivery Through a Cultural Lens: It May Not Be That Simple

(Theory)
DOROTHY XUAN ZHANG (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology; George Mason University; ABA Professional Committee of China Association of Rehabilitation of Disabled Persons (ABA-CARDP)
Abstract:

Over the past decade, educational and therapeutic services driven by Applied Behavior Analysis has gained more and more attention in mainland, China, particularly in the area of treatment for autism. Despite this increase in recognition and acceptance, the quality of service for students with special needs varies drastically across settings. This variation is caused by a need for more quality training courses, current misunderstanding toward students with special needs and their educators, and the availability of alternative, and often nonscientific treatment options. Behavior analysts provide services under clear and comprehensive professional and ethical guidelines. However, when cultural variations come into play, practitioners may require additional guidance with decision making during service delivery. From a conceptual analysis of behavioral perspective, this presentation will focus on the ethical challenges that behavior analysts may encounter while working in different educational and therapeutic setting in China. Potential directions and recommendations for future research and practice will also be discussed.

 

Comparison of Simple Conditional Discrimination Method and Conditional Only Discrimination Method: Using Discrete Trial Training in Teaching Receptive Labeling to Young Children With Autism in China

(Applied Research)
FAN-YU LIN (Robert Morris University), Jing Zhu (University of Iowa)
Abstract:

The emerging Western model of professional training and service delivery in Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) leads to a continuous debate between universal designs and localized decisions in China, a country with over 75,000 preschools with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) (Sun & Allison, 2010; Zhang & Ji, 2005), who receive alarmingly uneven service quality given the high demand of treatment (Xu, Yang, Ji, Xu, & Wang, 2014). Even for those who claim the use of ABA procedures in teaching receptive labeling, one of the fundamental skills for preschoolers, the decision-making process is not typically based on data, but is rather on routines or personal preferences. In this study, two discrimination methods were compared in teaching students with autism. The first method is simple conditional discrimination (SCD), which involves a total of nine steps to gradually increase task difficulty over time. The second method is conditional only discrimination method (COD), which includes presenting the target task from the onset of the intervention (Grow, Carr, Kodak, Jostad, & Kisamore 2011). The data suggested COD resulted in more efficient acquisition while SCD fostered gradual improvement. The results provide data driven guidance for Chinese ABA practitioners in the decision making process of ASD program design.

 
A Comparison of Two Types of Remote Performance Feedback on Treatment Integrity
(Applied Research)
JING ZHU (University of Iowa), Allison Bruhn (University of Iowa)
Abstract: Treatment integrity (TI) has a direct impact on early intensive behavioral interventions outcomes for children with autism. Research suggests that providing feedback can improve TI. The purpose of the present study is to evaluate and compare the effects of two remote feedback methods, videoconferencing feedback and email feedback (with graph), on TI of teachers working with children with autism in China. Four teachers will participate in the study. During baseline, teachers’ TI of implementing discrete trial training and incidental teaching will be measured. During comparison, the teachers will receive performance feedback via either videoconferencing or email with graph. The associations of the feedback method and teaching procedure will be counterbalanced across all teachers. Teachers’ acceptance and preference of the two types of feedback will be collected via a social validity questionnaire at the end of the study. Results of the study will answer the following questions: (1) whether either or both of the remote feedback methods are effective, (2) whether email feedback is as effective as videoconferencing feedback, and (3) whether if there is a preferences between the two types of feedback. We expect to complete the data collection by the end of February in 2019.
 
 
Symposium #69
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
A Systems Approach to Learner-Centered Instruction for Staff and Clients
Saturday, May 25, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, International Ballroom
Area: TBA/VBC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Matthew C. Howarth (Verbal Behavior Associates)
CE Instructor: Matthew C. Howarth, Ph.D.
Abstract:

We present the effects of behavior analytic interventions that resulted in increased supervisor and technician expertise and an analysis of organizational intervention components. The data show that the implementation of a rule governed organizational system to train clinicians supports increases in academic literacy, communication and social skills for pre-school and elementary age clients diagnosed with autism and related communication disabilities in 1:1 settings. In this model, the data generated through measurement of each individual’s responses drive the system. Clinicians are trained through modules that provide in situ opportunities specifically related to the accurate implementation of clients’ programs, choice of strategies and tactics, materials and selection of new objectives. Supervisors collaborate across clinics to improve the accuracy of the feedback delivered during Teacher Performance Rate and Accuracy (TPRA) observations for verbal development protocols. Researchers report more complex data analyses, improved verbal behavior about the science, and increases in rate of learning for the clients taught using a Rule Governed Algorithm which included a Verbal Behavior about the Science Protocol package. We analyze organizational components, discuss relevant measures to consider within the organization, and present meaningful client and staff outcomes when considering a systems approach using data-driven procedures and interlocking contingencies.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

BCBAs and Program Supervisors

 
Using a Rule Governed Algorithm to Increase Line Technicians Analysis of Instructional Problems and Decrease Clients’ Learn Units to Criterion
KELLY KING (Touchstone and The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Dolleen-Day Keohane (Nicholls State University)
Abstract: We tested the effects of a rule governed algorithm on line technicians’ analysis of instructional problems and clients’ learn units to criterion. We used a delayed multiple baseline design across eight participants who worked at a private center and provided 1:1 instruction for clients diagnosed with autism. The participants were selected because they showed interest in verbal behavior about the science and the scientific vocabulary used at the center. The participants had little or no previous experience with Applied Behavior Analysis and did not typically apply the vocabulary of the science when encountering instructional problems in situ. Training at the center included basic vocabulary, decision analysis and measurement but focused on clients’ program specifics and center-wide and client-specific schedules. The independent variable was the implementation of a Rule Governed Algorithm which included a Verbal Behavior about the Science Protocol package. The dependent variables were total and correct learn units delivered by the line technicians, pre- and post-probe data for mastery of the protocol and learn units to criterion for the clients taught.
 
Methods to Improve Treatment Fidelity
Dolleen-Day Keohane (Nicholls State University), JENNY CRONIER (Seattle Behavior Consulting & Therapy), Mara Katra Oblak (Seattle Behavior Consulting), Kelly King (Touchstone and The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Lauren Becnel (The Touchstone Center), Danica Reaves Savoie (Touchstone Center), Mark Flores (Seattle Behavior Consulting & Therapy)
Abstract: Methods to improve treatment fidelity within and across teaching sites should be the subject of more research to increase the validity and reliability of evidence-based treatment. Client programming is designed and implemented to promote generalization, and supervisors should measure the variability of implementation across Registered Behavior TechniciansTM (RBTs®) to ensure treatment fidelity. Additionally, research efforts across teaching sites are stifled by the lack of calibration across researchers for the implementation of evidence-based protocols. This paper describes a cross-clinic calibration procedure designed to increase the accuracy of implementation of verbal behavior developmental protocols by RBTs® using Teacher Performance Rate and Accuracy (TPRA) observations. The procedure includes observations of RBT® protocol implementation and analysis of inter-observer agreement (IOA) across TPRA observations by local and distance collaborating supervisors. Data were collected on the percent of IOA across TPRA observations for each protocol across supervisors. TPRA observations were repeated until criterion for calibration was met. Researchers report the effects of this cross-clinic calibration procedure on the number of correct and incorrect RBT observations by supervisors compared with baseline conditions that did not include multi-site TPRA calibration.
 

A Systematic Implementation of Organization-Wide Behavior Management Components and the Effects on Student Outcome and Job Performance: A Procedural Analysis and Review of Clinical Outcomes

MARA OBLAK (Seattle Behavior Consulting & Therapy), Jenny Cronier (Seattle Behavior Consulting & Therapy)
Abstract:

ABA service providers recognize the need for effective operating procedures and supervision practices that produce quality outcomes. Complex interactions between supervisors and supervisees should result in effective treatment through accurate instruction and delivery of behavioral interventions. The CABAS® model is a data-driven, research-based system that takes into account the interdependent relationship between teachers, students and their parents, and school supervisory personnel, whose primary function is to train and mentor teachers to continually apply the principles and tactics of the science of behavior to ensure student success (Singer-Dudek, Speckman, & Nuzzolo, 2010). We sought to develop a standardized system of individualized instruction for administrators, students and clinicians utilizing components of the CABAS® model in a private ABA clinic and develop a measurement system to develop the quality of the product. We implemented Learn Units, TPRAs, a Decision protocol, the VBDR assessment, developmental protocols and performance-based modules. This data collection describes the components implemented, a procedural analysis of systems implemented, data analysis for staff and clients and future considerations regarding data driven operating procedures.

 
 
Invited Paper Session #70
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

Correspondence of Verbal Reports: An Experimental Analysis

Saturday, May 25, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom EF
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research
Instruction Level: Advanced
CE Instructor: Julio De Rose, Ph.D.
Chair: Sarah A. Lechago (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
JULIO DE ROSE (Universidade Federal de Sao Carlos), Mariéle Cortez (Universidade Federal de Sao Carlos)
Julio de Rose received his Ph.D. at the University of São Paulo, Brazil, in 1981, and was a postdoctoral Fulbright fellow at the Eunice Kennedy Shriver Center for Mental Retardation. He is now Professor of Psychology at the Federal University of São Carlos, Brazil, and Research Director of the Brazilian National Institute of Science and Technology on Behavior, Cognition and Teaching, of which he is one of the founders. He is the author and co-author of more than 130 articles and chapters on experimental, applied, and conceptual Behavior Analysis, and has served in the editorial boards of several international journals in the field of Behavior Analysis.
Abstract:

Skinner remarked that verbal responses are “true” or “objective” when the correspondence with a stimulating situation is sharply maintained. Lanza, Starr, & Skinner (1982) developed an “animal model” for the study of variables involved in correspondence: a pigeon “reported” to another about the color of a hidden disc, by pecking a specific key. Having access to the color, the experimenter could investigate contingencies leading to distorted reports. This presentation will address a series of studies with human participants recently conducted in our lab, with variations in this method. Participants reported about previous behavior or played card games in which they reported the value of their cards. A recent study developed a videogame with different audiences asking about the participant’s previous behavior. Several independent variables have been investigated. Correspondence was enhanced by reinforcement of corresponding responses, punishment of non-corresponding responses, probability of response checking, and modelling of corresponding reports by confederates. Non-corresponding reports increased with reinforcement for specific reports (reinforcing reports of correct responses regardless of correspondence), punitive audiences, and modelling of non-corresponding responses by confederates. This series of studies has progressively refined experimental methods and increased the range of variables investigated, contributing to clarify the determinants of correspondence.

Target Audience:

Researchers or students interested in basic and translational research on verbal behavior.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe and discuss Skinner’s conceptualization about correspondence between verbal response and stimulating situation; (2) identify independent and dependent variables in experiments about verbal correspondence; (3) analyze critically methods, results and conclusions of a sample of correspondence experiments; (4) identify variables that increase or decrease correspondence; (5) relate the conceptual and experimental analysis of correspondence to the lay notions of truth and lie.
 
 
Symposium #86
CE Offered: BACB
Generalization From the Clinic
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Lobby Level, Plaza Ballroom AB
Area: AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: Karen Nohelty (Center for Autism and Related Disorders)
CE Instructor: Karen Nohelty, M.Ed.
Abstract:

Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) is used to teach individuals diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) in a variety of settings. While there are many benefits for clients receiving sessions in a clinic-based setting, one area that deserves attention from clinicians is generalization. The gains made by clients have a significantly greater impact when their skills are demonstrated in situations in which training did not occur. Assessing and planning for the occurrence of generalization are key components of quality programming for individuals with ASD. Clinician cannot “train and hope” that skills will generalize to other locations, parents, etc. In this symposium, research on generalization from three different perspectives will be discussed to provide more information to clinicians programming for generalization. In the first talk, a literature review on the amount and type of generalization measured in research studies on individuals with ASD will be shared, along with a discussion of the factors leading to successful generalization. Following this discussion, the effects of a parent training program on parent-child interactions and parental self-efficacy will be reviewed. Lastly, data will be presented on the generalization of treatment gains made in the clinic setting, to parents in the home.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): clinic-based, generalization, parent training
Target Audience:

Board Certified Behavior Analysts, Board Certified Assistant Behavior Analysts

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the current state of inclusion of generalization in recent research articles on individuals with ASD; (2) describe elements of an effective parent training program; (3) identify factors contributing to the success of generalization from the clinic with a technician to the home with parents.
 
A Review: Examining the Use of Generalization in the Current Literature
(Theory)
LEAH HIRSCHFELD (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Karen Nohelty (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Dennis Dixon (Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD))
Abstract: A key component of Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) is generalization: the occurrence of skills under circumstances in which they were not specifically trained. In order for generalization to occur, ABA practitioners can teach a number of different scenarios and examples so individuals use the instructional concept outside of one context. This review examined articles in the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis over five years. In order to be included in the review, articles had to be primary research that included at least one participant diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD). Our review showed that researchers frequently did not plan for generalization; however, of the articles that did program for generalization, a majority of them utilized a generalization promotion strategy in the research study design. This review also examined the factors that lead to the success of generalization. The results of this review provide information to better inform current ABA practices to increase generalization of skills taught to individuals with ASD.
 
Examination of Effects of Parent Training on Parent-Child Interactions
(Service Delivery)
JULIE LEMON (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Karen Nohelty (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Dennis Dixon (Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD)), Nicholas Marks (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Christopher Miyake (Center for Autism and Related Disorders)
Abstract: Parent training has been established as a key element of treatment programs for individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD). However, treatment gains noted in the research vary greatly. The current study expanded upon past research on the naturalistic developmental behavioral intervention, Project ImPACT, by modifying procedures to increase accessibility to parents (e.g. removing homework) and incorporate collaborative practitioner strategies (e.g. asking open ended questions, individualizing examples). Twelve weekly sessions were implemented for six children with ASD and their parents. Each week, the clinician reviewed the target skill(s) with the parent during a 1-hour session and then used behavioral skills training to support the parent in demonstrating the target skill(s) with his/her child during a subsequent 30-minute session. A concurrent multiple baseline design across participants was used to examine parent treatment integrity scored from a video of interaction with the child. Data indicate an increase over baseline throughout the course of the treatment for all participants. Additionally, on a measure of parental self-efficacy scores increased over baseline for 5 out of 6 parents. These results build upon the research base behind the benefits of parent training and provide details regarding parental treatment integrity throughout the course of the intervention.
 
Generalization of Clinic-Based Treatment Gains to Parents
(Applied Research)
KAREN NOHELTY (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Dennis Dixon (Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD)), Leah Hirschfeld (Center for Autism and Related Disorders)
Abstract: While Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) as a treatment for individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) has demonstrated effectiveness across a multitude of studies, generalization of gains is an area of concern. Not only is it necessary to consider generalization from clinicians to parents, but it is also critical to program for generalization of skills mastered in a clinic to the home. In this study, for children with ASD receiving the majority of their ABA services in a clinic-based setting, skills were identified that were mastered within the ABA program and indicated as not known by parents via the Skills® Assessment before instruction began. The amount of parent training received by the children’s parents was compared with the percent of skills known in a probe at home with their parent. Preliminary data indicate that the children demonstrated a high rate of generalization of skills at home with their parent regardless of amount of parent training received. While the generalization noted by this study is promising, more research is needed to clarify the variables impacting the transfer of skills across people and settings. However, this study provides early support of generalization of skills for children with ASD receiving services at a clinic.
 
 
Panel #87
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Using A Decision Making Framework to Address Ethical Dilemmas in Schools
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: DDA/EDC; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Ilene S. Schwartz, Ph.D.
Chair: Ilene S. Schwartz (University of Washington)
ILENE S. SCHWARTZ (University of Washington)
NANCY ROSENBERG (University of Washington)
JOE M. LUCYSHYN (University of British Columbia)
Abstract: The Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (IDEA) guarantees a free and appropriate public education to students with disabilities in the United States. Therefore, publics schools are a setting in which Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBAs) should be working. When working in public schools, however, BCBAs often face numerous ethical challenges. Some of these challenges are related to philosophical differences, others may be related to resource allocations. Regardless of the issues contributing to the ethical dilemmas, BCBAs working in schools need a process to evaluate these dilemmas and make decisions about their practice. Rosenberg and Schwartz (2018) propose a decision making framework that BCBAs can use in their practice to address ethical dilemmas. The decision making framework does not provide BCBAs with a “right” answer, rather it is a tool for them to use to consider the Professional and Ethical Compliance Code, student outcomes, and other issues when making decisions about their practices. The purpose of this panel is to describe this process and then use it to address real world ethical dilemmas faced by BCBAs working in public schools.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience: BCBAs, specifically those who are working in schools
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will improve their knowledge about the Professional and Ethical Compliance Code 2. Participants will increase their knowledge of a decision making framework proposed by Rosenberg and Schwartz, 2018. 3. Participants will increase their comfort with discussing ethical issues.
 
 
Symposium #88
CE Offered: BACB
Current Strategies to Assess and Treat Multiple Topographies of Food Refusal
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom A
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Elizabeth A. Masler (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Discussant: Valerie M. Volkert (Marcus Autism Center and Emory School of Medicine)
CE Instructor: Elizabeth A. Masler, M.A.
Abstract: A variety of effective behavioral treatments to address pediatric food refusal have been thoroughly discussed in the behavior-analytic literature. Due to the complexity of food refusal, children often present with multiple topographies (e.g., inappropriate mealtime behavior, expulsion, packing) and interventions often include multi-component treatment packages. This symposium includes a study that evaluated the sequential introduction of treatment components designed to address multiple topographies of food refusal. Results suggested that at least three topographies were likely members of a single response class which required simultaneous treatment, although packing was the most resistant to intervention. Thus, the second study focused on a single topography of food refusal, packing. An assessment model was introduced and evaluated to guide the treatment of packing. Results indicated that such a model may be useful in identifying an effective treatment for packing. Together, these studies provide assessment models that may be useful in determining when specific treatment components may be effective.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience: 1) Practitioners 2) Researchers
 
Analysis of Response Classes in Pediatric Food Refusal
MEARA X. H. MCMAHON (University of Georgia), Carrie S. W. Borrero (Kennedy Krieger Institute), John C. Borrero (University of Maryland, Baltimore County)
Abstract: Multicomponent intervention packages used to treat pediatric food refusal often consist of several procedures that may be cumbersome for caregivers to implement (e.g., Pangborn, Borrero, & Borrero, 2012; Werle, Murphy, & Budd, 1993). Practitioners may avoid the use of additional procedures by sequentially introducing treatment components only when necessary. In the present study, the sequential introduction of treatment components designed to address multiple topographies of food refusal was evaluated using reversal designs for three children. Extinction analyses were conducted to determine if topographies were members of a response class. An evaluation of temporal relations between responses suggested that inappropriate mealtime behavior (IMB) was most likely to occur first if untreated. When escape extinction procedures were implemented for IMB, other topographies of food refusal increased. Results suggest IMB, expulsion and packing may be members of the same response class and all topographies may need to be addressed when designing treatment procedures.
 

Evaluation of a Packing Assessment to Decrease Packing Among Children With Food Refusal

ALEXANDRA MARIE RIVERO (Kennedy Krieger Institute / UMBC), Carrie S. W. Borrero (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract:

A significant problem among children who engage in pediatric food refusal is packing (i.e., pocketing or holding accepted food in the mouth), which could hinder successful treatment. Previous research has identified effective treatments to reduce packing; however, an assessment model to guide treatment decisions is lacking. In the present study, a multielement design was used to identify conditions under which low levels of packing occurred for four children with pediatric food refusal. Results were used to empirically inform treatment selection to decrease packing for three children. Assessments indicated that packing was related to texture, food preference, or response effort and subsequently informed individualized treatments, which led to decreased levels of packing. Results suggest that this model may be useful in the design of treatment packages for children who engage in packing at clinically problematic levels.

 
 
Symposium #89
CE Offered: BACB
Family-Centered Dissemination of Interventions
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom C
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: Claudia Campos (Florida Institute for Technology)
Discussant: Andrew L. Samaha (University of South Florida)
CE Instructor: Claudia Campos, Ph.D.
Abstract:

For interventions to make meaningful changes in the lives of clients and their families, they should be generalized to home settings. These two presentations address challenges faced during generalization to family implementation. The first is on a pyramidal approach to training in which primary caregivers learn how to implement an intervention, and then train others in their family to use it as well. The second is on the use of static or dynamic symbols to indicate when reinforcement is and is not available within a multiple schedule. A discussant, Dr. Andrew Samaha, will provide inside and commentary on these presentations.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): multiple-schedules, parent-training, problem behavior, pyramidal training
Target Audience:

Behavior analysts who work with children with challenging behavior.

Learning Objectives: 1. Why might different families require training beyond just the parents? 2. What is the benefit of static versus dynamic signals to indicate reinforcer availability/unavailability? 3. How does the use of multiple schedules preserve the contingency between an alternative response and the reinforcer that previously maintained problem behavior?
 
Culturally Adapted Services: Using Pyramidal Training to Teach Behavior Analytic Procedures to Hispanic Families
(Applied Research)
MARLESHA BELL (University of South Florida), Sarah E. Bloom (University of South Florida), Anna Garcia (University of South Florida)
Abstract: Research has demonstrated that disparities exist in Applied Behavior Analysis services among Hispanic children with developmental disabilities. One way to reduce disparities is to develop treatments that are congruent with Hispanic families’ customs and cultural values so they are more likely to adopt the treatment in their home. For example, some Hispanic families follow the cultural value familismo. Familismo refers to strong family closeness, and getting along with and contributing to the well being of the nuclear and extended family. In addition, parent training is an important component of Applied Behavior Analysis therapy because it helps generalize and maintain the results in their typical environment. Typically, clinicians train all members of the household, but it is important to consider specific cultural values when choosing parent training models. Therefore, if we identify parent training strategies that are congruent with Hispanic families’ they may be more likely to adopt the training, learn the procedures, and implement them with high treatment fidelity. Thus, the purpose of this study is to use pyramidal training to teach family members who are caregivers for individuals with developmental disabilities to conduct behavior analytic procedures.
 

Comparing the Effects of Static and Dynamic Signals During Multiple Schedules

(Applied Research)
CLAUDIA CAMPOS (Florida Institute of Technology), Sarah E. Bloom (University of South Florida), Lori Ann Kollin (University of South Florida)
Abstract:

Functional communication training (FCT) is effective in reducing problem behavior. Some limitations to FCT include manding excessively (e.g., every 10 seconds) or at inappropriate times (e.g., when parent is making dinner). Multiple schedules using static signals have been used to decrease these limitations while maintaining low levels of problem behavior and appropriate levels of functional communication responses (FCRs). Dynamic signals in the form of Time Timers® have also been shown to maintain appropriate levels of problem behavior and FCRs. Presently, no research has examined the comparison of static and dynamic signals within the context of FCT. Therefore, the purpose of the current study is to compare the effects of static and dynamic signals (i.e., Time Timer®) during multiple schedules consisting of reinforcement and extinction components following FCT. Four children with an autism spectrum disorder participated in this study. Results showed that for three out of four subjects dynamic signals resulted in faster and more consistent discriminated responding.

 
 
Symposium #90
CE Offered: BACB
A Strategic Science of General Education: The CABAS(R) Accelerated Independent Learner Model of Instruction
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 1-3
Area: DEV/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: JoAnn Pereira Delgado (Teachers College, Columbia University)
CE Instructor: JoAnn Pereira Delgado, Ph.D.
Abstract: In this symposium, we will present three papers on the scientific procedures and tactics utilized in the CABAS® Accelerated Independent Learner (AIL) Model of Instruction. Our program includes students with and without disabilities from preschool through middle school age and implements teaching procedures rooted in applied behavior analysis, the strategic science of teaching and the Verbal Behavior Development Theory. In the first paper, we will discuss the key pre-requisite developmental cusps for early learners including Bi-directional Naming, Observational Learning, Transformation of Stimulus Function across saying and writing, and Social Listener Reinforcement. In the second paper, we will describe the extension of the developmental cusps for reader-writers in the general education elementary school setting. The final paper will provide an overview of the later reader/writer and self-editing cusps. Collectively these papers will emphasize the importance of designing instruction based on the verbal behavior development theory and introduce teaching procedures that address both structure and function that ultimately result in the development of independent learners.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): AIL, CABAS, VBDT
Target Audience: Teachers and students in graduate programs in applied behavior analysis. Also supervisors and professors with interest in verbal behavior development theory and the strategic science of teaching
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of this symposium, learners will be able to, 1. Define verbal behavior development theory related to general education. 2. List the prerequisite cusps for early learners 3. List the reader and writer cusps 4. Describe how to arrange instruction once critical cusps are induced.
 

How Students Become an Accelerated Independent Learner: Pre-Requisite Verbal Behavior Cusps

FRANCIS JIHYE HWANG (Teacher College, Columbia University), JoAnn Pereira Delgado (Teachers College, Columbia University), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School of Arts and Sciences)
Abstract:

A key element of a successful student is the ability to be an independent learner. Over the past three decades of research, Verbal Behavior Development Theory (VBDT) identified the pre-requisite cusps and capabilities (i.e., Bi-directional Naming, Observational Learning, Transformation of Stimulus Function across saying and writing, and Social Listener Reinforcement) that a student needs to acquire prior to becoming an accelerated independent learner (AIL). As an AIL, the student requires minimal direct instruction from the teacher, leading to acquisition of academic materials at their own pace. For over a decade, AIL classrooms demonstrated the effectiveness in student performance across Pre-K to middle school grade classrooms in a public-school district general education and self-contained special education classrooms. In this presentation, I will discuss the development of the pre-requisite cusps and capabilities necessary for an AIL along with the effects of the presence of these cusps on how lessons are designed and taught to these individuals.

 
The Development of Elementary Reader and Writer Stages in an Accelerated Independent Learner Classroom
LAUREN BALDONADO (Morris School District), JoAnn Pereira Delgado (Teachers College, Columbia University), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School of Arts and Sciences)
Abstract: We will provide a description of the elementary reader and writer stages in an Accelerated Independent Learner (AIL) classroom for grades K-2. The verbal behavior development theory is an essential component and has an impact on methods of instruction and curriculum design. Reader and writer stages in these early grades build on one another such that the student becomes more independent as he or she acquires more skills. Verbal behavior developmental cusps and capabilities demonstrated in these stages include: responding to own textual responding as a listener, Naming accrues from listening to a story, textually responding at 80 words per minute (wpm), print transcription, print dictation, transformation of stimulus function across vocal and written responses, and reading governs responding. Interventions to induce reader/writer cusps/capabilities are built into the district-mandated curriculum so that students acquire objectives at a faster rate and learn things they could not before. Functional writing objectives are taught across reading, math, and social studies objectives to build skills for technical writing that affects reader behavior.
 
Learner Independence: Instructional Tactics and Protocols Employed in a Comprehensive Application of Behavior Analysis to Schooling Middle School Classroom
YIFEI SUN (Teachers College, Columbia University), JoAnn Pereira Delgado (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: Teaching reading and learning skills that allow students to become independent learners is a critical component of higher-grade level Comprehensive Application of Behavior Analysis to Schooling (CABAS®) classrooms. Independent learning skills allow students to acquire essential reading repertoires and to receive maximized instruction. Students received systematically sequenced learning objectives through personalized system of instruction (PSI) and peer tutoring. They monitor the amount of instruction received, measured by the number of learn units received, as well as the rate of acquisition through graphing their own learn units. Students’ acquisition of independent learning skills also allows teachers to focus on designing instructions that optimize students’ learning. Teachers scripted behaviorally defined objectives with criteria that suit students’ individual levels of verbal behavior and sequenced objectives to ensure that students mastered all necessary prerequisite skills before tackling more advanced objectives. Teachers also implemented research-based protocols rooted in the verbal behavior development theory to induce early or advanced reader/writer skills and cusps including self-editing and writing governs complex operations of others. All of the components work together to foster independence of students in a middle-school CABAS® classroom.
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #92
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

Understanding, Measuring, and Changing Bystander Behavior in Bullying

Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Robin Codding, Ph.D.
Chair: Robin Codding (University of Minnesota)
AMANDA NICKERSON (University at Buffalo, The State University of New York)
Amanda Nickerson is a professor of school psychology and director of the Alberti Center for Bullying Abuse Prevention at the University at Buffalo, the State University of New York. Her research focuses on school violence and bullying, and the critical role of family, peers, and schools in preventing violence and building social-emotional strengths of youth. Dr. Nickerson has published more than 90 journal articles and book chapters, and written or edited 5 books (including the PREPaRE School Crisis Prevention and Intervention Model and the Handbook of School Violence and School Safety: International Research and Practice, 2nd ed). Her research has been funded by the National Institutes of Health, the American Educational Research Association, the New York State Developmental Disabilities Planning Council, and the Committee for Children. Dr. Nickerson served as associate editor of the Journal of School Violence and is on the editorial boards of several other journals in school psychology. She is a licensed psychologist, nationally certified school psychologist, fellow of the American Psychological Association, and Coordinator of Research for the National Association of School Psychologists’ School Safety and Crisis Prevention Committee.
Abstract:

Bullying has received unprecedented attention from legislators, media, and the general public. Studies of the phenomenon have widened the lens from focusing solely on perpetrators and victims to examining the role of peers who are almost always present when bullying occurs. These “bystanders” often remain passive or even join in, which can maintain or increase the bullying behaviors. To inform prevention and intervention efforts, it is important to understand the factors associated with bystanders’ attitudes and actions. In this presentation, findings from a program of research examining the behavior of peers in bullying situations and the factors that predict the likelihood of actively defending (directly or indirectly) in bullying will be highlighted. The measurement, validation, and application of a five-step model of bystander intervention in bullying will be shared. Implications for practice, including the importance of shaping prosocial norms and explicitly teaching the 5-step bystander intervention model and offering multiple intervention options according to individual and situational variables, will be suggested.

Target Audience:

Researchers, educators, mental health professionals (focus on children and adolescents in schools)

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) identify roles of youth in bullying interactions; (2) describe the five-step bystander intervention model as applied to bullying; (3) discuss the individual and situational variables that predict bystander intervention; (4) identify the implications of the role of bystanders in bullying prevention and intervention.
 
 
Symposium #94
CE Offered: BACB
Advancements in Organizational Behavior Management Assessment and Intervention
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Concourse Level, Michigan 1 A-C
Area: OBM; Domain: Translational
Chair: Abigail Blackman (University of Kansas)
CE Instructor: Abigail Blackman, M.S.
Abstract: This symposium includes three talks that span basic to applied experimental evaluations of assessments and interventions to foster desired employee behavior. Novak will share findings of an experiment that evaluated the predictive validity of three preference assessment formats for identifying reinforcers for college students completing a computerized work task. The remaining two presentations will summarize findings from applications of organizational behavior management assessments and interventions. Cruz will describe results of an experiment that examined the utility of the Performance Diagnostic Checklist – Safety to identify interventions to improve appropriate employee hand washing within a human service setting. Finally, Wine will present a series of experiments that assessed reinforcement delay, with embedded probabilities, on employee filing behavior.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): preference assessment, reinforcement delay, reinforcer assessment, safety
Target Audience: Behavior analysts, individuals working within the field of organizational behavior management
 
A Translational Evaluation of Preference Assessment Formats for Employees
(Basic Research)
MATTHEW NOVAK (University of Kansas), Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (University of Kansas)
Abstract: We evaluated the predictive validity of three formats for identifying reinforcers for completing an experimental work task by undergraduate student participants. The computerized task involved a series of transcription and match-to-sample activities. The first format was a Likert-type survey that asked participants how much work they would be willing to do to gain access to each stimulus. The second format asked participants to rank the stimuli according to how much work they would do to earn each stimulus. The third format was a hypothetical work task that asked participants whether they would be willing to complete a given number of work tasks to gain each stimulus. The presented number advanced in a progressive fashion until reaching a break point for each stimulus. Using a multielement design we then assessed the reinforcing efficacy of the stimuli at a low, fixed response requirement. Finally, participants had the opportunity to work for each stimulus under a progressive ratio schedule in a multielement design. Although data collection is ongoing, pilot data indicate high correspondence between each preference assessment format and high correspondence between preference assessment outcomes and reinforcer assessment work rates.
 

Further Evaluation of the Performance Diagnostic Checklist-Safety

(Applied Research)
NELMAR JACINTO CRUZ (Florida Institute of Technology), David A. Wilder (Florida Institute of Technology), Curtis Phillabaum (Florida Institute of Technology), Rachel Thomas (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract:

We evaluated the utility of the Performance Diagnostic Checklist- Saftey (PDC-Safety) (Martinez-Onstott, Wilder, & Sigurdsson, 2016) by comparing the effectiveness of a PDC-Safety indicated intervention with a PDC-Safety non-indicated intervention. The interventions targeted participants’ hand washing behavior at a clinic serving children with intellectual disabilities. Failure to wash hands at appropriate times could pose health risks to both behavior technicians and clients, so efforts should be made to increase the likelihood of hand washing. Based on the results of the PDC-Safety, a lack of antecedents was the variable contributing to unsafe performance. The indicated intervention, which consisted of a prompt, was effective to increases safe performance, although two of three participants required additional intervention components. The non-indicated intervention, which consisted of increased access to materials, was ineffective. Results are discussed in terms of the utility of the tool to identify effective interventions to increase safe performance in a variety of settings.

 
An Examination of Reward Delay and Probability in Employees
(Applied Research)
BYRON J. WINE (The Faison Center & Florida Institute of Technology), Ting Bentley (The Faison Center), Adam Thornton Brewer (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: The effects of delay to delivery of earned rewards were evaluated in program support employees. During study 1, an immediate reward delivery condition was implemented. During study 2, employees were exposed to increasing delays to reward delivery. Employees continued to respond at high levels up to a 32-day delay. Study 3 held the 32-day delay constant but also evaluated three different probabilities of receiving the rewards: 1.0, .5, and .1. Employees continued to respond during delays but decreased responding when the probability of receiving the rewards decreased.
 
 
Symposium #95
CE Offered: BACB
Does Behavior Analysis Have a Metaphysical Crisis?
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 1/2
Area: PCH/EAB; Domain: Theory
Chair: Marcus Jackson Marr (Georgia Tech)
Discussant: William M. Baum (University of California, Davis)
CE Instructor: Julian C. Leslie, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Scientists are reluctant to discuss metaphysics, preferring to apply the methods typical of their disciplines to questions of current interest. However, a natural science of human behavior raises special problems in that it treats objectively topics which the wider community treats subjectively. Furthermore, the recent debate about the status of private events in the experimental analysis of behaviour is about the presuppositions of the science, and thus its metaphysics, rather than about specific findings. Arguably, we have been using a "Skinnerian metaphysics" without regularly examining it in detail or considering whether there are alternatives that are consistent with the most fundamental precepts of the experimental analysis of behavior. Leslie's paper will identify those fundamental precepts and argue that the core ideas consist only of "antirepresentationalism" and a commitment to behavior principles that relate environmental regularities to systematic behavior change. These embrace a wider range of behavioral phenomena than currently without reducing empirical rigor. Clavijo Alvarez’s paper will scrutinize the ontological assumptions and differences in the debates on privacy, realism versus an anti-realist perspective, and mechanism versus contextualism, and recommend the neutral monism of Russell and others as an ontology that may be acceptable to the whole behavior analysis community.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): metaphysics, monism, private events
Target Audience:

This symposium reviews fundamental issues that should be considered by all behavior analyts at or above masters level, including practitioners.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) identify basic tenets of behavior analysis; (2) identify the roles of some major Western philosphers in defining the metaphysics of science; (3) describe at least two accounts of the role of private events in behavior analysis
 
Metaphysics and the Basic Tenets of Behavior Analysis
JULIAN C. LESLIE (Ulster University)
Abstract: Metaphysics is the study of that which is known a priori, and what can be deduced from what is so known. There is a strong Western philosophical tradition of naturalism and realism. David Hume claimed that we cannot help believing in the existence of bodies and other people, and in inductive inference, and that these beliefs come from “nature” not “reason”; reason thus operates within bounds which are already set. These Humean principles are embedded in the metaphysics of science and thus have been imported into behaviour analysis. However, Rorty suggests that these are not necessary truths but conventions of that philosophical tradition. Alternatively, we can adopt some metaphysical assumptions that are closer to direct perception and do not entail the familiar problems of dualism. Additionally, we have been constrained by some assumptions made by Skinner about the operant conditioning process which again are not necessary and may need to be discarded. Revising our metaphysical and theoretical assumptions, while retaining core principles which define behavior analysis, may enable us not only to resolve debates about private events, but also allow us to provide accounts of a range of interesting findings on animal cognition which otherwise pose problems for behavior analysis.
 

Neutral Monism as an Ontology for Behavior Analysis? Might Be...

ALVARO A. CLAVIJO ALVAREZ ALVAREZ (Universidad Nacional de Colombia)
Abstract:

Some of the arguments used by members of the Behavior Analysis community indicate that their ontological assumptions differ. Sometimes the divergence is subtle as, for example, in the controversy around the notion of privacy and its role in explaining behavior. Privacy was the way in which Skinner and the radical behaviorists dealt with subjectivity. They were committed, however, to a particular ontology. Others, by starting from different ontological assumptions, necessarily have a different stance on the subject of privacy. In other cases, the controversy has been openly about ontological concerns, as in the dispute between those with a realistic view versus those with an anti-realist perspective, or between those who support a mechanistic approach versus those who support a contextual one. Nonetheless, Radical Behaviorists and Behavior Analysts do share beliefs including a certain degree of environmental determinism, the importance of behavior as the relevant data and, broadly, rejection of mentalism. Some of the main postulates of neutral monism, the ontology of Mach, James, and Russell, could offer ontological assumptions that can eventually be shared by most members of the Behavior Analysis community. This presentation examines these assumptions and their possible implications for a behavioral interpretation of behavior.

 
 
Invited Paper Session #96
CE Offered: BACB/PSY/QABA

Common Mistakes Behavior Analysts Make When Working in Schools (and What to Do Instead)

Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom EF
Area: PRA; Domain: Service Delivery
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Jennifer Austin, Ph.D.
Chair: Bobby Newman (Proud Moments)
JENNIFER AUSTIN (University of South Wales)

Jennifer L. Austin, Ph.D., BCBA-D has been applying the science of behavior analysis to improve outcomes for children and their teachers for over 20 years.  Both her research and clinical work focus on how behavior analytic assessment and intervention strategies can be applied with typically developing children, as well as examining what adaptations may be necessary for making our science “work” in mainstream classrooms.  She has worked with numerous schools in the US and the UK, focusing primarily on those in disadvantaged communities.  Dr. Austin received her PhD from the Florida State University and currently serves as Professor of Psychology and Head of Behavior Analysis at the University of South Wales.  Prior to moving to the United Kingdom, Dr. Austin served as faculty at the University of South Florida, California State University, Fresno and the University of Houston, Clear Lake.  She is the President of the UK Society for Behaviour Analysis and a former Associate Editor of the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis and Behavior Analysis in Practice.

Abstract:

Current statistics regarding problem behavior and academic attainment confirm that schools need behavior analysts more than ever. However, many schools that could benefit from our services do not know we exist (or have misconceptions about what we do). Further, our enthusiasm for helping schools enact meaningful changes in student and teacher behavior may cause us to miss some important contingencies that might impact our effectiveness as behavioral consultants. Drawing on work conducted at the University of South Wales, this presentation will identify some tips for “opening the school doors” for behavior analysis. It also will identify some common mistakes that behavior analysts make in schools, including such areas as functional assessment strategies, intervention planning and approach, and data collection. Importantly, it will provide some potential solutions to these problems, as well as identifying some interpersonal skills that might be useful in improving our efficacy in both mainstream and special education settings.

Target Audience:

Behavior analytic practitioners working in schools (particularly early career behavior analysts)

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) identify common mistakes that behavior analysts might make when working in schools, including mistakes related to assessment, intervention, and data collection; (2) describe some solutions to common mistakes; (3) identify interpersonal skills that may affect school personnel’s willingness to use behavior analytic strategies; (4) describe some strategies for gaining entry to schools that could benefit from behavior analytic consultation.
 
 
Invited Tutorial #97
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP
SQAB Tutorial: Using Genetically Modified Organisms to Probe Neurobiological Bases of Behavior
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: SCI; Domain: Basic Research
PSY/BACB/NASP CE Offered. CE Instructor: Paul Soto, Ph.D.
Chair: Jesse Dallery (University of Florida)
Presenting Authors: : PAUL SOTO (Louisiana State University)
Abstract:

This tutorial will provide a general introduction to some technologies available for manipulating gene expression in mice. Technologies for manipulating gene expression can be used to investigate the neurobiological contributors to behavior. Results obtained from studies in dopamine receptor knockout mice on the role of dopamine receptors in food’s reinforcing efficacy will be used as an example of use of a global knockout approach. Results obtained from studies in Alzheimer’s transgenic APPswe/PS1dE9 mice on the role of beta amyloid in cognitive decline will be used as an example of a transgene approach. Additionally, the tutorial will discuss emerging technologies that allow precise control over the timing and location of modification of genetic expression. These emerging technologies allow behavioral researchers to investigate the role of neurobiological variables on behavior from a developmental perspective and to address questions regarding the role of particular brain regions in behavior. Genetically modified organisms provide a promising avenue for fruitful collaborations between behavior analysts and geneticists, neuroscientists, and scientists in other complementary areas.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) distinguish genetic knockout and transgene manipulations; (2) describe emerging technologies for regionally and temporally selective manipulations of gene expression; (3) describe the impact of dopamine receptor deletion on reinforcer efficacy; and (4) describe the impact of transgene-mediated build-up of beta amyloid on delayed matching-to-position and 3-choice serial reaction time task performances.
 
PAUL SOTO (Louisiana State University)
Dr. Soto completed graduate training in psychology at Emory University and postdoctoral training in behavioral pharmacology at the National Institute on Drug Abuse and the Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine. Prior to accepting a position at LSU in 2017, Dr. Soto held tenure-track appointments in the School of Medicine at Johns Hopkins University and Texas Tech University. Dr. Soto’s research interests are in (1) the use of laboratory animal models of psychiatric diseases and symptoms for the evaluation of potential therapeutic approaches, (2) the use of drugs and genetically engineered animals to identify the neurobiological contributors to basic and complex behavioral processes, and (3) the investigation of short- and long-term effects of exposure to psychiatric medications. Some of Dr. Soto’s research has involved the investigation of the role of dopamine D2-like receptors in learning and memory and the long-term effects of early-life exposure to ADHD stimulant medications and antipsychotic medications, both of which are frequently prescribed in children. Dr. Soto’s research has been published in many journals including high impact journals such as Neuropsychopharmacology and Psychopharmacology.  Additionally, Dr. Soto recently completed a four-year appointment as an Associate Editor for the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior. Finally, Dr. Soto is currently managing the final year of an NIH R15 project to investigate the longitudinal profile of cognitive decline in Alzheimer’s disease transgenic mice.
 
 
Panel #98
CE Offered: BACB
Current Practices in Online Education for Teaching Behavior Analysis
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, International Ballroom
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Cheryl J. Davis, Ph.D.
Chair: Julianne Lasley (Capella University )
CHERYL J. DAVIS (7 Dimensions Consulting; SupervisorABA)
DANA R. REINECKE (Capella University)
NOELLE NEAULT (Simmons College)
Abstract: At the university-level, online instruction in behavior analysis is achieved using a variety of pedagogical tactics. Examples of these tactics include different methods to deliver content, ways to facilitate learner engagement, and approaches to effective feedback application. In addition to written formats, instructional content may be delivered using either or both live and recorded lectures, with or without active student responding. Asynchronous discussion boards may be used in a variety of formats to facilitate learner engagement, including large and small group contact, embedded video, and written contributions. Instructor or peer feedback may be delivered in different ways, including audio, video and written formats. Presenters in this panel are experienced online educators who have used and evaluated all of these varied practices in past and current coursework. Each panelist will discuss one of the practices and offer an assessment of the advantages and disadvantages of each practice based on professional experience. Panelists will take questions from the audience and the moderator.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience: The target audience is faculty in higher education programs teaching behavior analysis or related content.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the panel, participants will be able to: (1) describe ways to establish an effective online teaching presence, and to deliver effective feedback; (2) describe ways to incorporate evidence-based practices into online learning formats; (3) describe strategies to increase active student responding in online classrooms; (4) describe strategies to facilitate learner engagement in online communities.
Keyword(s): asynchronous instruction, online instruction, synchronous instruction, TBA
 
 
Panel #99
CE Offered: BACB
Behavior Analysis and Open Educational Resources
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Rouge
Area: TBA; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Veronica J. Howard, Ph.D.
Chair: Cassandra Anderson (University of Alaska Anchorage)
MAGGIE PAVONE (Lindenwood University)
RYAN SAIN (Northwest Autism Center)
VERONICA J. HOWARD (University of Alaska Anchorage)
Abstract: Open educational resources (OERs) are educational materials that can be freely downloaded, edited, and shared to better serve all students. (SPARC, 2017). OERs can help disseminate behavior analysis to a wider audience without the barriers of university or program enrollment. While open resources are used widely for high-enrollment undergraduate general education courses, few if any resources exist that accurately portray behavior analysis. This creates a pragmatic barrier to student education and may pose a challenge when related fields (i.e., psychology) attempt to represent our science. This panel will: Demonstrate how to locate OERs that may be useful in education, practice, and professional development. Describe the types of OERs currently available that are related to behavior analysis. Discuss the contingencies that maintain (or fail to maintain) the production of ABA-related OERs. Introduce a new professional resource group to encourage collaboration on new OERs and assist interested BCBAs in locating quality OERs.
Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience: Behavior analytic educators and supervisors
Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to describe what open educational resources (OER) are and where to find them. Participants will be able to describe the contingencies shaping OER creators and benefits for OER users.
Keyword(s): Dissemination, OER, Open Access, Open-Ed Resources
 
 
Symposium #100
CE Offered: BACB
Supporting Social Interactions for Children With Developmental Disabilities and Their Peers
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom A
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Tracy Jane Raulston (Penn State)
Discussant: Russell Lang (Texas State University-San Marcos)
CE Instructor: Tracy Jane Raulston, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) and other developmental disabilities are likely to experience difficulties socially interacting with their peers during natural routines, including play times at school or home. Additionally, children with developmental disabilities may have difficulty forming friendships or report lower quality of friendships as well as increased loneliness, peer rejection, or bullying. Social behavior and social play are important areas of child development and may require explicit intervention procedures and supports. This symposium is comprised of four presentations of original datasets. Each study evaluated an intervention to increase social skills between children with ASD or other developmental disabilities and their typically-developing peers. The interventions targeted social skills including responding to peer bids for joint attention, taking turns during imaginary play activities, recess skills, and taking game turns during playdates. Intervention components consisted of environmental arrangement, prompting, reinforcement, use of video scene displays in an augmentative and alternative communication device (AAC), and direct instruction (DI). Key takeaways are that children and their peers may require systematic teaching procedures in natural environments in order to fully benefit during social routines.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): "play interventions", "social skills", "young children"
Target Audience:

This event is appropriate for practitioners and researchers working in classrooms or homes of children with developmental disabilities.

 
Peer Mediated Early Social Skill Intervention in an Inclusive Preschool Classroom
SARAH GRACE HANSEN (Georgia State University), Amarie Carnett (University of Texas at San Antonio), Megan Mowbray (Georgia State), Christopher A. Tullis (Georgia State University)
Abstract: Joint attention, or shared attention of two individuals on an object or event, is a pivotal social communication skill that develops in most children before their second birthday. Response to (i.e., following someone’s point) and initiation of (i.e., pointing out an object or event) joint attention are considered pivotal skills for later social communication skill acquisition. Children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) may not develop these skills without targeted intervention, and may not demonstrate mastery of these skills even by preschool. For this reason, involving peers in intervention on these skills may allow for greater support in the natural environment. The current study extends findings of a peer mediated joint attention intervention targeting response to joint attention skill in preschool settings using peer training and interventionist mediated priming sessions. Results indicated peer bids and target child responses both increased following intervention. The current study extended the work of Hansen and colleagues by implementing the intervention in inclusive preschool classrooms, teaching both initiation and response to joint attention skills to the target child, and removing interventionist mediated priming sessions. Results indicated increase in peer bids, target child response, target child bids and subsequent peer response in a multiple baseline design across behaviors embedded in a multiple baseline design across participants. Implications and opportunities for future research are discussed.
 
Effects of a Mobile App on Communication During Interactive Play in Autism: A Pilot Study
EMILY LAUBSCHER (Penn State), Janice Light (Penn State), David McNaughton (Penn State)
Abstract: In early childhood, interactive pretend play with peers provides an important context for development of social communication skills that tend to be challenging for individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). Children with ASD and limited speech are at risk for exclusion from pretend play due to difficulties with both acquisition of symbolic play behaviors and expressive communication during play; as such, they often miss out on the very play experiences that would allow them to observe and practice the skills they lack. Several existing interventions have successfully targeted both play behaviors and communication during pretend play for children with ASD, but few have provided adequate expressive communication supports for nonverbal children. To address this gap, the current pilot study uses a multiple probe design across activities to examine the effect of an innovative AAC approach, the use of video visual scene displays (video VSDs), on communication and play skills for one child with ASD and limited speech during pretend play with a typically developing peer. Results showed an increase in frequency of communicative turns for the participant with ASD, suggesting that video VSDs may be promising tools for supporting social communication during play for nonverbal children with ASD.
 
A Direct Instruction Treatment Package Approach to Teaching Playground Rules and Expectations
SLOAN STORIE (University of Oregon), Allaina Douglas (University of Oregon), Andrew Bulla (Armstrong State University), Wendy A. Machalicek (University of Oregon)
Abstract: The playground is one of the most unstructured times during the school day (Colvin & Lowe, 1986). Playground time can be especially difficult for students with disabilities due to a lack of social skills and training (Nabors, Willoughby, Leff, & McMenamin, 2001). One approach that teaches skills and concepts to generalize to new situations is direct instruction ([DI] Carnine, 1994). This study used a DI treatment package to examine social skills of students with and without disabilities on the playground. Participants consisted of two typically developing Kindergarteners and a Preschooler with a diagnosis of Cerebral Palsy, and developmental disabilities. The effects of this intervention were examined with two single-subject designs. A withdrawal design was used to determine if a functional relation existed between a DI lesson on “Be Kind” and scheduled feedback on student’s demonstration of inviting their classmates to play and sharing their space and materials. A multiple-baseline design was used to identify if there was a functional relation between the DI lesson “Be On Time” and practice sessions on each student’s demonstration of cleaning up and lining up right away. Although functional relations were not demonstrated, authors identified interesting patterns to consider when implementing the playground treatment package.
 

Coaching Parents of Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder to Embed Social Skills Instruction During Playdates

TRACY JANE RAULSTON (Penn State), Sarah Grace Hansen (Georgia State University), Rebecca Frantz (University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign), Wendy A. Machalicek (University of Oregon), Naima Bhana (The Pennsylvania State University)
Abstract:

Children need opportunities to practice social skills outside of school, and a common means for this is through playdates. There are few studies examining methods to teach children with ASD social skills during playdates and have included children with advanced language skills, such as the ability to ask questions to peers. In the current study, we examined a parent-implemented packaged intervention aimed at embedding instruction in early social skills during playdates in the home of the child with ASD. A concurrent multiple-probe across parent-child-peer triads single-case design was employed. Data were collected on parent treatment fidelity and frequency of child and peer mands (e.g., requesting a turn) and child and peer responses to mands (e.g., passing the game die). During the coaching phase, parents were taught the steps of the packaged intervention, which included a social narrative, activity schedule, environmental arrangement, prompting, and reinforcement strategies. Parents were taught to embed social skills instruction within the context of game play. During baseline, low levels of treatment fidelity, child, and peer behaviors were observed for all three triads. Upon implementation of coaching, an immediate increase in level of independent correct steps of treatment fidelity was observed for triads one and two. An immediate increase in level and trend was observed for child behavior and peer behavior for triad one. An immediate increase in level and trend was observed for child behavior and peer responses, with moderate changes observed for peer mands for triad two. A small change in level was observed for parent, child, and peer behaviors in triad three. Due to emergence of child challenging behavior and a decreasing trend in target behaviors for triad three, a procedural modification was employed. Following the procedural modification, an immediate increase in level was observed in parent treatment fidelity, and moderate changes in level for child mands and peer behaviors were observed. This pilot study suggests that training parents of children with ASD to implement evidence-based strategies with their child and a peer may be an effective means to support early social skills, but that child challenging behavior and communication needs may affect outcomes.

 
 
Symposium #101
CE Offered: BACB
Responding to the Emotions of Others: Theory, Research, and Practice in Autism Treatment
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom B
Area: AUT; Domain: Theory
Chair: Jaime DeQuinzio (Alpine Learning Group)
Discussant: Martha Pelaez (Florida International University)
CE Instructor: Jaime DeQuinzio, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The purpose of this symposium is to present theory and research focused on improving the responding of individuals with autism to the emotions of others. To engage in social referencing, empathy, and helping individuals must be able to respond to the verbal and non-verbal emotional displays of others as discriminative stimuli. Individuals with autism display challenges orienting toward and responding to these social stimuli and behavior analytic instruction can be been used to alleviate these deficits. This symposium will begin with a discussion of social referencing from a behavior-analytic framework. The second paper presents a demonstration of the effects of discrimination training on the differential responding to joyful and fearful expressions within social referencing. The third paper will focus on the effects of a teaching package to train empathetic responses by adolescents with autism using socially mediated reinforcers. The fourth paper will present a comparison of group and individual instruction to teach empathy and helping.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): emotions, empathy, helping, social referencing
Target Audience:

BCBAs, BCaBAs

Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will learn a behavioral conceptualization of social referencing 2. Attendees will be able to conceptualize emotions as discriminative stimuli 2. Attendees will learn single case experimental designs for evaluating treatments focused on improving social referencing, empathy, and helping in children with autism 3. Attendees will learn effective procedures for improving social referencing, empathy, and helping
 
Social Referencing and Joint Attention: Toward a Conceptual Analysis and a Functional Distinction
PAMELA NICHOLE PETERSON (New England Center for Children), Rebecca P. F. MacDonald (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Social referencing is a social response that has been largely discussed in the developmental literature. Behaviorally-defined as a discriminated operant consisting of a chain of responses following the presentation of a novel or ambiguous stimulus, social referencing is lacking in children with autism. Due to the failure of children with autism to demonstrate social referencing, behavior analysts have begun to consider the conditions most suitable to teaching this chain of responses. Effective design of behavior-analytic teaching procedures necessitates a thorough understanding of the relevant behavioral processes and contingencies that maintain social referencing. A behavioral conceptualization of social referencing will be expanded upon and the role of discriminative stimuli and establishing operations in the facilitation of the response chain in typically-developing children will be discussed. Additionally, a functional distinction between social referencing and joint attention, a topographically similar response often considered to be maintained by the same contingencies, will be posited.
 

Teaching Children With Autism to Respond to Joyful and Fearful Expressions Within Social Referencing

JAIME DEQUINZIO (Alpine Learning Group), Stephanie Ruch (Alpine Learning Group), Jaime Stine (Alpine Learning Group), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group)
Abstract:

During social referencing, infants as young as 6 months of age look to others when confronted with unfamiliar or unexpected events in the environment as a means of determining how to respond to such events. Typically, approach or avoidance responses are learned by responding to positive and negative affective cues of the parent or caregiver (e.g., smiling and frowning). Unfortunately, social referencing repertoires are limited, delayed, or completely lacking in children with autism. Despite these documented social deficits, to date there has been only one published study that has focused on ameliorating social referencing deficits in children with autism. In this study we used a multiple baseline design across three participants to determine the effects of discrimination training, verbal instructions, and manual guidance on the differential responding of children with autism to fearful and joyful expressions. All three participants learned to discriminate the expressions presented within the context of social referencing but generalization to others was limited. A discussion of social referencing and future directions for research will be presented.

 

Using a Three Component Generalization Strategy to Teach Empathy to Adolescents With Autism Spectrum Disorder

VICTORIA BARBUTO (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Danielle L. Gureghian (Garden Academy), Alexandra O'Grady (Caldwell University)
Abstract:

Previous research has demonstrated that children and adolescents who show empathy and towards others are likely to increase their opportunities for future interactions with peers and family members. This study extended the work of Garcia-Albea, Reeve, Reeve, Kisamore, LeBlanc, and Brothers (2015) to teach empathetic responses to four adolescent males with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). A treatment package consisting of video modeling, audio and manual prompts, behavior rehearsals, and socially mediated consequences was used to teach empathy. It further programed for generalization using a three-component generalization strategy (i.e., general-case analysis, multiple-exemplar training, and experimenter-defined categories). Each empathy category was comprised of nine compound discriminative stimuli, that programmed for generalization from trained to novel compound discriminative stimuli. A multiple probe across participants design was used to assess the effectiveness of the treatment package and the degree of empathetic response acquisition across participants.The results indicated the effectiveness of the treatment package and empathetic responses maintained in the absence of the treatment package. Further, the skill generalized from trained to novel compound discriminative stimuli and from untrained to a novel empathy category.

 

Comparing Group and Individual Instruction to Teach Empathy and Helping Skills to Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

MELISSA ANDREACIO (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Anjalee Nirgudkar (Behavior Analysts of NJ, LLC)
Abstract:

Children with autism spectrum disorders (ASD) have deficits in language and social skills that make it difficult to learn to initiate and respond to others. Individual and group instruction have been used to teach different social behaviors but confounds have been noted in the research in how skills have been assessed. A two by two factorial design was used to compare group and individual instruction to determine which form of instruction was more effective to teach eight children with ASD empathy and helping skills. Four of the participants were taught empathy and helping with group instruction and the other four were taught empathy and helping with individual instruction. Video models were presented either individually or in a group, questions were posed to participants, and in-vivo assessment trials were conducted individually in separate rooms. Generalization probes were conducted using a novel empathy and helping scenario and maintenance data was collected one week, two weeks, and four weeks after the completion of the intervention. All participants learned helping and empathy skills, generalized these skills to novel situations, and maintained them, however, no differences was found between group or individual instruction.

 
 
Symposium #102
CE Offered: BACB
Comparing Procedural Variables in Skill Acquisition Arrangements for Children With Autism
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom C
Area: AUT/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Chata A. Dickson (New England Center for Children; Western New England University)
Discussant: Karen A. Toussaint (University of North Texas)
CE Instructor: Karen A. Toussaint, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Behavior-analytic teaching procedures have been shown to be effective in promoting the acquisition of important skills in children with autism. Research that specifies the critical features upon which this success depends may lead to refinements in our instructional design, and improvements in outcomes for the children we serve. This symposium consists of four studies that compare procedural variables in skill acquisition arrangements for children with autism. These procedural variables include the within-trial sequence of sample and comparison stimulus presentation, the within-session timing of an opportunity for the learner to choose a reinforcer, and the criteria for introducing multiple exemplars and initiating differential reinforcement of unprompted and prompted correct responses.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): autism, remediation, skill acquisition, teaching procedures
Target Audience:

Researchers and practitioners who evaluate or implement instructional programs to children with autism or intellectual disabilities.

Learning Objectives: If asked to do so following this presentation attendees will: 1. Identify the stimuli presented in a matching-to-sample trial, distinguishing between sample and comparison stimuli. 2. Describe multiple-exemplar teaching as a strategy for promoting generalization of skills. 3. Define differential reinforcement and describe how this is applied in the context of promoting independent responding.
 

A Comparison of Presenting the Sample or Comparisons First During Audio-Visual Conditional Discrimination Training for Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

COURTNEY LYN MEYERHOFER (Marquette University), Samantha Bergmann (University of North Texas), Tiffany Kodak (Marquette University), Mike Harman (Briar Cliff University), Miranda May Olsen (University of Wisconsin Milwaukee), Gabriella VanDenElzen (University of Wisconsin Milwaukee; University of Nebraska Medical Center), Dayna Costello (University of Wisconsin Milwaukee), Jessi Reidy (Marquette University)
Abstract:

Auditory-visual conditional discriminations (AVCD) occur when behavior comes under the control of auditory stimuli (e.g., a vocal sample) and a related visual stimulus (e.g., a picture in an array) in the environment. The sequence of procedures in AVCD training may vary; this study evaluated two common sequences by comparing sample- and comparison-first presentation format. A sample-first training format involves the presentation of an auditory sample stimulus before the array of visual stimuli, and a comparison-first format involves the presentation of the array of visual stimuli before the auditory sample stimulus. The study used a multiple probe design across two stimulus sets with an embedded adapted alternating treatments design. Four individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder participated. Results show that all eight comparisons for the sample-first condition were efficacious and seven of the eight comparisons for the comparison-first condition were efficacious. The comparison-first condition was the most efficient procedure in four of the eight comparisons. In two of the comparisons, both sample- and comparison-first procedures were equally efficient. Implications and future directions will be discussed.

 

A Comparison of Serial and Concurrent Training With Multiple Exemplars to Teach Propositional Direction-Following to Children With Autism

TERESA LING (New England Center for Children; Western New England University), Chata A. Dickson (New England Center for Children; Western New England University)
Abstract:

Multiple exemplar teaching (MET) has been shown to improve the likelihood that a learned response will occur in situations that are different from the training environment. The purpose of this study was to compare effects of two methods for programming MET: serial and concurrent training. Two young men with autism spectrum disorder were taught to follow prepositional spoken directives using serial and concurrent presentation of multiple exemplars. Trials to mastery and generalization to untrained, natural environment locations were evaluated using each method. One participant met mastery criteria more quickly using concurrent training. Both training methods resulted in generalization to untrained, natural environment locations for both participants.

 

Reinforcer Choice as an Antecedent Versus Consequence During Acquisition Tasks for Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

RAFAELLA GASHI (Garden Academy), Danielle L. Gureghian (Garden Academy), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University), Alexandra Marie Campanaro (Caldwell University)
Abstract:

Providing choice of reinforcers has shown to be an effective and efficient strategy to increase skill acquisition (Toussaint, Kodak, & Vladescu, 2016). However, less is known about the differential effectiveness and efficiency of providing choices before or after task responding. We sought to replicate and extend Peterson, Lerman, and Nissen (2016) by evaluating reinforcer choice using auditory-visual conditional discrimination acquisition targets with three children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. We assigned three unknown targets to each condition and taught the targets using a constant prompt delay with a gesture prompt. During the antecedent condition, participants selected the putative reinforcer prior to earning tokens. During the consequence condition, participants selected the reinforcer following earning tokens. Antecedent and consequence choice responding was evaluating using an adapted alternating treatment design embedded within a nonconcurrent multiple baseline design Results showed acquisition of targets across both the antecedent and consequence condition for two of three participants. However, consequence choice condition appeared to be more efficient for all three participants. These data provide preliminary support that providing choice prior to task responding, a commonly used strategy with children with autism spectrum disorder, may not result in the most efficient responding.

 
Comparing Skill Acquisition Under Varying Onsets of Differential Reinforcement
ALEXANDRA MARIE CAMPANARO (Caldwell University), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University), Ruth M. DeBar (Caldwell University), Tiffany Kodak (Marquette University), Kasey Clark Nippes (Caldwell University)
Abstract: Previous research has demonstrated that differential reinforcement may increase instructional efficiency relative to nondifferential reinforcement. However, little research has directly evaluated when during instruction to begin differentially reinforcing unprompted and prompted correct responses. The current study evaluated the effect of implementing differential reinforcement at different times relative to the onset of teaching new skills to three learners with autism spectrum disorder. Specifically, we first determined the most effective differential reinforcement arrangement for each participant. Next, we evaluated the efficacy and efficiency of differential reinforcement from the immediate onset, early onset, or late onset. The results indicated that across participants, the immediate onset of differential reinforcement resulted in the most efficient instruction in six of seven comparisons. These outcomes will be discussed in light of previous research and recommendations for future research.
 
 
Symposium #103
CE Offered: BACB
Removing Barriers to Managing Diabetes With Cognitive Impairment
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 3/4
Area: CBM; Domain: Theory
Chair: Elise Pearl (Eastern Michigan University)
Discussant: Rebecca A Sharp (Bangor University)
CE Instructor: Rebecca A Sharp, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Cognitive impairment and type 2 diabetes often co-occur: individuals with neurodevelopmental disorders are 1.5 to 2.7 times more likely to have diabetes than the general population, and there is a 1.5- to 2-fold increased risk that older adults with diabetes will develop a major neurocognitive disorder, such as vascular dementia. Adults with cognitive impairment and diabetes tend to receive substandard diabetes care, putting them at increased risk of complications and hospitalization. Consequently, approximately 33% and 9-17% of individuals with type 2 diabetes and cognitive impairment experience episodes of hyper or hypoglycemia, respectively. Problematic glycemic control associated with poorly managed type 2 diabetes can function as an antecedent, contributing to increased frequencies of behavioral problems when neurodevelopmental or neurocognitive disorders are also present. This symposium will present a behavior analytic approach to diabetes management, including a structured task analysis, and discuss barriers and facilitators to diabetes management, particularly the role of specific cognitive deficits, family care partner behavior, and the structure of food environments.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): care partners, cognitive impairment, diabetes management, task analysis
Target Audience:

Behavior analysts working with children or adults, particularly those with impaired cognition and comorbid medical concerns.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of this presentation, participants will be able to 1. identify tasks required to manage diabetes and how these may be affected by impaired cognition; 2. contextualize difficulty structuring supportive food environments and consider intervention strategies; 3. conceptualize facilitators and barriers to care partner management of comorbid diabetes and cognitive impairment.
 
Task Analysis of Type 2 Diabetes Management
LINDSEY BUNIO (Eastern Michigan University), Kayla Rinna (Eastern Michigan), Claudia Drossel (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: Behavior analysts can prevent adverse events and contribute to the quality of service delivery for adults with type 2 diabetes and impaired cognition by enhancing adherence to treatment regimens. When a client has diabetes, a behavior analysis includes assessment of and intervention on the chain of behaviors required to effectively manage blood sugar levels, including systematic monitoring and medication administration. This presentation introduces the development and the implementation of a task analysis that clarifies areas of skill breakdown and suggests interventions at each relevant step. This task analysis can be modified based on the type of medication (e.g., insulin vs. oral tablets), and it can assess potential breakdowns within the complex sequence related to various elements, such as specific devices and tracking methods. Behavior analysts will be able to distinguish specific components of the process that the client may self-manage from those components that may require additional support or assistance for completion. Also discussed will be steps to train family care partners to provide the additional support.
 

Integrating Neuropsychological Test Data With Behavioral Analytic Conceptualization

REBECCA CAMPBELL (Wayne State University), John Woodard (Wayne State University)
Abstract:

Managing type 2 diabetes entails significant patient involvement to perform many daily self-care tasks, such as monitoring blood glucose, taking medications, and maintaining a diabetic diet. Chronic and poorly managed type 2 diabetes -- with frequent episodes of hyper- and hypoglycemia -- often is accompanied by functional decline, including changes in sensory acuity due to diabetic retinopathy and executive functioning, i.e., initiating complex actions, organizing, and planning. Decreased motor skills and difficulties learning, attending, or remembering may also occur. These types of changes further diminish individuals’ ability to direct and engage effectively in their diabetes care. Available neuropsychological testing data can supplement a task analysis and provide further useful information about the types of difficulties that may interfere with tasks necessary to self-management of diabetes. Common neuropsychological changes in type 2 diabetes will be discussed, along with the specific instruments used to measure these changes, and their potential impact on behavioral intervention strategies. When possible, neuropsychological testing should be integrated with behavioral analytic case conceptualizations, to facilitate intervention planning.

 

Food Environments and Glycemic Control: Education and Behavior Analytic Intervention

Kate Krautbauer (Eastern Michigan University), ELISE PEARL (Eastern Michigan University), Claudia Drossel (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract:

Eating well is critical to health for all people, and this may be particularly true for individuals with type 2 diabetes. Given the relevance of behavioral economics and discounting to everyday food choices and obesity as a general public health problem, impaired cognition -- accompanied by decreased influence of larger later outcomes over behavior -- presents unique challenges when arranging or structuring a food environment to support adherence to diabetes management. Extremes of blood sugar - both high (hyperglycemia) and low (hypoglycemia) - have been associated with accelerated functional decline and behavioral disturbances. Hyperglycemia has been linked to the development of physical impairment and increased risk for delirium or psychosis. Hypoglycemia has been associated with increased difficulty tracking contingencies over time, impairment in immediate and delayed stimulus control, decrements in motor control and gait, and break down of behavioral chains. The impact of glycemic control on the functional status and behavior of those with comorbid diabetes and cognitive impairment will be reviewed. Contingency management interventions designed to increase the likelihood of glycemic control by targeting the food environment will be suggested.

 
Care Partners’ Role in Managing Diabetes and Cognitive Impairment
Jennifer Battles (Eastern Michigan University), Claudia Drossel (Eastern Michigan University), KAYLA RINNA (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: Effectively managing diabetes in the presence of cognitive limitations poses a significant challenge for healthcare providers, advocates, and families. Many adults with diabetes and impaired cognition have informal care partners -- family members or friends -- who assist with or complete instrumental activities of daily living, such as cooking or medication administration. Data from public health surveys indicate that long-term demands of informal caregiving for spouses or family members with cognitive impairment correlate with care partner health problems and functional decline. For this reason, there have been national initiatives to support care partners by providing education and skills. Despite these initiatives, many informal care partners do not receive proper training to assist individuals with cognitive impairment with diabetes management. Thus, care partners may misattribute behavioral changes associated with poor glycemic control to the neurodevelopmental or neurodegenerative disorder. Notably, evidence suggests that healthcare providers may make similar attributional errors. The current paper will review the facilitators and barriers to diabetes management within families and health systems, introduce functional analytic case diagrams to illustrate the reciprocal relationship between blood glucose control and external social/family factors, and suggest points of intervention for behavior analysts. Future research directions will also be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #104
CE Offered: BACB
Emerging Trends in Acceptance and Commitment Therapy
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 1/2
Area: CBM/EAB; Domain: Translational
Chair: Dex West (Saint Louis University)
Discussant: Adam DeLine Hahs (Arizona State University)
CE Instructor: Adam DeLine Hahs, Ph.D.
Abstract: The current symposium seeks to showcase emerging new trends in Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) approaches and conceptualization refinement of identified mechanisms of change. Each paper provides a unique approach to using ACT, and explicit targeting of psychological flexibility. Psychological flexibility is a central mechanism for all ACT techniques, one that focuses on changing behavior in accordance with all stimuli and valued-based contingencies. The first paper will showcase emerging evidence in the validity of the Children’s Psychological Flexibility Questionnaire (CPFQ) with currently available psychometric's for children. The second paper explores the utility of ACT on children’s responses to a continues performance task (CPT-X). The third paper evaluates the relationship between derived relational responding and psychological flexibility, as measured with the CPFQ, with children with autism. Finally, the fourth paper explored the effects of an ACT body image self-help book on psychological flexibility and body-image avoidance behavior with participants with maladaptive body-image coping strategies. Attendees will gain first hand knowledge about new psychometric tools useful for measuring psychological flexibility, as well as new ACT intervention strategies.
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): ACT, derived relations, psychological flexibility
Target Audience: Board certified behavior analysts and assistant level certified behavior analysts.
Learning Objectives: At the end of the symposium, attendees will: 1. Identify useful psychometric surveys to use to measure psychological flexibility 2. Define mechanisms of change for psychological flexibility 3. Identify emerging trends in ACT research for behavior analysts 4. Label measures and measurement systems for ACT intervention strategies
 

Assessing Psychological Flexibility With Children: Current Measures and Future Directions

(Applied Research)
DANA PALILIUNAS (Missouri State University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract:

Psychological flexibility is a central mechanism of change for therapeutic techniques that emphasize the relationship between human language and psychological suffering. Psychological flexibility can be described as persistence with or changing of behavior, in accordance with values-based contingencies, while contacting all stimuli, both public and private, in the present environment (e.g. Bond, Hayes, & Barnes-Holmes, 2006). In the context of Acceptance Commitment Therapy or Training, interventions are designed to increase this flexibility among individuals, including children with behavioral needs, and methods of assessment are necessary to examine the effects of such treatments. First, we examine the relationship between self-reports of psychological flexibility and language ability for a sample of children with and without autism and discuss the implications of this data in terms of treatment. Then, we explore psychological flexibility assessment measures currently available specifically for children, and relationship of these, such as the Children’s Psychological Flexibility Questionnaire, to other common measures of child behavior. Finally, we conclude with a discussion of possible future directions in the assessment of children’s psychological flexibility.

 
Use of an Acceptance and Commitment Training Curriculum to Target Psychological Flexibility, Attention, and Behavior Management
(Applied Research)
MARY RACHEL ENOCH (Antioch University New England)
Abstract: Acceptance and Commitment Training is an intervention that integrates mindfulness and acceptance with behavior change processes. Study one had 40 participants aged 6-12 years old. The study sought to demonstrate whether ACT activities increased particular attention processes. ACT participants (M = 5.4, SD = 9.8) showed fewer inaccuracies on the CPT-X task compared to the control group (M = 19.75, SD = 16.1) at posttest F (1, 38) = 11.49, p = .02, ηp² = .232. Study two had a total of 30 participants aged 7-12 years old. The study sought to determine if ACT camp increased psychological flexibility among the participants in the experimental group. The results of the AFQ-Y suggest there was significant difference in psychological flexibility between the experimental group (M=17.13, SD= 2.64) compared to the control group (M=27.4, SD=2.64) at posttest F (1, 28) = 7.53, p= .01, ηp²= .212. The third study is currently being conducted and includes 14 after school sites each with 60 participants. Staff were trained on an ACT curriculum and receive weekly coaching from a BCBA. Data is being collected on rates of problem behavior to determine if an ACT curriculum is effective in the afterschool setting to reduce rates of problem behavior.
 

Evaluating the Relationship Between Derived Relational Responding and the Children's Psychological Flexibility Questionnaire in Individuals With Autism Spectrum Disorders

(Basic Research)
JESSICA M HINMAN (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University), Danielle Hilkey (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Becky Barron (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract:

The current investigation evaluated the relationship between complex Derived Relational Responding and psychological flexibility in individuals of various ages diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorders (ASD) or a related developmental disability. The Promoting the Emergence of Advanced Knowledge (PEAK) Relational Training System Transformation pre-assessment was used to measure Derived Relational Responding while psychological flexibility was measured using the Children’s Psychological Flexibility Questionnaire (CPFQ) which was reported by participants themselves and their caregivers. As data collection is still in the early stages and complete statistical analyses cannot yet be conducted, preliminary data suggests a relationship between the PEAK-T and CPFQ: Child and CPFQ: Caregiver assessments. Specifically, with a strong relationship between the PEAK-T and CPFQ: Caregiver assessment. These findings suggest that increased derived relational responding likely results in improved psychological flexibility as reported by the child and their caregiver which suggests a clinical utility in improving relational responding in individuals with ASD.

 

An Evaluation of an Acceptance and Commitment Therapy-Based Self-Help Intervention for Body Image Inflexibility

(Basic Research)
JADE CAMPBELL (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Abstract:

Body image involves the experience of one’s body, and body image disturbance occurs when one’s experience of body image is particularly painful and disruptive to daily living. Body image flexibility seems to be an important component for reducing body image disturbance. In recent years, there has been an increase in the interest of using self-help manuals as an alternative to interpersonal therapy for treating body image disturbance. The presented study aimed to help individuals struggling with their body image utilizing a self-help book based in Acceptance and Commitment Therapy. Participants who reported body image disturbance during prescreen evaluations were invited to partake in an eight-week self-help program designed to increase body-image flexibility and reduce maladaptive body-image coping strategies. Changes in target behaviors were assessed via self-report data collected online at five different intervals: 1) prescreening (baseline); 2) midway through the readings (week 4); 3) upon completion of the readings (week 8); 4) 4-week follow-up (week 12); 5) 16-week follow-up (week 24). In general, participants exhibited improvements in body-image flexibility and reductions in body-image avoidance behavior over the course of treatment and beyond. Individual-level outcomes will be presented in detail and further implications discussed.

 
 
Symposium #105
CE Offered: BACB
Diversity submission The Way Forward: Behavior Analysis and the Contingencies of Inclusion
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Fairmont, B2, Imperial Ballroom
Area: CSS/PCH; Domain: Translational
Chair: Vivian Mach (Morningside Academy)
Discussant: Adam Hockman (The Mechner Foundation)
CE Instructor: Joanne K. Robbins, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Behavior analysts are in the unique position to build bridges that cross cultures and to respect diversity in meaningful measurable ways. We can reach across professions, across disciplines, and across age groups to address patterns that harm any population. We can translate procedures from other fields, and design and sequence measurable objectives without relying on psychological constructs. This symposium will share an analysis and solutions for challenges that arise from exclusionary cultural diversity practices and the great need to provide diversity training. Behavior analysts can contribute to policy and practices that affect the LGBTQ community. We discuss the need to develop culturally competent assessment and treatment interventions for those diagnosed on the autism spectrum. We examine the current and historical make up of the leadership in our own international organization. The constructional approach is presented to help define and facilitate how behavior analysis can move us forward in addressing these issues.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): bias, constructional approach, cultural diversity, discrimination
Target Audience:

College professors BCBA practitioners

Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to name three free or low cost resources that are available for teaching adults and youth about LGBTQ needs. Participants will be able to state two examples of differences between the etiology of autism in different cultures. Participants will be able to state which emotion is a by-product of the distancing contingency.
 
Diversity submission 

Cross-Cultural Implementation of Applied Behavior Analysis for Treating Individuals Diagnosed With Autism Spectrum Disorder

(Service Delivery)
STACEE LEATHERMAN (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), James C. Moore (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Ileana Torres (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Robyn M. Catagnus (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract:

The worldwide impact of autism creates a need to develop culturally competent assessment and treatment interventions that can be implemented in a variety of cultures. The literature on interventions for autism spectrum disorder (ASD) has identified behavioral interventions as being very effective in Western cultures. However, there is little research about behavioral interventions in non-Western cultures. Culture can affect a person’s beliefs about the cause or origin of ASD, which types of treatment the person seeks, and the goals/outcomes the person expects. Western ABA providers working with individuals with ASD from diverse cultures need to develop and maintain multicultural competencies to better understand the needs of the people with whom they work and to be able to modify interventions to be more effective in non-Western cultures. This paper discusses the impact of culture on the diagnosis and treatment of ASD, barriers to accessing ASD treatment services in non-Western cultures, the existing research gap regarding the cross-cultural implementation of ABA, current ABA efforts to address diversity issues in the field, and recommendations for future research.

 
Diversity submission 

Free and Appropriate Education for All: LGBTQ Youth and Inclusive Schools

(Service Delivery)
SEAN MICHAEL WILL (PEER International; Denton ISD)
Abstract:

Inclusive practices for students, teachers, and families help create an inviting school culture. All families need to experience a safe and welcoming environment. Stereotypes of gender may limit life experiences, limit access to meaningful consequences, and limit available alternatives. In 2016, the first-ever national survey was administered to parse high school students by sexuality. The two new questions added to the U.S. Centers for Disease Control survey asked students about (1) their sexual orientation and (2) the gender of their partners. These data show that 1.3 million teens, about 8% of all high school students in America, report being lesbian, gay, or bisexual. This presentation will present a behavior analytic approach to define bullying and other social interactions that lead to exclusion. We will share resources that promote inclusion and teach students to create allies, and to recognize the undesirable role of the bystander. Behavior analysis provides us with the framework to design and arrange these complex social contingencies.

 
Diversity submission 

Diversity and Representation Within the Field of Behavior Analysis

(Theory)
ALFRED TUMINELLO (Touchstone), Dominique Michellee Rougeau (Mental Health Connections of SWLA/Crossing Roads ABA)
Abstract:

As a field, Applied Behavior Analysis is expected to be able to produce socially significant changes in the lives of individuals from diverse social, cultural, and economic backgrounds. While behavior analysts strive to provide the best care to their clients, only minimal support may be available to help behavior analysts develop the skills needed for effectively bridging gaps that exist when providers and clients share little in terms of cultural understanding. This challenge is particularly well illustrated when reviewing the sociocultural backgrounds of those comprising major leadership groups, such as the Behavior Analysis Certification Board and Association for Professional Behavior Analysts, as well as when accounting for the frequency of related presentations at major conferences. Without a concentrated effort to both develop field-wide leaders from diverse communities and promote appropriate diversity and sensitivity training for practitioners, consumers of ABA services may find it difficult to find behavior analysts with whom they can effectively communicate. As our field naturally results in contact with people from all walks of life, it is important for practitioners at every level to have a solid understanding of the issues surrounding diversity within the Association for Behavior Analysis International.

 
Diversity submission Contingencies of Inclusion and Exclusion: A Constructional Approach to Cultural Diversity
(Theory)
JOANNE K. ROBBINS (Morningside Academy; PEER International)
Abstract: Concepts of freedom and equality have been at the core of the debate on how we should live and treat one another since the inception of this country. Skinner (1971) thought the concepts important enough to devote an entire book to the subject. In that book he argued that radical behaviorism could make a contribution to understanding the key issues framing debates concerning freedom, and could offer ways to help achieve the often elusive goals of equality and the "good" life. The purpose of this paper is to consider an analysis of an issue currently described as cultural diversity; an analysis derived from the principles of contingency analysis. Presented here is the constructional approach as formulated by Goldiamond in an attempt to treat these problems such as bias, prejudice, and discrimination as disturbing patterns that are maintained by their consequences, and viewed as patterns of social or societal behavior that can be rationalized given the available alternatives.
 
 
Symposium #107
CE Offered: BACB
Behavior Analytic Applications With Preschool Children With and Without Developmental Disabilities
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Berglind Sveinbjornsdottir (Reykjavik University)
Discussant: Nicole Heal (Margaret Murphy Center for Children)
CE Instructor: Nicole Heal, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Although the majority of behavior analytic applications have been carried out with clinical and special needs populations, behavior analytic procedures are also highly applicable with populations without disabilities or diagnoses. In the current symposium, four authors will present research on applications of behavior analysis with preschool children with and without disabilities. First, Kovar will present a study on teaching self-control to typically developing preschool children who demonstrated impulsivity. Second, Halfdanardottir will present a study on the translation and implementation of the preschool life skills (PLS) program with typically developing preschool children in Reykjavik, Iceland. In the third presentation, Glaze will describe a study on the potential aversive properties of a vicarious reinforcement arrangement with preschool children. Finally, Bernstein will describe a study on the assessment and treatment of age-inappropriate self-feeding (finger feeding) with seven young children with intellectual and developmental disabilities. After the presentations, Nicole Heal will provide discussant’s comments.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Feeding, Preschool life-skills, Self-Control, Vicarious reinforcement
Target Audience:

Practitioners and graduate students

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe different mediating responses that improve self-control ; (2) Describe the necessary components in a behavior skills training when teaching new skills to preschool children ; (3) Identify under what conditions vicarious reinforcement conditions could be aversive; (4) Recognize the difference between self-feeding as a motivational problem or as a skill deficit problem
 

A Procedure to Teach Self-Control to Preschoolers of Typical Development

Nicole Kovar (Caldwell University), Tina Sidener (Caldwell University), April N. Kisamore (Hunter College), Ruth DeBar (Caldwell University), NICOLE PANTANO (Caldwell University)
Abstract:

Demonstration of self-control in children has been correlated with attentiveness, academic achievement, and reduced drug use and body mass index later in life. Although some previous studies have demonstrated the effectiveness of teaching mediating responses to increase self-control, normative assessment has not been used to inform the selection of those responses. The purpose of the present study was evaluate the effects of mediating-response training on choices of four typically-developing 3- to 5-year-olds who demonstrated impulsivity. Responses trained were based on a descriptive assessment conducted with preschoolers who demonstrated self-control and included activity engagement, verbal behavior, and pushing the snack out of view. Stimulus preference assessments were conducted to demonstrate that toys used for activity engagement were moderately preferred. Following training and during maintenance and generalization probes with the classroom teacher, all participants selected larger delayed snacks over smaller immediate snacks and waited 5 min to consume them. Social validity assessments showed high ratings of goals, procedures, and outcomes.

 

Important Skills for Elementary School: Implementing Preschool Life Skills Program in a Preschool in Iceland

BARA FANNEY HALFDANARDOTTIR (Reykjavik University), Berglind Sveinbjornsdottir (Reykjavik University), Einar T. Ingvarsson (Virginia Institute of Autism)
Abstract:

Transition from preschool to elementary school can be difficult, especially for children that have not acquired school readiness skills. The preschool life skills (PLS) program was first developed as a class-wide teaching program, teaching typically developing preschool children important social and communication skills (Hanley, Heal, Tiger, & Ingvarsson, 2007). The aim of this study was to examine the impact of systematic teaching of school readiness skills in a preschool in Iceland. First, we compared the view of preschool and elementary school teachers in Iceland on important school readiness skills. Next, we translated the PLS program into Icelandic and adapted it to those skills that Icelandic teachers thought to be important. Finally, we implemented PLS in a preschool in Iceland for children who were starting first grade in elementary school in the fall of 2018. Results from the survey showed that both preschool and elementary school teachers in Iceland viewed instruction following and functional communication as the most important skills for children to acquire before first grade. The implementation of PLS increased the likelihood of the occurrence of instruction following and functional communication and decreased problem behavior for most children.

 
Evaluating the Potential Aversiveness of Vicarious Reinforcement Arrangements for Preschool Children
STEPHANIE M. GLAZE (The University of Kansas), Danielle L. Gureghian (Garden Academy), Pamela L. Neidert (The University of Kansas)
Abstract: Vicarious reinforcement (VSR) refers to a change in behavior as a result of observing the delivery of reinforcement to another person. As such, VSR procedures would appear to be a viable teaching strategy for use in group settings (e.g., preschool classrooms). However, some researchers have reported the emergence of problem behavior under conditions in which only the model’s behavior is reinforced and reinforcement is withheld from observers’ behavior. The purpose of this study was to experimentally examine the extent to which a VSR arrangement may be aversive for young children by arranging conditions under which the observer can terminate (i.e., escape) the delivery of reinforcement to the model. To date, six typically developing preschool children have participated. Although results were mixed, the majority of observers displayed behavior suggesting that the VSR arrangement was aversive. Results are discussed in terms of implications and applied issues related to the use of VSR in for classroom and other applied settings.
 

Response Blocking to Assess Self-Feeding Deficits in Young Children With Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities

ALEC BERNSTEIN (UNIVERSITY OF KANSAS), Pamela L. Neidert (The University of Kansas), Jessica Foster Juanico (Trumpet Behavioral Health)
Abstract:

Children typically gain skills to appropriately self-feed by the age of two years (Carruth et al., 2004). Those with delayed skills are at risk for insufficient nutrition (Carruth et al., 2004) and developmental and growth delays (Manikam & Perman, 2000; O’Brien et al., 1991). Although the behavior analytic literature has addressed a multitude of treatments for pediatric feeding delays and disorders, relatively few studies have evaluated whether delays are maintained by motivational or skill deficits. The current study describes the assessment and treatment of age-inappropriate self-feeding (finger feeding) for seven young children with intellectual and developmental disabilities. Response blocking was used to assess whether the absence of appropriate self-feeding was a motivational or a skill deficit. Results suggested motivational deficits for three children and skill deficits for four children. Treatments informed by assessment results (i.e., backward chaining and differential reinforcement) were effective at increasing age-appropriate self-feeding for all children. Results are discussed in terms of the importance of pre-treatment assessment for both treatment efficacy and efficiency when working with young children in early childhood education and intervention environments.

 
 
Symposium #109
CE Offered: BACB
University-School Partnerships in Behavior Analysis: Supporting Economically Disadvantaged Public Schools
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: EDC/CSS; Domain: Translational
Chair: Katherine Mahaffy (Western Michigan University)
Discussant: Denise Ross (Western Michigan University )
CE Instructor: Denise Ross, Ph.D.
Abstract: Public schools may serve a diverse group of students including students with differing ethnic and racial backgrounds, disability statuses, locales, and socioeconomic classes. As such, behavior analysts who work in public schools may need a variety of tools to support teachers, parents, school administrators, and communities. The current symposium addresses the application of behavior analysis to public schools serving large numbers of students with low socioeconomic status (SES). Specifically, this symposium will present four papers that describe the needs of economically disadvantaged PK-12 students, review the representation of economically disadvantaged students in behavior analysis research, describe interventions to support teachers and improve student academic performance, and discuss the utility of university-school partnerships in economically disadvantaged schools. Implications and recommendations for practitioners and researchers will be discussed.
Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience: Teachers, school administrators, practitioners, university personnel
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of this symposium, learners will be able to: 1) Describe the academic status and needs of economically disadvantaged learners in public schools 2) Discuss the inclusion of economically disadvantaged learners in behavior analysis research 3) Describe two academic and social interventions that can be used for economically disadvantaged schools
 

The Status and Needs of Economically Disadvantaged Schools and Learners

(Theory)
MYA HERNANDEZ (Western Michigan University), Katherine Mahaffy (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

According to the National Center for Children in Poverty (NCCP, 2018), 44% percent of children under age 18 in the United States are considered economically disadvantaged. Research suggests that these children are more likely to experience academic challenges than children who are not economically disadvantaged. This presentation will describe the academic needs of economically disadvantaged learners, historical contributions of behavior analysis to improving educational outcomes, and the current needs that behavior analysis can address. Implications and recommendations for practitioners and researchers will be discussed.

 

The Effects of Peer Observation on Teacher Intervention Integrity

(Applied Research)
Garrett Warrilow (Pfizer Pharmaceuticals), Sarah Ann Pichler (Western Michigan University), MYA HERNANDEZ (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

This study used the observer effect as part of a teacher training package by evaluating the effects of peer observations on an observing teacher's implementation integrity of components of a Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports (PBIS) system for four middle school teachers. The primary dependent variables were the number of praise and corrective statements made by the teachers to their students, and how closely the teacher approximated a ratio of three praise statements to every one corrective statement. Secondary dependent variables included the number of behavioral expectations set by the teacher for the students, and the number of office referrals written by the teacher. Results suggest that peer observations increased intervention integrity of target classroom management behaviors for three of four participants and that participants were highly satisfied with the procedure. Implications for teacher training in schools, and how the findings relate to the observer effect, are discussed.

 

The Effects of Decoding Instruction on Oral Reading Fluency for Older Students With Reading Delays

(Applied Research)
GAIGE JOHNSON (May Institute)
Abstract:

Struggling older readers often have difficulty with early decoding skills (Tolman, 2005; Toste, Williams, & Capin, 2017). If they are unable to master decoding, they may have difficulty with more complex skills, such as passage reading fluency. The current study extends research on reading fluency for older students by evaluating the combined effects of a phonics procedure and a fluency-building strategy on their reading fluency. Participants were older students with below grade level reading performance who had deficits in oral reading fluency and decoding. Dependent variables were the number of correctly sorted word patterns and the number of correct words per minute read in a passage and on a word list. During the intervention, a modified word sort procedure was used to train students to sort and read words containing the target word patterns. Following the initial word sort procedure, fluency building was employed by training word reading to a fluency criterion. Connected text passages were used to assess participants’ fluency when reading passages that contained the word pattern. A multiple-probe design across responses was utilized to evaluate the effectiveness of the intervention on the decoding skills and oral reading fluency of participants. Results showed that participants’ decoding and oral reading fluency increased following the intervention.

 
Representation of Economically Disadvantaged Learners in Applied Behavior Analysis Research: A Review of the Literature
(Theory)
BRANDI FONTENOT (Western Michigan University), Margaret Uwayo (Western Michigan University), Sarah Byrne (Michigan State University)
Abstract: In the United States, 24% of school-age children attend high-poverty schools. Research suggests that these children are at a greater risk for academic underperformance and dropping out of school than their peers who are not from economically disadvantaged backgrounds. As such, some economically disadvantaged children may need educational interventions to improve their academic outcomes. This presentation reviews the representation of children from economically disadvantaged backgrounds as research participants in behavioral journals. Ninety-one articles from behavioral journals were reviewed to determine the publication trends between 1968 and 2017. Results suggested that economically disadvantaged children are increasingly included in behavior analytic research. However, there are opportunities to conduct research with economically disadvantaged children who have disabilities or who are English Language Learners.
 
 
Symposium #111
CE Offered: BACB
An Evaluation of Training Procedures and Generalization of Mands for Information
Saturday, May 25, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD South
Area: VBC/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Mary Halbur (Marquette University)
Discussant: M. Alice Shillingsburg (May Institute)
CE Instructor: Mary Halbur, M.S.
Abstract: Mands for information allow a learner to obtain information that may help them access additional reinforcers. There is a need for research on identifying the most efficient and efficacious way to teach mands for information to children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) because direct teaching of these skills is often necessary. The purpose of this symposium is to provide resources on current research and clinical applications when teaching learners to engage in mands for information. In the first study, Halbur and colleagues taught individuals to mand to obtain information about the location of preferred items under EO and AO conditions. They also evaluated generalization of these mands across stimuli and locations. In the second study, Ingvarsson and Jessel investigated teaching mands for missing items using an interrupted chains procedure and assessed generalization of autoclitic frames. In the third study, Patil and colleagues taught children to engage in “why” mands across distinct scenarios (i.e., unusual events, emotional responses) and assessed generalization. In the fourth study, Pyles et al. established causal information as a reinforcer and investigated teaching “why” to children with ASD across EO and AO conditions. Following these presentations, our discussant will provide clinical recommendations and avenues for future research.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): abolishing operations, establishing operations, generalization, mands
Target Audience: graduate students, researchers, and behavior analytic clinicians
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation the participants will be able to (1) discuss potential methods for teaching learners to engage in various mands for information, (2) describe the possible benefits of including EO and AO learning trials when training mands, and (3) evaluate how to program for generalization of mands for information
 

Teaching Mands for Information With Where Under Establishing and Abolishing Operation Conditions

MARY HALBUR (Marquette University), Dayna Costello (Trumpet Behavioral Health), Tiffany Kodak (Marquette University), Mike Harman (Briar Cliff University), Jessi Reidy (Marquette University), Marisa E. McKee (Marquette University), Alyssa P. Scott (Marquette University)
Abstract:

Many children with autism spectrum disorder have deficits in appropriately manding for information using Wh-questions, although this question-asking repertoire is a valuable skill within social interactions and academic programs. Furthermore, mands for information provide the learner with necessary information in order to obtain access to preferred items and leisure activities (e.g., the location of a missing toy or where a snack might be stored). To ensure that mands are under correct antecedent control, previous behavior analytic studies have included conditions with both establishing (EO) and abolishing operations (AO); however, research on the mand ‘where’ is limited in this format. Thus, the present investigation utilized a prompt delay to teach two children with autism to mand for information (i.e., the location of a preferred edible) under a relevant EO but not when an AO was in place for such information. Prior to and following training, generalization probes were conducted in new locations as well as with novel therapists and materials. Clinical suggestions and future research considerations will be reviewed.

 

Teaching Children With Autism to Mand for Known and Unknown Items Using Contrived Establishing Operations

EINAR T. INGVARSSON (Virginia Institute of Autism), Joshua Jessel (Queens College)
Abstract:

The interrupted chains procedure has been used to teach children with limited verbal repertoires to independently mand for missing items required to complete a task. Previous research has included interrupted chains to teach children with autism autoclitic mand frames for information about the location of missing items and persons in possession of the missing items (e.g., Lechago, Carr, Grow, Love, & Almason, 2010). We extended previous research by (a) measuring generalization of autoclitic frames both within and between tasks with multiple missing items that the participants could tact, (b) assessing whether or not the autoclitic frames would emerge following tact training of previously unknown items, and (c) evaluating if the participants could be taught to mand for the appropriate information to evoke the autoclitic frame for unknown items (i.e., “What am I missing?”). Following training, the two boys with autism who participated in this study were able to independently mand for known missing items without direct teaching and mand for information about unknown missing items.

 

Teaching Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder to Mand “Why?”

PRIYA PATIL (Caldwell University), Tina Sidener (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), Anjalee Nirgudkar (Behavior Analysts of New Jersey)
Abstract:

For most children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD), manding for information is an important skill that must be systematically taught. Although previous studies have evaluated interventions for teaching the mands Where?, What?, When?, Who?, and How?, to date no studies have demonstrated effective procedures for teaching the mand, “why?” The purpose of this study was to teach three children with ASD to mand, “why?” under relevant establishing operation (EO) conditions in three distinct scenarios: restricted access to preferred items, unusual events, and observation of emotional responses. A trial-unique procedure (Williams, Johnston & Saunders, 2006) was used for all scenarios to increase the value of information provided during all trials. A preference assessment was conducted for all three participants for one scenario in the study. The intervention was evaluated in the context of a multiple probe design across scenarios. Generalization was programmed for by interspersing generalization probe trials during each session. Generalization was assessed using novel preferred items, novel scenarios, and novel people. All three participants acquired the mand “why?” for all three scenarios. Generalization and maintenance were demonstrated for all three scenarios. Social validity measures were conducted to assess the goals, procedures, and outcome of the study.

 

Teaching Children With Autism to Mand for Information Using “Why?” as a Function if Denied Access

MEGAN PYLES (California State University, Sacramento), Amanda Chastain (California State University, Sacramento), Caio F. Miguel (California State University, Sacramento)
Abstract:

Children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) often have difficulty developing complex verbal behavior, including question-asking. The purpose of this study was to evaluate a procedure to teach two children with ASD to ask “Why?” Typically, Why-questions are followed by causal information that describes the reason an event occurs. For this reason, we established causal information as a reinforcer by denying access to items without providing a reason. Participants were prompted to ask “Why?” and were provided information that led to access of preferred items. To ensure that “Why?” only occurred when information was valuable, we included a condition where access to items was restricted, but a reason for denied access was provided. Both participants learned to ask “Why?” when information was needed and refrained from asking “Why?” when information was not needed. Results from this study suggest that this procedure was successful in teaching children with ASD to ask “Why?”

 
 
Invited Paper Session #112
CE Offered: BACB/NASP — 
Supervision

Providing Effective Supervision to Clinical Practitioners Pre- and Post-Certification

Saturday, May 25, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom EF
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Tyra Sellers, Ph.D.
Chair: Tiffany Kodak (Marquette University)
TYRA SELLERS (Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
Dr. Tyra Sellers received her Ph.D. in Disabilities Discipline –Applied Behavior Analysis from Utah State University in 2011 and is a Board Certified Behavior Analyst. She earned a B.A. in Philosophy and M.A. in Special Education from San Francisco State University, and J.D. from the University of San Francisco. Dr. Sellers has over 20 years of clinical experience working with individuals with disabilities, spanning from EIBI through adult services in a wide variety of settings (public and non-public schools, vocational settings, in-home, clinics). Her research interests include behavior variability, choice, functional analyses, and behavioral interventions.
Abstract:

By the end of 1999, the first year in which the Board Certified Behavior Analyst® certification was available, there were 4,707 Board Certified Behavior Analysts® (BCBA®), and by the 10th year, in 2009 there were 5, 731 BCBAs. Fast forward to August of 2018, and there were 29,104 BCBAs; a 400% increase in the past nine years. This means that not only are there increasing numbers of individuals actively pursuing certification, but a flood of novice certificants in the workforce. Whereas our field places a particular emphasis on providing high quality supervision during an individual’s accrual of practical experience hours, it is equally critical to ensure that individuals, post-certification, continue to provide excellent clinical services. It is especially true when one considers that 76% of individuals who responded to a 2016 job task survey from the Behavior Analyst Certification Board® reported their primary-practice areas were providing clinical services to individuals with Autism and Developmental Disorders. Merriam-Webster defines supervision as: “the action, process, or occupation of supervising; especially: a critical watching and directing (as of activities or a course of action).” This is a functional definition, not topographical. In other words, supervision is not defined by the level or title of the parties involved (e.g., pre or post-certification), but by the purposeful activities that take place. This talk focuses on a tiered conceptualization of, and approach to, providing effective supervision that ensures the initial and continued development of robust clinical repertoires.

Target Audience:

This talk is targeted to individuals who are responsible for providing supervision of fieldwork experience, on-going supervision of clinical services, and designing or managing supervision practices, as well as for individual who will become supervisors in the near future.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) discuss strategies for providing effective supervision to individuals accruing their practical experience hours; (2) discuss strategies for providing effective supervision to individual post-certification; (3) be familiar with available resources related to effective supervisory practices.
 
 
Symposium #113
CE Offered: BACB
Behavioral and Pharmacological Determinants of Impulsive Behavior and Attending: A Search for Mechanism
Saturday, May 25, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Alpine 1/2
Area: BPN/EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Christine E. Hughes (University of North Carolina Wilmington)
CE Instructor: Christine E. Hughes, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Impulsive behavior has been termed a “transdisease” process because it is a key component in numerous clinical disorders. Deficits in attending certainly qualify as well. Experimental measures of both are grounded in choice, one of the two conference themes in 2019. These processes will be examined from multiple perspectives but all with the goal of understanding their behavioral and pharmacological mechanisms and correlates. The first paper will examine correlates among attending, impulsive behavior, and short-term remembering in a mouse model of Alzheimer’s disease. The second will examine how reinforcement magnitude and probability influence methylphenidate’s effects on risky decision making. The third will examine the role of baseline levels of impulsivity in determining the effect of d-amphetamine. Together, these papers will present, in a single setting, these multifaceted concepts using different experimental models. They will also summarize how impulsive behavior and attending relate to other important phenomena such as short-term remembering dementia, and the broader context in which the choices are made.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Alzheimer's Disease, Attention, Delay Discounting, Psychomotor Stimulants
Target Audience:

Scientists and practitioners interested in current thinking about the determinants of impulsive behavior and attending. While the studies are basic they have very clear transnational and applied implications.

Learning Objectives: Learn how the baseline rate of discounting influences the effects of drugs used to manage impulsive behavior. Learn how attending and remembering are related in an experimental model of Alzheimer's disease Learn how delay discounting interacts with
 

Longitudinal Assessment of Short-Term Remembering and Attending in a Mouse Model of Alzheimer’s Related Amyloidosis

PAUL SOTO (Louisiana State University), Breanna Harris (Texas Tech University)
Abstract:

In 2017, an estimated five million Americans were living with Alzheimer’s disease (AD), a progressive neurological disease that interferes with cognitive function, reduces quality of life, and is a significant economic burden to society. There is a need for pharmacotherapeutics for AD-associated cognitive impairment, the development of which requires preclinical models of AD-associated cognitive impairment. The aim of this study was to evaluate cognitive impairment in a mouse model of AD-associated amyloidosis. APPswe/PS1dE9 double transgenic (Tg) male and female mice and non-transgenic (non-Tg) littermates were trained on a delayed-matching-to-position (DMTP) or 3-choice serial reaction time (3CSRT) task. Mice were tested either continuously or intermittently from approximately 2 to 18 months of age. In the DMTP task, accuracy declined with the delay between sample lever presentation and choice opportunity although there was little evidence of between-genotype differences in performance. In the 3CSRT task, accuracy declined with duration of the signal stimulus and impulsive responses decreased as the time before the signal stimulus increased, but there were no between-genotype differences in accuracy, impulsive responses, or omissions. Potential factors contributing to lack of impairment in DMTP/3CSRT performance in the APPswe/PS1dE9 double mouse model of AD-associated amyloidosis will be discussed.

 
Methylphenidate Alters Sensitivity to Reinforcement Amount, Delay, and Probability: Implications for Impulsive/Risky Choice
Jeremy Langford (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Christine E. Hughes (University of North Carolina Wilmington), RAYMOND C. PITTS (University of North Carolina Wilmington)
Abstract: There has been growing interest in studying effects of drugs on impulsive and risky decision making. Identifying the relevant dimensions of reinforcement involved in these choices and quantifying the impact of drugs on control of choice by those dimensions might prove useful. The purpose of this study was to investigate drug-induced changes in control by reinforcement amount and delay in combination (Experiment 1) and reinforcement amount and probability in combination (Experiment 2) in a laboratory model of choice. In both experiments, pigeons responded on a rapid-acquisition, concurrent-chains procedure in which both terminal-link parameters of reinforcement alternated independently and pseudo-randomly across sessions; in some sessions both parameters favored one response key (dominated sessions); in other sessions each parameter favored a different key (tradeoff sessions). In both experiments, Initial-link response allocation tracked the four different terminal-link arrangements in a manner indicating independent and additive contributions by both reinforcement parameters (as assumed by the Generalized Matching Law). Methylphenidate reliably attenuated sensitivity to all dimensions of reinforcement at doses that did not substantially alter bias or initial-link response rates. Implications for theories of choice and for identifying behavioral mechanisms of drug action on impulsive and risky choice are discussed.
 

Baseline Dependency and Delay Discounting

M. CHRISTOPHER NEWLAND (Auburn University), Blake A. Hutsell (Eastern Carolina University), Derek Pope (Virginia Tech Carilion Research Institute)
Abstract:

Psychomotor stimulants can increase activity and impulsivity under non-clinical conditions but have the opposite effects in individuals with ADHD. This suggests a baseline-dependency in which a drug stabilizes an aspect of behavior by decreasing high-probability events while increasing low-probability events. Baseline-dependent effects on delay-discounting can be examined experimentally using inbred mouse strains that have different behavioral profiles and also by arranging conditions that yield different levels of discounting. BALB/c mice show greater sensitivity to reinforcer magnitude and delay than C57Bl/6 mice, making these two strains ideal subjects for examining baseline dependency on both measures. The presence of delay-specific stimuli can also influence the degree of magnitude- and delay sensitivity. These gene X environment interactions can be exploited to identify a common basis for the effects of a psychomotor stimulant. Across strains and stimulus conditions, d-amphetamine decreases both magnitude and delay sensitivity when they are high and increases it when it is low. The effects of this drug, both in an experimental model and in clinical settings, depends critically upon the baseline conditions under which behavior is maintained.

 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #114
CE Offered: BACB

Fighting Fake News and Post-Truth Politics With Behavioral Science: The Pro-Truth Pledge

Saturday, May 25, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: CSS; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Basic
CE Instructor: Todd A. Ward, Ph.D.
Chair: Todd A. Ward (bSci21 Media, LLC)
GLEB TSIPURSKY (Pro-Truth Pledge)

Dr. Gleb Tsipursky is passionate about promoting truth-oriented behavior, rational thinking, and wise decision-making. He currently serves as the President of Intentional Insights, a nonprofit devoted to popularizing these topics. Its main current focus is the Pro-Truth Pledge, a project that aims to reverse the tide of lies and promote truth in public discourse through combining behavioral science and crowd-sourcing. He is also the CEO of Disaster Avoidance Experts, Inc, a boutique consulting firm that uses behavioral analysis to improve organizational performance. He has a strong research background with over 15 years in academia, including 7 years as a professor at Ohio State University and the University of North Carolina-Chapel Hill. He published dozens of peer-reviewed publications in academic publications such as Journal of Political and Social Psychology and Behavior and Social Issues, and currently serves on the Editorial Board of the ABAI journal Behavior and Social Issues. He writes frequently for a broad audience, most notably his national bestseller on truth-seeking The Truth Seeker’s Handbook: A Science-Based Guide, and is currently writing From Post-Truth to Pro-Truth: Fighting Misinformation with Behavioral Science. Pieces by or about him regularly come out in prominent venues such as Time, Scientific American, Psychology Today, Newsweek, The Conversation, Inc. Magazine, CNBC, and elsewhere. He has appeared as a guest on network TV in the US, including CBS News and affiliates of Fox and ABC, and internationally, such as the Australian Broadcasting Corporation, and on US and international radio stations such as NPR, WBAI (New York City), KGO (San Francisco), 700WLW (Cincinnati), KRLD (Dallas), AM980 (Canada).

Abstract:

We have witnessed an alarming deterioration of truth in democracies around the globe, especially in the political arena. This presentation describes a behavioral analysis-based intervention, the Pro-Truth Pledge, which combines behavioral science research with crowd-sourcing to help address this problem. The pledge asks signers – private citizens and public figures – to commit to 12 behaviors that behavioral science has shown to be correlated with an orientation toward truthfulness. Pledge mechanisms have been shown in other contexts to lead private citizens to engage in more pro-social behavior. For public figures, the pledge offers specific incentives to behave in concordance with the pledge, with rewards in the form of positive reputation for honesty and truth-telling, and accountability through crowd-sourced evaluation and potential aversive consequences contingent upon deception. A study conducted on the pledge and published in the journal, Behavior and Social Issues, has demonstrated its effectiveness in reducing the sharing of misinformation on social media. These preliminary findings suggest that the pledge offers an important behavioral analysis-based intervention for addressing at least some of the problems caused by fake news and post-truth politics.

Target Audience:

Any attendees interested in how to use behavioral analysis to address the current global problem of misinformation in democracies

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) discuss what behavioral factors cause people to believe in and spread misinformation; (2) discuss why our current cultural, political, and technological environment facilitate post-truth politics and fake news; (3) review what behavioral analysis and other behavioral science fields have found about how to prevent people from spreading misinformation; (4) understand the research behind the effectiveness of the Pro-Truth Pledge as a behavioral analysis-based intervention against misinformation and post-truth politics; (5) discuss how behavioral analysts can take pragmatic steps to help turn back the tide of misinformation and post-truth politics in democracies around the globe.
 
 
Symposium #115
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
From Coursework to Practice: Emphasizing Ethics Along the Way
Saturday, May 25, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 1-3
Area: DEV; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Eliseo D. Jimenez (Georgia State University)
CE Instructor: Eliseo D. Jimenez, Ph.D.
Abstract: Behavior analysts work in various roles with diverse responsibilities, each posing unique ethical quandaries. This symposium combines three presentations emphasizing ethical issues that affect prospective and practicing behavior analysts during their schooling, training and supervision experience, and professional work. The first presentation will highlight challenges related to embedding ethics in a university special education/behavior analysis course sequence and present ways for promoting ethical situations/codes in the classroom that go beyond a single required ethics course. The second presentation will review common ethical issues Registered Behavior Technicians (RBTs) encounter during the credentialing process, as well as in the field, especially those resulting from inadequate supervision. Practical strategies for alleviating these issues and promoting the provision of adequate supervision will be shared. The last presentation will describe common ethical issues encountered by practicing school-based behavior analysts and pinpoint practical ways school-based behavior analysts can address these issues without compromising their ethical obligations. This symposium will provide ethical considerations for behavior analysts working in university settings, those supervising RBTs, and those working in school settings. Implications for practice will be discussed.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): coursework, education, ethics, supervision
Target Audience: Certified analysts and credentialed technicians
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) list ways to effectively embed ethical and conduct standards in their courses; (2) describe characteristics of proper RBT training and identify practical strategies to promote adequate supervision and practice; (3) describe ethical issues encountered by school-based behavior analysts and identify relevant ethical guidelines and strategies to address those issues.
 
Application of Ethical Codes Beyond Ethics Course
EDWARD JUSTIN PAGE (Duquesne University)
Abstract: The BACB requires 45 hours in a standalone course related to ethical principles and concepts in their verified course sequence. However, ethics and the application of these ethical principles should go beyond one course. Ethical principles can and should be embedded in classes where possible, and situations should be developed in the classroom that allows students to apply skills learned in their ethics course to another course’s content. One of the challenges that programs can face is applying the Ethical & Professional Compliance Codes in the classroom that students have previously learned. This presentation will highlight challenges related to embedding ethics in a special education/behavior analysis course sequence and present ways for promoting ethical situations/ codes in the classroom that goes beyond the required ethics course.
 

Registered Behavior Technician Credentialing Process: Issues and Strategies

ELISA M. CRUZ-TORRES (Florida Atlantic University)
Abstract:

According to the BACB, between 2016 and 2017, one of the most frequently violated categories is that of “improper or inadequate supervision or delegation.” Specifically, this category reflects ethical deviations to Compliance Codes 5.0 (Behavior Analysts as Supervisors) and 10.05 (Compliance with BACB Supervision and Coursework Standards). The RBT credentialing process includes the passing of a competency assessment, which is to be completed by a BACB certificant that has met supervision requirements. Additionally, once credentialed, the RBT must obtain ongoing supervision for a minimum of 5% of service hours delivered. This presentation will review common ethical issues RBTs encounter during the credentialing process, as well as in the field, especially those resulting from inadequate supervision. Practical strategies for alleviating these issues and promoting the provision of adequate supervision will be shared.

 
Ethical Considerations for School-Based Behavior Analysts
JESSICA NAOMI CADETTE DUNN (The Victory Center), Tara Olivia Loughrey (The Victory Center for Autism and Related Disabilities)
Abstract: Behavior analysts working in school settings face unique challenges related to balancing the needs of students, the wishes of parents, and requirements of the local education agency, while also adhering to the ethical guidelines put forth by the BACB. Ethical issues faced by behavior analysts in schools may relate to maintaining manageable caseloads, providing adequate supervision to teachers and support staff, making appropriate placement and referral decisions, and determining suitable interventions. This presentation will describe common ethical issues encountered by school-based behavior analysts at a small private school for students with autism and related disabilities, many of which can be generalized to those working in public and charter schools. This presentation will also pinpoint practical ways school-based behavior analysts can address these issues without compromising their ethical obligations.
 
 
Symposium #117
CE Offered: BACB
Teaching With Applied Behavior Analysis in Inclusive Settings: Application of Evidence-Based Practices
Saturday, May 25, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Fairmont, Third Level, Crystal
Area: EDC; Domain: Translational
Chair: Rose A. Mason (PUrdue University)
CE Instructor: Rose A. Mason, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The use of applied behavior analysis (ABA) in public schools has gained traction, primarily touted as a practice for supporting students with disabilities. However, the application of ABA principles is the foundation of high-quality instruction across skill levels. For example, positive behavior support methods applies a system-wide approach to support positive interactions and decrease challenging behaviors through the application of methods such as antecedent interventions and group-based contingencies. Likewise, academic instruction that incorporates systematic, direct instruction and personal systems of learning support acquisition across students with an array of skill levels, including those that have advanced skill levels and those that are behind grade-level. Further, the data-driven nature of the science facilitates ongoing progress monitoring at individual and group levels to guide educational decision-making. This symposium will explore the influence of ABA on teaching including comprehensive models, individualization of instruction, and inclusive practices for students with and without disabilities. The role of continuous measurement of student and teacher behavior to support acquisition of math and reading skills will be explored. In addition, application of component analysis procedures to identify the necessary features of an effective classroom will be discussed. Additionally, the role of research in identifying effective evidenced-based practices to support inclusion of individuals with autism will be examined, including gaps in our knowledge.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Autism, Comprehensive Models, inclusion, Instruction
Target Audience:

BCBAs Teachers

Learning Objectives: The learner will: 1.Learn how to collect data on the essential behaviors of teachers, students and supervisors in inclusive classrooms using a behavior analytic systems approach 2. Understand the evidence-base for interventions to support learners with autism in inclusive education environments 2. Be able to describe system-wide application of behavior analysis in schools including development and maintenance.
 
Using Science to Solve Educational Problems: How to Design Public School Classrooms Using the Principles and Tactics of Behavior Analysis
(Applied Research)
GRANT GAUTREAUX (Nicholls State University), Derek Jacob Shanman (Nicholls State University), Dolleen-Day Keohane (Nicholls State University), Laura Darcy (Nicholls State University), Mary A. Johnson (Touchstone), Danica Reaves Savoie (Touchstone Center)
Abstract: We describe the system for developing and maintaining quality practices in schools by providing a system-wide application of behavior analysis to all of the components of education for teaching all circular standard. Drawing from the CABAS and AIL models of instruction and other relevant published behavior analytic literature we implemented a system for implementing scientifically sound teaching applications for TABA classrooms in public schools. We outline some of those components including: classroom management, designing interventions, use of evidence based curricula, supervision, and research based tools to train and monitor professionals. The implementation of these procedures was done in successive phases to ensure the fidelity of the model was not compromised and also to inductively analyze which components were needed and when. Key components of the model include creating a positive classroom environment with several systems of reinforcement, training the classroom assistant to implement model components and to ensure that all instruction is individualized. The results are reported by the measurement of student progress vis-a-vis mastery of grade level expectations. The induction of verbal developmental capabilities for students including observational learning, naming and functional writing is also discussed. We also show data to display examples from one of our schools in a pilot full inclusion classroom and six special education public classrooms.
 

Inclusion of Students With Autism: A Systematic Review of the Evidence

(Applied Research)
Rose A. Mason (Purdue University), Catharine Lory (Purdue University), Mandy J. Rispoli (Purdue University), DANNI WANG (Purdue University), Emily Gregori (Purdue University), So Yeon Kim (Purdue University), Marie David (Purdue University), Stephanie Gerow (Baylor University)
Abstract:

Federal policy, including the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (IDEA), mandate students with disabilities be educated in the least restrictive environment. Additionally, policy and social justice advocates support inclusive models of education. In an effort to support skill acquisition and ameliorate challenging behaviors, a plethora of evidence-based interventions have been identified. However, little is known about which specific interventions are most effective in inclusive environments and for which target skills. The purpose of this study was to systematically review and synthesize high-quality single-case research evaluating the effectiveness of evidence-based practices implemented in inclusive environments. Additionally, meta-analytic methodology was employed to identify study and participant characteristics that differentially impact the effect of evidenced based practices. Findings indicate that a large portion of our evidence-base regarding effective interventions in inclusive setting targets social-communication skills and the evidence for academic interventions is scarce. Additionally, the majority of the evidence is conducted in elementary schools rather than secondary. Additional participant characteristics and intervention components were explored. Implications for practice and areas for future research will be discussed.

 
Beyond Evidence Based Practice: A Strategic Science of Teaching
(Applied Research)
R. DOUGLAS GREER (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School of Arts and Sciences), JoAnn Pereira Delgado (Teachers College, Columbia University), Jennifer Weber (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: A strategic science of teaching differs from evidence-based practices in that the strategic science of teaching requires usage of science at the level of application. Over the last 38 years, the CABAS® Accelerated Independent Learner (AIL) model of teaching, based on advanced application of Applied Behavior Analysis, has identified how to incorporate existing research-based tactics in ABA to teach reading, writing, math, and complex problem solving. This model includes continuous measurement of student, teacher, and supervisor behavior. In addition, it includes a research-based decision protocol model to connect teaching tactics with learning and verbal behavior cusps. This identifies different ways to teach children based on how they contact the instructional environment.
 
 
Invited Tutorial #120
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
SQAB Tutorial: Stimulus Equivalence 101
Saturday, May 25, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: SCI; Domain: Basic Research
PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP CE Offered. CE Instructor: Caio Miguel, Ph.D.
Chair: Anna I. Petursdottir (Texas Christian University)
Presenting Authors: : CAIO MIGUEL (California State University, Sacramento)
Abstract:

Researchers and clinicians rely heavily on the matching-to-sample procedure (MTS) to establish conditional discriminations. In an MTS trial, a visual or auditory sample is presented, followed by several comparisons (pictures or objects). The selection of the correct comparison leads to reinforcement while selection of the incorrect one leads to some form of correction. Clinically, MTS is used for teaching a variety of skills, including listener behavior, categorization, math, and reading. An important characteristic of MTS is that samples and comparisons become substitutable for each other (i.e., equivalent). Understanding the variables responsible for the development of equivalence classes has been the topic of investigation in the field of behavior analysis for almost 50 years, generating an enormous (and complicated) body of research. This research has led to the development of at least three theoretical accounts to explain meaning and symbolic behavior, as well as has informed clinicians on how to take advantage of the MTS procedure to produce a multitude of generative/novel performances. This talk will serve as a first introduction to the concept of stimulus equivalence and its ramifications for both research and practice.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Basic researchers, students, board certified behavior analysts, and licensed psychologists.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the different parameters that affect equivalence outcomes; (2) describe the three main theories explaining equivalence outcomes; (3) understand the theoretical and applied implications of equivalence research.
 
CAIO MIGUEL (California State University, Sacramento)
Dr. Caio Miguel is a Professor of Psychology and Director of the Verbal Behavior Research Laboratory at California State University, Sacramento. He holds adjunct appointments at Endicott College and at the University of Sa~o Paulo, Brazil. He is the past-editor of The Analysis of Verbal Behavior (TAVB) past Associate Editor for the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis (JABA), and current editorial board member of the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior. Dr. Miguel's research focuses on stimulus control, verbal behavior, and problem-solving strategies. He has given hundreds of professional presentations in North America, South America and Europe, and has had over 60 manuscripts published in English, Portuguese, and Spanish. He is the recipient of the 2013-2014 award for outstanding scholarly work by the College of Social Sciences and Interdisciplinary Studies at Sacramento State, and the 2014 Outstanding Mentor Award by the Student Committee of the Association for Behavior Analysis International.
 
 
Panel #121
CE Offered: BACB
Starting From Scratch: Training Behavior Analysts in Latin America and the Lessons Learned
Saturday, May 25, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, International Ballroom
Area: TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Estefania Carla Alarcon Moya, M.A.
Chair: Estefania Carla Alarcon Moya (ABA Technologies Inc.; Florida Institute of Technology)
CAROLA SCOLARI (Universidad Autónoma de Chile)
AMANDA BUENO DOS SANTOS (CEDIN)
PENELOPE JOHNSON (Johns Hopkins University)
Abstract:

Obstacles for training behavior analysts in Latin America, where educational resources are scarce, transcend the language barrier. While it seems reasonable to expect that an increase in behavior analytic programs to train qualified clinicians will increase the availability of higher-quality ABA services for citizens in need, other leading factors need to be considered and addressed simultaneously in order to promote the correct desired change that could benefit, and not impair, the current organization of the system. Some of these factors might include the promotion of continuing professional development, ethical practice and professional regulation of the field. Panel participants will discuss their experiences training behavior analysts with diverse backgrounds across Latin America. They will examine the current environmental contingencies disadvantaging the systematic and responsible growth of the profession and provision of high-quality services in these countries, and identify what behaviors from all stakeholders can have the greatest impact on these desired results. Most importantly, they will analyze the antecedent- and consequence-based solutions that could support and maintain these desired changes in the long-term.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Supervisors, faculties, practitioners interested in international dissemination

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, students will be able to: 1. State the rationale for increasing the number of well-trained certified behavior analysts in Latin America 2. Identify the desired behaviors from all parties involved in the training and certifying of behavior analysts in Latin America 3. List antecedent- and consequence-based solutions to increase the number of certified behavior analysts in Latin America
Keyword(s): Dissemination, International development, Latin America
 
 
Symposium #124
CE Offered: BACB
Advances in Toilet Training Research
Saturday, May 25, 2019
4:00 PM–5:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom A
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Sarah Slocum (Marcus Autism Center and Emory School of Medicine)
Discussant: Joanna Lomas Mevers (Marcus Autism Center)
CE Instructor: Joanna Lomas Mevers, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Azrin and Fox (1971), LeBlanc et al. (2005), and Lomas Mevers et al. (2018) empirically evaluated procedures for toilet training individuals with disabilities. More recently, Greer et al. (2016) demonstrated a treatment package for toilet training typically developing individuals. The current symposium will include four presentations on replications, component analyses, and extensions of common toilet training practices.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): enuresis, toilet training
Target Audience:

This presentation is for any behavior analysts who might be toilet training clients.

 

A Consecutive Case Series Analysis of a Toilet Training Program for Children With Autism Evaluating Gender Differences

ANDRESA DE SOUZA (University of Missouri St. Louis), Joanna Lomas Mevers (Marcus Autism Center), Colin S. Muething (Marcus Autism Center), Lawrence Scahill (Emory University), Scott Gillespie (Emory University)
Abstract:

To date, most of the research on autism spectrum disorder (ASD) has focused on males; therefore, little is known if there are differences in the manifestation of ASD between males and females. One example involves daytime enuresis, a behavioral issue commonly observed in children with ASD (Von Gontard, Pirrung, Niemczyk, & Equit, 2015). Intervention for daytime enuresis typically involves systematic fluid loading to increase opportunities for voiding, a progressive sit schedule with positive reinforcement for successful voids, and return to sitting upon episodes of incontinence (Lomas Mevers, Muething, Call, Scheithauer, & Hewett, 2018). The goal of this study was to conduct a consecutive case series analysis of outcomes of an intensive toileting program for treatment of daytime enuresis in children with ASD. We examined treatment outcome data from 2014 until 2018 and compared outcomes between males and females. Results demonstrated low significance between outcomes of males and females in terms of procedure modifications and final criteria met, and high significance in terms of performance during 6-month follow-up with males significantly more likely to have positive, long-term success. Results will be discussed in terms of the physiological and behavioral aspects that might affect females performance during intervention for day time enuresis.

 

Evaluation of an Abbreviated Toilet Training Procedure for Use With Young Children

Ansley Hodges (Florida Institute of Technology), Hallie Marie Ertel (Florida Institute of Technology), Lianne Hurtado (Nemours Children's Hospital), David A. Wilder (Florida Institute of Technology), DANIELA GALVEZ MORENO (Nemours Children's Hospital and Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract:

LeBlanc et al. (2005) described an effective, intensive outpatient procedure to decrease urinary incontinence among children with autism. This procedure included programmed consequences for appropriate urination and self-initiation, the provision of increased fluids, the use of a urine sensor to detect accidents, training a mand for elimination, and overcorrection contingent upon inappropriate urination. In the present study, we replicated and abbreviated LeBlanc et al.’s procedure by omitting the use of a urine sensor and overcorrection contingent upon accidents. We used a multiple baseline design across participants to evaluate the effects of the abbreviated procedure with three young children who were nonresponsive to non-intensive toilet training procedures. The results suggest that the procedure was effective to decrease urinary incontinence among all three children. Further, it took less time to implement than the procedure described by LeBlanc et al. Results are discussed in terms of the utility and efficiency of the procedure for a variety of populations and settings.

 

Efficiency of an Intensive Toilet Training Treatment for Young Children

ASHLEY ROMERO (University of Kansas), Pamela L. Neidert (The University of Kansas)
Abstract:

Young children between the ages of 13-30 months begin to have the skills necessary to begin the process of toilet training. However, delayed toilet training of typically developing children has become a trend (Simon & Thompson, 2006). Delayed training can have negative health, financial, and social implications. To date, we have systematically replicated the intensive toilet training procedure described by LeBlanc et. al (2005) with seven children (ages 22-58 mo) with and without intellectual and developmental disabilities for whom the treatment package described by Greer et al. (2016) was not immediately effective. A nonconcurrent multiple baseline was used to evaluate the training procedure, which consisted of a graduated sit schedule, reinforcement of successful urinations and self-initiations, increased fluids, communication training, a urine sensor and alarm, and positive practice for accidents. Results showed that the LeBlanc training procedure was effective for rapid performance acquisition that generalized and maintained in the preschool classroom for 5 of 7 subjects. Results are discussed in terms of treatment efficacy and efficiency, generality of procedures across populations (children with and without IDD), and social validity of treatment procedures in early childhood education and intervention environments.

 

An Analysis of Toilet-Training Procedures Recommended for Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

BRANDON C. PEREZ (University of Florida), Janelle Kirstie Bacotti (University of Florida), Kerri P. Peters (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
Abstract:

Behavior Analysts working with children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) and other intellectual and developmental disabilities, especially in early intervention type settings, are commonly asked for assistance in toilet training. Most of the current research in applied behavior analysis on toilet training interventions for children with ASD are replications and/or modifications of Azrin & Foxx (1971) or LeBlanc et al. (2005) procedures. These procedures differ from what is commonly used for typically developing children. For example, Greer et al. (2016) evaluated the effectiveness of three typical components presented within a toilet training package for typically developing children: a 30-min sit schedule, placing subjects in underwear, and differential reinforcement for remaining dry and eliminating in the toilet. These components were evaluated both in isolation and together in a treatment package with 19 typically developing and 1 child diagnosed with ASD. The primary purpose of the current study is to evaluate the effectiveness of the three aforementioned components, that are typically used in toilet training procedures for children, but in this case for children with ASD. If these procedures were ineffective, a secondary purpose was to evaluate elimination patterns to allow researchers to identify modifications necessary for individualized toilet training.

 
 
Symposium #126
CE Offered: BACB
Diversity submission Consideration of Demographic and Cultural Variables in Behavioral Research and Practice
Saturday, May 25, 2019
4:00 PM–5:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Tara A. Fahmie (California State University, Northridge)
Discussant: Elizabeth Hughes Fong (Saint Joseph's University)
CE Instructor: Tara A. Fahmie, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Demographic and cultural variables undoubtedly influence the global adoption and success of behavioral services, but limited research exists in this area. The authors of Study 1 identified reasons for the appointment cancellations of 43 children in an outpatient ABA program. Common barriers included those related to socio-economic status (e.g., work conflicts, instability in living situation), emphasizing the importance of considering stakeholder characteristics in service delivery. The authors of Study 2 conducted a review of articles recently published in the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis and found that demographic variables were generally underreported. The authors will describe obstacles to and rationale for fully reporting demographic variables in future publications. The authors of Study 3 analyzed the efficacy and social validity of a training program to teach function-based approaches to parents and practitioners in Chennai, India. The authors will discuss the cultural variables relevant to this region that were considered during the development phase of their study. The authors of Study 4 successfully extended tele-health services to families located in South America, Europe, Africa, Asia, and the Middle East. Both efficacy and social validity data will highlight the outcomes of the authors’ global outreach efforts. Finally, Elizabeth Fong will discuss these four studies in relation to our need for a more effective science of cultural and demographic influences.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): culture, demographics, telehealth, treatment acceptability
Target Audience:

Practicing behavior analysts

Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will identify a minimum of three demographic variables that may influence treatment adoption or adherence. 2. Participants will describe the manner in which training can be tailored to cultures outside of the US 3. Participants will acknowledge the importance of social validity measures in the dissemination of behavioral services to diverse populations.
 
Diversity submission 

Barriers to Appointment Attendance Among Families Receiving Applied Behavior Analysis Services for Problem Behavior

STEPHANIE LIOLLIO (Marcus Autism Center), Mindy Christine Scheithauer (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract:

Research has shown that children diagnosed with developmental disabilities exhibiting severe problem behavior benefit from Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) therapy. Because ABA therapy often places a heavy emphasis on caregiver involvement and consistency of treatment practice, the effectiveness of therapy may be compromised if excessive cancellations occur. The current study identified common reasons for appointment cancellations. This allowed us to examine potential barriers that may be intervened on to increase the likelihood of treatment success. Attendance records of 43 children being seen in a weekly outpatient ABA program that focused on parent training for problem behavior were reviewed. Frequency of cancellations were measured, grouped into categories, and ranked from highest to lowest. Preliminary data collected over twelve weeks indicated that scheduling conflicts, illness, and scheduling miscommunications were the most frequent reasons that cancellations occurred. These variables were discussed in terms of possible interventions that could be used to decrease cancellations and subsequently increase success of intervention for parents at high-risk of experiencing barriers to appointment attendance.

 
Diversity submission 

On the Reporting of Demographic Variables in the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis

STEPHANIE JONES (West Virginia University), Claire C. St. Peter (West Virginia University)
Abstract:

Describing participants’ demographic variables (ethnicity/race, socioeconomic status (SES), gender/sex, age, etc.) may be important for identifying how such variables may impact behavioral interventions and for identifying patterns across research articles. We evaluated the extent to which studies published in the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis for the last five years included demographic variables of participants. Any mention of information regarding age, gender or sex, ethnicity or race, SES, diagnosis, functioning level, scores on standardized tests or assessments, educational levels, and culture for any participant in the study was coded. The data were analyzed as the percentage of experiments mentioning a broad demographic variable (e.g., SES), and number of individuals mentioned in an experiment with a specific characteristic within the broader demographic category (e.g., low income). Generally, demographic variables were underreported, which may limit the broader impact of those publications. Obstacles to and rationale for fully reporting demographic variables are explored.

 
Diversity submission Investigation of a Training Manual for Teaching Behavioral Skills to Parents and Professionals in India
TARA A. FAHMIE (California State University, Northridge), Maithri Sivaraman (Tendrils Centre for Autism)
Abstract: In regions such as India, where one-to-one behavior analytic intervention is not easily accessible, parents and service providers may advocate for children with disabilities better if they have foundational training in the behavior analytic approach to problem behavior. The purpose of the present study was to develop and test the effectiveness of a manualized training in increasing behavior analytic perspectives and skills used to manage problem behavior. We noted several cultural adaptations used in both the manual and the training. Forty-six parents and service providers from Chennai, India participated in the study, and were assigned to either an immediate training (n=22) or a waitlist control (n=24) group. The training produced overall increases in participants’ knowledge and approach to the assessment and treatment of problem behavior. Moreover, all participants rated the acceptability of training highly in our measure of social validity. Guidelines for international dissemination are discussed.
 
Diversity submission Outcomes of a Global Telehealth Parent-Training Project
LOUKIA TSAMI (University of Houston, Clear Lake), Ozlem Toper Korkmaz (Uludağ Üniversitesi), Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
Abstract: Teaching parents to conduct functional analyses (FAs) and to implement functional communication training (FCT) is a highly effective approach for treating problem behavior maintained by social consequences (Derby et al., 1997). Studies have found that delivering this assessment and intervention package via telehealth technologies is effective and acceptable to parents in the United States (Wacker et al., 2013b). In the presentation, we will discuss the outcomes of families located in South America, Europe, Africa, Asia, and the Middle East who we coached via telehealth to implement FAs and FCT with their children with autism. Two behavior therapists located at a U.S. university conducted weekly 1-hour appointments with the use of interpreters for the non-English speaking families. The majority of the parents used smart phones to communicate with the clinicians. The parent-implemented FAs successfully identified the function(s) of problem behavior, and FCT reduced problem behavior and increased communication responses for all children. Moreover, the caregivers rated the procedures and use of telehealth as very acceptable. Overall, these results suggest that behavior analysts located in the United States can offer behavioral services via telehealth to individuals with autism around the world.
 
 
Symposium #128
CE Offered: BACB
Motor Planning: A Behavior Analytic Account and Evidence Base for Use
Saturday, May 25, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: AUT/VBC; Domain: Translational
Chair: Elizabeth R. Lorah (University of Arkansas)
Discussant: Elizabeth R. Lorah (University of Arkansas)
CE Instructor: Elizabeth R. Lorah, Ph.D.
Abstract: The use of Augmentative and Alternative Communication (AAC) is a practice that continues to evolve, as technology changes, becomes more economical, and readily available. The use of handheld technology (i.e., the iPad™) as a speech-generating device (SGD), is more common than ever, yet we continue to lack an evidence-based practice for its use. One method of instruction that has gained visibility outside of behavior analysis is motor planning; however, given the limited data to support its use, coupled with the use of internal processes as an explanation for behavior, most behavior analysts avoid a discussion of motor planning, including its potential benefit. This symposium will present a behavior analytic account for the use of motor planning as an instructional strategy for the acquisition of verbal behavior using the iPad as a speech-generating device, while providing a behavior analytic account for the processes that take place when developing a motor plan.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Autism, Mand, Motor Planning, Speech-Generating Device
Target Audience: Intermediate practitioners
Learning Objectives: 1. Review of verbal behavior and evidence base for mand training 2. Review of the literature for the use of handheld technology as a speech generating device 3. How to implement motor planning in terms of handheld technology as a speech generating device
 
A Behavior Analytic Account of Motor Planning
(Theory)
JESSICA MILLER (University of Arkansas), Elizabeth R. Lorah (University of Arkansas), Alison Karnes (University of Arkansas)
Abstract: Motor planning refers to the covert process by which an individual plans bodily movements. Some degree of motor planning is needed in order to effectively use a speech-generating device (SGD). Individuals with autism may have an increased incidence of motor development deficits. Where deficits exist, it is reasonable to teach communication in a way that minimizes the need for complex motor planning. One such method of teaching language with SGD to individuals with ASD is the Language Acquisition through Motor Planning (LAMPTM) approach (Halloran & Halloran, 2006). Despite the use of non-behavioral language in the description of LAMPTM protocols, a behavior analytic account of many of its methods is possible. This presentation will provide a behavior analytic account of motor planning as an instructional method for the use of handheld technology as a SGD.
 
An Evidence Base for the Use of Motor Planning
(Applied Research)
ALISON KARNES (University of Arkansas), Elizabeth R. Lorah (University of Arkansas), Jessica Miller (University of Arkansas)
Abstract: This presented will describe research that addresses the gaps in the motor planning literature by evaluating the effectiveness of motor planning with core vocabulary and a prompting package including within stimulus prompts, constant time delay prompts, and response prompts in the acquisition of manding in a play-based environment with three preschool aged children with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD). A changing criterion design within a multiple baseline design across participants was selected. The study includes an initial three phases specific to the within stimulus prompt included in the screen layout and a fourth phase that uses priming and the prompting package to expand the participants’ manding repertoire. The results of this study indicate that the procedures were effective at establishing a mand repertoire in participants. Implications of this study and future directions for similar research will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #129
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Training Care Staff in Applied Behavior Analysis, Part 2: Pyramidal Training Studies
Saturday, May 25, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom C
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Sarah Grace Hansen (Georgia State University)
CE Instructor: Wendy A. Machalicek, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Dissemination of evidence-based practices to individuals with autism and intellectual disabilities requires effective, acceptable and efficient training of many care givers. One solution to this problem is to develop and evaluate pyramidal caregiver training whereby one level I staff acquires staff training skills and then trains multiple level II staff thereby changing the behavior of students and clients with autism and intellectual disabilities. This symposium will present three empirical papers. In the first we will report the effects of training teachers to teach classroom assistants in multiple applied behavior analytic skills in a special school. In the second we will present the effects of pyramidal training on staff acquisition of five applied behavior analytic skills over a 10-month period. The third paper will report the results of a randomized controlled trial in which staff working with adults with autism and intellectual disabilities were trained in applied behavior analytic skills. This symposium will show that pyramidal training is an effective, efficient and acceptable form of disseminating applied behavior analytic skills in applied settings.

Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): feedback, modeling, pyramidal training, rehearsal
Target Audience: BCBAs; graduate students in applied behavior analysis; researchers in ABA
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1)describe the rationale for pyramidal training; (2) describe the effects of behavioral skill training on acquisition of pyramidal training skills; and (3) describe strategies to promote generalization of application of pyramidal training skills.
 
Designing Effective And Efficient Protocols To Train Caregivers to Implement Behavior Analytic Procedures
(Service Delivery)
PETER STURMEY (The Graduate Center and Queens College, City University of New York), Maya Madzharova (The Graduate Center and Queens College, CUNY)
Abstract: Applied behavior analysis (ABA) is a highly effective, evidence-based treatment for individuals with autism spectrum disorder. Designing efficient and effective protocols to train caregivers to implement ABA interventions is important because low treatment integrity compromises the effectiveness of ABA. Using a non-concurrent multiple baseline design across three novice classroom instructors we evaluated the effects of a training consisting of: (1) video and in-vivo modeling and feedback, (2) an algorithm, and (3) multiple exemplars on the acquisition of five ABA procedures (i.e., discrete trial teaching, multiple stimulus without replacement, echoic mand training, stimulus-stimulus pairing, and graphing percentage data). Upon mastery of these procedures we further evaluated the instructors’ generalized teaching skills on novel ABA procedures. All instructors mastered the directly taught skills and some generalized these skills to novel ABA procedures. We discuss the importance of these results in light of designing efficient training protocols for novice instructors in ABA settings.
 
The Effects of Pyramidal Training on Staff Acquisition of Five Behavior Analytic Procedures
(Service Delivery)
LINDSAY MAFFEI ALMODOVAR ALMODOVAR (CUNY Graduate Center at Queens College), Peter Sturmey (The Graduate Center and Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: Direct care staff members serving people with intellectual and developmental disabilities are often required to implement several behavior analytic procedures with only limited training soon after being hired. Pyramidal training is an effective model for disseminating applied behavior analytic skills to employees that treat individuals with developmental disabilities. This study used a multiple probes design across teachers and a delayed multiple baseline design across teaching assistants to evaluate the effects of video models, role play and feedback on teachers’ accuracy in implementing behavioral skills training and on teaching assistants’ accuracy in implementing five applied behavior analytic procedures (i.e. stimulus-stimulus pairing, multiple stimulus without replacement preference assessment, mand training, discrete trial teaching, and graphing discrete trial data). Pyramidal training was effective in increasing first tier participants’ procedural integrity of behavioral skills training steps and in increasing second tier participants’ procedural integrity of implementing the target procedures. First tier participants required feedback to maintain training skills over time, to train procedures other than the procedure implemented during their own training and to train novel staff members. Thus, pyramidal BST required ongoing supervision by a behavior analyst to effectively disseminate multiple ABA skills to a variety of staff members over time.
 
Dissemination of Evidence-Based Practice to Frontline Staff Working in the Field of Intellectual Disability
(Service Delivery)
LAURA GORMLEY (Trinity College Dublin), Olive Healy (Trinity College Dublin), Brona O'Sullivan (Rehab Care Dublin), Darragh O Regan (RehabCare, Ireland)
Abstract: Research has shown that staff with varying backgrounds and educational qualifications can be effectively trained to carry out procedures in line with evidence-based practice. Behavior Skills Training (BST) is a competency-based training model, used to effectively educate a broad selection of professionals, including frontline staff, in a diverse range of work-related skills. However, the BST intervention has yet to be evaluated in a large group-based experimental design. Therefore, 104 frontline staff were recruited from twelve service sites within one of the largest intellectual disability service providers in the Republic of Ireland. A total of 54 participants were assigned to the intervention condition, which used BST to coach participants in reinforcement, systematic prompting, functional communication training, and task analysis. Fifty participants were assigned to the wait list control condition. Results from the clustered randomised control trial showed that participants who received BST demonstrated statistically significant improvements across knowledge outcome measures. In contrast, participants in the wait list control condition showed either no change or a statistically significant decrease in knowledge scores over the study period. In addition, there was clear evidence of knowledge maintenance, target skill acquisition and subsequent generalization to the workplace environment, among participants in the intervention condition.
 
 
Invited Paper Session #132
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

Consequences of Violence and Neglect in Children: The Risks of Neurobiological and Psychological Impairments

Saturday, May 25, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 1-3
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Willy-Tore Morch, Ph.D.
Chair: Jeannie A. Golden (East Carolina University)
WILLY-TORE MORCH (The Arctic University of Norway, Tromsø)
Small children who live in long-lasting stress and anxiety, whether they be victims within their own homes or refugees suffering on a more global level, develop neurobiological impairments. The brain is plastic and “user dependent”. A child is born with 100 billion nerve cells, but only 15% are connected to other cells. During the first three years, 250.000 new connections are performed per hour in the child’s brain. The architects are the genes, but the constructors are the parents and the child’s social network. Positive experiences stimulate the myelination process in the cells axons and the myelin sheets increase the velocity of the nerve impulse. Long-lasting stress and anxiety reduces the myelination process and influences brain activity. Four brain structures are important for the brain’s reactions to stress and anxiety. The presenter will discuss the specific impacts that stress and anxiety have on each of these brain structures and the ensuing affect they have on the child’s development of crucial abilities necessary to successfully navigate the world. It is of great importance that sources of stress and anxiety, e.g. violence, abuse and neglect, but also war- and refugee experiences are quickly brought to an end. The role of child protection agencies, either by parent training interventions or by taking the child out of the family, is crucial. Likewise, the reception and caretaking of refugee children preventing neurobiological impairments will have life-long consequences for these children’s schooling, education, employment and mental health. The presenter will also briefly highlight parenting strategies and therapeutic interventions that can help to reduce the risk for these vulnerable children.
Abstract:

Small children who live in long-lasting stress and anxiety, whether they be victims within their own homes or refugees suffering on a more global level, develop neurobiological impairments. The brain is plastic and “user dependent”. A child is born with 100 billion nerve cells, but only 15% are connected to other cells. During the first three years, 250.000 new connections are performed per hour in the child’s brain. The architects are the genes, but the constructors are the parents and the child’s social network. Positive experiences stimulate the myelination process in the cells axons and the myelin sheets increase the velocity of the nerve impulse. Long-lasting stress and anxiety reduces the myelination process and influences brain activity. Four brain structures are important for the brain’s reactions to stress and anxiety. The presenter will discuss the specific impacts that stress and anxiety have on each of these brain structures and the ensuing affect they have on the child’s development of crucial abilities necessary to successfully navigate the world. It is of great importance that sources of stress and anxiety, e.g. violence, abuse and neglect, but also war- and refugee experiences are quickly brought to an end. The role of child protection agencies, either by parent training interventions or by taking the child out of the family, is crucial. Likewise, the reception and caretaking of refugee children preventing neurobiological impairments will have life-long consequences for these children’s schooling, education, employment and mental health. The presenter will also briefly highlight parenting strategies and therapeutic interventions that can help to reduce the risk for these vulnerable children.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; social workers; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) discuss the user dependent brain; (2) understand the effects of long-lasting stress and anxiety experiences in the brain; (3) discuss parent training.
 
 
Symposium #133
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Evaluating Strategies for Improving Early Infant Care
Saturday, May 25, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 3/4
Area: CBM/DEV; Domain: Translational
Chair: Rika Ortega (ABAI)
CE Instructor: Joshua Jessel, Ph.D.
Abstract: Infant care can often be stressful for parents of a newborn child. In addition, the early stages of development for the infant pose many unique risks (e.g., sudden infant death syndrome). Parents should be educated on those risks and trained to implement appropriate care to avoid possible harm and support normal growth. Study 1 evaluated infant moral judgement by presenting infants with options to choose from puppets that expressed interests in similar or opposite preferences with the participant. Contrary to previous work, the repeated opportunities to select the differing puppets in the concurrent arrangement did not support the notion that infants tend to prefer prosocial or similar companions. Strategies for reducing tantrums during tummy time were evaluated in Study 2. A preference assessment was developed using the percentage of eye contact with individually presented items to select preferred items to use during tummy time. Although there was marked improvement in head elevation and eliminations of tantrums regardless of the value of the item, social validity measures indicated that parents tended to favor using the more-preferred items during tummy time. Study 3 developed a video intended to disseminate knowledge on safe infant sleep practices and tummy time. A significant improvement in knowledge in the pretest/posttest arrangement was obtained with current and expectant parents who watched the video. All studies support the notion that behavior analytic technology can improve early infant care.
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Caregiver education, infant care, moral judgment, tummy time
Target Audience: BCBAs, BCBA-Ds, BCaBAs, licensed psychologists, and other behavior analytic providers who need to learn how to care for infants.
 

Do Infants Make Moral Judgments?: Investigating Other Probable Explanations

(Applied Research)
CAROLYNN S. KOHN (University of the Pacific), Amir Cruz-Khalili (University of the Pacific), Katrina Michele Ruiz Bettencourt (University of the Pacific), Tyler Nighbor (University of Vermont), Matthew P. Normand (University of the Pacific), Henry D. Schlinger (California State University, LA)
Abstract:

3. Research employing single choice paradigms suggest infants show a preference for prosocial others and those who are similar to themselves. This study (two experiments, N = 44 infants, aged 8 to 15 months) replicated and extended previous work by including (a) within-subject repeated measures and (b) an experimental manipulation of a plausible demand characteristic. In both experiments, (a) infants chose between two foods, (b) watched a puppet show in which one puppet expressed a liking for one of the foods and a disliking for the other food followed by a second puppet who expressed the opposite preferences, and (c) chose between the two puppets. Results for the first-choice trial indicated a majority of infants did not choose the puppet who liked the same food as the infant (i.e., the similar puppet). Within-subject repeated trials also indicated a majority of infants did not choose the similar puppet but a majority did choose a puppet presented on the same side. Findings suggest infants may not display very early preferences, for similar others and supports recommendations made by others, including publishing null findings, standardizing data collection and reporting methods, and examining individual differences by employing within-subject designs with repeated measures.

 

Improving Tummy Time for Infants and Caregivers: A Treatment Comparison With Social Validation

(Applied Research)
RIKA ORTEGA (Queens College), Daniel Mark Fienup (Columbia University), Joshua Jessel (Queens College), Antoinette Morea (Queens College)
Abstract:

Tummy time is an activity intended to strengthen infant motor development by placing them in a prone position. However, many infants may find this time aversive, often evoking noncompliant behavior and tantrums. Previous studies have used preferred tangible items during tummy time to reduce challenging behavior and improve head elevation. We extended this previous research by comparing the effects of a more-preferred stimulus (i.e., toy penguin) in comparison to a less-preferred stimulus (i.e., mother attention alone) selected from a preference assessment with two typically developing infants. During the preference assessment, items were placed to the side of the infants’ sight while they were seated in a comfortable position and the percentage of eye contact with each item was used to establish a hierarchy of preference. During the treatment comparison, the infant was placed in the prone position and the items were situated just above the infants’ view to ensure that seeing the item required holding the head up. Although both treatments improved head elevation and reduced tantrums, the caregiver selected the treatment using the more-preferred stimulus during a concurrent-chains preference assessment.

 

Implications and Future Directions for Educating Caregivers About Infant Safe Sleep and Tummy Time

(Applied Research)
AMBER E. MENDRES-SMITH (University of Maryland, School of Medicine), John C. Borrero (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Mariana I. Castillo (UMBC), Barbara J. Davis (Ann Storck Center), Jessica Becraft (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Shuyan Sun (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Alison Falck (University of Maryland, School of Medicine), Suhagi Kadakia (University of Maryland, School of Medicine)
Abstract:

Annually, approximately 3,500 infants die suddenly and unexpectedly in the United States, and many of these deaths are due to unsafe sleep positioning or environments (Centers for Disease Control, 2018). To promote safe sleeping and infant development, the American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP) recommends that caregivers put infants on their backs for sleep and on their stomachs to play, known as “tummy time.” In this study, we evaluated the effectiveness of an educational video on 120 current and expectant parents’ knowledge of the AAP’s positioning recommendations. The video was associated with a significant improvement in participants’ knowledge from pre- to post-test. We also identified that participants’ reasons for positioning their babies unsafely for sleep and for limiting tummy time was largely associated with infant intolerance. In this presentation, I will: (a) discuss the implications of our results and the role of behavior analysis in addressing infant safe-sleep and tummy-time behavior and (b) describe a new intervention to teach parents of high-risk, hospitalized premature infants about safe sleep and tummy time.

 
 
Panel #134
CE Offered: BACB
Considerations When Expanding Behavior-Analytic Services to Memory Care Settings
Saturday, May 25, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 1/2
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Jonathan C. Baker, Ph.D.
Chair: Jonathan C. Baker (Western Michigan University)
JENNA MATTINGLY (The Shabani Institute)
MARANDA ANN TRAHAN (Trinity Services, Inc.)
CHRISTOPHER WALMSLEY (Humboldt State University)
Abstract: Building up clientele and working with staff in memory care settings can be particularly challenging. Physicians, nurses, and caregivers want to use non-pharmacological interventions to manage the challenging behaviors exhibited by those with dementia, but there are not enough behavior analysts in clinical practice for referrals. Furthermore, once the clinician gets their foot in the door, it can be difficult to get buy-in from team members due to the general unfamiliarity of behavior analysis in aging. Adherence with behavior plans must come from the top down and it can be difficult for geriatric care managers to free up already overwhelmed staff to train them on additional responsibilities. As an additional challenge, nonbehavioral interventions already in place in memory care settings may include those based on poor empirical support, and may negatively impact client outcomes as the behavior analyst begins providing services. This panel will provide discussion on anticipated barriers and proposed solutions regarding a) setting up practice with older adults, b) staff training, and c) how to navigate unfamiliar nonbehavioral interventions when expanding services in the area of behavioral gerontology.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience: Current board certified behavior analysts
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) Describe strategies to establish your practice with older adults, (2) State solutions to barriers associated with training staff in aging settings, and (3) State tactics to evaluate nonbehavioral interventions encountered in aging settings.
Keyword(s): aging, behavioral gerontology, practitioners
 
 
Panel #135
CE Offered: BACB
Sustainability of Behavioral Interventions and Lasting Systems Change
Saturday, May 25, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Cuvee
Area: CSS/AUT; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Veronica J. Howard, Ph.D.
Chair: Veronica J. Howard (University of Alaska Anchorage)
RACHEL L. WHITE (University of Alaska Anchorage; Good Behavior Beginnings)
HANA JURGENS (Positive Behavior Supports Corp.)
YULEMA CRUZ (Global Behavior Consultants, Inc.)
Abstract:

The field of Applied Behavior Analysis has produced a wealth of information on interventions to produce socially significant behavior change. As a result, many individuals seek the services of Behavior Analysts, most notably, services for children with autism and other developmental disabilities. Although there is a high demand for Behavior Analysts to consult with clients and create successful interventions for behavior change, once the Behavior Analyst’s consultation ends, the interventions are not often continued. Sustainability of behavioral interventions is a key factor in the maintenance of behavior changes within a setting. Sustainability of system change also requires building the capacity for on-going services. This panel will feature individuals working on various aspects of building capacity and creating sustainable programs. Panelists will speak on their success with creating sustainable programs for individuals and teachers that lasted after consultation ended. Panelists will also discuss strategies used to produce sustainable behavior change at the group, organization, and system level.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Intermediate/BCBAs; Behavior Analysts interested in creating lasting change.

Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will identify key features of creating sustainable models. 2. Participants will list examples of way to improve sustainability of behavioral interventions. 3. Participants will describe how changes in supervision systems improve sustainability.
Keyword(s): supervision, sustainability, training
 
 
Symposium #136
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Research Evaluating Video for Enhancing Sports Performance
Saturday, May 25, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Fairmont, B2, Imperial Ballroom
Area: CSS/CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Merritt Schenk (University of South Florida)
CE Instructor: Merritt Schenk, M.A.
Abstract: This symposium includes three papers that evaluate interventions for enhancing sports performance with a focus on the different components of current video interventions. Schenk and Miltenberger discuss research evaluating the separate contributions of video modeling and video feedback for enhancing the performance of little league baseball pitchers. Snapp and Miltenberger discuss research evaluating the utility of video feedback for improving three separate cheerleading tumbling skills. Sellers discusses research evaluating the combined effects of video modeling and video feedback for improving three foundational rock climbing skills.
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Sports Performance
Target Audience: The target audience is all practicing behavior analysts who wish to learn about the application of behavior analytic techniques with typical developing populations.
Learning Objectives: 1. Replicate and demonstrate the utility of behavioral interventions for sports performance 2. Begin to assess the useful components in established interventions for sports-related performance enhancement 3. Continue to disseminate behavior analysis to fields outside of developmental disabilities
 

Evaluating Video Modeling Versus Video Feedback to Improve Baseball Pitching

Merritt Schenk (University of South Florida), RAYMOND G. MILTENBERGER (University of South Florida)
Abstract:

This study examined the use of video modeling and video feedback to evaluate how each procedure may improve pitching skills of baseball players in a community Little League. A multiple baseline design across participants with an ABC sequence was used to evaluate the intervention. In Phase 1 of intervention, the effects of video modeling were assessed. In Phase 2, the effects of video feedback were assessed for participants who did not show adequate performance improvement during Phase 1. A follow-up phase was conducted to examine maintenance of skill performance after a successful intervention. The results indicate that video modeling had little to no effect on performance, and video feedback was the important component to teaching pitching skills.

 
Evaluating the Effectiveness of Video Feedback to Improve Cheerleading Skills
SARA KATE SNAPP (University of South Florida), Raymond G. Miltenberger (University of South Florida)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effectiveness of video feedback to improve three cheerleading tumbling skills in a multiple baseline across behaviors design. The study included three high school cheerleaders. Target behaviors included a front walkover roundoff back handspring, a standing back tuck, and a toe touch two back handsprings. Video feedback increase the percentage correct for each of the three skills for all three participants. This study represents a systematic replication of video feedback to a novel sport and shows the robustness of this procedure for enhancing sports performance.
 
An Application of Expert Video Modeling and Feedback to Increase Foundational Climbing Skills in Novice Rock Climbers
SETH WALKER (Utah State University), Kerry Abigail Shea (Utah State University), Tyra Paige Sellers (Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
Abstract: There is a growing body of research examining novel applications of behavior analytic technology. One specific area of study is the application of behavior analysis in sports, health, and fitness. Several studies have examined the efficacy of behavior analytic coaching strategies in sports to increase performer fluency and accuracy. Rock climbing is a multifaceted sport that requires mastery of a number of complex behavior chains in order to successfully navigate either an artificial or natural climbing surface. To date, training rock climbing movement has not been a focus of many empirical investigations. The majority of rock climbing studies that do investigate training for climbers typically focus on the physiological aspects of rock climbing. In this study, researchers examined the application of expert video modeling and feedback on the performance of foundational rock climbing skills. Participants demonstrated an increase in fluency for all skills that were targeted in the intervention.
 
 
Symposium #137
CE Offered: BACB
Mindfulness: Investigations of its Effects on Creativity, Charity, and Emotional Regulation
Saturday, May 25, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 1-3
Area: DEV/PCH; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Don Togade (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology ; George Brown College, Toronto, Canada)
CE Instructor: Don Togade, Ph.D.
Abstract:

“Mindfulness” originated from the Pali word sati and the Sanskrit word smirti, which refers to an individual’s awareness, attention, remembering (Neale, 2006). Despite its popularity, majority of mindfulness investigations have employed indirect measures in determining its effects (e.g., Batalo 2012; Rabiee., 2014). This symposium presents three recently completed research studies on the impact of mindfulness on behavior, which included direct measures of behavioral effects; specifically, its effects on creativity, charitable giving, and emotional regulation were measured. Adults within the general population, both novice and more experienced meditators, were included in these studies. In light of the results obtained and based on the body of previous research on the behavioural effects of mindfulness, applied implications and future research recommendations will be outlined.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

The symposium will be geared towards undergraduate and graduate students in behavior analysis, BCBA and BCBA-D researchers and practitioners in education, healthcare, and applied clinical work.

 

Creativity in the Present Moment: A Behavior-Analytic Exploration of the Effects of Mindfulness Practice on Adults’ Creative Performance

DON TOGADE (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology ; George Brown College, Toronto, Canada), August Stockwell (Upswing Advocates), Jessica Gamba (National Louise University), Diana J. Walker (Trinity Services/Illinois Crisis Prevention Network), Patricia Arredondo (Fielding Graduate University; Arizona State University)
Abstract:

The present study investigated the effects of mindfulness practice on creative performance of adult participants classified as novice and experienced meditators across four computer tasks. Novice and experienced meditators’ mindfulness and creative performance across divergent, convergent, recombination, and block design were measured while exposed to neutral activity and mindfulness conditions. Participants’ self-reported levels of mindfulness was measured based on the difference between pre- and post- tests scores on the Mindfulness Awareness Assessment Scale (MAAS) and Kentucky Inventory of Mindfulness Scale (KIMS) across conditions, whereas direct measure of mindfulness was recorded using an iPhone app during mindfulness and maintenance conditions only. Across creative tasks, rate of both novel and redundant responses, duration of task completion, inter-response time (IRT), and latency to the first response were measured per session. Following steady state creative performance in the final mindfulness condition, participants’ mindfulness and creative performance were tested for maintenance. Across meditators, difference scores from the MAAS and KIMS did not yield significant changes between conditions, and difference scores maintained for both the MAAS and KIMS during maintenance tests. Finally, measures of rate, duration, IRT, and latency of creative performances yielded undifferentiated outcomes. However, some dimensions of creative performance maintained following without structured practice.

 

Effects of Loving Kindness Meditation on Charitable Giving and Written Statements About Self and Others

SIMRAN AGRAWAL (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), August Stockwell (Upswing Advocates), Don Togade (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology ; George Brown College, Toronto, Canada)
Abstract:

The purpose of this research was to examine the effects of LovingKindness Meditation on charitable giving and written statements about self and others. The study measured charitable giving by counting the amount of total dollars donated in baseline, LovingKindness Meditation, and control condition sessions. Written statements about self and others were measured by administering a writing prompt at the end of each of each session in each of three conditions mentioned above; written statements were categorized as positive, neutral or negative. The results of the study indicate that two out of three participants donated more money in the LovingKindness condition as compared to the baseline or control condition. Additionally, two out of three participants showed higher frequencies of positive statements about self and others in the LovingKidness condition as compared to the other conditions. The overall frequency of negative statements was low for all participants, except for one participant who showed the lowest frequency in the LovingKindness condition.

 
Mindfully Regulating: The Effects of Brief Interventions of Acute Emotion Regulation
JONAH DAVID MCMANUS (University of Louisiana in Lafayette), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Patrick Rappold (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Madison Gamble (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Abstract: Emotion regulation involves any attempt at changing, starting, or stopping covert verbal behavior, and associated emotions. Some experts suggest that difficulties in regulating emotions is central to most, if not all, psychological disorders. For this reason, increasing adaptive emotion regulation is a common therapeutic goal, and by extension, a focus of clinical research. Of equal importance might be investigations of brief, self-directed interventions. For example, video game play and mindful breathing are commonly reported as simple approaches to managing intense emotions and responses thereto. The current study examined the impact of two brief interventions, video games and mindful breathing, on acute emotion regulation measured via a distress tolerance task and self-reported emotional states as compared to a waiting control. Results showed divergent effects on emotion regulation as measured by the self-report measures versus the distress tolerance task. Steps for future research and limitations as well as implications for assessment will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #139
CE Offered: BACB
Using Equivalence-Based Instruction to Teach Academic and Music Skills to Children of Typical Development
Saturday, May 25, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jessica Day-Watkins (Drexel University)
CE Instructor: Jessica Day-Watkins, Ph.D.
Abstract: In recent years, equivalence-based instruction (EBI) has increasingly been used to teach a variety of socially relevant skills and content to children of typical development. The three talks in this symposium describe studies in which EBI was used to teach classes of academic content and music skills. The first study was a replication and extension of Lynch and Cuvo (1995)’s analysis of fraction-pictogram-percentages equivalence classes. Some participants were directly trained and tested on the classes while additional participants observed the training of the classes. The second study extended prior studies in which equivalence classes of music notes were established by also teaching music dynamics, followed by generalization tests of accurate piano playing. In the third study, the Go/no-go procedure, an alternative to match-to-sample to form equivalence classes, was used with compound stimuli to establish reading comprehension among dictated words, pictures, printed words, and textual behavior. Together, the three studies in this symposium extend the content domains and procedures that can be used to establish equivalence classes of relevant content to children of typical development.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): conditional discrimination, derived relations, equivalence, observational learning
Target Audience: The target audience will be those interested in equivalence-based instruction.
 
Math Instruction: An Investigation of Derived Relations, Observational Learning, and Transfer of Function
BRITTANY CHIASSON (Teachers College, Columbia University), Victoria Verdun (Teachers College, Columbia University), Daniel Mark Fienup (Columbia University)
Abstract: Little research has examined the intersection of derived relations and observational learning, which may be an additional avenue by which an instructor can increase the total amount of learning while conserving instructional resources. In this study, we replicated and extended Lynch and Cuvo (1995)’s analysis of fraction-pictogram-percentages equivalence classes. We trained 3rd grade students on baseline relations and observed the emergence of all possible derived relations. Prior to training, the participants could sort percentage stimuli from lowest to highest (comparative relations), but could not do this with fraction stimuli. Following the formation of equivalence classes, the participants could accurately sort fraction stimuli, thus demonstrating the transfer of function. Two additional participants observed the target participants undergo the training of baseline relations. The observing participants acquired baseline relations with no direct reinforcement, derived all relations, and demonstrated transfer of function. These findings suggest a novel way to incorporate EBI into classroom settings.
 
Using Equivalence-Based Instruction to Teach Music Notes and Piano Playing Dynamics
SARAH LOSOWYJ (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), Tina Sidener (Caldwell University), Emily Gallant (Caldwell University)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to extend the equivalence-based instruction (EBI) and music literature by using EBI to teach music concepts to three 8- to 10-year-old children. Participants were first taught to identify five notes on a music staff and piano keyboard using a one-to-many (OTM) training structure with five stimulus classes consisting of four members each. Following the formation of the music note classes, participants were taught to identify and discriminate between three levels of dynamics (magnitude of playing a note) using a OTM training structure with three stimulus classes consisting of four members each. Participants completed two match-to-sample pretests and posttests for all relations in each stimulus set along with two piano playing pretests and posttests. During tests for derived relations, all participants responded in a class-consistent manner, thus indicating the formation of the equivalence classes. In addition, music skills generalized to playing a song with indicated dynamics on a piano keyboard. The results indicate that EBI is an effective procedure for teaching music concepts to children.
 

Reading Comprehension With the Go/No-Go Procedure With Compound Stimuli

Cecelia Brayner de Freitas Gueiros (Universidade de São Paulo), PAULA DEBERT (University of Sao Paulo)
Abstract:

The Go/no-go procedure with compound stimuli is an alternative to matching-to-sample to establish equivalence relations between abstract stimuli. The present study is the first to investigate whether the Go/no-go procedure with compound stimuli would produce emergent relations among dictated word (A), picture (B) and printed word (C) and the emergence of textual behavior (CD) using a multiple probe design across sets of words. Three preschool children were exposed to five phases: (1) Pretest of BC, CB and CD relation, (2) Pretraining with known stimuli, (3) AB and AC training, (4) Posttests of BC and CB relations and (5) Posttest of the CD relation. During AB and AC training, compound stimuli (formed by auditory and visual stimuli) were successively presented on each trial. Responses in the presence of “related” compounds (A1B1, A2B2, A1C1 or A2C2), but not in the presence of “unrelated” compounds (A1B2, A2B1, A2C1 or A1C2) were differentially reinforced. The results showed that all children achieved the learning criteria and showed the emergence of BC, CB, and CD relations for all sets only after AB and AC training. The Go/no-go procedure with compound stimuli is an effective alternative to establish reading comprehension.

 
 
Invited Panel #142
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP
Derived Stimulus Relations: A Panel With Discussion
Saturday, May 25, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: SCI; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Anna I. Petursdottir (Texas Christian University)
CE Instructor: Anna I. Petursdottir, Ph.D.
Panelists: ERIK ARNTZEN (Oslo and Akershus University College), KAREN LIONELLO-DENOLF (Assumption College), DANIEL FIENUP (Columbia University)
Abstract:

This panel will be a discussion of Dr. Caio Miguel’s SQAB Tutorial on derived stimulus relations.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe current directions of derived stimulus relations research, (2) describe future directions of derived stimulus relations research, and (3) describe similarities between basic and applied derived stimulus relations research programs
ERIK ARNTZEN (Oslo and Akershus University College)
Dr. Erik Arntzen received his Ph.D. from University of Oslo, Norway, in February 2000. Arntzen’s dissertation focused on variables that influenced responding in accordance with stimulus equivalence. He also holds a degree in clinical psychology. He is currently a full-time Professor in Behavior Analysis at Oslo and Akershus University College (OAUC). His research contributions include both basic and applied behavior analysis, with an emphasis on research in relational stimulus control and verbal behavior. Lately, he has started research projects with a focus on (1) remembering functions in patients with dementia and (2) conditional discrimination of melanoma detection. He has also been interested in ethical considerations and core values in the field of behavior analysis. Furthermore, he has ongoing research projects within the areas of gambling behavior and consumer behavior. He also runs a Behavior Analysis Lab at OAUC. Dr. Arntzen has published papers in a number of different journals including Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior (JEAB), Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis (JABA), The Psychological Record, Behavioral Interventions, European Journal of Behavior Analysis (EJOBA), Experimental of Analysis of Human Behavior Bulletin, Analysis of Gambling Behavior, the Analysis of Verbal Behavior, American Journal of Alzheimer's Disease & other Dementias, and Psychopharmacology. Dr. Arntzen has served as the president and past-president of the European ABA (2008–2014). Dr. Arntzen has been a member of the board of the Norwegian Association for Behavior Analysis from 1987–1993 and from 2006 to present, holds the position as the secretary of international affairs. Dr. Arntzen is a trustee of Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies. He has presented papers at conferences worldwide. Dr. Arntzen has been recognized with awards, including the SABA award for the dissemination of behavior analysis, ABAI award for outstanding mentoring, the research award at Akershus University College, and publication award at OAUC. Dr. Arntzen is one of the founders and the editor of European Journal of Behavior Analysis. He has also served as the editor of Behavior & Philosophy. He has served on the editorials board of several journals, including the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, The Psychological Record, International Journal of Psychology and Psychological Therapy, American Journal of Alzheimer’s Disease, the Behavior Analyst, and The Behavior Analyst Today.
KAREN LIONELLO-DENOLF (Assumption College)
Dr. Lionello-DeNolf is an assistant professor of psychology and the director of the undergraduate and graduate programs in applied behavior analysis at Assumption College. She is also an adjunct faculty member at the University of Massachusetts Medical School. She holds a doctorate in psychology from Purdue University with an emphasis in learning and memory, and she is a Board Certified Behavior Analyst at the doctoral level. Dr. Lionello-DeNolf has taught undergraduate and graduate courses in research methods, learning and behavior, behavioral assessment, behavioral interventions, and the experimental analysis of behavior. For more than a decade, Dr. Lionello-DeNolf was a faculty member at the University of Massachusetts Medical School, Shriver Center, where she conducted translational research in the areas of experimental and applied behavior analysis, autism spectrum disorders, developmental disabilities, discrimination learning, stimulus equivalence, behavioral momentum, and choice. She has led several research projects funded by the National Institutes of Health that investigated the learning processes that may underlie some of the language and other deficits in autism and related developmental disabilities. Her research has been published in leading journals, such as the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, The Psychological Record, and Research in Autism Spectrum Disorders. Dr. Lionello-DeNolf is past Associate Editor of the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior and The Psychological Record, she has served on the editorial review board or as a guest reviewer for a number of journals, and she has served on the Science Board of the Association for Behavior Analysis International. Dr. Lionello-DeNolf is the current Associate Editor for Translational Research for the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior.
DANIEL FIENUP (Columbia University)

Daniel M. Fienup is an Associate Professor of Applied Behavior Analysis at Teachers College, Columbia University.  He received his Master’s in Applied Behavior Analysis from Southern Illinois University and his Ph.D. in School Psychology from Illinois State University.  Dr. Fienup and his students conduct research on instructional design and educational performance.  Dr. Fienup is an Associate Editor for the Journal of Behavioral Education and The Analysis of Verbal Behavior.  He also serves on the editorial board for Behavior Analysis in Practice, Perspectives on Behavioral Science, the Psychological Record, and Behavior Development.  He serves on the Licensed Behavior Analyst New York state board and is a past board member of the New York State Association for Behavior Analysis.

 
 
Panel #143
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
PDS: Integrity and Ethics in Publication
Saturday, May 25, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, International Ballroom
Area: TBA; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Ruth Anne Rehfeldt, Ph.D.
Chair: Ruth Anne Rehfeldt (ABAI Publication Board Coordinator; Southern Illinois University)
DONALD A. HANTULA (Editor, Perspectives on Behavior Science; Temple University)
MITCH FRYLING (Editor, The Psychological Record; California State University, Los Angeles)
MORGAN RYAN (Senior Editor, Behavioral Sciences, Springer.)
Abstract:

The purpose of this meeting is to discuss some of the core practices and guidelines for the Committee on Publication Ethics, or COPE, with an eye toward common issues or dilemmas encountered by the editors of the ABAI journals. The panel will share insights from their experiences as authors, reviewers, and editors, and will also advise newer authors on those common policies and practices that are necessary to ensure that behavior analysts pursue publication with integrity.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

ABAI members interested in publishing.

Learning Objectives: 1. To understand the core practices and guidelines for the Committee on Publication Ethics (COPE) 2. To identify common issues or dilemmas encountered by the editors of ABAI journals 3. To learn best practices for promoting research integrity
Keyword(s): Publication, ethics
 
 
Panel #144
CE Offered: BACB
Behavioral Skills Training: A Comparison of Four Pre-Service Training Models
Saturday, May 25, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Rouge
Area: TBA/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Jessica Wenig, M.S.
Chair: Jessica Wenig (Advances Learning Center)
HANNA C. RUE (Autism Spectrum Therapies)
BIANCA SIMS (Behavioral Concepts)
JILL HARPER (Melmark New England)
Abstract:

Organizations providing services to individuals with developmental disabilities often face challenges when developing and implementing effective staff training. For instance, in some regions of the country, funders require direct care staff to hold certification as a Registered Behavior Technician™ (RBT®). Behavior Skills Training (BST) provides an evidence-based methodology that can be used to train a variety of skills necessary of a direct care staff member. Data collected during pre-service training (e.g., pre and post feedback surveys, competency assessment scores) offer a source of information regarding training practices that are best for an organization’s needs. For instance, training curriculum, format and duration can be modified based upon the information gathered from such assessments while still maintaining the integrity of BST. The focus of this panel will be a comparison of training models across four organizations (home-based, center-based and educational services) inclusive of a discussion regarding the utility of continual assessment during the training process to inform further development of a pre-service training program. Objectives: 1. Describe development of competency measures to meet the unique needs of an organization 2. Describe models that include training for required RBT certification. 3. Describe scaffolding of training for staff member pursuing advancement 4. Describe a variety of data collection methods that can be used throughout the training process to make informed decisions regarding future training directions.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

BCBAs, LABAs, Business Owners, Training Coordinators

Learning Objectives: Objectives: 1. Describe development of competency measures to meet the unique needs of an organization 2. Describe models that include training for required RBT certification. 3. Describe scaffolding of training for staff member pursuing advancement 4. Describe a variety of data collection methods that can be used throughout the training process to make informed decisions regarding future training directions.
Keyword(s): Behavioral Skills, Pre-Service Training
 
 
Special Event #145
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
Presidential Scholar Address: Nonviolent Resistance in the Global Struggle to Defend Democracy and Human Rights
Saturday, May 25, 2019
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom A-F
Instruction Level: Basic
Chair: Mark A. Mattaini (Jane Addams College of Social Work-University of Illinois at Chicago)
CE Instructor: Mark A. Mattaini, Ph.D.
 

Presidential Scholar Address: Nonviolent Resistance in the Global Struggle to Defend Democracy and Human Rights

Abstract:

There is growing concern among citizens around the world at the rise in the election of populist governments, increase in authoritarianism, and degradation of democratic rights, institutions, and norms. Meanwhile, the use of nonviolent resistance to defend the rights of minorities and oppressed communities, advance environmental and human rights campaigns, and to preserve democratic freedoms and institutions is being applied with increased frequency. However, as a field, nonviolent resistance continues to be neglected, and as a technique and type of social and political action, the phenomenon is not well understood, including by policymakers, journalists, academics, or citizens or institutions in our societies. This dearth in understanding is dangerous. New research suggests that although the frequency of nonviolent struggle is increasing, its effectiveness is decreasing. This is being attributed to opponent learning and innovation, as well as the fact that as in the past, such struggles often rely on intuition, chance events, improvisation, and people acting without clearly identifying their objectives or understanding what is required to achieve them. As behavior scientists have begun shifting significant attention to social issues, and given their recent growing emphasis on cultural level change, they could become valued partners in shaping more effective strategic action. One important potential area for collaborative work is in researching constructional (Goldiamond), constructive (Gandhi) options for shaping socially and environmentally sustainable communities with the strength and knowledge to resist threats to democracy, and support human rights. In light of the growing exploration of nonviolent resistance to address the various political challenges faced by citizens around the world, a top priority now is to expand the capacity of practitioners of nonviolent action to plan and implement wise strategies that can guide their actions and maximize their effectiveness. By drawing from selected contemporary and historical movements, this presentation will explore the lessons that can be gained from global movements to face current challenges in the fight to advance human rights and defend democratic rights, institutions, and norms.

 
JAMILA RAQIB (Albert Einstein Institution; Center for International Studies at Massachusetts Institute of Technology)
 
Jamila Raqib, an Afghan native, was a nominee for the 2017 Nobel Peace Prize, and is Executive Director of the Albert Einstein Institution in Boston, which promotes the study and strategic use of nonviolent action worldwide. From 2002 until his recent passing, Ms. Raqib worked directly with political scientist Gene Sharp, the world’s foremost scholar on strategic nonviolent action. In 2009, she and Sharp jointly developed a curriculum called Self-Liberation: A Guide to Strategic Planning for Action to End a Dictatorship or Other Oppression drawing extensively on that literature, to provide in-depth guidance for groups planning or engaged in nonviolent struggle for democracy and human rights. She is also a Director’s Fellow at the MIT Media Lab, exploring how innovations in technology and education can make the collection, sharing, and application of knowledge of nonviolent action more effective, timely, and secure. In addition, she is currently doing research on nonviolent social change grounded in Gandhi’s “constructive programme,” which is similar on multiple dimensions to constructional work as outlined in Israel Goldiamond’s work. Ms. Raqib’s TED talk on nonviolent resistance has been translated into 29 languages and has more than 1 million views; many of her presentations are also widely shared on YouTube, making her work accessible especially to young people. She is among a handful of people in the world who has studied the extensive literature on nonviolence social change in real depth and has been working directly with the groups who have been applying that knowledge in conflicts around the world. Raqib regularly gives presentations and conducts educational workshops for activists and organizers, human rights organizations, academics, and government bodies concerned with diverse objectives including challenging dictatorship, combatting corruption, and attaining political rights, economic justice, environmental protection, and women’s empowerment. She also serves as commentator on nonviolent action for multiple media outlets and oversees the dissemination of extensive resources on the topic through the Einstein Institution. She therefore has much to contribute to behavior scientists and practitioners interested in expanding their involvement and participation in social change, human rights, and sustainability efforts, particularly from a constructional perspective.
 
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe two lessons that can be gained from global movements facing current challenges in the struggle to advance human rights, and strengthen and defend democratic institutions; (2) explain the value of nonviolent resistance as a form of social and political action; (3) explain how and why, while the frequency of nonviolent struggle is increasing, its effectiveness is declining in some arenas; (4) describe the value of constructive/constructional strategies for shaping environmentally sustainable and socially just communities.
 
 
 
Symposium #178
CE Offered: BACB/NASP
Direct Instruction (DI) for Individuals With Autism- Can We Just (D)o (I)t?
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom C
Area: AUT/EDC; Domain: Translational
Chair: Joel L. Vidovic (The Autism Model School)
CE Instructor: Joel L. Vidovic, M.A.
Abstract:

Although Direct Instruction (DI) has been shown to be an effective teaching method for building a variety of critical skills (language, reading, spelling, and mathematics) across a variety of populations (general education students, economically disadvantaged students, and special education students), the most recent reviews from The National Professional Development Center on Autism Spectrum Disorders (2015) and The Association for Science in Autism Treatment (ASAT, 2018) do not yet identify DI as an Evidence-Based Practice for individuals with autism. As such, are behavior analysts and behavior-analytically oriented schools missing out on a valuable tool? This symposium will include three presentations that will 1) provide a review of the published research evaluating the effectiveness of DI programs for individuals on the autism spectrum, 2) describe a single-subject study evaluating the effectiveness of the Language for Learning program for individuals with developmental disabilties who use high-tech augmentative and alternative communication (AAC) speech generating devices as a primary mode of communication , and 3) review lessons learned following 5 years of a site-wide implementation of DI programs at a public charter school serving youth and young adults with autism.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): AAC, Autism, Direct Instruction
Target Audience:

The target audience for this presentation is Master's level (or above) Board Certified Behavior Analysts and School Psychologists

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of this presentation, participants will be able to 1) describe the current peer-reviewed evidence-base regarding the use of Direct Instruction for individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder, 2) describe the feasibility and effectiveness of using the Language for Learning Curriculum with individuals who have a developmental disability and use high-tech augmentative and alternative communication (AAC) speech generating devices as a primary mode of communication, and 3) describe components (including outcome data) of a school-wide implementation of Direct Instruction curricula at a public school serving youth and young adults with autism.
 

Review of Direct Instruction as an Intervention for Individuals Diagnosed With Autism Spectrum Disorder

(Theory)
MELINDA GALBATO (The May Institute), Sarah Frampton (May Institute, Inc.), M. Alice Shillingsburg (May Institute)
Abstract:

Direct instruction (DI) is an intensive fast-paced instructional method that can be used to teach skills to students including those with learning and developmental disabilities. Direct instruction incorporates behavioral principles including concise sequenced instructions, immediate reinforcement, and error correction (EC) procedures (Head, Flores, & Shippen, 2018). DI curricula include several academic areas such as reading decoding, reading comprehension, language arts, and math among others. Although DI has been shown effective across various age groups, socioeconomic backgrounds, and presenting disabilities, less is known about the utility of DI for individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD). The following review of the literature summarizes 9 experiments published between 2000 and 2018 that use DI with children with a diagnosis of ASD. Studies were analyzed across various participant and procedural variables. Results suggest that DI can produce improvements in targeted skills for individuals with ASD. Recommendations are provided for future researchers about information to report and future research endeavors.

 

Using the Language for Learning Curriculum With Augmentative and Alternative Communication Learners: A Feasibility Study

(Applied Research)
PAUL J. SIMEONE (The May Institute), Sarah Frampton (May Institute, Inc.), M. Alice Shillingsburg (May Institute)
Abstract:

The purpose of the current study was to evaluate the feasibility and effectiveness of using Direct Instruction-Language for Learning (DI-LL; Engelmann & Osborn, 1976; Engelmann & Osborne, 1999) curriculum with children (10 to 15-years-old) with developmental disabilities who use high-tech augmentative and alternative communication (AAC) speech generating devices as a primary mode of communication. Overall performance of three students was evaluated using identical pre- and post-test measures in a concurrent multiple probe design across participants. Additionally, we evaluated the feasibility of DI-LL with AAC learners by evaluating: 1) responses to target exercises (independent, error), 2) number of repetitions needed to complete lessons with fluency, 3) average duration of exercises, 4) and participant affect during DI-LL exercises. Results show increased correct responding on the post-test measure, lending preliminary support for the effectiveness of this approach. Results for measures1-4 further support the feasibility of the intervention for this population. These preliminary findings have implications for the use of DI-LL with students utilizing AAC in a classroom setting.

 

Adventures in Direct Instruction at a Public School for Children With Autism

(Service Delivery)
MARY CORNELL (The Autism Model School), Joel L. Vidovic (The Autism Model School)
Abstract:

The Autism Model School, located in Toledo, OH, is a public charter school providing educational services to approximately 110 students with autism- ranging in age from 5 to 22 years of age. In 2013, the school initiated a site-wide implementation of Direct Instruction programs in the areas of oral language, reading, writing, and mathematics. Specific programs forming the core of the academic portion of the school’s curriculum include Language for Learning (Engelmann & Osborn, 2008) , Language for Thinking (Engelmann & Osborn, 2002), Language for Writing (Engelmann & Osborn, 2002), Headsprout Reading® , Reading Mastery (Engelmann & Bruner, 2003), Corrective Reading (Engelmann et al., 2008), Reasoning and Writing (Engelmann et al., 2001), Connecting Math Concepts (Engelmann et al., 2014), and Read-To-Achieve (Marchand-Martella & Martella, 2010) . Five years after the initial roll-out, this presentation will describe the experiences and lessons learned of those who lead, and continue to lead the implementation. Results of annual outcome testing of students using the Kaufman Test of Educational Achievement-Second Edition- Brief Form as well as the Clinical Evaluation of Language Fundamentals- Fifth Edition will be shared.

 
 
Panel #179
CE Offered: BACB
Social Skills Training: We Can Do Better
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom B
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Stefanie H. Perrin, M.Ed.
Chair: David M. Wilson (Georgian Court University)
JACQUELINE J. WEBER (Behavioral Consultants, LLC)
HEIDI LIGHT- GIGLIO (Brett DiNovi & Associates)
STEFANIE H. PERRIN (Brett DiNovi and Associates, LLC)
Abstract: Deficits in social communication and social interaction characterize learners with Autism Spectrum Disorder and identify where our intervention efforts must be directed. The need for teaching social skills to our learners and training social acceptance from peers at an early age is imperative in helping individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorders to be successful in a variety of environments including school, community, and home. There are a number of concerns that should be addressed when teaching social skills. In school programs, an emphasis on on-task behavior and academic achievement often takes precedence over communication and deficits when engaging with peers, and there is a disconnect between school and community. In some cases we are not addressing social skills in the most effective manner, too late or not at all. Research indicates that the greatest challenge with the state of social skills instruction is that it is not individualized enough, and there are low rates of maintenance and generalization outside of the classroom environment. This panel will discuss methods to address these concerns.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience: Practitioners
Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will be able to describe the importance of teaching social skills at an early age. 2. Attendees will be able to describe the value in incorporating neuro-typical peers as models when teaching social skills. 3. Attendees will be able to discuss ways to program for maintenance and generalization.
 
 
Symposium #180
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Advances in Treating Stereotypic Behavior
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Jacquelyn M. MacDonald (Regis College)
CE Instructor: Jacquelyn M. MacDonald, Ph.D.
Abstract: Motor and vocal stereotypy can be stigmatizing for people diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder. It is important to find socially valid interventions to promote socially appropriate behavior while decrease stereotypic behavior. This symposium will discuss recent research focused on decreasing stereotypy. Each study will discuss alternative appropriate behavior. Children and adults diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder participated in these studies. Two of the studies examined interventions to decrease motor stereotypy while one study examined an intervention to decrease vocal stereotypy. Interventions included using stereotypy as a reinforcer for alternative behavior, sibling-implemented response interruption and redirection, and using auditory stimulation to decreased vocal stereotypy. When stereotypy was used as reinforcer, stereotypy decreased and functional engagement increased. When siblings were trained to implement response interruption and redirection during playtime, stereotypy decreased for both participants and functional communication increased for one participant. When a competing item was identified, vocal stereotypy decreased significantly for one participant and to a more moderate degree for two participants. In all three studies, stereotypy decreased in varying degrees for all participants and appropriate behavior increased. Limitations of the current research and areas for future research will be discussed.
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Competing items, functional engagement, RIRD, stereotypy
Target Audience: Symposium will be targeted towards BCBAS working with children and adults diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder.
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will describe an intervention to use stereotypy as a reinforcer. 2. Participants will describe recent research outlining the use of a competing item to decrease vocal stereotypy. 3. Participants will describe recent research on sibling implemented response interruption and redirection.
 
An Investigation of Auditory Stimulation on Vocal Stereotypy
SAMANTHA VOLPE (Endicott College / Elwyn NJ), Mary Jane Weiss (Endicott College), Thomas L. Zane (University of Kansas), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation)
Abstract: Autism has always been characterized in part by the presence of repetitive, nonfunctional behaviors. In 1943, Leo Kanner was the first person to describe repetitive, ritualistic behavior to be one of the hallmark characteristics of an autism spectrum disorder. Today, restricted, repetitive patterns of behavior are still a cornerstone of the diagnosis of an autism spectrum disorder (ASD; APA, 2013). This focus on repetition, manifested in insistence on routine or the drive to engage in repetitive behaviors, can significantly impact academic achievement, eating, sleeping, and typical activities of daily living or self care (APA, 2013; Dyer, 1987; Matson, Kiely, & Bamburg, 1997). We sought to confirm that each participant’s vocal stereotypy was automatically maintained through the use of the functional analysis screening procedure (Querim et al, 2013). Then, through the use of a competing stimulus assessment, identify a stimuli that effectively competed with each learner’s vocal stereotypy.
 
Using Stereotypy as Reinforcement for Alternative Behaviors in a Chained Schedule
KATIE JOHNSON (University of Missouri-Columbia), Casey J. Clay (University of Missouri), SungWoo Kahng (Rutgers University)
Abstract: Some individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) engage in stereotypy or repetitive behavior typically maintained by automatic reinforcement. Chronic stereotypy, especially at high frequencies, can interfere with learning and cause social stigmatization. Response blocking and response interruption and redirection (RIRD) have been found to be effective for reducing motor and vocal stereotypy. Previous literature has also evaluated stereotypy as reinforcement for alternative behaviors, such as functional play or work tasks. The current study sought to replicate and extend previous studies by evaluating the effectiveness of a chained schedule on gaining stimulus control over motor and vocal stereotypy and increasing the complexity of novel alternative behaviors (Slaton & Hanley, 2016). Participants include two children with autism who engaged in motor and vocal stereotypy. Preliminary results indicate that chained schedules are effective at reducing stereotypy during the s-delta and increasing the complexity of novel alternative behaviors. These findings emphasize the importance of providing contingent access to stereotypy when attempting to gain stimulus control and highlights the ability of skill acquisition of novel behaviors during the s-delta.
 
Teaching Children to Implement Response Interruption Redirection to Reduce Siblings’ Stereotypy
KAITLYN MILES (Regis College), Jacquelyn M. MacDonald (Regis College)
Abstract: Vocal stereotypy impacts the lives of many individuals diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder (ASD). Current research supports the use of response interruption and redirection (RIRD) to decrease stereotypy (Ahearn, Clark, & MacDonald, 2007). We taught neurotypical children to implement RIRD with their sibling diagnosed with an ASD. We used a multiple baseline design across participants to evaluate sibling implemented RIRD on vocal stereotypy emitted by the individuals with an ASD with two sibling dyads. In each dyad, one of the participants was diagnosed with an ASD. Prior to implementing the RIRD procedure, siblings completed behavioral skills training (BST) to learn how to implement RIRD. Results demonstrated that neurotypical children learned how to implement RIRD with their siblings with an ASD. The rates of stereotypy exhibited by the children with ASD decreased following sibling-implemented RIRD. Additionally, the rates of appropriate vocalizations slightly increased from baseline levels for one participant.
 
 
Panel #181
CE Offered: BACB
PDS: Careers in Applied Behavior Analysis Beyond Autism
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 1-3
Area: CBM/AAB; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Tyler Nighbor, Ph.D.
Chair: Brian R. Katz (West Virginia University)
TYLER NIGHBOR (University of Vermont)
AUGUST F. HOLTYN (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
VALERIE SEGURA (Jacksonville Zoo and Gardens)
Abstract:

Applied behavior analysts are commonly employed to provide services and treatment for children with autism or other developmental disabilities. However, there are a number of other career paths unrelated to treatment for developmental disabilities that are open to those interested in applied behavior analysis. This panel will serve as an introduction to some of these potential career paths. Each speaker will discuss their professional experiences in the field of applied behavior analysis, including the populations with which they work, the types of services they provide for their clients, and how they entered their current line of work. After the speakers have shared their experiences, the remainder of the panel session will be opened up to members of the audience to ask questions regarding careers in applied behavior analysis beyond autism.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Applied practitioners, undergrads and graduate students

Learning Objectives: Describe how reinforcement schedules are arranged in contingency management interventions, identify populations and subject characteristics for whom contingency management has been particularly effective, describe how behavioral economics can be used to identify reinforcer pathology.
Keyword(s): Animal Behavior, Career Paths, Contingency Management, Substance Abuse
 
 
Panel #182
CE Offered: BACB
Strategies and Challenges in Vocational Service Delivery for Adults With Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Saul Axelrod, Ph.D.
Chair: Lois Meszaros (full member)
SAUL AXELROD (Temple University)
TERENCE G. BLACKWELL (Chimes International Limited)
KAORI G. NEPO (Chimes International)
Abstract:

There has been abundant research identifying evidence-based interventions for children with Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities (IDD). As a result, the funding to support high-quality services is often available for youth with IDD. To the contrary, there have been few studies attempting to identify evidence-based practices for adults with IDD, meaning that high-quality services for adults with IDD are often unavailable. Vocational support is critical for promoting the maximum level of independence of adults with IDD. Given limited resources, it has been difficult to identify a literature of evidence-based interventions that will lead to higher quality lives for people with IDD. Additionally, common misconceptions and a lack of knowledge regarding individuals with disabilities by the general public adversely affects employment opportunities for people with IDD regardless of their ability to meet job requirements. In this session, the expert panelists will discuss the challenges and strategies of implementing vocational related evidence-based services for adults with IDD. The topics include: collaboration with employers, supported employment, staff training, the use of technology, developing a vocational manual, navigating policies and regulations, and coordinating the contingencies involving service providers, individuals with disabilities, and stakeholders, including parents and funding agencies. The panelists will then open the floor for further discussion of strategies and service delivery options for adults with IDD.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

BCBAs and BCaBAs

Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will identify a strategy to maximize the potential of adults with IDD. 2. Attendees will identify a challenge in vocational service delivery for adults with IDD 3. Attendees will identify an area of improvement in current issues in vocational service for adults with IDD
Keyword(s): Aults, employment, IDD, service delivery
 
 
Symposium #184
CE Offered: BACB
Alternatives to Traditional Match-To-Sample Procedures to Establish Equivalence Classes
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich E-G
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University)
CE Instructor: Kenneth F. Reeve, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The three talks in this symposium describe studies in which equivalence classes were established using procedures that differed from the more traditional match-to-sample procedures. In the first study, two 4-member equivalence classes of arbitrary stimuli were established using either single-element samples and comparisons or compound samples and comparisons. In the second study, additional alternative response options of “BOTH” and “NEITHER” were presented during specific trials across four groups of college students to assess equivalence class formation with arbitrary stimuli. The third study was a replication of Lantaya, Miguel, Howland, LaFrance, and Page (2018) in which visual-visual successive matching-to-sample was used to establish three-member equivalence classes with college students. This study extended Lantaya et al. by evaluating whether auditory-visual conditional relations (listener behavior), and cross-modal equivalence classes, could be established via successive matching-to-sample. Collectively, the three studies in this symposium extend the procedures that can be used to establish equivalence classes.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): compound stimuli, derived relations, equivalence, successive MTS
Target Audience:

The target audience is behavior analysts interested in alternative match-to-sample procedures and researchers interested in conditional discrimination training and testing.

 

Using Compound Stimuli to Establish Equivalence Classes With College Students

CHRISTOPHER R COLASURDO (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Adrienne Jennings (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University), Leif Albright (Caldwell University)
Abstract:

Equivalence classes are typically formed by teaching arbitrary conditional discriminations using match-to-sample (MTS) procedures and discrete stimuli. Because single stimulus equivalence procedures require a large number of trials, it may be helpful to identify more economical stimulus equivalence procedures. One way to do this may be to use compound stimuli as comparisons and samples to train equivalence classes. This study used a pretest-train-posttest between-groups design to compare the establishment of equivalence classes using either single-element equivalence training (consisting of single class members) or compound stimulus training (consisting of pairs of class members). Two 4-member stimulus classes were established during training. The results showed that stimulus classes were established with similar accuracy but in a shorter amount of time and in fewer trials for participants in the compound group as compared to participants in the single-element equivalence group. These results may provide clinicians a way to use stimulus equivalence procedures in a more mainstream setting.

 

Using “Both” and “Neither” Response Options While Training and Testing for Equivalence Classes With College Students

STEPHANIE BENDUSH (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Adrienne Jennings (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), Tina Sidener (Caldwell University), Leif Albright (Caldwell University)
Abstract:

In the present study, response options of “BOTH” and “NEITHER” (BoNe) were presented during specific conditions across four groups of college students to assess equivalence class formation of two, 3-member classes of abstract arbitrary stimuli. One group used BoNe during both training and emergent relations testing; one group used BoNe during training but standard MTS during emergent relations testing; one group used MTS for training, but BoNe for emergent relations testing; and a final group used standard MTS for both training and emergent relations testing (no BoNe options). Computer pretests and posttests included both standard 2-choice MTS trials and 4-choice BoNe trials. Scores improved from the pretest to posttest for both computer and sorting tests for all participants, regardless of experimental group. During the emergent relations testing, the BoNe-MTS group scored better than the MTS-BoNe group. The BoNe-MTS group required fewer remedial training blocks than the MTS-BoNe group. The BoNe-MTS group required fewer emergent relations testing blocks than the BoNe-BoNe and MTS-BoNe groups. These findings indicate that within the different formats of teaching equivalence classes, training and testing formats can impact learning equivalence classes and responding during emergent relations tests although overall efficiency did not vary across experimental groups.

 
Using Auditory-Visual Successive Matching-to-Sample to Establish Listener Behavior and Cross-Modal Equivalence Classes
KARINA ZHELEZOGLO (California State University, Sacramento), Ryley Acrea (California State University, Sacramento), Tina Marie Charnett (California State University, Sacramento), Robbie Hanson (Endicott College), Caio F. Miguel (California State University, Sacramento)
Abstract: Lantaya, Miguel, Howland, LaFrance, and Page (2018) evaluated a visual-visual successive matching-to-sample (S-MTS) procedure as an alternative to standard matching-to-sample to establish three-member equivalence classes with college students. The present study extended Lantaya et al. by evaluating whether auditory-visual conditional relations (listener behavior), and and cross-modal equivalence classes could be established via S-MTS. Following training of baseline relations (AB/AC), where all A stimuli are auditory and all B and C stimuli are visual, eight college students were tested for the emergence of untrained relations (i.e., BA/CA and BC/CB). In addition, we tested for the emergence of tacts of all visual stimuli and measured the latency between the presentation of sample and selectin of comparisons. We used a non-concurrent multiple baseline design across participants. All eight participants demonstrated emergence of BA/CA symmetry and BC/CB transitivity relations. Five out of eight participants responded with perfect accuracy on tact tests and there was also no significant difference in latency to related relations across trained and tested relations. IOA scores averaged 98.6% and TI scores averaged 99.6 %. Results from this experiment suggest that S-MTS could be an alternative to traditional MTS to teach listener behavior and establish equivalence classes.
 
 
Symposium #187
CE Offered: BACB
Training Staff in Function-Based Interventions, Token Economies, and Applied Verbal Behavior
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Fairmont, Third Level, Crystal
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University)
CE Instructor: Sharon A. Reeve, Ph.D.
Abstract: As the field of applied behavior analysis continues to grow, it is necessary for behavior analysts to train more direct care providers. It is therefore important to identify training modalities that are effective and acceptable to staff trainees. Three papers on training staff in a variety of teaching procedures will be presented in this symposium. The first paper trained teachers to identify the correct function of behavior via analysis of descriptive data, to select the appropriate procedural variation of functional communication training (FCT) based on this function, and to implement FCT accurately in role play. The second study used a non-concurrent multiple-baseline design across participants to evaluate the effectiveness of manualized instruction to increase staff trainee’s accurate implementation of a token economy. The last study used a non-concurrent multiple-probe design across classroom cohorts to evaluate a performance and competency-based training model to teach teachers and teaching assistants to apply an applied verbal behavior approach at a private school serving individuals with autism spectrum disorder.
Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience: Students and Practitioners
Learning Objectives: Participants will define staff training Participants will describe manualized instruction Participants will describe a staff training procedure to identify functions of behavior
 
Training Special Education Teachers to Select and Implement Appropriate Function-Based Interventions for Problem Behavior
VICTORIA FLETCHER (University of Houston – Clear Lake ), Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Kally M Luck (University of Houston - Clear Lake), Sarah Williams (University of Houston – Clear Lake)
Abstract: Training teachers to select and implement appropriate function-based interventions in their classrooms may reduce their reliance on behavior specialists and other consultants to help manage their students’ problem behavior. Past research evaluated the outcomes of this type of training primarily through verbal report. We extended this research by training teachers to identify the correct function of behavior via analysis of descriptive data, to select the appropriate procedural variation of functional communication training (FCT) based on this function, and to implement FCT accurately in role play. Five special education teachers participated. Prior to training, the teachers did not correctly identify the function of problem behavior based on previously collected descriptive data, and they often reinforced problem behavior during role play with a simulated student. Following training, all of the participants identified the function of the behavior and implemented the correct procedural variation of FCT. This research highlights the importance of training teachers to identify function and implement interventions based on the function.
 
Evaluation of an Instructional Manual to Train Staff to Implement a Token Economy
JENNIFER GUTIERREZ (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University), Ruth DeBar (Caldwell University), Antonia R. Giannakakos (Manhattanville College)
Abstract: An instructional manual is a feasible way to train staff because it allows the staff trainee to refer to information previously read, highlight important information, and it is portable. Reinforcement in the form of a token economy is commonly used when teaching individuals with developmental disabilities. Therefore, it is important to find effective modalities to train staff on implementing token economies. Thus, this study evaluated an instructional manual to train inexperienced staff to implement a token economy with a confederate. A non-concurrent multiple-baseline design across participants was used to evaluate the effectiveness of an instructional manual to increase the staff trainee’s accurate implementation of a token economy. Following the use of the instructional manual, staff trainees accurate implementation of a token economy and data collection on confederate responding increased to mastery, the skills generalized from a confederate to a child with autism, and the skills maintained one month following training. The results of this study support and extend previous research that used written instructions to successfully train inexperienced staff. Interobserver agreement, treatment integrity and interobserver agreement on treatment integrity were collected on at least 33% of all trials across all phases of the study and were at 100%.
 
Establishing an Applied Verbal Behavior Approach in Schools Using Performance and Competency-Based Training
SARAH FRAMPTON (May Institute, Inc.), M. Alice Shillingsburg (May Institute), Brittany Ann Juban (May Institute), Meghan Silva (May Institute), Sarah Weddle (May Institute), Kayla Gordon (May Institute), Melinda Galbato (The May Institute)
Abstract: Over several decades, a modified approach to early intensive behavior intervention based on the core principles of behavior analysis and Skinner’s (1957) analysis of verbal behavior has been developed by clinicians and researchers. This approach, referred to here as applied verbal behavior (AVB), includes the core components of: a) analysis of language according to Skinner’s taxonomy of verbal behavior, b) emphasis on initial mand training, c) fast-paced, varied instruction, d) pairing with reinforcement, e) errorless instruction, and f) discontinuous data collection. We implemented a performance and competency-based training (DiGennaro Reed, & Henley, 2015) model to teach teachers and teaching assistants to apply an AVB approach at a private school serving individuals with ASD. The training package consisted of: a) didactic instruction, b) modeling, c) video examples, d) practice with feedback, and e) competency-based testing. Treatment was introduced in a non-concurrent multiple probe design across classroom cohorts; reliability data were collected during baseline and post-training sessions. Results showed that teachers and teacher’s assistants could be taught to apply AVB with integrity. Results also offer preliminary indications that an AVB approach may be efficacious for some students with ASD at increasing the frequency of mands and decreasing interfering behaviors.
 
 
Symposium #188
CE Offered: BACB
Using Organizational Behavior Management to Engage Applied Behavior Analysis Clinical and Information Technology Staff to Meet Business Objectives
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom A
Area: OBM/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Jennifer Lenderman (Positive Behavior Supports Corporation)
CE Instructor: Nicole J. Postma, M.S.
Abstract:

Three applications of Organizational Behavior Management (OBM) are presented to demonstrate measurable improvements in business results. First, how graphic dashboards combined with OBM principles can help staff focus on and meet short term objectives. Second, how informational technology staff can be motivated using OBM strategies in project management. Lastly, it will be discussed how staff can be empowered to participate in OBM activities through special projects and training.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): graphic feedback, staff engagement, technology
Target Audience:

ABA Business Leaders and Practitioners

Learning Objectives: Participants will identify how technology can be used to create goals to enhance performance Participants will evaluate pros and cons of a technology platform to display data in business dashboards Participants will identify strategies to measure information technology staff performance
 

Combining Key Performance Indicators and Custom Dashboards to Provide Graphic Feedback and Self-Monitoring to Meet Business Objectives

MICHAEL NOLAN (Positive Behavior Supports Corp.)
Abstract:

In order to drive growth and maintain quality, a technology platform was chosen that would allow for data based decision making across multiple states. Microsoft Sharepoint was chosen in this example to combine performance data and lead performance initiatives to motivate staff. Custom dashboards provided graphic feedback that is role specific which was a tool for goal setting and self-monitoring. With these tools, monthly incentives were established for achieve critical business targets. To date, all goals have been met and the technology continues to evolve and drive performance.

 

Using Organizational Behavior Management Techniques to Improve Information Technology Staff Performance

NINA MALAGIC (Positive Behavior Supports Corp.)
Abstract:

In order to develop tools that are needed to implement an online Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) platform based on Organizational Behavior Management principles, Information Technology Staff need to produce outcomes that are meaningful for ABA practitioners. This Panel topic will discuss how behavior analysts can work with Information Technology staff to shape greater productivity, meet deadlines, and work cohesively.

 

Empowering Applied Behavior Analysis Staff to Engage in Organizational Behavior Management Practices

NICOLE J. POSTMA (Positive Behavior Supports Corp.)
Abstract:

OBM can be used to empower staff to step beyond their clinical skills. Using special projects, Behavior Analysts can participate in business applications to grow professionally. Providing staff with this professional development can not only enhance their managerial skills but effect the bottom line for an ABA company.

 
 
Panel #189
CE Offered: BACB
Shaping Staff Performance With Emerging Technologies
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Toronto
Area: OBM/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Ana Elisa Escalante, M.Ed.
Chair: Ana Elisa Escalante (BehaviorMe)
ELIZABETH GARRISON (Shaping Development, LLC)
ANDRES CHAVEZ (BehaviorMe)
ANA ESCALANTE (BehaviorMe)
Abstract:

With the development of many technological advances, behavior analysts have more tools to use when constructing training programs to facilitate skill acquisition in learners. In 1958, B.F. Skinner’s invention of "The Teaching Machine" set the course for the eventual development of Programmed Instruction. Skinner envisioned a world where behavior could be shaped via immediate feedback systems. Now, with access to virtual reality training and computer-based instruction platforms, behavior analysts have the ability to shape new response repertoires through the use of these immediate feedback delivery systems. Within these systems, behavior analysts can also design instructional programs that are systematic in shaping learner repertoires. In service delivery, when behavior analysts are training incoming staff members, there are different levels of mastery with content as incoming staff members enter a training program. By implementing virtual reality and CBI platforms to assist with the training and development of staff, behavior analysts can individualize training to those levels. Ultimately, the world is rapidly changing in the development of technology. This panel will discuss how this technology can develop behavior repertoires, specifically when developing skills in staff training and development.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Behavior Analysts who engage in staff training and development.

Learning Objectives: Participants will learn how to utilize new methods when onboarding staff for initial staff trainings. Participants will learn how to utilize technology in staff training Participants will learn new methods in immediate feedback delivery in staff training.
 
 
Invited Panel #190
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP
Nonviolent Action for Social and Environmental Justice: Contemporary Options
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Domain: Theory
Chair: Mark A. Mattaini (Jane Addams College of Social Work-University of Illinois at Chicago)
CE Instructor: Kathryn Roose, M.A.
Panelists: JAMILA RAQIB (Albert Einstein Institution; Center for International Studies at Massachusetts Institute of Technology), RICHARD RAKOS (Cleveland State University), KATHRYN ROOSE (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract:

This panel offers an opportunity for convention attendees to interact with Jamila Raqib, the 2019 ABAI Presidential Scholar who will make opening comments, and behavior analysts with long interests in nonviolent social action. In some cases traditional approaches to nonviolent struggle have become less successful than previously; for this reason, emphases in this panel will be on exploring nonviolent scientific 21st century alternatives. A particular focus will be on contemporary approaches to understanding and shaping what Gandhi discussed as the “Constructive Programme”—which overlaps substantially with the seminal behavior analyst Israel Goldiamond’s “constructional” approach. The panel will include an audience-driven question and answer period, with time allotted for interactions amongst the panelists and the audience.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) define and discuss at least three alternative strategic options for nonviolently and effectively supporting social and environmental justice in the 21st century; (2) identify several commonalities between Israel Goldiamond’s “constructional” approach, and Gandhi’s “Constructive Programme;” (3) list at least three specific steps that they could take to prepare for, and participate effectively in, collective action for social and environmental justice. 
JAMILA RAQIB (Albert Einstein Institution; Center for International Studies at Massachusetts Institute of Technology)
Jamila Raqib, an Afghan native, was a nominee for the 2017 Nobel Peace Prize, and is Executive Director of the Albert Einstein Institution in Boston, which promotes the study and strategic use of nonviolent action worldwide. From 2002 until his recent passing, Ms. Raqib worked directly with political scientist Gene Sharp, the world’s foremost scholar on strategic nonviolent action. In 2009, she and Sharp jointly developed a curriculum called Self-Liberation: A Guide to Strategic Planning for Action to End a Dictatorship or Other Oppression drawing extensively on that literature, to provide in-depth guidance for groups planning or engaged in nonviolent struggle for democracy and human rights. She is also a Director’s Fellow at the MIT Media Lab, exploring how innovations in technology and education can make the collection, sharing, and application of knowledge of nonviolent action more effective, timely, and secure. In addition, she is currently doing research on nonviolent social change grounded in Gandhi’s “constructive programme,” which is similar on multiple dimensions to constructional work as outlined in Israel Goldiamond’s work. Ms. Raqib’s TED talk on nonviolent resistance has been translated into 29 languages and has more than 1 million views; many of her presentations are also widely shared on YouTube, making her work accessible especially to young people. She is among a handful of people in the world who has studied the extensive literature on nonviolence social change in real depth and has been working directly with the groups who have been applying that knowledge in conflicts around the world. Raqib regularly gives presentations and conducts educational workshops for activists and organizers, human rights organizations, academics, and government bodies concerned with diverse objectives including challenging dictatorship, combatting corruption, and attaining political rights, economic justice, environmental protection, and women’s empowerment. She also serves as commentator on nonviolent action for multiple media outlets and oversees the dissemination of extensive resources on the topic through the Einstein Institution. She therefore has much to contribute to behavior scientists and practitioners interested in expanding their involvement and participation in social change, human rights, and sustainability efforts, particularly from a constructional perspective.
RICHARD RAKOS (Cleveland State University)

Dr. Rakos received his Ph.D. in clinical psychology from Kent State University and now is Emeritus Professor of Psychology at Cleveland State University. He retired in 2016 after 37.5 years at CSU, most recently as associate dean for faculty and program development in the College of Sciences and Health Professions. Dr. Rakos is widely published in the areas of assertiveness training, self-management, law and psychology, and cultural analysis.  He served as Editor of Behavior and Social Issues (and its predecessor journals Behaviorists for Social Action Journal and Behavior Analysis and Social Action) from 1981-1993 and as associate editor of BSI from 1993 to the present. He also served on the editorial board of Law and Human Behavior from 2000-2016 and is a fellow of the American Psychological Association. Since retiring from CSU, Dr. Rakos has maintained his behavior analytic scholarly activities while expanding his private clinical practice significantly, focusing on the behavioral treatment of persons experiencing difficulties with anxiety, stress, depression, self-control, obsessions and compulsions, and social/interpersonal relationships.

KATHRYN ROOSE (University of Nevada, Reno)
Kathryn Roose, M.A., BCBA, LBA(NV), CADC is administrative faculty in the College of Education and a doctoral student in behavior analysis at the University of Nevada, Reno. She has experience as a drug and alcohol counselor, and as a practicing clinician with children and adults with and without disabilities and their families, adults with neurocognitive disorders and their families, and organizations. She currently manages data and evaluation for a federally funded grant implementing Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports in Nevada, and works as a consultant for the State Juvenile Justice System updating state policy and revising systems, practices, and data collection. Her current research projects include an experimental analysis of teamwork and cooperation in organizational settings, and conceptual analyses of social issues including the fake news phenomenon, employee wellbeing, environmental sustainability, and a behavioral science perspective of nonviolent action. Ms. Roose is the Student Representative to the ABAI Executive Council and is active in the ABAI SIGs OBM Network and Behaviorists for Social Responsibility.
 
 
Symposium #191
CE Offered: BACB/NASP
Extending Behavior Analysis Into the Criminal Realm: Mass Shootings, Domestic Violence, and Criminal Profiling
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 1/2
Area: PCH/CSS; Domain: Theory
Chair: James Nicholson Meindl (The University of Memphis)
CE Instructor: James Nicholson Meindl, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Crime and criminal behavior is a pervasive problem apparent across nearly all societies. These criminal behaviors exist on a broad continuum ranging from relatively benign behaviors such as jaywalking to more extreme and damaging behaviors such as murder. Just as there is a range of criminal behavior, there also exist a variety of approaches to explaining and understanding the causes of criminal behavior. This symposium will extend behavior analysis into the realm of criminal behavior by focusing on two extreme criminal behaviors as well as explaining common approaches to understanding these behaviors. In the first talk, Meindl and Ivy discuss mass killings and describe how the behavior may be partially environmentally controlled through media reporting. In the second talk, Templin will analyze domestic violence and intervention through the lens of behavior analysis. In the final talk, Niazi and Dracobly will illustrate how the current approaches to criminal profiling differ from explanations offered through behavior analysis.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): criminal behavior, criminal profiling, domestic violence, mass shooting
Target Audience:

Board Certified Behavior Analysts, graduate level students, faculty

Learning Objectives: By the end of this symposium attendees should be able to 1. Explain generalized imitation and identify specific ways media reporting may influence mass shootings 2. Identify antecedents and consequences that might explain domestic violence and help develop interventions 3. List at least two ways current criminal profiling differs from behavior analysis explanations and identify ways this poses a problem for treatment development.
 
The Role of Media in Evoking Mass Killings
JAMES NICHOLSON MEINDL (The University of Memphis), Jonathan W. Ivy (The Pennsylvania State University - Harrisburg)
Abstract: A mass killing is a complex behavior that is the product of a range of variables. Recent research suggests one such variable, by showing that when a mass killing occurs there is a heightened chance of another occurring in the near future. This increase in probability has been referred to as contagion and one possible mechanism for contagion may be generalized imitation. Generalized imitation requires the presence of some model to prompt imitation, and this talk suggests media reporting methods as a prominent model inspiring future mass killings. This presentation analyzes mass killings as the culmination of a sequence of thoughts and actions that are influenced by environmental events including media reports of mass killings. Media reporting guidelines are then evaluated and research related to the prevention of suicide and other imitational behaviors to identify reactive and proactive strategies that could minimize the likelihood of one mass killing inducing another.
 

Domestic Violence From the Viewpoint of Behavior Analysis: An Examination of Violence in the Home

TIMOTHY TEMPLIN (HABA)
Abstract:

To expand the field of behavior analysis, and out of concern for the public good, we seek out significant social and legal issues. In a 1995 article by David L. Myers, an age-old phenomenon is compared to other types of problem behavior, including potential functions and environmental contingencies. Myers (1995) reviewed how battering can be described within three term contingencies (antecedent, behavior and consequences). Ways that escape, punishment and positive reinforcement play a role. The common interventions to reduce domestic violence and how these can be more effective using behavior analysis. How direct observation can be a methodological barrier for behavior analysts, and some innovative ways it has been overcome. How the issue of domestic violence is an excellent candidate for study within the field of behavior analysis. A 2005 article by Bell and Naugle on why a victim of domestic violence would stay or leave their situation provides information on victim behavior. A reading from the 2014 essay provides details on life in a domestic violence shelter. The concepts of reinforcement, punishment, extinction, behavioral economics and delay discounting are seen in the light of this serious social problem.

 

Getting Away With Murder: A Comparison of Approaches to Understanding Criminal Behavior

Meena Niazi (Eastern Connecticut State University), JOSEPH D. DRACOBLY (University of North Texas)
Abstract:

Using method analysis and a case study, we compare the criminal profiling approach and the science of behavior in understanding criminal behavior. Criminal profilers emphasize classification (e.g., Crime Classification Manual) via internal psychological constructs (Devery, 2010). Behavior analysts emphasize an organism’s genetic endowment, current environment, history of reinforcement and punishment, and culture (e.g., Skinner, 1969). First, we will compare the two approaches, focusing on history, unique explanatory systems, and peer-reviewed support. Second, we elucidate these difference with a case study of murder. For instance, in a murder with sexual assault, a profiler may hypothesize the murder was based on a desire for power and lust. Therefore, there may be something inherently wrong with the offender’s personality because they inflict physical pain for sexual pleasure. A behavior analyst would look for specific, observable environmental and physiological variables. The murder may have been, in part, schedule induced, as either a side-effect of extinction (e.g., Lerman & Iwata, 1996 ) or (a response to some form of aversive stimulation (e.g., Azrin, Hutchinson, & McLaughlin, 1965). For example, deprivation of a tangible item (e.g., money) or certain physiological sensations (e.g., physical pleasure from sex) may have contributed.

 
 
Panel #193
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Exploring Foundational and Advanced Repertoires to Develop in Your Supervisees: What Makes a Great Behavior Analyst?
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Fairmont, B2, Imperial Ballroom
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Karen Chung, M.A.
Chair: Karen Chung (Special Learning, Inc. )
NOOR YOUNUS SYED (Lehigh University Autism Services; Global Autism Project)
BOBBY NEWMAN (Proud Moments)
JACOB SADAVOY (Global Autism Project)
Abstract:

As the number of programs offering coursework in behavior analysis continues to grow, a troubling consequence of this may be seen in the diminishing quality of supervision, as inexperienced BCBAs provide supervision to BCBA candidates. Successful behavior analysts possess the right combination clinical and intangible “soft skills” - commitment to ethics, ability to collaborate, think critically, make appropriate “in the moment” decisions, be effective in different cultural and socio-economic situations, and ability to effectively communicate with all key stakeholders, across settings. As the common supervision paradigm in the field of behavior analysis focuses on “teaching to the test,” the field may have created thousands of “by the book” BCBAs good at following rules but lacking in ability to make decisions that are contextually appropriate. In short, ability to think critically. This, combined with inability to influence parties in the service delivery process, is surely diminishing the effectiveness of the science of behavior analysis. This panel will explore basic, intermediate and advanced critical thinking skills that behavior analysts must possess to be effective service providers and supervisors. We will discuss the importance mastering to fluency critical skills, such as verbal mediation, to help increase problem solving and abstract reasoning skills.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

BCBA, BCaBA, BCBA-D, RBT

Learning Objectives: (1) Participants will be able to distinguish between 1st level, intermediate and advanced critical thinking skills. (2) Participants will learn about common attributes successful supervisors possess. (3) Participants will understand the importance of developing ethics, collaboration, interpersonal and critical thinking skills in supervision programs.
 
 
Symposium #197
CE Offered: BACB
Diversity submission Focusing on Cultural and Linguistic Diversity in Behavior Analysis
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom A
Area: DDA/PCH; Domain: Translational
Chair: Leslie Neely (The University of Texas at San Antonio)
Discussant: Jeannie M. Aguilar (Blue Sprig Pediatrics)
CE Instructor: Leslie Neely, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Behavior analysts are increasingly called to serve culturally and linguistically diverse populations. However, it is unclear the extent to which race, gender, and linguistic diversity are addressed in ABA practice (Talk 1). In addition, it is unclear the extent to which language of instruction affects skill acquisition for individuals from dual language households (Talk 2). After focusing on the role of diversity and language in practice, we will present the results of two studies. The first study evaluates the effect of interventionist’s language on speech generating device language output and challenging behavior for a child with Down syndrome. The second study presents the results of a culturally adapted behavioral consultation framework for the Latino population. Finally, as a leader in this area of Behavior Analysis, Dr. Jeannie Aguilar, will discuss the studies, findings, and implications for research and practice.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): bilingual, culture, developmental disabilities, diversity
Target Audience:

Researchers in Applied Research (graduate students, doctoral students, post-doctoral and professors) and practioners working with culturally and linguistically diverse populations.

 
Diversity submission 

Racial, Gender, and Linguistic Diversity in Applied Behavior Analysis: An Analysis and Implications for Training and Practice

(Applied Research)
Christopher A. Tullis (Georgia State University), AMARIE CARNETT (University of Texas at San Antonio), Sarah Grace Hansen (Georgia State University), Karen A. Toussaint (University of North Texas)
Abstract:

Diversity may be defined along a number of dimensions including, but not limited to the presence of a variety of genders, races, ethnicities, languages, and socio-economic statuses (Silverman, 2010). As a field, ABA has made great strides in some areas of diversity. This study investigates the results of survey polling individuals in the field of ABA related to racial and gender identity, linguistic diversity (e.g., primary language), and presence of diversity related coursework in training programs either in progress or completed. Results related to formal training on diversity training within programs (e.g., BACB Verified Course Sequences), recruitment of traditionally underrepresented populations, and continuing education will be discussed, as well as recommendations to address areas of need.

 
Diversity submission 

Impact of Language on Skill Acquisition

(Applied Research)
JORDAN WIMBERLEY (University of Texas at San Antonio), Leslie Neely (The University of Texas at San Antonio)
Abstract:

Recent research has suggested language of instruction may have an effect of the behavior of children with autism spectrum disorder during instructional sessions. This study aims to add to the literature base by evaluating effects of instructional language on skill acquisition during instructional settings. There were two participants for this study. Both of the children were diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Both of the participants came from a Spanish speaking family but received instruction primarily in English. Skill acquisition was evaluated using novel responses in both English and Spanish with the schedule of reinforcement held constant. Results indicate that language of instruction did not have an impact for the participating students. Potential moderating factors will be discussed

 
Diversity submission 

A Systematic Examination of the Influences of Interventionist Language on Mands Using a Speech Generating Device

(Applied Research)
MEGAN G. KUNZE (University of Oregon), Christine Drew (University of Oregon), Wendy A. Machalicek (University of Oregon), Rebecca Crowe (University of Oregon)
Abstract:

Individuals with disabilities whose family members speak a language other than English and communicate using speech generating devices (SGDs) require assessment of instructional language and programmed language output of the SGD. In this study, an alternating treatment design was used to examine the effect of interventionist language as a putative motivating operation (English or Spanish) on the (a) choice of SGD language output, (b) frequency of mands, and (c) frequency of challenging behavior for a 10-year old non-verbal child with Down syndrome. Results indicated a slight increase in manding when the interventionist spoke Spanish compared to the English or control conditions. The participant also manded most frequently in Spanish on the SGD, suggesting a preference for Spanish output. These results indicate a potential preference for instructional language and expressive language using an SGD. Challenging behavior was observed more frequently in the English and control conditions. The implications of this research were discussed in the context of potential motivating operations for communication. The ethical practices and standards of Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBAs) and educators were also addressed.

 
Diversity submission A Behavior Analytic Case Example of Culturally Responsive Consultation in Schools
(Applied Research)
ALYSSA LANSFORD (University of Texas at San Antonio), Leslie Neely (The University of Texas at San Antonio)
Abstract: Behavior analysts are increasingly called to serve culturally and linguistically diverse populations. The culture of a population can provide context in which to identify behaviors likely to be reinforced by the client’s social environment, client stimuli established as reinforcers through a learned history, and client behavioral repertories shaped by the client’s social environment. One of the largest and fastest growing minority groups in the United States is the Latino/Latina population. This paper offers a case example of an incorporating cultural adaptations of behavioral supports within the context of behavioral consultation for the Latinx population. Cultural adaptation of behavioral consultation can lead to improved outcomes for both educators and students. Five educators were served via behavioral consultation and provided training using behavioral skills training to implement culturally responsive classwide behavior management procedures. All five educators improved their treatment fidelity of the culturally responsive behavior management practices. Implications for practitioners and future research are discussed.
 
 
Symposium #198
CE Offered: BACB
Using Pre-Treatment Screening and Assessments to Improve the Safety and Care of Children
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–9:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 1-3
Area: DEV/AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: Charlene Agnew (Student)
Discussant: Kevin C. Luczynski (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute)
CE Instructor: Charlene Agnew, Ph.D.
Abstract: Pre-Treatment screening and assessments are typically conducted to refine and individualize the treatment of problem behavior. Although conducting assessments has been known to improve treatment outcomes, extended periods of evaluation may place the child in a dangerous context and delay introduction of any intervention. In Study 1, a pre-treatment screening analysis determined that the toe walking of three participants was automatically maintained. This informed a treatment of auditory feedback using squeaker shoes with and without the paired delivery of edible items that improved the heel-to-toe gait of the participants. Study 2 reanalyzed functional analyses of problem behavior with an added response criterion (i.e., session terminated after 5 instances) that reduced session durations. The authors found that limited exposure to problem behavior could improve analytic efficiency without negatively impacting interpretations of control. Study 3 attempted to improve the safety of the functional analysis by comparing the size of the functional class (i.e., with or without the inclusion of less severe topographies of problem behavior). Results suggest that severe forms of problem behavior can be avoided during a functional analysis by including less dangerous topographies. Study 4 screened for risk factors to problem behavior to develop preventative strategies for emerging problem behavior. Preschool children were exposed to typical evocative settings (e.g., removal of attention, presence of work) in a trial-based format and treatments were designed before more severe topographies of problem behavior emerged. These studies support the need to ensure that our pre-treatment screening and assessments are safe and efficient.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Functional assessment, Pre-treatment screening, problem behavior, safety
Target Audience: BCBAs, BCBA-Ds, BCaBAs, licensed psychologists, and other behavior analytic providers who need to learn about assessing and treating problem behavior.
 
The Use of Auditory Feedback and Conditioned Reinforcement to Decrease Toe Walking Among Children with Autism
(Applied Research)
HALLIE MARIE ERTEL (Florida Institute of Technology), David A. Wilder (Florida Institute of Technology), Ansley Catherine Hodges (Florida Institute of Technology), Rachel Thomas (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: We replicated and extended previous research on the use of auditory feedback and conditioned reinforcement to decrease toe walking exhibited by three children with autism. After pre-treatment screening analyses suggested that toe walking was maintained by automatic reinforcement, we attached squeakers to the heels of each participants’ shoes. The squeakers provided auditory feedback when participants walked appropriately (i.e., with a heel-to-toe gait). For one participant, the auditory feedback itself produced increases in appropriate walking. For two other participants, edible items paired with the auditory feedback were necessary to increase appropriate walking and decrease toe walking. We then thinned the schedule of edible delivery. Finally, for two participants, we conducted intervention probes in a different setting and had a different experimenter or a caregiver conduct additional probes; intervention effects maintained. This study extends previous research by verifying that toe walking was sensitive to automatic reinforcement, by demonstrating that the squeakers themselves (without other intervention components) can be effective, and by demonstrating that the auditory feedback produced by the squeakers (before pairing with preferred items) can be effective for some children.
 
Evaluation of Functional Analyses Retrospectively Truncated Based on Frequency of Problem Behavior
(Applied Research)
CATHERINE LARK (Marcus Autism Center), Mindy Christine Scheithauer (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Functional analyses (FA) are the gold standard for assessing problem behavior and determining optimal treatments. Thus, research determining efficient methods for conducting FAs is important, as less time in assessment reduces the frequency of problem behavior occurring prior to treatment and allows for shorter admissions. The current presentation covers the results of a retrospective chart review that assessed the utility of abbreviating FA sessions based on frequency of problem behavior. The FA data from ten clients at a day treatment clinic for the assessment and treatment of severe problem behavior were re-analyzed using a cutoff criterion of five instances of targeted problem behavior. That is, full session FA results were compared to results when the session was “stopped” after 5 instances of problem behavior and the session was graphed based on data up until this point. There was correspondence between the function identified using full session data versus the truncated data for nine out of ten participants. Across participants, there was an average of 17% time saved and a 59% reduction in problem behavior in assessment. Implications and limitations of these results will be discussed in relation to the assessment and treatment of severe problem behavior and future research directions.
 

Evaluating the Severity of Problem Behavior During Functional Analysis

(Applied Research)
JOSHUA JESSEL (Queens College), Debra Rosenthal (Queens College)
Abstract:

Functional analysis involves presenting putative reinforcers contingent on problem behavior to understanding the influence of environmental events and inform subsequent function-based treatment. Safety during a functional analysis of problem behavior is a common concern among clinicians and caregivers because a rich schedule of continuous reinforcement is programmed for the occurrence of problem behavior in the test condition. We conducted this study to determine if safety during a functional analysis could be improved by reinforcing a larger functional class of responses with less severe topographies. Participants were children with autism who exhibited severe forms of problem behavior such as self-injurious behavior, aggression, and property destruction. We conducted two functional analyses for each participant: one targeting multiple severe topographies of problem behavior and another targeting a collection of the severe topographies and less severe topographies reported to co-occur. The results suggest that opening the functional class to include less severe topographies can improve the safety of the functional analysis.

 
Functional Analysis of Emerging Problem Behavior and Functional Skills in At-Risk Preschoolers
(Applied Research)
RIMA HAMAWE (California State University, Northridge), Emily Mary Tierman (California State University, Northridge), Sandy Jin (California State University, Northridge), Tara A. Fahmie (California State University, Northridge)
Abstract: Identifying emerging problem behavior is an important first step in preventing severe problem behavior and promoting the long-term wellbeing of children. The purpose of this study was to screen for behavioral risk factors in preschool students using functional analysis methodology. Modified trial-based functional analyses were conducted in a small-group play session by embedding specific establishing operations (removal of teacher attention, presence of work, restricted access to toys) that typically precede problem behavior in preschool classrooms. Data were collected on the occurrence of varying levels of problem behavior and functional skills. Review of video-taped sessions were used to refine behavioral measures. Results showed that, across students, problem behavior occurred most often during EOs for escape and attention, and minor to moderate problem behavior occurred more often than severe problem behavior. Furthermore, students engaged in a multitude of appropriate skills in the presence of EOs, and those skills could be classified along a continuum of complexity. Individual child profiles from the functional analysis were used to prescribe tailored intervention based on both form and function of behavior. Our discussion of this study will highlight implications of our preliminary results as well as procedural refinements that were used to address initial limitations.
 
 
Symposium #199
CE Offered: BACB/NASP
Changing Educators' Practices in Functional Behavior Assessment in Public School Settings
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–9:50 AM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Brenda J. Bassingthwaite (Center for Disabilities and Development; Iowa's University Center for Excellence in Developmental Disabilities)
Discussant: Jennifer J. McComas (University of Minnesota)
CE Instructor: Jennifer J. McComas, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Educators in public school settings have been required to conduct functional behavior assessments (FBAs) when a student’s behavior interferes with his or her learning since the Individuals with Disabilities Act was reauthorized in 1997. Sadly, research on FBAs in public school settings continues to highlight the lack of trained personnel, time, and resources necessary to conduct high-quality FBAs. As experts in behavioral analysis, one of our roles is sometimes to increase the knowledge of educators in FBAs and its application to intervention. It is through this role that we can create systems-level change. This symposium is comprised of behavior analysts who are change agents in public school settings. The first two presenters will discuss their successes in using behavioral skills training to teach educators in FBA and intervention to improve outcomes for students. The third presenter discusses the long-term impact that training school-based behavior teams can have when the teams are supported to train other colleagues. The final presenter gives guidance to measuring educator’s knowledge of FBA so that we have the most accurate understanding of their skills. Audience participants will learn how they also can successfully increase educators’ knowledge and practice in FBA in public school settings.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Behavior Assessment, Educator Training, Public Schools
Target Audience:

The target audience is for masters or doctoral-level BCBAs and School Psychologists working in the school setting either directly or through consultation.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of this symposium, participants will be able to (1) describe how behavioral skills training can be used to teach skills in FBA (2) discuss factors that support changing FBA practice in school settings (3) Identify research-based methods for evaluating skill development of trainees
 
Training Educators to Conduct Functional Analysis and Functional Communication Training in Schools via Telehealth
PATRICK ROMANI (University of Colorado, Anschutz Medical Campus), Andrea Boorse (Children's Hospital Colorado), Brooke Carson (Colorado Department of Education), Kelsey Young (Colorado Department of Education)
Abstract: We present data from three educators who participated in a telehealth training program to learn functional analysis (FA) and functional communication training (FCT) procedures. Three students diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) who engaged in problem behavior in the classroom environment also participated. These students were recruited to evaluate generalization of skills educators acquired during training. Interobserver agreement was collected on an average of 41% of sessions and average 96%. Within a multiple baseline across educators design, we first collected baseline data on integrity of FA and FCT implementation with a protocol only. After showing a skill deficit for all three educators, behavioral skills training (BST) was implemented via telehealth to teach FA/FCT procedures. Integrity with implementing both FA and FCT procedures increased following BST implemented via telehealth. Afterwards, these procedures were implemented with the student diagnosed with ASD. Educators successfully generalized FA and FCT procedures when working with the student. Functions of problem behavior were identified for all three students. Their problem behavior was reduced by an average of 94% during FCT. These data will be discussed in terms of ways to expand access to behavior-analytic assessment and treatment into school settings.
 
Intensive Partnership for Behavior Intervention: Training Educators to Plan, Implement, and Evaluate Behavior Change Strategies
JOHN E. STAUBITZ (Vanderbilt University Medical Center, TRIAD), Michelle Mahoney Hopton (Vanderbilt University - Nashville, TN), Aislynn Kiser (Vanderbilt University Medical Center - TRIAD), Lauren A. Weaver (Vanderbilt University Medical Center TRIAD), William Martin (Vanderbilt University Medical Center - TRIAD), Becky Shafer (Vanderbilt University Medical Center - TRIAD), Kathleen Simcoe (Vanderbilt University Medical Center - TRIAD), Chelsea McQueen (Vanderbilt University Medical Center -TRIAD)
Abstract: Educators who serve students with disabilities report needing additional specialized training in order to intervene with those students who present with challenging behavior requiring tertiary behavioral supports. Through a multi-year contract with the Tennessee Department of Education, we train 12 school-based teams per year (totaling approximately 50 educators annually) through our Intensive Partnership for Behavior Intervention (IPBI) program. Adhering to a Behavior Skills Training (BST) model, our BCBAs seek to improve each school-based team’s capacity to assess, decision-make, design, and deliver tertiary-level behavioral supports and interventions while serving as a consultant to the team as they address the needs of 1 to 3 targeted students per school. Over the course of 5 to 9 months, BCBA consultants deliver training through traditional workshop and online learning platforms, as well as through on-campus and remote assessment, coaching and consultation sessions. Participants in the program demonstrated improvements in their knowledge as measured by knowledge quiz, and reported increased implementation and confidence related to the strategies trained, while rating the program as highly socially valid on surveys completed during and after the program. Participant-collected data indicated significant reductions in the occurrence of behaviors of concern over the course of the program.
 

Iowa's Apprenticeships in Functional Behavior Assessment: Where Are We Now?

TORY J. CHRISTENSEN (Center for Disabilities and Development; Iowa's University Center for Excellence in Developmental Disabilities), Brenda J. Bassingthwaite (Center for Disabilities and Development; Iowa's University Center for Excellence in Developmental Disabilities)
Abstract:

The Center for Disabilities and Development (CDD) has collaborated with the Iowa Department of Education (DE) since 2009 to support an initiative to improve the quality of functional behavior assessments (FBA) in public schools. Behavior analysts from the CDD provided training in FBA to challenging behavior teams across Iowa. Although team members came from a variety of backgrounds, all were tasked with delivering behavior support in public schools. Targeted skills during training included data collection, graphing, data analysis, descriptive assessment (Lalli et al., 1993; Riffel, 2018), preference assessment (Fisher et al. 1992), concurrent operants assessment (Harding et al., 1999), and antecedent analysis (Carr and Durand, 1995). An increase in trainees’ independent use of the assessments increased with training. The DE has also worked with CDD to insure sustainability of behavior teams to train other practitioners in behavior assessment skills. Thus far, all teams that have graduated from this project have begun training their colleagues in FBA. Additionally, CDD leads an Advanced Behavior Certification team, comprised of graduates from the training project, to help ensure the integrity of training remains high. This presentation will provide outcome data from this training initiative and discuss sustainability of this effort in the state.

 

A Comparative Analysis of Assessment Tools Used to Measure Teacher Knowledge and Skills in Functional Behavior Assessment

ANURADHA DUTT (Nanyang Technological University), Shengyu Leong (National Institute of Education - Nanyang Technological University), Marilyn Tan (National Institute of Education - Nanyang Technoloical University), Rahul Nair (University of Adelaide)
Abstract:

Given the prevalence of challenging behavior among students with developmental disabilities in schools, there is a high need for training in building the capacity of teachers in functional behavior assessment (FBA) and function-based behavioral interventions. A range of assessment approaches have been adopted to measure teacher competencies in FBA and function-based behavioral interventions. These assessment approaches include various perception-based surveys, knowledge-based assessment measures, and direct observation of teacher skills. This study conducted a comparative analysis of a perception-based survey and knowledge-based assessment tool across 292 special educators that work extensively for children with developmental disabilities who engage in challenging behaviors. Results indicated that knowledge-based assessment tools appeared to be a more stable measure of teachers’ competencies in FBA and function-based behavioral interventions than perception-based measures. These findings shed light on the use of perception-based surveys and knowledge-based assessments in measuring teachers’ abilities in FBA and function-based behavior interventions to inform planning of relevant teacher training programs in the area of behavior management.

 
 
Symposium #201
CE Offered: BACB/NASP
Advances in Teaching Conversation Skills
Sunday, May 26, 2019
8:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD South
Area: VBC/AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: Stephanie A. Hood (California State University, Northridge)
Discussant: Corey S. Stocco (University of the Pacific)
CE Instructor: Stephanie A. Hood, Ph.D.
Abstract: Individuals with an autism spectrum disorder often have difficulty developing friendships and intimate relationships (Gantman, Kapp, Orenski, & Laugeson, 2012) as well as securing jobs (Kelly, Wildman, & Berler, 1980) and thus are often underemployed (Shattuck et al., 2012). This may be due, in part, to skill deficits or behavior excesses related to communication. This symposium highlights several innovative approaches to teach advanced communication skills with children, adolescents, and young adults with and without autism spectrum disorder. First, Stephanie Monroy will present a study on teaching individuals to tact and initiate conversation based on a common interest. Second, Marisa Goodwin will present a study on a computer-based training with covert audio coaching to teach conversation skills. Third, Dr. Rose Mason will also present a study on the use of covert audio coaching and prompting to increase conversation skills. Last, Dr. Amanda Karsten will present a study on vignette-based training on discriminated social initiations. The results of these investigations demonstrate the efficacy of these teaching procedures to increase conversation skills. In addition, data will be presented on generalization across novel conversation partners, maintenance, and social acceptability. The symposium will conclude with a discussion from Dr. Corey Stocco.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): adults ASD, conversation skills, social skills, verbal behavior
Target Audience: Clinicians working with children, adolescents, and young adults with conversation skill deficits.
Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will identify examples of multiply-controlled social skills that may help people with ASD facilitate mutually reinforcing interactions with peers and faculty on a college campus. 2. Attendees will describe practical benefits of vignette-based training and follow-up under more naturalistic conditions for supporting the acquisition and transfer of social skills among college- or college-bound students with ASD. 3. Attendees will describe practical benefits of behavioral skills training to teach individuals to identify common interests. 4. Attendees will describe efficacy and generalized effects of covert-audio-coaching to teach conversation skills.
 
Teaching Individuals to Identify Common Topics of Interest
(Applied Research)
STEPHANIE MONROY (California State University, Northridge), Stephanie A. Hood (California State University, Northridge), Francesca Randle (Trumpet Behavioral Health), Jesey Gopez (California State University, Northridge)
Abstract: Individuals with social and conversation skills deficits often have deficits discriminating vocal and nonvocal cues of interest and uninterest from their conversation partner(s). In the present study, we taught individuals to converse about preferred and less preferred topics of conversation, discriminate when the conversation partner is no longer interested in the topic of discussion, to discriminate common interests, and to end the conversation using behavioral skills training. Stimulus generalization was assessed through conversations with novel conversation partners, similar aged peers in a one to one format, and additional novel conversation partners in a group format. We assessed the social acceptability rating from the participants and the conversation partners. We observed robust increases in following the conversation, changing the topic of conversation, ending the conversation, and tacting common interests with the trainer. In addition, we have observed high levels of stimulus generalization across all skills with novel conversation partners. However, we have observed over generalization of tacts of common interests with the trainer to tacts of common interests with the novel conversation partners, thus, we had to teach participants how to discriminate common interests with multiple conversation partners.
 

Acquisition, Generalization, and Maintenance of Conversation Skills in Adults With Autism Participating in a Group-Based Summer Training Program

(Applied Research)
MARISA CELESTE GOODWIN (University of Houston- Clear Lake), Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Karlie Hinkle (University of Houston- Clear Lake), Justin Hunt (University of Houston- Clear Lake), Alexis Marcouex (University of Houston - Clear Lake), Victoria Fletcher (University of Houston- Clear Lake)
Abstract:

Five adults diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) participated in a 7-week summer training program that targeted conversation skills using computer-based training (CBT) and role-play with peers. Computer-based training provided the definition, rationale, and video demonstrations of one or two individualized targets for each participant (e.g., decreasing interruptions; increasing the duration of utterances). Participants then spoke with other participants during 5-min conversations and received delayed feedback from an experimenter who observed the conversations remotely through the internet. The experimenter used covert audio coaching (CAC) to provide immediate feedback if the initial intervention did not improve performance. The experimenter assessed generalization of the skills to novel adults and in novel settings throughout all phases and maintenance of the skills after the training concluded. Results were inconsistent across participants, suggesting that some conversation skills will require more intensive intervention.

 

Supporting Development of Social-Communication Skills of Young Adults With Autism in Natural Settings: Impact of a Telecoaching Intervention

(Applied Research)
ROSE A. MASON (PUrdue University), Emily Gregori (College of Education, Purdue University), Danni Wang (College of Education Purdue University), Howard P. Wills (Juniper Gardens Children's Project)
Abstract:

Impairments in social-communication for individuals with autism limits the ability to engage in meaningful and socially reinforcing social interactions leading to social isolation and loneliness. Unfortunately, research on effective social interventions for adolescents and adults with autism is limited. Further, typical interventions aimed at supporting social skill acquisition and maintenance while also fostering independence for adolescents and young adults with autism can be challenging and stigmatizing, particularly given the need for the close proximity of the interventionist. Yet, few studies have capitalized on the use of covert audio coaching (CAC) to deliver evidence-based practices within a natural setting. This study employed a multiple-baseline design across participants to evaluate the impact of CAC with prompting to increase social communication skills in typical social setting for four young adults with autism. Implementation of CAC resulted in increases in the targeted social skill(s) for all participants. Additionally, social validity measures indicate the intervention was viewed favorably by participants. Challenges as well as implications for practice and future research will be discussed.

 

Effects of Vignette-Based Training on Discriminated Social Initiations of College Students With Autism Spectrum Disorder

(Applied Research)
Charlotte Mann (University of St Joseph), AMANDA KARSTEN (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

The purpose of the study was to evaluate effects of a multicomponent training package (scripted self-questions, modeling, and feedback) to establish appropriate stimulus control over social initiations. Participants were three college-age males diagnosed with ASD who were referred to the study based on a history of either initiating or avoiding conversations at socially inappropriate times. First, participants and a sample of typically developing peers completed assessments to inform the development of target scenarios and standards for scoring correct and incorrect performance. Second, we taught participants a self-questioning technique to classify written vignettes as either appropriate or inappropriate conditions to initiate a conversation. Finally, we assessed participants’ initiations under contrived (e.g., scripted interaction between trained research assistants) and naturalistic conditions (e.g., group activity in class). Results indicated that vignette-based training was efficacious for teaching participants to classify untrained written scenarios with preliminary evidence of generalization to interactions with faculty and peers.

 
 
Symposium #202
CE Offered: BACB
Listening, Looking, Sniffing: Dogs and Stimulus Control
Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Alpine 1/2
Area: AAB/EAB; Domain: Translational
Chair: Erica N. Feuerbacher (Virginia Tech)
CE Instructor: Timothy Edwards, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Dogs are well known for their superhuman olfaction and audition. Applying behavioral principles and techniques, we can explore the limits of dogs’ sense modalities. Perceptual limitations, however, are rarely a limiting factor when it comes to field or laboratory applications with dogs. Instead, the main challenge is to reliably and precisely bring an identifiable and useful behavior under the control of the relevant stimulus. For example, in a scent-detection scenario, an ideal training outcome is that the dog emits an “indication” response each time a target scent is encountered and never emits the response when the target is not encountered. Because dogs, like people, are never operating in the presence of a single stimulus but, instead, in the presence of a “stimulus soup,” it is also important to know whether stimuli operating through specific modalities are more or less likely to gain control over behavior than those operating through other modalities. In this series of presentations, the topic of stimulus control is explored in the context of basic and applied canine research. Although these presentations are related to canine behavior, researchers and practitioners in other areas may benefit from attending.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): compound stimuli, dogs, scent detection, stimulus control
Target Audience:

Practitioners and Applied Researchers

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe and apply one method of evaluating which element of a compound stimulus is controlling behavior; (2) describe one method of shifting from a topographical to a functional definition of a target behavior; (3) describe the outcomes (specifically with respect to stimulus generalization) of discrimination training with a single stimulus and a variable, complex stimulus.
 

The Differential Effectiveness of Visual and Auditory Elements of a Compound Stimulus in Controlling Behaviour in the Domestic Dog (Canis familiaris)

(Basic Research)
LEWIS A. BIZO (University of New England), Selina Gibsone (University of Southampton, UK), E. Anne McBride (University of Southampton, UK), Ed Redhead (University of Southampton, UK), Kristie E. Cameron (Unitec Institute of Technology, New Zealand)
Abstract:

The development of differential stimulus control has long been of interest since the seminal paper by Reynolds (1961). The responses of dogs to a compound stimulus, composed of visual and auditory elements, was investigated. Twelve dogs were trained to perform a simple behaviour in response to a compound stimulus composed of a hand signal and a voice command. Then during test trials each modality was presented alone and the dogs’ responses were recorded. These test trials were interspersed with standard training trials of the compound stimulus. It was found that for eight dogs the voice command came to control the behaviour more than the hand signal, and for the remaining four dogs the hand signal controlled the behaviour more than the voice command. Each dog, therefore, showed a strong preference in responding to one modality over the other. The learning of the voice command overshadowed the learning of the hand signal for the majority of dogs. For the minority of dogs the learning of the hand signal overshadowed the learning of the voice command. The results suggest that individual dogs may show differences in their response to certain stimuli. These differences are discussed in relation to differences in prior experience and possibly to inherited characteristics of the dogs. The ways that the dogs in this study learned about the relevance of elements of compound stimuli has implications for the methods that are used in training dogs and these are discussed.

 

An Automated Approach to Basic and Applied Scent-Detection Research With Dogs

(Applied Research)
TIMOTHY EDWARDS (University of Waikato), Claudia Giezen (University of Waikato, New Zealand), Jesse Quaife (University of Waikato, New Zealand), Margaret Crawford (University of Waikato, New Zealand), Laura Seal (University of Waikato, New Zealand), Clare Browne (University of Waikato, New Zealand)
Abstract:

Scent-detection research and practice is often compromised by cuing and subjectivity. With cuing, stimuli other than the target scent gain control over behavior and can lead to erroneous experimental results or ineffective applications. Subjectivity in scent-detection research stems from application of topographical, rather than functional, response definitions. These issues can be resolved to some extent by training and testing under blind conditions, but such conditions can be difficult to arrange. We have been conducting research with an automated apparatus that, apart from an initial shaping period, requires no human involvement in the training or testing procedures and can accommodate a wide variety of samples. A brief description of this automated approach is provided, followed by a description of some results obtained from a series of research projects carried out using this approach. Basic research carried out with 5 dogs focusing on the indication response itself is highlighted, as this was demonstrated to be a critical factor in determining hit rate and false indication rate. Outcomes from an applied research project carried out with another 5 dogs aimed at evaluating dogs’ ability to identify water samples that have contained a target fish species (koi carp) are also summarized.

 

Training With Odor Mixtures Enhances Dogs’ Detection of Home-Made Explosive Precursors

(Basic Research)
NATHANIEL HALL (Texas Tech University), Clive Wynne (Arizona State University)
Abstract:

Complex odor mixtures are thought to be perceived configurally, implying that there is little identification of the individual components in the stimulus mixture. Prior research has suggested that the chemical and or perceptual similarity of components in a mixture may influence whether they can be detected individually; however, how training influences the identification of individual components in odor mixtures is less clear. Identification of individual odorants is critical for dogs tasked with discriminating between Home Made Explosives and very similar, but innocuous, complex odor mixtures. In a cross-over experimental design, we evaluated the effect of two training procedures on dogs’ ability to identify the presence of a critical oxidizer (i.e. component in explosives) in complex odor mixtures. In the “Mixture training” procedure, dogs received trial variable odor mixtures with and without an oxidizer. In the more typical procedure for canine detection training, dogs were presented with the pure oxidizer only, and had to discriminate this from decoy mixtures (“target-only” training). Mixture training led to above chance discrimination of the oxidizer from variable backgrounds and dogs were able to readily generalize performance, with no decrement, to mixtures containing novel odorants. Target-only training, however, led to a precipitous drop in hit rate when the oxidizer was presented in a mixture background containing either familiar or novel odorants. Furthermore, by giving Mixture training to dogs previously trained with the target in isolation, they learned to identify the oxidizer in mixtures very quickly. Together, these results demonstrate that the training method has significant impacts on the perception of components in odor mixtures and highlights the importance of olfactory learning for the effective detection of Home Made Explosives by dogs.

 
 
Panel #203
CE Offered: BACB
Behavioral Medicine Special Interest Group of ABAI Presents: Securing Grant Funding for Behavioral Medicine Research
Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 1-3
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Gretchen A. Dittrich, Ph.D.
Chair: Gretchen A. Dittrich (Simmons University)
GREGORY J. MADDEN (Utah State University)
RICHARD WAYNE FUQUA (Western Michigan University)
CARLA J. RASH (UConn Health School of Medicine)
Abstract: Behavioral medicine is a field of study that integrates behavioral and biomedical sciences to improve behaviors associated with disease and health states. While there are myriad opportunities for conducting research in behavioral medicine, finding funding to support a line of research may be challenging. In 2017, the National Institutes of Health reported the success rate for competing Research Project Grants was 18.7%, which was 0.4% less than the success rate in 2016 (Lauer, 2018). While grant funding is becoming increasingly competitive, there are strategies that may help researchers successfully secure funding for their research. The purpose of the current panel discussion is to provide audience members an opportunity to hear from experts within the field of behavioral medicine who have successfully funded their research via external grant funding from local and national funding agencies, including the National Institutes of Health. The panel will review how to find grant money to support behavioral medicine research, discuss strategies for writing proposals to secure funding, provide recommendations for responding to feedback from reviewers, and give audience members helpful suggestions for increasing the likelihood that monies will be awarded.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience: BCBA BCBA-D BCaBA Health psychologists Health professionals
Learning Objectives: 1. Identify funding opportunities to support behavioral medicine research 2. Identify strategies to increase the probability of successful grant funding 3. Identify recommendations for responding to reviewer feedback
Keyword(s): Behavioral Health, Behavioral Medicine, Clinical Research, Grant funding
 
 
Invited Paper Session #204
CE Offered: PSY/BACB

Effort Manipulations to Increase Recycling and Reduce Waste

Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: CSS; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Jennifer Fritz, Ph.D.
Chair: Todd A. Ward (bSci21 Media, LLC)
JENNIFER FRITZ (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
Jennifer Fritz is an Associate Professor of behavior analysis at the University of Houston-Clear Lake. She serves as Director of the Severe Behavior Disorders Research Clinic and Co-Director of the Connecting the Dots program at UHCL's Center for Autism and Developmental Disabilities, as well as Director of the Behavior Analysis Program at Texas Children's Hospital's Autism Center. Dr. Fritz serves on the Editorial Board of the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, as a member of the Advisory Board for the TxABA Public Policy Group, and is the Program Chair for the Professional Track of the Texas Association for Behavior Analysis annual conference. In the past, she has served as President of TxABA and Secretary of the TxABA Public Policy Group, as well as Program Chair of the Autism Track for the TxABA annual conference and co-chair of the Autism Track for the Association for Behavior Analysis International. Her research interests include the assessment and treatment of behavior disorders, caregiver training and coaching, and sustainability issues such as increasing recycling and reducing use of single-use materials.
Abstract:

Human reliance on plastic, especially single-use plastic items, has produced devastating effects on the environment. Extensive change and clean-up is needed to improve current conditions; however, behavior analysis is well-suited to provide direction and data on strategies to change human behavior in more environmentally friendly ways. Strategies to effectively increase recycling and reduce reliance on single-use plastics are urgently needed. This talk will discuss studies conducted in a university setting to increase recycling behavior and reduce plastic waste. Both studies involved manipulations of effort to produce desirable change in behavior. Advantages and disadvantages of both approaches will be discussed, and suggestions for avenues of future research and collaboration will be offered.

Target Audience:

Behavior analysts, researchers, organizations seeking to improve recycling.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe how the placement of recycling bins influences recycling behavior; (2) describe the impact of signs posted by the door on recycling behavior; (3) describe the advantages and disadvantages of different effort manipulation approaches to increase recycling.
 
 
Panel #205
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Diversity submission Toward a Social Justice Framework: Shaping a Diverse Applied Behavior Analysis Community
Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Fairmont, B2, Imperial Ballroom
Area: CSS/TBA; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Neil Deochand, Ph.D.
Chair: Anita Li (Western Michigan University)
NEIL DEOCHAND (University of Cincinnati)
JAMES HAWKINS (University of Cincinnati)
DACIA MCCOY (University of Cincinnati)
Abstract:

Behavior analytic service is highly demanded as indicated by an exponential increase in certified behavior analysts (Deochand & Fuqua, 2016). Although the American Psychological Association requires graduate programs to train students in cultural competence, this type of training is not a requirement in the verified course sequence to certify behavior analysts. The need to integrate cultural assessments into the functional behavior assessment will increase as services are delivered to a broader community. Unfortunately, there is a dearth of data on the demographics served by behavior analysts in practice and in research. Li, Wallace, Erhart, and Poling (2017) indicate that only 10.7% of behavior analytic research reports racial or ethnic characteristics. This issue coupled with the paucity of guidelines regarding training cultural competent practitioners requires the community to start building the framework for such initiatives. This panel will define social justice, discuss how we meet the needs of an evolving consumer base while developing successful cultural and linguistic competency training programs. The field of applied behavior analysis could be uniquely positioned to lead discussions regarding culturally competent services due to its focus on individualized client-centered treatment.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Board Certified Behavior Analysts, Graduate students, verified course sequence program coordinators

Learning Objectives: Be able to define social justice. Identify how personal bias can impact treatment delivery Understand that Autism Spectrum Disorder is diagnoses equally to demographic populations in the US, but this does not mean all are equally served.
Keyword(s): cultural assessment, diversity, graduate training, metacontingencies
 
 
Symposium #206
CE Offered: BACB
Advances in Choice Making Interventions for Children With Developmental Disabilities
Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Tonya Nichole Davis (Baylor University)
Discussant: Rachel Scalzo (University of South Florida)
CE Instructor: Rachel Scalzo, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Choice making is a simple antecedent intervention that has been proven effective at reducing challenging behavior. A variety of choices can be provided including choice of activities, materials, and environmental arrangements. Not only can choice making result in reduced challenging behavior, offering choices promotes autonomy and self-determination. Despite the initial evidence supporting choice-making interventions, more research is necessary to identify the variety of approaches to successfully implement choice making into interventions to reduce challenging behavior. The first presentation will report results from the evaluation of a choice-making intervention to reduce resurgence of challenging behavior during schedule thinning following functional communication training (FCT). The second presentation will report results from an examination of the effects of two choice-making interventions, choice of activity and choice of materials, on escape-maintained challenging behavior. The final discussion will summarize these studies, highlight the applied value of the results, and discuss future research.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): challenging behavior, choice-making intervention
Target Audience:

The target audience includes practitioners are the BAaBA, BCBA, and BCBA-D levels as well as graduate students.

 

Effects of Activity Choice on Extinction-Induced Resurgence During Delays-To-Reinforcement

Emily Gregori (Purdue University), Mandy J. Rispoli (Purdue University), Rose A. Mason (Purdue University), XIAOJIE GUO (Purdue University)
Abstract:

Functional communication training (FCT) is the most effective function-based treatment for challenging behavior. Although FCT often results in robust treatment effects, challenging behavior often resurges after the termination of treatment. Schedule thinning using delays-to-reinforcement is often used to prevent the deterioration of treatment effect following FCT. However, delays-to-reinforcement alone are often not sufficient to prevent the resurgence of challenging behavior. The purpose of the current study was to evaluate the effects of choice of alternative activity during delays-to-reinforcement following FCT. Effects of the intervention were evaluated using a single-case ABAC design, with an embedded alternating treatments design in the C phase. Three adults with developmental disabilities participated. Participants were exposed to a pre-treatment functional analysis, initial FCT treatment, and a delay-to-reinforcement. During delays-to-reinforcement two conditions, choice and no choice, were implemented. During choice conditions, participants were given two stimuli and directed to choose one to use during the delay. During the no choice conditions, the experimenter provided the participant with an activity or item to interact with g the delay. Results and interpretation of key findings will be discussed.

 

Comparison of Choice-Making Interventions to Reduce Challenging Behavior for Individuals With Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities

PROVIDENCE GEE (Baylor University), Tonya Nichole Davis (Baylor University)
Abstract:

Current literature supports the effectiveness of choice-making interventions on reducing challenging behavior. However, choice-making interventions can vary by the type of choices offered, such choice of activity and choice of materials. Few studies have compared these various approaches to choice-making interventions. The purpose of this study was to compare the effectiveness of choice of activity and choice of materials on both challenging behavior and task completion with two children with developmental disabilities. The two choice-making interventions were compared within an alternating treatment design embedded within an ABAB design. Both choice-making interventions resulted in a decrease in challenging behavior and increase in task completion, relative to baseline. However, choice of activity resulted in less challenging behavior relative to choice of materials for one of the two participants. Implications of the results will be discussed.

 
 
Symposium #209
CE Offered: BACB
Firearm Safety Training: Implications From Unintentional Discharges
Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Toronto
Area: OBM/CSS; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: John O'Neill (Contextual Behavioral Science Institute)
Discussant: John O'Neill (Contextual Behavioral Science Institute)
CE Instructor: John O'Neill, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The purpose of this symposium is to (a) discuss the interdisciplinary literature on this topic, (b) merge and summarize the behavioral literature to provide a cohesive account, (c) analyze injuries in relation to antecedent classes and context, and (d) develop strategies, informed by a contextual behavioral taxonomy, for firearm safety training that might prevent unintentional discharges and associated injuries.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Firearm, Gun, Law Enforcement, Police
Target Audience:

Behavior Analysts interested in working with police or other law enforcement.

Learning Objectives: Attendees will learn about a behavioral interpretation of firearm safety. Attendees will how FBAs can be used in the context of firearm safety. Attendees will learn how to apply behavior analysis to firearm safety training.
 

Further Analysis of the Unintentional Discharge of Firearms in Law Enforcement

Dawn O'Neill (Contextual Behavioral Science Institute), JOHN O'NEILL (Contextual Behavioral Science Institute)
Abstract:

Empirical analysis of the contexts in which UDs occur in law enforcement have only recently begun to emerge. We analyzed a novel sample of UD reports (N = 171) that occurred between 1992-2016, collected from one non-U.S. and three U.S. law enforcement entities. Using an established antecedent-behavior-consequence (A-B-C) taxonomy, reports were analyzed by context, officer behavior, type of firearm, injuries, deaths, and property damages. This study is the first to empirically document reports of UDs caused by the startle response and the first to analyze a substantial sample of UDs that involved handguns with a double-action only trigger mechanism. An expanded analysis of UD consequences suggested that deaths and injuries might be more prevalent than previously reported.

 
Functional Behavior Assessment of the Unintentional Discharge of Firearms in Law Enforcement
JOHN O'NEILL (Contextual Behavioral Science Institute), Dawn O'Neill (Contextual Behavioral Science Institute)
Abstract: Unintentional discharge (UD) is a term used in law enforcement to distinguish between an unplanned gunshot and a planned gunshot, regardless of context. The purpose of this paper is to (a) discuss the interdisciplinary literature on this topic, (b) merge and summarize the behavioral literature to provide a cohesive account of the phenomenon, (c) analyze injuries in relation to antecedent classes and context, and (d) develop strategies for firearm safety training that might prevent UDs and associated injuries in law enforcement. We provide a contextual behavioral taxonomy through the identification of six distinct antecedent classes in which UD can be categorized: contact with objects, medical symptoms, muscle co-activations, routine tasks, startle stimuli, and unfamiliar tasks.
 
 
Panel #210
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
The Impact of Accomplishment Based Performance Management in a Large and Growing Applied Behavior Analysis Company
Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom A
Area: OBM; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Brett J. DiNovi, M.A.
Chair: Carl V. Binder (The Performance Thinking Network, LLC)
BRETT J. DINOVI (Brett DiNovi & Associates, LLC)
PIERRE D. LOUIS (Brett DiNovi & Associates)
MAY BEAUBRUN (Brett DiNovi & Associates, LLC)
Abstract:

What is the impact of shifting focus in coaching and performance management from behavior to valuable accomplishments, as encouraged by Thomas F. Gilbert in his seminal book, Human Competence? This panel, chaired by the creator of an accomplishment based coaching and performance improvement methodology called Six Boxes Performance Thinking, reports on initial effects of an accomplishment based approach in a large ABA company, already known for its effective use of ABA with clients, employees, and OBM consultation with outside organizations. Executives from Brett DiNovi and Associates will describe how a focus on accomplishments has “changed the conversation” about performance and enabled them to more directly link the behavior of their people to business results through the valuable accomplishments that they contribute to the organization, while helping to prioritize their own efforts leading and managing organizational performance. Panelists will describe and respond to questions about the impact of a paradigm shift from behavior-based management to accomplishment based performance improvement. In an organization passionate about growing while maintaining quality service and optimal employee engagement, an accomplishment based approach focuses everyone on the valuable contributions needed for business success while connecting people more directly to the natural consequences of their day-to-day activities

Instruction Level: Advanced
Target Audience:

The target audience includes BCBA's, professionals in leadership roles that supervise employees, and professionals responsible for the training of employees.

Learning Objectives: 1. The participants will explain the impact of a paradigm shift from behavior-based management to accomplishment based performance improvement. 2. The participants will define specific accomplishments that lead to successful business results and organizational growth. 3. The participants will describe how an accomplishment based approach focuses everyone on the valuable contributions needed for business success while connecting people more directly to the natural consequences of their day-to-day activities.
Keyword(s): Organizational behavior, Performance management
 
 
Special Event #211
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
CHOICE: Session 1
Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD North
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Chair: Jeannie A. Golden (East Carolina University)
CE Instructor: Jeannie A. Golden, Ph.D.
 

CHOICE: Look Again

Abstract:

Choice is at its core one of the most relevant topics that our field has, does, and must continue to address. The study of choice has been relevant since the beginning - of everything. The concept cuts across nearly every line of research in the field; from philosophical issues to schedule work, from maze work to self-management, from choosing what tie to wear to choosing what program to implement, from behavioral economics to the behavior of the scientist. There lies choice, at every turn. How you respond to the statement: “making a choice” might well define you as a behavior analyst – or a mentalist. The short discussion will cover a brief history of choice research and how it has changed, and not, current directions, and potential future work. I hope you choose to attend while I have a lecture on choice!

 
RYAN SAIN (Northwest Autism Center)
 

I have been a behavior analyst since my mother sat me down in a mall in the 80s and told me to “just watch people”. I formalized that education with undergrad work at Eastern Washington University and graduate study under Thomas Armon Brigham at Washington State University. I focused on experimental evaluations of applied self-management programs, and of course, behavior analysis in general. I later worked internationally doing university development work across Africa and Afghanistan. It is there that I developed an appreciation for open educational resources. I hung up my soft money hat and returned to teach at my alma mater (i.e., EWU). Several years ago, after leaving academia, I joined the team at Northwest Autism Center and am currently the Operations Support Analyst - functionally doing OBM type work in an ABA setting. In my spare time (and that of my friend and colleague, Mr. Brad Bishop) we focus on bringing ABA to the world via YouTube. PsychCore was formed as a vehicle to bring change to how ABA is taught and disseminated. We have thousands of subscribers and ~700 videos covering specific issues related to ABA, EAB, and Behavior Analysis in general. Our success in teaching is not our own - we are students of Behavior Analysis first - and we seek to apply those principles at every level of our delivery of content. I currently reside in Spokane, Washington with my wife and four children, 2 dogs, a cat, and a bunch of fish.

 

CHOICE: Helping Academic Avoiders Choose to Do More Work: Why Escape-Based Interventions Might Not Be the Answer

Abstract:

Students who avoid academic work often have long and complicated histories that have established school-based tasks as aversive. Although problem behavior in the presence of academic tasks might be maintained by escape, interventions based on escape (e.g., allowing breaks contingent on work completion, escape extinction) may be counterproductive, even for those who are capable of undertaking the work. This presentation will discuss how the ways we approach interventions for work avoidance may affect students’ choices to attempt academic tasks, as well as how much work they do. Data collected from high school students will demonstrate how interventions designed to match the functions of work avoidance may negatively impact students’ choices about undertaking work, as well as their perceptions about the aversiveness of academic tasks. The presentation also will address the potential importance of incorporating choice into various aspects of intervention delivery for work avoiders, as well as how consideration of more remote reinforcement (and punishment) histories may be helpful in promoting students’ choices to engage with learning opportunities at school.

 
JENNIFER AUSTIN (University of South Wales)
 

Jennifer L. Austin, Ph.D., BCBA-D has been applying the science of behavior analysis to improve outcomes for children and their teachers for over 20 years. Both her research and clinical work focus on how behavior analytic assessment and intervention strategies can be applied with typically developing children, as well as examining what adaptations may be necessary for making our science “work” in mainstream classrooms. She has worked with numerous schools in the US and the UK, focusing primarily on those in disadvantaged communities. Dr. Austin received her PhD from the Florida State University and currently serves as Professor of Psychology and Head of Behavior Analysis at the University of South Wales. Prior to moving to the United Kingdom, Dr. Austin served as faculty at the University of South Florida, California State University, Fresno and the University of Houston, Clear Lake. She is the President of the UK Society for Behaviour Analysis and a former Associate Editor of the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis and Behavior Analysis in Practice.

 
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) list the general areas of choice research; (2) discuss the scientific study of choice; (3) see the application of choice research to many fields related to behavior analysis; (4) identify contingencies that may result in work avoidance at school; (5) discuss how some function-based interventions for work avoidance may produce undesired effects on students’ choices to attempt work; (6) identify intervention components that may be helpful in supporting students’ choices to undertake work.
 
 
 
Invited Paper Session #213
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP

Don Baer Lecture: A Better Mousetrap is Not Enough: Rethinking the Dissemination of Behavior Analysis

Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom EF
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Ronnie Detrich, Ph.D.
Chair: Mark D. Shriver (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
RONNIE DETRICH (Detrich and Associates)

Ronnie Detrich has been providing behavior analytic services for over 50 years. His work can be characterized as thorough-going behavior analysis drawing from the conceptual, experimental, and applied branches of our discipline. From 1970-1977, he worked at a pioneering Family Service Agency in Flint, Michigan providing behavior analytic services for anyone requesting help. Later, he developed and was the director of a state-wide educational and residential program for school-aged children with autism in South Dakota. In the 1980s, Ronnie was the director of a residential program based on the Teaching Family Model for adjudicated juvenile offenders in West Virginia. From 1986-2004, he was the clinical director for a large non-public school in the San Francisco Bay Area serving children with intellectual disabilities and serious behavior challenges. In addition, he also co-directed a public-school consultation project supporting students with academic and behavioral challenges. From 2004-2018, Ronnie was a Senior Fellow at the Wing Institute, an education policy think tank that focuses on the implementation of evidence-based practices in public schools. Currently, he is the proprietor of Detrich and Associates, a consulting project based in Logan, Utah. He also holds an appointment as adjunct faculty at Utah State University.

In recent years, Ronnie’s work has focused on the challenges of achieving adequate levels of treatment integrity in large systems, the role of the evidence-based practice movement in behavior analysis, and the large-scale implementation of effective practices in public schools. He is a trustee of the Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies and is on the editorial boards of Perspectives in Behavior Science and Exceptional Children. He serves as an Associate Editor for the Journal of Positive Behavior Intervention. Ronnie has also served on the editorial board of Behavior Analysis in Practice and was the Coordinator of ABAI’s Practice Board.

Abstract:

One of the ambitions of behavior analysis is “better living through behaviorism.” Many scholars in behavior analysis have been concerned about the slow adoption rate of effective behavior analytic practices. Perhaps the problem lies not in our practices but in our dissemination efforts. There are two aspects to disseminating our practices. The first is when we are working with families, educators, or businesses and we have identified an intervention to be implemented. In many instances, even though our services have been sought out, the individuals responsible for implementing the intervention do not do so with sufficient integrity to yield benefit. This represents a limited dissemination effort and the failure to achieve promised gains has the potential to harm the reputation of the individual behavior analyst, the organization providing the service, and the discipline of applied behavior analysis.

The second aspect of dissemination is the effort to increase broad scale adoption of the science and technology of behavior analysis. It is often the case that our dissemination efforts, such as publication in journals and presentations at conferences, at this level are passive. We have a 60-year baseline suggesting that these approaches have been largely unsuccessful. A re-thinking of our dissemination strategies may be warranted. Behavior analysis is the science of social influence and dissemination is a social rather than a technical challenge. It involves, at a minimum, someone disseminating and someone adopting what is being disseminated. It may be worthwhile to frame dissemination as a speaker-listener relation and more closely analyze the variables that influence both the speaker and listener.

A first step in doing this requires that we move away from our topographical definition of dissemination to a functional one. The ultimate criterion for judging dissemination is that a practice is adopted. Without adoption, there is no dissemination. Drawing from our own literature as well as the literature from implementation science and dissemination, an approach will be proposed that has the potential to increase the adoption rate of our practices.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) provide a functional definition of dissemination; (2) describe two levels of dissemination; (3) describe how treatment integrity can influence dissemination; (4) describe the limitations of publications and conferences presentations as dissemination strategies.
 
 
Panel #214
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
PDS: The Role of the Teacher Mentor in Training and Supervising Teachers as Strategic Scientists
Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Fairmont, Second Level, International Ballroom
Area: TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Lara Gentilini, M.A.
Chair: Lara Gentilini (Teachers College, Columbia University; Comprehensive Application of Behavior Analysis to Schooling (CABAS®))
CLAIRE S. CAHILL (Teachers College, Columbia University; Comprehensive Application of Behavior Analysis to Schooling (CABAS®); The Fred S. Keller School)
JOANN PEREIRA DELGADO (Teachers College, Columbia University; Comprehensive Application of Behavior Analysis to Schooling (CABAS®))
JENNIFER WEBER (Teachers College, Columbia University; Comprehensive Application of Behavior Analysis to Schooling (CABAS®))
Abstract:

A mentor is considered a “teacher of teachers,” training both less experienced and advanced teachers. To mentor teachers operating within a scientific framework means to emphasize mastery of the components related to a strategic science of teaching. The role of the mentor is to conduct frequent teacher observations and provide data-driven feedback that facilitates the implementation of effective tactics. A mentor or supervisor must foster a symbiotic relationship in order to support teachers who function as strategic scientists, or those teachers who can characterize academic situations in scientific terms when identifying factors that impede student learning. In the Comprehensive Application of Behavior Analysis to Schooling (CABAS®) model, mentors scaffold and facilitate teacher learning through ranked modules of in-service teacher training requiring (a) in-situ demonstrations of the effective application of behavior analysis to schooling and teaching; (b) the use of systematic and scientifically-based teacher observation systems such as the Teacher Performance Rate and Accuracy scale (TRPA); and (c) training in the analysis of the decisions warranted by visual displays of data. The purpose of this panel is to provide an overview of how to train and supervise teachers who can effectively utilize applied behavior analysis within general and special education classroom settings via strategic mentorship.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

The target audience for our panel includes those interested in learning more about how to train and supervise teachers operating within a scientific framework.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) design and facilitate in-situ demonstrations of the effective application of behavior analysis to schooling and teaching; (2) utilize systematic and scientifically-based teacher observation systems; (3) train less experienced and advanced teachers in the analysis of the decisions warranted by visual displays of data.
Keyword(s): strategic scientists, supervision, teacher mentor, teacher training
 
 
Symposium #214A
CE Offered: BACB
Exploring the Technical Feasibility of Virtual Reality and Eye-Tracking in Interprofessional Healthcare Education for Medical and Nursing Students
Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 3/4
Area: CBM/OBM; Domain: Translational
Chair: Alison Szarko (University of Nevada, Reno)
Discussant: Laura Crosswell (Reynolds School of Journalism at the University of Nevada, Reno)
CE Instructor: Steven Anbro, M.S.
Abstract:

Medical error is the 4th leading cause of death in the United States. The majority of these preventable events are attributed to miscommunication among healthcare teams. Medical students and nursing students currently receive healthcare communication trainings in a siloed fashion and are often taught differing ways to communicate the same information. Interprofessional trainings that bring medical professionals together early in their education may reduce the prevalence of miscommunication once students enter their respective clinical fields. TeamSTEPPS is a promising communication training package that has been developed to decrease medical errors related to miscommunication. However, methods for assessing the effectiveness of TeamSTEPPS are lacking in their precision and often depend on indirect, self-report measures. This symposium will provide an overview of the TeamSTEPPS model and will present data on the technical feasibility of virtual reality and eye-tracking as assessment tools for more precisely measuring the impact of a TeamSTEPPS training package.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): communication training, eye tracking, medical education, virtual reality
Target Audience:

Behavior Analysts working in Healthcare and Medicine; Behavior Analysts working with Virtual Reality

 
 
Symposium #215
CE Offered: BACB
Evaluations and Applications of Token Economies
Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom B
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Gabriella Rachal Van Den Elzen (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Discussant: Jason C. Bourret (New England Center for Children)
CE Instructor: Gabriella Rachal Van Den Elzen, M.S.
Abstract:

Token economies are tools used in a variety of applied programming; however, little research has evaluated the efficacy of procedures to establish token economies or the procedures necessary to train service providers to implement token economies. The purpose of this symposium is to discuss evaluations and applications of token economies across several settings and participant groups. In the first presentation, Dawson, Lerman, and Shillings examined the effects of paired versus unpaired tokens on responding with typically developing children. In the second presentation, Van Den Elzen, Kodak, Halbur, Niland, and Bergmann compared the effects of two chaining methods on the acquisition of clinically-relevant skills with children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). In the third paper, Monaghan, Kisamore, Vladescu, Reeve, and Novak evaluated the effects of video-based instruction to train parents of children with ASD to implement a token economy. In the final paper, Kirkpatrick, Rehfeld, Rivera, Akers, and Sulak evaluated the efficacy of an intervention to teach undergraduate students to implement a token economy with children with literacy deficits. The discussant will describe the contributions of these studies to the extant research and suggest potential ways to further develop this area of research.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): BST, teacher training, token economy, token pairing
Target Audience:

The target audience members for this symposium are practitioners and researchers.

Learning Objectives: Identify conditions under which token economies may be established. Describe strategies for training teachers and parents to implement token economies. Summarize and discuss the current status of research on token economies.
 

Persistence of Responding in a Token Economy With Paired and Unpaired Backup Reinforcers

DESIREE DAWSON (University of Houston-Clear Lake; Texana Behavior Center; Marquette University), Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston-Clear Lake; Texana Behavior Center), Courtney Breann Shillings (University of Houston Clear Lake: Texana Behavior Center)
Abstract:

Clinicians commonly use token economies in applied settings, yet there is surprisingly little research on the mechanisms that make token economies successful. Previous research has produced mixed results on the components that impact the success of token economies as well as the durability of responding in token economies over time. The current study assessed the persistence of responding in a token economy across two settings. The instructor in one setting paired tokens with backup reinforcers while the instructor in the other setting did not. Participants were two typically developing 3 and 4-year-old boys. The results showed that the absence of backup reinforcers in the unpaired setting did not affect the acquisition or maintenance of responding for either participant. However, the participants showed a preference for instruction in the setting with back-up reinforcers. These results suggest that the tokens served as generalized conditioned reinforcers but may also have had discriminative effects. These findings have important implications for the maintenance and generalization of responding that is maintained by token reinforcement.

 

Comparing Forward- and Backward-Chaining Methods for Establishing Token Economies

GABRIELLA RACHAL VAN DEN ELZEN (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Tiffany Kodak (Marquette University), Mary Halbur (Marquette University), Haven Sierra Niland (University of North Texas), Samantha Bergmann (University of North Texas)
Abstract:

Tokens are stimuli that are accumulated and exchanged for preferred stimuli. Though token economies are used in a variety of educational, residential, and clinical settings, the extant literature provides little guidance on how to condition tokens and establish a token economy. We compared two methods for increasing the exchange production schedule in token economies with a two boys with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). In the forward-chaining condition, only one token was initially placed on the board. In the backward-chaining condition, the therapist pre-filled the token board and left only the locations that would be filled within the session open. In both conditions, we increased the exchange-production schedule by one token until a terminal schedule of five tokens was reached. We then compared the acquisition of a new skill across both token conditions, an FR 5 schedule for preferred items, and an FR 1 schedule for preferred items. We found minimal differences across conditions for one participant. The second participant acquired skills more quickly with the backward-chained tokens. These data add to the extant literature by demonstrating two efficacious ways to establish token economies with children with ASD.

 

Using Video-Based Instruction to Train Parents to Implement a Token Economy

Shannon Monaghan (Caldwell University), April N. Kisamore (Hunter College), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), Joseph Novak (REED Academy), ANNIE STAUFFER (Hunter College)
Abstract:

Noncompliance can be a concern for some children with autism and can affect their interactions with their parents. A token economy may be an effective and easily transportable strategy for parents to provide reinforcement to their children for compliance with directions. The results of this study (a) systematically replicated Spiegel, Kisamore, Vladescu, and Karsten (2016) by training parents of children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) to implement guided compliance and (b) evaluated the effects of video-based instruction to train parents of children with autism to implement a token economy to reinforce compliance and to decrease the need for the presence of a trainer by incorporating a self-scoring checklist. Participants were taught to correctly implement a token economy and evaluated their own performance via video recordings. These results provide clinicians with a means of teaching parents of children with ASD to implement a token economy and decrease the need for the presence of a trainer by incorporating a self-scoring checklist.

 

Evaluating the Effects of Behavioral Skills Training With Pre-Service Teachers

MARIE KIRKPATRICK (Baylor University), David Rehfeld (Baylor University), Jessica Akers (Baylor University), Gabriela Juanita Rivera (Baylor University), Tracey Sulak (Baylor University)
Abstract:

Behavioral skills training (BST) is a systematic teaching procedure aligned with the principles of applied behavior analysis (ABA). BST has empirical support as for its efficacy with populations such as individuals with autism spectrum disorders (ASD) and intellectual and developmental disabilities (IDD). However, research regarding its use as a total package is lacking with educational staff such as teachers. Furthermore, research regarding its use as a teaching procedure for pre-service teachers is almost non-existent. We used BST to teach five undergraduate students enrolled in a special education field based course to implement a token economy using a fixed interval system of reinforcement with children who have literacy deficits, including those with special needs. A multiple baseline design across participant teaching dyads (a co-teaching environment) was used to assess implementation accuracy. Results indicated that BST was an effective teaching procedure and social validity measures indicated BST was agreeable with participants. Limitations and needs for future research are discussed.

 
 
Symposium #216
CE Offered: BACB
Comparative Analyses on Preference for and Efficacy of Reinforcement Arrangements
Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: AUT/EAB; Domain: Translational
Chair: Andrew C Bonner (University of Florida )
Discussant: John C. Borrero (University of Maryland, Baltimore County)
CE Instructor: John C. Borrero, Ph.D.
Abstract: Much recent translational research has been devoted to examining variables that determine preferences for behavioral interventions, often in relation to differential effects. The studies in this symposium explore further, largely understudied, determinants of choice and efficacy in multiple contexts bound together by their relevance for common behavioral interventions. One study examined the effects of reinforcer quality on preference for distributed vs. accumulated reinforcement arrangements. A second evaluated whether the number of reinforcer options in a token system influences participants’ preference to choose or relinquish choice (i.e., choice overload). A third takes a behavioral economic approach to promoting preferences for physical activity over sedentary activities by manipulating the number of potential substitutes and the unit price for sedentary reinforcers. The final study takes a translational approach to comparing the relative efficacy of response commission and omission contingencies in supporting analog problem and alternative responses during reinforcement schedule thinning. Collectively, these studies advance our capacity for devising interventions that are both effective and valued by their recipients.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience: Intermediate
 

The Impact of Reinforcer Quality on Preference for Immediate and Delayed Reinforcement in Children With Autism

(Applied Research)
ANNA BUDD (Queens College, CUNY), Colleen Kocher (CUNY Queens College), Monica Howard (The ELIJA School), Daniel Mark Fienup (Columbia University)
Abstract:

Self-control can be conceptualized as preference for a larger delayed reinforcer over a smaller immediate reinforcer. Researchers have examined how to alter an individual’s preference between these types of reinforcers. In this study, the researcher examined the impact of reinforcer quality on preference for immediate or delayed reinforcers. Three 8- to 10-year-old students with Autism Spectrum Disorder participated. Researchers defined reinforcer quality as the reinforcer being available for its preferred duration. A participant chose between two response-reinforcer arrangements: continuous or discontinuous. The continuous arrangement entailed 5 m of access to a delayed reinforcer. The discontinuous arrangement entailed 30 s of access to a more immediate reinforcer. Only one arrangement entailed the preferred duration of reinforcer access. All three participants showed a consistent preference for one type of arrangement, regardless of the manipulation of reinforcer quality. Future research may re-examine the impact of reinforcer quality.

 

Choice Overload in Token Economies: Does Array Size Influence Preference for Choosing Versus Not Choosing?

(Applied Research)
NATHALIE FERNANDEZ (University of Florida), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (University of Florida), Elizabeth Schieber (University of Florida)
Abstract:

Token economies are commonly implemented in educational settings with individuals with neurodevelopmental disorders. Tokens stores are used to display available backup reinforcers, but the effects of array size on choice are unknown in this population. Choice overload is a phenomenon in typically developing populations in which an abundance of options leads to suboptimal choices. Recent research on the effects of array size on preference and toy engagement suggests that larger arrays may shift both preference and item engagement in typically developing children (Miller, Kaplan, Reed, and White, 2016), which may be consistent with choice overload effects. However, this preparation did not examine preference between array sizes and included duplicate items in the large array, which is not likely to occur in the natural environment. In the present study, we assessed preferences for small arrays, large arrays, and arrays in which the therapist selected the backup item (no choice) in individuals with neurodevelopmental disorders. We then assessed preference for array size across presentation modalities and varying levels of response effort. The results to date suggest that (a) larger array sizes were preferred to small arrays or no choice conditions, and (b) presentation modality does not affect preference for array size.

 

Shifting the Preferences of Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder From Sedentary Towards Physical Activities

(Applied Research)
KISSEL JOSEPH GOLDMAN (University of Florida), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (University of Florida)
Abstract:

The majority of youth with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) do not engage in recommended levels of daily physical activity (PA). The motivation to select or engage in PA may contribute to low levels of PA in this population but should be considered in relation to the concurrent motivations to engage in sedentary activities. Researchers observed increased selection of PA in typically developing adults when more PA options were made available and increased selection of appropriate activities as the effort required to access less-appropriate activities increases. The number of options and amount of effort required appear to influence motivation to select sedentary activities, but these effects have not been evaluated in the context of PA in children with ASD. Contrived reinforcement has been shown to increase PA engagement but may also influence the selection of physical over sedentary activities. We manipulated the number of PA options, effort required to access sedentary activities, and/or reinforcement contingency for engaging in PA on PA selection and engagement in 4 children with ASD. Increased PA options and effort to access sedentary activities increased PA selection for two of four participants. Delivering tokens contingent on PA increased selection and engagement for the remaining two participants.

 

A Comparison of Response Requirements During Contingency-Based Progressive Delay Schedule Thinning

(Basic Research)
JULIA IANNACCONE (City University of New York Graduate Center; Queens College), Joshua Jessel (Queens College)
Abstract:

Schedule thinning is an essential step in treating problem behavior, yet little research has been conducted to determine the method associated with sustained treatment effects throughout thinning. A frequently used method for thinning reinforcement involves providing the reinforcer following a programmed response requirement and progressively increasing that requirement (i.e., contingency-based progressive delay [CBPD]). This response requirement during CBPD could be dependent on (1) contextually appropriate behavior (e.g., math completion) or (2) the absence of problem behavior. We designed a computer program for college students to determine the effects of these two response requirements of CBPD on three behaviors: previously reinforced behavior (analogue problem behavior), currently reinforced alternative behavior (analogue functional communication response), and contextually appropriate behavior during the delay. Low rates of responding to the previously reinforced response (problem behavior) were sustained regardless of thinning method. For most participants, undifferentiated high rates of alternative behavior and contextually appropriate behavior were observed. Higher rates of contextually appropriate behavior were observed when the response requirement for math completion was in place during reinforcement thinning. These results support the use of a response requirement for behaviors that are expected of the individual when reinforcement is not immediately forthcoming.

 
 
Symposium #218
CE Offered: BACB
Laboratory Studies Assessing Clinically Relevant Approaches to Understanding Resurgence
Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich E-G
Area: EAB/DDA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Marissa Kamlowsky (Florida Institute of Technology )
Discussant: Kelly M. Schieltz (University of Iowa)
CE Instructor: Kelly M. Schieltz, Ph.D.
Abstract: Resurgence is the return of a previously extinguished response due to a discontinuation or reduction in availability of an alternative source of reinforcement. This symposium presents laboratory research relevant to application using human and nonhuman animals. Overall, these presentations cover variables influencing resurgence that could be relevant to the likelihood of relapse under clinical situations. Several presentations examine how manipulations that increase the generality from differentially reinforcing the alternative behavior potentially mitigate resurgence of target responding. The first two presentations assess resurgence when the extinction test for resurgence either includes or does not include stimuli previously paired with alternative reinforcement. Similarly, the third presentation examines two different approaches to mitigating resurgence by introducing extinction of alternative behavior during differential reinforcement of alternative behavior and the presence or absence of delivering a distinct reinforcer for alternative behavior during the resurgence test. The final presentation examines a novel approach to assessing resurgence by examining resurgence of specific strategies for solving mathematical problems.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): relapse mitigation, resurgence, translational research, treatment relapse
Target Audience: Practitioners, teachers, applied researchers, translational researchers, and basic researchers
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to define relapse and resurgence, describe some techniques aimed to mitigate resurgence, and state the clinical applications of resurgence studies involving rats as well as university students.
 

A Comparison of Resurgence During Extinction With and Without Conditioned Reinforcement

(Basic Research)
ANTHONY OLIVER (West Virginia University), Kennon Andy Lattal (West Virginia University)
Abstract:

Resurgence is the transient recurrence of a previously reinforced, but not currently occurring activity, when reinforcement conditions of some ongoing Alternative response are worsened. The degree to which reinforcement conditions need to be worsened to evoke resurgence, however, is not fully understood. This experiment assessed resurgence when the Alternative response was extinguished, in different phases, when an empty food hopper was presented dependent on keypecking and when the hopper presentations were omitted. Three pigeons were exposed to a three-phase resurgence procedure in which the Resurgence Test phase consisted of a single 6-hr session. Two cycles of the three-phase procedure were studied. During the first cycle Resurgence test, hopper presentations (without food) were delivered according to a VR 40 schedule of reinforcement during the Resurgence Test session. During the second cycle Resurgence Test session, the Resurgence Test occurred without any consequence for Alternative responses, that is, conventional extinction. Resurgence occurred during both Resurgence test conditions; however, generally more resurgence occurred in the absence of the hopper presentations and the time course of resurgence differed between the two conditions.

 
Using Auditory Extinction Cues to Mitigate Resurgence
(Basic Research)
SAMUEL SHVARTS (Florida Institute of Technology; The May Institute), Rachel Thomas (Florida Institute of Technology), James J Oskam (Florida Institute of Technology), Corina Jimenez-Gomez (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment, Florida Institute of Technology), Christopher A. Podlesnik (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: Resurgence is a laboratory model of treatment relapse revealing the effects of Treatment integrity errors on problem behavior eliminated through treatment with differential reinforcement of alternative behavior (DRA). This study took a translational approach to assess the effects of an auditory extinction cue to mitigate resurgence of target responding in children with autism using arbitrary responses to simulate target and alternative responding. The auditory cue was a recorded praise statement and was introduced in Phase 2 and remained in one of the test conditions in Phase 3. In 8 of 12 resurgence test comparisons (with and without the e-cue), responding was mitigated in the e-cue condition compared to the typical resurgence condition. Incorporating a praise statement within DRA treatment could maintain alternative responding while mitigating resurgence of the target response when the reinforcer is not available. This translational study connects applied research examining praise and basic research examining extinction cues to examine a novel DRA treatment strategy.
 

Resurgence in Humans: Increasing Generalization Between Treatment and Testing Reduces Relapse

(Basic Research)
ERIC A. THRAILKILL (University of Vermont, Department of Psychological Science), Mark E. Bouton (University of Vermont, Department of Psychological Science)
Abstract:

Resurgence is the increase in performance of an extinguished instrumental (operant) response that coincides with the extinction of a response that had been reinforced to replace it. Resurgence may involve processes relevant to relapse in applied and clinical behavioral interventions. While resurgence is a robust phenomenon in human operant extinction, the processes that control it remain unclear. We examined whether methods that reduce resurgence in animals also reduce it in humans. Undergraduate participants first learned to emit an operant response (R1) for a reinforcing outcome (snack food; O1). In a second phase (Phase 2), extinction was introduced for R1 and a second response (R2) was simultaneously introduced and reinforced with a monetary reward (USD $0.10 coins; O2). In a test phase, extinction was then introduced for R2 and resurgence of R1 was assessed. In Experiment 1, periodic exposure to R2 extinction during Phase 2 attenuated resurgence. In Experiment 2, response-independent presentations of O2, but not O1, during the test prevented resurgence. The results identify a role for generalization from Phase 2 to the test in determining resurgence in humans. Evidence suggests that resurgence may result from common processes in animals and humans, and it supports a contextual account of resurgence.

 
Resurgence of Problem Solving
(Basic Research)
CATHERINE STEPHENS (West Virginia University), Claire C. St. Peter (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Resurgence is the recurrence of a previously reinforced response after a more recently reinforced response is placed on extinction. Resurgence may explain why problem behavior recurs after initially successful treatment. However, resurgence may also explain how adaptive behavior recurs to solve problems. The aim of this study was to determine if resurgence occurred when a student was asked to solve quadratic equations. Each participant was taught two methods of solving quadratic equations. We reinforced different problem-solving methods across three phases. In the first phase, only simple factoring was reinforced. In the second phase, only the AC method was reinforced (simple factoring was placed on extinction). In the third phase, neither method was reinforced (both on extinction). The AC method was used primarily to solve problems in the extinction phase. For one participant, simple factoring, in combination with other methods, was also used, demonstrating resurgence during problem solving. There may be variables such as changes in context and reinforcement history controlling responding during problem solving. Future research should investigate the role of these variables.
 
 
Symposium #219
CE Offered: BACB
Applications to Research and Practice: Skinner’s Pragmatic Philosophy of Science
Sunday, May 26, 2019
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 1/2
Area: PCH/TBA; Domain: Theory
Chair: Guy S. Bruce (Appealing Solutions, LLC)
Discussant: Aubrey C. Daniels (Aubrey Daniels International, Inc.)
CE Instructor: Guy S. Bruce, Ed.D.
Abstract:

The last several years I have taught a workshop for board certified behavior analysts on the application of behavior analysis to improve organizational performance so that clients can achieve efficient progress. The workshop always begins with a discussion of Skinner’s pragmatic philosophy of science and its applications to research and practice. I ask participants if they can define pragmatism and if they have read any of Skinner’s writings that illustrate his pragmatic approach. Usually no hands are raised. Hence I have invited the presenters to discuss Skinner’s pragmatic philosophy of science, “Radical Behaviorism,” and its applications to behavior analysis research and practice. What role did Skinner’s pragmatism play in the discovery of more useful explanations of behavior and procedures for producing behavior change? How does a pragmatic approach differ from other approaches to research and practice? What might be the consequences for the future of behavior analysis if practitioners abandon Skinner’s pragmatism?

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Performance Engineering, Pragmatism, Radical Behaviorism, Scientific Method
Target Audience:

Researchers who prefer more useful explanations and practitioners who prefer more effective procedures will find this symposium useful in achieving their goals.

 
Skinner’s Pragmatism: A Preference for the Most Useful Explanations and Procedures
GUY S. BRUCE (Appealing Solutions, LLC)
Abstract: B. F. Skinner, in his article, Case Study in Scientific Method (1972), described a very different approach to the scientific study of behavior. It was pragmatic not dogmatic. He 1) asked questions instead of stated hypotheses; 2) studied the changes in the behavior of the individual, not the average of a group of individuals; 3) used sensitive and accurate measures of behavior change such as the response rate; 4) systematically changed one independent variable at a time, while holding constant all others, with the goal of discovering orderly processes of behavior change; 5) looked for practically significant changes in an individual’s behavior that were functionally related to changes in environmental variables, relying on a standard graphic display to evaluate whether the changes in behavior were practically significant; and 6) repeated his experiment with the same and then different subjects to assess the generality of the processes he discovered. Skinner’s pragmatic approach has been extremely fruitful, leading to more effective and efficient explanations and procedures for helping clients make useful changes in their behavior. Now it’s time to apply his pragmatic approach to pragmatic-based research, so that our clients can more efficiently achieve their behavior change goals.
 

Straying From Skinner’s Pragmatic Approach: Threats to Behavior Analysis and ABAI

HENRY D. SCHLINGER (California State University, LA)
Abstract:

Several recent developments that have grown out of behavior analysis have, to varying degrees, strayed from Skinner’s pragmatic approach to the study of behavior and, therefore, threaten the scientific and theoretical framework of behavior analysis and, by extension, the Association for Behavior Analysis International. They are delayed discounting, relational frame theory (RFT)/acceptance and commitment theory (ACT), positive behavior support (PBS), and the Behavior Analysis Certification Board (BACB). Each, in my opinion, has contributed to the erosion of the basic scientific foundation upon which behavior analysis is built. The combined effect is, to paraphrase B. F. Skinner by way of Mike Perone, the “circumvention of an operant analysis,” moving our discipline from being largely analytic to one that is increasingly descriptive and technological. One conclusion that can be drawn from this dramatic change is that those of us who consider ourselves true behavior analysts, that is, those who actually analyze behavior—not certified behavior analysts or behavior scientists—now possibly find ourselves in the minority. My point in this talk is that straying from Skinner’s pragmatic approach and the experimental and theoretical foundations of behavior analysis will dilute our science and, ultimately, our discipline.

 

Behavior Analytic Pragmatism in Research and Practice

JAY MOORE (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee)
Abstract:

Pragmatic considerations tend not to be uniformly well understood in behavior analytic research and practice. According to pragmatism, the value of an analytical or explanatory statement is found in its practical implications in the world of human affairs, rather than in some claim that it represents a metaphysical truth or reality. In this regard, the contemplative forms of science, such as the development of equations and models, are sometimes distinguished from the technological, such as interventions aimed at prediction and control. This presentation argues that these forms are more usefully understood as continuous than dichotomous. Equations and models are presumably derived from prior efforts to predict and control. These forms are valuable because of the further opportunities for prediction and control that they occasion, rather than any claims they represent laws of nature. In the applied arena, treatment fidelity and effect size surely seek to highlight pragmatic considerations for interventions. However, the complexity of clients’ histories and the setting sometimes makes the practical contribution of an intervention difficult to assess, especially when the intervention is balanced against ethical considerations. Throughout, the value of scientific statements in behavior analysis lies in the identification of the participating factors in contingencies.

 
Skinner's Radical Behaviorism: Characteristics and Applications for the Continuing Development of Behavior Analysis
SAM LEIGLAND (Gonzaga University)
Abstract: Skinner's pragmatic, systematic and comprehensive approach to science, radical behaviorism, is the scientific foundation of the field of behavior analysis. The interactive development of the experimental analysis of behavior as a research field and radical behaviorism as a system of science has produced a scientific field of unparalleled effectiveness and scope. Examples of behavior-analytic research will be presented which illustrate the range of themes explored empirically and through radical behaviorist interpretation of empirical research from other fields. Examples include programs of research within the field of behavior analysis, the role of private events in a comprehensive analysis of behavior, the functional analysis of philosophical terms, the radical behaviorist interpretation of research findings from fields such as language development, and basic and applied work on verbal behavior, including processes of complex derived stimulus functions such as stimulus equivalence and relational frames. Such examples illustrate the central importance of Skinner's pragmatism in his science of behavior; the perspective favors uselfullness over "theoretical" goals. Further, radical behaviorism may itself be viewed as area of research in behavior analysis, joining the basic, applied and clinical areas of behavior analysis.
 
 
Panel #220
CE Offered: BACB
An Update on the Behavior Analyst Certification Board
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom EF
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: James E. Carr, Ph.D.
Chair: James E. Carr (Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
JAMES E. CARR (Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
BRIDGET A. TAYLOR (Alpine Learning Group)
NEIL TIMOTHY MARTIN (Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
Abstract:

The panelists will discuss recent developments at the Behavior Analyst Certification Board (BACB). The most current data on the BACB’s certification programs will be provided: Board Certified Behavior Analyst, Board Certified Assistant Behavior Analyst, and Registered Behavior Technician. In addition, a number of recent and impending developments at the BACB will be described, including changes to certification standards, various international development activities, and the transfer of the VCS program to ABAI.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Behavior analysts

Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to describe recent BACB data trends. Participants will be able to describe the BACB’s recent developments. Participants will be able to describe key facets of the BACB’s international development efforts.
Keyword(s): BACB, certification, professional issues
 
 
Symposium #221
CE Offered: BACB
Eating Well and on the Move: Health and Fitness Interventions for Typically Developing Adults
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 1-3
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Marianne L. Jackson (California State University, Fresno)
CE Instructor: Marianne L. Jackson, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The benefits of regular physical activity and healthy eating are well known. Despite this, adherence to such regimes is often weak. As a result, interventions rooted in the principles of Applied Behavior Analysis have become increasingly popular and have been shown to be effective; however, many of these are limited to the application of direct acting reinforcers, and once removed, the effects are often short lived. Interventions based on verbal processes and non-associative processes may prove to be effective and allow for more enduring results. This symposium will present three papers examining the effectiveness of such interventions. The first presentation will examine the use of joint control procedures to increase acquisition rates for individuals in a group fitness setting. The second paper will examine the influence of habituation and satiation on food consumption with college students, and finally, the third paper will be a review and analysis of the effectiveness of interventions based on Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) on healthy eating behavior. Discussion of the results and overall implications will follow.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Healthy Eating, Joint Control, Mindfulness, Physical activity
Target Audience:

Graduate students, practitioners, researchers.

Learning Objectives: Learning Objectives: 1) Describe joint control procedures 2) Describe habituation and sensitization and the role they may play in food consumption 3) Describe one behavioral principle that underlies mindfulness-based interventions for healthy eating
 
Joint Control and the Acquisition of Sequences in a Group Exercise Setting
Natalie Arreola (California State University, Fresno), MARIANNE L. JACKSON (California State University, Fresno)
Abstract: Adults often cite lack of enjoyment among their reasons for not exercising, and research has suggested that increased competence in a form of physical activity leads to increased reports of enjoyment and greater adherence. Given this, focusing on skill acquisition may help maintain engagement in physical activities, allowing individuals to reap many of the related benefits. This study evaluated the effects of a joint control procedure on skill acquisition with 15 adult participants, in a group exercise format, using a multiple-probe design. After baseline probes with one sequence, the joint control intervention was implemented with a second sequence. During the intervention, participants were taught to tact each movement, to echo the verbal sequence of movements in each sub-section, and to engage in a self-echoic verbal sequence while the engaging in the sequence of moves themselves. Percentage of correct movements was recorded as the main dependent variable. Probes were conducted with the original sequence and a third sequence to test for generalization. All participants showed increases in the percentage of correct moves and generalization of the effects to a third sequence.
 
Examining the Effects of Olfactory Cues on Food Consumption
MINDY GOMEZ (California State University, Fresno), Marianne L. Jackson (California State University, Fresno), Nicholas L Vitale (California State University Fresno)
Abstract: Obesity has become a major health epidemic and over consumption of food is estimated to be a contributing factor. Specifically, the alluring sensory properties of food, such as olfactory cues, found in the environment may be one variable that contributes to overconsumption. Research on olfactory food cues has been mixed. On one side, research supports the idea that olfactory food cues can establish food as a reinforcer and increase food consumption. On the other side, studies demonstrate that olfactory cues can decrease food consumption. However, habituation research may explain both phenomena as sensitization and habituation, supporting the finding that olfactory food cues can both increase and decrease responding to food. The current study examined the effects of olfactory food cue exposure lengths on food consumption. Initial results suggest that a shorter exposure time (5 min) results in higher levels of food consumption, suggesting a sensitization effect, whereas a longer exposure time (15 min) results in lower levels of food consumption, suggesting a habituation effect. Final probes introduced a different food cue to test for stimulus specificity as a defining characteristic of habituation.
 
Mind Your Peas and Carrots: A Review and Radical Behavioral Conceptual Analysis of Mindfulness-Based Eating Interventions
MIA BROUSSEAU (University of Southern California), Jonathan J. Tarbox (University of Southern California; FirstSteps for Kids)
Abstract: Mindfulness-based strategies such as those used in Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) are increasingly used for craving and weight management as well as for behaviors related to disordered eating. A growing body of research in the clinical psychology literature provides evidence that these approaches can be effective in changing eating behaviors. However, few studies have examined the effects of these strategies in controlled settings, while pulling apart which components of the strategies are accountable for success. Fewer still have attempted to identify the behavioral mechanisms that may be responsible for behavior change in these interventions. This review will evaluate recent literature and examine evidence for effects of mindfulness-based interventions on eating behaviors. In cases where treatments have been effective, we attempt a radical behavioral conceptual analysis of what behavioral principles account for effectiveness. We discuss implications for future research and, especially, implications for behavior analytic approaches to improving eating behavior.
 
 
Symposium #224
CE Offered: BACB
Injuries Observed in Functional Classes of Self-Injurious Behavior
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom C
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jennifer N. Haddock (Johns Hopkins School of Medicine, Kennedy Krieger Institute )
Discussant: SungWoo Kahng (Rutgers University)
CE Instructor: Jennifer N. Haddock, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Self-injurious behavior (SIB) is common among individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities. Little is known about the relations between the forms and functions of SIB and the injuries it produces, yet there is reason to believe relations may exist. Hausman et al. examined the relations between automatic and social reinforcement functions of SIB and the location, type, and severity of injuries it produced in 64 individuals hospitalized for SIB. Results indicated that, of the 55% of individuals with injuries, engaging in a single topography of SIB increased risk of injury, and automatically reinforced SIB increased risk of head injury, specifically. Similarly, Rooker et al. examined the physical characteristics of SIB-produced injuries across groups of individuals with socially reinforced SIB and Subtypes 2 and 3 automatically reinforced SIB (see Hagopian et al., 2017). Results indicated that Subtype 2 automatically reinforced SIB produced the most frequent and severe injuries. Further, an inverse relation was found between the level of differentiation in the functional analysis and the number of injuries across groups. Although results of both studies are preliminary, they suggest the function of SIB may influence the severity and location of injuries produced. Implications for future research and clinical practice will be discussed.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): functional analysis, injuries, self-injurious behavior
 

Examination of Injury Characteristics Across Functional Classes of Self-Injurious Behavior for 35 Individuals

NICOLE LYNN HAUSMAN (Kennedy Krieger Institute; Johns Hopkins School of Medicine), Griffin Rooker (Kennedy Krieger Institute; Johns Hopkins School of Medicine), Alyssa Fisher (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Meagan K. Gregory (Kennedy Krieger Institute; Johns Hopkins School of Medicine), Jennifer Lawell (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute; Johns Hopkins School of Medicine)
Abstract:

Limited research has examined how the functions of self-injurious behavior (SIB) relate to the production of injuries and the location, type, or severity of those injuries. In the current study, clinical and medical records were coded for 64 individuals hospitalized for SIB. When injuries were present, the physical properties of SIB and injuries were assessed across groups of individuals with automatically and socially maintained SIB. Results indicated that injuries were observed for 35 of the individuals who engaged in SIB. Individuals who engaged in a single form of SIB were more likely to have injuries (p < .05). Further, individuals with SIB maintained by automatic reinforcement had significantly more severe injuries to the head than those in the social group (q < .05, p = .0132, H = 12.54). Although results are preliminary, the results provide evidence that the function of SIB may influence the severity and location of injuries produced.

 

Examination of Injury Characteristics Across Functional Subtypes/Subcategories of Self-Injurious Behavior

GRIFFIN ROOKER (Kennedy Krieger Institute; Johns Hopkins School of Medicine), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute; Johns Hopkins School of Medicine), Jessica Becraft (Kennedy Krieger Institute; Johns Hopkins School of Medicine), Noor Javed (Kennedy Kreiger Institute), Alyssa Fisher (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Katharine Finney (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract:

Self-injurious behavior (SIB) is inherently problematic because it can lead to injuries, including those that are quite severe and may result in loss of function or permanent disfigurement. There is reason to suspect that the function of SIB can affect its form, and consequently the injuries that SIB produces. The current study classified the physical characteristics of injuries across groups of individuals with automatically reinforced SIB (ASIB Subtypes 2 and 3) and socially reinforced SIB (attention and tangibly maintained). Differences were identified between groups, with individuals with ASIB Subtype 2 having the most frequent and severe injuries. Further, an inverse relation was found between the level of differentiation in the functional analysis and the number of injuries across groups. Additional research is needed to replicate these findings, and determine how the function of SIB affects the injuries it produces.

 
 
Symposium #225
CE Offered: BACB
Toilet Training Across the Lifespan: Recent Advances and Recommendations
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: DDA/DEV; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Joseph D. Dracobly (University of North Texas)
Discussant: Richard G. Smith (University of North Texas)
CE Instructor: Richard G. Smith, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Regardless of an individual's age, toilet training is a critical life skill. Seminal behavioral research on toilet training was conducted with adults (e.g., Adrian & Foxx, 1971). As early intervention for children with autism has expanded, more recent research on toilet training has focused on evaluations with you children (e.g., Greer, Neidert, & Dozier, 2016; Tarbox, Williams, & Friman, 2004). However, needs may vary based on an individual's age. For example, after learning to eliminate in a toilet, young children may have a limited history with using the bathroom independently. This may require specific training on approaching the bathroom for eliminations. Later in life, individuals may have a long history of problematic behavior that interferes with independent self-care skills. Therefore, the purpose of this symposium is to present recent research on issues unique to participants from distinct developmental periods: early childhood and mature adulthood. The authors will present two evaluations of procedures designed to address issues prevalent in each developmental period (self initiations for young children and problem behavior that interferes with toilet usage for an adult). Finally, our discussant will provide recommendations on identifying issues unique to individuals of differing ages and ideas for methods to address these issues.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Adults, Toilet Training, Young Children
Target Audience:

Researchers interested in the development of self-care skills; Practitioners who work with young children and older adults

Learning Objectives: 1. Describe toilet-training issues unique to individuals of different ages. 2. Describe an evaluation of teaching self-iniation skills to young children and an evaluation of reinforcement to reduce SIB that interferes with eliminations in a toilet and reinforcement to increase eliminations in a toilet 3. Describe other toilet-training issues that may be relevant to individuals of different agents and at least one method to address these issues
 

Establishing Appropriate Toileting Behavior in an Adult Female With Developmental Disabilities and Severe Self-Injurious Behavior

KATHLEEN ANN BAYLISS (University of North Texas), Richard G. Smith (University of North Texas)
Abstract:

Incontinence can adversely impact an individual’s quality of life, often increasing the likelihood of physical ailment, poor hygiene, stigmatization, disruption of schedule, and restriction of activities (Kroeger & Sorensen-Burnworth, 2009). Previous research suggests that multiple demographic factors may produce barriers to acquiring and maintaining continence. Such factors include: age, IQ, mobility, available resources and the prevalence of disturbing behavior patterns (Lohmann, Eyman & Lask, 1967; Eyman, Olmstead, Grossman & Call, 1993; Sadler & Merkert, 1977; Kahng, Iwata & Lewin, 2002). Our participant was a 51 year-old woman, diagnosed with a profound intellectual disability, who engaged in high rates of severe self-injurious behaviors (SIB) predominantly in the forms of head banging and head hitting. A changing criterion design and systematic generalization was implemented to enable appropriate toileting behavior in the natural environment. Treatment consisted of conjugate reinforcement for optimal toilet positioning with the absence of SIB, episodic positive reinforcement of eliminating in the toilet, and programed generalization across environments and staff. Results showed the maintenance of optimal toilet positioning, decreases in SIB (under 1 instance per min), and appropriate elimination in 96.3% of all available sessions. Direct support staff were trained to implement the program with 100% fidelity.

 
An Evaluation of Methods for Teaching Young Children to Self-Initiate Toileting
ALI MARKOWITZ VICKSTROM (University of Kansas), Stephanie M. Glaze (The University of Kansas), Pamela L. Neidert (The University of Kansas)
Abstract: Toileting is an essential developmental milestone for young children and a step toward independence. The majority of behavioral toilet-training research has relied on complex multicomponent training packages (Kroeger & Sorensen-Burnworth, 2009). Most of these training programs do not directly target self-initiations. To date, we have evaluated the effects of a treatment package with 6 young children within the context of a preschool classroom. Treatment consists of the use of underwear, response-dependent sit schedules, and differential reinforcement of three target behaviors: appropriate eliminations, accidents, and self-initiations. Results showed overall improvements in appropriate eliminations and accidents (4 of 6 children) and accuracy of self-initiated toileting (3 of 6 children). Results are discussed in terms of response-dependent versus arbitrary sit schedules, treatment efficiency, and potential requisite skills required for successful toilet training with young children.
 
 
Special Event #227
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
CHOICE: Session 2
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD North
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Chair: Elizabeth Kyonka (University of New England)
CE Instructor: Elizabeth Kyonka, Ph.D.
 

CHOICE: Influencing Preferences for Conditions With and Without Choice-Making Opportunities

Abstract:

When provided with the opportunity to select between conditions in which multiple responses may produce reinforcement or conditions in which one response produces reinforcement, human and non-human animals more often select (i.e., display preference for) the conditions associated with multiple response options (i.e., choice-making conditions). However, this finding is neither static within, nor universal across participants. This data-based presentation will discuss learning histories and variations in choice presentation methods which impact these preferences.

 
JEFFREY TIGER (Marquette University)
 

Dr. Tiger is an associate professor of psychology and the behavior analysis program director at Marquette University. He completed his Ph.D. in Behavioral Psychology at the University of Kansas under the guidance of Greg Hanley and a postdoctoral fellowship at the University of Nebraska Medical Center with Wayne Fisher. Dr. Tiger is a Board Certified Behavior Analyst and licensed behavior analyst in the state of Wisconsin. He has served on the board of editors of Behavior Analysis in Practice and the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis (JABA) and is a current Associate Editor for JABA. He also received the B. F. Skinner New Researcher Award in 2012, awarded by Division 25 of the APA. Dr. Tiger’s research emphasizes the development of effective intervention practices for individuals with developmental disabilities, while extending our knowledge of the basic processes that result in behavior change. Some examples of his research include evaluating the value of choice-making opportunities, developing stimulus control over social behavior through multiple schedule arrangements, and teaching braille related skills to individuals with and without visual impairments.

 

CHOICE: Variability as a Determinant of Food and Cocaine Choice in Rhesus Monkeys

Abstract:

Relative to nondrug reinforcers, illicit drugs may be uncertain or variable in terms of their availability, quality, price, and time and effort to obtain. Thus, variability may be an important aspect that differs for illicit drugs relative to nondrug alternatives. Research has demonstrated that reinforcers available under variable schedules of reinforcement are generally chosen over reinforcers offered under fixed schedules. As such, illicit drugs may more effectively compete with more predictable, nondrug alternatives, perhaps due to an inherent variability of the conditions associated with the acquisition of illicit drugs. Conversely, drug choice could be reduced by making nondrug reinforcers available under variable schedules. To examine these issues, male and female rhesus monkeys are given choices between fixed and variable schedules of cocaine or food. In control conditions, both schedules are a fixed-ratio (FR) 50, 100, or 200. In test conditions, the schedule of cocaine or food delivery is changed to a mixed-ratio (MR) 50, 100 or 200 on one lever and an equal on average FR on the opposite lever. At sufficiently large MR values, choice of cocaine or food under an MR schedule tends to be greater than choice of the same reinforcer under an FR schedule. However, we see individual differences in the degree to which MR schedules are chosen across different cocaine doses and schedule values. Our findings suggest that variable availability could contribute to excessive allocation of behavior toward procuring illicit drugs at the expense of more predictable, nondrug alternatives, and this effect appears likely to persist during periods of scarce drug access.

 
SALLY HUSKINSON (University of Mississippi Medical Center)
 

Dr. Sally Huskinson is currently an Assistant Professor in the Division of Neurobiology and Behavior Research in the Department of Psychiatry and Human Behavior at the University of Mississippi Medical Center. As an undergraduate, she worked with Dr. Erin Rasmussen at Idaho State University where she earned her bachelor’s degree (2007) in psychology. She went on to earn her master’s (2011) and doctoral (2012) degrees in psychology at West Virginia University with the mentorship of Dr. Karen Anderson. In 2012, Dr. Huskinson went to the University of Mississippi Medical Center to complete a postdoctoral fellowship in behavioral pharmacology with Dr. William Woolverton until his untimely death in 2013. Dr. Huskinson finished her postdoctoral training with Drs. Kevin Freeman and James Rowlett, also at the University of Mississippi Medical Center where she currently resides. Her research interests are in drug abuse with an emphasis on drug self-administration and choice procedures, including delay discounting and uncertain drug access.

 
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe features of providing choice-making opportunities which may contribute to preference for these conditions; (2) describe histories of differential reinforcement that may be arranged to enhance the reinforcing efficacy of choice-making opportunities; (3) explain how uncertain access to illicit drugs might influence behavioral allocation between drug and nondrug reinforcers; (4) describe how uncertain access to a drug can be evaluated using choice procedures in the laboratory; (5) describe how we might use our knowledge about variable schedules to inform treatments for substance use disorders.
 
 
 
Invited Tutorial #228
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Best Practices in BCBA Supervision
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: PRA; Domain: Service Delivery
BACB CE Offered. CE Instructor: Dana Reinecke, Ph.D.
Chair: Mark D. Shriver (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
Presenting Authors: : DANA REINECKE (Capella University; SupervisorABA), CHERYL DAVIS (The Sage Colleges; SupervisorABA)
Abstract:

Several recommended practices for behavior-analytic supervision have recently been identified (e.g., Sellers, Valentino, & LeBlanc, 2016; Turner, Fischer, & Luiselli, 2016). These include establishing a committed and positive relationship, evaluating the effects of supervision, incorporating ethics and professional development, continuing a professional relationship after certification, and establishing a plan for structured competence- and performance-based evaluation. This tutorial will review specific strategies to address each of these practices. Given the recent emphasis on training and monitoring of supervisee skills throughout training (Behavior Analyst Certification Board, 2017), we will focus on how to use the BACB task list to implement competence- and performance-based evaluation throughout supervision. Additionally, we will make suggestions for the ongoing evaluation of the effects of supervision.

Instruction Level: Advanced
Target Audience:

New and experienced BACB supervisors who have completed the 8-hour supervision training.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe ways to establish an effective supervisor-supervisee relationship, and to continue a collegial relationship after certification is obtained; (2) describe ways to incorporate ethics and professional development into supervision; (3) describe strategies for competence- and performance-based evaluation of supervisee skills during supervision; (4) describe strategies for the ongoing evaluation of the effects of supervision.
 
DANA REINECKE (Capella University; SupervisorABA), CHERYL DAVIS (The Sage Colleges; SupervisorABA)

Dana Reinecke is a doctoral level Board-Certified Behavior Analyst (BCBA-D) and a New York State Licensed Behavior Analyst (LBA).  Dana is a Core Faculty member in the Applied Behavior Analysis department at Capella University. Dana provides training and consultation to school districts, private schools, agencies, and families for individuals with disabilities. She has presented original research and workshops on the treatment of autism and applications of ABA at regional, national, and international conferences. She has published her research in peer-reviewed journals, written chapters in published books, and co-edited books on ABA and autism. Current areas of research include use of technology to support students with and without disabilities, self-management training of college students with disabilities, and online teaching strategies for effective college and graduate education. Dana is actively involved in the New York State Association for Behavior Analysis (NYSABA), serving as President in 2017 and 2018.

Cheryl Davis is a licensed and certified behavior analyst as well as a special education teacher who received her doctoral degree from Endicott College in Applied Behavior Analysis. Cheryl is an Assistant Professor at The Sage Colleges, as well as owner of 7 Dimensions Consulting, LLC. She received a Master’s of Science Degree in Intensive Special Education from Simmons College in Boston, MA after attending The University of Connecticut where she received a bachelor’s degree in Human Development. Cheryl then pursued her BCBA, while working in a world renown ABA school. With over 25 years of experience working with children and families with autism, developmental disabilities, and related disorders, Cheryl specializes in effective supervision for upcoming BCBA/BCaBA candidates. She has a passion for supervision, in both providing it to people who are in locations with limited access to behavior analysis and working with other supervisors to develop best supervision practices. Cheryl also specializes in skill acquisition programming for clients in need, online teaching, and active student responding. She has had experience as a supervisor, teacher, job coach, home therapist, residential supervisor, public school consultant, staff trainer and professor. Cheryl has extensive experience in developing training topics for both parents and teaching staff.

 
 
Symposium #229
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Research on Teaching Graph Construction and Visual Analysis
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Rouge
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Katie Wolfe (University of South Carolina)
CE Instructor: Katie Wolfe, Ph.D.
Abstract: The graphic depiction and visual analysis of data is integral to the science of applied behavior analysis, and it is important to investigate how to most effectively teach these critical skills to new researchers and practitioners. This symposium consists of the three data-based papers that describe recent research on teaching graph construction and visual analysis. The first paper will describe a component analysis of instruction using task analysis to create reversal design graphs in Excel. The second paper will describe the results of a single-case study evaluating the effects of a clinical decision-making model on the accuracy of a) visual analysis and b) data-based decisions made by Registered Behavior Technicians (RBTs). The third paper will report results of a survey of Behavior Analyst Certification Board Verified Course Sequence (VCS) Coordinators on the content and instructional methods used to teach visual and statistical analysis of single-case research data in VCS courses. The results of each study will be described with implications for training future researchers and practitioners in the graphic representation and analysis of data.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): graphic representation, single-case research, single-subject research, visual analysis
Target Audience: Current BCBAs, researchers, faculty members
Learning Objectives: 1. At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to describe the effective components of task analysis instruction for creating reversal design graphs. 2. At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to describe the evidence for using a clinical decision making model to improve data-based decision making. 3. At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to describe how instructors in VCS sequences report that they are teaching the visual and statistical analysis of data.
 

Optimizing Computer-Based Instructions for Visualizing Data in Microsoft Excel Through Component Analysis

BRYAN TYNER (CUNY Graduate Center), Steven Floumanhaft (Queens College, CUNY), Daniel Mark Fienup (Columbia University)
Abstract:

Task-analysis instruction is widely used for teaching and learning how to visualize data using computer software. Numerous studies demonstrate the efficacy of specific task analyses for teaching students and behavior analysts how to create graphs; however, little is known about the properties of task-analysis instruction that promote skill acquisition. Findings are reported from two component analyses of the instructional content presented in a computer-based tutorial for creating a reversal-design graph in Microsoft Excel. The first study demonstrated the relative effects on learner performance of describing and presenting images of: (a) stimuli to which a learner must respond, (b) the target responses required to create the graph, and (c) stimulus changes in the graph and the software's graphical user interface that are produced by correct responses. The second study further analyzed the relative effects of presenting text and images on graphing performance. The findings informed the development of a checklist of best practices for designing and evaluating graphing instruction, which will be shared.

 

Training Front-Line Employees to Conduct Visual Analysis Using a Clinical Decision-Making Model

KAILIE JAE KIPFMILLER (Michigan State University), Matthew T. Brodhead (Michigan State University), Katie Wolfe (University of South Carolina), Kate La Londe (Michigan State University), Emma Seliina Sipila (Michigan State University), M. Y. Savana Bak (Michigan State University), Marisa H Fisher (Michigan State University)
Abstract:

Behavior analysts visually analyze graphs to interpret data in order to make data-based decisions. Front-line employees, such as the Registered Behavior Technician, are the forefront of behavioral intervention and responsible for its direct implementation. Though front-line employees implement behavioral interventions on a daily basis, they are not often trained to interpret these data. A clinical decision-making model may aid front- line employees in learning how to interpret graphs. Such training will allow front-line employees to evaluate whether the data suggest a learner is struggling with a prescribed intervention, if variations in treatment implementation may be affecting obtained data, and to identify these potential outcomes to provide optimal and individualized therapy. A multiple-baseline-across-participants design was used to evaluate the effectiveness of a clinical decision-making model on the percentage of correct clinical decisions interpreted from line graphs. All of the participants increased their percentage of correct responses after the introduction of the clinical decision- making model. Two of the 8 participants required additional feedback. The implications of these findings are discussed.

 
The Analysis of Single-Case Research Data: Current Instructional Practices
MEKA MCCAMMON (University of South Carolina), Katie Wolfe (University of South Carolina)
Abstract: Visual analysis is the predominant method of analysis in single-case research (SCR). However, most research suggests that agreement between visual analysts is often suboptimal. Poor agreement may be due to a lack of clear guidelines and criteria for visual analysis, as well as variability in how individuals are trained. To date, no research has investigated how instructors are teaching this foundational skill to future researchers and practitioners. Therefore, we developed a 36-item survey containing questions about the content and methods used to teach visual and statistical analysis of SCR data in Verified Course Sequences (VCS). Four independent Board Cerified Behavior Analysts reviewed the survey for clarity and comprehensiveness, and then we distributed it via the VCS Coordinator Listserv to approximately 200 VCS coordinators. Thirty-seven (19%) instructors completed the survey. Results suggest that there is variability across instructors in some fundamental aspects of data analysis (i.e., number of replications required for experimental control), but a great deal of consistency in others (i.e., emphasizing visual over statistical analysis). Additional results will be discussed, along with their implications both for teaching students to analyze SCR data and for conducting additional research on content addressed in behavior-analytic training programs.
 
 
Symposium #230
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Advances in Extending Equivalence-Based Instruction Protocols and Research Designs
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Fairmont, Second Level, International Ballroom
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Bryan J. Blair (Long Island University - Brooklyn)
CE Instructor: Bryan J. Blair, Ph.D.
Abstract: In recent years, research in the area of Equivalence-Based Instruction (EBI) has demonstrated that a variety of skills can be taught using basic EBI experimental preparations, including undergraduate and graduate academic content and behavior analytic skills. EBI is approaching a status as an evidence-based practice, however, many questions remain (e.g., training/testing protocols, use of compound/complex stimuli, prompting, response topography, fluency, class size, reinforcement schedule, instructional feedback, EBI system design, research design etc.) The first study in the current symposium addresses some of these issues (compound/complex stimuli, response topography) while teaching typically developing adults complex socially relevant skills (Skinner’s verbal operants) using computer-based learning tools with video vignettes. In the second study, response fluency, as opposed to accuracy, was assessed as a dependent variable and implications will be discussed. The third paper discusses issues and challenges related to demonstrating experimental control in pretest-posttest EBI research studies (history and maturation threats to internal validity) and proposes a possible solution.
Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): fluency, research design, stimulus equivalence, verbal behavior
Target Audience: ABA practitioners (post-graduate) and researchers.
Learning Objectives: N/A
 

Using Equivalence-Based Instruction With Video Vignettes to Teach Skinner’s Verbal Operants

BRYAN J. BLAIR (Long Island University - Brooklyn), Lesley A. Shawler (Endicott College)
Abstract:

While equivalence-based instruction has been thoroughly investigated using a variety of stimulus-stimulus relations (e.g., auditory-visual, visual-visual etc.) across settings and participants, the formation of equivalence classes with video stimuli has yet to be fully systematically investigated. Videos are widely used by learners of all ages in training and educational settings, and the widespread availability of high-speed internet across devices makes an investigation into how to incorporate video-based stimuli into emergent learning protocols socially relevant and necessary. The current study evaluated the use of video vignettes to teach Skinner’s verbal operants to ABA practitioners, and the establishment of six 4-member equivalence classes (the elementary operants) where only two relations in each class were directly trained. Specifically, the purpose of the current study was to assess whether the use of video vignettes as part of an EBI system using selection-based conditional discrimination and match-to-sample training, and topography-based tact training, would result in the establishment of equivalence classes and emergent responding across response topographies. Initial data suggest that, like other stimulus-stimulus relations, compound auditory-visual stimuli, such as videos of applied vignettes, can be used to form equivalence classes with minimal direct training and a near immediate emergence of derived relational responding. Implications and future research questions will also be discussed.

 
Advancing the Analysis of Rate of Responding in a Stimulus Equivalence Paradigm
HAZEL BAKER (Advances Learning Center and LEARN Behavioral), Ginette Wilson Bishop (Advances Learning Center and LEARN Behavioral), Katherine A. Johnson (Advances Learning Center and LEARN Behavioral)
Abstract: Both stimulus equivalence and fluency-building are areas of behavior-analytic research that have fostered much replication and academic progress. To date, the research in these areas has not comprehensively examined the outcomes of equivalence-based instruction on rate of responding. The purpose of this study was to examine the effects of teaching trained relations in an equivalence paradigm on rate of accurate responding. Typical adults were recruited to participate in a basic study that used accuracy-based teaching methods to train specific relations, and measure rate of accurate responding in addition to percentage of accurate responding throughout the protocol. The results suggest that when accurate responding emerges, rates of responding do not match trained relations as clearly. Additionally, categories of emergent responding (such as reflexive, transitive, and symmetric relations) may occur at different rates, and be impacted differently by the teaching procedure. Because these results are the first single-subject analysis of this sort, implications should be considered preliminary while research on the topic progresses. Applications of equivalence-based instruction continues to be informed by progression of basic research, including implications that different measurements of outcomes inform different understandings of equivalence.
 

The “Air Gap” Research Design: Demonstrating Experimental Control With Participant Isolation in Within-Subjects Research Designs

PAUL MAHONEY, II (Amego, Inc.), Bryan J. Blair (Long Island University - Brooklyn)
Abstract:

Internal validity in research is demonstrated through the careful implementation of experimental designs and procedures that mitigate the impact of threats to validity or confounds caused by variables that are challenging to completely eliminate (e.g., opportunities to learn with another in other settings, participant abilities that change throughout study, and testing effects). Within-subject designs are uniquely able to reduce the threats to internal validity with repeated measurements of performances, the establishment of stable baseline responding, the measurement of effects of the repeated application of the independent variable, and the replication of the effects of the independent variable in a multiple-baseline design. However, in research with skill acquisition where gradual changes in learner performances are difficult to observe (e.g., in equivalence-based instruction (EBI) protocols in which skills are generally acquired quickly and posttests demonstrate the near immediate emergence of untrained responding), traditional experimental designs have been seen as insufficient in mitigating threats to internal validity. We discuss some of those criticisms and propose a possible solution based on experimental isolation that might control for threats to internal validity inherent in pretest-posttest designs, particularly in EBI research.

 
 
Symposium #231
CE Offered: BACB
Behavioral Indications of Welfare: How Behavior Analysts Contribute to Objective Measures of Animal Well-Being
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Alpine 1/2
Area: AAB; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Janie A Funk (University of Nevada, Reno)
Discussant: Megan Elizabeth Arant (Texas Tech University)
CE Instructor: Megan Elizabeth Arant, M.A.
Abstract:

Welfare can be a complex construct to define and measure. Some caretakers approach welfare in a topographical sense that is characterized by implementing certain environmental arrangements that are presumed to improve animal well-being. Alternatively, a functional approach can be taken which involves objective outcome measures. Identifying objective outcome measures comes with its own challenges and it is not always obvious if and how a behavior is related to welfare. We may consider welfare on a continuum that caretakers must consider and make decisions upon regarding what it means to make progress towards greater welfare of the animal. Furthermore, histories of the individual animal and species influence what efforts are required to assess and improve the animal’s well-being. Organizational contingencies may also make it difficult to sufficiently address welfare concerns. This symposium will provide examples of how behavior analysts have contributed to behavior-informed welfare measures in a variety of applied settings. Insight into the challenges of navigating organizational constraints will be discussed, as well as recommendations for collaborating with other professionals towards improved welfare of animals.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): animal training, animal welfare, interdisciplinary collaboration
Target Audience:

Behavior analysts interested in utilizing our science and technology to positively influence the welfare of animals are encouraged to attend.

 
Solid Foundations: Behavioral Goal Setting to Improve Enrichment Evaluation
CHRISTY A. ALLIGOOD (Disney's Animal Kingdom and University of Florida)
Abstract: Modern zoos use environmental enrichment to provide animals with choices and opportunities for species typical behavior. The SPIDER model of environmental enrichment (Setting goals, Planning, Implementing, Documenting, Evaluating, Re-adjusting) was introduced in 2001 and is now a part of the accreditation standards of the Association of Zoos and Aquariums. Despite wide acceptance of the model, which includes an “Evaluation” component, zoos have long struggled to systematically evaluate enrichment efforts on an ongoing basis. One challenge is that environmental enrichment strategies are often item-based rather than behavior-based. This can lead to uncertainty in the evaluation process. In this presentation I will discuss the “Setting goals” element of the model and its importance as a foundation for behavior-based enrichment and systematic evaluation.
 
Advances in the Assessment and Measurement of Captive Animal Welfare
KATHRYN L. KALAFUT (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract: A common goal of captive animal settings is to create environments that allow animals to behave as naturally as possible. This is often measured in terms of welfare. Identifying and defining the variables that make up an animal’s welfare is a challenging task that requires intimate knowledge of both the species and individual. Welfare is dynamic and would optimally be measured continuously. Developing methods to continuously and reliably measure welfare adds another layer of complexity for captive animal settings, but does not need to be a limiting factor. The goal of this talk is to highlight how the utilization of current technology, basic knowledge in the experimental analysis of behavior, and intuitive collaborations can greatly enhance our knowledge of captive animal welfare. Examples will include current research being conducted by the presenter in collaboration with the Cincinnati Zoo and Botanical Garden, which includes the implementation of radio frequency identification technology to monitor swimming behavior in little blue penguins, an operant chamber-inspired board with Asian Elephants, and a lickometer to measure and reinforce water consumption in domestic and wild cats.
 

Assessing and Maintaining Welfare in Shelter Dogs Using Behavior Analysis

ERICA N. FEUERBACHER (Virginia Tech)
Abstract:

With improvements in shelter adoptions and reduced volume of animals entering many shelters, some shelters now have the ability to keep animals for longer periods of time until they are adopted. However, with this comes new challenges for keeping dogs behaviorally healthy during their stay at the shelter. This, coupled with most shelters limits on staff and resources, makes finding programs that are easily implemented essential. We will discuss research looking at assessing welfare of dogs in shelters using behavior and two programs that were focused on improving welfare while minimizing the impact on staff time and shelter resources. The two programs are co-housing shelter dogs and brief sleepovers. In the co-housing study, dog-friendly dogs were paired with another dog or kenneled alone and behavior was assessed over a seven-day period. The brief sleepover study evaluated dogs before, during, and after a one- or two-day sleepover with a volunteer foster. We will discuss what impacts those programs had on the behavior and welfare of shelter dogs and where they point for future interventions.

 

Shelter to Home Transitions: Sending Training Home With the Adopted Pet

TERRI M. BRIGHT (MSPCA Angell)
Abstract:

In an animal shelter, welfare ideally includes husbandry, enrichment, behavior assessment and training, as well as finding the right home for the animal. The right home ideally includes families who are motivated to train the pet to be a good family and community member. To further this mission, for animals with special behavioral needs, a pre-adoption behavioral counseling session was required that entailed a discussion of the problem behavior, what assessment had been done, and what training had been effective (or not). The adopter was then instructed in how to carry out the training before they took the animal home, and they reported progress as the animal made the adjustment with its new family. They then came back in in the following month to report as to how the training was going and to ask any questions. Along with other programs, this can be an effective model for adoption of animals with problem behaviors.

 
 
Symposium #232
CE Offered: BACB
Behaviour Analytic Research in a School for Children and Young Adults Diagnosed With Autism and a Learning Disability
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Lobby Level, Plaza Ballroom AB
Area: AUT/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Emma Hawkins (Jigsaw CABAS School)
Discussant: Emma Hawkins (Jigsaw CABAS School)
CE Instructor: Emma Hawkins, Ph.D.
Abstract:

This symposium reviews four studies conducted in a school for children and young adults diagnosed with autism and a learning disability. Teachers within the school are encouraged to replicate research conducted in other settings (schools and clinics) and to evaluate the results of their work. They are encouraged to conduct basic research to determine the effectiveness of different tactics in the classroom and also advanced research in terms of inducing emergent behaviour. The first study reviewed a variety of procedures for addressing vocal stereotypy and established the most effective procedure for each individual participant. The second study focused on establishing a more creative curriculum with embedded reinforcement to increase the rate of learning in the classroom. The final two studies focused on using multiple exemplar instruction to induce emergent behaviour: either the joining of speaker behaviour and writer behaviour or emergent intraverbal vocal responses. A school setting that encourages and reinforces research within its setting clearly results in positive outcomes for the student population.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

BCBAs

 
Evaluating the Effects of Non-Contingent Auditory Stimulation and Response Interruption and Redirection, With or Without Matched Stimulus, on Vocal Stereotypy
EMILY PEAK (Jigsaw CABAS School), Kate Hewett (Jigsaw CABAS School), Louise Stock (Jigsaw CABAS School), Mariann Szabo (Jigsaw CABAS School)
Abstract: The current study examines the effects of response interruption and redirection (RIRD) with and without matched stimulation, matched stimulation alone and non-contingent auditory stimulation on vocal stereotypy. Participants comprised of three males ranging in age form 9 years to 15 years. All participants had a diagnosis of autism and attended the same school setting. Participants emitted high levels of stereotypy in the form of humming, repeating words and phrases, high-pitched screams and squeals. Participants initially completed a series of assessments presented in a multiple baseline across participant design. Subsequent treatment sessions comprised of response interruption and redirection with matched and unmatched stimuli, matched stimuli alone and non-contingent auditory stimulation conditions presented in a multi-element design. Results showed that for Participant 1 the matched stimulus condition and the RIRD & matched stimulus condition were the most successful in reducing the duration of vocal stereotypy. For participants 2 and 3, non-contingent auditory stimulation was the most effective condition for reducing the vocal stereotypy emitted. Results are discussed in terms of future research and significance for the participants.
 

The Importance of a Creative Curriculum: The Use of Stimuli With Embedded Reinforcement to Decrease Learn Units to Criterion for Early Learners

HAYLEY LOUISE LOCKE (Jigsaw CABAS School), Kate Hewett (Jigsaw CABAS School)
Abstract:

The purpose of the study was to examine the effects of embedded reinforcement on engagement with curricular stimuli and acquisition of learning objectives for a 5 year old male with an autism spectrum disorder. Weekly learn units to criterion were compared for 6 weeks prior to the treatment; whilst the participant followed a typical individualised curriculum in an ABA school with a token economy reinforcement system in place. During the 6 week treatment phase the curricular stimuli was manipulated to incorporate the participants known reinforcers and key interests, all other conditions remained the same as baseline. Embedded reinforcement resulted in a significant decrease in learn units to criterion demonstrating an increased acquisition of learning objectives and indicating that individuals preferences and interests should be considered and creatively embedded into their curricular stimuli. Implications of these findings and further research suggested to address limitations of the study are discussed.

 

Effect of Multiple Exemplar Instruction on the Transfer of Stimulus Function Across Written and Vocal Spelling Responses

NATALIE LEOW-DYKE (Jigsaw CABAS School)
Abstract:

The purpose of this study was to determine the effect of multiple exemplar instruction on the transfer of stimulus function across writing and vocal spelling responses. The participant was a 13 year old boy with a diagnosis of autism. Prior to the onset of the study, he did not demonstrate joint stimulus control of spelling across saying and writing. Multiple exemplar instruction was utilised to induce this emergent behaviour. The participant required a modified multiple exemplar instruction procedure which included an additional opportunity to see the letters of the word after saying them and hear the letters of the word after writing them. The results showed an increase in the number of correct untaught responses to the initial set of words. Furthermore, when a novel set of words were taught as a written spelling response, the untaught vocal spelling response emerged. Similarly, when a further novel set of words were taught as a vocal spelling response, the untaught written topography emerged. The findings demonstrate the inducement of transfer of stimulus function across vocal spelling and writing as a result of MEI procedures. This has implications for incidental learning in the classroom once transfer of stimulus function has been acquired.

 

The Use of Multiple Exemplar Instruction to Induce Emergent Intraverbal Vocal Responses in Children Diagnosed With Autism

KATE HEWETT (Jigsaw CABAS School), Emma Hawkins (Jigsaw CABAS School)
Abstract:

The present study replicated a study by May, Hawkins, and Dymond (2012) by testing for the emergence of intraverbal vocal responses following tact training with four children diagnosed with autism. Participants were taught to tact the name and favourite food item of two contrived cartoon monsters in the presence of a picture of the monster. Following tact training, test probes revealed the emergence of untrained vocal intraverbals, in the absence of the pictures, in one participant. The present study therefore extended the original study by implementing multiple exemplar instruction with a different set of materials for the remaining three participants. Once the criterion was met on the multiple exemplar instruction procedure then the initial test for the emergence of intraverbal vocal responses was conducted. All three participants were successful with this post-test and a subsequent re-test using a novel set of stimuli. Using multiple exemplar instruction to induce emergent intraverbal vocal responses is discussed along with the limitations of this study.

 
 
Symposium #233
CE Offered: BACB
Current Trends and Recent Advancements in Safety Skills Instruction
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 1/2
Area: CBM; Domain: Translational
Chair: Douglas Kupferman (Caldwell University)
Discussant: Raymond G. Miltenberger (University of South Florida)
CE Instructor: Nancy Marchese, M.A.
Abstract:

Children are routinely exposed to potential hazards in everyday environments that may lead to injury, harm or even death. Safety skill instruction remains an important area of focus for scientist practitioners. This symposium will present four diverse papers focusing upon safety skills. The first paper will review strengths and gaps of safety skills research of individuals with ASD. The second paper will present research evaluating the extent to which BST conducted in a single context would evoke the safety response across a range of contexts. In the third paper, research on the use of social referencing to teach safety skills to toddlers with autism will be presented. The fourth paper will present findings on the use of videomodeling to establish differential responding to lures across known and unknown people. This symposium will commence with comments from an expert in safety skill instruction, Dr. Ray Miltenberger. Effective instructional strategies and areas of additional research will be discussed.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): safety skills
Target Audience:

scientist practitioners

Learning Objectives: To discuss behavioral approaches to safety skills instruction To discuss the role of BST safety skills To discuss the role of social referencing on safety skills To discuss the role of videomodeling on safety skills To discuss the role of stimulus control and safety skills
 
Teaching Safety Skills to Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorders: A Review of the Literature
(Applied Research)
NANCY MARCHESE (Breakthrough Autism), Linda A. LeBlanc (LeBlanc Behavioral Consulting LLC), Melissa Bottoni (Breakthrough Autism)
Abstract: Individuals with autism are at risk for a variety of unsafe home- and community-based injuries and dangerous situations. This talk reviews the experimental research on behavioral strategies for teaching safety skills to individuals with autism. Behavioral strategies are effective in teaching a range of safety skills (e.g., seeking assistance when lost, responding appropriately to dangerous stimuli). However, some safety skills are understudied (e.g., water safety, home-based safety). Additional research is needed to investigate the variables that impact maintenance and generalization of safety skills.
 

Effects of Behavioral Skills Training on the Stimulus Control of Safety Responding

(Applied Research)
NICOLE LEE (Caldwell University), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Kathryn M. Peterson (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Antonia R. Giannakakos (Manhattanville College)
Abstract:

Teaching individuals a safety response when they encounter a firearm may be one way to prevent accidental injuries or death. Previous researchers have used behavioral skills training (BST) with and without in-situ training to teach individuals with and without disabilities to engage in a safety response in the presence of a firearm. However, few studies have arranged BST to ensure the safety response occurred in response to a representative sample of all relevant stimulus features for which a response should be evoked. The purpose of the current study was to evaluate the extent to which BST conducted in a single context established stimulus control that would evoke the safety response across a range of contexts under which a dangerous stimulus could be encountered in a room in a house. All participants demonstrated a discriminated safety response following BST. Further, safety responses generalized across all contexts not associated with training for all participants.

 

The Use of Social Referencing to Teach Safety Skills to Toddlers With Autism

(Applied Research)
KATHRYN COUGER (NECC), Rebecca P. F. MacDonald (New England Center for Children)
Abstract:

The purpose of this study was to teach safety skills to 2 toddlers with autism through a social referencing chain. Experimental control came from a concurrent multiple probe design across stimulus categories within subjects, and a concurrent multiple probe design across stimulus sets. Participants were trained using differential reinforcement and least-to-most prompting to gaze shift from an item in a bin or a lunchbox to an adult and reach or use an “all done” response based on the adult’s facial expression. Mastery of the skill with the stimuli used in training were followed by social referencing probes where the child could not see the items within the bin or lunchbox and a novel items probe where unfamiliar items were presented in the bin and lunchbox. Results show acquisition of both discrimination between safe and dangerous stimuli and the maintenance of a social referencing chain in the presence of novel stimuli. Interobserver agreement was calculated for 31.6% of sessions and averaged 91.4% (range 75%-100%). These findings are discussed as they relate to the implications of teaching socially valid safety skills to toddlers with autism.

 

Effects of Video Modeling on Responding to Lures With Individuals With Autism Spectrum Disorder

(Applied Research)
CHRISTINA ABADIR (Caldwell University), Ruth M. DeBar (Caldwell University), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University)
Abstract:

Deficits in safety skills and communication place individuals with autism spectrum disorders (ASD) at risk of danger. Abduction prevention remains an understudied area. Video modeling has effectively resulted in the acquisition of safety skills for individuals with developmental disabilities and ASD. Existing research has yet to evaluate responding to lures from known people. The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effects of video modeling to teach appropriate responding to lures from strangers using a multiple probe across participants with an embedded adapted alternating treatments design. We extended research by assessing responding to lures from known people by securing a code word using video modeling as the sole intervention. In addition, we programmed for and assessed generalization using multiple lure types, confederates, and locations. Participants learned to appropriately respond to lures from strangers and known people after viewing a video model and generalized responding to novel community settings, people, and lures. Maintenance was assessed for three participants at least one week following mastery criteria and maintained the skills. Procedures, goals and outcomes were considered socially valid among parents, clinicians, and educators.

 
 
Symposium #235
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Basic and Translational Research Evaluating the Effects of Baseline and Treatment Duration on Resurgence
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom A
Area: DDA/EAB; Domain: Translational
Chair: Ashley Marie Fuhrman (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute )
Discussant: Timothy A. Shahan (Utah State University)
CE Instructor: Ashley Marie Fuhrman, M.S.
Abstract:

It is important for the experimental and applied domains of behavior analysis to collaborate. Recent basic and translational research has demonstrated that practitioners can use quantitative models (e.g., Behavioral Momentum Theory and Resurgence as Choice Theory) to improve applied treatments for socially significant behavior. The presentations in this symposium will discuss the implications of basic and translational research evaluating the effects of baseline and treatment duration on the resurgence of target behavior. The symposium will consist of four presentations followed by comments from Dr. Timothy Shahan. First, Holly Pericozzi will present on the effects of baseline reinforcement history as a mediator of the resurgence of target behavior in adults with developmental disabilities. Next, Madeleine Keevy and Kayla Randall will present studies evaluating the effects of treatment duration on the resurgence of problem behavior in children. Finally, Kaitlyn Browning will discuss the effects of treatment duration on the resurgence of target behavior in rats.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): functional communication, quantitative models, relapse, resurgence
Target Audience:

Practitioners, faculty, graduate students, and professionals

Learning Objectives: Attendees will be able to: 1. Describe how the duration of exposure to baseline reinforcement may serve as a mediator of resurgence of target responding, 2. Explain how Behavioral Momentum Theory and Resurgence as Choice Theory make differing predictions about the effects of treatment duration on resurgence, and 3. Describe how differences in the length of exposure to treatment may affect the resurgence of problem behavior.
 
Evaluation of Duration of Exposure to Baseline Reinforcement as Mediator of Resurgence
(Applied Research)
HOLLY G PERICOZZI (Vanderbilt University), Joseph Michael Lambert (Vanderbilt University), Eugenia Perry (Vanderbilt University), Cassandra Standish (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract: Resurgence is the reemergence of previously reinforced behavior after the reinforcement of an alternative behavior has been discontinued. When addressing challenging behavior, a failure to implement effective treatments with seamless fidelity could result in the resurgence of previously extinguished problem behavior. Ideally, practitioners could design treatment components that mitigate the effects of resurgence. For example, recent translational work targeting arbitrary human responses suggests that incorporating multiple-mand instruction into a serial training format could produce a recency effect and response reversion when functional reinforcement isn’t available (both would be desirable outcomes in clinical settings). However, a replication of these procedures with socially significant human behavior (i.e., problem behavior and mands) produced primacy effects with inconsistent reversion. One potential explanation for these disparate results, supported by contemporary theory, is that differences in duration of exposure to baseline schedules of reinforcement were responsible for observed effects. In this translational investigation, we employed two-component multiple-schedules across three adults with developmental disabilities to determine whether differential exposure to baseline schedules of reinforcement could mediate within-subject primacy and recency effects. Results were obtained with high interobserver agreement and show differentiated responding across components; which could have implications for the design of future translational models of research.
 
The Effects of Time in Extinction on Resurgence of Destructive Behavior in Children
(Applied Research)
MADELEINE DIANE KEEVY (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Wayne W. Fisher (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Billie Retzlaff (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Ashley Marie Fuhrman (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Andrew R. Craig (SUNY Upstate Medical University)
Abstract: Applied researchers have become increasingly interested in examining variables that contribute to the resurgence of destructive behavior. Behavioral Momentum Theory suggests time in extinction predicts obtained levels of resurgence, with higher levels of resurgence being observed following briefer exposures to extinction (Nevin & Shahan, 2011). Using a three-phase procedure, we examined resurgence of destructive behavior following relatively long and short exposures to functional communication training (i.e., differential reinforcement with extinction) for six children. Whereas Behavioral Momentum Theory predicts that having three times the number of sessions in Phase II will consistently reduce the level of resurgence of destructive behavior, this finding was observed in a minority of participants. Our results are consistent with other studies that have used a similar procedures and found time in extinction did not differentially impact resurgence. Therefore it may be that another conceptual framework, such as Resurgence as Choice Theory or Context Theory, is better able to account for the negligible differences observed in resurgence.
 

The Effects of Treatment Duration on Resurgence Using Resurgence as Choice Theory

(Applied Research)
KAYLA RECHELLE RANDALL (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Timothy A. Shahan (Utah State University), Wayne W. Fisher (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Ashley Marie Fuhrman (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Abstract:

In functional communication training (FCT), resurgence of destructive behavior may occur when reinforcement is not delivered for the alternative functional communication response (e.g., when the caregiver is busy with a sibling). Researchers have used quantitative models such as Behavioral Momentum Theory (BMT; Shahan & Sweeney, 2011) and Resurgence as Choice Theory (RaC; Shahan & Craig, 2017) to make predictions about this type of treatment relapse. Both BMT and RaC suggest that more time arranged in extinction for target responding (e.g., destructive behavior) will lessen resurgence. Whereas BMT would predict time in extinction as a highly influential variable on the resurgence of target behavior, RaC would predict time in extinction may not be as influential. Basic and applied investigations (e.g., Wacker et al., 2011; Winterbauer, Lucke, & Bouton, 2013) have generated mixed findings about treatment duration and its effect on resurgence. In this study, we exposed participants with destructive behavior to three durations (i.e., short, moderate, and extended) of FCT which each consisted of three phases (i.e., baseline, FCT, and extinction) to clarify the necessary duration of treatment to produce the least amount of resurgence.

 
Treatment Duration and Resurgence
(Basic Research)
KAITLYN BROWNING (Utah State University), Rusty Nall (Utah State University), Timothy A. Shahan (Utah State University)
Abstract: Resurgence is the reoccurrence of a previously suppressed behavior following a worsening of conditions for a more recently reinforced alternative behavior. Behavioral Momentum Theory (BMT) and Resurgence as Choice (RaC) make differing predictions about the effects of treatment duration on resurgence, and the present experiment was designed to evaluate these predictions. In baseline, rats earned food for pressing a target lever. During treatment, target responding was extinguished while food was available for pressing an alternative lever. Resurgence of target responding was tested by extinguishing the alternative response. The duration of the treatment phase varied across five standard-duration groups, and the sixth group was exposed to cycling on/off alternative reinforcement across sessions. Consistent with the predictions of RaC, resurgence as a function of treatment duration was best described by a power function in the standard-duration groups. However, inconsistent with both RaC and BMT, resurgence was reduced in the on/off group compared to the standard-duration groups. These results suggest that increasing the duration of DRA might not meaningfully decrease resurgence, but that a repeated history of alternative-response extinction might. These results provide possible avenues for developing treatment and theory.
 
 
Symposium #236
CE Offered: BACB
Teaching Typical and Near-Typical Learners Higher Order Reasoning, Planning, Conceptual Knowledge and Their Foundations
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: EDC/AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: Andrew Robert Kieta (Morningside Academy)
Discussant: Andrew Robert Kieta (Morningside Academy)
CE Instructor: Andrew Bulla, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The four presentations in this symposium will illustrate evidence based practices in teaching higher order instructional objectives. The first two presentations examine teaching higher order thinking and planning repertoires, beginning with Vivian Mach, who will describe procedures for teaching children to generate questions when faced with a discrepant situation - the critical initial step in the reasoning process. Next, Shiloh Isbell will detail a a schoolwide extension of an executive functioning curriculum that assesses specific skill deficits, teaches students relevant planning and tracking repertoires, and probes self-reflection of students’ developing skillsets. In the third presentation, Drew Bulla will present a study that investigates how to select and craft specific active student responding questions to promote higher order conceptual learning. Finally, Aoife McTiernan will discuss the process of launching a learning center in Wales to teach a wide array of these foundational and higher order instructional objectives to typical learners. The chair will make comments on each presentation in turn as the symposium proceeds.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

behavior analysts and other psychology and educational professionals

 
Ask Yourself a Question: How Children Learn to Generate Questions to Solve Real-Life Situations
(Service Delivery)
VIVIAN MACH (Morningside Academy), Joanne K. Robbins (Morningside Academy)
Abstract: When we sense discrepancies in our world, feel stuck in the midst of a problem situation, or look for answers when a curiosity arises, we have a need for both questions and answers. Before we can solve the problem we need to think. As John Dewey (1910) wrote, “Thinking begins in a forked-road situation, a situation which is ambiguous, which presents a dilemma, which proposes alternatives.” To formulate and define the problem to solve, we must first ask ourselves questions. In this presentation we will describe our Talk Aloud Problem Solving (TAPS) class, which teaches children how to think and  reason through those problems. The “thinking classroom” described here presents a sequence of instruction for elementary students with mild special education needs. The learners recognize the better question(s) to ask when presented with real-world scenarios. They learn to discriminate which questions are most relevant and will lead to solutions. They generate questions while playing the game of 20 Questions to learn about the efficiency of asking the right question. They experience field trips that are designed with built-in ambiguity such as navigating a downtown neighborhood with closed sidewalks due to construction and take a shopping trip to a cashierless store.
 
A Schoolwide Implementation of a Program Designed to Shape Executive Functioning Behaviors
(Service Delivery)
SHILOH M ISBELL (Morningside Academy)
Abstract: Many students are unsuccessful in school not because they have a specific learning disability but rather because they lack a strong repertoire of executive functioning skills. This presentation is an extension of a project conducted at Morningside Academy during the 2017-18 school year by two middle school teachers, who designed and implemented a program to assess and shape executive functioning skills. Rather than treating the learning deficits labeled executive functioning as cognitive problems, the program assessed those repertoires through a behavior analytic lens. The final product of the project was a set of assessments and tracking tools called The Executive Functioning Tracking Journal. Initial findings showed that students who participated in the program showed an increase in executive functioning behaviors, which were a result of modeling, practice, and self-reflection built into the program. This presentation will show the processes for implementing the program in multiple classrooms - including how to tailor it to different learner profiles - coaching teachers to ensure fidelity of implementation, and collecting meaningful data to make instructional decisions.
 
An Evaluation of Instructional Strategies to Teach Conceptual Knowledge in an Introductory College Course
(Applied Research)
ANDREW BULLA (Georgia Southern University - Armstrong), Jennifer Wertalik (Georgia Southern University - Armstrong), Daniel Anthony Crafton (Georgia Southern University - Armstrong)
Abstract: Research has demonstrated that only approximately 63% of students beginning college complete a bachelor’s degree within six years (Berkner, He, & Cataldi, 2002). Behavior analysis poses a solution to this problem by offering a variety of methods that have demonstrated increases in academic achievement in higher education (Bernstein & Chase, 2013). Active student responding represents one behavior analytic practice that has garnered attention in higher education. Active student responding (ASR) occurs when students make an observable response to instructional material (Heward, 1997). Guidance on the type of questions asked during ASR activities appears minimal. The type of questions presented during response card activities that yield the greatest learning outcomes represents an empirical question that has yet to be answered. The present study sought to evaluate the effects of the type of question asked during response board activities on the emergence of conceptual learning. More specifically, the experimenters directly compared the effects of practice questions that ask students to recall specific definitions to practice questions that require the student to discriminate between examples and non-examples of the concept presented during instruction. Results of the study are displayed on a standard celeration chart. Social acceptability data will also be presented.
 

The University of South Wales Academics Intervention Service: A Description and Evaluation of a University-Based Intervention Service for Teaching Academic Skills

(Service Delivery)
AOIFE MCTIERNAN (University of South Wales), Jennifer L. Austin (University of South Wales)
Abstract:

The Academics Intervention Service (AIS) at the University of South Wales provides academic tutoring to children between the ages of 6-11, using behavior analytic instructional approaches. An overview of the service is provided, as well as case examples, which demonstrate typical instructional components and outcomes. The AIS has recently been developed within the Behaviour Analysis Clinic at the University, and provides opportunities for both psychology and behavior analysis students to gain experience in the application of behavior analysis in educational settings. In addition to providing a description of services, we describe the clinical training provided, and discuss the advantages and potential barriers to growing such a service. Further analysis and data should be collected in order to evaluate long-term benefits for both clients and trainee professionals learning to provide behaviour analytic services. However, early data demonstrates benefits for each client in targeted academic domains and that the AIS a valuable setting for students and trainee professionals.

 
 
Symposium #238
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Technological Advances in Staff Training
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Toronto
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Regina A. Carroll (University of Nebraska Medical Center Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Discussant: Nicole Gravina (University of Florida)
CE Instructor: Regina A. Carroll, Ph.D.
Abstract: The current symposium investigates evidence-based methodologies for staff training, including the use of verbal and textual prompts, behavioral observations, and video modeling. First, Landon Cowan will present a study investigating the effects of textual and verbal prompts on teaching graduate-level therapists to evaluate their own clinical skills, and to determine the influence of self-evaluation on clinical performance. Second, Kathleen Marano will present a study assessing the effects of conducting behavioral observations and ratings on staff implementation of a paired-stimulus preference assessment. Third, Abigail Blackman will present a series of studies examining the influence of the observer effect on participants’ integrity with implementing the guided-compliance procedure. Fourth, Amber Paden will present a study evaluating the use of video modeling with voiceover instructions to teach supervisors to provide performance feedback to therapists implementing the guided-compliance procedure. Finally, Nicole Gravina will discuss interesting components of each study, and describe future areas of research on staff training.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Behavioral Observations, Feedback, Observer effect, Staff Training
Target Audience: The target audience is professionals and researchers in behavior analysis
Learning Objectives: NA
 
The Effects of Textual and Verbal Prompts on the Self-Evaluation Skills and Clinical Performance of Graduate-Level Therapists
LANDON COWAN (University of Houston- Clear Lake), Sarah A. Lechago (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
Abstract: In the past few years, there has been a 400% increase in the number of individuals obtaining Board Certified Behavior Analyst (BCBA™) credentials in the United States (Dockhand & Fuqua, 2016). Previous research has suggested that there is a deficit of empirical research on the training and supervision of individuals seeking their BCBA™ and BCaBA™ credentials (LeBlanc & Luiselli, 2016; Reed & Henley, 2015; Sellers, Valentino, & LeBlanc, 2016). Organizational behavior management (OBM) research studies suggest that task clarification, performance feedback, and self-monitoring are effective in training employees and increasing workplace performance (Dargin, Mahoney, Cox, Sweetens, & Poling, 2014; Olson & Winchester, 2008). A multiple baseline across participants design is employed to investigate the effects of textual and verbal prompts on teaching graduate-level therapists to evaluate their own clinical skills, and to determine the influence of self-evaluation on clinical performance. A self-evaluation data collection sheet is used to teach therapists to evaluate their own clinical performance. Therapists are asked to write replacement behaviors for those skills that they did not perform correctly. Incorrect evaluations resulted in watching a video of their clinical session and using the self-evaluation sheet to record their performance. Thus far, results with two participants indicate that the textual prompt procedure is effective in increase self-evaluation of clinical skills. Additionally, there was an increase in clinical performance for both participants. Data will be collected with 1-2 additional participants.
 
Effect of Conducting Behavioral Observations and Ratings on Staff Implementation of a Paired-Stimulus Preference Assessment
KATHLEEN EMILY MARANO (Caldwell University), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Research is needed to find an efficient staff training method that requires little direct training by a qualified professional. One such technique is the observation and rating of others’ behavior. This technique may result in individuals learning to perform the behavior themselves, a result called observer effects. No studies have assessed observer effects and stimulus preference assessment implementation. The purpose of the present study was to assess the effects of conducting behavioral observations and ratings on staff implementation of a paired-stimulus preference assessment. Staff trainees scored videos of implementation of steps and conducted the assessment with a simulated consumer. Results showed the procedure was effective and efficient. Probes conducted with an actual consumer and with novel items showed extension of skills. These results extend the literature on observer effects by showing this procedure’s usefulness in applied settings.
 
The Impact of Variations in Training on the Observer Effect
ABIGAIL BLACKMAN (University of Kansas), Matthew Novak (University of Kansas), Tyler Erath (University of Kansas), Ryan Gallagher (University of Kansas), Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (University of Kansas)
Abstract: A limitation of behavioral skills training is that it is resource intensive, which may be a barrier to its adoption in applied settings. Recent research provides emerging support for the efficacy of behavioral observations and data recording on the behavior of the observer (referred to as the “observer effect”). This presentation will share findings of three experiments with undergraduate student participants that investigated the observer effect. In the first experiment, participants recorded data while observing a video model of guided compliance. In experiment two, participants recorded data while observing a peer trainee implement guided compliance and then provided performance feedback. In experiment three, participants recorded data while observing numerous videos of a teacher implementing guided compliance and answered questions regarding teacher implementation within the videos. Across all experiments, performance improved for some participants; however, experimenter feedback was necessary for most participants to meet criterion performance. Specifically, the observer effect was not consistently found. Implications of these findings as they apply to training staff will be presented.
 

Training Supervisors to Provide Performance Feedback Using Video Modeling With Voiceover Instructions

AMBER R. PADEN (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Regina A. Carroll (University of Nebraska Medical Center Munroe-Meyer Institute), Elizabeth J. Preas (University of Nebraska Medical Center Munroe-Meyer Institute), Amanda L. Gibson (May Institute), Natalie Ruth Shuler (West Virginia University)
Abstract:

Supervisors often use performance-feedback to train staff members to implement behavioral interventions. However, few studies have focused on evaluating methods to teach supervisors to provide effective feedback. The purpose of the current study was evaluate the use of video modeling with voiceover instructions to teach supervisors to provide performance feedback. In Study 1, we used a multiple-baseline design to evaluate the use of video modeling with voiceover instruction to train nine supervisors to provide performance feedback to a confederate therapist implementing a guided-compliance procedure. Specifically, we assessed supervisors’ accuracy with implementing eight feedback component skills during scripted role-plays before and after video modeling. We also assessed the extent to which supervisors’ skills generalized when providing feedback to an actual therapist implementing the guided-compliance procedure with a child with autism. All supervisors mastered the feedback component skills following video modeling. During Study 2, five of the supervisors trained in Study 1 used performance feedback to teach five therapists working with children with autism spectrum disorder to implement a guided-compliance procedure. All therapist learned to implement the guided-compliance procedure with a child with autism. Overall, the results of the current study suggest that video modeling may be an efficacious and efficient method to train supervisors.

 
 
Symposium #240
CE Offered: BACB
Advancements in Emergent and Multiply Controlled Verbal Behavior
Sunday, May 26, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD South
Area: VBC/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Olga Meleshkevich (Simmons University)
Discussant: Mark L. Sundberg (Sundberg and Associates)
CE Instructor: Mark L. Sundberg, Ph.D.
Abstract: Particularly with children with autism, verbal responses (and their response products) emitted under the control of one set of stimuli may facilitate the emission of verbal responses under a different set of stimuli. Conine, Vollmer, and Dela Rosa demonstrated that tacting during listener training facilitated intraverbal responding. In the remaining three studies, the researchers evaluated the extent to which an echoic response (e.g., “Color”) facilitated intraverbal-tact responding; that is, responding under the control of both a verbal (e.g., “What is it?” “What color is it?”) and nonverbal (e.g., picture of a green square) stimulus. Aragon, Rodriguez, McKeown, and Luczynski considered this echoic response a differential observing response (DOR), and they also evaluated a corresponding category intraverbal to facilitate the intraverbal-tacts. degli Espinosa, Gerosa, and Brocchin trained the echoic responding to one stimulus at a time (e.g., square) and then produced generalization to novel stimuli across novel classes. Meleshkevich, Axe, and degli Espinosa trained echoic responses to combined visual stimuli (e.g., green square) and documented generalization within and across categories. The data will be discussed in terms of verbal mediation, multiple control, joint control, and autoclitic control.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): intraverbal, listener behavior, multiple control, question discrimination
Target Audience: behavior analysts, researchers, professors, graduate students, speech-language pathologists
 
Variables Contributing to Emergent Intraverbal Responses Following Listener Training
DANIEL E CONINE (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida), Cynthia Dela Rosa (Florida Autism Center)
Abstract: In Skinner’s Verbal Behavior, several elementary verbal operants are defined as being functionally independent. However, training one verbal operant may often result in untrained (emergent) responses in another verbal operant. One example is the relationship between listener training and intraverbal responding, where previous research has produced mixed findings. Our study extends prior research by conducting listener training with and without tact requirements for three children with autism using a multiple baseline across responses. Results suggest that tacts during listener training are predictive of emergent intraverbals. These findings have applied significance for clinicians looking to teach intraverbals to individuals with autism.
 
The Use of Joint Control to Facilitate the Emergence of Intraverbal Tacts
MICHAEL ARAGON (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Monroe Meyer Institute), Nicole M. Rodriguez (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Ciobha Anne McKeown (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Kevin C. Luczynski (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Abstract: Children with autism may respond over-selectively to a given element in a conditional discrimination. In such cases, prompting a differential observing response (DOR) can reduce restricted stimulus control. A DOR commonly used during intraverbal training is an echoic DOR in which a portion of the sample stimulus is repeated (e.g., echoic of “color” when asked, “What color?”). Alternatively, a DOR that promotes joint control may be a mechanism through which multiply controlled verbal behavior is brought to strength. This study evaluated the role of joint control in facilitating intraverbal tacts. We asked two children with autism to tact one of two components (color vs. shape) when presented with a complex stimulus (e.g., a green square). If mastery was not achieved with an echoic DOR and differential reinforcement, we taught participants to engage in the DOR plus a corresponding category intraverbal (e.g., “red, yellow, blue” in response to “What color?”) prior to responding under both intraverbal and tact control. Results indicated the DOR plus category intraverbal facilitated accurate conditional discriminations of the elements when the DOR and differential reinforcement failed. High-level performance maintained following the removal of the prompted category intraverbal. We discuss the implications of joint control facilitating intraverbal tacts.
 

“What Color?” Versus “What Is It?”: Teaching Children With Autism to Discriminate Questions

FRANCESCA DEGLI ESPINOSA (ABA Clinic, U.K., University of Salerno, Italy), Francesca Gerosa (Queen’s University, Belfast), Veronica Brocchin (Bangor University, UK)
Abstract:

Rarely are verbal responses, even the simplest ones like saying the colour or name of a common visible object, not preceded by a verbal antecedent, such as a question. The ability to discriminate questions is therefore one of the most fundamental listener and speaker skills, yet it is poorly understood and underappreciated by ABA curricula. The present study will present both an analysis of intraverbally-controlled tacting and the first investigation to date on how to establish it effectively. Following chance responding on baseline measures across multiple probes of different stimulus classes (coloured items, numbers, animals), four children with autism underwent a procedure that brought tact responses under multiple echoic, intraverbal and non-verbal control on one set of stimuli only. Results showed that all participants were able to discriminate questions with respect to trained stimuli and demonstrated generalisation to novel stimuli across novel classes. In other words, once children learned to understand the question, they were able to demonstrate such understanding by answering questions on completely new stimuli. The present research provides clinicians with a conceptually systematic framework for teaching complex and generalised verbal behaviour to children with autism that is firmly based on a Skinnerian analysis of verbal stimulus control.

 

The Effects of Incorporating Echoic Responding Into Intraverbal Tact Training

OLGA MELESHKEVICH (Simmons University), Judah B. Axe (Simmons University), Francesca Degli Espinosa (ABA Clinic, U.K., University of Salerno, Italy)
Abstract:

We evaluated a procedure to teach answering questions about visual stimuli (i.e., intraverbal-tacts) by echoing the key word in the question. For example, in the presence of a blue cup and the question, “What color?” the participants were required to respond, “Color blue.” We evaluated two categories of questions: Object/Color (i.e., “What is it?” “What color?”) and Shape/Number (i.e., “What shape?” “What number?”). Stimuli in each category were distributed into one trained and two generalization sets. Cross-category probes were untrained combinations of trained components of visual stimuli: colored numbers, colored shapes, and colored shapes with numbers. We used a multiple probe across behaviors and participants design with 3 preschoolers with autism. After mastering the trained sets, all participants demonstrated generalized question answering across all generalization probes. IOA data were collected in 100% of sessions across participants and phases; means were 95-100%.

 
 
Panel #241
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
The Balancing ACT: Ethical Considerations for BCBAs Doing Acceptance and Commitment Training
Sunday, May 26, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 1-3
Area: CBM/AUT; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Adam DeLine Hahs, Ph.D.
Chair: Dana Paliliunas (Missouri State University)
JONATHAN J. TARBOX (University of Southern California; FirstSteps for Kids)
ADAM DELINE HAHS (Arizona State University)
HEATHER LYNN LEWIS (Saint Louis University)
Abstract:

Acceptance and Commitment Training (ACT) has been shown to be an effective treatment strategy for a range of populations, including individuals with autism. Recent behavior analytic attention has been paid to ACT, as evidenced by a recent surge of behavior analytic training/workshops, curriculum materials and protocols, research publications, etc. While promising, limited information is currently available for practitioners to assess their integrity with implementing ACT with their clients. Similarly, behavior analysts have minimal resources to consider ethical conduct when implementing behavioral therapies in general, and ACT specifically. Therefore, the current panel will discuss relevant scope of practice for behavior analysts when implementing ACT in their practice. The goal of the panel is to provide attendees with insight into specific areas, to ensure ethical and quality implementation of ACT. The following topics will be discussed: implementation strategies, ethical considerations, and strategies for targeting private events. All three panelists have published empirical studies using acceptance and commitment training and relational frame theory (RFT), and are board certified behavior analyst-doctoral.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Board Certified Behavior Analysts, Board Certified Assistant Behavior Analysts

Learning Objectives: 1. Label key ethical codes that pertain to using ACT in clinical practice 2. Identify strategies for targeting private events 3. Define how to assess integrity of ACT implementation
Keyword(s): ACT, Behavior Therapy, Ethical Considerations, Psychological flexibility
 
 
Special Event #243
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
CHOICE: Session 3
Sunday, May 26, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD North
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Chair: R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School of Arts and Sciences)
CE Instructor: R. Douglas Greer, Ph.D.
 

CHOICE: How Stimuli Come to Choose: Transformation, Valuation, and Durability of Learned Reinforcers

Abstract:

From a behavioral selectionist perspective, it is not the individual who chooses, but the consequent stimuli (e.g., reinforcers) that select out responding. New reinforcers are learned throughout the lifespan, just as new responses are learned. When new reinforcers are acquired, stimuli that do not function to reinforce are transformed such that new stimulus control is established. The question is: How do stimuli that did not have value come to be transformed into reinforcers, or, how are new reinforcers learned? This presentation will describe three ways in which new reinforcers are established with children: stimulus-stimulus pairings, operant procedures, and observational conditioning-by-denial procedures. These procedures have been successful in altering the value of stimuli leading to changes in a) musical preference and “appreciation,” b) food preferences, c) social reinforcers, d) educational reinforcers, e) foundational verbal developmental cusps, such as observing responses, and f) stimulus control for social learning.

 
JESSICA SINGER-DUDEK (Teachers College, Columbia University)
 

Dr. Jessica Singer-Dudek is the Director of Transdisciplinary Programs in ABA at Columbia University Teachers College. She also serves as a Senior Behavior Analyst Consultant to schools implementing the Comprehensive Application of Behavior Analysis to Schooling (CABAS®) model, and serves as the CABAS® Professional Advisory Board Secretary/Treasurer. Dr. Dudek’s research interests include component analyses of successful behavior analytic models of education, teacher and supervisor training, verbally governed and verbally governing behaviors, establishment of early observing responses, verbal behavior development, conditioned reinforcement, and observational learning.

 

CHOICE: How Should/Do People Choose When Discrimination is Difficult?

Abstract:

Classic models of signal detection assume that subjects set a criterion on a similarity dimension, calling all events below that S1 and all above S2. The criterion should be set at the point that maximizes the expected (long run) payoffs. This tutorial describes that model and the effect of discriminability (d’) on the ability to accurately position the criterion. It is shown that the forces driving the criterion toward optimal are too weak and complicated to ever work when discriminability is poor. How do subjects do it? They don’t: They deviate systematically from optimality. Why? What do they actually do? Will any model successfully predict their behavior? How is Gerd Gigerenzer relevant? These questions will be answered, and those answers questioned.

 
PETER KILLEEN (Arizona State University)
 

Peter received his doctorate in 1969 under the perplexed gazes of Howie Rachlin, Dick Herrnstein, and Fred Skinner. His first (and only) position was at Arizona State University (in the department Previously-Known-As Fort Skinner in the Desert). He has studied choice behavior and schedule-induced responses like polydipsia, reinforcement schedules, timing, and delay discounting. His reinforcers include the Poetry in Science Award; the APA Div. 25 Med Outstanding Researcher Award; the Hilgard Award for the Best Theoretical Paper on Hypnosis (!); the F. J. McGuigan Lecture on Understanding the Human Mind (!!); Presidents of the Society of Experimental Psychologists, the Society for the Quantitative Analysis of Behavior, and the 3rd International Seminar on Behavior (SINCA). A year at the Institute for Advanced Studies in Oslo birthed a paper that received The Faculty of 1000’s “Must Read” for its behavioral energetics theory of ADHD. His statistic prep was an Emerging Research Front Feature on Thomson Reuters Sciencewatch. He has written oodles of screeds on Choice; his first, now receiving social security, showed that pigeons were indifferent between free food and schedules where they had to work for it https://goo.gl/E8gzSo; his last was a deep dive into the logistics of choice https://goo.gl/y9GjJG. What matters in his golden years is family and friends, the well-being of behavior analysis, and thinking deep thoughts. He is urging our field to turn some of their efforts to understanding the role of emotions in behavior, and bridging to the outer world through embodied cognition. About these you will hear more at the presidential address.

 
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) discuss a behavioral selectionist point of view of choice; (2) discuss various methods of how stimuli are transformed into conditioned reinforcers; (3) discuss the effects of learned reinforcers on a wide variety of social and non-social behaviors; (4) draw the logo of SDT, and show how the criterion should move with changes in frequency of signal or payoff changes; (5) explain what today’s analysis demonstrates to be the strategy people probably use; (6) scratch your head over why optimality analysis persisted as a descriptive model many decades after it was invalidated; (7) argue whether it remains a good normative model; (8) explain what “to Gerd” means.
 
 
 
Symposium #244
CE Offered: BACB/QABA/NASP
Theory and Practice of Misophonia: A Multisensory Conditioned Respondent Behavior Disorder
Sunday, May 26, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 1/2
Area: PCH/CBM; Domain: Translational
Chair: Thomas H. Dozier (Misophonia Treatment Institute)
Discussant: Emily Thomas Johnson (Behavior Attention and Developmental Disabilities Consultants, LLC)
CE Instructor: Emily Thomas Johnson, M.S.
Abstract:

Misophonia is an understudied but relatively common respondent behavior condition, the effects of which range from annoying to debilitating. Misophonia is known as a condition where commonly occurring innocuous stimuli (e.g. chewing sound) elicit anger and accompanying physiological responses which function as motivating operations for overt aggression and escape. Although there are some common misophonic stimuli, each person has a unique set of stimuli, which often includes auditory and visual stimuli, but can be any sensory modality. Misophonia is similar to general sensory sensitivity which is common with autism, but the management and intervention for each are quite different. Misophonia was first identified and named by audiologists and has been considered a hearing disorder. Recently misophonia has come to be viewed as an anger disorder and the focus of psychiatrists, psychologists, and neuroscience. Behaviorally, misophonia may be considered a classically conditioned physical respondent phenomenon, and it may be more appropriate to view misophonia as a conditioned behavioral disorder.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): classical conditioning, misophonia, motivating operation, respondent behavior
Target Audience:

Behavior analysts, psychologists, school counselors, and other clinicians

Learning Objectives: 1. Identify 3 or more common misophonic stimuli in at least 2 stimulus modalities. 2. Identify the key difference in the theory of stimulus-stimulus classical conditioning and stimulus-response classical conditioning. 3. Explain how the theory of stimulus-response classical conditioning provides a plausible theory for why misophonic responses strengthen with real-life exposure to trigger stimuli.
 
Theory of Misophonia: A Stimulus-Response Classically Conditioned Behavior
(Theory)
THOMAS H. DOZIER (Misophonia Treatment Institute)
Abstract: Misophonia is a respondent behavior condition that has only been observed in humans, therefore basic research concerning the etiology of misophonia is not possible. With misophonia, common stimuli such as the sound of chewing, sniffing, or visual images of other chewing of leg jiggling elicit a very distressing reflex response. Research studies indicate misophonia consists of conditioned emotional responses and physical respondents. A review of this limited literature will be included. Case reports studies indicate that the physical respondent of misophonia has similar topography to unconscious operant or respondent behavior occurring during onset of misophonia. A basic theory for development of respondent behavior is stimulus-response classical conditioning. The theory of stimulus-response classical conditioning will be examined and contrasted with stimulus-stimulus classical conditioning theory. The misophonic response does not typically extinguish with repeated exposure or prolonged avoidance. A theory for this will be explained using stimulus-response classical conditioning theory. Treatment cases will be reviewed which indicate possible options for interventions to remediate the misophonic response.
 

Behavioral Treatment of Problem Behavior Evoked by Bodily Sounds in an Adult With Autism Spectrum Disorder

(Applied Research)
SHAJI HAQ (Center for Behavioral Sciences, Inc.), Juan Rafael (Center for Behavioral Sciences, Inc.), Ken Nhu (Center for Behavioral Sciences, Inc.), Ignacio Aviles (Center for Behavioral Sciences, Inc.), Cristain Ceja (Center for Behavioral Sciences, Inc.), Trong Pham (Center for Behavioral Sciences, Inc.), Amber Shults (Center for Behavioral Sciences, Inc.), Joyce C. Tu (Center for Behavioral Sciences, Inc.)
Abstract:

Misophonia is characterized by an autonomic response that is elicited by certain innocuous or repetitive sounds (Edelstein, Brang, Rouw, & Ramachandran, 2013), and individuals with misophonia may display an extreme, overt response commonly associated with rage, hatred, and a loss of self-control (Dozier, 2015). In this investigation, we used an operant approach to treat problem behavior evoked by bodily sounds (i.e., coughing, sneezing, sniffling, and clearing throat) for a young adult with autism spectrum disorder. The procedure involved pairing bodily sounds with preferred edibles at fixed intervals and withholding attention from the participant if he engaged in problem behavior (i.e., attention extinction). In addition, problem behavior did not produce any delays to the presentation of the next bodily sound (i.e., escape extinction). The intervention produced immediate reductions of problem behavior and the effects of treatment maintained during progressively lean schedules of reinforcement. A brief review of past research, along with implications for research and clinical practice will be discussed.

 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #245
CE Offered: PSY/BACB

The Public Lives of Animal Behavior

Sunday, May 26, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: PCH; Domain: Theory
Instruction Level: Basic
CE Instructor: Darlene E. Crone-Todd, Ph.D.
Chair: Darlene E. Crone-Todd (Salem State University)
MICHAEL PETTIT (York University)

Michael Pettit is an associate professor of psychology at York University in Toronto, CA where he teaches in their unique Historical, Theoretical, and Critical Studies of Psychology program. He is the author of The Science of Deception (University of Chicago Press, 2013) and over a dozen articles on the history of the social and behavioral sciences.

Abstract:

The behavior of nonhuman animals continues to elicit considerable interest not only from scientists, but from a wide range of publics. This fascination means studies of animal behavior often have a double life, a source of a scientific knowledge while also providing edifying entertainment. For this reason, students of animal behavior have had to grapple with an array of (both wanted and unwanted) audiences for their research. In this talk, I will offer examples from the history of psychology, with a particular focus on the controversies over animal sexuality and cognition, to illustrate the ways in which scientific knowledge has been consumed and contested.

Target Audience:

The audience includes those interested in the history and theory of psychology and the behavioral sciences.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe important episodes in the history of animal behavior; (2) challenge the diffusionist model of the public understanding of science; (3) put contemporary concerns into historical perspective.
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #246
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

How to Leverage Behavioral and Pharmacological Sciences to Impact the Opioid Crisis

Sunday, May 26, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: SCI; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: William Stoops, Ph.D.
Chair: William Stoops (University of Kentucky)
SHARON WALSH (University of Kentucky)
Dr. Sharon Walsh is a Professor of Behavioral Science and Psychiatry, and Director of the Center on Drug and Alcohol Research at the University of Kentucky. Dr. Walsh's clinical research has focused on pharmacological issues in opioid and cocaine dependence. She has conducted pharmacodynamic and pharmacokinetic studies of licit and illicit opioids and opioid treatment agents, including buprenorphine, methadone and LAAM. She has conducted abuse liability evaluations of opioid compounds in humans. She has evaluated potential pharmacotherapies for efficacy and safety in the treatment of cocaine dependence employing both inpatient drug interaction studies and outpatient clinical trials. Her work has been supported through continuous funding from the National Institute on Drug Abuse along with funding from private foundations and industry. She has provided expert advice to the FDA, NIH, legal representatives and the pharmaceutical industry.
Abstract:

This presentation will provide an overview of the origins of the present opioid crisis, now in its second decade, in the United States. This year alone it is estimated that approximately 50,000 lives will be lost to opioid overdose with innumerable others suffering other consequences of the disorder. Effective interventions must span the continuum from prevention (both through education and improved opioid prescribing practices), expansion of evidence-based treatment and increasing additional harm reduction approaches to decrease the health risks associated with opioid use and injection drug use. The basis for the use of pharmacotherapies for the treatment of opioid use disorder are grounded in the principles of behavioral pharmacology, and the empirical evidence for the efficacy of our pharmacological armamentarium will be reviewed. The utility of additional behavioral approaches to augment the effectiveness of pharmacotherapeutics will be discussed. Finally, innovative programs that are having significant impact on the crisis will be discussed.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students. 

Learning Objectives: PENDING
 
 
Symposium #247
CE Offered: BACB
Synthesizing the Assessment and Treatment of Problem Behavior Literature
Sunday, May 26, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom C
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Rachel Metras (Western New England University)
Discussant: Griffin Rooker (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
CE Instructor: Rachel Metras, M.A.
Abstract:

The assessment and treatment of problem behavior has long been a focus of behavior analytic research and practice. By conducting literature reviews, researchers connect relevant literature, synthesize empirical findings, and discover important relations that might not be detected by reading a series of empirical papers. In this way, literature reviews may help guide future research and practice. This symposium seeks to highlight and summarize literature on current assessment and treatment practices. The presenters will discuss: the extent to which descriptive assessment and functional analysis (FA) results correspond; the prevalence and use of synthesized contingencies in FAs; the scope and outcomes of different function-based treatments for multiply-maintained problem behavior; and the extent to which stimuli identified through a competing stimulus assessment have been incorporated into treatments for problem behavior. The potential merits and implications of the existing literature for assessment and treatment of problem behavior will be discussed, and recommendations for future research and practice will be provided.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Competing Stimuli, Descriptive Assessments, Functional Analysis, Synthesized Contingencies
Target Audience:

BCBAs, applied behavior analytic researchers, students of behavior analysis

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the extent to which descriptive assessment and functional analysis (FA) results correspond, (2) identify the prevalence and uses of synthesized contingencies in published FA applications, (3) describe treatment outcomes for multiply-maintained problem behavior under different treatment conditions, and (4) discuss the uses of competing stimuli (as identified through competing stimulus assessments) in treatments of problem behavior.
 
Use of Descriptive Assessment and Correspondence to Functional Analysis: A Systematic Review
Bethany P. Contreras Young (Middle Tennessee State University), SAVANNAH TATE (University of Missouri Thompson Center for Autism and Neurodevelopmental Disorders), SungWoo Kahng (Rutgers University)
Abstract: Assessment is used to identify the function of problem behavior and leads to the development of effective treatment. Two types of direct assessment are often used to identify function of problem behavior: descriptive assessment (DA) and functional analysis (FA). Some researchers have suggested that DA is not as accurate as FA (Thompson & Iwata, 2007), yet many practitioners continue to use DA as a primary method for identifying variables maintaining problem behavior (Roscoe et al., 2015). We are conducting a systematic literature review to identify the use of DA and the correspondence between results of DA and FA. We conducted a thorough search of the existing literature and included any articles that reported the methods and results of a DA for problem behavior. For articles that included both a DA and FA, we calculated agreement in function between the two assessments per participant. Data analysis is still underway, but thus far we have found that the results of DA corresponded with results of FA in 59% of cases. In 22% of cases, results of DA yielded completely different results than FA. We will conduct additional analyses, including sensitivity and specificity analysis of the assessment results.
 
Nature and Scope of Synthesis in Functional Analysis and Treatment of Problem Behavior
JESSICA SLATON (Nashoba Learning Group), Gregory P. Hanley (Western New England University)
Abstract: Functional analysis (FA) of problem behavior typically includes the contingent delivery of a single reinforcer following problem behavior. However, the FA literature also includes examples of analyses that have delivered multiple reinforcers, arranged multiple establishing operations in one or more test conditions, or both. These analyses have been successfully applied under heterogeneous conditions over several decades and with various synthesized establishing operations and reinforcers, but their qualitative details, outcomes, and contributions to the literature have never been described in a comprehensive manner. The purpose of the current review was to: (a) identify articles that have reported the use of synthesized FAs or treatments; (b) describe the nature and scope of synthesis as it has been applied in the FA literature; (c) analyze outcomes of synthesized FAs and treatments to determine general benefits and disadvantages of synthesis; and (d) offer recommendations for future areas of research. We identified 55 articles with a total of 287 applications of synthesized FAs or treatments across 149 participants, published between 1995 and 2018. We found that 94% percent of all synthesized FAs were differentiated, and synthesized treatments indicated an average mean baseline reduction of 90.2% across all treatment applications.
 
A Review of Treatments for Problem Behavior Maintained by Multiple Reinforcers
ROBIN K. LANDA (Western New England University), Gregory P. Hanley (Western New England University)
Abstract: Functional analyses enable researchers to identify contingencies that influence problem behavior so that effective treatment can be developed. Hanley, Iwata, and McCord (2003) reported that problem behavior was controlled by multiple reinforcers in 15% of the 514 differentiated functional analyses published between 1961 and 2000 (a total of 77 analyses). The percentage of analyses showing control by multiple reinforcers increased to 24% of the 158 differentiated analyses published from 2001 to 2012 (an additional 38 analyses; Beavers, Iwata, & Lerman, 2013). These data combined with the recent awareness of synthesized contingencies operating in past analyses as well as the increase in prevalence of synthesized contingencies (Slaton & Hanley, 2018) underscore the importance of a technology for treating multiply-controlled problem behavior; however, the procedural details and outcomes of function-based treatments that involve multiple reinforcers have yet to be summarized. The goal of this review is to summarize and critically evaluate the procedures and outcomes of function-based treatments that have involved multiple suspected reinforcers for problem behavior.
 
Evolution of Competing Stimulus Assessments: A Quantitative Review
JENNIFER N. HADDOCK (Johns Hopkins School of Medicine, Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: We reviewed the literature on competing stimulus assessments (CSAs), which are pre-treatment assessments designed to systematically identify stimuli that displace problem behavior, ostensibly through reinforcer competition. Although CSA methods vary across studies, most share these features: (a) presentation of nominated stimuli, singly, across a series of trials, (b) a no stimulus control trial, and (c) measurement of problem behavior and stimulus engagement. Stimuli associated with clinically significant reductions in problem behavior in the CSA are frequently delivered noncontingently during treatments for automatically reinforced problem behavior or used as supplementary treatment components for socially reinforced problem behavior. In the majority of cases in which an extended analysis was performed following the CSA, reductions in problem behavior observed during the CSA produced similar reductions during treatment, regardless of topography or function of problem behavior, or whether the stimuli “matched” the stimulation thought to be produced by problem behavior. Implications for research and practice will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #248
CE Offered: BACB
Accumulated and Distributed Reinforcement Arrangements: Further Comparisons in Multiple Contexts
Sunday, May 26, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom B
Area: AUT/EAB; Domain: Translational
Chair: Nathalie Fernandez (University of Florida)
Discussant: Iser Guillermo DeLeon (University of Florida)
CE Instructor: Iser Guillermo DeLeon, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Several recent studies have compared the relative effects of, and preferences for, reinforcer arrangements that provided either a) immediate, but discontinuous, access to a reinforcer following a small response requirement (i.e., distributed reinforcement) or b) delayed, but continuous (or uninterrupted), access to the same total quantity of the reinforcer following a larger response requirement (i.e. accumulated reinforcement). Most (but not all) comparisons have revealed that learners prefer, and work more efficiently, under the accumulated reinforcement condition despite the inherent delay to first contact with the reinforcer. The studies in this symposium extend our understanding of these effects in multiple contexts and under multiple conditions. The themes collectively explored include implications for varying applied contexts (e.g., feeding disorders, skill acquisition, problem behavior); effects of effort permutations (e.g., task difficulty, task mastery), and effects of schedule requirements (e.g., reinforcer production schedules, token exchange-production schedules). Collectively, the studies contribute to our understanding of the determinants of choice and preference and advance our knowledge of best practices for individualized learning arrangements.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Intermediate

 

Preference for and Efficacy of Accumulated and Distributed Response-Reinforcer Arrangements During Skill Acquisition

(Applied Research)
MICHELLE A. FRANK-CRAWFORD (Kennedy Krieger Institute; University of Maryland, Baltimore County), John C. Borrero (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Eli T. Newcomb (The Faison Center), Ting Chen (The Faison Center), Jonathan Dean Schmidt (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract:

We evaluated preference for and efficacy of distributed and accumulated response-reinforcer arrangements during discrete-trial teaching for unmastered tasks. During the distributed arrangement, participants received 30-s access to a reinforcer after each correct response. During accumulated arrangements, access was accrued throughout the work period and delivered in its entirety upon completion of the work requirement. Accumulated arrangements were assessed with and without the use of tokens. In Experiment 1, four of five participants preferred one of the accumulated arrangements and preference remained unchanged across mastered and unmastered tasks for all 5 participants. Four individuals participated in Experiment 2 and we conducted replications with new target stimuli with three of these individuals (for a total of seven analyses). Target stimuli were mastered more quickly in one of the accumulated arrangements in six of the seven analyses. Partial correspondence between preference and efficacy outcomes was obtained for two of the three individuals for whom both experiments were conducted. These results support prior research indicating that many learners with intellectual and/or developmental disabilities prefer accumulated reinforcement and that accumulated arrangements can be as effective as distributed arrangements in teaching new skills.

 
Comparing Effectiveness of Distributed, Accumulated, and Negative Reinforcement in the Treatment of Escape-Maintained Problem Behavior
(Applied Research)
ANDREW C BONNER (University of Florida), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (University of Florida), Sarah Weinsztok (University of Florida), Michelle A. Frank-Crawford (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Treatments for escape-maintained problem behavior sometimes consist of placing problem behavior on extinction and delivering reinforcers according to a differential reinforcement schedule. However, evidence suggests that positive reinforcement for task completion may decrease escape-maintained problem behavior in the absence of escape extinction. Moreover, a variety of reinforcers (e.g., food, toys, escape) and reinforcement arrangements (e.g., distributed, accumulated) have been utilized in prior research. However, the differential effects of these interventions on treatment durability when problem behavior continues to produce escape remains unknown. Treatment durability refers here to an interventions capacity to maintain low rates of problem behavior as the unit price per reinforcer is increased. Thus, the current study evaluated whether interventions incorporating the use of tokens (exchangeable for accumulated access to toys) would equal or exceed the effects, in terms of treatment durability, of interventions that incorporate distributed access to food or the functional reinforcer. Results showed that for two of four participants, accumulated positive reinforcement was as durable as distributed positive reinforcement. Furthermore, the intervention involving negative reinforcement for compliance was either not effective or deteriorated as schedule thinning was conducted for all participants.
 
Accumulated and Distributed Reinforcer Arrangements in the Treatment for Pediatric Food Refusal and Selectivity
(Applied Research)
ELAINE CHEN (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Carrie S. W. Borrero (Kennedy Krieger Institute), John C. Borrero (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Michelle A. Frank-Crawford (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Treatment for inappropriate mealtime behavior (IMB) often includes extinction and differential reinforcement of alternative behavior (DRA) arranged using distributed reinforcement where brief reinforcer access is delivered immediately following each appropriate mealtime response. Alternatively, DRA may be arranged using accumulated reinforcement where longer, continuous access to reinforcers is delivered following the completion of a larger response requirement (e.g., multiple consecutive bites). Although research has suggested that individuals prefer and perform better under accumulated arrangements in academic settings, no research to date has evaluated their efficacy in the context of mealtime. The present study compared preference for and the efficacy of distributed and accumulated (with and without tokens) reinforcement with three participants who engaged in IMB. The results suggest that distributed reinforcement was as or more effective than accumulated reinforcement at treating IMB. In addition, two participants preferred distributed reinforcement and the third preferred accumulated reinforcement without tokens.
 
Preferences for Token Exchange-Production Schedules: Effects of Task Difficulty and Token-Production Schedules
(Basic Research)
JOHN FALLIGANT (Auburn University/Kennedy Krieger Institute/Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Sacha T. Pence (Drake University), Sarah Bedell (Auburn University)
Abstract: Individuals allocate behavior to simultaneously available schedules of reinforcement as a function of different dimensions of reinforcement (e.g., delays, magnitude, response effort). Previous research suggests that accumulated exchange-production schedules promote increased work completion and are more preferred than distributed exchange-production schedules despite the commensurate delays to reinforcement. The purpose of the present study was to evaluate whether the response effort or token-production schedules associated with token delivery influence preferences for exchange-production schedules. Participants consisted of three children with autism who were referred to a university-based applied behavior analysis clinic for escape-maintained problem behavior. Tokens exchanged under accumulated schedules supported higher rates of responding and were more preferred, relative to distributed schedules, when they were earned for completing easy tasks (Experiment 1). When participants earned tokens for completing difficult tasks, they generally preferred accumulated exchange-production schedules, and accumulated schedules were slightly more effective than distributed schedules in maintaining behavior (Experiment 2). Under dense token-production schedules, accumulated exchange-production schedules were preferred, but participant’s preferences switched to distributed schedules under increasing token-production (i.e., leaner) schedules (Experiment 3).
 
 
Symposium #249
CE Offered: BACB
Functional Behavior Assessment and Treatment of Sleep Problems in Individuals Diagnosed With Autism Spectrum Disorder
Sunday, May 26, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: AUT/CBM; Domain: Translational
Chair: Sandy Jin (California State University, Northridge)
Discussant: Amarie Carnett (University of Texas at San Antonio)
CE Instructor: Sandy Jin, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Sleep problems are ubiquitous among children and adolescents diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). These problems are unlikely to abate without treatment, resulting in adverse long-term effects on the daytime functioning and wellbeing of people with ASD and their siblings, parents, and others. To effectively address sleep problems, it is important to first identify the variables controlling relevant behavior. Functional Behavior Assessment (FBA) is a process that can help facilitate an understanding of the reinforcement contingencies that either disrupt or facilitate bed preparation, sleep onset, self-soothing behavior following night wakings, and waking at an appropriate time in the morning. From this process, caregivers and clinicians are more equipped to devise individualized and function-based treatment programs for individuals diagnosed with ASD whose sleep is chronically disturbed. This symposium contains a series of presentations as follows: (a) discussion of the core behavioral model of sleep with specific considerations of how this needs to be adapted for individuals diagnosed with ASD, (b) efficacy evaluation of function-based treatments with and without melatonin for sleep problems of children diagnosed with ASD, (c) effectiveness of adolescent-led or combined parent/adolescent-led behavioral treatments for sleep problems in 7, 9-15 year old participants diagnosed with ASD, and (d) outcome data for 40 participants diagnosed with ASD who have received function-based treatments for their sleep problems.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Autism, Functional Assessment, Sleep, Sleep Treatment
Target Audience:

Board Certified Behavior Analysts, Graduate Students of Behavior Analysis, BCaBA, RBT, Clinical Psychologists, Psychiatrists, Pediatricians

Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will gain an understanding of the variables that influence sleep in children diagnosed with autism. 2. Attendees will gain an understanding of the reinforcement contingencies that disrupt or facilitate bed preparation, sleep onset, self-soothing behavior following night wakings, and waking at an appropriate time in the morning. 3. Attendees will learn the efficacy and social acceptability of function-based treatments for sleep problems of children diagnosed with autism. 4. Attendees will learn strategies to design individualized treatments for sleep problems in children diagnosed with autism.
 

A Behavioral Model of Pediatric Sleep Disturbance: Adaptations for Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

(Theory)
NEVILLE MORRIS BLAMPIED (University of Canterbury), Karyn France (University of Canterbury), Jenna van Deurs (University of Canterbury)
Abstract:

Sleep is essential to health, wellbeing, and development and chronic sleep disruption has many adverse consequences. Children and adolescents with a diagnosis of Autism Spectrum Disorder have high rates of sleep disturbance. For typically developing children Blampied and France (1983; JABA, 26, 477-92) proposed a bio-social-behavioral model of pediatric sleep disturbance for typically developing children that explains sleep disturbance in terms of (a) stimulus control (or its lack) for sleep-interfering and facilitating behaviors, and (b) related contingencies of reinforcement for the behaviors. Going to sleep is a state transition supplying primary reinforcement for a terminal link in a concurrent chain, where choice of sleep facilitating or interfering behaviors is dynamically influenced by the salience of the stimuli for the concurrent chains and the associated schedules of reinforcement. This model guides functional behavioral assessment of sleep disturbances and the design of remedial interventions. This talk will outline the model and elaborate on those aspects that need particular attention to adapt it for children and adolescents with ASD, such as the impact of extended device use, stereotypic behavior and or high-intensity challenging behavior. This is intended to provide background information for papers to follow in the symposium.

 

Assessment and Treatment of Sleep Problems in Children Diagnosed With Autism: Behavioral Treatment With and Without Melatonin

(Applied Research)
SANDY JIN (California State University, Northridge)
Abstract:

Sleep problems are prevalent and persistent in young children, especially children diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD). These problems negatively impact the health and development of young children and are often challenging to address for caregivers and clinicians. Pharmacological interventions, such as melatonin, are commonly recommended for pediatric sleep problems despite limited research on their efficacy and social acceptability. Function-based behavioral interventions shows merit as a promising alternative but has yet to draw to focus of mainstream treatment providers. This present study evaluated the efficacy of personalized and assessment-based behavioral intervention with and without melatonin on the sleep problems of children diagnosed with ASD. Nighttime infrared video and sleep diary were used to measure sleep interfering behaviors, sleep onset delay, night and early wakings, the total amount of sleep, as well as other relevant variables in the participating children. Parents and caregivers were encouraged to assist with treatment development during the assessment process and served as interventionists at home following behavioral skills training. A multiple-baseline-across-subjects designed was used to evaluate the treatments. Parents also provided feedback on the acceptability of each treatment and on their satisfaction with the outcomes. The relative advantages and disadvantages of each treatment option, their comparative efficacy, and the extent to which parents can implement the strategies with integrity are discussed.

 

Treating Sleep Disturbance in Young People With Autism

(Applied Research)
JENNA VAN DEURS (University of Caterbury), Laurie McLay (University of Canterbury), Karyn France (University of Canterbury), Neville Morris Blampied (University of Canterbury)
Abstract:

Young people with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) often exhibit significant sleep problems e.g., delayed sleep onset latency, and frequent and prolonged night wakings throughout their life, but there is little research into effective interventions for them. Previous research has largely focused on sleep problems in non-verbal preschool or school-aged children with autism, where parents are the primary intervention agents. We illustrate how behavioural sleep interventions can be adapted to include young people with ASD, who are verbal and have various levels of functioning, in therapy. The current study used a single-case multiple baseline design to evaluate the effectiveness of adolescent-led or combined parent/adolescent-led behavioral treatments for sleep problems in 7, 9-15 year old participants with ASD. Selected participants displayed sufficient communication abilities to participate in therapy, assessed by clinical judgement and the Communication domain of the Vineland Adaptive Behavior Scales; inclusion was not limited by IQ. Preliminary analysis indicates both young person-led and combined parent/ young person-led treatment approaches resulted in a reduction in target sleep variables for 6/7 participants. Parent and young person treatment fidelity and social validity data will also be presented. The process and implications of including young people with ASD within the therapeutic process will be discussed.

 

Evaluating the Effect of Function-Based Treatments for Sleep Disturbance in People With Autism

(Applied Research)
LAURIE MCLAY (University of Canterbury), Karyn France (University of Canterbury), Neville Morris Blampied (University of Canterbury), Jenna van Deurs (University of Canterbury), Jolene Hunter (University of Canterbury)
Abstract:

Sleep problems in children and adolescents with autism are often maintained by antecedent variables and reinforcement contingencies unique to the individual. Functional Behavioural Assessment (FBA) is a tool used identify this unique combinations of variables for each individual. To date, few large N studies replicating the evaluation of function-based interventions for sleep problems in people with autism exist. This presentation reports the outcomes of a series of single-case multiple baseline design studies evaluating the effects of function-based, parent-implemented interventions for 40 children and adolescents with ASD. Data was gathered using a combination of daily parent-reported sleep diaries, videosomnography and actigraphy and was used to calculate a Sleep Problem Severity score for baseline, treatment, and short- and long-term follow-up. Treatment fidelity, reliability and social validity data were also collected. Preliminary analysis indicates that FBA-based interventions led to a reduction in some or all sleep problems for all children who completed intervention. These gains were generally maintained at short- and long-term follow-up. The implications of these findings for clinical practice and future research will be discussed.

 
 
Symposium #250
CE Offered: BACB
Behavioral Assessment and Treatment With Juvenile and Adult Offenders
Sunday, May 26, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Fairmont, B2, Imperial Ballroom
Area: CSS; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: P. Raymond Joslyn (Berry College)
Discussant: Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
CE Instructor: P. Raymond Joslyn, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Behavior analysis has been shown to be effective in addressing behavior in a multitude of populations and settings. However, there are still many populations that remain underserved and understudied in behavior analysis. The current symposium will address various methods of assessment and treatment for criminal offenders, an understudied population. The first presentation will cover a multicomponent intervention to reduce problem behavior and multipharmaceutical interventions with adolescent offenders diagnosed with intellectual disabilities. The second presentation will discuss a study on the use of rules, role playing, and feedback to increase appropriate behavior with adjudicated adolescents. The third presentation will cover the use of relative risk to determine high- and low- risk environmental and behavioral factors related to severe aggression in juvenile offenders. Finally, the last presentation will discuss the use of behavioral interventions such as differential reinforcement to increase appropriate behavior and decrease inappropriate behavior with adult male prisoners. Implications and future directions will also be discussed.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): criminal offenders, delinquency, high-risk behavior, restrictive settings
Target Audience:

Behavior analysts who currently work with or are interested in working nontraditional populations such as juvenile offenders, prisoners, and/or ID offenders would benefit from the research in this symposium.

Learning Objectives: Attendees will be able to: 1) Describe current research in the area of juvenile delinquency. 2) Discuss some potential challenges and obstacles for behavior analysts working in prisons. 3) Describe interventions that can reduce reliance on psychotropic medication for individuals with severe problem behavior.
 

Residential Behavioral Treatment and the Withdrawal of Polypharmaceutical Treatment in Adolescents
With Intellectual and Other Developmental Disabilities

Duncan Pritchard (Aran Hall School), HEATHER PENNEY (Aran Hall School), Veda Richards (Aran Hall School)
Abstract:

Psychotropic medication is frequently used to treat behavior disorders in adolescents with intellectual and other developmental disabilities, despite the risk of severe side-effects from the medication. A multi-component behavioral intervention was associated with a reduction in severe problem behavior presented by three male adolescents attending a residential program in the UK. Prior to their admission to the program, the three young people had been prescribed 3-4 psychotropic medications by community-based psychiatrists. None of the participants were attending school prior to their admission to the program and two had received criminal convictions. Alongside intensive behavioral treatment concurrent with systematic withdrawal of their psychotropic medication, the participants all attended the on-site school and gained a range of awards and qualifications. They were also able to participate in staff supported community-based activities such as food and clothes shopping, visits to the cinema, sports events, and restaurants. During their time in the program, two of the young people went on to attend college and work experience. The success of the behavioral treatment concurrent with the withdrawal of the medication perhaps demonstrates that the increasing prevalence of polypharmacy should be questioned by behavior analysts.

 

Rules, Role-Play, and Feedback Increase Appropriate Reactions of Adolescent Males Who Have Been Adjudicated

KRISTEN BROGAN (Auburn University), John T. Rapp (Auburn University), Anna Kate Edgemon (Auburn University), Amanda Niedfeld (Auburn University), Jodi Coon (Auburn University), Kelli Thompson (Auburn University), Barry Burkhart (Auburn University)
Abstract:

Adolescents who have been adjudicated may engage in excess behavior immediately following verbal directives or reprimands from staff. Excess behavior may include verbal aggression, indices of disrespect (e.g., eye rolling, grunting, obscene gestures), or even physical aggression. These excess behaviors may evoke further directives or reprimands from staff which in turn escalates the excess behavior. These cyclical interactions may result in severe consequences for both staff (e.g., risk of injury, involvement in an incident report) and adolescents (e.g., risk of injury, time out). Teaching adolescents who are detained to respond appropriately to staff directives and reprimands may produce large collateral changes in the way staff interact with adolescents in detention facilities. We taught eleven adolescent males who had been adjudicated to respond appropriately to staff directives and reprimands through the use of behavioral skills training. All participants showed low percentages of appropriate reactions in baseline and high percentages of appropriate reactions during treatment and generalization sessions. Implications of programming to teach appropriate reactions to diverse populations are discussed.

 

Risk Assessment of Severe Aggression With Detained Juvenile Offenders

P. RAYMOND JOSLYN (Berry College), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
Abstract:

Although functional assessment is an ideal approach for developing behavioral treatment, there are some scenarios in which it is difficult or infeasible. For behaviors that occur infrequently and are extremely dangerous, obtaining objective and reliable information can be challenging. For example, it would be unethical and dangerous to conduct a functional analysis of aggression that is likely to result in severe injury to staff members and it would be difficult to obtain indirect information if the behavior occurs infrequently. However, relative risk can be used to determine risk and protective factors for the occurrence of these difficult-to-assess behaviors. A relative risk calculation compares the conditional (factor-specific) rate or probability of a behavior to the unconditional (overall) rate or probability to provide information about conditions in which the behavior is more or less likely to occur. The current study was conducted in a long-term detention facility for juvenile offenders. We used environmental and resident behavior characteristics to calculate relative risk for severe aggression. Examination of specific factors such as the time of day, day of week, location, and latency to first instance of behavior indicated risk and protective factors for severe aggression. Implications for treatment, assessment, and future research are discussed.

 
Behaviour Analytic Interventions for Offenders in Secure Prisons: Opportunities and Challenges
CHRISTOPHER SEEL (University of South Wales), Jennifer L. Austin (University of South Wales)
Abstract: Behaviour analytic interventions hold great promise for improving outcomes for offenders in secure correctional facilities, despite the relative dearth of behaviour analysts working in these settings. This presentation will use multiple case examples to demonstrate the utility of reinforcement-based interventions in a UK prison housing nearly 2000 male offenders. For example, one case (Figure 1) demonstrates how a differential reinforcement of alternative behaviour (DRA) procedure increased prisoner engagement in education. Results showed that access to tokens exchangeable for cleaning tasks and certificates of accomplishment resulted in more consistent engagement in education sessions. However, positive changes were moderated by the presence of punitive procedures implemented by prison staff. A second case (Figure 2) demonstrates how a differential reinforcement of other behaviour (DRO) procedure decreased a prisoner’s unwarranted visits to the staff office. Visits decreased when the prisoner accessed to one-to-one staff attention and stationery contingent on absence of office interruptions. However, treatment effects were less stable when implementation was transferred to prison staff. We will highlight challenges of working in prison environments, including the volatility of the setting, dealing with procedural integrity compromises when transferring intervention implementation to prison officers, and addressing prison officer perspectives on appropriate strategies for behaviour change.
 
 
Symposium #251
CE Offered: BACB
Sticky Interventions for Environmentally Relevant Behaviors
Sunday, May 26, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Cuvee
Area: CSS/PCH; Domain: Translational
Chair: Thomas Anatol Da Rocha Woelz (PUC-SP)
Discussant: Mark P. Alavosius (Praxis2LLC)
CE Instructor: Mark P. Alavosius, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Most behaviors recommended to slow, prevent or adapt to global warming entail delayed consequences that may be inadequate to maintain behavior change. A challenge to any effort to organize behaviors responsive to climate change is increasing the current value of those behaviors to individuals, organizations and communities and consideration of their value to future generations. A framework for research and practice to govern consumption of community resources and preserve natural capital for future generations might consider what determines ‘sticky’ interventions that persist over time and attract others to invest in their expansion. Central to this framework are principles governing collective action, policies that define contingencies and organizational models that promote valuing of natural resources over unchecked consumption. Presentations in this symposium will highlight the emerging discussions and research associated with socially relevant issues.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Social Issues, Sticky Interventions
Target Audience:

Academicians, students, and practitioners who are interested in performance improvement in organizations.

Learning Objectives: The audience will describe the foundation (concepts, principles, methodology) underlying contingency analysis at the cultural level of selection. The audience will discuss the behavior analytic account of implicit bias as related to emerging socio-cultural issues. The audience will list behaviors and results that align with a behavior analytic discussion of wellbeing.
 

Methodological Developments for Evaluating Bicycle Lane Implementation on Urban Mobility

(Theory)
Felipe Leite (Imagine Behavioral Technology - Fortaleza/Brazil), MIGUEL ABDALA PAIVA MACIEL (Federal University of Ceará), Gerôncio de Oliveira Filho (University of Fortaleza), Carlos Rafael Fernandes Picanço (Universidade Federal do Para), Thais Maria Monteiro Guimarães (Federal University of Pará), Felipe Augusto Gomes Wanderley (Imagine Behavioral Technology), Hernando Borges Neves Filho (Imagine Behavioral Technology)
Abstract:

Large populations in urban centers leads to increasing complexity and concurrency between contingencies that affect individuals and groups. Modern urban mobility debates focus on how to implement policies that address this issue in an environmentally conscious account. Private automobiles are the preferred transportation in urban centers, however bicycles are gaining attention as an environmentally friendly alternative. This presentation discuss methodological developments to measure the impacts of the implementation of bicycle lanes on the use of bicycles as a basic means of transport. Counting of individuals biking were conduct in two two-hour time intervals by two independent observers on four days before bike lane implementation and four days after implementation. Follow-ups with equal measures were made in two months after the bicycle lanes are open. Video feeds from public security cameras were obtained, which allowed the use of BORIS software. A complementary software was developed in PASCAL to increase measurement precision from the video feeds in BORIS. Preliminary results indicated precise measurement and high IOA (≥90%). These developments are important to discuss the difficulties of evaluating public policies in developing countries such as Brazil, which can have direct implications for efficient urban planning and sustainable development.

 

Programming and Implementation of a Cultural Design for Solid Waste Management

(Applied Research)
Carla Morello Hayashi (Londrina State University), CAMILA MUCHON DE MELO (State University of Londrina)
Abstract:

Solid waste management has often been target of interventions in behavior analysis therefore this research had the purpose to develop a cultural design to this practice. Two studies were made in a community. The first one followed a systematized guidance used to cultural designs and 21 people participated. The procedure was divided into two stages to gather information about the community demand for pro-environmental practices and about the inappropriate practice of solid waste management. As a result, the cultural design was planned. The second study consisted of the implementation of a cultural design and 33 children participated. It was divided into: environment modification, instruction activities, gamification strategy and a practical activity. A baseline procedure was performed before the interventions and at the end of the program, two follow-up sessions were held. After each phase, the products of behaviors were measured. The results showed that the proportion of correct discards in Follow Up I and II was significantly higher than the first baseline (p = 0,0001?5%), as well as the proportion of separations by recyclable and organic items in both Follow Ups was significantly higher than the second baseline (p = 0,0001?5%). It was concluded that the cultural design was effective.

 
A Metacontingency Account of a Community’s Response to a Natural Disaster
(Theory)
JOSE ARDILA (University of Nevada), Ramona Houmanfar (University of Nevada, Reno), Mark P. Alavosius (Praxis2LLC)
Abstract: Weather and climate disasters are increasing threats for the survival of human communities across the globe (IPCC, 2018). The aim of this presentation is to analyze the ways by which the citizens of Puerto Rico responded to Hurricane María’s landfall. For this purpose, we used the elaborated account of the metacontingency (Houmanfar, Rodrigues, and Ward, 2010) to analyze the community’s process of recovery and adaptation. First, we will provide an overview of Glenn’s (2004), and Houmanfar and colleagues’ (2010), accounts of the metacontingency. Next, we will offer a descriptive analysis of the adaptive actions of puertorricans in the aftermath of Hurricane María. At the individual level, we will identify cultural responses with respect to institutionalized stimulus functions (cf. Kantor, 1982). At the group level, we will identify the cultural milieu (i.e. contextual variables) as well as the macro and metacontingencies involved in Puerto Rico’s recovery and adaptation. The results of this analysis have theoretical and applied implications. At the theoretical level, the 5-term metacontingency effectively orients scientific work towards the identification of the psychological and sociological factors involved in the human response to natural disasters. At the applied level, identifying these factors can potentially inform future preventive, recovery, and adaptive measures and procedures.
 
Evidence-Based Advocacy
(Theory)
MARK A. MATTAINI (Jane Addams College of Social Work-University of Illinois at Chicago)
Abstract: Human behavior is at the root of each of the major interlocking issues facing current societies and the global environment, including climate change, growing authoritarianism, violence, poverty, and the struggles of refugee populations. The evidence that those issues are genuine, serious, and structurally-based is overwhelming, and each is associated with serious violations of human rights. Reshaping the practices of human societies to address these issues is extraordinarily difficult, especially when the existence and importance of each remains controversial within the general public and across cultures. There are at least three related and apparently valuable responses under these conditions: Advocacy, Activism, and Accompaniment. There is an enormous literature related to each of these strategic options (Mattaini, 2013; Mattaini & Holtschneider, 2016); comprehensive, established evidence bases that can guide those practices are, however, not well developed. One of the projects being pursued by the Coalition of Behavior Science (organized by ABAI) therefore, is assembling a knowledge base to effectively guide evidence-based advocacy for sustainability and social and environmental justice, drawing on existing literature and current events, interpreted and conceptualized from a behavior science perspective. Coalition efforts in this area will be sketched in this presentation.
 
 
Symposium #253
CE Offered: BACB
The Effect of Response Rate, Reinforcement Schedules, and Stimulus-Reinforcer Relations on Response Patterns During Extinction and Delays to Reinforcement
Sunday, May 26, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich E-G
Area: EAB/DDA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Fabiola Vargas (University of Texas at Austin)
Discussant: Christopher A. Podlesnik (Florida Institute of Technology)
CE Instructor: Jennifer J. McComas, Ph.D.
Abstract: Response patterns during extinction or delays to reinforcement following functional communication training are of interest to those concerned about durable treatment effects. This symposium is comprised of four data-based presentations on the effect of response rate, reinforcement schedules, and stimulus-reinforcer relations on response patterns during extinction and delays to reinforcement. The studies presented are translational in nature and span basic human operant to applied investigations, all designed to improve our understanding of the effect of these variables on subsequent response patterns. Fabiola Vargas Londono will present first on the effect of response rate of functional communication responses (FCRs) on subsequent responding during extinction. Next, Jennifer McComas will present the results of a human operant study of the effect of a lag schedule of reinforcement on subsequent persistence and resurgence, followed by Kelly Schieltz who will present on the effects of stimulus-reinforcer relations on resurgence of problem behavior. Rachel Cagliani will present the final paper that demonstrates the effects of delays to reinforcement on FCRs. Finally, Christopher Podlesnik will discuss the papers in the context of translational research and future directions.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience: Scientist-practitioners, researchers, BCBA-Ds
 

Further Evaluations of the Effects of Response Rate on Resurgence of Responding in Individuals With Autism: A Translational Study

(Applied Research)
FABIOLA VARGAS LONDOÑO (UT-Austin), Terry S. Falcomata (The University of Texas at Austin), Andrea Ramirez-Cristoforo (The University of Texas at Austin), Cayenne Shpall (Student)
Abstract:

Prior research has demonstrated that response rate pertaining to target responding can affect levels resurgence (e.g., Reed & Morgan, 2007; Da Silva, Maxwell, & Lattal, 2008). However, the effects of response rate have not been evaluated with clinically relevant populations. We conducted a two-experiment study in which we translated the results of Da Silva et al. (2008). In Experiment 1, we assessed resurgence of respective mands with distinct response rates (in Phase A) including a relative high response rate (i.e., under a FR 6 schedule of reinforcement) versus a relatively low response rate (i.e., under a FR 1 schedule of reinforcement) with an equal rate of reinforcement in individuals with autism. The results of Experiment 1 were idiosyncratic and inconsistent with basic findings. In Experiment 2, based on aspects of the findings in Experiment 1, we incorporated a discrimination procedure and subsequently evaluated relative resurgence of responding across conditions with different rates of responding. The results of Experiment 2 were consistent with the basic findings in that higher levels of resurgence were associated with higher rates of responding. Future avenues of research and potential implications of the current results will be discussed.

 
A Translational Evaluation of the Effects of a Lag Schedule on Resurgence of Target Responding and Persistence of Alternative Responding: An Analog of Functional Communication Training
(Basic Research)
JENNIFER J. MCCOMAS (University of Minnesota), Terry S. Falcomata (The University of Texas at Austin), Ashley Bagwell (University of Texas at Austin), Joel Eric Ringdahl (University of Georgia)
Abstract: Functional communication training (FCT) is one of the most commonly cited function-based treatments for problem behavior. However, FCT has been demonstrated to be susceptible to treatment relapse (i.e., resurgence) during challenges to treatment. One strategy for preventing and/or mitigating resurgence is the inclusion of multiple alternative responses during FCT. We evaluated the effects of reinforcing multiple alternative responses via lag schedules on the persistence and resurgence of responding within a human operant experimental preparation. We alternated two conditions across a 3-phase resurgence preparation. During Phase A, in both conditions, a target response was reinforced on a fixed ratio (FR) 1 schedule. During Phase B, target responding was on extinction in both conditions; an alternative response was reinforced on a FR 1 schedule in one condition and multiple responses were reinforced on a Lag 3 schedule in the other condition. During Phase C, all responses across both conditions were on extinction and we compared persistence of alternative responding and resurgence of targeting responding across conditions. The majority of subjects exhibited higher persistence of alternative responding and lower resurgence of target responding in the Lag schedule condition. Future avenues of research and potential implications of the current results will be discussed.
 
An Evaluation of Resurgence Following Functional Communication Training Conducted in Alternative Antecedent Contexts via Telehealth
(Applied Research)
KELLY M. SCHIELTZ (University of Iowa), Alyssa N. Suess (Trinity Health), David P. Wacker (The University of Iowa), Jessica Detrick (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Treatments based on differential reinforcement may inadvertently increase the recurrence of problem behavior when challenge conditions are encountered. The current study evaluated one potential solution to the possible strengthening effects of differential reinforcement treatments using methodology proposed by Mace et al. (2010). Participants were four children with autism spectrum disorder and treatment involved using telehealth to implement functional communication training (FCT) in three contexts with antecedent stimuli that had minimal histories of reinforcement for problem behavior before initiating FCT in the treatment context. Evaluations of the effects of treatment and tests of resurgence were conducted intermittently during treatment to evaluate maintenance, and to specifically compare the results to Wacker et al. (2011). The initial results of FCT treatment were comparable to Wacker et al. (2011) when treatment was initiated with alternative stimuli. Resurgence was reduced to similar levels during extinction challenges for all participants when compared to those achieved by Wacker et al., but clinically significant reductions in resurgence occurred more quickly in the present study
 
An Evaluation of Local Extinction Following Augmentative and Alternative Communication Mands on Response Variability
(Applied Research)
RACHEL CAGLIANI (University of Georgia), Kevin Ayres (University of Georgia), Joel Eric Ringdahl (University of Georgia)
Abstract: Carr and Kologinsky (1983) found that when mands contacted extinction individuals altered their responding to another mand modality. Several studies have further investigated the effect of response variability by demonstrating that altering parameters of reinforcement, specifically delay to reinforcement or temporary extinction, may result in individuals shifting their response allocation from AAC to vocalizations (Tincani, 2004; Tincani, Crozier, & Alazetta, 2006; Carbone, Sweeney-Kerwin, Attanasio, & Kasper, 2010; Gevarter et al., 2014). Delay to reinforcement serves as a temporary exposure to extinction; the individual responds and the therapist waits a pre-determined amount of time before delivering the reinforcer. The current study evaluated response variability when augmentative and alternative communication mands temporarily contacted extinction. Across three data sets, 6 of 8 individuals overall with autism spectrum disorder shifted their responding to vocalizations when the AAC mand contacted extinction temporarily. Researchers determined the appropriate delay to reinforcement through a parametric manipulation.
 
 
Invited Tutorial #255
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
Toward a Complete Technology of Reinforcer Identification
Sunday, May 26, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom EF
Area: PRA; Domain: Basic Research
PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP CE Offered. CE Instructor: Richard Graff, Ph.D.
Chair: Paula Ribeiro Braga Kenyon (Trumpet Behavioral Health)
Presenting Authors: : RICHARD GRAFF (May Institute)
Abstract:

Behavior analyst practitioners use reinforcement-based procedures to increase desirable behavior and to reduce undesirable behavior. The success of these procedures depends in part on the clinician’s ability to identify reinforcers and deliver them in an effective manner. Understanding how to identify reinforcers is critical to designing and implementing effective reinforcement-based interventions, and requires a working knowledge of preference assessments. However, there are few resources available to practitioners that synthesize the rich technology of reinforcer identification that behavior analysts developed over the past 30 years. This tutorial reviews different preference assessment methods that have been published in the behavior analytic literature, how to identify stimuli to include in assessments, the prerequisite skills required for each assessment, and the conditions under which assessments should be conducted to maximize the validity of preference hierarchies that are established. Variables that influence preference assessment outcomes are reviewed, including the effects of pre-assessment motivating operations, displacement effects that result from including items from different categories (edible, tangible, social) on the same assessment, and the role of differential consequences following selection responses.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Behavior analytic practitioners and clinicians who work with individuals with autism and developmental and intellectual disabilities.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe three different preference assessment methods and the prerequisite skills required for each assessment; (2) describe the role of pre-assessment motivating operations on preference assessment outcomes; (3) describe potential displacement effects when different categories of stimuli are included on the same preference assessment; (4) describe the role of differential consequences when implementing preference assessment procedures.
 
RICHARD GRAFF (May Institute)

Richard B. Graff, Ph.D., BCBA-D, LABA, has worked in the field of autism and developmental disabilities for 32 years. He currently serves as the Senior Vice President of Clinical Training and Services at the May Institute. He previously served as Senior Scientist and Clinical Director at the New England Center for Children and as a clinical consultant to the Rhode Island Department of Human Services. Rick is on the Board of Directors of the Berkshire Association for Behavior Analysis and Therapy and serves on the Conference Planning Committee for the Association of Professional Behavior Analysts. Rick also serves on the Code Compliance Committee of the Behavior Analyst Certification Board® (BACB®). He is an Adjunct Faculty member for Western New England University and Endicott College. Rick's research interests include preference and reinforcement, choice, functional analysis and treatment of challenging behavior, and skill acquisition in learners with severe disabilities. Rick has served on the editorial boards of the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis and Behavioral Interventions, and his research has been published in the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, Behavioral Interventions, Behavior Modification, Research in Developmental Disabilities, Research in Autism Spectrum Disorders, Behavior Analysis in Practice, and The Journal of Special Education.

 
 
Symposium #256
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Whose Job is it, Anyway?: How to Stop Passing the Buck and Start Evolving the Field Through Nurturing Supervised Experiences
Sunday, May 26, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Rouge
Area: TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Sara Baillie (Trinity Christian College)
Discussant: Jennifer Klapatch Totsch (National Louis University)
CE Instructor: Sara Baillie, Ed.D.
Abstract:

The topic of field experience supervision has received growing attention in recent years, as evidenced by the continuously evolving BACB field experience standards and the recent special edition on supervision in Behavior Analysis in Practice. In addition to the exponential growth of new BCBAs functioning as supervisors and supervisees pursuing this supervision, there is also growing variability in the topography of training experiences and the capacity in which BCBAs function as supervisors. However, the field experience standards and the majority of literature to date on best practices in providing this supervision discuss the provision of supervision in a simplistic, supervisee-supervisor dyad. There has been little discussion of navigating complex and multifaceted supervisory relationships, from both the perspective of the supervisor and the supervisee, in service of producing optimal supervisee learning outcomes. In this symposium, supervisors and former supervisees will share their experiences in navigating these multifaceted supervisory relationships and the effect it had on their ability to provide and receive socially valid, effective supervision. We’ll conclude with suggestions for empowering both supervisors and supervisees in creating socially valid field experiences, aligned with Biglan’s (2015) recommendations to “make everyone’s environment more nurturing—less coercive and more caring, supportive of human development, and focused on doing what works” (p. 213).

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): social validity, supervision
Target Audience:

current or future field experience supervisors; current or future field experience supervisees

 

The Move Away From University Practicum Options: How Will This Change Graduate Training Programs?

SARA BAILLIE (Trinity Christian College)
Abstract:

Large institutions, such as universities, can be compared to large, slow-moving barges. With established processes and procedures already in place, it can be near impossible to change the direction quickly. And yet, with the continuous, unanticipated changes from the Behavior Analyst Certification Board (BACB), we have been expected to change our graduate training programs quite abruptly (in the context of how long it takes for such changes to be processed and approved by the governing institution). One such adjustment is required to meet the new field experience standards. With the upcoming removal of university oversight from the field experience standards, we have been compelled to think outside of the box to determine how we can continue to facilitate quality field experiences to our students. Looking towards other professions as models, this discussion will include comparisons to other professions and the role of universities in overseeing their training requirements, how the removal of university oversight from the field experience standards may impact graduate training programs, and details about how one institution has navigated these changes in order to continue facilitating socially valid field experiences for its students.

 
The Balancing Act: Providing Meaningful Field Experiences While Meeting Case Supervision Needs
JAMINE LAYNE DETTMERING (ReachABA, The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Lindsay B. Rouse (ReachABA), Rosie Ward (ReachABA)
Abstract: Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBAs) working in service delivery agencies provide case supervision to those individuals, such as behavior technicians, who are providing direct services to their clients. Often, BCBAs are also tasked with concurrently providing those supervisees field experience supervision. While there may be considerable overlap between field experience supervision and case supervision, the goals are fundamentally different. Whereas the goal of case supervision is directly related to facilitating effective treatment delivery and ensure consumer protection (BACB, 2014), the overarching goal of field experience supervision is to develop the supervisee’s behavior-analytic, professional, and ethical repertoires (BACB, 2012). The difference in these goals can create many barriers for BCBAs who provide supervision in this dual capacity. With resource, setting, and time constraints, it can be difficult to assess the supervisee’s current repertoire, prioritize goals, and arrange appropriate supervision activities, as is required by our ethical codes and field experience standards. While recent literature has suggested techniques for standardizing and streamlining this process, BCBAs often supervise multiple supervisees concurrently, each with different entering skill sets, at different points in the continuum of their field experience, and for varying durations of time. This presentation will discuss these barriers from the perspective of an agency supervisor and explore potential solutions to address those barriers.
 

The Trials and Tribulations of Providing Effective Training and Supervision as a Third Party Supervisor

Erin Abell (Garden Center Services; The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), DANIKA MCGANDY (Gorbold Behavioral Consulting, inc.), Shannon Biagi (Chief Motivating Officers, LLC)
Abstract:

Consultative supervision models have developed out of necessity; in many instances, supervisees pursuing field experience supervision may not have access to a local BCBA, or the BCBA directly responsible for the supervisee’s clients may not have the capacity to provide field experience supervision. As a result, BCBAs sometimes act as “3rd party” supervisors, such as when a supervisee hires a BCBA to provide field experience supervision or when university faculty provide field experience supervision outside of traditional lab settings. While this model has increased the accessibility of field experience supervision for supervisees, providing adequate supervision and training in a consultative model has its challenges. It is often difficult to provide effective training and feedback due to the nature of this model, in which 3rd party supervisors may have little to no control over clinical decisions regarding the supervisee’s clients. In addition, when providing feedback to a supervisee in this model, it can be challenging to do so in a way that is perceived to be collaborative, as opposed to critical, by other supervisors involved. The consultative supervision model creates several competing contingencies for the supervisee, their direct supervisor, and the consultant supervisor, which can severely affect the efficacy of the consultative supervision and impact the social validity of the experience for everyone involved. By creating stronger contingencies for a more collaborative training model, both direct and 3rd party supervisors can more effectively support the development of their supervisees and improve delivery in our field as a whole.

 

The Social Validity of Current Supervision Experiences: A Student’s Perspective

LAUREN BROUWERS (ReachABA)
Abstract:

While it is pertinent that students equip themselves for accruing supervision hours by fully engaging in their coursework, it is also imperative that students advocate for themselves when the coursework is not sufficient. In order to ensure that the supervision experience is well-rounded, it is important that aspiring Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBAs) take an active role in this experience through seeking opportunities for further developing technical skills and generalizing environmental assessment and analysis to the behavior of their supervisor to ensure that the supervisor is filling the gaps that academic training could not. While it can be argued that the supervisor’s job is not to be their professor, the supervisor’s job is to be a mentor that guides the student through how to apply the coursework concepts to the task list and the clients receiving services regardless of when supervision starts, whether that is the first or last day of classes. In this session, the supervision experience’s benefits, as well as its drawbacks, will be addressed from the perspective of a former student and supervisee.

 
 
Symposium #257
CE Offered: BACB
Improving Learning in Higher Education: Fluency, Oral Quizzes, Reducing Procrastination, and Weekly Quizzes
Sunday, May 26, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, International Ballroom
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Christopher J. Perrin (Georgian Court University)
Discussant: Traci M. Cihon (University of North Texas)
CE Instructor: Judah B. Axe, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The four papers in this symposium extend research demonstrating the application of principles of behavior analysis to improving learning in undergraduate and graduate courses. In a graduate course, Perrin and Wilson compared two methods of fluency-based practice of terms – see/say versus see/type definitions – and found both improved weekly quiz scores, though the see/type method was preferred. In an online graduate course, Axe, Chase, Breault, and Neault found that oral quizzes administered at the start of live sessions improved written quiz and exam scores. In a graduate course, Bird and Chase reduced procrastination by providing study materials contingent on completing practice quizzes, though students did not prefer distributing their practice until bonus points were contingent on distributed practice. Finally, in a study focused on low-performing students in an undergraduate course, Dalfen, Fienup, and D’Ateno showed that requiring a passing criterion on weekly quizzes improved exam scores. These studies will be discussed in terms of the behavior analytic strategies of fluency-based instruction, self-control, choice behavior, and mastery learning.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): fluency, passing criteria, procrastination, quizzes/exams
Target Audience:

behavior analysts, professors, graduate students, researchers

 
Comparing the Effects of See-Say (SAFMEDS) and See-Type (TAFMEDS) Fluency Exercises on Quiz Performance
CHRISTOPHER J. PERRIN (Georgian Court University), David M. Wilson (Georgian Court University)
Abstract: Precision teaching techniques used in higher education often are see/say activities (i.e.., SAFMEDS) despite the fact that examinations are usually in a see/write or see/type learning channel. Previous researchers (e.g., Cihon, Sturtz, & Eshleman, 2012) have suggested it may be beneficial to conduct practice in the same learning channel as assessment. In a recent study, use of a see/type (i.e., TAFMEDS) exercise delivered by course management software was been shown to improve quiz performance relative to a no exercise condition (Perrin & Wilson, 2017). As such, the current investigation compared the effects of SAFMEDS and TAFMEDS on the weekly quiz performance of students enrolled in a graduate level experimental analysis of behavior course. Each week, students completed either SAFMEDS or TAFMEDS in a counterbalanced fashion in preparation for an in-class written quiz. Results indicated that quiz scores were similar across the SAFMEDS AND TAFMEDS conditions. In addition, the majority of students rated SAFMEDS and TAFMEDS as “useful in preparing for the quiz”. If given a choice, more students indicated a preference for TAFMEDS (54.5%) than SAFMEDS (45.5%).
 
The Effects of Oral Quizzes on Written Exam Performance in an Online Graduate Course
JUDAH B. AXE (Simmons University), Philip N. Chase (Simmons University), Megan Breault (RCS Learning Center; Simmons University), Noelle Neault (Simmons University)
Abstract: There is limited research on strategies to improve exam performance in higher education, and even less in online teaching. Work from behavioral instruction has suggested that oral quizzing may improve written exam performance (Johnson & Ruskin, 1977). In the current study, 20 graduate students in an online research course were exposed to weeks with and without oral quizzes. Oral quizzes occurred during the first 15 minutes of four out of 10 live sessions in which the instructor randomly called on students to answer questions from the previous week’s content. Written quizzes and exams were divided into questions on content for which there was (oral quiz condition) and was not (no oral quiz condition) an oral quiz. Results indicated that 15 of the 20 participants had higher scores in the oral quiz condition. In one of the two terms, one section performed better on a post-oral exam compared to a pre-oral exam. Most participants reported liking the oral quizzes and feeling they helped in the course. Two of the three instructors rated the oral quizzes as helpful. Oral quizzes may have produced better learning as they held students accountable to verbalizing content and required more frequent studying.
 

Applied Behavior Analysis Master's Student Pacing: Procrastination, Preference, and Performance

ZACHARY C. BIRD (Principled Behavior Consultants; Simmons University), Philip N. Chase (Simmons University)
Abstract:

Previous research has shown that a large percentage of students procrastinate and a majority of those students wish to reduce it. The purpose of experiment 1 of the current study was to replicate previous findings that contingent access to study materials would produce distributed studying patterns. The current study extended previous research by evaluating preference for treatment using both a choice procedure as well as an end-of-semester survey. Results indicated that although contingent access to study materials was successful at reducing procrastination, students chose to pace themselves when allowed. Given that the intervention was disliked by a vast majority of students and was time intensive for researchers, professors may be reluctant to use the contingent access intervention. Experiment 2 evaluated a treatment for procrastination that was likely to be preferred by the students and more efficient to implement. Effects of a bonus point contingency for pacing was evaluated. Results indicated that a majority of students who procrastinated opted to distribute their studying behavior to access bonus points in the course. The data from both studies are discussed in terms of recommendations for future research regarding the use of bonus points in college courses and implications of student and professor preference.

 
Passing Criterion: How Lowering Expectations for Quizzes can Produce Higher Scores on Exams
Samantha Dalfen (Behavioral Intervention Psychological Services), DANIEL MARK FIENUP (Columbia University), Patricia A. D'Ateno (Queens College CUNY)
Abstract: Students in higher education perform better on exams when they complete frequent quizzes on the assigned reading material; but little research has investigated how different grading criteria for quizzes affect quiz and exam performance. Previous research has shown that the frequent quiz effect has a lower impact on low-performing students, or the students who need help the most. To address this limitation, we examined the effects of different passing criterion for quizzes on exam scores. A passing criterion consists of requiring a student to obtain a certain score to earn full credit for the quiz, thus lowering the response effort to obtain reinforcement for completing quizzes. In Experiment 1, we compared low- and high-passing criterion and found that low-passing criterion produced better outcomes, especially for low performing students. In Experiment 2, we compared a low-passing criterion to a standard quiz grading criterion; we also manipulated the type of exam question and whether exam questions were replicated from a previous quiz. Experiment 2 revealed that passing criteria produced higher performance on exams. Collectively, the experiments support the notion that lowering the response effort for earning points from quizzes translated to improved exam scores.
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #259
CE Offered: BACB/PSY/QABA

The Effects of Human-Animal Interaction on Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

Sunday, May 26, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: AAB; Domain: Basic Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Valeri Farmer-Dougan, Ph.D.
Chair: Valeri Farmer-Dougan (Illinois State University)
MARGUERITE O'HAIRE (Purdue University)

Dr. Marguerite (Maggie) O’Haire is an internationally recognized Fulbright Scholar who is currently an Associate Professor of Human-Animal Interaction in the Center for the Human-Animal Bond at Purdue University. She earned her BA in Psychology from Vassar College in New York and her Ph.D. in Psychology from The University of Queensland in Australia. Her research program focuses on the unique and pervasive ways that humans interact with animals. From research with household pets to highly trained service animals, her findings have been instrumental in evaluating the value of the human-animal bond. She has received funding from three different NIH institutes to fund her human-animal interaction research, including an NICHD-funded trial of animal-assisted intervention for autism. In addition to her peer-reviewed publications and textbook chapters, her work has also been highlighted in over 1,000 media stories around the globe, including NPR, the Wall Street Journal, and the New York Times. For more information, see www.humananimalinteraction.org.

Abstract:

The field of human-animal interaction encompasses the unique and pervasive relationships between humans and animals. These relationships can influence human health, well-being, and development. An emerging body of research has begun to systematically evaluate these effects across a broad range of populations and settings. One population that has received growing attention is children with autism spectrum disorder. This talk will review the evidence base for this practice as well as provide concrete examples of research with various animal species, including guinea pigs in inclusion classroom settings and therapy dogs in a specialized psychiatric hospital program.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) identify different types of animal-assisted intervention; (2) describe outcomes of animal-assisted intervention for autism spectrum disorder; (3) list behavioral changes from animal presence.
 
 
Panel #260
CE Offered: BACB
School Based Behavior Consultation: Developing Sustainable Interventions With Strong Contextual Fit
Sunday, May 26, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Lobby Level, Plaza Ballroom AB
Area: AUT/DEV; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Katherine Bateman, Ph.D.
Chair: Elizabeth Kelly (University of Washington)
KATHERINE BATEMAN (University of Virginia)
ERIN STEWART (University of Washington)
SCOTT A. SPAULDING (University of Washington)
Abstract:

Over the last century, diagnosis of Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) has continuously increased, drastically changing education systems across the country as more and more students with autism, as well as other disabilities, are educated in public school settings. Higher rates of maladaptive and challenging behaviors are often observed in classrooms, as one significant area of development that is often associated with a diagnosis of autism is behavior regulation. The field of education continues to shift theory and practice to better accommodate and teach children of all abilities in public school settings. Further, school personnel are often required to implement high levels of intervention to support and meet the needs of all students in accessing presented curriculum and instruction. Research identifies an overall lack of training and behavioral skills in teacher preparation programs to effectively intervene on challenging behavior while maintaining high quality instruction. In order to meet the needs of all students educated in public school settings, Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBAs) are increasingly utilized in a consultation model of collaboration, aiming to develop effective behavior interventions for students with challenging behavior. In order to create sustainable interventions in classrooms, one major factor that should be considered is the contextual fit of potential behavior plans. Further, it is critical that interventions include analysis of contextual fit during the development phase of interventions to ensure plans created by BCBAs can easily be implemented in the already occurring systems and supports of each unique classroom. This leads to higher positive outcomes of intervention for students and teachers, as intervention easily fits into the particular nuances of each classroom. Ultimately, this strong contextual fit leads to high fidelity of implementation of developed plans. This panel will discuss barriers and constraints that affect high fidelity of implementation in school settings, as well as present an interview protocol developed as a tool to guide BCBAs in development of intervention plans from the onset of the consultation experience. This interview tool aims to identify contributing factors to sustainability of interventions in each unique classrooms in order to develop behavior intervention plans that are individualized to the student and particular classroom, ensuring that they are effective, feasible, and sustainable.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

BCBAs and teachers that are involved in school based behavior consultation.

Learning Objectives: 1. Identify and understand barriers present when implementing behavior support plans developed in collaboration during school based consultation. 2. Discuss and explore issues of sustainability and the idea of contextual fit of interventions in classrooms. 3. Examine and explore interview tool presented to analyze contextual fit prior to development of behavior interventions in classrooms.
Keyword(s): Behavior Intervention, School Consultation, Service Delivery, Sustainability
 
 
Panel #261
CE Offered: BACB/NASP — 
Ethics
Fostering Relationships With Family Members: Compassionate Care in Applied Behavior Analysis
Sunday, May 26, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 1-3
Area: CBM/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Bridget A. Taylor, Psy.D.
Chair: Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group)
LINDA A. LEBLANC (LeBlanc Behavioral Consulting LLC)
EVELYN RACHAEL GOULD (McLean Hospital, Harvard Medical School; FirstSteps for Kids, Inc.)
KATE E. MASSEY (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University)
Abstract:

Within certain areas of healthcare, it has been documented that treating patients with compassion and empathy can have important benefits, such as increasing patient satisfaction, enhancing adherence to treatment, and improving clinical outcomes. While current empirical support for these outcomes is mixed (Kirby, Tellegen & Steindl, 2017), there is increasing scientific interest in the benefits of compassionate care. Behavior analysts have recently begun to articulate the importance of attending to relationships in our clinical work. For example, Taylor, LeBlanc and Nosik (2018) proposed that clinical outcomes of clients may be enhanced by improving relationships with caregivers. The panel will review survey data documenting parent perception of compassionate care by behavior analysts, as well as behavior analysts’ impressions of training needs in this area. Panelists will present their respective clinical and or research programs that incorporate compassionate care, such as ACT in parent training, and staff training programs to increase the therapeutic relationship skills of BCBA’s. Audience members will have an opportunity to ask questions and engage in discussion with panelists.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Target audience is Master or Doctoral Level clinicians, BCBAs or BCBA-Ds.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to 1. Identify components of the BACB ethical code related to building therapeutic relationships with parents. 2. Identify curriculum components that can be incorporated into a comprehensive training program to teach these skills. 3. State the potential positive impact therapeutic relationship skills could have on client outcomes.
 
 
Panel #264
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Ethical Considerations and Risk Assessment During Functional Analysis and Treatment of Problem Behavior
Sunday, May 26, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Rebecca Renee Eldridge, Ph.D.
Chair: Stephanie M. Peterson (Western Michigan University)
REBECCA RENEE ELDRIDGE (Western Michigan University)
CYNTHIA M. ANDERSON (May Institute)
YANNICK ANDREW SCHENK (May Institute)
Abstract:

Functional analysis of problem behavior has become the "gold standard" assessment to be used. However, the use of functional analysis involves some risk, because it creates conditions that occasion problem behavior (Khang et al., 2015). Safety precautions should be part of the considerations when designing and implementing a functional analysis (Poling et al., 2012). Despite the widely accepted use of functional analysis technology to assess problem behavior and the need for safety precautions to reduce risk during a functional analyses, there is not a single source to access recommended safety precautions. Instead, they are scattered throughout the literature. As such, Wiskirchen, Deochand, & Peterson (2017) suggested the need to develop a formal risk-benefit assessment for proceeding with a functional analysis. This session discusses ethical considerations when designing and implementing a functional analysis as well as safety precautions that should be considered in the evaluation of problem behavior. The panelists will also address when to use alternative assessments when the risks of a functional analysis cannot be ameliorated satisfactorily. These safety precautions must also be considered during treatment implementation, because problem behavior is likely to occur during treatment as well. Thus, the panelists will also address safety precautions and considerations within treatment during the discussion.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Behavior analysts working with individuals who engage in severe and challenging behavior

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) discuss how to conduct a risk-benefit analysis with functional analysis procedures; (2) discuss some ways to reduce risk for functional analysis or state other alternative assessments to functional analysis; (3) discuss some safety precautions to consider within treatment procedures for problem behavior.
 
 
Symposium #267
CE Offered: BACB/NASP
Behavioral Parent Training to Promote Academic Achievement in Children With Intellectual and Neurodevelopmental Disabilities
Sunday, May 26, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: EDC/DDA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Sara S. Kupzyk (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Med)
Discussant: Kimberly Martell (Ball State University)
CE Instructor: Sara S. Kupzyk, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Students with intellectual and developmental disabilities (IDDs) experience significant barriers to academic achievement. Parents of children will IDDs often feel overwhelmed in finding ways to effectively promote their children’s academic success. Behaviorally-based parent training has been shown to improve parents’ use of evidence-based behavior and academic strategies, and promote subsequent child outcomes. This symposium will include two presentations focused on methods implemented in the context of an academic evaluation and intervention clinic to provide parent training for the purposes of (1) improving parents’ behavior management skills, (2) promoting academic outcomes for children and adolescents with IDDs, and (3) increasing parents’ treatment integrity implementing academic interventions. Participants included parents and their child/adolescent with IDD. A series of multiple baseline designs were used to determine the effectiveness of the parent training program on parents’ behavior management skills and treatment integrity and child/adolescent academic outcomes. Collectively, results indicated that (1) parents improved their use of effective instructions with concomitant improvements in child/adolescent compliance and (2) parents improved their treatment integrity for delivering academic interventions with concomitant improvements children’s reading skills. Results obtained from this program inform both research and practice related to promoting academic achievement for children and adolescents with IDDs.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): academic intervention, consultation, parent training, treatment integrity
Target Audience:

Behavior analysts who work with individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities, behavior analysts who work in educational contexts, clinical psychologists, school psychologists, and graduate students in applied behavior analysis, school psychology, and/or clinical psychology.

Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will learn to develop and implement group-based parent training to teacher parents to implement effective instructions. 2. This presentation will describe how to implement a systematic framework for increasing parents' treatment integrity of academic interventions. 3. Attendees will learn to analyze program outcome data to determine if a parent training program for improving parent and child skills is effective.
 
Toward Improving Access to Evidence-Based Behavior Management: Evaluation of Group-Based Behavioral Skills Training
(Applied Research)
ZACHARY CHARLES LABROT (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Whitney Strong-Bak (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Sara S. Kupzyk (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Med)
Abstract: Children and adolescents with intellectual and developmental disabilities (IDDs) often exhibit behavioral difficulties, which can impact their academic achievement. As a result, many parents of children with IDDs may struggle with helping their children improve academic performance due to difficult behaviors. One way to address these concerns is to provide group-based parent training for similar presenting concerns. Behavioral skills training (BST) is an effective strategy for teaching parents to implement evidence-based behavior management strategies. This presentation includes data collected from two separate studies designed to evaluate the effectiveness of a group-based BST program to teach parents effective behavior management strategies. Participants included seven children with intellectual or neurodevelopmental disabilities (e.g., autism, ADHD, intellectual disorder) and their parents. Using two multiple baseline designs, parents were trained to provide effective instructions via group-based BST to promote child compliance in an academic context. Collectively, results indicated that parents demonstrated improved integrity for providing effective instructions, with concomitant improvements in children’s compliance. Further, parents rated group-based BST as a socially valid and effective training procedure. These results are important as they demonstrate that group-based BST is an effective method for improving parents’ ability to implement behavior management strategies with struggling learners.
 
Parent Tutoring for Academic Skills and Application of a Systematic Framework to Enhance Treatment Integrity
(Service Delivery)
SARA S. KUPZYK (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Med), Zachary Charles LaBrot (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Meredith Weber (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Emmie Hebert (University of Nebraska Medical Center)
Abstract: Parent tutoring has been identified as a promising practice for improving academic skills. Although treatment integrity is essential to making valid decisions about the effectiveness of interventions, applied interventions are at high risk for poor implementation. A systematic framework for problem solving for treatment integrity failures has been proposed. This model includes high quality initial training for implementers, collection of data on treatment integrity, identification of problems, and strategies to improve integrity based on hypotheses related to the dimensions of integrity (e.g., adherence, quality, dosage, and engagement) and skill, performance, and resource deficits. The purposes of this study were to (a) assess the impact of parent tutoring on students’ early reading skills and (b) examine the usefulness of the systematic framework for solving treatment integrity problems. Two adolescents with intellectual disabilities and their parents participated. Graduate students taught parents to use a research-based intervention in the home environment. Data were collected on parent implementation and adolescent progress with targeted reading skills. A nonconcurrent multiple baseline design was used. Preliminary results indicate improvements in early literacy skills upon implementation of parent tutoring and improvements in parents’ treatment integrity when interventions identified through the systematic framework were implemented.
 
 
Symposium #268
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Applications of Behavioral Skills Training
Sunday, May 26, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom A
Area: OBM/TBA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Christopher M. Furlow (Canopy Children's Solutions )
CE Instructor: Christopher M. Furlow, Ph.D.
Abstract: Behavioral Skills Training (BST) has been shown as an effective way to teach basic and complex skills to a variety of populations. In the current symposium, three novel applications that demonstrate the efficacy of BST across settings and behaviors will be presented, as well as a discussion of implications to training.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): BST, In-situ feedback, Staff training
Target Audience: Practicing Behavior Analysts, graduate students, faculty members in behavior analysis
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will review the steps of Behavioral Skills Training 2. Participants will learn the application of in-situ feedback as part of BST across three novel applications. 3. Participants will discuss implications of in-situ feedback as part of an overall training package.
 

A Comparison of Immediate and Post-Session Feedback with Behavioral Skills Training to Improve Interview Skills in College Students

LAURA-KATHERINE K BARKER (Canopy Children's Solutions), James Moore (Canopy Children's Solutions)
Abstract:

Successful interviewing skills help maximize the probability that a job candidate will make a positive impression upon a prospective employer. Stocco, Thompson, Hart, and Soriano (2017) described a method using Behavioral Skills Training (BST) to increase appropriate interview skills that used post-session feedback. Immediate feedback has been shown as an effective method that may improve the effectiveness and efficiency of the training package described by Stocco et al. This study aimed to replicate Stocco et al. using BST to improve interview skills of college students and extend the study by comparing post-session and immediate feedback. All participants demonstrated improvements in interview skills, thus replicating the findings of Stocco et al. More specifically, BST with immediate feedback showed greater acquisition, maintenance, and generalization, with fewer training minutes required to meet mastery criteria compared to BST with post-session feedback.

 
An Evaluation of Group Training Methods on the Treatment Integrity of Day Treatment Staff
MADELINE POTTER (Canopy Children's Solutions), James Moore (Canopy Children's Solutions), Christopher M. Furlow (Canopy Children's Solutions), Laura-Katherine K Barker (The university of Southern Mississippi)
Abstract: A variety of group training methods, including Behavioral Skills Training, voice-over video instruction, voice-over video feedback, and in-situ feedback were evaluated in the acquisition of basic applied behavior analytic methods (effective instruction delivery and time-in) across three day-treatment classrooms for children with autism. A multiple-baseline design across classrooms was employed to determine the effects of transitional BST with a voice-over video instruction component, voice-over feedback, and then in-situ feedback delivered during on-going teaching. Results indicated that, although all methods led to initial increases in integrity, only in-situ training resulted in acceptable levels of performance that maintained in the absence of feedback. Results are discussed in the context of effective and efficient group training strategies.
 
An Application of a Staff Training Model to Newly Hired Registered Behavior Technicians
MARY THOMASON (Canopy Children's Solutions), Christopher M. Furlow (Canopy Children's Solutions), Laura-Katherine K Barker (The university of Southern Mississippi), James Moore (Canopy Children's Solutions)
Abstract: Competency training for newly-hired Registered Behavior Technicians (RBTs) presents numerous challenges for practicing behavior analysts. Efficient and effective training solutions offer valuable tools that could offset the numerous time and monetary demands placed on clinicians. This study replicated and extended the findings of Potter et al. (previous paper) to a sample of newly-hired RBTs. Results indicated that training with in-situ feedback was the only training method that resulted in significant acquisition of mastery-level skills that also maintained in the absence of feedback.
 
 
Symposium #269
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
There is More to Supervision Than Surviving the Nine to Five
Sunday, May 26, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Toronto
Area: OBM; Domain: Theory
Chair: Krystyna Riley (ALULA)
CE Instructor: Krystyna Riley, M.S.
Abstract:

Based on the BACB®'s US Employment Demand for Behavior Analysts: 2010-2017 report published on 06/14/2018, "annual demand for individuals holding BCBA/BCBA-D certification has increased approximately 800% from 2010 to 2017." As of October 3rd, 2018, there are 30,540 individuals who hold a BCBA; in 2013, there were only 12,625 BCBA's. As a field, we have 59% of our credentialed workforce operating with 5 or fewer years of experience. ALULA has 25 years of experience uplifting business performance. We have a proven track record of helping Fortune 500 companies improve strategy execution. ALULA will present on the methodologies and tools we use to inspire and accelerate the extraordinary growth of individuals and exceptional performance of business. You will learn about how we coach leaders at all experience levels (early career to CEOs) and apply the wealth of Organizational Behavior Management techniques – all of which you can use in your daily workflow. We are offering a cohesive pragmatic technology to equip BCBAs with practical supervision methodology.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Coaching, Leadership, OBM, Supervision
Target Audience:

BCBA's who are supervisors at all experience levels (early career to CEOs).

 

There is More to Supervision Than Behavior Skills Training

HEATHER M. MCGEE (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

In this talk, you will learn the difference between BST and supervision. BST is a content-based training model, but supervisors are responsible for more than designing and implementing training solutions. In this talk, you will learn about the supervision process, what it means to be a supervisor across each phase of the supervision process, and what key behaviors you should be engaging in within and across phases to unlock extraordinary performance.

 

There is More to Management Than Supervision

AMY DURGIN (ALULA)
Abstract:

This talk will build upon what you learned during the first talk. You will learn about how and why management is different than supervision. The tools used to manage and the management behaviors you need to engage in differ in areas, such as: process control, planning, resources allocation, and project management. You will learn how to balance between managing and supervising. Although, good supervision can unlock extraordinary performance, good management techniques are imperative to create an environment where extraordinary performance can occur.

 

There is More to Business Than Management and Supervision

KRYSTYNA RILEY (ALULA)
Abstract:

For our final talk, you will learn about leadership from a behavioral perspective. We will discuss how effective leadership is different from management and supervision, and will give you tools and techniques to take your leadership skills to the next level. You will learn about different types of leaders and the results they typically see, key behaviors that leaders should engage in, and the types of data managers and supervisors should produce to enable effective leadership. Lastly, you will understand how leadership, management, and supervision are interconnected and, when effective, produce extraordinary performance and exceptional value.

 
 
Invited Paper Session #270
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

Behavior Analysis and Relational Frame Theory: Implications

Sunday, May 26, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Carmen Luciano Soriano, Ph.D.
Chair: Jonathan J. Tarbox (University of Southern California; FirstSteps for Kids)
CARMEN LUCIANO SORIANO (University Almería, Spain; Madrid Institute of Contextual Psychology (MICPSY))
Carmen Luciano, PhD, is Full Professor of Psychology and Director of the Functional Analysis Doctoral Program at University of Almeria, Spain. And she is Director of Master in Contextual Psychology in Madrid Institute of Contextual Psychology (MICPSY). She received her doctoral degree from the Universidad Complutense, Madrid in 1984. She got a Post-doc-Fulbright fellowship in Boston University and Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies (USA) to do research in the emergence of problema-solving in 1985. She has focused her work in tracking the integration of philosophical, basic and applied areas as a dimensional contextual tree of knowledge. She has directed thirty doctoral theses and has published pivotal papers in Behavior Analysis, RFT and ACT. She is mostly focused in analyzing the deictic and hierarchical framing that might be implied in bringing emotions, thoughts, and valued functions to the present to doing possible flexibility responding. She has a vibrating and creative style while teaching, doing research or working with clients.
Abstract:

Behavior Analysis (BA) and Relational Frame Theory (RFT) are integrated in a continuum dimension that is rooted to the functional and contextual perspective of behavior. The implications are simply huge. In this presentation, I will travel back to those times where BA began to provide formulas about how contingencies organized behavior. These effective experiences accounted for part of the enormous variability shown in behavior and very soon B.F. Skinner realized the impact of rules on contingencies. Even more, the relevance of generative self-rules and self-knowledge as well as how we respond to the one`s own behavior were on the table. This door was identified to further scientific inquiry, however it took some time for an insightful behavior to occur in the middle of practical experiences, an insight pointing to the emergent or derived responding. It was when the door was clearly opened to the analysis of further and more sophisticated forms of variability as generativity or derived responding as altering the meaning of contingencies. Relational Frame Theory was a step forward into the analysis of such behavioral phenomena. Consequently, an extension of the functional dimension was in place to account for relevant behaviors as those pointing to human suffering or, conversely, responding to living in peace with oneself. Acceptance and Commitment Therapy is nowadays the contextual Therapy more compromised with the identification of the interactions involved in moving from suffering to living. Very good news for the functional and contextual perspective of behavior with the focus in the emergence of insightful behavior in the days to come that might connect still isolated points.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students. 

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) identify BA and RFT as part of the same functional dimension; (2) discuss the emergence of insight in behavioral science; (3) discuss ACT strategies based on RFT.
 
 
Special Event #271
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
CHOICE: The Future of Choice in Behavior Analysis
Sunday, May 26, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD North
Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Elizabeth Kyonka (University of New England)
CE Instructor: Elizabeth Kyonka, Ph.D.
Panelists: AMY ODUM (Utah State University), ERIN B. RASMUSSEN (Idaho State University), TODD A. WARD (bSci21 Media, LLC)
Abstract:

Conceptually, “choice” can be theoretically fraught for radical behaviorists because of its incompatibility with strict determinism. Pragmatically though, choice has been an important and popular topic in behavior analysis research and practice. Broadly defined, choice is consistently among the most popular topics at this conference and in behavioral journals. It has yielded some of the most significant conceptual and empirical advances in behavior analysis. From substance abuse to consumer activities to problem behavior, few areas of behavior analysis have escaped the influence of choice. Choice is a critical variable in mathematical elaborations on the matching law that serve as the foundation for quantitative models of behavior and client preference assessments alike. This panel follows six individual presentations about key concepts, cutting edge research, and contemporary thinking about choice in behavior analysis education, research, and practice. In this panel, three distinguished behavior analysts will reflect on the value of choice for behavior analysts and offer their thoughts about where the field might go in the future. The panel is also an opportunity for an interactive discussion with the audience about the future of choice in behavior analysis.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

AMY ODUM (Utah State University)
ERIN B. RASMUSSEN (Idaho State University)
TODD A. WARD (bSci21 Media, LLC)
 
 
Symposium #273
CE Offered: BACB
Pushing PEAK to the Edge: Explorations to Music, Empathy, and Advanced Verbal Operants With Neurotypical Children and Individuals With Autism
Sunday, May 26, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD South
Area: VBC/EDC; Domain: Translational
Chair: Asha Fuller (Arizona State University)
CE Instructor: Kieva Sofia Hranchuk, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The present symposium explored relatively uncharted territory of PEAK. Specifically, the authors investigated the extent to which the system facilitated a basic musical repertoire in playing notes on a piano, empathetic responding supported by a scenario-based empathy training, and advanced verbal operants with typically-developing children.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Empathy, Music, PEAK, Verbal Operants
Target Audience:

beginner-intermediate behavior analysts or students of

 
Using the PEAK Relational Training System to Teach Music
(Applied Research)
KIEVA SOFIA HRANCHUK (Arizona State University), Mario Lanuza (Arizona State University), Adam DeLine Hahs (Arizona State University)
Abstract: The PEAK Relational Training System (Dixon, 2014-2016) has been used predominantly to teach early language and cognition skills. One area of the PEAK system yet to be empirically explored is that of the music-related programs. To that end, the proposed study used the PEAK Relational Training System, Equivalence, Module: Playing Music (13A) program to facilitate the acquisition of recognizing, labeling, and playing musical notes on a piano.
 

Assessment and Training of an Empathetic Repertoire for Children With Autism

(Theory)
SHRAVYA SRINIVAS SANAGALA (Arizona State University, MS ABA program), Adam DeLine Hahs (Arizona State University), Alison Parker (ASU)
Abstract:

Great behavior-analytic attention has been afforded to the better understanding of the core skills to an empathetic repertoire. However, these efforts have predominantly remained in the conceptual and theoretical domains of our science. To expand the extent to which behavior analysis has a place in the discussion of a more advanced skill, the current study sought to tease out theoretically-couched prerequisites to a typically-developing empathetic repertoire and, in the absence of said skills, propose a training for those skills.

 
Generalization and Derived Emergence of Metaphorical Sensory Tact Extensions: PEAK for Neurotypical Preschool Children
(Applied Research)
RYAN C. SPEELMAN (Pittsburg State University), Andy Gloshen (Pittsburgh State University - Pittsburgh Kansas)
Abstract: We evaluated multiple exemplar training (MET) and equivalence based instruction (EBI) to promote the emergence of novel metaphorical sensory tact extensions in two neurotypical preschool children. Methods were adapted from the Promoting the Emergence of Advanced Knowledge (PEAK) equivalence and generalization curriculum guides. Participants were first trained to label pictures (A) using metaphorical tacts (B). Following MET both participants demonstrated response generalization by emitting untrained metaphorical tacts in the presence of novel pictures. Next participants were taught to select a corresponding picture (A) given a functionally related tactile stimulus (C). This phase established three member equivalence classes consisting of pictures, generalized metaphorical responses, and tactile stimuli. Following EBI participants demonstrated emergent transitive relations by providing previously generalized metaphorical tact extensions (B) in the presence of untrained tactile stimuli (C). These preliminary results illustrate the convergent role of relational responding and response generalization in the formation and flexible application of academic concepts. Manualized curriculum guides such as the PEAK may be used in educational practices to facilitate the acquisition of complex language skills common to standard education curriculum.
 
 
Invited Paper Session #290
CE Offered: PSY/BACB

Canine Sense and Scent Ability: Applications of Behavior Analysis to Working and Pet Dogs

Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: AAB; Domain: Service Delivery
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Nathaniel Hall, Ph.D.
Chair: Valeri Farmer-Dougan (Illinois State University)
NATHANIEL HALL (Texas Tech University)

Dr. Hall is an Assistant Professor of Companion Animal Science at Texas Tech University and the Director of the Canine Olfaction Research and Education Laboratory in the Department of Animal Science. Dr. Hall earned his Ph.D. at the University of Florida, specializing in the study of Behavior Analysis and canine olfaction. As a post-doc, he continued his studies at Arizona State University investigating the optimization of training to enhance canine’s detection of Homemade Explosives. At Texas Tech, his work continues to explore canine olfactory perception and how experience influences odor perception. His lab also investigates predictors and correlates of problem behavior, behavioral predictors of working aptitude, and canine health.

Abstract:

Domestic dogs are utilized worldwide for the detection of explosives, narcotics, wildlife, and missing persons. Further, dogs are utilized by numerous private and governmental organizations such as the military, customs, border patrol and police departments for critical detection and apprehension tasks. Importantly, key basic research measuring detection limits, developing optimal training methods, and selection of dogs are largely lacking. Our lab aims to apply basic behavioral research to address relevant questions for working and pet dogs. This talk will highlight our lab’s research, addressing basic questions on how olfactory sensitivity varies across breeds, the degree to which olfactory sensitivity changes with training, the effects of training method on compound odor stimulus processing, and simple measures to enhance the selection of optimal working dogs. Audience member will learn about the current state of knowledge of detector dog science and where behavioral research can be leveraged to improve the performance of working dogs. The same behavioral principles will also be applicable to pet owners interested in training scent work with their pet dogs, or would simply like to learn more about canine olfactory perception.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to (1) discuss key issues facing the detection dog community; (2) discuss key issues behavioral research can facilitate the performance of working dogs; (3) discuss how a canine behavioral lab can be beneficial in teaching behavioral principles while providing community service.
 
 
Symposium #291
CE Offered: BACB
Current Research on Evaluating Preference for and Reinforcing Effectiveness of Social Interactions Among Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Patrick Romani (University of Colorado, Anschutz Medical Campus)
CE Instructor: Patrick Romani, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Much research has shown the importance of evaluating stimulus preference as part of behavioral treatment for children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). The majority of this research has focused on preference for leisure activities. Less research has identified strategies to measure preference for social interaction. Thus, the current symposium will provide an update on research investigating evidence-based methods for evaluating preference for social interaction. Morris and Vollmer will present a study comparing assessment procedures (e.g., multiple stimulus without replacement, paired stimulus preference assessment) to measure preference for social interaction. Laureano, DeLeon, and Goldman will follow with a study evaluating a procedure to measure child preference for social and solitary play. Finally, Carrion and colleagues will present a study showing the reinforcing efficacy of social play versus leisure activities. Taken together, these three presentations will provide attendees with both practical and empirical suggestions for further developing this important area of practice.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Preference, Social Interaction, Tangible Reinforcement
Target Audience:

The target audience for this symposium will be practitioners and research who work with children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorders.

 
Comparing Methods of Assessing Preference for Social Interaction
SAMUEL L. MORRIS (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
Abstract: Researchers have evaluated a variety of methods of assessing preference for social interaction and generally found that they produce accurate hierarchies. However, relatively few researchers have compared different methods of assessing preference for social interactions and none have done so with subjects across different skill levels. We compared the stability and validity of hierarchies produced by SIPAs, picture-based MSWOs, and Vocal PSPAs with 8 individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. We found that the MSWO and Vocal PSPA most often produced valid hierarchies for subjects that could match, identify, and tact pictures of social interactions and that the SIPA most often produced valid hierarchies for subjects that could not identify or tact pictures of social interactions. Considerations and recommendations for selecting a method of assessing preference for social interactions are discussed.
 

Preference for Social Versus Solitary Play in Children With Autism: Effects of Play Partner Type

BRIANNA LAUREANO (The University of Florida), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (University of Florida), Kissel Joseph Goldman (University of Florida)
Abstract:

A recent study (Goldberg et al., 2016) showed that children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) placed greater value on play activities when those activities were embedded in a social context, perhaps contradicting conventional notions of diminished social motivation in this population. However, the social context exclusively involved playing with a parent. It remains unclear if similar results would obtain with other kinds of social partners. We first conducted preference assessments to identify the activity preferences of children with ASD. We then gave the children repeated choices to play with a highest-preference item either alone or with a social partner while varying the kind of play partner: a peer with ASD, an adult therapist, or a parent. Each choice resulted in 5 min of playing under the selected condition. Choices continued until: a) the child made 5 consecutive choices for one condition; b) cumulative choices for one condition exceed the other by 100%; or c) 15 choice opportunities transpired without a clear preference. The results reveal that our participants have idiosyncratic social preferences. Although the preference for playing with a parent over playing alone has largely persisted, results have been more varied when other kinds of social partner were involved.

 

Comparing Reinforcing Efficacy of Social Interactions and Leisure Activities in Children With Autism

DEVA CARRION (Marcus Autism Center), Nathan Call (Marcus Autism Center), Joanna Lomas Mevers (Marcus Autism Center), Chelsea Marie Rock (UNMC Munroe-Meyer Institute), Ansley Reich (Marcus Autism Center), Warren Jones (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract:

There is growing support for the theory that disruptions in the degree to which social interactions are reinforcing may constitute a root cause of autism spectrum disorder (ASD). This paper will review several studies that have attempted to develop methods for quantifying the degree to which social interactions function as reinforcers for children with ASD as compared to children with developmental disabilities and typically developing children. This will include the results of a novel study that used progressive ratio (PR) schedules to compare the relative reinforcing efficacy of social attention and leisure items in children with ASD (n=14), children with developmental disabilities (DD; n=6), and typically developing peers (TD; n=6). Results demonstrated that participants in the TD group exhibited higher breakpoints and Omax for attention than for leisure items, whereas results for children in the ASD and DD groups were mixed. Results will be discussed in terms of how these methods compare to other approaches to quantifying the reinforcing efficacy of social interactions in children with ASD.

 
 
Symposium #292
CE Offered: BACB
Current Research in Behavioral Assessment
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom C
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Kerri P. Peters (University of Florida)
CE Instructor: Kerri P. Peters, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The current symposium will focus on current research in the area of assessment with children with autism spectrum disorders (ASD). The first presenter will discuss research evaluating the relative preferences and reinforcing value of fruits and vegetables and salty and sweet foods for children with ASD. The second presenter will discuss research comparing of outcomes of a variation of a trial-based functional analysis in which problem behavior or appropriate alternative behavior produced the control segment, and further comparing the outcomes using 5 trials vs.10 trials. Finally, the third presenter will discuss an evaluation of a no-interaction condition in a functional analysis to differentiate between problem behaviors maintained by attention, escape and tangible with subjects between the ages of 2 and 6 with ASD.

Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): assessment, functional analysis, preference assessment
Target Audience:

Behavioral researchers

 

Evaluating Preference for and Reinforcing Efficacy of Nutritive and Non-Nutritive Foods

FARIS RASHAD KRONFLI (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
Abstract:

Children with autism are often more selective in their food preferences than their typically developing peers. However, many preferred food selections typically include foods with minimal nutritional value. Due to the common use of edible reinforcers during therapies for children with autism, we evaluated the preference for and reinforcing value of fruits and vegetables and salty and sweet foods. First, multiple-stimulus preference assessments (MSWO) were conducted to identify preferred fruits and vegetables and salty and sweet foods. Second, reinforcer assessments were conducted incorporating the top ranked foods identified in the MSWO to determine the reinforcing efficacy of each food. Despite salty and sweet foods often ranking higher than fruits and vegetables in preference assessments, fruits and vegetables still functioned as effective reinforcers. Future research should incorporate fruits and vegetables into preference assessments when identifying putative reinforcers.

 

Comparison of Outcomes Using Five Trials Versus Ten Trials During Trial-Based Functional Analyses

Eliana Maria Pizarro (University of Florida), Meghan Deshais (University of Florida, Caldwell University), KERRI P. PETERS (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida), Brandon C. Perez (University of Florida)
Abstract:

Previous research has used 10 trial functional analyses (FA) during trial-based FAs (e.g., Bloom et al., 2011). Thus, the purpose of this current investigation was to compare of outcomes using 5 trials vs.10 trials. Thus, we ran 10 trial FAs and compared the results to that of the first 5 trials, to see if the assessment could be even more brief. Each trial consisted of two 1-min control segments and one 3-min test segment (control -> test -> control). During test segment, problem behavior or appropriate alternative behavior produced the control segment (access to putative reinforcer for one minute and termination of EO). The primary measure was latency to the first response (problem and/or appropriate). Results indicated at least partial correspondence for all subjects. Future research should continue to evaluate the parameters of this variation of the trial based FA.

 

The Extended No-Interaction Condition as a Screening for Behavioral Function

CRYSTAL M. SLANZI (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida), Faris Rashad Kronfli (University of Florida), Brandon C. Perez (University of Florida)
Abstract:

Common criticisms of the standard functional analysis (FA) include the complexity of the procedures and the duration required to complete it (Hanley, 2012). The extended no-interaction condition has been shown to be an effective modification to differentiate between behaviors maintained by automatic reinforcement and those maintained by socially mediated reinforcement, reducing the amount of time required to complete the FA (Querim, 2013). In an extension of previous research we are evaluating if the no-interaction condition may also be used to differentiate between problem behaviors maintained by attention, escape and tangible with subjects between the ages of 2 and 6 with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD). This presentation will demonstrate how the extended no-interaction condition may be used to develop specific hypotheses about behavioral function that can then be confirmed by conducting a test only for specific functions. In over 80% of assessments, collected data have shown a) when behavior does not occur in the no-interaction condition this is indicative of a tangible and/escape function, b) when it occurs and decreases by the end of the condition is indicative of an attention function and c) when it continues throughout the session it is indicative of automatic reinforcement.

 
 
Symposium #293
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Technological Advances and Extension Assessment and Treatment of Eye Contact
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Lobby Level, Plaza Ballroom AB
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Gabrielle Morgan (Endicott College )
CE Instructor: Hayley Neimy, M.S.
Abstract:

Three presentations focusing on advances and extensions in the assessment and treatment of eye contact will be highlighted. First, eye contact will be discussed in a historical context, including how it has been typically defined, how data have been collected with and/or without the use of technology, and how eye contact has been treated historically among individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). Then, preliminary pilot data will be reviewed demonstrating the effects of a video game for teaching various social skills, particularly eye contact, and how this can be subsequently shaped through the use of video game technology. Finally, eye contact will be discussed in the context of the development, data collection, and analysis of eye contact in relation to socially valid performance measures among school-age learners with ASD. Thoughts, future direction, and extensions are discussed in the context of appropriate clients, generalization, and social validity.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Behavior analysts and students of behavior analysis

Learning Objectives: 1) Participants will learn the development, collection, and analysis of measures of eye contact that are socially valid among individuals with ASD 2) Participants will learn how eye contact has been defined, operationalized, and intervened upon using various aspects of technology among individuals diagnosed with ASD 3) Participants will learn how technology has been used in assisting in the data collection and treatment of eye contact deficits historically 4) Participants will learn how the use of video games and other technologies may facilitate the development of socially valid eye contact along individuals with ASD
 

Technological Advances in Recording and Treating Eye Contact Deficits in Children Diagnosed With Autism Spectrum Disorder: A Review

GABRIELLE MORGAN (Endicott College), Hayley Neimy (Shabani Institute; Endicott College), Mary Jane Weiss (Endicott College), Emily Gallant (Somerset Hills Learning Institute)
Abstract:

Eye contact has long been noted as a deficit in individuals diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder. The use of technology to track and measure impairments in social eye gaze, appropriate eye contact, and identification of emotions has evolved as the technology has advanced. These advancements in measurement have included methods for measuring where the individual is looking on the face, how often the individual is looking at the eyes, the duration of time spent gazing, and the ability of the individual to obtain socially relevant information about others such as emotional state or object of attention. This review will discuss the history of these definitional issues, the timeline of technological advances, the role of technology in measuring eye contact and eye gaze. In addition, we will discuss how technological advances have improved our understanding of eye contact impairments, as well as interventions for improving social eye contact in individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder. Future implications of advances in technological measurement of social eye contact and eye gaze will also be discussed.

 

Preliminary Data on Improvement in Social Skills Following Video Game Exposure

HAYLEY NEIMY (Shabani Institute; Endicott College), Amy M. Golden (Biostream), Kristin N. Foley (Endicott College), Mary Jane Weiss (Endicott College), GABRIELLE MORGAN (Endicott College)
Abstract:

The use of video games to build social skills is an interesting possibility that has received increased attention in recent years. Using video games to teach skills is intriguing for several reasons. High-interest, preferred gaming might provide many learning opportunities for shaping skills, and individuals who select to spend time gaming might benefit from games with identified social skill acquisition targets. Specifically, it may be possible to shape eye contact into socially acceptable forms. In this presentation, preliminary data will be presented on video games that are intended to increase core social skills. Data will be presented on the extent to which eye contact can be shaped within video games. In addition, data will be presented on the extent of change observed following game exposure, in dyadic interaction tasks. Additional information will be shared on the social validity data attained from exposure to such games. Questions on dosing, engagement, and generalization will be posed, and suggestions for future investigations of these questions will be explored.

 
Recent Developments in Objective Measures of Eye Contact
EMILY GALLANT (Somerset Hills Learning Center), Kevin J. Brothers (Somerset Hills Learning Institute), E. Dennis Machado (Somerset Hills Learning Institute)
Abstract: Extensive literature exists characterizing pre-intervention levels of eye contact for individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). However, this does not yet form a strong foundation for applied interventions. For example, studies have typically been conducted under highly contrived conditions rather than during more naturalistic interactions, and overwhelmingly focus on characterizing rather than teaching eye contact. Existing characterizations rarely operationalize eye contact in a manner that facilitates applied investigation or reflects socially meaningful performance. Additionally, there is a paucity of evidence regarding normative ranges of features of eye contact. The current presentation, in response, describes the development, collection, and analysis of measures of eye contact that correlate to socially valid performance and are suitable for investigating interventions to improve eye contact for school-age learners with ASD. Video of individuals with ASD is captured using a camera worn by a conversation partner; dependent variables are coded from video using specialized software and summarized to produce baseline measures of eye contact. Normative ranges of performance by an equal number of same-aged and same gender peers are included. We will conclude by discussing how these data lay the groundwork for future research to improve eye contact by learners with ASD in socially meaningful ways.
 
 
Symposium #294
CE Offered: BACB
Building Better Teams With Prosocial: Employee Engagement in the Workplace, Cultural Competence, and Core Design Principles for Groups
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Cuvee
Area: CSS/EDC; Domain: Translational
Chair: Tiffany Dubuc (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
CE Instructor: Tiffany Dubuc, M.S.
Abstract:

The Prosocial process is rooted in economics, evolution science, and contextual behavior science and offers a process for teams and groups to identify core values, determine those behaviors most valued by the group, and in doing so facilitate cooperation and sharing of resources (Wilson, Ostrom, & Cox, 2013). The method is a six-step process, components of which include, the Acceptance Commitment Training (ACT) Matrix (Polk, Schoendorff, Webster, & Olaz, 2016), eight Core Design Principles (CDPs) for group interaction (Wilson, Ostrom, & Cox, 2013), and a planning for actionable goals, and measurement of team interactions (Atkins, 2018). This symposium will give examples of implementing the individual and group ACT Matrix to influence values clarification and behaviors related to employee engagement in a public service organization and cultural competence within clinical settings. Additionally, examples of a process for operationalizing the eight core design principles with different groups will be shared, making these principles observable and measurable within and across groups to facilitate flexible and healthy group dynamics to positively impact cooperation, performance, and well-being.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): ACT Matrix, Cooperation, Culture, Prosocial
Target Audience:

Behavior Analysts, Researchers and Practitioners

Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will gain an overview of all 6 steps of the Prosocial process 2. Participants will gain an understanding of the ACT Matrix tool and possible applications related to employee engagement and cultural competency in groups 3. Participants will learn the 8 Core Design Principles of cooperative groups, how to define principles, and suggestions for measurement.
 

Psychological Flexibility in the Workplace: Examining the Use of the Prosocial Matrix for Increasing Employee Levels of Psychological Flexibility and Rates of Participation in Work-Related Tasks

(Applied Research)
BRITTANY MAZUR (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Julia H. Fiebig (Ball State University; ABA Global Initiatives LLC), Jonathan J. Tarbox (University of Southern California; FirstSteps for Kids)
Abstract:

Creating and maintaining a positive and productive work environment has been the focus of researchers in various disciplines for decades, yet, research examining systematic methods for increasing job satisfaction and job performance remains limited. This study investigated how a brief 45-minute work group session utilizing The Prosocial Matrix (a visual tool representing psychological flexibility processes and grounded in Relational Frame Theory and Acceptance and Commitment Therapy) impacted work task engagement and levels of psychological flexibility across three work groups in one public service organization. Defined work tasks were used to measure rates of employee engagement, in addition to using the Work-Related Acceptance and Action Questionnaire pre- and post intervention. Analysis of results will be shared along with discussion of suggestions for future applications and research. Results provide additional information regarding the potential benefits of utilizing the Prosocial Matrix as means for altering levels of work task engagement and psychological flexibility among work group populations.

 

Examining the Use of the Acceptance and Commitment Therapy Matrix to Facilitate Difficult Conversations: A Clinician’s Approach to Cultural Competency

(Service Delivery)
TIFFANY DUBUC (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract:

Entrusted with the clinical, educational, social and/or behavioural progress of our clients in today’s culturally dynamic and ever-changing world can be challenging. The need for cultural competency, and thoughtful dissemination of Western therapeutic practices has never been greater. In this talk, participants will be exposed to a Psychological Flexibility model of cultural competency, with an emphasis on values as verbal stimuli which may alter the reinforcement function of those responses previously involved in direct and aversive conditions. The ACT Matrix will be explored as a tool for facilitating culturally-competent clinical practices amongst teams. It is hypothesized that an approach to cultural competency that is based in contextual behaviour science will be more meaningful and effective than traditional “rule-based” approaches (which may prove to be ineffective or even counter-productive). The presentation is applicable to all clinicians looking to increase the cultural competency of their team members.

 
Overview of the Prosocial Core Design Principles and Suggestions for Operationalizing to Enhance and Further Develop Behavioral Measures
(Service Delivery)
REBECCA A. WATSON (ABA Global Initiatives, LLC; RSU13), Julia H. Fiebig (Ball State University; ABA Global Initiatives LLC)
Abstract: How does a behavior scientist help groups identify what behaviors are most critical to gain optimal team outcomes? Using an evidence-based method that improves teamwork for groups of any kind, the Prosocial method provides a functional blueprint for a group to increase behaviors that matter in accordance with group values. Values are seen as conduits that inform an individual’s behavior (Ciarrochi, Fisher, & Lane, 2011) and are the result of an individual’s history of responding and reinforcement (Skinner, 1971). To connect values to behaviors this process involves using the Acceptance and Commitment Training (ACT) Matrix and Elinor Ostrom’s Core Design Principles (1990) to help groups clarify common purpose, build flexibility and cultivate collaborative relationships for group wellbeing and improved performance of the team. In this talk, we will introduce the Core Design Principles and share practical suggestions for operationally defining each principle to enhance the utility of the Prosocial process in order to pair it with performance management methods.
 
 
Symposium #295
CE Offered: BACB
Teaching Reading and Writing to Preschool Students: A Verbal Behavior Development Approach
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 1-3
Area: DEV/TBA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Jessica Singer-Dudek (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Discussant: Jessica Singer-Dudek (Teachers College, Columbia University)
CE Instructor: Jessica Singer-Dudek, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The following symposium explores three different studies that targeted effective instruction across the areas of reading and writing within preschool populations through the perspective of the Verbal Behavior Development Theory. Longano, Hranchuk, and Greer (2018) present the effects of a preschool writer immersion instructional package on the structural components of writing and on affecting the behavior of a reader. Al Sharif and Dudek (2018) present the effects of establishing hear-do correspondence on read-do correspondence for children diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder. Lastly, Morgan and Kim (2018) discuss a related topic in their presentation entitled The Effects of Reader Immersion on the Acquisition of Read-Do Correspondence for Two Preschool Students.

Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): preschool students, reading, verbal behavior, writing
Target Audience:

Practitioners and educators working with young children with and without disabilities

 

The Effects of Establishing Hear-Do Correspondence on Read-Do Correspondence for Children Diagnosed With Autism Spectrum Disorder

(Applied Research)
SHAHAD ALSHARIF (Teacher College, Columbia University), Jessica Singer-Dudek (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract:

The experimenters conducted a study to establish hear-do correspondence and observe its effects on read-do correspondence in 3 children diagnosed with Autism using a delayed multiple probe design (Johnston & Pennypacker, 2008). Hear-do correspondence is defined according to Verbal Behavior Development Theory (2009) and Verbal Behavior Theory (1957) as speaker as his own listener. According to Skinner (1957) the behavior of the listener is automatically reinforced as the listener takes on the role of both the listener and the speaker. Read-do correspondence is defined as reading governs responding. The experiment was conducted in a self- contained classroom that is based on the CABAS® model. The experimenters included 4 dependent variables represented in 2 different tasks, writing and building. In addition, all probes were conducted in 2 topographies, listening and reading. In the listening topography, the participants listened to a recording of themselves reading a set of directions they had to follow, while in the reading topography, they had to read a set of directions on an A4 paper and follow the directions. The writing task consisted of completing a set of 3 steps that included 10 components that produced a drawing, while the building task consisted of completing 10 steps that produced a construction. The independent variable consisted of the reader immersion protocol (Greer & Ross, 2008; Mackey, 2017), however, it was presented in a listening topography, rather than reading where the participants recorded the treasure hunt used in the intervention prior to starting the intervention and listened to the recording of their own voices to follow the instructions and receive reinforcement or correction as a consequence. The results of the experiment showed that the intervention was effective in increasing both hear-do and read-do correspondence following the completion of the intervention for all 3 participants.

 
The Effects of Reader Immersion on the Acquisition of Read-Do Correspondence for Two Preschool Students
(Applied Research)
GEORGETTE MORGAN (Teachers College, Columbia Unversity), Ji Young Kim (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract: Reader immersion is a protocol developed to teach students read-do correspondence, which is the correlated exchange between reading words and emitting actions based on novel print stimuli. In the present study, we used a multiple baseline design across 2 preschool aged participants with disabilities to demonstrate the effects of the reader immersion protocol on the acquisition of read-do correspondence. The dependent variable was the number of correct read-draw responses emitted during probe sessions. The independent variable was the reader immersion protocol in which the instructor provided written directions that the participant was required to read and complete to gain access to the reinforcer. The results of our study indicated that the reader immersion protocol was effective in the acquisition of read-do correspondence for both participants. This experiment built upon prior research that demonstrated the effectiveness of the reader immersion procedure on increasing the number of correct novel responses to print stimuli for kindergarten and elementary school aged students. The results suggested that classrooms could utilize reader immersion as part of their curriculum to induce read-do correspondence and thus provide necessary prerequisite skills to acquire advanced reader and writer repertoires.
 
 
Symposium #297
CE Offered: BACB
Improving Classroom Behavior in Students With Problem Behavior
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Fairmont, Third Level, Crystal
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Kwang-Sun Cho Blair (University of South Florida)
CE Instructor: Kwang-Sun Cho Blair, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Classrooms are complex environments that require teachers to implement a variety of classroom management strategies to minimize problem behavior and maximize learning time. Given the difficulty of selecting and implementing behavioral interventions in the school setting, there is a need for interventions that are contextually fit with the school environment. This symposium presents findings from three papers on improving individual student behavior in pre-K through 2nd-grade classrooms. The third study compared use of auditory feedback to visual feedback in implementing an interdependent group contingency to improve on-task behavior of three students with disabilities and explored whether incorporating student choice into the feedback would enhance the outcomes for student behavior. The second study evaluated the use of the presession paring to decrease problem behavior and increase on-task behavior of four students with and without disabilities. The third study examined the use of the Teaching Tools for Young Children with Challenging Behavior (TTYC) by classroom teachers to improve classroom behavior of three students with and without disabilities. All three papers reported positive outcomes when using the interventions for students with and without disabilities who engage in problem behavior during classroom activities or routines.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Graduate Students, Practitioners, BCBA

Learning Objectives: 1. Describe how presession pairing, TTYC, group contingency using visual and auditory feedback, and preprinted response cards can be implemented to improve individual student behavior 2. Explain specific ways to work with students with and without disabilities needing additional support to decrease problem behavior within class routines or activities 3. Describe effective teacher training and consultation procedures
 

Incorporating Auditory and Visual Feedback and Student Choice Into an Interdependent Group Contingency to Improve On-Task Behavior

Trevor Maxfield (1989), THOMAS SCHULZ (University of South Florida), Beth Giguere (University of South Florida), Kwang-Sun Cho Blair (University of South Florida)
Abstract:

The presentation describes the outcomes of using an interdependent group contingency for three 2nd-grade students with disabilities served in general education classrooms. Group contingencies are efficient and effective behavioral interventions that allow teachers to apply a reinforcement criterion to a large group of students. However, most research on group contingencies has not examined the impact of types of teacher feedback and student choice of teacher feedback incorporated in using the group contingencies. The current study used a multiple baseline across participants design with an embedded alternating treatments design to explore the use of an interdependent group contingency that compared the effectiveness of incorporating auditory or visual feedback to improve on-task behavior of three students in public elementary school classrooms. The study also explored whether incorporating student choice into the feedback would enhance the outcomes for student behavior. Results indicated that the interdependent group contingency intervention was successful in increasing the on-task behavior of all three participants. Results indicated that while both auditory and visual feedback were effective in increasing on-task behavior of all three students, two of the students engaged in slightly higher levels of on-task behavior when auditory feedback was used. When students were given the option to choose what type of feedback would be used, two of the three students favored auditory feedback over visual feedback, and on-task behaviors maintained for all three participants. These results have implications for the use of auditory feedback and choice in classroom setting as part of a group contingency.

 

Teacher-Implemented Presession Pairing to Increase Student On-Task Behavior and Reduce Problem Behavior in Public School Classrooms

SYDNEY ROULHAC (University of South Florida), Rachel Sofarelli (University of South Florida), Kwang-Sun Cho Blair (University of South Florida)
Abstract:

Presession pairing is an antecedent intervention that has shown to decrease problem behavior of elementary school children with autism, whose problem behavior is maintained by social reinforcement. It has also shown modest increases in academic responding. However, the research on presession pairing has not examined its efficacy or acceptability in the natural classroom setting when implemented by the teacher. This presentation introduces the results of a study on the use of presession pairing, which targeted four elementary school students with and without disabilities and assessed its impact on student behavior during academic time periods. A multiple-baseline design across participants was used to demonstrate that the presession pairing successfully decreased problem behavior and increased on-task behavior in all students whose problem behaviors were maintained by escape or attention. The social validity assessment indicated that the teachers found the presession pairing intervention contextually fit, easy to implement, and effective for all students in the classroom.

 

Evaluation of the Teaching Tools for Young Children With Challenging Behavior: Improving Classroom Behavior in Young Children

SOFIA REYES (University of South Florida), LeAnn Sarah Avila (University of South Florida), Kwang-Sun Cho Blair (University of South Florida), Deanna Deenihan (University of South Florida)
Abstract:

The Teaching Tools for Young Children with Challenging Behavior (TTYC) presents a useful tool to disseminate evidence-based practices into the classroom setting for teachers to create lasting behavioral changes in young children. This presentation outlines the impact of using the TTYC by classroom teachers for students ages 4-6 years old with and without disabilities. A multiple-baseline across participants design was employed to demonstrate the outcomes of the TTYC in increasing appropriate classroom behavior and reducing problem behavior of the target children. The results indicated that the teachers’ fidelity of implementing the behavior intervention plans designed using the TTYC was relatively high with the exception of a few sessions. The teachers’ implementation of the plans resulted in increased appropriate classroom behavior and decreased problem behavior for all three child participants. The data indicated an association between implementation fidelity and changes in child behavior. When the teachers had difficulty implementing the steps for implementing intervention strategies, the children’s problem behavior increased, resulting in decreases in appropriate classroom behavior.

 
 
Special Event #298
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
CREATIVITY: Session 1
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD North
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Chair: Darlene E. Crone-Todd (Salem State University)
CE Instructor: Darlene E. Crone-Todd, Ph.D.
 

CREATIVITY: Using the Science of Behavior to Engineer Creativity and Innovation in the Workplace

Abstract:

Since the industrial revolution, we have witnessed a steady decline in the need for unskilled labor as the workplace has become progressively more automated. This continuing trend has led to a greater value for new types of workplace behaviors, particularly those that contribute to employee creativity and organizational innovation. As such, modern researchers and supervisors need to investigate strategies that promote such valued novelty at work. This talk will draw upon the lessons from the science of behavior to explore factors that managers can practically influence.

 
DOUGLAS JOHNSON (Western Michigan University)
 
Dr. Douglas A. Johnson works as an assistant professor at Western Michigan University. He is the Director of Undergraduate Training for the Department of Psychology and Co-Chair of the Industrial/Organizational Behavior Management graduate program at WMU. He completed his doctoral degree in applied behavior analysis in 2009 from Western Michigan University. His publications and research interests are related to topics such as organizational behavior management, behavior-based instructional design, behavioral approaches to adult learning, computer-assisted instruction, performance feedback, motivation, and creativity.
 

CREATIVITY: Behavioral Approaches to Creativity: Novel Behavior, Generativity, and Contingency Adduction in Education

Abstract:

Generativity is the study of the conditions that produce novel responding in new circumstances, without directly programing them. This conceptualization has driven our Generative Instruction model of teaching and learning in educational settings. The thrust of Generative Instruction is to engineer discovery learning by arranging instruction of key component skills, facts, concepts and principles in such a way that students will engage more frequently in novel complex academic behavior without direct teaching, a process we call contingency adduction. We have discovered that complex behavioral repertoires emerge without explicit instruction when well-selected component repertoires are appropriately sequenced, carefully instructed, and well-rehearsed. In this presentation I will report our discoveries and investigations of generative responding in academic skill development as well as thinking, reasoning, and problem-solving development. The data that we will share have come from many classrooms across the United States, as well as an associated instructional design company. Our descriptive data show such consistent patterns that we want to share them with the wider behavioral community, in the hopes that other practitioners will join us in our inductive explorations, and that researchers will join us by conducting controlled studies of the contingency adduction in a variety of settings.

 
KENT JOHNSON (Morningside Academy)
 
Dr. Kent Johnson founded Morningside Academy, in Seattle, WA, in 1980, and currently serves as its executive director. Morningside is a laboratory school for elementary and middle school children and youth. Morningside investigates effective curriculum materials and teaching methods, and has provided training and consulting in instruction to more than 125 schools and agencies throughout the USA and Canada since 1991. Dr. Johnson has served in all the positions at Morningside, including classroom teacher for 10 years, financial manager, administrator, teacher trainer, school psychologist, and school consultant. He has published many seminal papers and books about research-based curriculum and teaching methods, including The Morningside Model of Generative Instruction: What It Means to Leave No Child Behind, with Dr. Elizabeth Street. Dr. Johnson also is a co-founder of Headsprout, Inc., now Mimio, a company that develops web-based, interactive, cartoon-driven instructional programs, including Mimio Sprout Early Reading and Mimio Reading Comprehension Suite. Dr. Johnson received the 2001 Award for Public Service in Behavior Analysis from the Society for the Advancement of Behavior Analysis. Before founding Morningside, Dr. Johnson was a professor at Central Washington University, director of staff training at the Fernald School in Massachusetts, and an instructional designer at Northeastern University in Boston. He received his M.S. (1974) and Ph.D. (1977) in psychology at the University of Massachusetts in Amherst. He received his B.S. in psychology and sociology from Georgetown University (1973).
 
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) explain the changing nature of work tasks and the challenges these present to Organizational Behavior Management; (2) explain how new workplace demands represent an opportunity to answer long-standing criticisms of the field of behavior analysis; (3) describe the implications of basic research on novelty and creativity and how it relates to potential best practices for organizational innovations; (4) describe 5 controlling variables that produce novel behavior; (5) define the 3 critical features of contingency adduction; (6) describe 5 variations of contingency adduction in education; (7) give examples of 5 variations of contingency adduction in education.
 
 
 
Panel #299
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Unethical, Dysfunctional Supervision Practices Exposed: A Panel Discussion
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom EF
Area: PCH/TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Jon S. Bailey, Ph.D.
Chair: Jon S. Bailey (Florida State University)
MARY JANE WEISS (Endicott College)
THOMAS L. ZANE (University of Kansas)
JON S. BAILEY (Florida State University)
Abstract:

This panel is a continuation of previous presentations at ABAI regarding Behavior Analysts Who Are Behaving Badly. This year we will focus on the Ethics of Supervision. For this panel we have brought together three behavior analysis ethicists who are regularly sought after concerning the practice of behavior analysis through the ABAEthicsHotline.com site as well as other sources. To demonstrate the range of approaches used and opinions offered, recent supervision questions will be presented, each panelist will offer their guidance, we will then debate the merits of our various often differing, approaches. Toward the end of the session we will open the floor to questions from the audience and again each ethicist will respond so that the range of tactics and strategies will be apparent.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

The target audience is both supervisors who need to learn about inappropriate and unethical practices as well as supervisees who need to know what to watch out for and what to do in the case that they are a victim of unscrupulous supervision practices.

Learning Objectives: 1. Members of the audience will be able to list three common ethical violations that supervisors commit with their supervisees. 2. Members of the audience will be able to describe the appropriate steps to take if they are the supervisee victim of unethical practices. 3. Members of the audience will be able to describe steps to be taken in an organization to prevent unethical supervision practices.
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #301
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP
The Science of Why We're Socially Awkward and Why That's Awesome
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: SCI; Domain: Theory
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: William Stoops, Ph.D.
Chair: William Stoops (University of Kentucky)
TY TASHIRO (Independent Author)
Ty Tashiro is the author of Awkward: The Science of Why We’re Socially Awkward and Why That’s Awesome and The Science of Happily Ever After. His work has been featured at the New York Times, Time.com, TheAtlantic.com, and National Public Radio. He received his Ph.D. in Psychology from the University of Minnesota, has been an award-winning professor at the University of Maryland and University of Colorado.
Abstract:

The presentation will share research findings from psychology, neuroscience, and sociology to explain why roughly 15% of people are socially awkward. It will also review how awkward people view the complex social world, show how tailored behavioral activation components can help awkward people build their social skill, explore why awkwardness is associated with giftedness. The talk revolves around a welcome, counterintuitive message: the same characteristics that make people socially clumsy can be harnessed to produce remarkable achievements.

Target Audience:

The talk should be useful for both researchers and practitioners with a social science Ph.D.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) discuss psychological and sociological research relevant to the etiology of social awkwardness; (2) discuss data that helps us understand the distinction between autism spectrum disorders and social awkwardness; (3) discuss behavioral strategies for helping awkward individuals gain insight into their interpersonal struggles and encourage their unique potential.
 
 
Invited Paper Session #302
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP

Applied Behavior Analysis as a Teaching Technology for Inclusion

Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Jeremy H. Greenberg, Ph.D.
Chair: Lin Du (Teachers College, Columbia University)
JEREMY GREENBERG (The Children's Institute of Hong Kong)
Dr. Jeremy H. Greenberg has joined The Children’s Institute of Hong Kong as Director in 2009. He also works with The Harbour School as a consultant and on its Senior Management Team. In his previous position, he served as Educational Coordinator at the Manhattan Children’s Center in New York, New York, USA where he has retained his role on the faculty advisory committee. Throughout his work in the field, Jeremy has worked as a special educator, supervisor, administrator, and behavior analyst where he has effectively and efficiently provided teacher training and consultation to both public and private schools in New York and New Jersey. Dr. Greenberg’s professional certifications include Board Certified Behavior Analyst, New York State Education Department Permanent Special Education, School District Administrator, and Supervisor and Administrator of Schools. Dr. Greenberg earned three Masters’ degrees in special education and his doctorate in Special Education Applied Behavior Analysis from Teachers College Columbia University after earning a Bachelor’s of Arts in Psychology. In 2010, Dr. Greenberg founded the Hong Kong Association for Behavior Analysis where he has served as President and other Board positions. In 2012 Dr. Greenberg established the first Verified Course Sequence from the Behavior Analysis Certification Board Inc. in Hong Kong. He presents annually at the International Association for Behavior Analysis Convention where he has been a member since 1993. Dr. Greenberg has multiple publications in professional and international journals in fields of applied behavior analysis and education. Dr. Greenberg has been an invited as a lecturer in Hong Kong Polytechnic University. His research areas of interest include verbal behavior, teacher training, cost benefit analysis, and systems management of behavior analysis applied to schools.
Abstract:

We have come a long way since the adoption of the Handicapped Children’s Act of 1975. Inclusion of students with special education needs (SEN) is gaining traction, albeit slowly, in and out of the US. This presentation will review various successful behavioral strategies and tactics and include outcome data from a systems perspective. Greenberg & Greenberg (2014) have described a successful model of inclusion in a complex international school setting in Hong Kong. Applied behavior analysis components were and continue to be used extensively there. A detailed description of those components will be provided in this presentation. It is the aim of this presentation to share the program description and its parts using verbal behavior about the science and terms associated with the research literature in applied behavior analysis. Participants familiar with an intermediate to advanced level of understanding in the field may consider the implementation of some or all of those components in their own schools around the world.

Target Audience: Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) use an assessment and screening tool to determine a given student’s appropriateness for inclusion into a mainstream educational environment; (2) discuss the various roles and responsibilities for general education teachers and special education teachers in an inclusive setting across four behavioral areas (i.e. safety, behavior management, academics, and social skills); (3) discuss a number of strategies and tactics from applied behavior analysis literature that have been found successful for various students in inclusive settings.
 
 
Symposium #303
CE Offered: BACB
Further Investigations to Derived Relational Responding, Verbal Operants, and Autism Severity
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD South
Area: VBC/AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: Zhihui Yi (Arizona State University)
CE Instructor: Albert Malkin, M.A.
Abstract:

The present symposium investigates the extent to which Derived Relational Responding (and related tests for) has implications to the overall acquisition of trained relations for individuals with autism and symptom severity. Further, the symposium provides an exploratory analysis of the oft-cited competing viewpoints concerning the independency or interdependency of Skinner's verbal operants.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Autism, DRR, PEAK, VB-MAPP
Target Audience:

intermediate-advanced behavior analysts

 

The Relative Effectiveness of Repeating Tests for Derived Language Relations During the Acquisition of Trained Relations in Children With Autism

(Applied Research)
CHANTAL RAINFORD (Southern Illinois University-Carbondale), Ayla Schmick (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract:

The present study sought to examine the use of two teaching procedures as methods of increasing relational responding in children with developmental disabilities. We compared one procedure that presented test probes for combinatory entailment and transformation of function probes throughout the acquisition of directly trained A-B and B-C relations. In the second procedure test probes were withheld until the learner achieved mastery criteria for the directly trained A-B and B-C relations. Results show that all three participants achieved mastery criterion across both procedures and demonstrated the emergence of mutual entailment, combinatory entailment, and transformation of stimulus function. The presentation of entailed and transformation probes resulted in faster acquisition of directly trained and test relations. An account of current research and implications of these findings is provided.

 

The Relationship Between Derived Relational Responding and Autism Spectrum Disorder Symptom Severity

(Applied Research)
KWADWO O. BRITWUM (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University), Caleb Stanley (Southern Illinois University), Anne Sheerin (Southern Illinois University), Becky Barron (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract:

Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) symptom severity has been linked with lower IQ (Mayes & Calhoun, 2011). The prevalence of maladaptive behavior may change as a function of IQ as demonstrated by Ando and Yoshimora (1978). Belisle, Dixon, and Stanley (2018); and Dixon, Belisle, and Stanley (2018) recently demonstrated the relationship between derived relational responding skills and intelligence in individuals with ASD. Derived relational responding provides a behavior analytic conceptualization of intelligence and how these skills develop. The current investigation extends the work of Dixon, Belisle and Stanley (2018) by evaluating the relationship between participants’ abilities to engage in derived relational responding and ASD symptom severity as indicated by the Gilliam Autism Rating Scale-Third Edition (GARS-3). Derived Relational Responding skills were assessed using the Promoting the Emergence of Advanced Knowledge Transformation Assessment (Dixon, 2016). Assessments were conducted across 13 individuals (more data is being collected, targeted sample size is 35) with ASD. The current results indicated a negative correlation between PEAK-T Expressive Pre-Assessment scores and GARS-3 (r = -.594, p < 0.05), 28 % variance in GARS-3 scores were also predicted by PEAK-T Expressive Pre-assessment scores (r2 = .283). These findings provide some preliminary implications for the treatment of individuals with ASD.

 
Exploratory Factor Analysis of the VB-MAPP: Support for the Interdependency of Elementary Verbal Operants
(Applied Research)
ALBERT MALKIN (Southern Illinois University), Jordan Belisle (Missouri State University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University), Joshua R. Hollie (Southern Illinois University), Caleb Stanley (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Competing viewpoints on the independency or interdependency of Skinner’s verbal operants have been discussed in the literature and with empirical support for both positions generated using single-case research methods. Our study provides support for the interdependency of the verbal operants using items contained in the Verbal Behavior Milestones Assessment and Placement Program (VB-MAPP) as a measure of broader skill acquisition in each verbal operant category and across complexity levels. The result of an Exploratory Factor Analysis conducted across 85 participants (Aged 5 to 22) with autism suggested that the verbal operants were not independent constructs; rather, items appeared to cluster in terms of skill complexity producing a best-fit 2-factor model. Together with prior research showing untrained cross-operant transfers, results fail to support the validity of distinguishing between the verbal operant categories as independent constructs, with implications for how behavior scientists and analysts describe language development, as well as in the assessment and treatment of language deficits for individuals with autism.
 
 
Symposium #304
CE Offered: BACB
Instructional Strategies for Skill Acquisition
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom B
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Brittany Ann Juban (May Institute)
Discussant: Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University)
CE Instructor: Brittany Ann Juban, Ph.D.
Abstract: Skill acquisition programs are designed to provide learners with assistance to establish important skills that were not previously in his or her repertoire. This assistance generally comes in the form of establishing a discriminative stimulus to occasion the desired skill, prompts to increase the likelihood that the skill will be performed correctly, an opportunity to respond, and reinforcement for correct responses. The current symposium presents a collection of studies that investigated different instructional strategies to promote new skills in children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). The first study investigated the use of instructive feedback to expand listener skills in English when the instructive feedback was delivered in a different language for children with ASD. The second study evaluated brief assessment procedures to inform appropriate interventions when teaching vocal mands and tacts to children with vocal-verbal deficits and ASD. The third study compared different stimulus models when teaching tacts to children with ASD. The fourth study compared using a task analysis with a single opportunity method and a multiple opportunity method to teach complex skills to children with ASD. This collection of studies will assist practitioners in the identification of effective and efficient strategies to promote skill acquisition for children with ASD.
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Skill Acquisition
Target Audience: This CE event is targeted toward direct therapists, BCBAs and BCABAs working with students with ASD and/or related developmental disabilities.
 
Instructive Feedback to Expand Listener Skills in a Different Language
VICTORIA RYAN (Florida Institute of Technology), Corina Jimenez-Gomez (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment, Florida Institute of Technology), Katherine Haggerty (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment, Florida Institute of Technology), Jessebelle Pichardo (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment), Rachel Thomas (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment, Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: Despite not being their primary language, many parents in bilingual speaking homes receive recommendations to forgo using their native language with their child and only use the primary local language because it is assumed that learning two languages may cause additional language delays in children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) or other developmental disabilities. This advice, however, poses a problem because it is possible that skills acquired in a clinic setting may not generalize and maintain in the home environment if parents are not fluent in the language in which the skills were taught. It may be possible to teach skills in the clinic in a manner that promotes generalization to the native language without the need for explicit instruction. Instructive feedback promotes effective acquisition of maximum skills with minimal training. The present study evaluated whether instructive feedback delivered in the native language (Spanish) would be sufficient for children with ASD to display a listener skill taught in English when the instruction was delivered in Spanish during probes. Results suggest this may be a useful strategy for some participants.
 
An Evaluation of Mand and Tact Assessment Procedures
BRITTANY ANN JUBAN (May Institute), Tiffany Kodak (Marquette University), Barbara E. Esch (Esch Behavior Consultants, LLC), Dayna Costello (Trumpet Behavioral Health)
Abstract: This study replicates and extends Bourret, Vollmer, & Rapp (2004) who evaluated an assessment to inform effective mand interventions for children. In the first study, we replicated their full mand assessment and compared it to a brief assessment with similar procedures. Results showed that both assessments identified similar patterns of responding for each participant. In the second study, we extended the brief assessment from the mand to the tact to evaluate the identification of training strategies for the tact. The brief tact and mand assessment demonstrated similar patterns of responding for only two of the three participants, suggesting that vocal verbal deficits may differ across verbal operants. These studies provide a methodology for conducting brief assessments to inform mand and tact training and environmental variables related to vocal-verbal deficits may differ across verbal operants for some individuals. Implications for assessment informed mand and tact training will be discussed.
 
Evaluation of Acquisition and Generalization of Tacts Across Three Stimulus Modes
Haley Nelson (The University of South Florida), NATALIE MANDEL (University of South Florida), Catia Cividini-Motta Cividini (University of South Florida)
Abstract: Individuals with an Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) often have a limited tact repertoire. This study compared the acquisition and generalization of tacts taught using different stimulus modes. Participants were three children with an ASD, ages 3 to 5 years old. Each participant was taught two sets of tacts, and each tact was randomly assigned to one of the stimulus mode. This study employed a simultaneous treatment design within a multiple baseline across participants. In this study, overall fewer training sessions were required for tacts in the picture and 3D object stimulus modes. In addition, one participant did not acquire either of the tacts assigned to the video stimulus mode. Finally, in most of the cases, participants correctly tacted novel exemplars of the mastered tacts, however generalization to a novel exemplar was more likely in the object (6/8 tacts) and video (4/4) stimulus modes.
 

A Comparison of Baseline Procedures in Evaluating Skill Performance Within Task Analyses

EMMA GRAUERHOLZ-FISHER (University of Florida), Jonathan K Fernand (Aurora University), Brandon C. Perez (University of Florida), Haleh Amanieh (West Virginia University), Kerri P. Peters (University of Florida), Kara L. Wunderlich (Rollins College), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
Abstract:

Task analyses are commonly used by behavior analysts to teach complex skills across many types of tasks. One variation in task analysis teaching procedures has been the type of baseline procedures used. In the single-opportunity method (SOM) baseline, the entire task is presented, and all steps that are completed by the subject are scored as correct. Once the subject meets termination criteria the task is ended and all remaining steps are counted as incorrect. In the multiple-opportunity method (MOM) baseline, the therapist presents the task, and if the subject stops responding the therapist sets up the next step in the task for the subject, who then has the opportunity to respond independently. Concerns have been raised regarding how each of these methods might change the baseline performance of a task, affecting the interpretation of experimental control. The purpose of the current study was to conduct a within-subject comparison of both the SOM and MOM procedures for children with autism performing daily living skills. Results indicated that for most participants the MOM baseline resulted in increased performance during baseline compared to the SOM baseline, and that for some participants the MOM baseline resulted in acquisition prior to direct training.

 
 
Symposium #306
CE Offered: BACB
Direct and Indirect Effects of Escape Extinction as Treatment for Pediatric Feeding Disorders
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 1-3
Area: CBM/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Ashley Andersen (University of Nebraska Medical Center, Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Discussant: Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
CE Instructor: Dorothea C. Lerman, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Approximately 25% to 45% of typically developing children and up to 80% of children with a developmental disability display feeding problems (Manikam & Perman, 2000; Volkert & Piazza, 2012). Volkert and Piazza (2012) determined that escape extinction was one of the most effective and empirically supported treatments for pediatric feeding disorders. The purpose of the current symposium is to review effective treatments for feeding disorders including escape extinction, differential positive and negative reinforcement of alternative behavior and discuss factors influencing generalization of treatment effects. The first presentation will evaluate differential reinforcement of alternative behavior and escape extinction to determine their effects on resistance to change, a core symptom of Autism Spectrum Disorder. The second presentation will compare enriched versus non-enriched differential negative reinforcement with and without escape extinction to increase acceptance and swallowing. The third presentation will evaluate renewal of inappropriate mealtime behavior associated with drinking from an open cup following a context change from therapist to caregiver. The last presentation will examine the effects of escape extinction as treatment for inappropriate mealtime behavior.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): differential reinforcement, escape extinction, feeding disorders
Target Audience:

Researchers and clinicians interested in learning more about the direct and indirect effects of escape extinction as treatment for pediatric feeding disorders.

Learning Objectives: 1) Attendees will be able to identify the risks and benefits of implementing escape extinction. 2) Attendees will be able to describe contextual changes that may threaten generalization of treatment effects. 3) Attendees will be able to state the importance of incorporating positive or negative reinforcement to increase acceptance and swallowing.
 
Manipulating Quality of Differential Negative Reinforcement in the Treatment of Pediatric Feeding Disorders
CAITLIN A. KIRKWOOD (Center for Pediatric Behavioral Health, University of North Carolina Wilmington), Melanie H. Bachmeyer (University of North Carolina Wilmington; Center for Pediatric Behavioral Health), Taylor Kristina Moseley (UNCW), Sarah Morrison (University of North Carolina Wilmington; Center for Pediatric Behavioral Health)
Abstract: Given the role of negative reinforcement (i.e., escape from bites or drinks) in the maintenance of inappropriate mealtime behavior and the effectiveness of escape extinction as treatment for inappropriate mealtime behavior, it is surprising that only one study has examined the use of escape as a reinforcer for appropriate mealtime behavior (LaRue et al., 2011). Previous studies have shown that manipulation of different parameters of negative reinforcement (e.g., duration and magnitude) have increased appropriate behavior (Golonka et al., 2000; Zarcone, Fisher, & Piazza, 1996). In the current study, we examined the effects of manipulating the quality (i.e., enriched break versus nonenriched break) of negative reinforcement following mouth clean (i.e., a product measure of swallowing) with and without escape extinction. So far, results indicated that an enriched break resulted in beneficial treatment effects (i.e., quicker acquisition of acceptance and lower initial rates of inappropriate mealtime behavior) for one child, but only when escape extinction was implemented in combination with differential negative reinforcement. Implications of using differential negative reinforcement for appropriate behavior in the treatment of escape-maintained inappropriate mealtime behavior exhibited by children with feeding disorders are discussed further.
 

Further Evidence of Interventions to Decrease Resistance to Change in the Form of Food Selectivity

JAIME CROWLEY (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Kathryn M. Peterson (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Cathleen C. Piazza (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Wayne W. Fisher (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Abstract:

Researchers report that up to 72% of children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) have feeding difficulties (Shreck, Williams, & Smith, 2004). Food selectivity is the most common among this population. Although the etiology of feeding disorders is often unknown, we hypothesize that food selectivity is another form of resistance to change. Resistance to change is one of the repetitive and restricted response patterns that make up a core symptom of ASD. In the current study, we demonstrated that our behavior-analytic intervention reduced food selectivity to clinically acceptable levels for seven participants between the ages of 2 and 8 diagnosed with ASD. We were able to shift the participants’ responding from resistive feeding responses (e.g., always selecting chicken nuggets and French fries) to alternative, appropriate feeding responses (e.g., selecting healthier target foods like green beans and baked beans) by using differential reinforcement of alternative behavior and escape extinction. The treatment effects maintained when escape extinction was no longer in place and generalized to foods not yet targeted. These results have implications for the treatment of other symptoms of resistance to change as well as the generalization of treatment effects from one symptom to another.

 

Renewal of Problem Behavior Associated With Drinking From an Open Cup

RONALD JOSEPH CLARK (Florida Institute of Technology; The Scott Center for Autism Treatment), Toni LaMonica (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment), Corina Jimenez-Gomez (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment, Florida Institute of Technology), Christopher A. Podlesnik (Florida Institute of Technology; The Scott Center for Autism Treatment; The University of Auckland)
Abstract:

Feeding problems in children with Autism Spectrum Disorder can result in malnutrition and delayed development. Behavioral interventions have been shown to be widely effective in increasing consumption of a range of foods in the absence of problem behaviors. The change in environmental cues from the treatment context (e.g., clinic) into novel contexts (e.g., home), however, can result in relapse of previously eliminated inappropriate mealtime behaviors. The present study sought to evaluate whether, after effectively reducing problem behavior associated with independent drinking from an open cup, problem behavior would return if the intervention was conducted under different contextual stimuli. During baseline, participants were exposed to an escape condition implemented by their primary caregiver (Context A), during which instances of problem behavior resulted in removal of the cup. Next, a trained therapist (Context B) implemented escape extinction and a fading procedure to increase self-fed acceptances from an open-cup. As participants continued to be exposed to the treatment, caregivers were trained to implement the intervention to high levels of treatment integrity. Upon reaching mastery criteria, caregivers implemented the treatment package as a return to Context A. Results and implications for treatment will be discussed in the context of research and theory on renewal.

 

Evaluating the Effects of Escape Extinction During Treatment of Pediatric Feeding Disorders

CHRISTOPHER W ENGLER (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Kathryn M. Peterson (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Cathleen Piazza (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Abstract:

Escape extinction is a well-established treatment for increasing acceptance and decreasing inappropriate mealtime behavior of children with feeding disorders (Volkert & Piazza, 2012), but some researchers have characterized escape extinction as intrusive because of its potential negative side effects. Two potential negative side effects that may be relevant to escape extinction are increases in emotional responding (Lerman & Iwata, 1996) and extinction-induced variability (Sevin, Gulotta, Sierp, Rosica, & Miller, 2002). Despite the criticisms, no studies to date have examined how often increases in emotional responding and extinction-induced variability occur during escape extinction to increase acceptance and decrease inappropriate mealtime behavior for children with feeding disorders. Therefore, the current study evaluated the negative side effects of escape extinction with negative vocalizations as our measure of emotional responding and packing and expulsion as our measure of extinction-induced variability. We analyzed the data of 82 children with food refusal, liquid refusal, or both, resulting in 124 data sets (69 and 55 data sets for solid and liquid intake, respectively). We observed increased negative vocalizations, expulsion, and packing in 70%, 83%, and 48% of the data sets, respectively. Participants’ increased acceptance during escape extinction occasioned the opportunity for expulsion and packing.

 
 
Symposium #307
CE Offered: BACB
Introduction to Clinical Behavior Analysis for Common Mental Health Presentations: Part One
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 1/2
Area: CBM; Domain: Theory
Chair: Emily Brennan (Eastern Michigan University)
CE Instructor: Thomas J. Waltz, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Behavior analysis has been applied broadly and has been part of clinical psychology since the 1950’s. Behavior analysts have worked with a wide variety of clinical populations and several contemporary behavior therapies are deeply rooted in functional analytic thinking. This is the first of two symposiums aimed at introducing behavior analysts to clinical behavior analysis for common outpatient mental health presentations. In the service of workforce development, it is important that behavior analysts stay informed on the broad applications of behavioral principles in a wide variety of practice areas. This symposium covers Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT), Functional Analytic Psychotherapy (FAP), Problem Solving Therapy (PST), and Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT). Each presentation will describe a therapy—its aims, techniques, and methods in functional terms. Outcome data for the treatments will be briefly reviewed. Finally, regulatory frameworks and professional training pathways will be discussed to inform behavior analysts of the training needed for these treatments to fall within their ethical scope of practice.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): ACT, clinical, depression, extreme behavior
Target Audience:

Individual in graduate training programs in behavior analysis and graduates from such programs.

Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to describe contemporary behavior therapies for mental health presentations in terms of behavioral principles. Participants will be able to describe the evidence base for these treatments. Participants will be able to describe training pathways for having these treatments ethically fall within ones scope of practice.
 
Acceptance and Commitment Therapy
THOMAS J. WALTZ (Eastern Michigan University), Claudia Drossel (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: Acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) is a behavior therapy that takes a functional approach to verbal behavior and applies it to a wide variety of clinical presentations. ACT was developed to address verbal barriers to effective action. The dissemination of this treatment has involved a wide variety of techniques and the use of “middle level terms,” such as acceptance and mindfulness. This presentation will focus on characterizing ACT in terms of basic behavioral principles, molar functional relations, and a contemporary analysis of rule-governed behavior. A brief review of the outcome literature for ACT will be provided for a variety of clinical presentations including anxiety, depression, chronic pain, obsessive-compulsive disorder, and psychosis. ACT’s status as an evidence-based therapy and the evolving criteria used to categorize the evidentiary status of therapies will be presented. Finally, professional development pathways for having a professional scope of practice inclusive of ACT for clinical presentations will also be discussed.
 
Functional Analytic Psychotherapy for Interpersonal Repertoires
EMILY BRENNAN (Eastern Michigan University), Kayla Rinna (Eastern Michigan University), Claudia Drossel (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: Functional analytic psychotherapy (FAP) is a behavioral therapy that utilizes the client-therapist relationship as an environment for changing a client’s social repertoire and increasing the frequency of social reinforcers. This is achieved through the differential reinforcement of clinically relevant behaviors (CRBs); that is, ineffective CRBs (CRB1s) are discouraged, while more effective alternatives (CRB2s) are prompted and reinforced in session. Ideally, these behaviors then generalize to clients’ social environment outside of session, granting them the skills to identify and access social relationships of higher reinforcing value. A brief summary of the outcome data for FAP will be provided. Because of the reciprocal nature of client-therapist interactions in FAP, therapists must be aware of differences in dimensions of diversity between themselves and their clients that could impact intervention outcomes. This presentation will review the behavioral principles in FAP, discuss FAP with diverse populations, and the special considerations in this work. The presentation will conclude with a discussion of the pathways available to obtaining training in FAP.
 
Problem Solving Therapy for Depression
CAITLYN UPTON (Rowan University), Tori Humiston (Eastern Michigan University), Thomas J. Waltz (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: Problem Solving Therapy (PST) is a systematic approach to skills training. Across sessions, therapists coach clients to identify problematic areas, clearly define the problem(s) clients have, brainstorm solutions, implement, and evaluate them. A behavior analytic conceptualization of PST includes discrimination training (changeable versus unchangeable problems), identification of short-term contingencies that might be barriers to problem-solving (e.g., commiserating or other social reinforcement for maintaining the status quo), and reinforcement of a general active and experimental approach to problem-solving (approach versus avoidance). Of note, Division 12 of the American Psychological Association has listed the treatment as evidence-based for depression, particularly when impairments in planning and organizing are present (Alexopoulos, Raue, Kiosses, et al., 2011; Katon, Von Korff, Lin, et al., 2004; Nezu, Nezu & Perri, 1989). This presentation will introduce behavior analysts to the techniques of and the evidence base for PST, while highlighting the importance of contextualizing clients’ behavior. Finally, the appropriate clinical settings and professional training required for PST will be reviewed.
 
Dialectical Behavior Therapy for Severe Multi-Problem Outpatient Clients
EFTHYMIA ORKOPOULOU (Eastern Michigan University), Rachel VanPutten (Eastern Michigan University), Claudia Drossel (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: Behavior analytical principles constitute the foundation of many contemporary psychotherapies and can offer a comprehensive understanding of complex behavioral phenomena. Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT) is a behaviorally rooted therapy that replaces pervasive, long-standing, and ineffective behavior patterns with more effective alternatives. Division 12 of the American Psychological Association designated DBT an evidence-based treatment for severe problems, such as self-harming, therapy-interfering, or other impulsive behaviors. DBT conceptualizes these problems as behavioral deficits and/or excesses, and it addresses specific behaviors by contextualizing them, using descriptive functional analyses and systematic problem-solving. The strategies employed require a solid background on functional analytic methodology, termed within DBT as contingency management, skills training, and chain analysis. While DBT initially was a treatment for adult self-harm, studies have suggested efficacy with other clinical populations (e.g. adults with eating and substance abuse disorders). This presentation will provide an overview of DBT, the strategies used, and the clinical targets of the therapy. It will review the evidence and describe training pathways.
 
 
Symposium #308
CE Offered: BACB/QABA/NASP
Behavior Analysis Meets Institutional Analysis: Discussing the Preservation of Common Pool Resources
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Fairmont, B2, Imperial Ballroom
Area: CSS; Domain: Theory
Chair: Sigrid S. Glenn (University of North Texas)
Discussant: Ramona Houmanfar (University of Nevada, Reno)
CE Instructor: Ramona Houmanfar, Ph.D.
Abstract:

General abstract: Elinor Ostrom’s work on management of common pool resources (CPR) offers an opportunity for behavior analysts to consider contingencies at behavioral and cultural levels involved in management of CPRs. This symposium comprises four papers, each focusing on behavioral contingencies, macrocontingencies and metacontingencies having roles in the depletion or conservation of a real-world CPR. The first presentation considers conservation of a public lake, examining behavioral and cultural selection contingencies in the context of a larger external system. The second presentation investigates the management of common pool resources in an Extractive Reserve as an example of self-governance of a CPR in contemporary Brazil. The third presentation examines the evolution of new interlocking behavioral contingencies when an indigenous CPR community starts to be affected by metacontingencies of a commercial market. The last presentation examines another case in which economic and political contingencies are producing new alliances between large and small producers of garlic in Bahia, Brazil.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
 
Integrating Institutional and Culturo-Behavioral Analyses to the Management of Common Pool Resources
MARIA E. MALOTT (Association for Behavior Analysis International), Sigrid S. Glenn (University of North Texas)
Abstract: The “tragedy of the commons” describes the depletion of resources when appropriated by a group of people. Previous scholars concluded that the only ways to avoid depletion of resources were private ownership or external governmental control. In Ostrom’s institutional analysis she identified a third solution to the tragedy of the commons. She analyzed multiple small communities lasting hundreds and even thousands of years in which the appropriators themselves managed their common pool of resources without external government control or privatization. She also identified eight design principles that characterize successful management of shared resources. Later she developed additional principles analyzing more complex social systems. We bring behavioral and cultural selection perspectives to complement her work. We analyze appropriators’ management of common pool resources in terms of metacontingencies and macrocontingencies operating within larger external systems. We conclude with a description of complementary principles to guide management of shared resources.
 
Managing Environmental Policies: Lessons From Traditional Communities
ROBERTA LEMOS (Ministério do Desenvolvimento Social, Brazil), Célia Regina Favacho (Ministério do Desenvolvimento Social, Brazil), Kátia Favilla (Ministério do Desenvolvimento Social, Brazil)
Abstract: Natural resource preservation concerns have been prevalent around the world and a range of solutions have been implemented to prevent their depletion. This paper brings together the literature on the commons and behavioral principles to understand how traditional communities’ management of common pool resources can contribute to this discussion. More specifically, it highlights how these communities can offer lessons to governments on how to develop and manage environmental policies with minimal intervention to ensure sustainable development. While Ostrom's work focuses on investigating how small communities succeed at managing common pool resources without external interference, Behavior Analysis can describe how cultural practices are selected. Through this framework, we investigate the practices of an Extractive Reserve (RESEX) in Brazil. A RESEX is an area of land, generally state-owned, where access and use rights, including natural resource extraction, are allocated to local groups. umos Fishermen in this community are able to successfully preserve one of their main sources of livelihood, the fiddler crab. Finally, we describe relevant elements and behavioral interactions to the preservation of resources that governments may want to consider.
 
The Impact of a Market Economy in the Preservation and Production of Açaí Berries in Brazilian Amazon
AECIO DE BORBA VASCONCELOS NETO (Universidade Federal do Pará, Brazil)
Abstract: Many different fields of knowledge approach social problems such as the overuse of resources necessary for human development and survival. Behavior analysts can contribute to the debate with the description of the individual and cultural contingencies that impact in the cultural practices responsible for the depletion or conservation of these resources. When looking on the possible overuse of common pool resources, an understanding of Elinor Ostrom’s work is valuable. This presentation aims to describe and analyze the selection of different cultural practices in the case of the production of açaí berries in Brazilian Amazon. In the past, the fruit was harvested and consumed by traditional caboclo communities in the Amazon region, in sustainable common pool management. The boom in the economy in the last 50 years led to new practices. We argue that the profit of this market selected new interlocked behavioral contingencies that may have different long-term nature effects as environmental erosion and social costs as the exclusion of the traditional populations and limiting the access of the low-income population to the product.
 
The Common Pool Resource: The Evolution of Cultural Practices in the Brazilian Economy
LAÉRCIA ABREU VASCONCELOS (Universidade de Brasília; Brazilian Agricultural Research Corporation), Virgínia Nogueira (Universidade de Brasília; Brazilian Agricultural Research Corporation), Pedro Vieira (Universidade de Brasília; Brazilian Agricultural Research Corporation), Gilmar Henz (Universidade de Brasília; Brazilian Agricultural Research Corporation)
Abstract: The Behavioral Systems theory, based on metacontingencies as sources of behavior change, has shown how behavioral engineering offered by Behavior Analysis can contribute to the analysis of different levels of complexity. The interface between Behavior Analysis, Elinor Ostrom's Economics, and the agricultural sector shows the strength of integrating areas in the study of cultural interventions. Thus, the objective of this essay is to present points of the Economic theory, in particular of the Common Pool Resources approach, in the study of the evolution of cultural practices. A case study of the adoption of virus-free garlic production by family farmers in Bahia State, Brazil, will be analyzed, with emphasis on the macrosystem (e.g., economic and political aspects) and on the alliance between small and big garlic producers. Impacts on the agents directly involved, as well as on the local economy, show favorable development alternatives.
 
 
Symposium #309
CE Offered: BACB
Evaluating Direct Observation Measurement Systems and Outcomes of Visual Analysis to Inform and Improve the Assessment and Treatment of Challenging Behavior
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Mindy Christine Scheithauer (Marcus Autism Center)
Discussant: William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children)
CE Instructor: William H. Ahearn, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Direct observation and visual analysis are cornerstones of treating challenging behavior and this symposium evaluates novel methods in this domain. Two studies targeted assessment, with the first comparing assessments with different goals and measurement systems and the second evaluating visual analysis decision making. Specifically, one study evaluated correspondence between a concurrent operant analysis (measuring choice allocation) and a multielement functional analysis (measuring challenging behavior) and conducted treatment comparisons for cases of non-correspondence. The next study evaluated the number of sessions required in extended alone or ignore assessments to make valid conclusions about whether challenging behavior is automatically maintained based on visual analysis of the rate of behavior across sessions. The other studies evaluate direct observation and visual analysis in treatment contexts, one focused on observations across contexts and the other comparing treatments with measurement of various dimensions of behavior. For the observations across contexts, the authors demonstrate whether a treatment for stereotypy shown effective in controlled contexts is also efficacious in naturalistic settings. The next study also targeted repetitive movements, but compared the success of two treatments (blocking and manual guidance) using three behavioral measurements, demonstrating that some measurement systems may be more sensitive in detecting treatment differences.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): direct observation, problem behavior, repetitive behavior, visual analysis
Target Audience:

Professionals working with children who exhibit challenging behavior.

Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will describe the difference between a concurrent operant and multielement functional analysis 2. Attendees will identify the number of extended alone/ignore sessions required to make reliable clinical decisions 3. Attendees will describe why it is important to evaluate the effects of treatments across contexts 4. Attendees will identify why it may be useful to measure multiple dimensions of behavior when evaluating treatment outcomes
 

Comparisons Between Functional Analysis and Concurrent Operant Analysis Outcomes in the Assessment of Problem Behavior

JESSICA TORELLI (Vanderbilt University), Emily Weaver (Vanderbilt University), Nealetta Houchins-Juarez (Vanderbilt University), Blair Lloyd (Vanderbilt University), Joseph Michael Lambert (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract:

We evaluated the extent to which the results of a response-guided concurrent operant analysis (COA) framework assessing relative preference for attention, tangible, and escape corresponded with results of functional analyses (FA) of problem behavior across six children with or at risk for disabilities. For each participant, we conducted a COA using a simultaneous treatments design, followed by a multi-element FA. In cases where the two assessments did not fully correspond, we used an alternating treatments design to compare the effects of interventions based on each assessment outcome on rates of problem and appropriate behavior. Finally, for cases in which at least one effective intervention was identified, we used a concurrent chain procedure to evaluate participant preference among effective interventions. COA results partially corresponded with FA results (i.e., COA identified one of multiple functions of problem behavior) for all six participants. Treatment results varied by participant. For one participant, both treatments were equally effective; for two participants, neither treatment was effective; and for three participants either the FA- or COA-based treatment was more effective. Participants for whom a superior treatment was identified showed a consistent preference for the more effective intervention.

 

Comparing Decisions Regarding Whether Challenging Behavior is Automatically Maintained Based on Assessments of Varying Lengths

MINDY CHRISTINE SCHEITHAUER (Marcus Autism Center), Stephanie Liollio (Marcus Autism Center), Seung Ju Lee (Emory University)
Abstract:

Several studies have evaluated functional analysis (FA) methods for identifying whether challenging behavior is maintained by automatic reinforcement. Queirim et al. (2013) found that extended alone sessions conducted prior to a multielement FA correctly identified whether challenging behavior was maintained by automatic reinforcement. However, it is unclear how many sessions are needed in this type of an assessment to make confident conclusions. In this study, we conducted a retrospective consecutive case series analysis from clients with intellectual or developmental disabilities that completed extended alone or ignore sessions as part of a day treatment admission for challenging behavior. Using visual analysis, we compared decisions regarding whether challenging behavior was automatically maintained based on data from the first three and six sessions of the assessment to decisions made when all available clinical data were presented. Results from the first 20 cases suggest that reliability between decisions made following three data points compared to all available clinical data was poor, but increased dramatically with the first six data points. This suggests that at least six consecutive sessions with alone/ignore contingencies may be required to draw conclusions about automatically-maintained challenging behavior. Results are discussed in the context of maximizing assessment efficiency.

 
A Naturalistic Approach to the Treatment of Stereotypy
HALEY STEINHAUSER (The New England Center for Children; Western New England University), Rebecca Foster (Western New England University), Riley Fergus (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Stereotypy treatment often involves decelerative methods, but Colón, Ahearn, Clark, and Masalsky (2012) demonstrated that reinforcement of alternative verbal behavior can decrease stereotypy. Similar to this approach, we targeted stereotypy by first reinforcing verbal and social behavior in contexts that mimicked the typical flow of a classroom. Verbal behavior was targeted in two contexts, with one context approximating academic programming and the other providing incidental opportunities for established verbal responses. An interactive leisure context expanded on existing social skills, and an independent leisure context provided incidental opportunities for established play skills. We measured appropriate behavior and stereotypy across all contexts prior to redirection. Data from two participants will be presented. With the first participant, we observed desirable levels of appropriate behavior and low levels of stereotypy in both verbal behavior contexts. Stereotypy remained problematic in the leisure contexts, requiring stereotypy redirection. Context-specific redirection suppressed stereotypy significantly in one of the contexts and response interruption and redirection decreased stereotypy in the other context. Interobserver agreement was calculated for a minimum of 30% of sessions across all conditions and was an average of 90% or above.
 

Implications of Three Measures to Determine Treatment Effectiveness for the Repetitive Body Movements of an Adult With Autism

NICOLE SCHUIERER (Alpine Learning Group), Cortney DeBiase (Alpine Learning Group), Kathryn E. Cerino Britton (The Alpine Learning Group), Jaime DeQuinzio (Alpine Learning Group), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group)
Abstract:

The participant was a 19-year-old with autism who engaged in high rates of repetitive body movements (RBM) that interfered with and was responsible for the loss of paid employment. We chose two vocational tasks (i.e., cleaning a table and rolling napkins) that the participant performed independently at the job site and that typically took approximately 5- 8 minutes to complete. We used a multi-element design across these tasks to compare the effects of blocking and manual guidance on the number of RBM in, the duration of task completion, and the rate of RBM. Duration of task completion for both tasks decreased, but more so for cleaning the table when manual guidance was used. The frequency of RBM reduced dramatically for both conditions and remained low. Taken together, these two measures imply that both blocking and manual guidance were equally effective. Alternatively the rate of RBM, indicated that blocking was the more effective procedure. Taken collectively, we decided to continue with manual guidance as that was the more effective procedure for decreasing the duration of task completion. Results support the importance of using more than one measurement to determine intervention effects.

 
 
Symposium #310
CE Offered: BACB
Evaluating the Impact of Chaining Methods on Skill Acquisition and Treatment Integrity
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom A
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Kate E. Fiske Massey (Rutgers University-New Brunswick)
Discussant: Laura L. Grow (Garden Academy)
CE Instructor: Kate E. Fiske Massey, Ph.D.
Abstract: Behavior chains are a commonly used teaching strategy within applied behavior analysis, especially for teaching vocational and self-help skills to individuals with autism spectrum disorder and other developmental disabilities. However, little guidance is provided by the literature with regard to the conditions under which chaining procedures are effective and efficient (Donnelly & Karsten, 2017). Variations in chaining procedures such as prompting and reinforcement have the potential to impact not only student skill acquisition (e.g., Libby, Weiss, Bancroft, & Ahearn, 2008), but also the treatment integrity of staff implementation (e.g., Donnelly & Karsten, 2017). In the current symposium, we will present a review of the literature on chains to guide our implementation of this complex teaching procedure. We will then present evaluations of three procedural variations of chaining and the effects on either the skill acquisition of learners or the treatment integrity of staff implementation. This symposium will provide guidance for practitioners in behavior chain implementation and also present a call to the field for increased research focus on defining and evaluating the effectiveness of chaining procedures.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Behavior chains, Skill acquisition, Treatment integrity
Target Audience: Behavior analysts and other professionals implementing chaining procedures to teach complex skills to individuals with autism spectrum disorder and other developmental disabilities.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) summarize the body of research on implementing behavior chains; (2) identify components of behavior chains that are subject to procedural variation, and (3) describe the impact of some programmatic variations of skill acquisition or treatment integrity.
 
Evaluating the Replicability of Chain Procedures in Published Literature
SHIN TEH (Rutgers University-New Brunswick), Catherine Kishel (Rutgers University-New Brunswick), Kate E. Fiske Massey (Rutgers University-New Brunswick)
Abstract: Chaining procedures are commonly used in promoting skill acquisition among those with autism and other developmental disabilities. However, there is a relative lack of guidance in the literature regarding procedural administration. To help guide implementation of chains in a clinical setting, in the current study we reviewed peer-reviewed publications that used chaining procedures. Our goals were to determine whether studies 1) reported procedures in a replicable manner and 2) taken together, could inform a consistent protocol for various chaining procedures to enhance both research and clinical consistency. For our preliminary review, we examined 20 articles published between 1988 and 2018 that used forward, backward, or total task chaining procedures. Each article was coded for the presence of 33 components of chain implementation. Overall replicability was determined for each study by calculating the percent of components that were clearly described in the methods. Preliminary findings indicate only 30% of reviewed studies achieved greater than 80% replicability. This result highlights the inconsistency regarding procedural implementation across studies, which is a concern that should be brought to the attention of the field as it limits our ability to use research to inform our practice.
 
The Effects of Different Behavior Chain Strategies on Treatment Integrity
HYEIN LEE (Rutgers University-New Brunswick), Kate E. Fiske Massey (Rutgers University-New Brunswick), Meredith Bamond (Rutgers University-New Brunswick), Catherine Kishel (Rutgers University-New Brunswick)
Abstract: The use of chaining procedures is effective for teaching a sequence of skills and is widely used for individuals with developmental disabilities. The literature suggests that when teachers implement behavior chains with a high level of error, or with low treatment integrity, skill acquisition stagnates. By comparison, high-integrity teaching often leads to rapid acquisition (Donnelly & Karsten, 2017). Errors commonly identified when teaching forward chains include prompting steps out of order, incorrectly delivering the reinforcer, and failing to provide appropriate prompts (Donnelly & Karsten, 2017), but we do not know whether these findings also extend to other types of chaining procedures. This project aims to identify the frequency of different types of staff error across three different chaining strategies: backward, forward, and total task. We sampled 34 to 36 trials each of forward, backward, and total task chains across multiple skills, students, and teachers. Preliminary results indicate that teachers were more likely to make errors for certain treatment integrity components regardless of chaining strategy used. Results will be discussed in the context of training teachers to implement chains effectively.
 

Evaluating Backward Chaining Methods on Vocational Tasks With Adults With Developmental Disabilities

ASHLEY MARIECLAIRE KOBYLARZ (Caldwell University), Ruth M. DeBar (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Linda Sue Meyer (Linda S. Meyer Consulting, LLC)
Abstract:

Backward chains are widely used to teach complex skills to individuals with an autism spectrum disorder (ASD) and other developmental disabilities. Implementation of chaining procedures may vary and there is little to guide practitioners in the selection of chaining procedures. Moreover, there is a dearth of research evaluating effectiveness and efficiency of procedural variations of behavior chains. The purpose of this study was to extend previous research by evaluating the effectiveness, efficiency, and preference for procedural variations (i.e., teacher-completion, participant-completion, and no-completion) of backward chains across vocational tasks for three adults with developmental disabilities. Data will be presented across the percentage of independent and correct steps completed in addition to efficiency measures of errors and trials to mastery. We will also discuss participant preference for instructional strategies, maintenance across one- and four- weeks post-mastery, and socially validity measures as well.

 

The Effect of Prompt Assignment on Treatment Integrity and Skill Acquisition in Total Task Chains

CATHERINE KISHEL (Rutgers University-New Brunswick ), Olivia Heck (Ripon College), Meredith Bamond (Rutgers University-New Brunswick), Kate E. Fiske Massey (Rutgers University-New Brunswick)
Abstract:

Little research exists regarding the assignment of prompts used within chains. Prompts have considerable impact on total task chains, in which each step of the chain is taught simultaneously. The current study evaluated the effect of prompt assignment on staff treatment integrity and student performance. Phase 1 evaluated the ability of three teachers to implement two prompting methods with integrity across three adult clients with ASD. In the multiple-prompt (MP) method, the prompt required to occasion the correct response for each step of the chain during a probe was assigned to those steps during teaching. In contrast, using the single-prompt (SP) method, the most intrusive prompt required on any step of the chain during the probe was assigned to every step of the chain during teaching. Results showed that teachers implemented the MP and SP methods with equally high levels of treatment integrity but that lower average levels of prompting were used during MP. Phase 2 of the current study seeks to evaluate the effects of the MP versus SP method on skill acquisition of two of the clients from Phase 1. Initial results suggest that the MP method may be more effective in promoting skill acquisition and independence.

 
 
Symposium #311
CE Offered: BACB
Bringing the Lag Out of the Lab: Applied Lag Schedule Research
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom C
Area: DDA/EAB; Domain: Translational
Chair: Andrea Ramirez-Cristoforo (The University of Texas at Austin )
Discussant: Ronald Lee (William James College)
CE Instructor: Clodagh Mary Murray, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The utility of lag schedules for increasing varied responding has been established in basic research with animals since the 1980s. This symposium aims to disseminate the latest research investigating lag schedules in applied settings. The first paper, a comprehensive research synthesis, will “set the scene” by providing an overview of the recent developments in applied, basic and translational research on lag schedules with human participants. This will be followed by three empirical papers describing lag schedule research for increasing variability in play behaviours of children with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD). The first of these increased variation in selection of toys, remediating a common problem among children with ASD, namely that they perseverate on a limited number of toys, missing out on opportunities for social and tangible reinforcement. The next paper describes the use of lag schedules to increase variation in appropriate play behaviors and the impact of this on stereotypy. This is timely as it represents a potential shift in how restricted repetitive behaviors are conceptualized. If we frame them as low behavioral variability then reinforcement-based strategies are indicated. The third paper outlines a lag schedule intervention to increase variability in play actions with toys, with a focus on generalization and maintenance effects and how these may be maximized. Together with the discussant, these papers will provide an engaging insight into the practical aspects of using lag schedules to increase variability in humans, with an emphasis on play.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

BCBA, BCBA-D Post graduate students, practitioners, researchers

 
A Systematic Synthesis of Lag Schedule Research in Humans
(Applied Research)
BRYANT C. SILBAUGH (The University of Texas at San Antonio, Department of Interdisciplinary Learning and Teaching), Clodagh Mary Murray (National University of Ireland Galway), Michelle Kelly (Emirates College for Advanced Education), Olive Healy (Trinity College Dublin)
Abstract: Variability provides the basic building blocks for operant selection to shape the behavioral repertoires of individual organisms. Findings from basic and applied behavior analytic research conducted over multiple decades have converged to suggest that variability may be a dimension of operant behavior. Therefore, researchers have begun to develop and evaluate applied behavioral technology used to teach, strengthen, and bring operant variability under discriminative stimulus control for educational or clinical purposes, such as replacing repetitive behavior or stereotypy with variable behavior in individuals with autism spectrum disorder. The current study is the first comprehensive synthesis of basic, translational, and applied research on lag schedules in humans. We employed a multi-step search strategy to identify all experimental studies of lag schedules in humans published in peer-reviewed journals since 1985. We identified 38 studies that met inclusion criteria, then extracted data on participant and study characteristics and compared applied study characteristics to the 2014 Council for Exceptional Children (CEC): Standards for Evidence-Based Practices in Special Education. Preliminary results suggest that (a) more translational research on lag schedules is needed to further characterize the effects of lag schedules in humans, (b) the effects of lag schedules in applied studies have largely been positive, and (c) lag schedules of reinforcement can increase operant variability in typically developing individuals and individuals with intellectual disabilities or developmental disorders across a range of ages, settings, and skill domains such as verbal behavior, play, and feeding. We conclude by discussing future avenues of research and some preliminary practice guidelines.
 

Increasing Variability in Toy Selection in Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder Using Stimulus to Stimulus Pairing and Lag Schedules of Reinforcement

(Applied Research)
Catherine Moynihan (National University of Ireland Galway), CLODAGH MARY MURRAY (National University of Ireland Galway)
Abstract:

Research has demonstrated that children with ASD engage more in stereotyped, repetitive movements during play and demonstrate limited interest in varying the toys they play with. Therefore, evidence-based interventions are necessary to assist with widening the community of reinforcers and improving variability and flexibility of play among this group. In Phase 1, a stimulus-stimulus pairing intervention was successfully implemented to condition three toys as reinforcers for four children with ASD. In Phase 2, lag schedules of reinforcement were implemented in a non-concurrent multiple baseline across participants design to increase variability in toy selection for three children with ASD using the toys that were conditioned in Phase 1 along with three novel toys. Results indicated that lag schedules are an effective intervention for increasing variability in toy selection for children with ASD and that the toys that had been previously conditioned were not selected more frequently under lag conditions than the novel toys. Implications of this work for early intervention programs will be outlined.

 

An Evaluation of the Effects of Lag Schedules on Variable Play Behavior and Stereotypy in Individuals With Autism Spectrum Disorder

(Applied Research)
ANDREA RAMIREZ-CRISTOFORO (The University of Texas at Austin), Terry S. Falcomata (The University of Texas at Austin), Fabiola Vargas Londoño (University of Texas at Austin), Cayenne Shpall (Student)
Abstract:

The tendency of individuals with autism to engage in excessive repetitive and stereotyped behavior may be conceptualized as a deficit in variable responding. Basic and applied studies in the behavioral literature have demonstrated that, similar to other operant dimensions of behavior, variability can be impacted via the manipulation of reinforcement contingencies using lag schedules. Lag schedules have been demonstrated to positively impact variability across a variety of skills with individuals with autism including verbal behavior such as mands, tacts, and appropriate answers to social questions. Lag schedules have also been demonstrated to increase variability with toy play behaviors. In this study, we evaluated the effects of applying lag schedules to appropriate toy play behaviors on object-based stereotypy, appropriate toy play behavior, and novel play responses. We utilized an ABAB embedded in a non-concurrent multiple baseline design across participants. Results suggested that applying the lag schedule increased the cumulative number of novel responses and engagement in appropriate play. It also resulted in decreased time engaged in object-based stereotypy. The potential utility of lag schedules for decreasing object-based stereotypy in individuals with autism will be discussed.

 

Increasing and Generalizing Variability in Toy Play Actions of Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder Using Lag Schedules of Reinforcement

(Applied Research)
RASHA BARUNI (New England Center for Children - Abu Dhabi), Daniel John Sheridan (Mohammed Bin Rashid Center for Special Education operated by The New England Center for Children), Clodagh Mary Murray (National University of Ireland Galway), Michelle Kelly (Emirates College for Advanced Education), Jonathan Seaver (The New England Center for Children)
Abstract:

Restricted repetitive behaviors are frequently demonstrated by children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). Invariable behaviors, along with limited play skills, may result in little contact with social sources of reinforcement. Research has demonstrated variability to be an operant element of behavior, sensitive to reinforcement contingencies and lag schedules are gaining increasing attention in the research literature. The current study adds to previous work by investigating the use of lag schedules of reinforcement to occasion novel play actions with toys with three children diagnosed with ASD in the United Arab Emirates. A non-concurrent multiple baseline design across participants was utilized to evaluate the effects of lag 1 and lag 2 schedules of reinforcement. During baseline conditions, play behavior with was observed in the absence of intervention. During intervention conditions, reinforcers were delivered contingent on responses that met the lag criterion. Furthermore, prompts were introduced and faded to further increase variable toy-play behavior. The data indicate that the procedure was effective in increasing novel toy-play responding for all three participants. Additional data on generalization, maintenance and social validity will be presented and discussed as these factors are likely to influence the adoption of lag schedule interventions in applied settings.

 
 
Symposium #312
CE Offered: BACB
Stimulus Equivalence: Conceptual and Experimental Issues
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich E-G
Area: EAB/VBC; Domain: Translational
Chair: Erik Arntzen (Oslo Metropolitan University)
Discussant: Abdulrazaq A. Imam (John Carroll University)
CE Instructor: Erik Arntzen, Ph.D.
Abstract: The first paper is by Arntzen, Nordenstam, and Fields. They present an experiment in which college students were trained 12 conditional discriminations (ABCDE) followed by a sorting test and a simple discrimination of C stimuli and finally a test for emergent relations. The main findings were a 100% correspondence between sorting and MTS performance, and all participants sorted correctly after an extension of stimulus classes. The second paper by Vilela and Tomanari present an experiment exploring the effect of delayed matching-to-sample with the focus on parameters of eye-fixation. They found that the longer exposure to the sample stimuli in an MTS task may be not enough to explain the differences observed in the establishment of equivalence classes in DMTS compared to SMTS tasks. Fields and Arntzen in third paper discuss the use of the percentage of participants in a group who form equivalence classes. They argue that many of the critiques raised are about other factors that are essential in the measurement of class formation. The last paper by Vaidya discusses the definition of equivalence classes. The presentation will describe important aspects of developments in Sidman’s conceptualization of equivalence relations.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): conceptual, experimental, stimulus equivalence
Target Audience: Researchers, students
Learning Objectives: Participants will by the end of the symposium be able to talk about (1) sorting as measurement for class formation, (2) the role of eye-fixations, (3) arguments why yields are important in equivalence class formation, and (4) definitions on stimulus equivalence.
 
Extension of Stimulus Classes
(Basic Research)
ERIK ARNTZEN (Oslo and Akershus University College), Constanse Nordenstam (Oslo Metropolitan University), Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: The correspondence between performance on class-formation sorting test (CFST) and matching-to-sample (MTS) test have been shown in many recent experiments. The present experiment expands the knowledge by studying sorting performance after extending stimulus classes by including a simple discrimination training. Twenty participants trained 12 conditional discriminations with a linear series training structure (ABCDE).The training was followed by a CFST. Then, they were exposed to an extension training with simple discrimination of the C stimuli. In the presence of C1, C2, and C3, they had to click 3, 5, and 7 times, respectively. The numbers 3, 5, and 7 were used as F stimuli in a test block including AF, BF, DF, and EF. The participants were assigned into two different groups. Half of the participants were exposed to MTS testing and a CFST, while the other half of participants were exposed to CFST, MTS test, and CFST. Half of the participants were exposed to MTS testing and CFST, while the other half of the participants were exposed to CFST, MTS testing, and CFST. The main findings were a 100% correspondence between sorting and MTS performance, and all participants sorted correctly after an extension of stimulus classes (see Table 1).
 

The Effects of Delayed Momentary Time Sampling Tasks on the Establishment of Equivalence Classes and on the Parameters of Eye Fixations

(Basic Research)
Eduardo Vilela (University of Sao Paulo), GERSON YUKIO TOMANARI (Universidade de Sao Paulo)
Abstract:

Data have suggested that delayed MTS (DMTS) is more effective in establishing equivalence classes than simultaneous MTS (SMTS), in addition to providing stronger associations among stimuli within classes. A possible explanation for these results is that the delay allows the participant to be exposed to the sample stimuli for longer time. The present study aimed to evaluate the effects of different delays in MTS tasks on the formation of equivalence classes and on temporal parameters of eye fixations regarding the sample stimuli as assessed by eye-tracking apparatus. Nine undergraduate students were exposed to a conditional discrimination training in order to establish classes A1B1C1, A2B2C2, A3B3C3 and A4B4C4. Each of these classes was associated with one of the following condition: SMTS and DMTS (delay 0 s, 2 s and 4 s). Seven participants demonstrated the formation of stimulus classes. Regarding eye tracking, no remarkable differences had been observed regarding the fixations to the sample stimuli during the acquisition of conditional discriminations as well as during equivalence tests in any of the experimental conditions.These results suggest, therefore, that the longer exposure to the sample stimuli in a MTS task may be not enough to explain the differences observed in the establishment of equivalence classes in DMTS compared to SMTS tasks.

 
Yield as an Essential Measure of Equivalence Class Formation
(Theory)
LANNY FIELDS (Queens College, City University of New York), Erik Arntzen (Oslo Metropolitan University)
Abstract: “Yield”, the percentage of participants in a group who form a set of targeted equivalence classes, has been used to discover many variables that enhance the immediate emergence of equivalence classes. Additionally, yield is now being used increasingly to document the formation of educationally relevant equivalence classes. Recently, however, six criticisms have been raised regarding the appropriateness of using yield to study equivalence class formation. An analysis of each critique suggests that (i) none are supportable, (ii) yield cannot be replaced with trial-based measurements of stimulus control topographies that influence responding during or after class formation, and (iii) both yield and trial-based measures of performance are needed to provide a comprehensive understanding of equivalence class formation. Further, many of these critiques are really about other factors that play critical roles in the measurement of class formation.
 

On the Definition of Stimulus Equivalence: Current Status and Future Directions

(Theory)
MANISH VAIDYA (University of North Texas)
Abstract:

Theoretical developments in the inductive sciences come about when a sufficient amount of data has been collected to warrant a conceptual organization or reorganization of known empirical facts. When cast precisely, theories can also delimit their domain and, thus, serve to create the conditions for their modification and development. Sidman’s (1994 and 2000) papers serve as excellent examples of this kind of theory making. In this address, I will attempt to describe how developments in Sidman’s conceptualization of equivalence relations have created the conditions for a re-evaluation of the procedures and criteria by which equivalence relations are assayed and measured. In brief, Sidman’s recognition that equivalence relations include all positive members of a contingency or reinforcement allows for the possibility that equivalence relations can emerge from systematically arranged two- and three-term contingencies. This presentation will explore the implications of this shift in thinking for how equivalence relations are defined and measured.

 
 
Symposium #313
CE Offered: BACB
Extending the Reach of Behavior Analysis
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom A
Area: OBM/TBA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Ellie Kazemi (California State University, Northridge)
Discussant: Patrick C. Friman (Boys Town)
CE Instructor: Ellie Kazemi, Ph.D.
Abstract: In this symposium, we will discuss applications of Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) beyond treatment for individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorders (ASD). The first paper focuses on a proposed method of training conflict resolution skills to behavior analysts using a decision-making tree and corresponding behavior measurement tool. The second paper includes results of a recent survey distributed to fire safety trainers and the collaborative development of a behavioral tool to be utilized by trainers teaching fire prevention in the community. The third paper disseminates the effectiveness of ABA for both skill acquisition and problem behavior reduction for children who do not have a diagnosis of ASD. The final paper outlines the effects of a behavior analytic intervention in a classroom with typically developing students. Our discussant will conclude with further discussion of these findings and the importance of extending the reach of behavior analysis.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Beyond Autism, Conflict Resolution, Fire Safety, Typically Developing
Target Audience: The target audience are Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBAs), behavior analysts in training, or individuals interested in application of behavior analytic principles to populations outside of those with a diagnosis of Autism Spectrum Disorders.
Learning Objectives: 1) Attendees will identify the impact of workplace conflict on behavior analysts and the utility of a decision-making tree in resolving conflict. 2) Attendees will identify the benefits of the application of behavioral measurement tools in community safety trainings. 3) Attendees will identify potential application of behavior analytic interventions with children who are typically developing or have a diagnosis other than Autism Spectrum Disorder.
 
Conflict Resolution Training for Behavior Analysts
(Applied Research)
CHELSEA M CARTER (California State University, Northridge), Ellie Kazemi (California State University, Northridge), Ryan Moradpour (California State University, Northridge), Shelby Jones (California State University, Northridge)
Abstract: Recently, we distributed a nation-wide survey and found that unresolved workplace conflict was associated with turnover, lost cases, and decreased job satisfaction for Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBAs) who participated. Training BCBAs to resolve workplace conflict may mitigate these adverse effects. However, there is currently no evidence-based conflict resolution training available to BCBAs, and existing models of conflict resolution often lack specific performance measures or decision-making criteria for resolving conflict. Therefore, we propose a behavior analytic approach to teaching conflict resolution skills using a decision-making tree. In this presentation, we will summarize common components of conflict resolution in existing literature we used to develop our decision-making tree and discuss how they can be incorporated into behavior skills training for practitioners. We will share our proposed 5-step decision tree and the results of our pilot trainings.
 
Extending the Reach of Behavior Analysis to Fire Safety Training
(Applied Research)
ADISA PTAH (California State University, Northridge), Ellie Kazemi (California State University, Northridge), Andrew Ainsworth (California State University, Northridge), Jennifer Radics-Johnson (Alisa Ann Ruch Burn Foundation), Daniel Chacon (Alisa Ann Ruch Burn Foundation), Ed Comeau (Writer-Tech), Coral Florian (California State University, Northridge)
Abstract: According to the National Fire Protection Association, there are over 3,000 fire and burn-related deaths every year. Fire Departments and Burn Foundations provide community trainings for fire prevention and to increase the public’s skills for safe emergency responding. In this Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) funded project, our goal is to develop behavior measurement tools to help community trainers assess the impact of their training on the performance of their trainees. We surveyed 135 experts in fire and burn education and asked them about their current training procedures for fire escape planning, smoke alarm education, burn care, and burn prevention education. We learned that majority of these respondents evaluate the effectiveness of fire safety and burn education by the number of participants who attended their education program. We then conducted phone interviews with 14 of the respondents who had indicated that they assess behavior change after their trainings. Through the interviews and focus group discussions, we found that there is a high demand for behavior measures that capture emergency response skills of trainees. We will discuss the results of the survey, interviews, and the focus group meeting and end by showing the performance monitoring tool we have developed collaboratively.
 
Beyond Autism: Disseminating Applied Behavior Analysis Across a Variety of Populations and Presenting Problems
(Applied Research)
MEGAN MICHELLE ST. CLAIR (Halo Behavioral Health), Lauri Simchoni (BCBA), Bryan Burra (Halo Behavioral Health), Jonathan J. Tarbox (University of Southern California; FirstSteps for Kids)
Abstract: Numerous research studies have been dedicated to evaluating the effectiveness of applied behavior analytic (ABA) treatment in problem behavior reduction and skill acquisition with individuals with autism spectrum disorders (ASDs). However, research studies dedicated to evaluating the efficacy of the dissemination of ABA across a variety of differing populations and presenting problems, beyond ASD, is limited and warrants further investigation. Therefore, the purpose of this pilot program evaluation is to analyze the effects of traditional ABA treatment on the total percentage decrease in problem behavior and percentage increase in skill acquisition, across individuals with various clinical diagnoses to no diagnosis at all. The outcome data for three children, ranging in age from 6 to 10 years, is included. Results of this pilot program evaluation preliminarily indicates that ABA treatment is effective and efficient in decreasing problem behavior and increasing skills beyond individuals with ASD.
 

Wait! You Want Me to Not Listen to the Teacher?: Evaluating the Effects of Augmental Values on the Establishment and Reversal of Instructional Control

(Applied Research)
SHARI DAISY (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology, Los Angeles), Eric Carlson (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology, Los Angeles ), Jonathan J. Tarbox (University of Southern California; FirstSteps for Kids)
Abstract:

The current study evaluated whether instructional control over learning readiness behavior could be established and reversed as a result of trained augmentals. Six typically developing second grade students participated in the study. First, coordination relations were trained and tested for a network of learning readiness behavior. High value, minimal value, and negative value augmentals were then established for two arbitrary stimuli. Instructional control tests with trained augmentals in place resulted in rapid control over student responding under the negative value augmental condition with varied responding under the high and minimal value augmental conditions.

 
 
Symposium #314
CE Offered: BACB
Supporting Better Management Practices: Research on Response Deprivation, Countercontrol, and Performance Scorecards
Sunday, May 26, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Toronto
Area: OBM; Domain: Translational
Chair: Elizabeth Virginia Krulder (California State University, Fresno)
Discussant: Todd A. Ward (bSci21 Media, LLC)
CE Instructor: Sharlet D. Rafacz, Ph.D.
Abstract: There are a number of important areas for further research within the field of Organizational Behavior Management (OBM) to better inform managers on how to improve employees' behavior. As one example, response deprivation may assist managers with increasing performance without the addition of costly reinforcers, but research within OBM is limited and several studies suffer from methodological limitations. Countercontrol can also be a concern for management, yet many of the publications in this area are theoretical or countercontrol is invoked as a post hoc explanation rather than being empirically investigated. Finally, performance scorecards (also known as the performance matrix) are a package intervention that includes a number of empirically-supported components for management to utilize in increasing a variety of workplace behaviors. However, further research regarding the necessary components of the scorecard is needed. The current symposium will present both analogue and applied research in each of these areas and discuss how the results have implications for future research but also for how management designs systems to motivate and improve employee performance.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience: Behavior Analysts, particularly those who are conducting research in organizational behavior management and/or are currently a supervisor or manager in their organization.
 
The Effects of Response Deprivation on Employee Performance in an Analogue Work Setting
(Basic Research)
ROBBYN WOOD (California State University, Fresno), Sharlet D. Rafacz (California State University, Fresno)
Abstract: The response deprivation model includes depriving a behavior below baseline levels and then providing access to the behavior contingent on the completion of a different behavior. With the response deprivation model, supervisors can use any behavior that is already occurring, particularly low-probability behaviors, as a reinforcer for any other behavior. This is particularly important for organizations because it decreases the need for other, more costly reinforcers, such as money. Within the field of Organizational Behavior Management (OBM) there have been few studies conducted utilizing response deprivation within a work environment. Those studies that have been conducted evaluated the effects of restricting high-probability behaviors; however, a majority of the behaviors in a work environment are low-probability behaviors. As such, the purpose of the current study was to examine the effects of restricting access to high- and low-probability behaviors and making access to those behaviors contingent on performing a different high- or low-probability behavior in an analogue work setting. The effects of restricted access to high-probability or low-probability tasks was evaluated in an alternating treatments design with five participants. Results of this study and how they inform managerial practices and future research will be discussed.
 

Evaluation of an Experimental Procedure to Evoke Countercontrol in an Organizational Analogue

(Basic Research)
ALEXIS BARAJAS (California State University, Fresno ), Miguel Angel Vieyra (California State University, Fresno), Sharlet D. Rafacz (California State University, Fresno)
Abstract:

One way an individual can control another person's behavior is through aversive consequences, such as threats of punishment. In behavioral research this is referred to as aversive control. Aversive control is widespread in our culture and its use is concerning because it frequently evokes negative side effects. Countercontrol is one of these negative side effects. Countercontrol is an operant response that is evoked by aversive control and that functions to punish the user of aversive control. This may take the form of acts of rebellion, revolution, protest, sabotage, and terrorism. Organizational settings frequently utilize aversive control and more research is needed to determine under what conditions the side effects of aversive control, such as countercontrol, may be evoked. The purpose of the current study was to create an organizational analogue in which statements made by a manager may evoke countercontrol responses. The study used an ABCDCD reversal design, and a total of 14 participants completed the procedure. Results indicated that the majority of participants did not engage in countercontrol, however, the procedure may have resulted in countercontrol responding by several participants. How individual results may inform managerial practices and future research will be discussed.

 
Flexibility in Goal Attainment: The Role of Overachievement in Performance Matrices
(Applied Research)
BLAIN HOCKRIDGE (California Autism Center & Learning Group), Sharlet D. Rafacz (California State University, Fresno)
Abstract: There are few studies in the Journal of Organizational Behavior Management (JOBM) that examine the effectiveness of individual goal setting components (O’Hora & Maglieri, 2006). For instance, some versions of the performance matrix, an employee behavior scorecard, allow employees to achieve points above a specified goal level (overachievement) for certain behaviors to make up for other goals that are not met even though there is no evidence to justify doing this (Daniels & Daniels, 2006). While some versions of the performance matrix are used frequently in applied settings, little research regarding their utilization is available (Plowman, 2005). As such, the current study examined the effect that eliminating the possibility of overachievement on a performance matrix would have on the safe driving behavior of six fork lift drivers at a ceramics manufacturing company. The overachievement and non-overachievement matrices were compared in a counterbalanced ABACX and ACABX reversal design. Results of the study showed that both versions of the performance matrix significantly increased the safe driving behaviors of all participants, but differences in level of improvement, cost, and employee preference may have implications for designing performance matrices in the future.
 
How Priority Weights Effect Employee Behavior Allocation on Performance Scorecards
(Applied Research)
SHARLET D. RAFACZ (California State University, Fresno), Andrew Olson (California State University, Fresno)
Abstract: Only a small number of studies in the Journal of Organizational Behavior Management (JOBM) have examined the effect that performance matrices (also known as performance scorecards) have on employee performance. The performance matrix is a multicomponent intervention that targets several performance measures simultaneously using goal setting, feedback, and incentives. The limited research in this area tends to target groups of individuals and very few studies provide an analysis of the individual components or interventions present in the performance matrix. One such component is the priority weighting of target behaviors. The purpose of the current study was to investigate the effect that priority weight manipulation on a performance matrix has on behavioral allocation across target behaviors. Utilizing an alternating treatments design, five participants were exposed to two sets of priority weighting across four target behaviors. Specifically, equal weighting (25% for each behavior) was alternated weekly with a matrix that had prioritized weighting (40%, 40%, 10%, 10%). The goal was to see how high, equal and low weights impact individual performance and how shifting weights may further increase or decrease target behaviors. Results of the intervention will be presented and how these findings inform design of performance scorecards in the future discussed.
 
 
Symposium #317
CE Offered: BACB
Using Celeration to Examine Police Killing and Crimes Against Humanity
Sunday, May 26, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Cuvee
Area: CSS/OBM; Domain: Translational
Chair: Kent A. Corso (Xcelerate Innovations, LLC)
Discussant: Mark P. Groskreutz (Southern Connecticut State University)
CE Instructor: Kent A. Corso, Psy.D.
Abstract:

The authors use the standard celeration chart to examine behavioral phenomenon that are not only underappreciated in behavior analysis, but in America more generally. Police suicide and killing and nefarious behaviors including terrorist attacks, hate crimes and school shootings have unfortunately become commonplace in America. But the application of science to analyzing these is far less common, making solutions to these elusive. While newspapers print trends of various crimes against humanity, these are not always listed in the most helpful and accurate terms for understanding what story the data are telling. One paper examines recent trends in use of force and people killed by police. An update is offered regarding current acceleration or deceleration rates of people killed by police and law enforcement officers who have died via suicide. The second paper depicts a more meaningful depiction of trends in school shootings, hate crimes and terrorist attacks to help convey a more cogent conclusion about these phenomenon. By applying behavior analysis to these phenomenon, there is potential for the field of ABA to develop solutions. The authors use celeration to understand and interpret these trends over the last several years. Broader implications of these trends and possible solutions are discussed.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): celeration, hate crimes, law enforcement, school shootings
Target Audience:

The audience is intermediate to advanced ABA practitioners.

Learning Objectives: 1. Describe the trends in police killing. 2. Explain why analyzing the trend of a behavior in celeration has advantages to analyzing the rate. 3. Use celeration trends to make new meaning out of data on crimes against humanity.
 
Examining Law Enforcement Through a Behavior Analytic Lens
(Applied Research)
AMY D. WIECH (Autism Behavior Consulting)
Abstract: Behavior analysts must remind the world that journalism is not SCIENCE. It breeds bias! By misleading the world with statistics and fake news, they are fueling a crisis that puts our law enforcement officers and country at increased risk. In 2015, Miller suggested that less than 1.5% of police-citizen encounters result in Use of Force (UOF) and media reports highlight these incidents and give attention to those 1.5% of encounters, especially those that result in death (Miller, 2015). The purpose of this presentation is to examine recent trends in use of force and people killed by police. An update is presented on acceleration or deceleration of people killed by police, and law enforcement officers who have died by suicide. The authors suggest behavior analytic solutions to improving officer health and wellness, and relations between police and the broader community, while recommending methods to help law enforcement bolster its field with ABA. This presenter will encourage behavior analysts to disseminate behavior analysis to law enforcement agencies in their regions and contribute to this much needed area by partnering with police agencies in their region or locale. Paths for behavior analysts to support the field of law enforcement will be proposed.
 

Using Celeration to Examine Crimes Against Humanity

(Applied Research)
KENT A. CORSO (Xcelerate Innovations, LLC), Abigail B. Calkin (Calkin Consulting Center), James Meador (Graduate student), Michael Kondis (Xcelerate Innovations, LLC), Kristopher R Kielbasa (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract:

School shootings, hate crimes and terrorist attacks appear to be on the rise despite numerous public efforts to increase awareness of these deviant behavioral phenomena. Examining the celeration of these offers an advantage to traditional graphing methods because celeration is a derivative of rate and serves as an earlier indicator of change. Using the standard celeration chart, the author illustrates how these detrimental social phenomena are changing over the last several years and what behavior analysts can offer in the way of contributions to preventing or decreasing these. The lack of applied science used to target reduction of these behaviors are a tragedy, particularly considering the effectiveness of ABA interventions, be they at the organizational, community or population level or the individual level (e.g., individual treatment). Uniquely, standard celeration enables professionals to compare the trends of phenomenon that may not be measured in the same unit. This is because celeration is a standard property of all behavior change and underlies the trends. The author concludes by suggesting how standard celeration may offer previously unrealized solutions to understanding and curbing these phenomenon.

 
 
Panel #318
CE Offered: BACB
Engineering the Contingency Fields for Developing Early Attending, Joint Attending and Social Referencing Repertoires
Sunday, May 26, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 1-3
Area: DEV/AUT; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Richard E. Laitinen, Ph.D.
Chair: Richard E. Laitinen (Personalized Accelerated Learning Systems (PALS))
PER HOLTH (OsloMet -- Oslo Metropolitan University)
MARTHA PELAEZ (Florida International University)
RICHARD E. LAITINEN (Personalized Accelerated Learning Systems (PALS))
Abstract:

This discussion cover both conceptual issues that drive the formulation and analysis of attending, joint attending and social referencing repertoires and provide video demonstrations of behavioral operations that work to establish such repertoires in individuals in which they are weak or missing. The primary focus of the discussion is to provide practitioners with current intervention tools and approaches to effect exponential change and growth in clients.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

BCBAs and clinical practitioners providing services to young children with autism and ASD

Learning Objectives: 1. To provide a conceptual model for analyzing and planning intervention programming to address deficits in attending, joint attending and social referencing repertoires and behavioral cusps. 2. To provide explicit examples of effective interventions to address each area of deficit performance. 3. To provide a model of program management that effects the establishment and extension of propaedeutic behavior cusps.
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #319
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

Embodied Cognition in Theory and Practice: How Behavior Becomes Thought

Sunday, May 26, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: EAB; Domain: Theory
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Peter R. Killeen, Ph.D.
Chair: Peter R. Killeen (Arizona State University)
ARTHUR GLENBERG (Arizona State University)

Arthur Glenberg is a professor in the Department of Psychology at Arizona State University, an emeritus professor at the University of Wisconsin-Madison, and a member of INICO at the Univeridad de Salamanca. He does basic research in cognitive psychology and cognitive neuroscience with a focus on developing theories of embodied cognition in the areas of language, education, and social processes. In addition, he and his colleagues at ASU have developed an embodied reading comprehension intervention (EMBRACE) for English language learning children in the early elementary grades (see: http://resourcecenters2015.videohall.com/presentations/565.) His work has been funded by NIH, IES, and NSF. Dr. Glenberg has authored a textbook (in its third edition), an edited volume, and over 100 peer-reviewed articles. As of October 2018, these publications have been cited almost 20,000 times with an h-index of 61.

Abstract:

A basic principle of embodied cognition is that all cognitive processes depend on behavioral and neural systems of action (goal-directed behavior such as operant responding), perception, and emotion. I will illustrate this principle with demonstrations and data from fields of perception, developmental psychology, social psychology, and cognitive psychology. After developing the case for cognition being embodied, I will discuss applications in teaching reading comprehension, second language learning, physics, and mathematics. In each domain, substantial improvements in learning occur when the body is appropriately engaged.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the basic principle of embodied cognition; (2) describe two or more illustrations of this principle; (3) describe applications of this principle to enhance learning; (4) generate novel applications of this principle.
 
 
Symposium #322
CE Offered: BACB
Data and Systems in the Schools: From Initial Problem-Solving to Maintenance
Sunday, May 26, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Fairmont, Third Level, Crystal
Area: EDC/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Megan G. Kunze (University of Oregon)
Discussant: Rebecca Renee Eldridge (Western Michigan University; Kalamazoo Autism Clinic )
CE Instructor: Allaina Douglas, M.A.
Abstract: The fidelity with which evidence-based practices are implemented is a major driver of students’ educational outcomes (Gersten et al., 2009). This symposium includes two research studies examining the training of school staff in the implementation of evidence-based practices using methods consistent with behavioral skills training. The first study examines a critical area for future growth related to service provision for students with Autism Spectrum Disorders in public education settings: professional development (in a multi-tiered model) for paraprofessionals. The second study examines the application of research validated decision making models from positive behavioral supports to literacy supports as implemented by general education teachers. Both studies examine the application of behaviorally based practices to areas of significant need and potential impact within the current landscape of educational practice. Further, these studies share an element of seeking to build scalable models of implementation for behavioral practices in educational settings. Together, these studies demonstrate the breadth of potential application of behavioral principles within educational contexts ranging from supporting the integrity of specific behavior supports to supporting the implementation of behaviorally based systems.
Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience: Teachers, BCBAs in the schools, Behavior specialists, PBIS
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: 1. Be familiar with data collection tools during grade-level team meetings. 2. Describe a multi-tiered system of support for paraprofessionals. 3. List key elements needed during trainings of the TIPs model
 

Team-Initiated Problem Solving During Academic Grade-Level Meetings

PAUL MICHAEL MENG (University of Oregon), Robert H. Horner (University of Oregon)
Abstract:

The fidelity with which evidence-based practices are implemented is a topic of critical concern in education. How to efficiently implement data-based decision making with fidelity has been a topic of concern in the literature related to response to intervention, positive behavioral interventions and supports, as well as other areas. One research-validated practice for implementing data-based decision making with fidelity in the context of problems related to problematic social behavior in schools is Team-initiated Problem Solving (TIPS). The present study examined the extension of this technology to decision making related to academic supports. One grade level team participated in a pilot research study examining the effects of training in TIPS on their problem solving performance during grade-level team meetings. The team was observed twice, once before and after training. The training was an abbreviated version of the full TIPS training which included; (1) Meeting Foundations, (2) Precision Problem Statements, and (3) Using Quantitative Data. Results indicate that the team improved the accuracy of their data analysis as well as the efficiency of their problem solving behavior, as indicated by scores on the Decision Observation, Recording and Analysis (DORA-II) direct observation tool.

 

Using a Multi-Tiered Consultation Model to Increase Fidelity of Behavior Support Plans for Paraprofessionals in a Preschool Setting

ALLAINA DOUGLAS (University of Oregon), Jake John Mahon (University of Oregon), Wendy A. Machalicek (University of Oregon)
Abstract:

Within special education, a reliance on paraprofessionals continues to increase as more students are identified with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) (Bolton & Mayer, 2008). It is critical that classroom personnel are trained to effectively implement evidence-based strategies (Downs & Downs, 2012); however, lack of resources and time often results in low treatment fidelity (Mason, et al., 2017). A multi-level consultation model for training preschool staff will be presented. Four children between three and five years of age, with histories of challenging behavior were included. Classroom staff, including three paraprofessionals and one teacher, were trained on individualized Behavior Support Plans (BSP) using Behavioral Skills Training (BST). Performance was monitored to identify additional supports as needed to maintain treatment fidelity. Results indicate higher levels of staff treatment fidelity following intervention and lower levels of child challenging behavior which maintained over time.

 
 
Special Event #323
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
CREATIVITY: Session 2
Sunday, May 26, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD North
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Chair: Darlene E. Crone-Todd (Salem State University)
CE Instructor: Darlene E. Crone-Todd, Ph.D.
 

CREATIVITY: The Stitching and the Unstitching Revisited: The Creative Tripod

Abstract:

There are no undebated definitions of “creativity” and any definition will reflect how this rich topic is treated. Nearly 20 years ago I discussed how behavior analysis might contribute—or not—to an understanding of creativity. I revisit this topic, expanding on some issues and reconsidering others. As before, I focus on scientific and mathematical accomplishments which tie closely to Weisberg’s placement of creative achievements in the domains of problem-posing and problem-solving. From the massive empirical, theoretical, and historical literature at least three essential and interlocking dimensions of significant creative achievements emerge: talent, expertise, and motivation. I emphasize “interlocking” because the productive expression of each of these elements depends on the others. The role of behavior analysis in these elements is modest, at best. It has nothing to say about talent—and even in some cases might deny its role altogether. As for expertise, with some notable exceptions, behavior analysis has had little to say about the acquisition of truly complex performances; this has been left to other fields. As for motivation, one must go well beyond naïve “pleasure and pain” accounts to more elusive, yet more powerful and pervasive behavior-consequence relations.

 
M. JACKSON MARR (Georgia Tech)
 
M. Jackson (Jack) Marr received a BS degree in 1961 from Georgia Tech where he studied mathematics, physics, engineering, and psychology.  He received a Ph.D. in experimental psychology with a minor in physiology from the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill in 1966. He is professor emeritus of psychology at Georgia Tech where he has taught courses in physiology and behavior, behavioral pharmacology, probability & statistics, and the experimental analysis of behavior. He is one of five founding Fellows of the Association for Behavior Analysis International, a Fellow of Division 25 (Behavior Analysis) and Division 3 (Experimental Psychology) of the American Psychological Association (APA), a Fellow of the Psychonomic Society, and a Federation of Associations in Behavioral and Brain Sciences honoree. He was elected twice to president of the Association for Behavior Analysis International and served twice as president of the Society for the Advancement of Behavior Analysis. He was also president of Division 25 (Behavior Analysis) of APA and the Southeastern Association for Behavior Analysis. He was APA Council member representing Division 25.  He is the past editor of Behavior and Philosophy and continues to serve on its editorial board. He also serves as review editor of the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior. He served as the co-editor of Revista Mexicana de Análisis de la Conducta and as an associate editor of the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior and The Behavior Analyst. He was experimental representative to the executive council of the Association for Behavior Analysis International, served on the Board of Directors of The Society for the Quantitative Analysis of Behavior, and currently serves on the Board of Trustees the Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies. He has been particularly active in the international support and development of behavior analysis in Great Britain, Europe, Mexico, Brazil, China, and the Middle East. He was a Research Fellow in Pharmacology at Harvard Medical School, a visiting professor at the Universidad National Autonoma de Mexico, and the first eminent scholar invited to Jacksonville State University. He was a Navy contractor for Project Sanguine in a study of possible behavioral effects of extremely low frequency electromagnetic fields and an AIEE Senior Fellow at the Naval Aerospace Medical Research Laboratory, where he conducted research on the behavior effects of microwaves and of stimulant drugs on sustained military flight performance. For over 20 years he was involved through NSF grants and other support in the assessment and improvement of engineering education, including instructional design of systems to teach engineering physics. Current scholarly interests include dynamical systems theory, the quantitative analysis of behavior, comparative behavior analysis, and theoretical/conceptual issues in behavioral analysis.
 

CREATIVITY: All Creative Behavior is Operant, But Not All Operant Behavior is Creative

Abstract:

Creativity is goal-directed variation and selection. It is one tool in a problem-solving toolbox. If there are effective algorithms to solve problems, creativity is unnecessary and often counter-productive; few people want creative brain surgeons. The world however is unpredictable, and often algorithms, or learned habit patterns, or well-conditioned operant chains, fail. Then alternative routes to a goal must be found, and efficient production of and effective selection of alternative solution paths constitutes creativity. The pleasure in creative problem solving is so great for some individuals that they become artists, writing novels and composing music and painting scenes, where almost every move sets a problem, and ensuing ones solve it. Creativity itself can be created; there are both algorithms and heuristics that foster it. This talk will outline a number of those, embed them in a behavioral framework, and test your use of them with problems.

 
PETER KILLEEN (Arizona State University)
 
Dr. Peter Killeen is professor of psychology at Arizona State University, and has also been visiting scholar at the University of Texas, Cambridge University, and the Centre for Advanced Study, Oslo. He is a Fellow of the Society of Experimental Psychologists, has held a Senior Scientist Award from the National Institute of Mental Health, has been president of the Society for the Quantitative Analyses of Behavior (from which organization he appropriately received the Poetry in Science Award in 2002), held the American Psychological Association F. J. McGuigan Lectureship on Understanding the Human Mind, and received the Ernest and Josephine Hilgard Award for the Best Theoretical Paper (Killeen & Nash, 2003). Dr. Killeen has made many highly innovative and fundamental contributions to the experimental and quantitative analysis of behavior. His major work includes the development of incentive theory, culminating in the mathematical principles of reinforcement (Behavioural and Brain Sciences, 1994), and the behavioral theory of timing (Psychological Review, 1988). He is the author of 80 peer-reviewed papers, many of which have been heavily cited. He has served on the boards of editors of the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, Behavioural Processes, Journal of Experimental Psychology: Animal Behavior Processes, Psychonomic Bulletin & Review, Psychological Review, Brain & Behavioral Functions, and Comparative Cognition & Behavior Reviews. Dr. Killeen's quantitative and conceptual developments have enriched behavior analysis and the world beyond.
 
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe some of the richness and complexity of creative accomplishments; (2) describe the interlocking roles of talent, expertise, and motivation in creative accomplishments; (3) describe the quite modest role behavior analysis has played, or can play, in addressing creative accomplishments; (4) create a bug list; (5) distinguish lateral and convergent thinking; (6) get the creator and the critic in you under proper stimulus control; (7) outline a more general problem-solving framework, and identify where creativity resides in it; (8) foster play and unfoster rectitude.
 
 
 
Symposium #324
CE Offered: BACB
Steeped in Science: How Behavior Analysts Practice from a Scientific System
Sunday, May 26, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 1/2
Area: PCH/DDA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Jennifer Lynn Hammond (Center for Applied Behavior Analysis (CABA))
CE Instructor: Jennifer Lynn Hammond, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Applied behavior analysis is deeply rooted in the natural sciences – as a natural science, description, prediction, control, objective observation and data-based decision-making necessarily run paramount. The application of our technology to matters of social significance, albeit important, is not complete without consideration of the other aspects that make up a scientific system – namely, the philosophical and theoretical underpinnings that inform our methodology. Baer, Wolf, and Risley (1968) clearly laid out the dimensions of which our applied science should be comprised, while cautioning practitioners against several pitfalls – a critical one being the consideration that: “The differences between applied and basic research are not differences between that which ‘discovers’ and that which merely ‘applies’ what is already known. Both endeavors ask what controls the behavior under study.” As behavior analysts working in applied realms, area we continuing to operate within the foundations of our scientific system? This symposium will be comprised of three papers directly addressing this question.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Practitioners, students, basic and applied researchers

Learning Objectives: (1) Attendees will identify four components that make up a scientific system. (2) Attendees will describe how operating from a scientist-practitioner model may improve the provision of their services in practice. (3) Attendees will describe at least one method by which the application of behavior analytic services may be enhanced via consideration of our theoretical and philosophical underpinnings.
 

Got Science?: Science, It Does a Practitioner Good

(Theory)
HEIDI EILERS (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract:

A scientific system is comprised of four parts (a) philosophy, (b) theory, (c) methodology, and (d) technology. The strength of a scientific system can be evaluated by its ability to have increasingly organized statements that are consistent and cohesive and allow for depth and precision (Hayes, Hayes, & Reese, 1988; Pepper, 1942). With the recent increase in demand for applied behavior analytic services, an emphasis has been placed on training in technology with little emphasis on the philosophical and theoretical roots of behavior analysis. All four parts of a scientific system inform and influence each other. As such, it can be argued that not only is the scientific system weakened, but the technology being used and the methodology used to analyze the effectiveness of technology are also weakened by not developing scientist practitioners who have an understanding of the entire scientific system. This presentation will describe areas in which our ability to describe behavioral phenomenon with precision and scope has been deterred by the lack of training in philosophy and theory, and how this has also impacted the quality of our technology.

 
A Case for Matching as a Foundation for Practice
(Service Delivery)
BRITTNEY MICHAELS (Center for Applied Behavior Analysis), Benjamin Thomas Heimann (Center for Applied Behavior Analysis), Rachel Taylor (Center for Applied Behavior Analysis), Richard Colombo (Center for Applied Behavior Analysis), Jennifer Lynn Hammond (Center for Applied Behavior Analysis (CABA))
Abstract: Choice, or the allocation of responding under a concurrent-schedules arrangement, has been a topic of interest in applied behavior analysis since the earliest years of the field (Ferster & Skinner, 1957) and has been thoroughly explored in foundational research resulting in a quantifiable theory of response allocation, or matching (Herrnstein, 1961; 1974). This foundation of research has since been adapted to applied settings to address the treatment of problem behavior (Myerson & Hale, 1984; Fisher & Mazur, 1997) and has been documented as an explanatory framework for the choices of typical individuals, as well as those with developmental disabilities (Borrero & Vollmer, 2002; Vollmer & Bourret, 2000). Despite this body of established research, the use of the matching law is no longer identified as a necessary skill for practitioners as indicated by the Behavior Analyst Certification Board’s (BACB's) removal of it from the BCBA/BCaBAs Task List (BACB, 5th edition, 2017). The purpose of this presentation is to challenge this de-emphasis of established research – arguing that an understanding of choice, informed by matching, is not only an invaluable skill for any clinician but a foundational principle that will improve practice.
 
Rethinking Loss: Its Potential Effects on the Value of a Reinforcer
(Applied Research)
RICHARD COLOMBO (Center for Applied Behavior Analysis), Henry D. Schlinger (California State University, Los Angeles), Rachel Taylor (Center for Applied Behavior Analysis)
Abstract: Reinforcer value is a long-studied topic in behavior analysis. Previous researchers have examined the various conditions that produce reliable changes in reinforcer value. Recently, Miller, DeLeon, Toole, Lieving, and Allman (2016) found differences in the behavior of participants who were either exposed to a contingent (CD) or non-contingent (NCD) token-delivery condition that preceded a gambling task. Participants in the CD group (associated with more work) did not gamble as much and obtained more money in the end, relative to those in the NCD group, thereby demonstrating that contingent effort produced a beneficial change in behavior. The authors recommended that future researchers explore how other seemingly aversive events (effort, delay, loss) affect reinforcer value. The purpose of this investigation is to evaluate the role of loss contingencies by comparing progressive ratio breakpoints across two conditions: earn only and earn plus loss. This presentation will outline the literature regarding reinforcer value, discuss preliminary data on the topic of loss and reinforcer value, and propose how the application of reinforcement as an intervention might be enhanced through the consideration of specific aversive arrangements.
 
 
Invited Tutorial #325
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
Discrimination Training in Action: Lessons Learned From the Lab
Sunday, May 26, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom EF
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research
PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP CE Offered. CE Instructor: Carol Pilgrim, Ph.D.
Chair: Cynthia M. Anderson (May Institute)
Presenting Authors: : CAROL PILGRIM (University of North Carolina Wilmington)
Abstract:

Three- and four-term contingencies describe uniquely fundamental units in the analysis of behavior, as most operant responses are emitted in changing environments, and few are reinforced equally often in the presence of all environmental conditions. The stage is thus set for the development of stimulus control over virtually all everyday behavior. Familiarity with the fundamentals of establishing discriminative control should hold special significance for applied behavior analysts. Indeed, stimulus control procedures provide the basis for therapeutic efforts ranging from standard teaching techniques (e.g., prompting), to pivotal forms of assessment and training (e.g., verbal behavior interventions), to the ultimate goal of programming for treatment generalization. In short, learning to identify possible sources of stimulus control, and to increase or decrease them as needed, is essential to effective service delivery. The experimental behavior-analytic literature has much to offer practitioners who wish to understand more about the stimulus-control principles and findings that can improve intervention effectiveness. This tutorial will review some of the fundamental lessons of stimulus control that have emerged from decades of careful laboratory research.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students. 

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe basic strategies for establishing simple discriminations; (2) describe basic strategies for establishing conditional discriminations; (3) describe some common pitfalls in discrimination training, and their possible remedies; (4) describe contributions from the experimental analysis of behavior to effective practice.
 
CAROL PILGRIM (University of North Carolina Wilmington)

Carol Pilgrim, Ph.D., is Professor of Psychology at the University of North Carolina, Wilmington.  Her primary research interests are in the analysis, application, and conceptual treatment of relational stimulus control, particularly stimulus equivalence.  Carol is a former editor of The Behavior Analyst and associate editor of the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior and The Behavior Analyst.  She has served as President of the Association for Behavior Analysis, International (ABAI), the Society for the Advancement of Behavior Analysis, Division 25 of the American Psychological Association (APA), and the Southeastern Association for Behavior Analysis.  She is a fellow of ABAI and of Division 25 of APA, and she has been honored with the North Carolina Board of Governors Teaching Excellence Award (2003), the UNCW Faculty Scholarship Award (2000) and Graduate Mentor Award (2008), and the ABAI Student Committee Outstanding Mentor Award (2006) and Distinguished Service to Behavior Analysis Award (2017).   

 
 
Invited Paper Session #326
CE Offered: BACB/PSY/QABA

Breaking New Ground: ABA in South Korea

Sunday, May 26, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: TBA; Domain: Theory
Instruction Level: Basic
CE Instructor: Jinhyeok Choi, Ph.D.
Chair: Gabrielle T. Lee (Western University)
JINHYEOK CHOI (Pusan National University)
Dr. Choi is an associate professor of special education and director of the Autism and Developmental Disorder Treatment Center at Pusan National University Hospital, South Korea. He obtained his MA and Ph.D. in Applied Behavior Analysis at Columbia University under the direction of R. Douglas Greer. He also has teaching experiences in the CABAS model of schooling (www.cabasschools.org)at the Fred S. Keller School, Rockland BOCES, and the Faison School for Autism. He has served on the editorial boards of 10 journals including Korean Journal of Behavior Analysis and Behavior Support, has published over 50 research articles, and has published three books on behavior analysis and special education in South Korea. He is the recipient of the 2018 award for the Outstanding New Scholar by the Pusan National University, and the 2018 Commendation Award by the Ministry of Health and Welfare, South Korea.
Abstract:

Applied behavior analysis (ABA) is the “cutting-edge and traditional” application of behavioral science in real-world settings such as clinics and schools with the aim of improving socially important behavior. ABA has been active in South Korea for the last 10 years. More and more medical doctors, teachers, therapists, and stakeholders are interested in ABA beyond “behavior modification.” The science and practice of a behavioral approach has taken hold in South Korea in a variety of ways, including (a) Positive Behavior Support in schools, (b) legislation for people with developmental disabilities, and (c) training behavior analysts via graduate-school level programs. In this presentation I describe a significant growth in the number of clinics/schools using ABA, BCBA’s practicing, and ABA training programs, in South Korea. Additionally, the current limitations and the future of ABA in South Korea are discussed.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: Pending
 
 
Symposium #327
CE Offered: BACB
Variables Affecting Bidirectional Naming
Sunday, May 26, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD South
Area: VBC/EAB; Domain: Translational
Chair: Torunn Lian (OsloMet)
Discussant: Caio F. Miguel (California State University, Sacramento)
CE Instructor: Caio F. Miguel, Ph.D.
Abstract: Common bidirectional naming may be defined as the process by which stimuli become members of the same class as they come to evoke common speaker and listener behavior (Miguel, 2016). It is demonstrated, for example, when novel speaker (tact) and listener relations are shown to emerge following exposure to contiguous presentation of verbal and nonverbal stimuli. The studies in this symposium examined the effects of variables that have been hypothesized to affect the emergence of new speaker and listener relations following contiguous stimulus presentation. First, Olaff and Holth examined the effects of multiple-response exemplar instruction on the emergence of both speaker and listener behavior, and additionally assessed the effects of repeated probing. Second, Oliveira et al. examined the effects of blocking echoic response during stimulus exposure on the emergence of the speaker component of bidirectional naming. Implications for the conceptual analysis of bidirectional naming and its sources will be discussed.
Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): Listener behavior, Naming, Tacting, Verbal behavior
Target Audience: Behavior analysts; graduate students; EAB scientists
 
Bidirectional Naming as a Result of Repeated Probing and Multiple-Response Exemplar Training
(Applied Research)
HEIDI SKORGE OLAFF (OsloMet - Oslo Metropolitan University), Per Holth (OsloMet -- Oslo Metropolitan University)
Abstract: Bidirectional naming (BiN) as a higher order operant is observed when novel speaker and listener responses emerge from incidental observations of others’ tacts. The current study assessed 1) whether repeated probes affect the acquisition of BiN, 2) the effects of multiple response-exemplar training (MRET) which entailed rotation of stimuli and antecedents within the same session on the acquisition of BiN, and 3) whether BiN maintained one month after final probes. We used a multiple probe design across three novel stimulus sets. For six participants, following two subsequent baseline probes, MRET was conducted with novel stimulus sets, while baseline-probes continued for the remaining participants. The results showed that repeated probes improved BiN for four participants. The present experiment, support MRET as a successful approach to produce BiN. Maintenance of listener behavior was observed for seven participants, while the emission of both speaker and listener behaviors (full BiN) was observed for three participants. The results may have implications for how BiN should be probed, as repeated probing may interfere with the independent variable.
 
Effects of Blocking Echoic Responses on Tact Emergence Following Contiguous Stimulus Presentation
(Basic Research)
JULIANA SEQUEIRA SEQUEIRA CESAR DE OLIVEIRA (Texas Christian University), Reagan Elaine Cox (Texas Christian University), Alexandra Miller (Texas Christian University), Anna I. Petursdottir (Texas Christian University)
Abstract: Covert echoic responses have been hypothesized to play a role in the emergence of the speaker component of naming, but experimental evidence is weak. This study examined the effects of blocking echoic responses to the verbal stimulus during contiguous stimulus presentation on the emergence of tact control over vocal responses. Preschool-age children were exposed to repeated presentations of national flags and associated country names. In the echoic condition, the participants were instructed to echo the country name presented in each trial. In the interference condition, they were instructed to name the background color on which the flag was presented in each trial, which was presumed to interfere with echoic responding. In the no-response-requirement (NRR) condition, participants were not instructed to make any responses. Tacts were probed under extinction after each session. Preliminary results indicate that exposure to contiguously presented verbal and visual stimuli resulted in some degree of emergent tact control in all conditions for 3 of 4 participants, and that at least after the first few sessions of exposure, there was no reliable differentiation between conditions. We will go on to assess the effects of more extended exposure on the speed with which mastery is achieved.
 
 
Symposium #328
CE Offered: BACB/NASP
Engineering Public Educational Programs for Students With Autism: Replications of a Training Model
Sunday, May 26, 2019
4:00 PM–5:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: AUT/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Michael Miklos (Pennsylvania Training and Technical Assistance Network)
Discussant: Judah B. Axe (Simmons University)
CE Instructor: Judah B. Axe, M.S.
Abstract:

Since a free and appropriate public education is mandated for students with autism spectrum disorder, it is critical that in-service teachers receive specialized training and support relevant to establishing and maintaining effective instructional practice . Achieving outcomes for students with autism in public education programs requires engineering of multiple aspects of the instructional environment. The Pennsylvania Training and Technical Assistance Network Autism Initiative (PaTTAN AI) has implemented a range of teacher supports that have altered educational practice in over 600 classrooms across Pennsylvania. Content of this symposium will address the rationale for structured teaching derived from a behavior analysis that is both individualized across a range of student functional levels and able to be replicated across a range of educational settings. Replications of the PATTAN AI system of training in Seminole County, Florida and in an area centered in Missouri will be described. Updates of efforts in Pennsylvania will be summarized. The update will include details that continue to demonstrate a template for effective instructional practice.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Behavior Analysts, School Psychologists, Teachers, School Administrators

Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will identify components of effective instructional arrangements for school programs serving students with autism. 2. Participants will describe the relationship between implementation criteria on the PaTTAN site review form and measurable student outcomes. 3. Participants will note commonalities in training components across replications of a system of technical support in Seminole County, Fl, School districts in the Mid-western region of the USA, and across Pennsylvania public schools.
 
Engineering Autism Interventions in Public Schools: Why Science Isn't Enough
MICHAEL MIKLOS (Pennsylvania Training and Technical Assistance Network), Amiris Dipuglia (PaTTAN/ Autism Initiative)
Abstract: As described by Henry Petroski (2010), engineering involves using the principles of the natural sciences to guide the design of structures that serve a practical purpose. However, established science may not be able to provide direct guidance on each circumstance in which a practical problem must be solved. While science and scientific principles must be honored when designing an effective educational environment, it will be suggested that the practice of behavior analysis in such environments is more akin to engineering. This session will describe the complexity of school environments that shape educational outcomes. A single caseload and school conditions of one autism support teacher will be reviewed in detail. Supporting teachers functioning in such complex situations is often a responsibility of behavior analysts. It will be suggested that behavior analytic practice is schools must be guided by a model that allows for effective adaptation of science to locally complex educational circumstances that require some degree of effective engineering.
 

Increasing Access to Evidence-Based Training for Special Education Staff in the Mid-Western USA and Resulting Student Outcomes

STACEY MARTIN (Summit Behavioral Services)
Abstract:

Access to training on evidence-based practices is critical for teachers to meet the expectation of implementation in their special education classrooms. Appropriate training on scientifically validated interventions is lacking at both the university and school district levels (Morrier, Hess, & Heflin, 2011; Lang et al., 2010). A wide array of online and print resources exists to assist teachers in their selection of evidence-based interventions (Alexander, Ayres, & Smith, 2014). However, their choices of teaching practices are often not evidence-based. (Hess, Morrier, Heflin, & Ivey, 2008: National Research Council, 2001; Stahmer, Collings, & Palinkas, 2005). Traditional teacher training methods are inadequate in that they typically involve solely written material and/or lecture formats (Bethune & Wood, 2013). A replication of the PaTTAN Autism Initiative model for delivering rigorous training to special education staff which incorporates evidence-based instructional practices has been undertaken in numerous districts in the Midwest in order to train teachers, paraprofessionals, and support staff how to deliver intensive, effective, evidence-based instruction to students on the autism spectrum. During this session, information on efforts to increase teacher access to training on evidence-based practices, data on staff training outcomes, site reviews and student skill acquisition will be shared.

 
Transformation of a Florida School District: Scaling Up a Behavioral Approach to Public Education
SANDRA MICHELLE GUFFEE (Seminole County Public Schools)
Abstract: The Every Student Succeeds Act (ESSA) calls for use of evidenced-based interventions. Observations of classroom practice, however, have suggested that the education received by many students with disabilities does not take advantage of that knowledge (Kauffman, 1996; Moody, Vaughn, Hughes, & Fischer, 2000: Wagner, Blackorby, Cameto, & Newman, 1994). Over the past four years, Seminole County Public Schools (SCPS) has infused a behavioral approach into the traditional instructional pedagogy, creating a significant merger between clinical interventions for children and youth, and instructional strategies for students with Autism and related disabilities. A replication of the PaTTAN AI model for training, instructional practice, data collection, and fidelity checks using the site review has been utilized starting with nine classrooms in 2015 and scaling up over four years to 74 classrooms. This session will cover the transformation process that has taken place to establish the current service model. A review of training, site review, and student outcome data will be presented.
 

Reaching a Broad Consumer Base: Recent Advances and Outcomes from the Pennsylania Training and Technical Assistance Network's Autism Initiative Applied Behavior Analysis Supports

AMIRIS DIPUGLIA (PaTTAN/ Autism Initiative), Michael Miklos (Pennsylvania Training and Technical Assistance Network), Willow Hozella (Pennsylvania Training and Technical Assistance Net)
Abstract:

Over the past 15 years, The Pennsylvania Training and Technical Assistance Network Autism Initiative Applied Behavior Analysis Supports (PATTAN AI ABA) has provided ongoing training and technical support to approximately 600 school teams across the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. The system of support has provided an empirical approach to instructional design and delivery that addresses both structural and analytical aspects of instructional arrangements. The system addresses implementation of practice across various levels of educational practice including classroom organization, assessment and data-based decision making, instructional materials, instructional delivery, parent training and engagement, establishing and maintaining instructional control, teacher training, treatment integrity and effective local consultative support. The training model has been adapted to local needs and circumstances allowing structured interventions to be delivered across age level of students (from preschool through graduation) and students who present skill sets representative of various levels of severity in relation to Autism Spectrum Disorders. The session will provide summary descriptions of current and longitudinal training and technical support outcomes across training competencies, consultative effectiveness, and student outcomes.

 
 
Symposium #329
CE Offered: BACB
Increasing the Feasibility of Treatment for Problem Behavior and Evaluating Treatment Outcomes
Sunday, May 26, 2019
4:00 PM–5:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom C
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jennifer N. Fritz (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
Discussant: Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute)
CE Instructor: Brian D. Greer, Ph.D.
Abstract:

During function-based treatment of severe problem behavior, caregivers may be unable to ignore or implement extinction consistently and may find it difficult to reinforce appropriate behavior immediately or on dense schedules of reinforcement. Interventions that address these issues are critical for maintaining treatment effects in home and community settings when caregivers are responsible for implementing the intervention. A growing body of research on treatment of problem behavior without extinction addresses the former issue, and various approaches to reinforcement schedule thinning after teaching an appropriate, alternative response addresses the latter. Furthermore, caregivers’ experience of problem behavior extends beyond simply dealing with the rate or duration of responding, and research that explores the other aspects of caregivers’ experiences following treatment of problem behavior is needed. This symposium will include studies on treatment without extinction, reinforcement schedule thinning with delay tolerance following FCT, and an evaluation of treatment outcomes beyond the traditional overall percentage reduction in rate or duration of problem behavior. Collectively, these studies will address the feasibility and outcomes of function-based behavioral interventions for severe problem behavior.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): concurrent reinforcement, delay tolerance, FCT, treatment outcome
Target Audience:

Professionals, researchers

 
Competing Stimuli in Treatment of Problem Behavior Maintained by Social-Negative Reinforcement
KYLE DAWSON (University of Houston-Clear Lake; Marquette University), Jennifer N. Fritz (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Desiree Dawson (University of Houston-Clear Lake; Marquette University), Leah Smith (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Kelsey Leadingham (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
Abstract: Treatment of escape-maintained problem behavior has largely focused on providing the functional reinforcer (a brief break) contingent on appropriate alternative behavior, for the absence of the target behavior, or noncontingently. Recent research suggests the use of arbitrary reinforcement can also be effective in decreasing problem behavior maintained by escape from demands. The current study examined the use of a competing stimulus without the use of extinction on problem behavior maintained by social-negative reinforcement in the form of escape from demands and on compliance with demands. The competing stimulus was provided noncontingently and continuously, while problem behavior still resulted in the functional reinforcer (i.e., break from demands). Results suggested the use of a competing stimulus was effective in decreasing problem behavior maintained by escape from demands and did not impede compliance with demands. For two participants, reductions in problem behavior maintained by the competing stimulus was removed. Therefore, this can be an effective, quick treatment with lasting effects for some individuals.
 

Using Results From a Modified Assessment to Teach Functional Communication and Delay Tolerance Responses to Children With Severe Problem Behavior

JESSI REIDY (Marquette University), Mary Halbur (Marquette University), Tiffany Kodak (Marquette University), Samantha Klasek (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Alyssa P. Scott (Marquette University), Xi'an Maya Williams (Marquette University), Courtney Lyn Meyerhofer (Marquette University)
Abstract:

Implementing a function-based intervention that is feasible to implement in the natural environment is a crucial component in behavior analytic interventions for problem behavior. The purpose of the present evaluation was to teach a child and adolescent with autism spectrum disorder to engage in functional communication responses (FCR) and delay-tolerance responses to escape multiple non-preferred tasks and/or gain access to preferred tangible and edible items. Following acquisition of the targeted FCRs, participants were taught a delay-tolerance response. Thereafter, we introduced delay-tolerance steps (i.e., walking part way to the garage before taking a break, working for a short period prior to obtaining a tangible) to successively reach the terminal delay goals identified by family members (e.g., walking to the bus stop, waiting 10 min for a requested tangible item). The intervention was efficacious in teaching both participants to engage in multiple FCRs and delay-tolerance responses. Additionally, the rate of problem behavior decreased during the delay tolerance steps that included completion of activities and the wait periods, and terminal delay goals were achieved for multiple skills.

 

A Summary and Evaluation of Using Tolerance Training With Children With Severe Problem Behavior

ANLARA MCKENZIE (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Nicole Lynn Hausman (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Molly K Bednar (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Meagan K. Gregory (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract:

Functional communication training (FCT) is a common intervention employed with children with Autism Spectrum Disorder who will engage in problem behavior to gain access to desired reinforcement. A common problem with FCT in the natural environment is the caregiver’s inability to reinforce appropriate communication immediately or on an FR1 schedule. Tolerance training as described by Hanley, Jin, Vanselow, and Hanratty (2014) is a method to increase a client’s acceptance of delays to or denials of reinforcement during periods caregivers are unable to respond to communication or when the desired reinforcer is not available. However, few studies have employed these procedures with clients that engage in severe topographies of problem behavior (e.g., problem behavior that causes injury to themselves or others). We replicated and extended previous literature by conducting variations of tolerance training with children and adolescents admitted to an inpatient hospital for assessment and treatment of severe problem behavior using a reversal design. Results indicated that tolerance training is generally an effective method in reducing problem behavior related to delayed or denied reinforcement with these clients. Possible mechanisms for these results (e.g., differing methods per individual client) are discussed.

 

Beyond Percent Reduction: A Consecutive Case Review Evaluating Outcomes From a Severe Behavior Day Treatment Model

NADRATU NUHU (Marcus Autism Center; Emory University School of Medicine), Joanna Lomas Mevers (Marcus Autism Center; Emory University School of Medicine), Jamison Keenum (Marcus Autism Center; Children’s Healthcare of Atlanta), Colin S. Muething (Marcus Autism Center; Emory University School of Medicine), Mindy Christine Scheithauer (Marcus Autism Center; Emory University School of Medicine), Nathan Call (Marcus Autism Center; Emory University School of Medicine)
Abstract:

Behavior analysts typically use percent reduction of problem behavior as a primary outcome measure when evaluating intervention effectiveness for the treatment of problem behavior (Scheithauer, Muething, Silva, Gerencser, Krantz, & Call, 2018). However, families of individuals who engage in severe problem behavior are likely to experience a number of outcomes beyond what is captured by percent reduction. To date, few researchers have systematically evaluated the broader impact of behavior interventions, beyond the observed reduction of problem behavior, on the lives of patients and their families. The purpose of the current study was to conduct a consecutive case series analysis of patients that were seen in a severe behavior day treatment program over five years. The current study examined the use of indirect assessments, combined with data from treatment evaluations, to assess the global impact of problem behavior interventions on families’. Indirect measures include Behavior Problem Index and Parental Stress Index. The current study includes data from two time points during the admission: pre-treatment and post-treatment. Overall, investigators found discrepancies between outcome measures. Indirect measures on other domains of functioning may provide valuable information regarding the global impact of interventions used to treat severe problem behavior.

 
 
Symposium #330
CE Offered: BACB
A Deeper Examination of Social Validity and its Role in Clinical Practice
Sunday, May 26, 2019
4:00 PM–5:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Lobby Level, Plaza Ballroom AB
Area: AUT/CSS; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Sonia Levy (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Discussant: Diana J. Walker (Trinity Services/Illinois Crisis Prevention Network)
CE Instructor: Cameron Mittelman, M.A.
Abstract:

While many would agree that social validity plays an important role in the field of applied behavior analysis, the degree to which social validation is incorporated into all facets of clinical practice is mixed. Furthermore, variations exist in the exact manner in which social validity is assessed and the extent to which the results of social validity assessments are properly used by practitioners (Schwartz & Baer, 1991). The purpose of this symposium is to expand the audience’s understanding of the very idea of social validity and to provide further considerations for how clinicians can utilize social validity in their practice. The first presentation will discuss social validity from a conceptual standpoint, thoroughly examining Wolf’s (1978) description. The second presentation will provide a review of the extent to which social validity was assessed for stereotypic behavior in two major behavior analytic journals. The third presentation will include a description of how social validity is assessed and utilized in a clinic setting for children diagnosed with various developmental disabilities. The final presentation will discuss the relation between social validity and diversity, and the ways in which culture impacts social validity assessment. The symposium will conclude with a discussion from Dr. Diana Walker.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Cultural Considerations, Diversity Issues, Social Validity
Target Audience:

The target audience is current practitioners who work with clients to change behavior. This symposium is also for college or university instructors teaching behavior analysis to students who may be able to incorporate information from this symposium into their lessons.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the concept of social validity and state its importance in clinical practice, (2) state ways in which socially validity may be assessed and ways in which the results of such assessments can affect clinical decisions, and (3) describe how cultural differences may affect social validity and impact the ways in which it may be assessed.
 

Social Validity: What it is and Why We Need it

CAMERON MITTELMAN (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract:

Wolf (1978) suggested three elements of the behavior change process for which social validity can be examined: the social significance of the goals, the social appropriateness of the procedures, and the social importance of the effects. Though few would argue against the value of social validity, the extent to which it is assessed and used does not often match its stated importance. For example, Snodgrass et al. (2018) found in their review of six behavior analytic publications across a 12-year period that only 26% of the articles examined discussed social validity. Furthermore, only 6.5% of those articles included an assessment of all three of Wolf’s (1978) areas of social validity. For too many researchers and practitioners, socially validity seems to be considered an afterthought or a footnote rather than as a vital part of the behavior change process. This presentation argues that as applied behavior analysis expands, the deliberate assessment of social validity will become even more important. Specifically, the presentation will elaborate on Wolf’s (1978) conceptualization of social validity and will describe various ways in which social validity can not only be assessed, but ways in which social validity can be deliberately increased.

 
The Social Validity of Intervention for Stereotypic Behavior: A Literature Review
AMY NICOLE LAWLESS (Nationwide Children's Hospital), Joshua Garner (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract: Stereotypic behavior or “stereotypy” refers to any number of behavioral topographies typically maintained by automatic reinforcement. Stereotypy is often a behavior targeted for decrease in many behavior change interventions, particularly for individuals with autism. However, this focus on the reduction and/or replacement of such behavior has drawn criticism, particularly from members of the autism community who often question the social validity of intervening on such behavior. Previous studies (e.g., Carr et al., 1999; Kennedy, 1992; Snodgrass et al., 2018) have examined reports of social validity assessment in the literature, though these reviews have not examined variations in social validity reporting across specific target behaviors. Therefore, the purpose of this presentation is to provide a review of the literature pertaining to stereotypy in two behavior analytic journals. Specifically, the review will examine the frequency of any descriptions of social validity in empirical articles in which stereotypy was one of the target behaviors. The review will include a discussion of the implications of these results, as well as recommendations for how future researchers may evaluate the role of social validity for such behaviors.
 

Social Validity in the Applied Clinical Setting: Making Change That Matters

SONIA LEVY (Integrate Health Services)
Abstract:

What is social validity? And why is it so important? Social validity is typically discussed as the extent to which the target behaviours selected for intervention or change are appropriate, the intervention and procedures used are acceptable, and the extent to which significant change is produced (Cooper, Heron, & Heward, 2007). Simply put, from a clinical standpoint, social validity is the extent to which we create a meaningful change in our client’s lives. Which target behaviour will benefit the client the most? Which procedures are the least intrusive/invasive and most effective? How can we program for this behaviour change to last over time? Through a discussion of client scenarios, this portion of the symposium will focus on how and why social validity should be at the forefront of our clinical decisions and how social validity can and should be incorporated into all aspects of our clinical decision making – from assessments, to program development, to behaviour plan implementation, to parent training, and everything in between.

 

Social Validity in The Applied Setting: Where Culture and Diversity Matter

PADMINI SRIMAN (National Louis University), Jennifer Klapatch Totsch (National Louis University)
Abstract:

From an applied standpoint, social validity is the extent to which we create a meaningful change in our client’s lives. The effects of our interventions are just one measure of social validity; social validity of targets should also be assessed (such as why a clinician and a parent may disagree on how to prioritize targets) as well as the social validity of the procedures (treatment acceptability). In assessing the social validity of all three of those things, cultural differences between clinicians and clients likely impact their individual definitions of socially valid goals, interventions, and outcomes. How do we evaluate clients and incorporate programs that factor the client’s culture and diversity? Which interventions are likely to be accepted and implemented by relevant stakeholders, such as parents? And which programs will be maintained in the client’s natural environment? Through a discussion of various diverse client scenarios, this portion of the symposium will focus on the need for our clients/ culture to be at the forefront of our service delivery and clinical decisions, and how social validity assessments can and should be incorporated into all aspects of that service delivery in order to produce the most meaningful outcomes possible for our clients.

 
 
Symposium #331
CE Offered: BACB
Applied Behavior Analysis With Companion Dogs: Functional Analysis and Preference Assessments
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Alpine 1/2
Area: AAB; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Steven W. Payne (California State University, Fresno)
Discussant: Christy A. Alligood (Disney's Animal Kingdom and University of Florida)
CE Instructor: Christy A. Alligood, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Functional Analysis and Preference Assessments are two methodologies commonly used in Applied Behavior Analysis to identify the functions of problem behavior and the efficacy of reinforcers, respectively, in human subjects. More recently, both of these methods have been applied to non-human animals, including companion and shelter dogs. However, research on these methodologies is limited, and there are questions as to how the efficacy of these procedures will generalize to companion animals. The studies in this symposium sought to further generalize the efficacy of these procedures. The first study in this symposium used functional analyses to identify the function of mouthing in companion dogs, and to use the results to develop function-based treatments. The second study sought to identify the whether paired-stimulus preference assessments or multiple-stimulus-without-replacement preference assessments were more effective and efficient at identifying reinforcers for shelter dog behavior. Implications of this research to companion animal welfare will be discussed.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Dogs, Functional Analysis, Preference Assessment
Target Audience:

The target audience will be those interested in the application and study of functional analysis methodology and preference assessments. Applied Behavior analytic researchers, graduate students, and practitioners should find the content useful.

 

Developing Functional Analysis-Informed Interventions to Reduce Mouthing in Dogs

MINDY WAITE (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee; Marquette University ), Tiffany Kodak (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee; Marquette University ), Samantha Bergmann (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee; University of North Texas ), Caitlin Fulton (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee; University of Nebraska Medical Center )
Abstract:

The most common cause of companion dog relinquishment and non-medical euthanasia is problem behavior emitted by the dog. Mouthing is a relatively common problem behavior observed in pet dogs, and many owners seek to reduce the frequency of the behavior. However, the functions of dog mouthing are unknown; therefore, proposed interventions are based on inferred behavioral functions. As a result, current interventions may lack efficacy or even worsen the behavior. Although the functional analysis is the gold standard for identifying human behavioral functions and developing function-based interventions, its efficacy across animal behaviors is still being explored. This study assessed the validity of the functional analysis for mouthing in companion dogs and tested function-based interventions informed by the results. Participants included three dogs and their owners participating in a functional analysis and intervention assessment. Data indicate that function-based interventions informed by functional analysis results were efficacious for reducing problem mouthing in companion dogs.

 
Preference Assessment With Shelter Dogs
Cintya Toledo Fulgencio (California State University, Fresno), ERIN AUSTIN (California State University, Fresno), Steven W. Payne (California State University, Fresno)
Abstract: Dogs may be relinquished to shelters and unlikely to be adopted if they engage in problem behavior. A successful way to eliminate problem behavior is through training techniques based on behavioral principles. Obedience training with the use of positive reinforcement has been successful in treating problematic behavior by dogs. In order for this method to work, it is essential that the stimuli selected function as reinforcers. A method used to identify potential reinforcers is to use preference assessments. A preference assessment is a systematic method used to identify stimuli that may serve as possible reinforcers by yielding preference hierarchies. Although preference and reinforcer assessments have been successfully used with humans, research with non-human animals is limited. Therefore, the purpose of the study was to compare the efficacy and efficiency of paired-stimulus preference assessment with a multiple-stimulus-without-replacement preference assessment. Results suggested that the results of both preference assessments corresponded with reinforcer assessments, but that the paired-stimulus was the most efficient. Overall, the data showed that while both types of preference assessments were efficacious, paired-stimulus preference assessments were more efficient. Implications for shelter welfare will be discussed.
 
 
Panel #332
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
The Compelling Case for Clinical Prescription: Practical Interventions for Aligning Caregivers and Clinicians
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom B
Area: AUT/OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Gina Chang, Ph.D.
Chair: Kristine Rodriguez (Autism Learning Partners)
GINA CHANG (Autism Learning Partners)
SARAH TORGRIMSON (Autism Learning Partners)
MEGAN ROSE DIMARTINO (Autism Learning Partners)
Abstract:

In the context of medically necessary treatment for Autism Spectrum Disorders, the intensity of service delivery translates to a clinical prescription. The panelists will present a case for level of care recommendations that meet rigorous expectations for effective and efficient progress and that align with best practice literature and the Behavior Analyst Certification Board’s Professional and Ethical Compliance Code. The panel will identify common barriers to best practice in prescription intensity and prescription fulfillment (i.e. full utilization of treatment hours prescribed). Barriers will be categorized as impacted by caregiver availability/adherence or behavior analyst’s competency; the panel will explore successful interventions implemented by supervising clinicians and organizational leaders to improve prescription fulfillment and to align treatment recommendations. At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: create alignment between ethical values and prescription practices, analyze organizational data to identify relevant barriers, and describe 6 barrier-specific interventions that can be implemented immediately to improve prescription adherence.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Behavior Analysts

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: create alignment between ethical values and prescription practices, analyze organizational data to identify relevant barriers, and describe 6 barrier-specific interventions that can be implemented immediately to improve prescription adherence.
Keyword(s): clinical prescription, treatment efficacy, treatment efficiency
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #333
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

The Neuroeconomics of Reinforcement and Choice: From Dopamine to Decision-Making

Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: BPN; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Carla H. Lagorio, Ph.D.
Chair: Carla H. Lagorio (University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire)
PAUL GLIMCHER (New York University)
My post-doctoral training was with in oculomotor physiology. Working with Prof. David Sparks researching the brainstem and mesencephalic nuclei that control eye rotations, I uncovered evidence that structures participating in the execution of saccadic eye movements might be involved in planning those movements as well. Evidence of this type has been accumulating throughout the neuraxis, but few signals have been associated with any one of the covert processes postulated to intervene between sensation and action. As a result, over the past decade my laboratory has focused on the identification and characterization of signals that intervene between the neural processes that engage in sensory encoding and the neural processes that engage movement generations. These are the signals which must, in principle, underlie decision-making. My students and post-docs study these processes using a variety of tools that are drawn from the fields of neuroscience, economics and psychology. Our methodologies thus range from single neuron electrophysiology to fMRI to game theory. In a similar way, the members of my laboratory include scientists with primary training in neurobiology, economics, and psychology. One set of ongoing projects seek to understand how humans and animals make choices in time, a process usually called delay discounting. A second set of projects seeks to understand the contribution of midbrain dopamine systems to the process of valuing alternative courses of actions. A third set of ongoing related projects seeks to understand the role of the basal ganglia in choice. A fourth set of projects seeks to understand the structure of cortical areas involved in action selection both in the face of risk and in the face of ambiguity. The long-term goal of my research is to describe the neural events that underlie behavioral decision-making employing an interdisciplinary approach that is coming to be called "neuroeconomics". Our approach to this problem consolidates mathematical economic approaches to decision-making with traditional neurobiological tools. By using these tools in our physiological analyses we hope to develop a coherent view of how the brain makes decisions
Abstract:

Over the last decade cognitive neuroscientists have revealed the basic mechanisms of both operant and pavlovian conditioning in the mammalian brain. The dopaminergic neurons of the midbrain have been shown to compute a reward prediction error almost exactly as predicted by the psychologists of the 1970s had supposed. These signals implement a precise value computation in which reinforcement gives rise to a stored synaptic representation of the precise value of stimuli and actions. More recently, neuroeconomists have shown how these values are stored, accessed, and compared when humans and animals choose amongst actions. These new insights have validated many of the core tenets to learning theory, while broadly extending our notion of the response to include more representational mechanisms than had been previously supposed.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students. 

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) discuss basic biology of reinforcement learning; (2) explain role of dopmaine in conditioning; (3) describe basic neural circuit for general-purpose decision-making.
 
 
Symposium #334
CE Offered: BACB
Brain Injury: Review of Behavior Analytic Interventions and a Case Demonstration
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 1/2
Area: CBM; Domain: Translational
Chair: Anneka Hofschneider (Centre for Neuro Skills)
Discussant: Megan R. Heinicke (California State University, Sacramento)
CE Instructor: Anneka Hofschneider, M.A.
Abstract:

This symposium will feature two papers pertaining to brain injury and treatment. The first paper will review effective behavior analytic applications and address potential areas of expansion for researchers and practitioners. The second paper will present a case study of a male individual diagnosed with both viral and autoimmune encephalitis presenting with significant problematic behaviors including sexual advances, suicidal ideation, engaging in physical altercations, and frequent crying. Results and limitations based on behavior analytic programming will be reviewed. Implications and future directions will be discussed for both papers.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): brain injury, encephalitis, neurological rehabilitation
Target Audience:

brain injury practitioners; applied researchers

Learning Objectives: First, attendees will be able to describe functional assessment and function-based intervention procedures that have been shown to effectively decrease challenging behavior in survivors of traumatic brain injury. Second, attendees will be able to identify medical and behavioral symptoms of viral and/or autoimmune encephalitis. Third, attendees will be able to describe behavior analytic strategies addressing treatment of encephalitis including medical and treatment complexities.
 

Behavioral Interventions for Reducing Maladaptive Behaviors in the Traumatic Brain Injury Community: Opportunities to Expand Behavior Analytic Practice

(Service Delivery)
LAUREN SERVELLON (University of Southern California; FirstSteps for Kids), Jonathan J. Tarbox (University of Southern California; FirstSteps for Kids)
Abstract:

According to the Centers for Disease Control (CDC), it is estimated that 2.5 million Americans sustain a traumatic brain injury (TBI) that results in hospitalizations, long-term disability, and even death, with approximately 5.3 million men, women, and children currently living with a TBI-related disability. TBI occurs when there is sudden trauma or force upon the brain and can result in changes to behavior, emotion, motor and executive functioning. There is limited research supporting the use of behavioral approaches in the traumatic brain injury community, however existing research suggests that behavioral interventions are effective in decreasing maladaptive behaviors for traumatic brain injury survivors. This paper reviews research on behavioral interventions to reduce maladaptive behaviors in individuals with traumatic brain injury and suggests directions for expanding behavior analytic research and practice in this critically needed area.

 

Behavior Analytic Interventions for Treatment of Herpes Simplex Virus 1 Meningeal Encephalitis and N-methyl-D-aspartate Receptor Encephalitis

(Service Delivery)
ANNEKA HOFSCHNEIDER (Centre for Neuro Skills), Chris Persel (Centre for Neuro Skills)
Abstract:

This paper reviews behavior analytic applications with a 34-year-old male diagnosed with both Herpes Simplex Virus (HSV) 1 meningeal encephalitis and N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) receptor encephalitis in a post-acute Neurorehabilitation program. Neurobehavioral problems included socially inappropriate behaviors (i.e., sexually aberrant behaviors), excessive eating, initiating verbal and physical altercations, exiting therapeutic area, emotional lability (i.e., crying), and suicidal ideation. Treatment package included significant antecedent modifications, differential reinforcement of other behavior, contingent access to normalized setting, and brief over-correction procedures. Cooperation at admission improved from 47% to 100% at discharge. Socially inappropriate behaviors also improved from 63% at admission to 0% at discharge. Data and graphical analysis along with case specifics, insurance and treatment hindrance, and general limitations will be presented.

 
 
Panel #336
CE Offered: BACB
A Strategic Plan for Expanding Behavioral Science Research on Climate Change
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Cuvee
Area: CSS; Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: Holly Seniuk, Ph.D.
Chair: Holly Seniuk (University of Nevada, Reno)
ANTHONY BIGLAN (Oregon Research Institute)
JULIA H. FIEBIG (Ball State University; ABA Global Initiatives LLC)
MAGNUS JOHANSSON (Oslo Metropolitan University)
Abstract:

Despite overwhelming evidence of the catastrophic consequences of accelerating climate change (IPCC, 2018), very little effective research is being done on how to bring about widespread changes in people's behavior. This panel discussion will present a thorough and integrated analysis of existing behavioral science research on climate change. It will begin by contrasting the amount of money being invested in physical science research relevant to climate change with the much smaller amount being invested in behavioral science research, despite the fact that addressing the problem is almost entirely a matter of changing human behavior. A panelist will then review the extent to which research is identifying effective and scalable strategies for affecting climate-relevant policy and behavior. We will then describe the kind of experimental research that is most likely to result in scalable change. Finally, we will present a strategic plan for greatly increasing funding for large-interdisciplinary programs of experimental analysis of strategies for affecting climate-relevant policy and behavior. It is hoped that this panel discussion will be a first step in the implementation of such a strategic plan.

Instruction Level: Advanced
Target Audience:

Graduate students, researchers

Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will be able to analyze the behavior science research on climate change 2. Participants will be able to identify behavioral strategies for changing behavior related to climate change 3. Participants will be able to identify strategies for conducting interdisciplinary research related to climate change
Keyword(s): Climate Change, Policy, Sustainability
 
 
Symposium #338
CE Offered: BACB
An Overview of Common Effect Size Measures Used in Single-Case Research Design: Log Response Ratios, Hedges' g, and Multiple Regression-Based Effect Sizes
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich E-G
Area: EAB/AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: Donald A. Hantula (Temple University)
CE Instructor: Art Dowdy, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Single-case designs are one of the main tools used for evaluating applied behavioral interventions. Although single-case studies can be highly informative about the efficacy of an intervention for the individual participants, single studies provide a limited basis for generalization. The tools of research synthesis, meta-analysis, and effect sizes provide a stronger basis for establishing evidence-based practices and drawing broader, more defensible generalizations than what is possible from single studies considered separately. For single-case studies that use systematic direct observation of behavior to measure behavioral outcomes, response ratios, hedges' g, and multiple-regression based effect sizes are often used. We provide a general overview of each, benefits and drawbacks when using with single-case studies, along with intuitive ways to calculate each effect size.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Effect sizes, Evidenced-Based, Meta-Analysis, SCRD
Target Audience:

Researchers

 
Challenge and Convention: Effect Sizes in Multiple Regression
(Theory)
ELIZABETH KYONKA (University of New England)
Abstract: Psychologists who operationalize constructs must report standardized effect size statistics because the observations themselves are abstractions. A score of 16 on an impulsivity questionnaire that is an aggregation of responses to several Likert-scale items does not indicate that the respondent “has” 16 points of impulsivity. In behavior analysis, dependent variables tend to be more concrete. A change in the number of times a key was pecked, problem behavior occurred, or the correct mand was provided are meaningful without standardization. However, even in those cases when the dependent variable is a behavior, standardized effect sizes are valuable because they make comparison across subjects and across studies possible. Behavior analysts who conduct single-subject research with continuous predictors must deal with all of the issues surrounding continuous predictors as well as those relating to single-subject designs. There are many options and few standards for reporting standardized effect sizes for continuous predictors. Possible intercorrelations between sequential observations and sphericity must be addressed carefully in all single-subject research. In combination, these challenges make reporting unbiased and interpretable measures of effect size (standardized or not) difficult, but the end results are worth the effort.
 

Response Ratio Effect Sizes: Methods for Single-Case Designs With or Without Treatment-Phase Time Trends

(Theory)
JAMES ERIC PUSTEJOVSKY (University of Texas at Austin)
Abstract:

Single-case designs are one of the main tools used for evaluating applied behavioral interventions. Although single-case studies can be highly informative about the efficacy of an intervention for the individual participants, single studies provide a limited basis for generalization. The tools of research synthesis, meta-analysis, and effect sizes provide a stronger basis for establishing evidence-based practices and drawing broader, more defensible generalizations than what is possible from single studies considered separately. For single-case studies that use systematic direct observation of behavior to measure behavioral outcomes, response ratios are a simple and intuitive way to quantify effect sizes in terms of proportionate change from baseline. This presentation will review recently developed methods and tools for estimating response ratio effect sizes. Methods will be described for the simple scenario where the level of the outcome is constant within each phase and for the more challenging scenario where treatment has gradual effects, which build up and dissipate over time. The presentation will highlight interactive web-based tools for calculating response ratios under both scenarios.

 

Determining Effect Sizes Using Hedges' g in Single-Case Research Design Based Meta-Analyses

(Theory)
ART DOWDY (Temple University)
Abstract:

In single-case research design (SCRD), experimental control is demonstrated when the researcher’s application of an intervention, known as the independent variable, reliably produces a change in behavior, known as the dependent variable, and the change is not otherwise explained by confounding or extraneous variables. Recently, researchers and policy organizations have identified evidence-based practices (EBPs) for children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) based on systematic reviews and meta-analyses of SCRD studies (e.g., Odom, Collet-Klingenberg, Rogers, & Hatton, 2010). Effect sizes determined from SCRD meta-analyses allow for a sound basis when determining EBPs. A popular ES determined from SCRD meta-analyses is Hedges' g. This presentation will review Hedges' g, the benefits and limitations, and an intuitive way to calculate the ES once SCRD data has been extracted.

 
 
Panel #339
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Considerations for the Ethics of Behavior Analysts Working in Public Schools
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Selena Layden, Ph.D.
Chair: Selena Layden (Old Dominion University)
DARIA LORIO-BARSTEN (College of William & Mary)
LAUREN MARIE VETERE (Culpeper County Public Schools)
DANIS URBAN (New Horizons Regional Education Centers, Public Day Treatment Program)
Abstract: Working as a behavior analyst in a public school setting can be challenging, particularly from an ethical standpoint. While this focus is an important applied area in the field of behavior analysis, it requires a strong understanding and application of the Professional and Ethical Compliance Code for Behavior Analysts from the Behavior Analyst Certification Board®. Yet, even with great skill and care, situations arise that can challenge the ethical compass of any behavior analyst in this setting. This panel discussion will focus on some of the ethical challenges behavior analysts face in public schools and provide potential solutions from behavior analysts currently working in and with public school settings in a variety of roles. The targeted audience for this panel discussion are those currently working in public school settings, those who consult in these settings, or those teaching future behavior analysts who may work in the public school setting. Identifying and discussing potential areas of conflict as well as possible solutions provides the field a basis to address these issue and ensure behavior analysts are effective in supporting public schools while remaining true to the ethical code of our profession.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience: BCBAs or BCaBAs who are working or consulting in public school settings.
Learning Objectives: 1. Identify at least 5 challenges to being a BCBA in the public school setting with potential resolutions. 2. Determine at least 3 questions from the larger audience that need to be addressed related to this topic.
Keyword(s): Education, Ethics, Public Schools
 
 
Special Event #342
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
CREATIVITY: Session 3
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD North
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Chair: Douglas A. Johnson (Western Michigan University)
CE Instructor: Douglas A. Johnson, Ph.D.
 

CREATIVITY: PORTL: A Lab for Teaching Students to Design Creative Behavioral Solutions

Abstract:

In addition to being able to follow existing protocols, students of behavior analysis should also be able to design solutions based on the needs of their learner. However, this requires students to both understand basic principles and to have a particular set of skills and tools. This presentation will introduce you to a tabletop teaching game called PORTL (the Portable Operant Research and Teaching Lab). PORTL provides a versatile environment where students can learn how to engineer creative solutions in the context of both designing teaching programs and designing research experiments. Students are taught a series of component skills which later can be built on and recombined when designing novel solutions to problems. This presentation will describe the curriculum that we use to teach these skills. As well, it will feature video examples of student products illustrating both teaching programs and research experiments.

 
JESUS ROSALES-RUIZ (University of North Texas)
 

Jesús Rosales-Ruiz is an associate professor at the University of North Texas in the Department of Behavior Analysis. He obtained his Ph.D. from the University of Kansas in 1995, under the mentorship of two pioneers in the field of behavior analysis, Donald M. Baer and Ogden R. Lindsley. Jesús is one of the few scientists in the world studying animal training from both the theoretical and applied perspectives. He, along with his students, has greatly contributed to the understanding of the science and practice of animal training. Jesús also studies the antecedent control of behavior, generalization, behavioral cusps, fluency-based teaching, treatment of autism, teaching of academic behavior, rule-governed behavior and contingency-shaped behavior. He has served on several editorial boards, including the Journal of Precision Teaching, the European Journal of Behavior Analysis, and the International Journal of Psychology and Psychological Therapy. He has also served as a reviewer for the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, the Journal of Neuroscience Methods, Behavioral Processes, and PLOS ONE. Jesús is a fellow of the Eastern Psychological Association, a trustee of the Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies and a member of the Association for Behavior Analysis International.

 

CREATIVITY: A Behavior Analytic Account of "Creativity"

Abstract:

Creativity can be defined in many ways, including the extent to which behavior occurs under certain circumstances, results in desirable outcomes, and perhaps varies along one or more dimension of behavior. In this talk, a brief overview of the operant and respondent components of creativity will be discussed, including antecedent conditions, variations and coordination of behavior, and temporal aspects of consequences. Examples will be provided from art, literature, and other realms to provide a context for the audience to make contact with the analyses from a behavioral lens.

 
DARLENE CRONE-TODD (Salem State University)
 
Darlene E. Crone-Todd is a Full Professor in Psychology at Salem State University. She designed and coordinates the graduate program in Behavior Analysis, and has presented in over 50 symposia at conferences worldwide, including time spent researching and presenting in Brazil. She has published research in peer-reviewed journals including, The Behavior Analyst Today, The Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, and Substance Use and Misuse. She is currently on the board of directors for the B. F. Skinner Foundation, and serves as the editor in chief for their publication, Operants. Dr. Crone-Todd earned her doctorate at the University of Manitoba, completed a post-doc at the Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine in Behavior Pharmacology. Her current research interests include human choice behavior, computer-mediated learning environments, higher-order thinking, and shaping behavior. Ongoing projects involve behavioral interventions related to wellness, and to facilitating student success.
 
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the important variables of a Skinner box and how these relate to both PORTL and applied settings; (2) describe the PORTL reinforcement system; (3) describe component skills of shaping that can be practiced during PORTL; (4) describe how PORTL can be used to design teaching programs and conduct research; (5) define “creativity” in behavior analytic terms; (6) discuss how motivating operations are involved in creative behavior; (7) discuss how creative behavior is selected for by consequences; (8) discuss how creative behavior involves successively more complex behavioral repertoires.
 
 
 
Panel #343
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Diversity submission A Radical Pursuit of Cultural Awareness
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 1/2
Area: PCH/CSS; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Dominique Michellee Rougeau, M.A.
DOMINIQUE MICHELLEE ROUGEAU (Mental Connections of Southwest Louisiana/ Crossing Roads ABA, LLC)
STACHA VERA (Denton Independent School District)
ARIELLE ARMSTRONG (The Behavior Exchange)
Abstract:

Though behavior analysis has its own theoretical framework for the concept of culture, low efforts have been made to apply it to addressing macro-level, social issues, such as creating measures to avoid discrimination and bias. As a science and practice dedicated to behavior change, there is an obligation to be well-informed in how to effectively service vulnerable populations with multicultural competence. Given that behavior analytic technologies have produced effective cultural change, diversity and inclusion strategies are able to be addressed by behavior analysts as topics of interest. Furthermore, these strategies should be systematically integrated into supervision, academia, and service delivery to ensure that we are seeking to improve the social validity of our field. This panel attempts to help offer some insight on how to define bias and discrimination, as well as strategies to incorporate diversity and inclusion within various roles. Panelist Chair:

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

The target audience is any individual practicing or teaching applied behavior analysis, or in an otherwise supervisory role in the field of behavior analysis.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) understand the expansive definition of "multiculturalism" ; (2) identify boundaries to multicultural competence; (3) address these barriers in an ethical manner.
Keyword(s): diversity, inclusion, multicultural competence, social issues
 
 
Panel #344
CE Offered: BACB
Online Applied Behavior Analysis Education: Facing Academic Dishonesty and Finding Solutions
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, International Ballroom
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Dipti Mudgal, Ph.D.
Chair: Dipti Mudgal (Ball State University)
SHANNON MARIE DIERINGER (Ball State University)
ROBYN M. CATAGNUS (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
LAURA L. DUDLEY (Northeastern University)
Abstract:

As more and more individuals seek ABA education via online programs, the technology options to teach are increasing. Various tools are being used to provide quality instruction to students and engage them. However, the downside of the vastness of world wide web is that students sometimes seek unwanted means to submit work. Academic dishonesty has been a notable challenge for online educators. While we have many tools to dodge plagiarism, continuous efforts are still needed as students find newer ways to sabotage academic integrity. This panel includes three seasoned instructors teaching ABA online who will share their expertise on understanding, preventing, detecting, addressing, and deterring academic dishonesty. The aim of the panel discussion is also to invite the audience to provide input with their own experiences for bettering the overall integrity of online education.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Graduate students, ABA educators and program directors,

Learning Objectives: 1. Understanding academic dishonesty in online programs. 2. Ways to encourage academic honesty and prevent cheating. 3. Addressing academic dishonesty in online programs.
 
 
Symposium #345
CE Offered: BACB
How Behavior Analysts Can View and Use Indirect Data to Improve Traditional Psychology
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD South
Area: VBC/CBM; Domain: Translational
Chair: Jennifer Trapani (University of Mississippi)
CE Instructor: Emmie Hebert, M.A.
Abstract:

Traditional psychological research and applications have relied on unobservable phenomena and behavior-behavior relations to predict various variables in individuals' lives. Behavior analysis has much to offer in terms of improving these predictions and furthermore effectively influencing behaviors to improve the lives of individuals and groups. This symposium will include talks that focus on using behavioral strategies to collect indirect data in order to make both research and clinical work more effective. One of the talks will discuss how to use linguistic analysis to make the concept of psychological flexibility directly observable. The second talk will discuss how indirect self-report data can be used to make interventions for children. The last talk will discuss how to use behavioral principles to improve data collection from hard to reach populations, such as men of color who have sex with men. The varying topics in this symposium are linked by the emphasis on using behavioral and behavior analytic methods to improve traditional psychological research and interventions.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): behavioral strategies, improving psychology, indirect data
Target Audience:

BCBAs RBTs Other professionals working in applied settings Researchers conducting applied research in any psychology domain

Learning Objectives: 1. Describe a behavioral measure for psychological flexibility and summarize this measure’s relationship with current measures of psychological flexibility. 2. Describe how indirect behavioral data can be used to improve services provided to children and their caregivers 3. Describe how indirect behavioral data can be used to improve research with understudied populations
 
A Linguistic Analysis of Psychological Flexibility
(Applied Research)
MELISSA MORGAN MILLER (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Emily Kennison Sandoz (70503, University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Abstract: Psychological flexibility seems to be an important dimension of the behavioral repertoire that involves the ability to learn and to engage in effective and personally significant behavior in the presence of unwanted private events. As it involves aspects of behavior-behavior relations between overt and covert events, however, psychological flexibility has proven difficult for the behavior analyst to directly observe. While some have suggested that qualitative self-report might eliminate bias caused by questionnaires, it does not generally lend itself to quantitative analysis at the individual or group level. Linguistic Analysis involves transforming qualitative data so that quantitative analysis is possible. This paper will present data from several attempts to create a linguistic analysis “dictionary” that will allow for direct observation and quantification of psychological flexibility. Results suggest that linguistic analysis may be a promising approach to assessing psychological flexibility and other complex aspects of the repertoire. Implications for the continued use of linguistic analysis to assess psychological flexibility and related constructs will be discussed.
 
I Can Do This!: Using Self-Reported Confidence to Inform Caregiver Workshop Series on Child Academics
(Applied Research)
EMMIE HEBERT (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Sara S. Kupzyk (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Med)
Abstract: Caregivers of children with disabilities serve more than just the caregiving role. They also serve as interventionists, teachers, and advocates. Because of this, it is important for professionals working with families to be aware of the caregivers’ confidence in serving their child’s needs. Operationally defined, a caregiver is displaying confidence when they are able to tact the needs of the child and behave in ways that result in the child’s needs being addressed. While the best way to collect caregiver confidence data would be observe caregivers in-vivo, it is not always a practical method of data collection. The field of psychology has historically used self-report as a measure of indirectly collecting data about individual experiences. This presentation will discuss the process of developing a measure of caregiver self-confidence in providing for academic needs in their children with disabilities and using this measure to inform a caregiver workshop series. Pre-post data collected from caregivers of children in an academic intervention program suggest that workshops targeted at identified “low confidence” items increased caregiver confidence in identifying and providing for their child’s academic needs.
 

Dissertation, Please Help!: Using Behavior Analytic Techniques to Influence Data Collection

(Applied Research)
YASH BHAMBHANI (University of Mississippi), Karen Kate Kellum (University of Mississippi), Kelly G. Wilson (University of Mississippi)
Abstract:

Traditional psychology has much to benefit from behavior analytic methods. One of these areas is the process of scale construction to measure verbal reports of behavior. This project aimed to use behavior analytic methods to influence data collection for a scale construction study, from content area experts, and a hard to reach population (men of color who have sex with men). We collected data from experts three times, via an online survey. We used verbal praise delivered online to reinforce survey completion. If experts did not respond within an expected time frame, we used prompts to increase likelihood of responding. Prompts were successful about 40% of the time in influencing experts’ behavior. Next, we collected data from two large samples of men of color, through Amazon mTurk in two different studies. We varied reinforcer strength (compensation in dollars) within each study to influence response rate. For study 1, response rate increased from 8.35 per hour to 29.4 per hour upon increasing the reinforcer by $.20. Interestingly, response rate in study 2 dropped from 19.7 per hour to 10.7 per hour upon increasing the reinforcer by $.25. Implications for using behavior analytic techniques to enhance traditional psychological methods will be discussed.

 
 
Symposium #346
CE Offered: BACB
Considerations for Using Acceptance and Commitment Therapy in Practice: Ethics, Psychometrics, and Novel Populations
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–6:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 1-3
Area: CBM; Domain: Translational
Chair: Mary Grace Cavaliere (Saint Louis University)
Discussant: Luisa F Canon (Institute for Effective Behavioral Interventions)
CE Instructor: Victoria Diane Hutchinson, M.S.
Abstract:

Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) has been shown to be an effective treatment strategy, and behavior analysts are beginning to use it in their clinical practice. However, minimal resources exist to assist clinicians with selecting psychometric tools and implementing ACT with novel populations. Further, behavior analysts must consider ethical conduct when using ACT, to ensure they adhere to their code of ethics. Therefore, the current symposium will focus on considerations for using ACT in practice across three domains: ethics, psychometrics, and innovative ways to use ACT with novel populations. The first paper will discuss how a brief 4-session ACT package was developed and implemented for a novel population, female university students with anxiety. The second paper will discuss a new psychometric survey, the Children’s Psychological Flexibility Questionnaire (CPFQ), and the convergent validity of the CPFQ with caregiver report. The third paper will focus on the effects of ACT on staff engagement in positive interactions when implementing behavioral programs for children with autism. Finally, the fourth paper will discuss ethical considerations for behavior analysts using ACT, and will highlight strategies for using ACT consistent language and functional intervention techniques while adhering to the ethical code of conduct.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Board Certified Behavior Analysts, Board Certified Assistant Behavior Analysts, Registered Behavior Technicians

Learning Objectives: At the end of the symposium, attendees will: 1. Define mechanisms of change within an ACT treatment package 2. Identify psychometrics and other related measures useful when implementing ACT 3. Label ethical considerations and function-based strategies for using ACT in practice 4. Demonstrate knowledge for using ACT with novel populations
 
The Effects of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy on College Students’ Anxiety and Psychological Flexibility
(Applied Research)
ARIANNA CHAROS (Arizona State University), Alison Parker (Arizona State University), Adam DeLine Hahs (Arizona State University)
Abstract: Recent statistics suggest that 4.2% of undergraduate and 3.8% of graduate students suffer from anxiety disorders. Of these students, women are more than twice as likely than men to meet the criteria for one of these disorders (Eisenberg, Gollust, Golberstein & Hefner, 2007). A promising treatment for anxiety and related problems is Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT; Hayes, 2004). ACT has been shown to be effective for a variety of conditions (Hayes, 2004), but to the author’s knowledge has not been examined for anxiety in female university students specifically. A multiple probe design was used to evaluate the effects of a brief, 4-session ACT package on anxiety and psychological flexibility in this population. The Beck Anxiety Inventory (Julian, 2011), the Acceptance and Action Questionnaire-II (Bond et al., 2011), and a social validity measure specific to the study were also used. Results and implications of a brief ACT approach for this population will be discussed.
 

An Assessment of Convergent Validity on the Children's Psychological Flexibility Questionnaire: Child Report and CPFQ: Caregiver Report in Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder and Related

(Basic Research)
NATALIA BAIRES (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale)
Abstract:

As a new tool for measuring psychological flexibility in children and adolescents, the Children's Psychological Flexibility Questionnaire (CPFQ; Dixon & Paliliunas, 2017) constitutes 24 items across the six core clinical processes used in Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT; Hayes, Strosahl, & Wilson, 2012). Moreover, the CPFQ: Caregiver Report mirrors items from the Child Report, with the exception that it is completed by an adult (e.g., caregiver, provider, educator, etc.) who is familiar with the child or adolescent. In addition to measuring progress and growth over time, the CPFQ is also used in intervention planning to determine which ACT areas to target as part of the Accept. Identify. Move (AIM) curriculum (Dixon & Paliliunas, 2017). Although AIM blends mindfulness, ACT, and applied behavior analysis, it is still in its early introduction and little research has been done assessing the curriculum or its measures. In the current study, the convergent validity of the CPFQ: Child Report and CPFQ: Caregiver Report were compared. Child Reports were completed by individuals 12 years and older who have a diagnosis of autism or a related developmental disability, whereas caregivers or providers completed Caregiver Reports, depending on whether participants were their own legal guardians or not. Preliminary results indicated that at least one item in the present moment, defusion, values, and committed action categories had a strong positive correlation between Client and Caregiver Reports. The findings suggest that scores from the CPFQ: Child Report and Caregiver Report are related and support high validity for the CPFQ.

 

Effects of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy Sessions on Positive Interactions and Staff Rigidity Among Therapists for Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

(Service Delivery)
SEBASTIAN GARCIA-ZAMBRANO (Southern Illinois University), Becky Barron (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract:

Therapists for individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) are exposed to high levels of work-related stress that are associated with negative interactions and emotional exhaustion among workers. Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) has been explored as a treatment to decrease levels of perceived work-related stress among direct care staff (Bond and Bunce, 2000; Flaxman and Bond, 2010; Kurz et al., 2014; Veage et al., 2014). However, ACT-based interventions are not improving scores on burnout and it is necessary to develop a better understanding of the specific goals of ACT in work settings. Therefore, the purpose of this presentation is to evaluate the effectiveness of ACT and mindfulness techniques, on improving interactions and intervention techniques towards clients with developmental disabilities. Preliminary results indicated that the percentage of positive interactions and psychological flexibility improved across participants. Our results suggest that using ACT-based exercises may increase psychological flexibility of ABA therapists as well as increase positive interactions among ABA therapists with their clients. Potential implications for organizations who provide ABA services as well as for ABA therapists to improve the psychological well-being and quality of services delivered are discussed.

 

Ethical Considerations for BCBAs Using Acceptance and Commitment Therapy in Clinical Practice

(Theory)
VICTORIA DIANE HUTCHINSON (Saint Louis University), Alyssa N. Wilson (Saint Louis University)
Abstract:

Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) has been researched over 20 years, with overwhelming positive effects. For instance, ACT has been shown to improve job interview skills in adults with disabilities, smoking cessation in typically developing adults, and reduction of off-task related behaviors in school-aged children. Recently, ACT protocols for behavior analytic interventions have begun to emerge, as ACT can easily be utilized to assist BCBAs with identifying and treating experiential avoidance behaviors. While research to date supports ACT as an effective intervention for BCBAs, minimal guidelines exist for ethical considerations for practicing ACT in behavior analytic practice. Therefore, the current presentation will outline the role and importance of behavior analyst’s implementation of ACT, including adhering to an ethical code of conduct. The following strategies will be discussed: practitioner use of ACT consistent vs. inconsistent language; functional vs. non-functional intervention techniques; and ethical considerations throughout implementation.

 
 
Symposium #347
CE Offered: BACB
Research Examining Strategies to Mitigate Resurgence
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–6:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom A
Area: DDA/EAB; Domain: Translational
Chair: Yaara Shaham (Florida Institute of Technology; The Scott Center for Autism Treatment )
Discussant: Sarah E. Bloom (University of South Florida)
CE Instructor: Sarah E. Bloom, M.S.
Abstract:

Resurgence is the return of a previously extinguished response due to discontinuation or reduction in rate of reinforcement of a more recently reinforced alternative response. Resurgence has been used to model treatment relapse due to treatment-integrity errors resulting from the failure to reinforce alternative responses. In this symposium, we will consider several approaches to modifying differential reinforcement of alternative responding (DRA) and the effect on the mitigation of resurgence in basic and translational research. The first presentation compares the effect of five concurrently available alternative responses to a single alternative response on the mitigation of resurgence using rats. The second presentation compares the effect of serial-DRA training with more typical single-DRA in a laboratory experiment with children. The third presentation compares the effect of serial-response training with concurrent-response training in a laboratory setting with university students. The final presentation examines multiple-mand training and a lag schedule with functional communication training in an applied setting involving participants diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): DRA, relapse, resurgence, translational research
Target Audience:

Practitioners, teachers, applied researchers, translational researchers, and basic researchers

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to 1. Define relapse and resurgence. 2. Describe some techniques aimed to mitigate resurgence. 3. State the clinical applications of resurgence studies involving rats as well as university students.
 
Multiple Concurrent Alternative Responses Fail to Reduce Resurgence of Food-Seeking in Rats
(Basic Research)
RUSTY NALL (Utah State University), Timothy A. Shahan (Utah State University)
Abstract: Resurgence is the relapse of a previously-suppressed target behavior following the worsening of reinforcement conditions for an alternative behavior. Alternative reinforcement is a common component of treatment for clinically-relevant problem behaviors. Thus, when alternative reinforcers are omitted due to treatment lapses or cessation, problem behavior is susceptible to resurgence. There is mixed evidence that training multiple alternative behaviors may mitigate resurgence. There are at least two potential explanations for this effect. First, because overall rate of reinforcement is not typically controlled in studies reinforcing multiple alternative behaviors, differences in reinforcer rates may explain differences in resurgence. Second, response competition may explain lower resurgence rates when multiple sources of alternative reinforcement are used. The present study was designed to evaluate these possibilities. Rats were first trained to press levers for food. Next, lever pressing was extinguished, and alternative reinforcement was programmed for a single alternative or five simultaneously-available alternatives at the same rate across groups. Finally, alternative responding was extinguished while target responding remained on extinction. Resurgence occurred for both groups at similar rates, suggesting that alternative reinforcer rate was responsible for determining the magnitude of resurgence. Implications of these results for clinical application and theories of resurgence will be discussed.
 
Reinforcing Multiple Alternative Responses to Mitigate Resurgence in Children
(Applied Research)
WEIZHI WU (Florida Institute of Technology), Kelsey Lynn Purcell (Kaleidoscope Interventions; Florida Institute of Technology), Ashley Shuler (Florida Institute of Technology), Cheyenne Dong (Florida Institute of Technology), Shana Fentress (Florida Institute of Technology), Christopher A. Podlesnik (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: Resurgence is a type of treatment relapse that occurs when an extinguished behavior reappears once reinforcement for a more recently reinforced behavior is reduced or eliminated. Resurgence of problem behavior often occurs when treatment-integrity errors are made during the implementation of differential reinforcement of alternative behavior (DRA). Training multiple alternative responses with serial-DRA training shows a promise in mitigating resurgence of problem behavior compared to training only a single response. This study used laboratory methods to systematically replicate previous studies comparing the effects of more typical, single-DRA training with serial-DRA training on the magnitude of resurgence. The present experiment included children as participants, topographically different target and alternative responses, and counterbalanced independent conditions. Less resurgence was observed in the serial-DRA condition than traditional DRA for one out of three participants. However, serial-DRA training increased the total amount of responding observed during the resurgence phase, while decreasing the overall percentage allocated to target responding. Findings from this study expand upon current literature on possible techniques to mitigate resurgence when using DRA treatment.
 
Serial and Concurrent Response Presentation: Their Effects on Resurgence
(Applied Research)
MICHAEL KRANAK (Western Michigan University), Stephanie M. Peterson (Western Michigan University), Claire C. St. Peter (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Serial response training (SRT) may mitigate resurgence of a target response when compared to teaching a single alternative response. However, the necessity of the serial presentation of alternatives is yet to be determined. We hypothesized teaching alternative responses at the same time (concurrent response training [CRT]) may be as effective as, and more efficient than, SRT. We used a multielement design embedded within an ABC paradigm in a human operant arrangement in three studies. Thirty undergraduate students enrolled in a psychology course participated. In Study 1, we compared CRT to differential reinforcement of a single alternative response (traditional DRA). In Study 2, we compared CRT, SRT, and traditional DRA. In Study 3, we implemented CRT and made real-time, data-based decisions regarding phase length rather than standard a priori phase-change criteria. We found both CRT and SRT resulted in greater persistence of alternative responses and suppression of target responses than traditional DRA. However, CRT mitigated resurgence of target responding better than SRT. This experiment suggests investigating CRT with clinically-relevant behavior may prove fruitful as a modification to differential reinforcement procedures.
 
Variations of Functional Communication Training and Their Effects on Resurgence
(Applied Research)
BRITTANY SCHMITZ (University of Missouri; Thompson Center for Autism and Neurodevelopmental Disorders ), SungWoo Kahng (Rutgers University), Casey J. Clay (University of Missouri; Thompson Center for Autism and Neurodevelopmental Disorders ), Savannah Tate (University of Missouri; Thompson Center for Autism and Neurodevelopmental Disorders ), Bethany P. Contreras Young (Middle Tennessee State University)
Abstract: A common treatment that is implemented to decrease problem behavior and increase appropriate behavior in individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) is functional communication training (FCT; Carr & Durand, 1985). Although demonstrated to be highly effective, it is possible that procedures will not be implemented with fidelity by caregivers in the natural environment. In these situations, functional communicative responses (FCRs) are likely to undergo extinction, increasing the likelihood of the resurgence of problem behavior (e.g., Fisher et al., 1993; Hanley, Iwata, & Thompson, 2001). In applied contexts, the resurgence of problem behavior during temporary lapses in procedural fidelity represents a reality for which there are currently few solutions (Lambert et al., 2017). One possible treatment for resurgence of problem behavior in the face of extinction challenges is multiple mand training during FCT. The purpose of this study was to evaluate what effect teaching multiple FCRs as outlined in serial FCT by Lambert, Bloom, Samaha, and Dayton (2017) had on resurgence of problem behavior and FCRs during extinction challenges. Researchers then evaluated what effect implementing a lag schedule of reinforcement following serial FCT had on resurgence of problem behavior and FCRs during extinction challenges compared to serial FCT.
 
 
Symposium #348
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Recent Advancements in Treatment Integrity Assessment and Intervention
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–6:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: DDA/OBM; Domain: Translational
Chair: Sandra Alex Ruby (University of Kansas)
Discussant: Linda A. LeBlanc (LeBlanc Behavioral Consulting LLC)
CE Instructor: Linda A. LeBlanc, Ph.D.
Abstract:

This symposium summarizes novel research on interventions to improve treatment integrity as well as extensions of parametric analyses of treatment integrity. Bergmann will share results from a parametric analysis of treatment integrity to determine at which level of error most participants acquired a skill. The second presentation by Hodges evaluated an assessment to identify barriers and solutions to effective parent implementation of behavioral programming. Luck will describe findings from a study that measured teacher’s integrity of function-based treatments for escape-maintained problem behavior in the presence and absence of environmental distractions. The fourth presentation by Erath will summarize findings of a study evaluating the efficacy of antecedent- and technology-based training procedures on the integrity with which staff used behavioral skills training to teach colleagues how to implement a behavioral procedure. The symposium will conclude with discussant remarks by Dr. Linda LeBlanc.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Supervisors

 

When Do Errors Affect Learning?: A Parametric Analysis of Treatment Integrity of Skill-Acquisition Procedures

(Basic Research)
SAMANTHA BERGMANN (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee; University of North Texas), Tiffany Kodak (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee; Marquette University), Mike Harman (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee; Briar Cliff University)
Abstract:

Treatment integrity is the extent to which components of an intervention are implemented as intended (Gresham, 1989). Recent behavior-analytic literature has begun to evaluate the effects of treatment integrity on efficacy and efficiency of skill-acquisition interventions. We extended current literature on the effects of errors of omission and commission of reinforcement by replicating and extending Hirst and DiGennaro Reed (2015). We compared instruction implemented with varying degrees of integrity in a parametric analysis using a randomized-control group design with undergraduate students. A computer program made errors on 0% to 50% of trials. The purpose was to identify a level of error at which most participants could still acquire the task. Most participants assigned to integrity levels at or above 85% acquired the skill; therefore, errors of reinforcement on 15% or fewer trials did not hinder acquisition for most participants. The potential implications for training teachers, parents, and therapists to implement behavior analytic interventions with integrity will be discussed.

 
Further Evaluation of a Tool to Identify Barriers to Effective Parent Implementation of Behavioral Programming
(Applied Research)
ANSLEY CATHERINE HODGES (Florida Institute of Technology), Hallie Marie Ertel (Florida Institute of Technology), David A. Wilder (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: We evaluated the utility of an informant-based tool used to identify the barriers to effective parent implementation of behavior analytic programs. Specifically, we compared the effectiveness of two interventions to increase parent implementation of a mand training program. The first intervention was not indicated by the tool as likely to be effective, whereas the second intervention (task clarification and prompting) was indicated by the tool as likely to be effective. The results showed that the non-indicated intervention was ineffective to improve parent performance; the indicated intervention improved performance of all three parents. In addition, manding increased and problem behavior decreased for all three children during the indicated intervention. In a social validity analysis, both parents and clinicians reported that the tool was useful and that they would recommend it to others. Results are discussed in terms of the utility of the tool to identify effective interventions to increase parent performance in a variety of contexts.
 
The Effects of Environmental Distractions on Teacher’s Procedural Integrity When Implementing Three Function-Based Treatments
(Applied Research)
KALLY M LUCK (University of Houston - Clear Lake), Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Sarah Williams (University of Houston - Clear Lake), Victoria Fletcher (University of Houston -- Clear Lake), Landon Cowan (University of Houston- Clear Lake)
Abstract: Past research has demonstrated the effectiveness of a variety of function-based treatments, including differential reinforcement of other behavior (DRO), differential reinforcement of alternative behavior (DRA), and noncontingent reinforcement (NCR). However, the ease with which teachers can implement these procedures in busy classrooms may vary across possible treatment options. In this study, we compared the procedural integrity of teachers when implementing three different function-based interventions with and without the presence of environmental distractions. Experimenters taught five special education teachers to implement DRO, DRA, and NCR for escape-maintained problem behavior. Following training, the experimenters assessed the teachers’ procedural integrity in a simulated classroom setting. Although the teachers’ integrity was similarly high for all three treatments when the setting was free of distractions, their integrity for certain aspects of the procedures declined in the presence of common classroom distractions (e.g., other students engaging in problem behavior or requesting attention). In general, distractions were more likely to impact the integrity of DRA relative to DRO and NCR, particularly for the delivery of reinforcement and data collection. Furthermore, all teachers indicated that they were least likely to implement DRA in their classrooms. These findings have important implications for behavior analysts who consult in school settings
 
Increasing the Training Repertoires of Human Service Staff Using a Technology-Based Intervention
(Applied Research)
TYLER ERATH (University of Kansas), Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (University of Kansas), Abigail Blackman (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Training integrity, or the degree to which a training procedure is implemented as intended, is a critical variable to providing effective and evidence-based training to staff working in human service settings. Recent literature has demonstrated a growing body of support for antecedent-only and technology-based training procedures as two potential modalities to increase the resource efficiency and integrity with which training is provided. Two studies were conducted to evaluate the effects of a technology-based, antecedent-only training procedure on the degree to which human service staff could be taught to use BST when teaching others how to implement behavioral procedures. Results across both studies suggest improvements in BST integrity following the video-based training for all participants. Brief experimenter feedback was necessary though to increase performance to mastery levels. Training effects generalized to implementation of other behavioral procedures and were also found to maintain at follow-up. These findings provide support for the use of a technology-based, antecedent training procedure to enhance the training repertoires of direct support staff operating as novice trainers, as well as one potential modality to increase the resource efficiency with which human service organizations can provide evidence-based training that aligns with best practice.
 
 
Symposium #349
CE Offered: BACB
Tools for Positive Supports: Staff Training in Residential Settings
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–6:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom C
Area: DDA/OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Annette Griffith (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Discussant: Matthew A. Law (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology )
CE Instructor: Matthew A. Law, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Millions of adults diagnosed with intellectual disabilities are living in paid-for-support situations, such as group homes. Studies have concluded that very few staff employed by agencies offering paid supports are provided with behavioral training (e.g., Crosland et al., 2008). This is in spite of the fact that a large proportion of the adults supported are reported to display socially significant maladaptive behaviors, such as physical aggression, property destruction, and elopement. These behaviors may have negative impacts on access to the community and may create environments in which staff experience frustration, which may result in coercive interactions (Crosland et al., 2008). As a result, there is need for evidence-based training that can provide staff with the skills needed to help their clients to obtain the most positive outcomes possible. This symposium will begin to meet this need. First, we will provide an introduction from the Chair, to provide context. We will then present data from 4 research studies examining methods for staff training, with a focus on improving staff knowledge of individual support and behavior plans, staff-client interactions, and staff engagement. We will conclude with a discussion of overall findings, and a focus on implications for future research, applied practice, and funding directives.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): developmental disabilty, residential, staff training
Target Audience:

The target audience will be behavior analysts who work in residential settings.

Learning Objectives: 1) Describe why staff training is important in residential settings. 2) Identify and describe various approaches to training staff in residential settings. 3) Describe challenges for staff training in residential settings. 4) Identify important next steps, related to staff training in residential settings, for practice, policy, and research.
 

Tools of Choice: Increasing Positive Interactions

CHAD LEWIS (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Jack Spear (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Annette Griffith (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract:

Staff employed in a paid-for-support setting are often given little or no training how to offer quality supports to those they serve yet are often in situations that require them to try and reduce or change behaviors from the clients that hinder or reduce their ability to live a better quality of life with choice and responsibility. Tools of Choice is a basic behavioral curriculum that offers staff a competency-based program that teaches them the basics of understanding behavior, the benefits of relationships with those they serve that are based in positive supports and interventions, effective use of proper reinforcement, as well as tools to use when faced with problematic or socially significant behavior. This study is a replication of the Crosland, et al. study (2008) that looks specifically at the ratio of positive-based interactions to negative-based interactions that staff are having with the intellectually disabled adults they are supporting. This study measures the ratio of interactions that staff are having prior to and then after receiving the Tools of Choice curriculum. This study found that staff who receive the Tools of Choice curriculum have a much higher ratio of positive to negative-based interactions with their clients after receiving the instruction.

 

Effectiveness of Computer-Based Instruction With Overt Response Requirements in Staff Training

ANGELA D BARBER (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Annette Griffith (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract:

The current study used an alternating treatment design to investigate the effect of computer-based instruction (CBI) with and without overt response requirements on Direct Support Professionals (DSPs) working at an Intermediate Care Facility (ICF) for adults with Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities (IDD). The overt responding consisted of multiple-choice questions administered throughout PowerPoint training videos. Results showed that although both the PowerPoint training videos with overt response requirements and the videos without response requirements resulted in learning, there was no clinically significant difference between the learning gains associated with overt response requirements and those without. Similarly, maintenance data collected at least 14 days after posttest completion showed no distinct differentiation. These findings are contrary to the literature on overt responding in classrooms, suggesting additional research is needed to identify the variables that contribute to this discrepancy. Implications for the use of CBI in organizational settings and directions for future research are discussed.

 

The Effects of an Interdependent Group Contingency on Staff Performance

KASEY BEDARD (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Jennifer Weber (CABAS)
Abstract:

Ineffective workplace contingencies may lead to an abundance of off track behavior among employees, thereby resulting in lower productivity, and cost to the employer. Current practices for increasing employee performance tend to be centered around punishment. Research into effective, easy to implement, affordable, and reinforcement-based behavior strategies are needed to promote positive practices in the workplace. The current study sought to evaluate the effect of an interdependent group contingency on direct client interaction hours in behavior technicians in a professional setting. Findings indicated that an intervention consisting of an interdependent group contingency was effective in increasing the completion of direct client interaction hours across two groups of behavior technicians working in a professional setting. In addition, the intervention served to help stabilize rates of responding close to goal rates, eliminating variability and major trend changes during intervention phases.

 
Self-Monitoring and Supervisor Feedback as a Method of Increasing On-Task Staff Behavior in a Residential Setting
RANDI MELVIN (NABA), Annette Griffith (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Thomas Wade Brown (Chrysalis), Shawnee D. Collins (Chrysalis)
Abstract: The use of self-monitoring and supervisor feedback were implemented to determine if there were effects on on-task behavior of direct support personnel (DSPs) in a residential setting. On-task behavior included interaction and engagement with a client receiving residential services. Examples of on-task behaviors were available on data collection sheets and self-monitoring cards. After baseline participants participated in a short in-service regarding self-monitoring and the use of the data collection sheet. Self-Monitoring and Feedback were implemented simultaneously following the completion of the in-service. Data displayed an increase in on-task behavior and more stable responding following the implementation of self-monitoring and feedback. Feedback was removed following participants meeting a pre-determined criterion for on-task behavior, however the study continued. On-task behavior was observed with only self-monitoring to determine if behavior maintained at increased levels without the delivery of individualized feedback. Additionally, participants completed social validity questionnaires at the completion of the study, information gleaned are discussed. Follow up maintenance probes were completed several weeks following the completion of data collection.
 
 
Symposium #351
CE Offered: BACB
Behavior Analysis Goes to Preschool: Strategies for Increasing Critical Skills in Young Children
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–6:50 PM
Fairmont, Third Level, Crystal
Area: EDC/DEV; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jennifer L. Austin (University of South Wales)
Discussant: Gregory P. Hanley (Western New England University)
CE Instructor: Gregory P. Hanley, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Preschool is potentially one of the most important years of school, as it may set the stage for a child’s later success in building important social, academic, and self-help skills. Behavior analytic strategies have much to offer in creating positive environments that foster the development of these important behaviors. In this symposium, we will address a range of issues pertaining to skill acquisition. The first presentation will address using multiple exemplar training to establish generalized helping behavior. The second presentation will analyze the intervention components necessary for teaching children to appropriately wash their hands. The third presentation will explore the effectiveness of strategies aimed at building letter-sound correspondence. The fourth presentation will present an analysis of reinforcement strategies for increasing on-task behavior. The studies will be discussed within the context of their contributions to the preschool literature, as well as what future research directions may be useful in promoting effective learning environments for young children.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): early childhood, preschool, skill acquisition
Target Audience:

Behaviour analysts working with young children

 
Developing Helping Behavior in Young Children Through Multiple Exemplar Training
GEORGE H. NOELL (Louisiana State University), Jeanne M. Donaldson (Louisiana State University), Kristin Gansle (Louisiana State University), Rachel Bradley (Louisiana State University), Catherine Lark (Children's Healthcare of Atlanta), Katherine Moore (Louisiana State University), Ashley Bordelon (Louisiana State University)
Abstract: Research has demonstrated that engaging in helping is highly valued by children and adults and has diverse benefits for the recipient, helper, and larger group. Not surprisingly, raising children who exhibit prosocial behavior such as helping others is a central concern for parents and societies. However, the learning process that leads to the emergence of helping remains under-studied. The current study examined the establishment of generalized helping behavior in young, typically developing children, in a context in which helping competed with ongoing toy play. Additionally, we examined the emergence of verbalizations about behavior that suggest the adoption of a socially conventional rule that helping is a good thing to do. Generalized helping was initially established through multiple exemplar training, with some participants also receiving rule instruction and behavioral feedback. Generalized helping emerged across all participants and 2 of 3 participants made verbalizations demonstrating a behavioral rule that helping is good.
 
Component Analysis of a Video-Modeling and Visual-Feedback Package on Handwashing in Preschool Children
RACHEL JESS (University of Kansas), Claudia L. Dozier (University of Kansas), Elizabeth Foley (University of Kansas), Kelsey Goddard (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Young children who attend out-of-home care (e.g., preschool) are more susceptible to infections than children who do not attend out-of-home care (Bylinsky, 1994). Previous research suggests handwashing is effective in reducing risk of infection and illness (Larson, 1988). However, research suggests that individuals do not routinely wash their hands using methods that healthcare agencies, such as the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, have determined best practice (Witt & Spencer, 2004). The purpose of this study was to evaluate the separate and combined treatment components of a video-modeling and visual-feedback intervention on handwashing in preschool children: (a) rules, (b) singing a handwashing song, (c) video modeling, and (d) visual feedback. We evaluated the effects of the various intervention components on correct handwashing steps across groups of preschool children. Furthermore, we measured an index of hand cleanliness pre- and post-handwashing to determine how well children washed their hands. Overall, results suggest that the treatment components are most effective in increasing correct handwashing and cleanliness of children’s hands when combined as a packaged intervention.
 

The Effects of Paired Kinesthetic Movements on Literacy Skills Acquisition With Preschoolers

ERICA LOZY (Louisiana State University), Jeanne M. Donaldson (Louisiana State University)
Abstract:

The standard approach for teaching pre-reading skills is small and whole group instruction that combines passive and active techniques. Because the standard approach for evaluating pre-reading skills is conducted in a one-to-one format, skill deficits are identified as early as preschool and thus warrant early intervention. The purpose of this study was to compare a traditional drill (TD) and strategic incremental rehearsal (SIR) flashcard method on letter-sound correspondence with 5 preschool children. All participants mastered the letter sets in both conditions, however, results varied across and within participants: The TD method was superior for four evaluations and the SIR method was superior for four evaluations. Letter set mastery predicted follow-up data for five evaluations, suggesting that maintenance is a function of the superior method for each individual. Additionally, fewer treatment integrity errors occurred during the TD method, suggesting that TD should be considered first when implementing interventions for young children.

 
Comparison of the Effects of Conjugate and End-of-Session Reinforcement for Increasing On-Task Behavior in Preschoolers
SARA CAMILLE DIAZ DE VILLEGAS (University of Kansas), Claudia L. Dozier (University of Kansas), Rachel Jess (University of Kansas), Elizabeth Foley (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Researchers have demonstrated that manipulating various dimensions of reinforcement (i.e., magnitude, intensity, duration, and schedule of reinforcement) may produce changes in behavior (Morgan, 2010). For example, intermittent and continuous reinforcement schedules produce different patterns of responding (Lattal, 2010; Lerman, Iwata, Shore, & Kahng, 1996; Wallace, Iwata, Hanley, Thompson & Roscoe, 2012). A less common schedule of reinforcement termed “conjugate-reinforcement schedule” is a schedule in which a dimension of behavior directly controls some dimension of reinforcement (e.g., magnitude, intensity, or duration of reinforcement; Lewis, 1973; Rapp, 2008). Although previous research has demonstrated the influence of conjugate-reinforcement schedules on various behaviors, no studies have evaluated the effects of conjugate reinforcement on increasing socially important behavior in young children. Furthermore, few have compared the effects of a conjugate-reinforcement schedule to other reinforcement schedules. The purpose of this study was to compare the effects of a conjugate-reinforcement schedule to a schedule of reinforcement in which reinforcers are delivered at the end of a session for on-task behavior in preschool children. We also determined participant preference for the two schedules of reinforcement. Results show that the conjugate-reinforcement schedule was more effective for increasing on-task behavior and more preferred for most participants.
 
 
Invited Tutorial #352
CE Offered: BACB/PSY/QABA
Speech Production and Applied Behavior Analysis: Using a Conceptual Analysis of Phonetic Hand Cues to Shape Speech Production
Sunday, May 26, 2019
5:00 PM–6:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom EF
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research
BACB/PSY/QABA CE Offered. CE Instructor: Bobby Newman, M.S.
Chair: Bobby Newman (Proud Moments)
Presenting Authors: : TAMARA KASPER (The Center for Autism Treatment)
Abstract:

Phonetic hand cueing systems (PHCs) are commonly used by speech-language pathologists and promoted in commercially available products (Carahaly, 2012; Kaufman, 2007; Strode, 1994, and others), however; research on the effectiveness of these systems for improving articulation is limited (Hall and Jordan, 1992, Jordan 1988, Klick, 1985, Stelton & Graves 1985). This series of four studies examines the effect of the systematic use of phonetic hand cues as a stimulus control transfer procedure and compares the relative effectiveness of three procedures: PHCs as antecedent prompts, PHCs modeled by instructor and executed by learner, and a commonly used differential reinforcement procedures. Study results reveal rapid acquisition of hand cues, and improved articulation at the syllable, and word level as well as use of hand cues to improve intelligibility in natural settings. Reduction of speech sound errors on formal testing further confirms results. Use of hand cues as part of an ABA or school program from target selection to generalization of improved articulation across the verbal operants will be presented and illustrated via video examples. Results confirm previous case study findings that phonetic hand cues may be an effective intervention in promoting speech production skills in children with autism with limited vocal repertoires.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) state a conceptual analysis of Phonetic Hand Cues (PHC); (2) analyze study results and state relative effectiveness of use of PHC v. Echoic only procedures for students with speech production issues; (3) identify teaching procedures for HC and HCT at the word level.
 
TAMARA KASPER (The Center for Autism Treatment)

Tamara S. Kasper, MS, CCC-SLP, BCBA, is a Speech-Language Pathologist with nearly 30 years of experience working with children with challenging behaviors. Tamara’s commitment to the children she serves led her to pursue treatment methods outside the field of Speech-Language Pathology. Under the mentorship of renowned Behavior Analyst Dr. Vincent Carbone and his protégé, Tamara became a Board Certified Behavior Analyst. She has also completed advanced training in application of Skinner’s analysis of verbal behavior and Kaufman’s strategies for apraxia of speech.

Tamara is a frequently invited international lecturer, having treated clients and trained professionals in England, Ireland, Greece, Ethiopia, Senegal, and other countries. She enthusiastically shares her unique approaches and her outside-the-box intervention techniques that are successful in building functional verbal behavior for children on the autism spectrum.

Tamara is also Director of The Center for Autism Treatment (www.centerautismtreatment.org)  near Milwaukee, Wisconsin; A center which provides personalized ABA intervention plans for children as well as consulting services and workshops to autism treatment teams in the United States and abroad. Tamara’s publications include the K&K Sign to Talk materials and Speak with Sign. She is a past recipient of the Wisconsin Speech and Hearing Association’s Clinical Achievement Award.

 
 
Symposium #354
CE Offered: BACB
Rapport Construction: Creating Objective Programs and Goals, to Better Our Relationships With Our Clients
Sunday, May 26, 2019
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom B
Area: AUT/DEV; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Damali Alexander (Proud Moments ABA )
CE Instructor: Aline Kovacs, LSW
Abstract:

A crucial, and often underdeveloped component of ABA sessions is the rapport building process, in which the therapist pairs him or herself with reinforcement. Often times, the rapport building process is rushed through or not prioritized. In clinical practice, most rapport-building programs are not developed into objective, measurable goals. This makes it difficult to objectively determine real-time progress for both the client and the staff member running the program. Because of this, many third-party payers have difficulty understanding and reimbursing for this period of services. In this presentation, we will bring the rapport building practice back to a behavior analytic model. We will give an overview of the research in this area. Furthermore, we will discuss the best methods to use while pairing with clients of varying need, how to create objective, measurable programs and goals, and how to best conduct and document a pairing phase that abides by medical necessity criteria to fit with third party payer guidelines.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Any licensed behavior analysts, administrators of ABA agencies working with insurance companies, BCaBAs and Behavior Analyst Assistants

Learning Objectives: Attendees will define objective, measurable mastery criteria for effective pairing between a client and a behavior technician. Attendees will design objective, measurable pairing long term objectives to reach a good quality rapport between clients and staff members. Attendees design objective, measurable short term objectives to reach a good quality rapport between clients and staff members Attendees will identify ways to pair with reinforcement for clients of varying levels of functioning and reinforcement preferences Attendees will identify and design objective, quantitatively measurable short and long term objectives for clients in a clinical setting
 
A Research Review and Discussion of the Pairing Process in Clinical Settings
ALINE KOVACS (Proud Moments ABA), Joseph O'Keefe (Proud Moments ABA), Andrea Kotler (Proud Moments ABA)
Abstract: The pairing process is an imperative component of the client-therapist relationship, yet it is often seen in practice as a subjective way to “make the client like you.” As behavior analysts, however, we always make informed decisions based on measurement, evidence and research. This presentation explores a brief history of the the research and literature behind the pairing and rapport building process in clinical settings, based on the definitions by Carr et al. (1994) and Sundberg & Partington (1998). We will evaluate the evidence in research studies that focuses on building rapport with clients, including McLaughlin & Carr (2005) and Kelly et al. (2015), and see what methods were used to create quantitative changes in client behavior and in the relationships between clients and staff members. In addition, the audience will learn how to build a pairing program for clients with varying levels of functioning and different reinforcers. Staff training methods to teach staff members to build rapport with clients will also be discussed. Further, this presentation will look at where the research on this topic is lacking, and what questions we have for the future of this subject.
 

Producing Practical Measures for the Pairing Process and How to Develop Goals That Satisfy Third Party Payer Guidelines

ANDREA KOTLER (Proud Moments ABA), Joseph O'Keefe (Proud Moments ABA), Aline Kovacs (Proud Moments ABA)
Abstract:

Based on the research discussed previously, this presentation will illustrate different examples of pairing methods, writing short term and long-term objective, as well as clear and concise goals that adhere to the best practice standards of behavior analysis. Third-party payers reimburse for services that show measurable changes in our client’s behaviors, and often only reimburse for changes that they deem “medically necessary.” Due to an increasing amount of individuals receiving services through third-party payers, we will show how to present the paring phase of services in a way that explains the medical necessity of the process. In order to create a treatment plan that illustrates measurable progress, all goals must be clear, objective and measurable. Every short term and long term objective must show “who” is doing “what” and under “what context.” After learning about the best practices for rapport building in the literature, the audience will learn how to make modifications in rapport building goals according to their specific client’s interests, abilities, and willingness to participate. We will go over the anatomy of the pairing goals to create quantitative progress in our clients’ behaviors and their relationships with staff members.

 
 
Symposium #355
CE Offered: BACB
Methods of Quantifying and Mitigating Severe Aggressive Outbursts in Inpatient and Emergency Department Settings
Sunday, May 26, 2019
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: AUT/TBA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Seth B. Clark (Marcus Autism Center)
Discussant: Meagan K. Gregory (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
CE Instructor: Seth B. Clark, M.A.
Abstract: Behavioral inpatient units and hospital settings can often be associated with increased rates of severe aggressive behavior. Within these settings, it can also be difficult to manage aggressive outbursts and determine clinically significant reductions. This symposium will present the results of two studies that examined methods of quantifying and decreasing intense bursts of aggressive behavior. Bednar and Hausman examined the effectiveness of an individualized outburst severity score that quantified several unique dimensions of severe behavior (e.g., frequency of problem behavior, duration, number of staff required, staff rating of severity, and staff/patient injury). Clark, Call, Lomas Mevers, Scheithauer, and Muething sought to improve the quality of services provided to patients who are in behavior health care crisis and increase staff buy in by teaching emergency department (ED) staff basic strategies on how to prevent, identify, manage and de-escalate crisis behaviors. Together, these studies provide potential strategies of quantifying and improving the outcomes of individuals who engage in severe aggressive outbursts. Additionally, challenges associated with collecting data and training staff in these settings will be discussed.
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): aggressive outbursts, crisis management, measuring outcomes, staff training
Target Audience: Behavior Analysts and Clinicians
 
A Method of Quantifying the Severity of Outbursts of High Intensity Problem Behavior
MOLLY K BEDNAR (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Nicole Lynn Hausman (Kennedy Krieger Institute; Johns Hopkins School of Medicine)
Abstract: Individuals with intellectual disabilities and autism spectrum disorder engage in severe problem behavior at rates disproportionately higher than their typically-developing peers (Newcomb and Hagopian, 2018). Some of these individuals engage in more episodic patterns of problem behavior which are infrequent, yet highly severe. The standard measure of clinical outcome is often percentage of reduction as compared to baseline levels. However, in a subset of the population who engage in episodic behavioral outbursts, relying on this measure may not be the most important indicator of treatment success. The purpose of the current study is to define and quantify relevant dimensions of problem behavior that occur in episodic outbursts to determine an effective clinical outcome measure. An individualized outburst severity score was used as a more appropriate outcome measure of treatment for these individuals. Data are collected across several dimensions including; frequency of problem behavior, duration, number of staff required, staff rating of severity, and staff/patient injury. Each dimension is scored on a scale of 1 (less intense) to 5 (more intense) in which each score is defined based what is clinically relevant for the individual patient. Results suggest a composite severity score could be an effective measure of clinical outcome.
 
The Impact of Teaching Emergency Department Direct Care Staff Crisis Management Strategies
SETH B. CLARK (Marcus Autism Center), Nathan Call (Marcus Autism Center; Emory University School of Medicine), Joanna Lomas Mevers (Marcus Autism Center; Emory University School of Medicine), Mindy Christine Scheithauer (Marcus Autism Center; Emory University School of Medicine), Colin S. Muething (Marcus Autism Center; Emory University School of Medicine)
Abstract: Emergency departments (ED) and inpatient units can often be associated with stressors and triggers that may ultimately lead to increased agitation and crisis behaviors, such as aggression and disruption. EDs also frequently interact with patients who are currently in behavior health care crisis, further increasing the risk of agitation and aggression. This ultimately can result in difficulties providing medical care to these patients and ultimately an increased need for the use of restraint to safely manage behavior. The following study sought to examine if teaching ED staff basic strategies on how to prevent, identify, manage and de-escalate crisis behaviors can improve the quality of services provided to patients who are in behavior health care crisis, increase staff buy in, decrease the use of restraint, and decrease staff injuries. Over thirty ED staff completed behavioral skills training in these strategies and completed pre/post measures assessing their confidence in managing patients exhibiting aggressive behaviors, their overall feeling of safety and risk of injury, and their ability to communicate during crisis. Results demonstrated significant improvement on this measure following training. These outcomes are discussed in relation to next steps disseminating training on these topics to professionals outside of the field of behavior analysis.
 
 
Panel #356
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Telehealth for Applied Behavior Analysis Services: National Advancements and Global Demands
Sunday, May 26, 2019
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 1/2
Area: CBM/AUT; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Laurie Tarter, Psy.D.
Chair: Karelix Alicea (Lotus Behavioral Interventions)
LAURIE TARTER (Encompass Behavioral Health / Laurie Tarter, Psy.D., BCBA)
JANET VASQUEZ (weTherapy)
KIMBERLY D WOOLERY (Lotus Behavioral Interventions/Sunny Days/MASC/World Evolve)
Abstract:

Telehealth, an exciting and promising service delivery model, has changed significantly in the past two years. It is now evident that this model can be a viable option for providing ABA services by increasing the availability of providers within the United States and on an international scale. Our expert panel will provide a comprehensive overview of recent advancements relating to demand and insurance coverage in the United States, as well as international opportunities. A thorough analysis of providing ABA services using the telehealth model will also be discussed, as it requires careful considerations to yield interventions that are both effective and ethically sound. Several critical areas needed to successfully implement the telehealth model on a global scale will be examined which are inclusive, but not limited to, the BACB’s standards. We will explore how to successfully use HIPAA-compliant technology in order to effectively provide clinical services, including supervision. Business perspectives will be examined, in addition to a family systems approach that supports ethical and evidenced-based practices in ABA. Each of the panel members will contribute their own unique experiences as it pertains to each of these key areas.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

The target audience is BCBA's and LBA's providing direct services, supervision, and parent training. Those who are interested in learning about advancements in the Telehealth delivery of service would benefit from this presentation.

Learning Objectives: -Updates and advancements in Telehealth -Ethical delivery of services via Telehealth -How to incorporate family and considerations of the dynamics that impacts services.
Keyword(s): Ethics, Global Demands, Telehealth
 
 
Panel #359
CE Offered: BACB
What if Behavior Analysts Ran Facebook?: Using Behavioral Principles to Study and Improve Social Media Interactions
Sunday, May 26, 2019
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Cuvee
Area: CSS/OBM; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Todd A. Ward, Ph.D.
Chair: Jonah David McManus (University of Louisiana in Lafayette)
TODD A. WARD (bSci21 Media, LLC)
MAN-PUI CHAN (University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign)
SCOTT HERBST (Six Flex Training)
Abstract:

Behavior analysis has a specific commitment to establishing principles of behavior that generalize to allow for prediction and influence of a number of distinct behaviors across a range of contexts. One of the newest contexts we are having to contend with is that of social media platforms. These come in a variety of forms and serve numerous expressed purposes, some unintended and potentially problematic. At the individual level, the rise of social media has introduced a host of concerns regarding adolescent exposure to abusive or coercive interactions. Further, social media platforms have been implicated in terms of their considerable influence on the current political climate, including influence of voter behavior. Behavior analysis has much to offer on how to investigate functional relations between social media contexts and user behaviors of social relevance. Yet, our contribution has been limited. Panelists will discuss behavior analysis might approach the study the complex world of social media so as to understand and improve it.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

BCBA

Learning Objectives: Social media
Keyword(s): digital, online interactions, research, social media
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #360
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

Direction Dependence Analysis: Testing the Direction of Causation in Non-Experimental Person-Oriented Research

Sunday, May 26, 2019
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: DDA; Domain: Basic Research
Instruction Level: Basic
CE Instructor: Eric Boelter, Ph.D.
Chair: Kelly M. Schieltz (University of Iowa)
WOLFGANG WIEDERMANN (University of Missouri)
Wolfgang Wiedermann (Ph.D., Quantitative Psychology, University of Klagenfurt, Austria) is an Assistant Professor in the Educational, School, & Counseling Psychology Department at the University of Missouri. His primary research interests include the development of methods for causal inference, methods to determine the causal direction of effects in non-experimental studies (so-called Direction Dependence Analysis; see www.ddaproject.com), and methods for intensive longitudinal data in the person-oriented research setting. He has published over 60 peer-reviewed articles and book chapters that focus on the theory and application of statistical methods in experimental and non-experimental data settings.
Abstract:

In observational studies, at least three possible explanations exist for the association of two variables x and y: 1) x is the cause of y (i.e., a model of the form x → y), 2) y is the cause of x (y → x), or 3) an unmeasured confounder u is present (x ← u → y). Statistical methods that identify which of the three explanatory models fits best would be a useful adjunct to use of theory alone. The present talk introduces one such statistical method, Direction Dependence Analysis (DDA; Wiedermann & von Eye, 2015; Wiedermann & Li, 2018). DDA assesses the relative plausibility of the three explanatory models using higher moment information of the variables (i.e., skewness and kurtosis). DDA will be discussed in the context of person-oriented (non-experimental) research. Extending DDA principles to so-called (linear) vector autoregressive models (VAR) can be used to empirically evaluate causal theories of multivariate intraindividual development (e.g., which of two longitudinally observed variables is more likely to be the explanatory variable and which one is more likely to reflect the outcome). An illustrative example is provided from a study on the development of experienced mood and alcohol consumption behavior. Specifically, DDA is used to answer questions concerning the causal direction of effect of subjective mood and alcohol consumption behavior from a person-oriented perspective, i.e., whether individual changes in mood are the cause of changes in alcohol consumption (i.e., mood → alcohol reflecting the so-called “tension reduction hypothesis“; Conger, 1956; Young, Oei & Knight, 199) or whether alcohol consumption patterns cause changes in perceived mood (i.e., alcohol → mood reflecting the “hedonic motive hypothesis”; Gendolla, 2000). In the present sample, DDA supported the “tension-reduction hypothesis” suggesting that experienced mood is more likely to cause alcohol intake than vice versa. Data requirements of DDA for best-practice applications are discussed and software implementations in R and SPSS are provided.

Target Audience:

Researchers, practitioners, and graduate students interested in quantitative methods of causal inference.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) list the limitations of standard regression/correlational analysis to discern causality statements in non-experimental data settings; (2) understand statistical principles of direction of dependence; (3) apply DDA in their own research.
 
 
Symposium #361
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Findings on Automatically Maintained Self-Injurious Behavior
Sunday, May 26, 2019
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom C
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Michelle A. Frank-Crawford (Kennedy Krieger Institute; University of Maryland, Baltimore County)
CE Instructor: Michelle A. Frank-Crawford, M.A.
Abstract:

Approximately 25% of self-injurious behavior is maintained by automatic reinforcement. Recent research has identified subtypes of automatically maintained self-injurious behavior (ASIB) based on levels of differentiation across play and no interaction conditions of functional analyses and the presence of self-restraint. Subtype classification and level of differentiation are highly predictive of response to treatment using reinforcement alone. The first presenter will provide an overview of results obtained during the course of a 5-year grant supported research project on subtypes of ASIB, summarizing data which replicate and extend earlier findings, as well as new findings with respect to injuries incurred from SIB, results of analyses examining sensitivity to contingencies on operant tasks, and the impact of procedures designed to promote alternative responses and disrupt SIB in the most treatment resistant subtypes. The second presenter will provide an in-depth review of findings from an augmented competing stimulus assessment that involves actively promoting engagement and blocking SIB to identify and establish competing stimuli. The third presenter will describe results from an assessment designed to examine differences in sensitivity to changing reinforcement parameters, which unexpectedly produced reductions SIB to uncharacteristically low levels. Each presenter will discuss potential implications of the findings.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Automatically maintained, competing stimulus, response competition, Self-injurious behavior
Target Audience:

Practitioners in applied settings; researchers

Learning Objectives: 1. Understand the concept of sensitivity to disruption by alternative reinforcement and how it distinguishes the various subtypes of automatically maintained self-injurious behavior, 2. Understand the implications of findings for future research on ASIB, 3. Understand the rationale for and procedures of the augmented competing stimulus assessment and single operant task and their potential utility in treatment.
 

Automatically-Maintained Self-Injury: A Summary of Findings From a Five Year study

LOUIS P. HAGOPIAN (Kennedy Krieger Institute; Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Griffin Rooker (Kennedy Krieger Institute; Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Michelle A. Frank-Crawford (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jennifer N. Haddock (Johns Hopkins School of Medicine, Kennedy Krieger Institute), Alexander Rodolfo Arevalo (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Christopher M Dillon (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Alyssa Fisher (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Noor Javed (Kennedy Kreiger Institute)
Abstract:

Results from a 5-year federally-funded research grant on automatically maintained self-injurious behavior (ASIB) will be reviewed. Subtypes are derived from the level of differentiation of SIB across play and no interaction conditions of functional analyses and the presence of self-restraint. Data replicating and extending earlier findings on subtypes of ASIB, and their differential responsiveness to treatment using reinforcement alone will be summarized. Findings related to self-restraint, injuries incurred from SIB, and behavioral sensitivity to contingencies on operant tasks across functional classes of SIB will be reviewed. New procedures designed to promote alternative responses and disrupt SIB in the most treatment resistant subtypes will be briefly discussed - and elaborated upon further by the other presenters. In addition to findings on ASIB, this work led to the refinement of methods for safely conducting research on SIB that may have clinical utility, the development of a preliminary model of injury production, and the application of methods and concepts used in precision medicine to define predictive behavioral markers. Implications of these findings for future research on ASIB will be discussed.

 

Initial Results From an Augmented Competing Stimulus Assessment

NOOR JAVED (Kennedy Kreiger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute; Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Michelle A. Frank-Crawford (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Alyssa Fisher (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Christopher M Dillon (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Griffin Rooker (Kennedy Krieger Institute; Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
Abstract:

A competing stimulus assessment (CSA) is used to identify stimuli that, when made freely available, reduce problem behavior - presumably via reinforcer competition. Recent research suggests that competing stimuli are more frequently identified for subtype 1 automatically reinforced behavior than for more treatment-resistant subtypes 2 and 3. We developed and applied an augmented CSA (A-CSA) with six individuals with treatment resistant subtypes of automatically maintained behavior. The A-CSA involves first providing free access to the test stimuli, then repeating the assessment while prompting engagement and, when necessary, blocking problem behavior. Prompting and blocking are then removed and the free access condition is repeated to determine if outcomes are improved. Results demonstrated that the number of effective stimuli and duration of engagement increased across the initial and repeated free access condition for all participants. Additionally, for 3 of 4 participants, response blocking resulted in further increases in engagement relative to prompted engagement alone. Changes across the initial and repeated free access condition may be related to the prompting and/or blocking procedures interrupting reinforcement maintaining problem behavior and facilitating contact with reinforcement available through stimulus engagement.

 

Reductions in Self-Injury Under Fixed Ratio Schedules in Treatment-Resistant Subtypes of Automatically Maintained Self-Injurious Behavior

CHRISTOPHER M DILLON (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Griffin Rooker (Kennedy Krieger Institute; Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Jennifer N. Haddock (Johns Hopkins School of Medicine, Kennedy Krieger Institute), Nabil Mezhoudi (New England Center for Children), Alexander Rodolfo Arevalo (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute; Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
Abstract:

Recent research on automatically maintained SIB (ASIB) has shown a positive relation between level of differentiation in the functional analysis and response to treatment using reinforcement alone – a dimension that has been characterized as sensitivity to disruption by alternative reinforcement. Relative to subtype 1 ASIB and socially maintained SIB, subtypes 2 and 3 ASIB show decreased sensitivity to disruption by alternative reinforcement. To examine whether the insensitivity of ASIB is specific to that response class, or is a generalized response tendency among individuals with these subtypes, individuals performed a single operant task under changing schedules of reinforcement (i.e., fixed and progressive ratio schedules, and extinction). Individuals with subtypes 2 and 3 ASIB showed comparable levels of sensitivity to reinforcement schedule changes relative to individuals with socially maintained SIB. During this assessment, uncharacteristically low levels of SIB were observed with the majority of participants with ASIB. Specifically, near zero rates of SIB were observed for six of the 10 participants with ASIB, and an 80% reduction in SIB relative to the toy play condition of the functional analysis was achieved with eight participants. The implications of these findings for research are discussed.

 
 
Symposium #362
CE Offered: BACB
EAHB SIG Distinguished Contributions Award: Celebrating the Contributions of Dr. Kathryn J. Saunders
Sunday, May 26, 2019
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich E-G
Area: EAB/EDC; Domain: Theory
Chair: J. Adam Bennett (Western Michigan University)
Discussant: Denice Rios Mojica (Western Michigan University)
CE Instructor: Denice Rios Mojica, M.A.
Abstract:

The Experimental Analysis of Human Behavior Special Interest Group invites you to formally recognize the contributions of Dr. Kathryn J. Saunders. Dr. Saunders's research interests have long focused on the Experimental Analysis of Behavior with extensions into Applied Behavior Analysis. A colleague of Dr. Saunders will reflect on her many contributions toward advancing our understanding of complex human behavior. Subsequently, Dr. Saunders will deliver comments reflecting upon her career and a topic of her choosing. Please join us to celebrate the contributions of Dr. Kathryn Saunders.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Human Operant, Multidisciplinary, Reading
Target Audience:

Researchers and practitioners

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the social significance of effective reading instruction; (2) summarize the underlying behavioral processes (e.g., stimulus control) that are foundational to reading; (3) discuss the interdisciplinary nature of reading instruction and research.
 
On the Importance of Component Discriminations: A Case History
CAROL PILGRIM (University of North Carolina Wilmington)
Abstract: A wise man once argued (Sidman, 1986) that science suffers when its advocates do not take the time to establish, train, and build on a body of systemized principles, characteristic measurement techniques, and standard investigative procedures. A wise woman (Saunders & Spradlin, 1989, 1990) once demonstrated the necessity of such basic component discriminations for advancing the study and understanding of more complex performances (e.g., arbitrary matching-to-sample and stimulus equivalence). This talk will highlight features of Dr. Saunders’ career that exemplify the benefits to be accrued from holding true to this analytic strategy
 
Studying Behavioral Processes That Underlie Reading Difficulties in the Human-Operant Lab
KATHRYN SAUNDERS (The University of Kansas)
Abstract: Reading is required to thrive in our culture. Yet approximately 20% of children have great difficulty learning to read, despite receiving phonics-based instruction. Unfortunately problems often occur in developing the foundation upon which further growth depends––reading words that have not been taught directly. The result is a cascading, long-term negative impact on reading achievement. Over the last few decades, reading scientists have identified previously unappreciated prerequisite and component skills associated with success in learning to read. These skills can be analyzed in the human-operant laboratory, and the analysis applied to the development of improved instruction. In particular, the behavioral process of abstraction, along with precise stimulus control in relational learning (which can be surprisingly difficult to achieve), are critical to early reading success. The relevance of laboratory work on stimulus control to problems in reading instruction has made my collaborations with researchers from Speech/Language, Communication Disorders, and Educational Psychology a seamless, not to mention essential, process. I will discuss scientific ties to the reading literature, the inherently interdisciplinary nature of behavior analysis, and illustrate the acceptance of behavior-analytic thinking among researchers who are working together to solve a problem.
 
 
Symposium #363
CE Offered: BACB
Acceptance and Commitment Therapy Goes to School: Effectiveness of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy on Academic Performance, Classroom Disruption, and Psychological Flexibility
Sunday, May 26, 2019
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
Fairmont, Third Level, Regent
Area: EDC/DDA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Keyana Cooke (Saint Louis University)
CE Instructor: Emily Dzugan, M.S.
Abstract:

Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) has been shown to be an effective treatment strategy for a range of populations and behaviors. For instance, ACT has been shown to be effective with children to reduce bullying and other maladaptive behaviors, decrease food refusal, and increase attention during class activities. Recent behavior analytic attention has been paid to ACT with school aged children, as evident by a surge of behavior analysts interested in and using ACT in their practice. The current symposium will focus on three papers all using ACT with school aged children, across academic performance, classroom disruption/maladaptive behaviors, and psychological flexibility. The first paper will highlight the efficacy of PEAK-Transformation module for assisting children out of traditional behavior analytic services to ACT. The second paper will focus on the effects ACT had on three boys’ classroom engagement in a range of disruptive and maladaptive behaviors, and on-task behaviors. The final paper will explore the new AIM Curriculum (Dixon, 2017), and showcase outcomes on student academic performance and psychological flexibility. Attendees will gain first hand knowledge about three unique ways to bring ACT to school aged children, as well as see the effects of ACT on a range of behaviors.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Board Certified Behavior Analysts, Board Certified Assistant Behavior Analysts, Registered Behavior Technicians

Learning Objectives: At the end of the symposium, attendees will: 1. Identify useful psychometrics and other measurement systems for measuring psychological flexibility 2. Label similarities across ACT and Dixon's 2017 AIM curriculum 3. Define mechanisms of change when using ACT for school-aged children
 

The Efficacy of the PEAK-T Module for Transitioning Individuals From Traditional Applied Behavior Analytic Services to Acceptance and Commitment Therapy

(Service Delivery)
HALEY DAVIS (Southern Illinois University), Becky Barron (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract:

The current study evaluated the effects of implementing eight PEAK-T modules that targeted aspects of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) to two individuals who had been previously receiving ACT services. The participants had been targeted as struggling with the transition from traditional Applied Behavior Analytic services to ACT, with high levels of maladaptive behaviors, low ACT Quantitative Analysis Scale (AQAS) scores, and low scores on psychological flexibility assessments. Individuals were introduced to treatment in a staggered fashion according to multiple baseline across participants. Behaviors were recorded according to rate, and the assessments were conducted initially at baseline, prior to treatment, and at the conclusion of the study. Preliminary data suggests that the PEAK-T modules have been successful at achieving stable and/or increased scores for the AQAS. Additionally, maladaptive behaviors have displayed stable and/or decreased rates. Finally, it appears that there has not been a significant difference in scores between the beginning and the end of baseline for the psychological flexibility assessments. This may would suggest that the PEAK-T modules would be an effective tool for transitioning individuals from traditional Applied Behavior Analytic services to ACT.

 
Exploring the Effects of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy on Classroom Disruption and On-Task Behavior
(Applied Research)
EMILY DZUGAN (Saint Louis University), Alyssa N. Wilson (Saint Louis University), Heather Lynn Lewis (Saint Louis University)
Abstract: Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) has demonstrated effectiveness across a wide-range of populations; yet to date, no published research has demonstrated the utility of Dixon’s (2014) ACT curriculum as a treatment for children in an educational setting. Therefore, the purpose of the study was to determine the effects of one-on-one ACT treatment on three participating students’ in-class behaviors. A nonconcurrent multiple baseline across participants with an embedded ABCB design was used. Two control conditions were incorporated into the experimental design: (a) pull-out version one was included to control for variables present in ACT therapy in this setting (e.g., escape from class and non-contingent adult attention); and (b) pull-out version two assessed the necessity of tailoring ACT treatment for children. Following ACT, challenging behaviors decreased to stable levels and on-task behaviors increased to stable levels. Following both versions of the pull-out condition, challenging behaviors surged to higher levels than previously demonstrated in both baseline and ACT conditions. Psychological measures (e.g., AFQ-Y and CAMM) showed both inconsistent and some negative score changes following treatment. Potential reasonings are discussed. Overall, these results support the utility of individual, tailored ACT treatment as an effective treatment for children and adolescents in the school setting.
 

An Exploration of the Accept-Identify-Move Curriculum: Impacting Psychological Flexibility and Academic Performance

(Applied Research)
ASHA FULLER (Arizona State University), Adam DeLine Hahs (Arizona State University), Pilar Isabella Bonilla (Arizona Association of Behavior Analysis (AZABA))
Abstract:

The AIM curriculum (Dixon, 2017) was developed to facilitate social-emotional development in children. Given its novelty, little research of any scope has been conducted exploring the efficacy of the curriculum. To that end, the current study seeks to explore the efficacy of the AIM program on student performance related to promoting psychological flexibility and increasing overall academic performance, while decreasing experiential avoidance and challenging behavior-related issues. We implemented the Mindfulness and Acceptance and Commitment Therapy portions of AIM with students aged 5-12. Additionally, we assessed the extent to which infusing these approaches within classrooms would impact teacher and instructional aid (IA) psychological flexibility and overall job satisfaction. Results suggest that student psychological flexibility increased over the duration of their exposure to AIM.

 
 
Panel #365
CE Offered: BACB
The Balanced Scorecard: A Values-Based Approach to Clinical and Operational Metrics
Sunday, May 26, 2019
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Toronto
Area: OBM/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Kristine Rodriguez, Ph.D.
Chair: Gina T. Chang (Autism Learning Partners)
CELINA LOPEZ (Autism Learning Partners)
KRISTINE RODRIGUEZ (Autism Learning Partners)
RACHAEL SCHNEIDER (Autism Learning Partners)
Abstract:

Applied Behavior Analysis is distinguished by its broad social impact, compelling clinicians to provide treatment in alignment with best practice literature and client values; this alignment comprises a broad framework for evidence-based practices (EBP). When clinician operators are tasked with determining metrics to measure performance across an organization, a values-based approach considers clinician values, guided by the Professional and Ethical Compliance Code, in addition to EBP. This panel explores the evolution of a balanced scorecard, a values-based approach to selecting weighted clinical and operational metrics. Panelists will give an overview of the process for developing a mission statement that drives clinical and business practice, as well as a presentation of interventions that successfully improved key metrics: family satisfaction, staff retention, and clinical quality. Performance management strategies, to promote enthusiastic adoption of organizational initiatives, will be discussed. At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: engage in a values-based discussion to identify mission-critical organizational metrics, describe successful interventions to promote family and staff satisfaction, and develop systems for objectively measuring and improving quality of services.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Behavior Analysts

Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to engage in a values-based discussion to identify mission-critical organizational metrics, describe successful interventions to promote family and staff satisfaction, and develop systems for objectively measuring and improving quality of services.
Keyword(s): clinical quality, operational metrics, performance management, values
 
 
Special Event #367
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
CREATIVITY: Panel
Sunday, May 26, 2019
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD North
Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Darlene E. Crone-Todd (Salem State University)
CE Instructor: Darlene E. Crone-Todd, Ph.D.
Panelists: DARLENE E. CRONE-TODD (Salem State University), KENT JOHNSON (Morningside Academy), DOUGLAS A. JOHNSON (Western Michigan University), PETER R. KILLEEN (Arizona State University), MARCUS JACKSON MARR (Georgia Tech), JESUS ROSALES-RUIZ (University of North Texas)
Abstract:

This panel features the six speakers from the "creativity" thematic sessions and will include a question and answer period with the audience.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
DARLENE E. CRONE-TODD (Salem State University)
KENT JOHNSON (Morningside Academy)
DOUGLAS A. JOHNSON (Western Michigan University)
PETER R. KILLEEN (Arizona State University)
MARCUS JACKSON MARR (Georgia Tech)
JESUS ROSALES-RUIZ (University of North Texas)
 
 
Invited Panel #369
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
Diversity submission Promoting Diversity and Inclusion in Behavioral Science
Sunday, May 26, 2019
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: SCI; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Jennifer R. Zarcone (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
CE Instructor: Jennifer R. Zarcone, Ph.D.
Panelists: JOMELLA WATSON-THOMPSON (University of Kansas), TRACI CIHON (University of North Texas), DIANA WALKER (Trinity Services; Illinois Crisis Prevention Network)
Abstract:

Behavior analysis has addressed issues of social justice since the early formation of its field. Early basic and theoretical work provided promise for addressing such issues, while the advent of applied behavior analysis explicitly demonstrated the power of behavioral science in addressing issues of societal concern. Despite the celebrated social validity of behavior analysis, issues of diversity and inclusion persist. This panel features three scientists who have effectively addressed issues of diversity and inclusion in their own laboratories. The discussion will highlight ways to foster diversity and inclusion in the operations and makeup of lab groups, in addition to discussing ways behavior analysis can leverage its science to answer research questions regarding issues of diversity and inclusion in broader cultural contexts. Questions from the audience will be welcomed and encouraged.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe current limitations in behavior analyst’s science communication, (2) describe contemporary methods of engaging the public with science communication via social media, and (3) operationalize ways behavior analysts can change their dissemination tactics to better communicate science.
JOMELLA WATSON-THOMPSON (University of Kansas)

Dr. Jomella Watson-Thompson is an Associate Professor in the Department of Applied Behavioral Science, a Senior Faculty Associate with the Center for Service Learning. and an Associate Director for the Center for Community Health and Development at the University of Kansas.  She attained a Ph.D. in Behavioral Psychology and a Masters of Urban Planning from the University of Kansas. She applies behavioral science methods and interventions to improve how communities address issues related to community health and development. Her research has focused on neighborhood development, substance abuse prevention, and youth and community violence prevention. Dr. Thompson uses a community-based participatory approach to address social determinants or factors that may contribute to disparities, particularly for marginalized groups and communities. She has researched the effects of community-based processes and interventions to promote mobilization and change in communities.  Dr. Thompson has co-authored articles on community capacity-building, youth development, and prevention and received numerous federal, state and local funding awards.  She is as an Associate Editor with Behavior and Social Issues.  Dr. Thompson serves as a Principal with Ad Astra Community Innovations Group, and has extensive experience providing training, technical support and evaluation for coalitions and community-based initiatives.

TRACI CIHON (University of North Texas)
Traci M. Cihon, Ph.D., BCBA-D is an Associate Professor in the Department of Behavior Analysis at The University of North Texas (UNT). She teaches graduate level courses in Behavior Principles; Verbal Behavior; and Legal, Ethical and Professional Issues. She oversees the Teaching Science Lab, which is a system that designs, delivers, and evaluates the undergraduate Introduction to Behavior Analysis courses and she co-supervises the Cultural Selection Lab. Dr. Cihon has worked in several clinical and academic systems including public and private sectors in both school and home settings in and outside of the US with a variety of individuals with disabilities, children who are at-risk for school failure, and university students. Her scholarship focuses on verbal behavior, international and interdisciplinary dissemination of behavior analysis, behavior analysis as applied to social issues – namely education, and cultural selection and has published in a number of peer-reviewed journals both within and outside of the field of behavior analysis. Dr. Cihon serves on the editorial boards for several major disciplinary and non-disciplinary peer-reviewed journals such as The Analysis of Verbal Behavior, the American Annals of the Deaf, Perspectives on Behavior Science, and she is an Associate Editor for Behavior and Social Issues.
DIANA WALKER (Trinity Services; Illinois Crisis Prevention Network)
Diana Walker received her Ph.D. in Psychology (Behavior Analysis focus) from the University of Florida in 1996, where she studied basic behavioral principles and behavioral pharmacology in nonhumans under the mentorship of Dr. Marc Branch. She also helped out with Dr. Brian Iwata’s research on the treatment of self-injurious behavior of adults with intellectual disabilities. She then spent ten years conducting NIH-funded research with Dr. Jim Zacny on reinforcing and other abuse liability-related effects of medically used drugs in humans at The University of Chicago. In 2004 Diana began teaching in The Chicago School of Professional Psychology's Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) Department, becoming Chair of the department in 2011. Diana still teaches for the department and advises doctoral students, but her full-time job is with the Illinois Crisis Prevention Network, providing crisis-intervention services to people with intellectual disabilities and mental illness who engage in severe challenging behavior. Diana is currently interested in making behavioral services more accessible, effective, and compassionate; mentoring new behavior analysts to be conceptually systematic and essentially empathic; and using a radical-behaviorist approach to addressing social and cultural concerns. Diana has a strong commitment to diversity and social justice and to applying behavior analysis to those issues
 
 
Symposium #399
CE Offered: BACB
Response Persistence: Token Economies, Overjustification, and Behavioral Momentum
Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom A
Area: AUT/EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Cormac MacManus (New England Center for Children)
CE Instructor: Cormac MacManus, M.S.
Abstract:

In this symposium, we will review the effects of reinforcement history on the persistence of behavior. The first presenter will share data on the response patterns of children with autism under lean and rich token schedules and yoked tandem schedules at varying response requirements. Our second presentation will explore the effects of aggregate reward history on overjustification and behavioral persistence, and to extend to which these may be a function of stimulus-reinforcer relations. Our final presenter will share data comparing the persistence strengthening effects of a DRA procedure in which reinforcement histories are developed concurrently vs. a DRA procedure in which reinforcement histories for two responses are developed separately.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): behavioral presistence, reinforcement history, reinforcement schedules
Target Audience:

Researchers interested in the pattern of responding and persistence of behavior under different reinforcement schedules and parameters.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: 1. Describe the effects of various schedules of the delivery and exchange of token reinforcers and tandem schedules on response patterns 2. Describe additional assessments to determine the reinforcing efficacy of stimuli from preference assessments 3. Describe the predictions of behavioral momentum theory in relation to DRA and behavioral persistence and one method for mediating these effects
 

Effects of Token and Tandem Reinforcement Schedules on in Applied Settings

LAURA SENN (Florida Institute of Technology), Dana M. Gadaire (Florida Institute of Technology), Kristin M. Albert (Florida Institute of Technology), Michael Passage (Florida Institute of Technology), Yaara Shaham (The Scott Center/ Florida Institute of Technology), Basak Topcuoglu (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract:

Token economies are commonly used in educational and clinical settings as tools for reinforcing appropriate behavior as well as the absence of problem behavior. However, little applied research has been conducted to investigate the behavioral mechanisms through which token economies exert their effects. What’s more, research with non-human animals has shown that tokens may serve discriminative functions that may actually suppress responding under specific conditions. The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effects of various schedules of token delivery and exchange as well as yoked tandem schedules on response patterns in children with autism spectrum disorders. Four children ranging in age from 4 to 11 participated in the current study. We compared responding under lean and dense token delivery schedules with responding on tandem schedules at varying response requirements. Visual inspection of session to session graphs revealed variable responding within and across participants. However, aggregated response patterns revealed effects consistent with basic research on token and tandem schedules. Notably, token training was associated with increased response rates in most participants. Tokens were also found to suppress responding under some conditions (e.g., high response requirements). These findings provide further insight into the generality of basic research findings on token schedules to clinical settings.

 

The Effects of Aggregate Reinforcement History on Overjustification and Behavioral Momentum

ABBEY CARREAU-WEBSTER (May Institute), John C. Borrero (University of Maryland, Baltimore County)
Abstract:

The overjustification effect remains controversial across psychological perspectives. Cognitive researchers frequently find evidence of the phenomenon (Deci, Koestner, & Ryan, 2001), whereas behavioral researchers rarely observe the effect (Cameron & Pierce, 2002). Importantly, researchers have generally employed methods of investigation common to their own field. This has occasioned consistent differences across perspectives in the rate and aggregate history of reinforcement prior to tests of overjustification. This is notable considering behavioral momentum literature indicates rate of reinforcement has a central importance in governing response persistence during disruption (such as extinction, as applied in the overjustification effect). Aggregate reward history may have similar effects, to the extent that heightened stimulus-reward associations may obtain over longer durations of stimulus-reinforcer pairings. This study examined the effects of aggregate reward history on overjustification and behavioral persistence, and the extent to which overjustification effects, like persistence, may be a function of stimulus-reinforcer relations. Results indicated that in 3 of 4 cases, longer histories of reinforcement were associated with stronger persistence values and less frequent overjustification effects, suggesting aggregate reward history may strengthen responding as it relates to these phenomena.

 

Persistence of Responding Following Differential Reinforcement of Alternative Behavior in Multiple Phases of Extinction

CORMAC MACMANUS (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children), Riley Fergus (New England Center for Children)
Abstract:

Behavioral momentum theory research has demonstrated that DRA based interventions, while decreasing the rate of a target response (i.e., problem behavior), may in fact increase the persistence of the target response when reinforcement for the alternative response is disrupted. Previous studies have demonstrated that by training the alternative response in a context in which a target response has no history of reinforcement and then combining this context with one in which the target response has a history of reinforcement, the persistence increasing effects of DRA can be minimized when disruption occurs. The present study replicated previous findings with individuals with developmental disabilities by showing that combining stimuli associated with a rich FI schedule for an alternative response with a comparatively leaner FI schedule for a target response reduced target respond persistence compared with concurrent training of the alternative and target responses. Participants engaged in comparatively similar novel responses across three colored conditions, in which target and alternative responding was reinforced separately and concurrently. Extinction tests were used to test response persistence across the concurrent and combined stimulus conditions. The current study extends previous research by replicating this finding within participants following resumption of reinforcement phases and subsequent disruption phases.

 
 
Symposium #400
CE Offered: BACB
Investigating the Impact of Derived Relational Responding and the PEAK Relational Training System
Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom B
Area: AUT/EDC; Domain: Translational
Chair: Arianna Charos (Arizona State University)
CE Instructor: Becky Barron, M.S.
Abstract:

The present symposium serves as investigation to the various ways in which the technology of Derived Relational Responding (DRR) and the PEAK Relational Assessment System may extend beyond the typical contexts in which it is applied and the implications for the science of behavior analysis and beyond. We will provide promising evidence supporting PEAK's use within behavior analysis and the potentially massive impacts these endeavors could have when communicating with or about other psychologies, diagnoses, and ethnicities.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): DRR, Intelligence, PEAK
Target Audience:

beginner-intermediate behavior analysts

 

An Evaluation of Low Dose Applied Behavior Analysis Therapy With the Inclusion of Derived Relational Responding on Changes of Intelligence for Children With Autism

(Applied Research)
BECKY BARRON (Southern Illinois University), Jessica M Hinman (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract:

Applied Behavior Analytic (ABA) therapy has one of the largest bodies of literature on effective treatment interventions for children with autism. Parents, providers, teachers, and insurance companies always have to worry about how much intervention is best, and at what cost is enough. There is limited research on the effects of ABA at various hour doses per week, although most providers will always advocate for “more is better.” The current study sought to investigate the impact of a low dose of ABA at 4 hours per week compared to a larger dose of ABA at 10 hours per week, over an 8-week period. In addition to traditional discrete trial intervention, all participants received. Children’s intelligence quotients were measured before and after intervention. Preliminary results suggest that children who received the larger dose had greater gains in intelligence, but some children who received the lower dose also made positive gains. These preliminary results suggest that ABA with relational training at a low dose may still be an effective treatment option for some children if a larger dose is not available. In addition, improvements on derived relational responding skills will also be assessed and discussed.

 

Relational Framing to Promote Academic Achievement and Intelligence Scores in Individuals With and Without Autism

(Applied Research)
CALEB STANLEY (Southern Illinois University), Ayla Schmick (Southern Illinois University), Becky Barron (Southern Illinois University), Kwadwo O. Britwum (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract:

Over the past several decades, the number of individuals that receive an education from the public-school system has increased significantly, along with an increase in equal access regardless of disability or socioeconomic status. Despite the increased access and amount of resources afforded to the educational system, a corresponding increase in academic performance and intellectual ability has not been observed. Therefore, an empirically validated method for increasing these behaviors is necessary. The current study aimed to evaluate the effect of a set of procedures based on Relational Frame Theory on academic performance and intelligence. Experimenters obtained pre-training and post-training performances by administering Curriculum-Based Measures and WISC-V IQ tests to a control group and an intervention group. Following pre-training assessment, the intervention group was exposed to a series of relational training phases, in which the participants were required to respond in accordance with arbitrarily applicable relational responding across a series of relational tasks. Following training the participants in the intervention group showed improvement in academic performance and an increase in IQ, whereas those in the control group did not. Taken together, the results add to a growing body of literature that support the use of RFT-based interventions to promote complex behaviors.

 
Normative Sample of the Chinese Version PEAK Relational Training System: Direct Training Module
(Applied Research)
ZHIHUI YI (Arizona State University), Adam DeLine Hahs (Arizona State University)
Abstract: The PEAK Relational Training System is an increasingly popular assessment and treatment program among clinicians working with developmental disabilities. However to date, no research has examined to what extend the knowledge gathered can be generalized into a different language or cultural setting. The current research examined and established the normative sample of a Chinese version of the PEAK: Direct Training Module. All 184 programs were translated into Chinese. 21 programs were modified to adapt to the Chinese language setting. Programs were back-translated and verified by a PEAK expert. 310 families with typical-developing children from Beijing, China signed up for this research. Preliminary data suggested that the PEAK total score among Chinese participants fit the score-age distribution among US populations. However, discrepancy existed between different factors. As we collect more responses, we would examine the correlation between the performance-age distribution between the Chinese population and the US population. We would provide the normative sample of the Chinese version of the PEAK: Direct Training Module and assess whether it would be appropriate to use this module to assess the behavioral skill among 2-12 years old children.
 
 
Symposium #401
CE Offered: BACB
Assessment and Intervention: Adjusting the Lens
Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Cynthia P. Livingston (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
CE Instructor: Cynthia P. Livingston, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Both clinicians and applied researchers describe themselves as applied behavior analysts. This symposium includes three presentations that provide information and strategies that are relevant to both. The first presentation is on the use of praise in the demand condition of an FA, and examines its effect on escape as a reinforcer. The second examines a strategy to increase the range of preferred and reinforcing stimuli for children with autism. The third presents an alternative way to examine data that can both clarify results for researchers and provide useful information for clinicians.

Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): data analysis, escape, functional analysis, video modeling
Target Audience:

Behavior analysts who work with children with disabilities including autism.

Learning Objectives: 1. What alternatives are there to examine latency data? 2. What, if any, are the effects of video modeling on preference? 3. What effect does praise during the demand condition of an FA have on rate and establishing operations.
 

Effects of Video Modeling on Preference and Reinforcer Value in Children With Autism

(Applied Research)
CYNTHIA P. LIVINGSTON (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Andrew L. Samaha (University of South Florida)
Abstract:

Autism Spectrum Disorder is a developmental disability characterized by social, behavioral, and communicative impairments. A primary characteristic of Autism includes restrictive and repetitive patterns of behavior. Because having few preferred items and activities can lead to educational, social, and communication barriers, it is important to identify additional preferred stimuli to incorporate into the individual’s environment. One way to identify potential reinforcers is via preference assessments. Although substantial literature exists on ways to identify preferred stimuli there may be occasions when those methods fail to identify a large variety of preferred items, or items that function as reinforcers . In these cases, another approach to increasing the variety and number of preferred and reinforcing stimuli may be to increase preference and reinforcer value for items that are readily available, but low preferred. One novel approach to doing this includes video modeling. The purpose of the current study was to assess effects of video modeling on preference and reinforcer value of previously low-preferred stimuli.

 

Instantaneous Rate: A Method to Assist Visual Analysis of Latency-Based Data

(Applied Research)
ANTHONY CONCEPCION (University of South Florida), Andrew L. Samaha (University of South Florida), Paige Talhelm (University of South Florida)
Abstract:

Recent studies have demonstrated the use of latency as an index of response strength in the assessment and treatment of behavior (e.g., Thomason-Sassi et al., 2011). However, latency-based single subject designs may be difficult to interpret given how latency values are depicted graphically. Although visual inspection is the primary method of analyzing single-case subject designs, previous studies have primarily focused on interrater agreement of rate or frequency as primary measures. An alternative method to depicting latency-based measures and instantaneous rate may be a useful tool for clinicians to interpret latency-based graphs and in comparing latency to non-latency-based graphs.

 
Some Effects of Praise During the Escape Condition of the Functional Analysis
(Applied Research)
JENNIFER REBECCA WEYMAN (University of South Florida), Sarah E. Bloom (University of South Florida), Claudia Campos (Florida Institute of Technology), Anna Garcia (University of South Florida)
Abstract: Many researchers provide praise for complying with demands during the escape condition of the functional analysis. However, praise may function as a reinforcer for some individuals diagnosed with autism and intellectual disabilities. This may reduce the aversiveness of task presentation or increase behavior that competes with problem behavior (e.g., compliance with demands). In general, this may result in lower or less stable levels of problem behavior and decrease the efficiency of the functional analysis. Thus, the purpose of the current study was to evaluate some effects of praise on the rate of problem behavior and compliance during the escape condition of the functional analysis in children diagnosed with autism and intellectual disabilities. We found that there may be a slight advantage to not providing praise for compliance during the escape condition of the functional analysis for some individuals. We will discuss the implications of our results and future research directions.
 
 
Symposium #402
CE Offered: BACB
Using Self-Management Strategies as Replacement Behaviors for Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder
Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom C
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Adrianna O. Zambrzycka (Center for Children with Special Needs)
Discussant: Mark J. Palmieri (The Center for Children with Speical Needs)
CE Instructor: Elizabeth C. Nulty, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorders commonly engage in inflexible or rigid behaviors, such as deciding on a game to play with a peer, insisting that they drink from a certain cup, or wearing a specific shirt daily. Interruption of these behaviors often evokes challenging behavior; leading to reduced access to home, school, and community environments. When analyzing the complex nature of these behaviors and the resulting challenging behavior, behavior analysts must identify not only management strategies and topography specific replacement skills but also the underlying skill deficits present in the children’s profile. This symposium describes how behavioral cusp skills can be targeted for instruction to provide the learner with a conceptual framework of self-management skills that can evolve in complexity as they encounter varying situations and engage in novel topographies of behavior. Two papers will be presented, with the first outlining strategies for teaching generalized problem-solving strategies and the second focusing on teaching children to accurately self-report their emotional state and then apply a previously trained coping strategy.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): problem solving, self-management
Target Audience:

This symposium is for anyone working with children with autism who need self-management strategies.

Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will identify the components to teaching problem solving strategies to children on the autism spectrum. 2. Participants will identify the components for teaching individuals on the autism spectrum to accurately self-identify their own challenging behavior in the moment.
 
Teaching Children on the Autism Spectrum Generalized Problem Solving Skills
SHAUNESSY M. EGAN (The Center for Children with Special Needs), Samuel Hauslaib (Center for Children with Special Needs)
Abstract: Often when a conflict or challenge arises in the environment, individuals on the autism spectrum rely on others to identify the problem and provide them with guidance on the steps required to manage the situation successfully. Within home and school settings, instruction is often focused on teaching the child how to respond to a series of specific situations and engage in prescribed alternative behaviors, resulting in little opportunity for spontaneous generalization. By focusing instead on teaching critical thinking skills related to problem solving both small issues (e.g., “I’m bored, and I don’t know what to play”) and large issues (e.g., “I’m bullied at school”), generalized responses are acquired and the over-reliance on adult support on can be decreased in novel situations. This paper focuses on teaching children ages 7-12 years old, diagnosed with autism spectrum disorders, how to critically think through individualized scenarios, by teaching problem solving in in clinical setting. Additionally, strategies for supporting caregivers to expand the skills that have been mastered in a contrived format to naturally occurring novel situations will be discussed.
 

Using Self-Management Training to Teach Children With Autism to Accurately Self-Identify Challenging Behaviors

ELIZABETH C. NULTY (Center for Children with Special Needs), Samuel Hauslaib (Center for Children with Special Needs)
Abstract:

Individuals on the autism spectrum are frequently unaware of how their behavior affects others in their environment. It can be challenging for the individual with autism to self-identify the antecedents in their environments that may evoke their own challenging behaviors and for the individual to then manage their behavior in the moment. This paper first reviews strategies for instructing students to self-tact their behavior according to a five-point Likert scale. The paper then describes how the child specific labels were yoked to self-management programming to teach children, ages 7-12 years old, how to identify the environmental situations and establishing operations that affect their behavior, identify in the moment that they are engaging in a specific behavior, and apply individualized coping strategies in-vivo. The data presented will include agreement scores based on the child’s self-monitoring data as compared the ratings of staff members, along with social validity information gathered from caregiver surveys.

 
 
Invited Paper Session #404
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

Novel Behavioral Targets and Outcomes in Treating Cocaine Use Disorder

Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: BPN; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: William Stoops, Ph.D.
Chair: Sally L. Huskinson (University of Mississippi Medical Center)
WILLIAM STOOPS (University of Kentucky)
Dr. William Walton Stoops, a Professor in the Departments of Behavioral Science, Psychiatry and Psychology at the University of Kentucky, earned his Bachelor’s degree in Psychology from Davidson College in Davidson, NC and his Master’s degree and Ph.D. in Psychology from the University of Kentucky. His research evaluates the behavioral and pharmacological factors that contribute to drug use disorders, focusing especially on cocaine use disorder. Dr. Stoops’ research contributions resulted in receipt of the 2016 Psychologist of the Year Award from the Kentucky Psychological Association, the 2013 Joseph Cochin Young Investigator Award from the College on Problems of Drug Dependence and the 2008 Wyeth Young Psychopharmacologist Award from Division 28 (Psychopharmacology and Substance Abuse) of the American Psychological Association (APA). Dr. Stoops currently serves on the ABAI Science Board, chairs the Program Committee for the College on Problems of Drug Dependence and is Editor of Experimental and Clinical Psychopharmacology.
Abstract:

Cocaine use disorder presents an enduring and significant public health concern. Despite decades of research, a widely effective and accepted treatment for cocaine use disorder remains to be identified. The failure to identify treatments may be due, in part, to the only accepted indicator of treatment efficacy: complete abstinence from cocaine. This presentation will provide an overview of human laboratory and clinical trial research that has identified other potential treatment targets that can be adopted as indicators of efficacy. These behavioral targets include attentional bias, inhibitory control and decision making. As the clinical relevance of these novel targets is demonstrated, they may become acceptable treatment outcomes and can be used to identify novel effective interventions for cocaine use disorder.

Target Audience:

Graduate students, Researchers, Board certified behavior analysts, Licensed psychologists

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) discuss the current state of treatment development for cocaine use disorder; (2) understand how novel treatment targets are evaluated in the human laboratory and in clinical trials; (3) appreciate how novel outcomes can change cocaine treatment development.
 
 
Symposium #405
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Ethical Integration of Applied Behavior Analysis Into an Acute Pediatric Medical Setting
Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 3/4
Area: CBM/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Terry J. Page (None)
Discussant: Terry J. Page (None)
CE Instructor: Terry J. Page, M.S.
Abstract:

Behavior analysts often work collaboratively with other disciplines; however, behavior analytic consultation within an acute pediatric medical setting can present unique ethical challenges. During consultation, behavior analysts are typically provided short time frames to conduct assessment and implement treatment. However, behavior analysts still need to follow ethical guidelines to work with medical colleagues to rule out medical etiology and determine how to safely conduct assessments and implement treatment in a medically compromised patient population or patients who are awaiting transfer to in-patient psychiatric units. In addition, behavior analysts must disseminate behavior analysis in a setting where this technology is relatively novel to other team members, who are more familiar with pharmacologic interventions and psychotherapy to manage problem behaviors. This symposia will discuss the use of traditional and synthesized functional analyses within a pediatric medical setting as well as the implementation function-based treatment to reduce life-threatening behavior, and demonstrate the use of behavior analysis to help inform medical decision-making with medically and behaviorally complex patients.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): ethical collaboration, functional analysis, medical hospital, pharmacology
Target Audience:

Target audience includes behavior analysts practicing in a variety of settings, specifically those working in consultation roles and as part of an interdisciplinary team and those working with medically complex populations.

 
Implementing Functional Analyses and Function Based Treatment in a Medical Setting
KRISTIN VESPE (Children's Hospital of Philadelphia)
Abstract: An acute pediatric medical setting presents unique challenges when assessing problem behavior and implementing function based treatment. The patient’s length of stay can vary greatly based on the admission problem and criteria for safe discharge. The length of stay for behavioral health patients can be as short as a few hours prior to a patient discharging to an in-patient psychiatric facility. If behavioral assessment is needed in a relatively short time, synthesized functional analyses are an alternative to a traditional functional analysis. When patients present with life-threatening behaviors, such as self-decannulation, patient safety is most important when selecting assessment methodology. In one case this was achieved through the use of latency- and trial-based functional analysis. This methodology allowed behavior analysts to assess the function of the behavior while mitigating the risk of eliciting the behavior with greater frequency than the patient’s baseline rates. When function-based treatment is implemented consistently by the treatment team and results in a decrease in problem behavior, it may result in a decreased length of hospital stay and/or discharge to a less restrictive environment than initially projected.
 

Integrating Applied Behavior Analysis Into a Medical Setting

VIRGINIA KAUFMANN (Children's Hospital of Philadephia)
Abstract:

Integrating applied behavior analysis into an acute medical setting allows opportunities for technology to be utilized with a diverse patient population. A transdisciplinary team within a pediatric medical hospital may include nursing, psychiatry and psychology, neurology, and other medical professionals. The ability to provide objective data regarding patient behavior can help inform medical decisions in complex cases in which the transdisciplinary team has struggled to make progress related to the patient’s behavior. This may include decisions to make changes in psychotropic or other medications, as well as providing input into difficult diagnoses. Behavioral intervention and the use of data-based decision-making has been useful with patients with a variety of medical diagnoses, including anti-NMDA receptor encephalitis, functional neurologic/conversion disorder, and avoidant/restrictive food intake disorder (ARFID), with the benefit of minimizing the amount of as needed/PRN medications given to patients, informing the transdisciplinary team on timing of standing medications, and discharging patients to less restrictive settings.

 
 
Symposium #406
CE Offered: BACB
Applied Behavior Analysis in Sports: Evaluating Successful Applications and Assessments Across Sports
Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 1/2
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jesse DePaolo (University of South Florida)
CE Instructor: Jesse DePaolo, M.A.
Abstract:

This symposium will consist of three papers related to sports assesments and research. The first paper, by Schenk and Miltenberger, discuss the effects of video self-evaluation and video feedback on golf performance. Specifically, the improvement of the golfer’s long-iron swing. The second paper, by Greenberg and Crosland, discuss the use of a video feedback procedure, using the Dartfish application, to increase figure skaters’ performance on six established figure skating moves. Lastly, DePaolo et al. discuss the development and implementation of a sports based performance diagnostic checklist, based off of previously designed PBM PDC’s (Austin 2000 & Martinez-Onstott et al. 2016). The golf and figure skating papers discuss and demonstrate the effectiveness of ABA in sports, while the Sports PDC discusses the importance of working with the coaches and athlete’s prior to intervention and having them be part of the process to choose what behavior(s) to study and what intervention(s) to implement.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

The target audience for this presentation are researchers interested in disseminating behavior analysis. Specifically, those studying, or interested in studying, sports, fitness, and athletics. Also, those interested in the proper use of video feedback and assessment tools.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to identify interventions to increase performance. At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to compare the benefits of video self-evaluation and video feedback. At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to demonstrate proper use of an assessment tool to help determine what athletic behavior(s) to intervene on.
 
Evaluating Video Self-Evaluation and Video Feedback to Improve Swing Form in Golf
MERRITT SCHENK (University of South Florida), Raymond G. Miltenberger (University of South Florida)
Abstract: The use of video technologies to improve sports performance has been common practice for some time and is gaining popularity. However, there are still questions as to which component, or components, of the video technology can be used to most efficiently improve performance. Multiple studies have shown that video feedback is a very effective procedure. However, golf is an individualized sport, and, therefore, the use of video feedback introduces several variables that would not usually be present when a golfer is practicing, most notably is the presence of an experimenter. Thus, we evaluated video self-evaluation versus video feedback to improve long-iron swing form for 4 to 5 golfers. Overall, we found that video self-evaluation can be useful for some individuals. However, video feedback appears to be the most effective procedure for most participants. The procedures, results, and implications of this study will be discussed, as well as ideas for future research.
 
Using Video Feedback to Increase Figure Skaters’ Performance
Lori Greenberg (University of South Florida), KIMBERLY CROSLAND (University of South Florida)
Abstract: Figure skating is a competitive sport that requires intensive training which can be taught in a variety of settings. There are various methods to teaching figure skaters new skills such as positive and corrective feedback, modeling and coaching procedures, and physical guidance. These different approaches may lead to a lack of consistency among coaches. Over the years, these established coaching strategies have not changed substantially as training methods are passed down from coach to student. Skaters may progress more quickly in skill development if coaches are implementing empirically based successful coaching methods. These teaching approaches may also be enhanced by incorporating the latest technology available. This study evaluated the effectiveness of a video feedback coaching procedure using the Dartfish application. A multiple baseline design was utilized to document the impact of this video feedback coaching procedure on the demonstration of six established figure skating moves, three moves for one skater and three different moves for two other skaters. Results showed utilizing video feedback improved figure skater’s performance levels on the targeted moves to an acquisition of 80% accuracy or higher.
 
Sports Based PDC: Assessing What Behaviors to Study and How to Intervene
JESSE DEPAOLO (University of South Florida), Kimberly Crosland (University of South Florida), Nicole Gravina (University of Florida)
Abstract: This paper discusses a sports assessment tool, based off of the Performance Diagnostic Checklist (Austin, 2000). This tool can be used by coaches and athletes and has two main goals. First, to ensure that the behavior of interest is of social significance. Researchers often approach coaches with an idea on what behavior to study and are not necessarily considering the importance of this behavior on the team beforehand. This tool allows for coaches and players to determine if the behavior is of social significance to their performance. The second goal is to bridge any gaps between coach’s and player’s perspectives on the behavior of interest. Coaches often tell researchers that players are ‘choosing’ not to perform the behavior. Interventions are then based around increasing behavior. However, sometimes players don’t know how to perform the behavior and the intervention needs to focus on teaching the skill, before increasing frequency. Though this paper is conceptual, it ties into the other papers in this symposium by acknowledging that sports research works, and it is something that people are interested in. However, the current way researchers are determining what behaviors to study may not be ideal and this paper discusses a possible solution.
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #408
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

The Urge to Smoke and the Urge to Urinate: Pavlovian Processes in Health-Related Behaviors

Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: DEV; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: R. Douglas Greer, Ph.D.
Chair: R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School of Arts and Sciences)
KATHLEEN O'CONNELL (Teachers College, Columbia University)

Kathleen A. O’Connell, Ph.D., RN, FAAN, FABMR is the Isabel Maitland Stewart Professor of Nursing Education at Teachers College Columbia University. She received her PhD in Psychology from the University of Kansas and did a Postdoctoral Fellowship in psychology at Purdue University. She is a fellow of the American Academy of Nursing, the Association for Psychological Science, and the Academy of Behavioral Medicine Research. In her research on health behavior in diabetes, smoking cessation, and overactive bladder syndrome, she has applied various theories, including value expectancy theory, self-regulation theory, reversal theory, the theory of self-control strength, Pavlovian theory, and Pavlovian instrumental transfer.

Abstract:

Although it seems obvious that operant learning processes are important in the acquisition of addictive behaviors like smoking, I report on the importance of Pavlovian processes in the extinction of smoking and in the acquisition of urinary urge incontinence. Context is important in the extinction of behaviors. After responses to conditioned stimuli have been extinguished in one context, responding resumes when the organism enters a different context. Our work using ecological momentary assessment techniques showed that resisting urges to smoke is context-dependent and that using the stimulus control strategy of staying away from available cigarettes functions as an extinction context that does little to prepare ex-smokers for when they inevitably encounter a context with available cigarettes. Pavlovian processes are also responsible for the acquisition of some behaviors that contribute to pathological conditions, including the phenomenon of key-in-the-lock incontinence, which is cue-stimulated urinary urgency and incontinence when arriving at the entrance to one’s home. I will report our research on the effect of conditioned stimuli on daytime urinary urgency and nocturia, including the effect of displaying urge-related and neutral stimuli during urodynamic assessment of bladder contractions and during functional magnetic resonance imaging of the brains of individuals with urge incontinence.

Target Audience:

Researchers interested in Pavlovian processes in humans and researchers and clinicians interested in health behaviors.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) explain that extinction of conditioned stimuli is context-dependent, (2) discuss how stimulus control techniques may ultimately lead to relapse in addictive behaviors when individuals enter contexts where the stimuli are available, and (3) describe how Pavlovian processes are important in the acquisition of behaviors related to urinary urgency and incontinence.
 
 
Symposium #410
CE Offered: BACB
Context Modulates Sensitivities to Sunk Time and Delay to Reinforcement
Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich A
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Nicole L. Bank (The PartnerShip, LLC)
Discussant: T. V. Joe Layng (Generategy, LLC)
CE Instructor: Nicole L. Bank, M.S.
Abstract:

The research on the effects of delay to reinforcement is robust. The literature base demonstrates the extent to which delays affect responding with standard reinforcers. These investigations try to understand the effects of delays in typical online contexts. Bank and Vaidya explore contexts where search engine users are sensitive to a delay to search results. Hantula explains why time spent in an online dating context leads to an increased selection of sub-optimal matches. Prompts for future research projects are provided.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): CHOICE, DELAY, INTERNET
Target Audience:

Appropriate attendees for this presentation are behavior analysts with a basic understanding of quantitative models in choice responding and a general interest in how these models apply in typical online contexts.

 

Effects of Delay on Search Engine Choice

NICOLE L. BANK (University of North Texas; The PartnerShip, LLC), Manish Vaidya (University of North Texas)
Abstract:

Current research and development of search engines relies on satisfaction surveys and group designs to identify key features. Such is the case when studying the effects of delay to search results. The literature studying the effects of delay to other commodities indicates the preference for the commodity decreases as the delay to the commodity increases. This study explored whether such an effect occurs in an online information search setting and if such an effect could be arranged in a choice scenario. In the context of a trivia game scenario participants were instructed to search quickly using one of two search engines. Participants were most sensitive to delays when the difference between the two search engine delays was greater than one second. As the difference between search engine delays decreased to a 0.5 second difference and a 0.25 second difference, performance approached indifference. These data suggest search engine results may be another context to study the effects of delay on choice.

 

The Waiting is the Hardest Part: Sunk Time Effects Online

DONALD A. HANTULA (Temple University)
Abstract:

Sunk costs are often assumed to motivate seemingly irrational choices (i.e. "throwing good money after bad"), but recent data reveal a more nuanced interpretation. This analysis is extended to an investigation of sunk time effects (situations in which time, not money, is invested) in online dating. Single young adults completed date profiles and searched for a potential date on an experimental dating site. Time between initiating a search and finding a matching date was systematically manipulated, and potential date "quality" ranged between 25%-75% compatibility. At low levels of compatibility, less than 50% of dates were accepted. However at 50% and 75% levels of compatibility, sunk cost had a strong linear effect on acceptance of a date, which was especially pronounced at the 75% level. These data show that sunk time effects, much like sunk cost effects, are not as general as assumed but are sensitive to context, and also that delay effects found in other studies of online consumer behavior extend to online dating choices.

 
 
Panel #412
CE Offered: BACB/NASP
Flexibly Navigating Outcomes That Matter in Academic Settings
Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Fairmont, Third Level, Crystal
Area: EDC; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Corinne Gist, Ed.S
Chair: Kathy Fox (Haugland Learning Center)
CORINNE GIST (The Ohio State University)
MARY SAWYER (TEAM Coaching)
LUCIE ROMANO (TEAM coaching)
Abstract:

The number of behavior analysts consulting in school settings has increased significantly over the past few years. Allowing an “outsider” into the classroom can sometimes be difficult for teachers and staff. Although behavior analysts are well trained in operationally defining behaviors and developing systematic and structured intervention plans, rigid adherence to specific procedures, protocols, and practices can be counterproductive. The result of rigidity around practices is often times detrimental to children who are the recipients of cookie-cutter interventions. This panel seeks to address settings, contexts, and populations for which it may be appropriate to be more flexible as a behavior analyst. The panelists have been consulting in public and private schools for a combined 30 years; additionally, all three presenters are former school-based practitioners themselves. Data, case studies, and anecdotal experiences consulting in a variety of educational settings from a behavior analytic perspective will be shared.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience: Behavior Analysts, School Psychologists
Learning Objectives: •Participants will be able to list appropriate strategies to use when building relationships with teachers and school staff. •Participants will be able to state specific strategies to use when including teachers and staff in the development and implementation of research-based interventions. Participants will be able to name Participants will be able to determine when a "flexible" intervention is needed.
Keyword(s): Classroom Management, School consulting, Skill acquisition, Teacher training
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #413
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

When the Stars Align: Managing Behavior-Based Interventions in a Workplace Academic Unit

Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom EF
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Douglas A. Johnson, Ph.D.
Chair: Douglas A. Johnson (Western Michigan University)
NELSON MILLER (Western Michigan University Cooley Law School,)
Nelson P. Miller is a licensed lawyer and Associate Dean and Professor at the Grand Rapids campus of Western Michigan University Cooley Law School. He manages a campus academic unit of from 150 to 750 law students and 12 to 24 full-time faculty members, as part of a four-campus law school, while administering the law school’s public-university affiliation. He has published over forty books and many more book chapters and scholarly articles on law, legal education, managing firms, finances, and organizations, and related subjects. Dean Miller’s three-year project with Western Michigan University’s Instructional-Design Research Lab, implementing campus behavior-based reforms, resulted in publication of five books including Teaching Law: A Behavioral Approach and Preparing for the Bar Exam: Plans, Programs, Content, Conditions, and Skills, the latter with organizational-management expert Dr. Douglas Johnson. The Harvard University Press book What the Best Law Teachers Do recognized Dean Miller’s instruction. The State Bar of Michigan recognized Dean Miller with its Pro Bono Service Award, following substantial service to individual clients and to statewide and national professional organizations. He is a frequent speaker, blogger, and media commentator.
Abstract:

Workplaces challenge reform efforts to improve productivity and outcomes. While not unique in this respect, academic workplaces, especially those in higher education, present special challenges in getting faculty members to accept needed reforms, given faculty members’ high expertise and academic-freedom-based independence. This presentation, data-based in part, summarizes insights from a three-year research-lab-supported project implementing successful behavior-based reforms at one unit of a multi-unit organization. The reforms raised the unit’s critical outcome, graduate passage of a licensing exam, well above the organization’s other units. Passing a licensing exam is the organization’s primary validated outcome, the statistics for which it confirms as reliable for accreditation purposes. Under the positive influence of the project’s organizational-management initiative, half of the unit’s faculty members volunteered to participate in the reforms, and their participation further induced reforms by non-participating faculty members in the same unit. The project eschewed managing by policy and mandate in favor of recognition reinforcement, supportive change context, participant control and choice, evidenced-based practices, and knowledge showcasing. The project focused participants on the behaviors that they wished to induce and on measuring those behaviors, while fostering team approaches within a unit culture that inoculated participants against adverse conditions imposed centrally across the organization.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) predict presenting problems; (2) propose potential solutions for implementing behavior-based improvements in a workplace academic unit, consistent with recognized behavior-analytic principles.
 
 
Panel #414
CE Offered: BACB
The Path to Entrepreneurship: Building a Behavioral Repertoire for Expanding the Field
Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Toronto
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Janet Vasquez, M.S.
Chair: Janet Vasquez (weTherapy)
GIANNA BISCONTINI (Biscontini Behavior)
KARELIX ALICEA (Lotus Behavioral Interventions)
SHANNON BIAGI (Chief Motivating Officers)
Abstract:

The BACB ethical code calls for behavior analysts to disseminate our practice beyond its current reach. Practitioners and researchers alike have made an enormous impact on the treatment of autism and related disabilities, but what about other areas? We are vigorously trained to understand behavior and the conditions under which it is governed. However, the ways in which our unique repertoire position us to bring behavior analysis to other markets remains unaddressed. This panel will explore several key questions related to entrepreneurship, such as: What does it mean to be an entrepreneur? What separates those that attempt entrepreneurship from those that don’t? What does it take to be a successful entrepreneur, and how can one prepare to bring behavior analysis to the masses? With a focus on dissemination of behavior analysis into new markets, each panelist will contribute their own unique experiences as it pertains to mentorship, networking, education and self-management—all critical components to building a successful enterprise.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Behavior analysts looking to start their own business in the field.

Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will be able to operationalize entrepreneurship 2. Attendees will learn the skills required to be an entrepreneur 3. Attendees will learn how to position themselves to be an entrepreneur
 
 
Symposium #416
CE Offered: BACB
Reviewing and Evaluating Methods to Train Staff to Implement ABA-Based Intervention Procedures for Individuals Diagnosed With Autism
Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom C
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College)
Discussant: Mary Jane Weiss (Endicott College)
CE Instructor: Joseph H. Cihon, M.A.
Abstract:

Training staff to implement effective behavioral interventions for children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) requires effective training techniques. This symposium is comprised of a series of presentations reviewing and evaluating various approaches to training staff. The first presentation provides a review of the literature on training staff and parents to implement discrete trial teaching (DTT). The second presentation evaluates correlations between a multiple-choice exam, analogous of certifying exams, and the direct implementation of ABA-based procedures. The third presentation evaluated a specific staff training procedure to train staff to implement a social discrimination procedure. The fourth presentation provides an evaluation of a comprehensive staff training package for new staff. The symposium will close with a discussion of the strengths and limitations of the presentations as well as future directions of staff training for individuals providing ABA-based interventions for individuals diagnosed with autism.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): ASD intervention, DTT, social skills, staff training
Target Audience:

This symposium will be beneficial for anyone providing supervision and training for behavior analysts providing ABA-based interventions for individuals diagnosed with autism. Those seeking training to improve their implementation of ABA-based procedures may also benefit from this symposium.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, the participants will be able to: 1. describe common approaches to training staff and parents on the implementation of DTT as well as barriers to that training 2. describe potential correlations between multiple choice behavior analysis exams and the implementation of ABA-based autism intervention 3. identify and describe an approach to training staff on the implementation of a social discrimination procedure for individuals diagnosed with autism 4. identify and describe components of a comprehensive staff training package for staff new to ABA-based intervention for individuals diagnosed with autism
 

Training Behavior Change Agents and Parents to Implement Discrete Trial Teaching: A Literature Review

WAFA A. ALJOHANI (Autism Partnership Foundation Academy; Endicott College), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), Christine Milne-Seminara (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), Julia Ferguson (Autism Partnership Foundation), Joseph H. Cihon (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), John James McEachin (Autism Partnership), Ronald Leaf (Autism Partnership)
Abstract:

Discrete trial teaching (DTT) is a commonly implemented and evaluated teaching procedure for individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). As such, DTT is often a procedure that behavior analytic practitioners are required to learn how to implement. Additionally, parents are often encouraged to learn how to implement DTT to supplement intervention for their child(ren) diagnosed with ASD. This review of the literature included 51 studies (57 experiments) that involved training behavior change agents and/or parents on the implementation of DTT. Each of the studies was evaluated and quantified along several dimensions including participant demographics, experimental design, outcome, DTT task analysis, training procedures, training time, and the mastery conditions for the implementation of DTT. The results of the review indicated that there is a robust literature on training individuals to implement DTT. However, results also revealed there are several areas that should be addressed by future studies as well as implications for practitioners and certification standards.

 

Evaluating the Correlation Between Multiple Choice Examination Scores and the Implementation of Applied Behavior Analysis-Based Autism Intervention Procedures

JULIA FERGUSON (Autism Partnership Foundation), Joseph H. Cihon (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), Christine Milne-Seminara (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), John James McEachin (Autism Partnership), Ronald Leaf (Autism Partnership)
Abstract:

To ensure the quality of training, skills developed and maintained, and expected standards for behavior analysts, several systems have been put into place across the years. Of these systems, perhaps the most widespread was the development of the Behavior Analyst Certification Board® (BACB®) in 1998. More specifically, the global mission of the BACB® is to “protect consumers of behavior analysis services worldwide by systematically establishing, promoting, and disseminating professional standards” (BACB, 2015b). Once all requirements are met (e.g., supervised hours, coursework), the final step in obtaining certification (i.e., Board Certified Behavior Analyst; BCBA) is a multiple-choice examination. Given the position many BCBAs find themselves in (i.e., autism intervention), some have questioned the correlation between exam scores and practice. To date, no studies have examined this correlation. Therefore, the purpose of this study was to evaluate any potential correlations between scores on a popular commercially available prep exam and basic ABA-based autism intervention procedures (e.g., discrete trial teaching).

 

Using the Teaching Interaction Procedure to Train Staff to Implement a Social Discrimination Procedure

CHRISTINE MILNE-SEMINARA (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), Julia Ferguson (Autism Partnership Foundation), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), Joseph H. Cihon (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), Ronald Leaf (Autism Partnership), John James McEachin (Autism Partnership)
Abstract:

The teaching interaction procedure is an evidence-based procedure that has been utilized for the development of social skills. The teaching interaction procedure consists of labeling the targeted skill, providing a meaningful rationale for the importance of the skill, describing the steps of the targeted skill, modeling the skill, role-play and providing feedback throughout the interaction. Although the teaching interaction procedure has been used to teach a variety of social skills for children and adolescents diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD), it has only been utilized to train staff in two studies (i.e., Harchik, Sherman, Sheldon, & Strouse, 1992; Redican et al., in press). The purpose of this study was to evaluate the use of the teaching interaction procedure to teach three interventionists the skills to implement the Cool vs. Not Cool procedure to target the development of social skills for children diagnosed with ASD. The results of a multiple baseline design showed the teaching interaction procedure was effective at teaching all interventionists how to implement the Cool vs. Not Cool procedure with children diagnosed with ASD.

 

Evaluating the Effectiveness of a Comprehensive Staff Training Package for Behavioral Interventions for Children With Autism

Yvonne Cheung (St. Cloud State University; Autism Partnership Hong Kong), JOSEPH H. CIHON (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), Ho Yan Eunice Luk (Autism Partnership Hong Kong), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), Raymond Fung (Autism Partnership Hong Kong), Toby Mountjoy (Autism Partnership Hong Kong)
Abstract:

Training staff to implement effective behavioral interventions for children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) requires effective training techniques. The purpose of the present study was to evaluate the effectiveness of a training package with three new staff. The package consisted of didactic lectures, self-learning assignments, readings, written tests, hands-on practice, and regular evaluation. Thirty-eight skills across seven broad domains with respect to ABA-based intervention for individuals diagnosed with ASD were assessed. These domains included engagement, reinforcement, discrete trial teaching, communication temptations (sometimes referred to as mand training), maximizing progress, and behavior management. The results of a multiple baseline across staff indicated that the training package was successful with all three staff. Maintenance data also indicated that the effects of the training package maintained after the training ended. The results will be discussed with respect to strengths, limitations, and future directions of staff training for staff providing behavioral interventions for children diagnosed with ASD.

 
 
Symposium #417
CE Offered: BACB
Teaching Vocational and Problem-Solving Skills to Adults With Developmental Disabilities
Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Tina Sidener (Caldwell University)
Discussant: Peter F. Gerhardt (The EPIC School)
CE Instructor: Peter F. Gerhardt, Ph.D.
Abstract:

This symposium will include four data-based presentations on teaching vocational and problem-solving skills to adults with developmental disabilities. The first study evaluated correspondence between paired-stimulus and multiple-stimulus without replacement preference assessments for vocational tasks with three adolescents with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). The preference assessments identified the same high-preferred task but different low-preferred tasks. All participants remained highly engaged with their highest preferred task and differed in their engagement with their lowest preferred tasks. The second study replicated and extended Stocco, Thompson, Hart, and Soriano (2017) by evaluating the effects of behavioral skills training (BST) on interview skills of three adults with ASD. Two participants learned all skills with BST alone; one participant learned them with additional textual cues and reinforcement. In the third study, electronic-based flowcharts were evaluated as a form of self-instruction to increase problem solving skills in two adults ASD in a simulated vocational setting. Results showed an increase in problem-solving and generalization to novel problem exemplars. The fourth study evaluated effects of teaching tablet-based problem-solving responses during daily living tasks to three adults with Down syndrome. For all participants, responding in problem solving scenarios increased and generalized to a novel problem scenario and task.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Down syndrome, problem-solving, vocational
Target Audience:

behavior analysts, graduate students

 

Using Preference Assessments to Identify Preferred Job Tasks for Adolescents With Autism

Claire C. St. Peter (West Virginia University), CLAUDIA C DIAZ-SALVAT (West Virginia University), Natalie Ruth Shuler (West Virginia University)
Abstract:

Paired stimulus (PS) and multiple stimulus without replacement (MSWO) preference assessments can identify preferred vocational tasks for individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) and limited verbal communication. However, there has not been a direct comparison of these procedures to date. We evaluated the correspondence between vocational activities identified as high- and low-preferred by PS and MSWO preference assessments for three adolescents with ASD, and determined the extent to which assessments predicted engagement with those vocational activities. Additionally, we collected social-validity ratings from caregivers following observations of high- and low-preferred activities. The MSWO and PS preference assessments identified the same high-preferred task (although the specific task identified differed across participants), but different low-preferred tasks across assessment types. All participants remained highly engaged with their highest preferred task and differed in their engagement with their lowest preferred tasks. Caregivers stated that they would recommend the task identified as high preferred.

 

Improving Interview Skills of Adults With Autism Using Behavioral Skills Training

KATRINA ROBERTS (Alpine Learning Group), Jaime DeQuinzio (Alpine Learning Group), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group)
Abstract:

Interviewing for a job is one challenge that adults with autism encounter when attempting to find paid employment. There is little research showing that individuals with autism can be taught to respond appropriately during an interview to secure future employment opportunities. We replicated the results of Stocco, Thompson, Hart, and Soriano (2017) who evaluated the effects of behavioral skills training on the interview skills of college students. We extended the results to three adults with autism. We used a multiple baseline design across three responses (i.e., asking questions, answering questions, and appropriate body language). During baseline, responding was low for all three participants. Behavioral skills training consisted of role playing simulated interviews, providing feedback, and performance rehearsals. For two of the participants, behavioral skills training alone was effective at increasing all three response classes. For the third participant we added textual cues and reinforcement during behavioral skills training to reach criterion performance. Results demonstrate that adults with autism can benefit from modified behavioral skills training to improve interview skills and employment opportunities. We are currently assessing social validity of responses by asking business owners to observe video-taped segments of the interviews and rate the responses.

 

Teaching Adults With Developmental Disabilities to Problem Solve Using Electronic-Based Flowcharts Within a Vocational Setting

NATALIE KRYSTINE VILLANTE (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Sopia Som (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Justin Hunt (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
Abstract:

Employers report that many individuals with disabilities have difficulty completing their work and lack independence. This limits those individuals from acquiring and/or maintaining employment. The purpose of this study was to assess the use of electronic-based flowcharts as a form of self-instruction to increase problem solving skills in individuals with developmental disabilities within a simulated vocational setting. Two males diagnosed with autism, ages 17 and 25 years, participated. Behavioral skills training was used to teach the participants how to use one of the electronic flowcharts within one problem situation. Generalization of flowchart use was probed across multiple problem exemplars. For one participant, results showed an increase in problem solving skills and generalization of flowchart use across two problem exemplars. For the second participant, results showed an increase in problem solving skills and generalization across three problem exemplars. These findings have important implications for increasing independence on the job, while also decreasing intrusive and costly supports for those with disabilities.

 

Teaching Problem Solving Skills to Young Adults With Down Syndrome

ASHLEY ALBANESE (Caldwell University), Tina Sidener (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), April N. Kisamore (Hunter College), Allison Parker (Caldwell University)
Abstract:

Although most studies in the area of problem solving have included individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD), individuals with other types of developmental disabilities may have unique deficits and skill sets that warrant systematic replication and individualization of these protocols. The purpose of the current study was to evaluate the effects of teaching tablet-based problem-solving responses during daily living tasks to three adults with Down syndrome. An Apple Keynote™ presentation was used to teach problem solving skills relating to items that were dirty, high on a shelf, heavy, and missing. These tasks included setting the table, vacuuming the living room, putting laundry away, and bringing in groceries. For all three participants, responding in problem solving scenarios increased after problem solving training, generalized to a novel problem scenario and task, and maintained during a three week follow-up probe. These findings extend the literature on problem solving by demonstrating effective procedures using technology, with nonreaders, during ADL tasks, and with individuals with Down syndrome.

 
 
Symposium #418
CE Offered: BACB
Individualizing Instruction for Greatest Efficiency: From Children to Parents
Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–9:50 AM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: EDC/TBA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Amanda Mahoney (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology )
Discussant: Christina Fragale (The University of Texas)
CE Instructor: Christina Fragale, M.Ed.
Abstract:

Behavior analysis can be considered a science of learning. Not only does the field address how learning occurs, but it also seeks to improve teaching technologies. To make learning more efficient, the goal should be on increasing rate of acquiring individual targets and increasing generative learning. In the literature, the focus is often on explicitly taught skills (e.g. Kodak et al, 2016; Sidman, 1994). However, generative learning, the ability to demonstrate responses that have not been explicitly taught or reinforced prior, is a crucial component of efficient learning (e.g., Critchfield & Twyman, 2014). Howard, Sparkman, Cohen, Green, and Stanislaw (2005) investigated the effects of having children with an autism spectrum disorder in an intensive behavior based preschool program compared to an electric program and a control, non-intensive program. In their discussion, they point out that in order for a child with a developmental delay to close the gap with neurotypical peers, an intervention must produce learning rates that are faster than the typical peer, which was seen in the intensive behavior-based program. Thus, it is imperative to have teaching procedures which are both effective and efficient (Albarran & Sandbank, 2018) to reach this learning rate.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Equivalence-Based Instruction, Error Correction, Instructive Feedback
Target Audience:

The target audience is both newer BCBAs as well as those who have been in the field for a long time and may continue to use certain procedures because that is what they are used to doing. It provides both an overview and more in depth view into the various methods to improve efficiency in learning.

Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will be able to identify ways to determine the correct error correction procedure for their learners. 2. Participants will be able to use instructive feedback to increase efficiency in learning. 3. Participants will be able to use equivalent-based instruction to increase efficiency in learning.
 

Error Corrections: Why Do We Use Them and Are They Important?

(Service Delivery)
TRICIA CLEMENT (LaBAA; The Chicago School of Professional Psychology; Touchstone)
Abstract:

Procedures developed to provide corrective feedback are part of many types of instructional programming (Englemann, 1988; Binder & Watkins 1990). A correction procedure is essential to the formation of operants and literature has provided some considerations that should be made in regard to correction procedures. Within the literature a large degree of variations is used within similar procedures for example reinforcement delivery; number of repetitions; errorless learning vs. error corrections (Worsdell, 2005; Cowley, Green, & Braunling-McMorrow, 1992; Koegel & Egel, 1979, Carr & Kologinsky, 1983; Wheeler & Sulzer, 1970, and Carey & Bucher, 1983; Remington & Clarke, 1983). These variations regarding error correction procedures have resulted in numerous studies with inconclusive findings (Smith et al., 2006; Turan, Moroz, & Croteau, 2012; Rodgers and Iwata, 1991). The purpose of this study included gaining a better understanding of how and why practitioners currently select error correction procedures for their students and how they may affect student progress. In this study, ten questions were presented to BCBAs using an electronic survey. Survey data and the importance of the findings will be discussed.

 
Expansion of Instructive Feedback: Tacting the S- During Error Correction
(Applied Research)
LAURA A. KRUSE (First Leap LLC; The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Yors A. Garcia (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Amanda Mahoney (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Daniel Mark Fienup (Columbia University)
Abstract: The field of behavior analysis seeks to improve the efficiency of learning while maintaining effectiveness. Improving rates of learning and promoting derived responding are two ways to improve efficiency. Instructive feedback has been shown to effectively facilitate the learning of additional targets within instruction, yet this feedback is rarely used as an error correction procedure. Additionally, there are many methods for error correction, yet there is not one procedure that has been shown to be effective for all learners, nor do any attempt to teach the error as an additional learning target. As a learner progresses and moves towards a more natural setting, less invasive, more naturally occurring error correction procedures should be used. This paper discusses a novel minimally invasive error correction procedures in which errors are not only corrected via a model, error, the S-, is labeled for the learner. This paper also expands upon the stimulus equivalence research by examining the impact these various error correction methods may have on the emergence of derived equivalence relations for neurotypical learners.
 

Stimulus Equivalence Instruction to Teach Parents About Functions of Problem Behavior

(Applied Research)
TIM CALDWELL (Behavior Interventions Inc.; The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Yors A. Garcia (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Jack Spear (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Jonathan W. Ivy (The Pennsylvania State University - Harrisburg), Kaitlyn Burylo (Behavior Interventions, Inc.)
Abstract:

Equivalence-based instructional (EBI) technology has been shown to be highly effective in teaching relations among arbitrary stimuli (Sidman, 1994). The present study examined the use of EBI to train caregivers a five-relation stimulus class consisting of the following elements: a) labels of social functions of behavior, b) descriptions of antecedent events, c) descriptions of consequence events, d) vignettes with both antecedent and consequence events, and e) function-based responses (Albright, Schnell, Reeve, & Sidener, 2016; Fienup, Covey, & Crithchfield, 2010). Initial results demonstrated a functional relation between teaching the first set of relations (A:B:C) and a significant increase within untrained relations (B:C:D:E). These results must be viewed cautiously as responding in the pre-test of the second teaching set (A:D:E) was higher than expected. This supports previous experience with these stimuli as part of the formation of the untrained class merger (B-C-D-E) relations. Demonstration of an effective EBI intervention could lead to the development of computer-based training that could assist caregivers in acquiring more efficient function-based responses to problem behavior.

 
 
Symposium #419
CE Offered: BACB
The Behavior Analysis Training System
Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–9:50 AM
Fairmont, Second Level, International Ballroom
Area: TBA/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Kelly Kohler (Western Michigan University)
Discussant: Richard W. Malott (Western Michigan University)
CE Instructor: Kelly Kohler, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The overarching goal of the Behavior Analysis Training System (BATS) is to train BS, MA, and PhD students who are science-based practitioners, rather than researchers. This lab focuses on training students in the concepts and principles of applied behavior analysis, with an emphasis in systems analysis and developmental disabilities. This symposium will examine the Behavior Analysis Training System at the Bachelor's, Master's, and Doctoral level.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): autism, graduate training, undergraduate training
Target Audience:

Students, supervisors, and faculty in the field of behavior analysis.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe a behavior analytic approach to undergraduate training; (2) describe a behavior analytic approach to graduate training; (3) describe the science-based practitioner model.
 
The Undergraduate Student Experience: Course Work
HERIBERTO BOBADILLA (Western Michigan University), Clare Marie Christe (Western Michigan University), Michael Kranak (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Undergraduate students in the Department of Psychology at Western Michigan University are first introduced to behavior analytic concepts and principles in our Introduction to Behavior Analysis course, along with the supplemental Operant Conditioning Lab (rat lab). This presentation will examine how a behavior analytic approach to college teaching is used to train and recruit students into the field of behavior analysis.
 

The Undergraduate Student Experience: Practicum and Research

MICHAEL LEE TOMAK (Western Michigan University), Kaylee Tomak (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

In the Autism Practicum, undergraduate students are trained to be behavior technicians providing one-on-one ABA therapy in a discrete-trial preschool classroom. Some students also complete an undergraduate Honor's thesis under the mentorship of a second-year Master's student. This presentation will describe our training and mentorship models.

 
The Master's Student Experience
KELLY KOHLER (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The Behavior Analysis Training System (BATS) Master's program trains MA students who meet the qualifications for graduation and the Board Certified Behavior Analyst (BCBA) exam. Students in the MA program complete a BACB Verified Course Sequence, gain practicum experience, teach an Introduction to Behavior Analysis course, and complete a Master's Project. This presentation will describe our training system.
 
The Doctoral Student Experience
SOFIA F. PETERS (Western Michigan University), Kohei Togashi (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: PhD students in the Behavior Analysis Training System (BATS) gain experience as science-based practitioners. They complete theses and dissertations where the first goal of the research is that the child benefits from the research. In addition to their research and coursework, PhD students are given an assistantship, either overseeing the MA instruction of the Introduction to Behavior Analysis course, or providing BCBA supervision to the Master's students. This presentation will describe our PhD program.
 
 
Symposium #420A
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Diversity submission Valuing Diversity and Equity in Behavior Analysis: Actions Speak Louder Than Words
Monday, May 27, 2019
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
Fairmont, B2, Imperial Ballroom
Area: CSS; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: So Ra Kang (University of Souther California)
Discussant: Evelyn Rachael Gould (McLean Hospital, Harvard Medical School; FirstSteps for Kids, Inc.)
CE Instructor: Evelyn Rachael Gould, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Addressing issues of diversity and equity is an ongoing process that requires intentional goal-setting, committed action, and ongoing evaluation. As a field, we have embraced diversity as a value, however greater individual awareness and training are needed to increase engagement in values-directed behaviors by individuals. The aim of this symposium is to discuss key data and research related to increasing diversity and equity in Applied Behavior Analysis; specifically issues related to race, gender, socioeconomic background, and sexual orientation will be discussed. The symposium will open with a detailed discussion of cultural competency with respect to transgender individuals, followed by a paper examining an Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) approach to increasing awareness of privilege and committed action with respect to increasing cultural competency as an ABA practitioner. Following a review of relevant data and research, each paper will discuss key ethical and practical concerns related to the topic, and make recommendations regarding specific actions that might benefit consumers and create a more inclusive and empowering environment for ABA staff, students, and practitioners.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): ACT, cultural competence, diversity, values
Target Audience:

BCBAs, BCaBAs, Graduate students, Psychologists, Researchers, Academics

Learning Objectives: 1) Identify ethical and practical issues of diversity and equity within ABA 2) Explain how issues of diversity and equity can be understood from a behavior analytic perspective 3) Identify ways applied behavior analysts can create contexts that promote diversity and equity
 
Diversity submission 

My Pronouns Are She/Her: Transgender Cultural Competence

KRISTEN LANCASTER (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract:

This discussion paper will define and differentiate gender identity, gender expression, and sexual orientation specific to the transgender and gender-nonconforming community. Relevant research and data will be presented to highlight the unique needs of transgender individuals and the common barriers that impact their access to healthcare and behavioral health services. Tying in the BACB ethics code, specific action steps will be outlined to promote cultural sensitivity and competence, with a highlight on navigating pronouns.

 
Diversity submission Cultural Competence Needs ACTion
DENISHA GINGLES (Signature Behavior Analytic Services)
Abstract: Despite policy statements from our leading organizations declaring the importance of diversity, inclusion and cultural competence, a lack of training standards and practice guidelines means clinicians are unprepared to take effective steps to actually achieve a more diverse and equitable field. This paper will review publicly declared values of diversity and equity, and provide recommendations for how practitioners and researchers can uphold and advance our mission of helping others and creating a better world. The paper will explore how an Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) approach might foster cultural competency and committed action in behavior analysts. Audience members will be encouraged to clarify personal values around diversity and equity, identify potentially problematic rules and rule deriving related to privilege and bias, and engage in specific behaviors that might move us towards a more diverse and equitable field.
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #421
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP
Theory of Mind in Autism: Parent Training in Narrative Book Reading to Improve Social Understanding
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Nicole Heal, Ph.D.
Chair: Nicole Heal (Margaret Murphy Center for Children)
PATRICIA PRELOCK (University of Vermont)

Patricia Prelock, Ph.D., is Dean of the College of Nursing and Health Sciences, Professor of Communication Sciences & Disorders, and Professor of Pediatrics in the College of Medicine at the University of Vermont. Dr. Prelock coordinates parent training programs designed for caregivers of children with ASD and has been awarded more than 11 million dollars in university, state and federal funding as a PI or Co-PI to develop innovations in interdisciplinary training supporting children and youth with neurodevelopmental disabilities and their families, to facilitate training in speech-language pathology, and to support her intervention work in ASD. She has over 178 publications and 523 peer-reviewed and invited presentations/keynotes in the areas of autism and other neurodevelopmental disabilities, collaboration, IPE, leadership, and language learning disabilities. Dr. Prelock received the University of Vermont’s Kroepsch-Maurice Excellence in Teaching Award in 2000, was named an ASHA Fellow in 2000 and a University of Vermont Scholar in 2003. In 2011, she was named the Cecil & Ida Green Honors Professor Visiting Scholar at Texas Christian University and in 2015 Dr. Prelock was named a Distinguished Alumna of the University of Pittsburgh. In 2016, she received the ASHA Honors of the Association and in 2017 she was named a Distinguished Alumna of Cardinal Mooney High School. Dr. Prelock is a Board-Certified Specialist in Child Language and was named a Fellow in the National Academies of Practice (NAP) in speech-language pathology in 2018.  She was the 2013 President for the American Speech-Language Hearing Association and is leading the development of the University of Vermont Integrative Health Program.

Abstract: Theory of Mind (ToM) is understood as the ability to think about the thoughts, feelings, and intentions of oneself and others. Individuals with autism repeatedly fall behind on measures designed to test attribution of false beliefs, inference of others’ perspectives, beliefs, emotions, and motivations in varied social contexts, compared to their typically developing (TD) peers. This lecture will focus on a parent training intervention using book reading with scaffolded support to facilitate various aspects of ToM in children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD).
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) define the theory of mind deficits typically observed in children with ASD; (2) describe at least two ToM outcome measures that can be used to assess change over time; (3) explain the value of parent training in supporting the social communication and social cognition of children with ASD; (4) identify at least two reasons that support the use of narrative book reading as an intervention for enhancing the ToM in children with ASD.
 
 
Symposium #422
CE Offered: BACB
Token Reinforcement: An Examination of Token Function and Application
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom C
Area: AUT/PCH; Domain: Translational
Chair: Jonathan W. Ivy (The Pennsylvania State University - Harrisburg )
CE Instructor: Jonathan W. Ivy, Ph.D.
Abstract:

A token economy is a complex system of reinforcement in which a token is delivered (or removed) contingent upon target behavior(s) and can be later exchanged for back-up reinforcers. The complexity of a token economy is derived from three-interconnected schedules of reinforcement. Following the pioneering research of Ayllon and Azrin (1965; 1968), token economies and token reinforcement has become a common component of behavioral programming. Despite the broad success of this behavioral technology, the mechanics of token reinforcement have not been thoroughly studied (Hackenberg, 2009; 2018). Further, token economy literature often contains vague or incomplete procedural descriptions (Ivy, Meindl, Overly, & Robson, 2017). The purpose of this symposium is to present and synthesize token reinforcement and token economy literature. The first presentation will examine the methods to condition token reinforcers. The second presentation will explore assessment strategies to evaluate the function of tokens. Finally, the third presentation examines the application of token economies for individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): token economy, token reinforcement
Target Audience:

Practitioners and researchers who use token economies or token reinforcement.

Learning Objectives: The audience will be able to label and describe four methods to condition a token reinforcer. The audience will be able to describe strategies to access the function of tokens. The audience will be able to discuss the state of token economy research for individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder.
 
Methods to Condition Token Reinforcers
(Service Delivery)
JONATHAN W. IVY (The Pennsylvania State University - Harrisburg), Kathryn Glodowski (The Pennsylvania State University - Harrisburg)
Abstract: A token reinforcer is a type of conditioned reinforcer that can be exchanged for other, already established reinforcers (i.e., terminal reinforcers; Skinner, 1953, p.79). Tokens are unique among other conditioned reinforcers (c.f., attention) in that contact with the terminal reinforcer requires tokens be accrued and exchanged. Since the pioneering work of Ayllon and Azrin (1965; 1968), token reinforcement has become a common component of behavioral research and practice. Despite the large body of empirical evidence supporting the use of token reinforcement, the process to condition a token reinforcer has not undergone thorough evaluation. The purpose of this presentation is to identify and describe methods to condition token reinforcers from research and the conceptual analysis of behavior. The author will describe four primary methods of token conditioning: a) verbal description of token-reinforcer relation, b) token-reinforcer (i.e., stimulus-stimulus) pairing, c) response-independent token delivery with exchange, and d) response-dependent token delivery with exchange. Common procedural variations, implications for practice, and areas of future research will be discussed.
 
Measuring the Stimulus Functions of Tokens: Assessment Strategies for Clinicians
(Service Delivery)
MARY-KATE CAREY (Glenwood)
Abstract: Tokens are traditionally referenced as functioning as generalized reinforcers when used in clinical settings (Kazdin & Bootzin, 1976). However, evidence from basic research demonstrate tokens functioning as S-deltas and actually suppress early-component responding within a token schedule. (Foster, Hackenberg, Vaidya, 2001). Given that the clinical utility of tokens rests of the expectation that tokens will maintain behavior in the absence of or in the face of long delays to primary reinforcement, it is essential that they function as conditioned or generalized conditioned reinforcers. Likewise, avoiding token economy arrangements that facilitate S-delta effects is equally as important. This talk will focus on assessment strategies for measuring the stimulus function of tokens that are practical to implement in a clinical setting as well as provide suggestions for how to optimally arrange a token economy given varying stimulus functions.
 

A Systematic Review of the Token Economy With Individuals With Autism Spectrum Disorder

(Applied Research)
STEPHANIE ORTIZ (Caldwell University), Ruth M. DeBar (Caldwell University), Jenny-Lee Alisa Aciu (Caldwell University)
Abstract:

Token reinforcement systems are widely used in the field of applied behavior analysis to promote behavior change across settings, behaviors, and populations (e.g., individuals of typical development and with developmental delays). While previous literature reviews on token reinforcement have assessed staff training, selection of backup reinforcers, programed consequences, and generalization procedures across diverse populations, none have explicitly evaluated these procedures with individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). The purpose of this systematic literature review was to extend previous analyses by evaluating applications of the token economy with individuals with ASD. The included studies were summarized across (a) participant demographics (age, gender, and diagnoses), (b) experimental setting, (c) token conditioning (d) target behavior defined, (e) inverse of target behavior, (f) programed consequences, (g) individual delivering tokens, (h) training on token delivery, (i) token production schedule, (j) exchange-production schedule, (k) token-exchange schedule, (l) token economies implemented, (m) token boards, (n) conditioned reinforcer, (o) token exchange, (p) backup reinforcer selection, (q) designated backup reinforcers, (r) opportunity to select backup reinforcer, (s) faded token economy, (t) maintenance, (u) generalization, (v) social validity, (w) procedural integrity, (x) interobserver agreement (IOA), and (y) outcomes.

 
 
Symposium #423
CE Offered: BACB
Strategies for Establishing Meaningful Social Skills Through Manualized Intervention Programs
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Matthew T. Brodhead (Michigan State University)
CE Instructor: Matthew T. Brodhead, Ph.D.
Abstract: Unfortunately, there are several barriers to widespread implementation of Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) techniques, with particular difficulty delivering ABA interventions in community settings where a majority of individuals with ASD receive services. A second barrier is the long-term reliance on early social skills interventions derived from research methods developed in idiosyncratic research settings. The purpose of this symposium is to survey two examples of manualized social skills intervention programs, as well as to demonstrate how structured and easy to implement ABA interventions may be used to establish complex social behaviors in individuals with ASD.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Autism, Manualized Interventions, Response Variability, Social Skills
Target Audience: Board Certified Behavior Analysts
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) demonstrate how structured and easy to implement ABA interventions may be used to establish complex social behaviors; (2) have a better understanding of manualized social skills interventions; (3) potentially implement a manualized social skills intervention
 
An Evaluation of Fidelity of Implementation of a Manualized Social-Play Curriculum
EMMA SELIINA SIPILA (Michigan State University), Matthew T. Brodhead (Michigan State University), Josh Plavnick (Michigan State University)
Abstract: Play is the foundation upon which social skills are built. Though typically developing children learn from an early age to interact socially through play, children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) demonstrate characteristic deficits in social interaction and often do not engage in social play like their typically developing peers. When children with ASD engage in inappropriate, rigid, or isolated play, their peers often perceive them as odd or disrespectful. These perceptions lead to social isolation and stigmatization, and interfere with a child’s ability to build meaningful relationships with peers. The purposes of the present study were to: (1) implement a component of a play curriculum for children with ASD and (2) measure the extent to which that curriculum was accurately implemented by instructors. The results of this study indicated that instructors implemented the curriculum with high levels of treatment fidelity. The implementation of an instructor self-monitoring checklist further increased instructor fidelity. These findings and implications are discussed.
 

Teaching Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder to Vary Language During Social Interactions via Video-Chat

MATTHEW T. BRODHEAD (Michigan State University), Mandy J. Rispoli (Purdue University), So Yeon Kim (Purdue University), Emma Seliina Sipila (Michigan State University)
Abstract:

Without the means to develop meaningful relationships, children with ASD are more likely to experience social isolation and struggle with depression. It is imperative, then, that researchers develop strategies to help children with ASD develop robust social relationships. The purpose of this study was to evaluate a strategy to teach children with ASD to communicate via video-chat, in order to provide a framework for how they may one day interact with distant family members or peers. A second purpose of this study was to evaluate the effects of multiple exemplar training on producing varied conversation in the context of the video-chat experience.

 

Promoting Conversation Skills of Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder With a Manualized Social Skills Curriculum

RODERICK O'HANDLEY (School Psychology Program, Department of Special Education, Rehabilitation, and Counseling, California State University, San Bernardino)
Abstract:

A core feature of Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) includes difficulty engaging in fluid conversations and social interactions due to verbal and nonverbal communicative deficits and difficulty recognizing environmental social cues. Social skills training is a treatment approach that may be used to promote the social skills of children with ASD. The current study evaluated the effects of a manualized social skills training program in promoting accurate demonstration of three conversation skills with three children with ASD. A multiple baseline design across three conversation skills was implemented across three elementary-aged children. Maintenance of skill accuracy was assessed two months post-intervention. Visual analysis indicated large and stable improvements of skill accuracy across all three skills for all three children. Indirect secondary measures of participant social functioning were also collected pre and post-intervention and suggested generalized improvements associated with social skills training.

 
 
Panel #424
CE Offered: BACB
Discussion of Behavior Analysis in Community Corrections, Criminal Justice, and Policing
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Fairmont, B2, Imperial Ballroom
Area: CSS; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Holly Seniuk, Ph.D.
Chair: Janice Ellen DeWitt (University of Mississippi)
AUTUMN KAUFMAN (Virginia Department of Juvenile Justice)
SARAH M. RICHLING (Auburn University)
HOLLY SENIUK (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Society has begun to increasingly notice problematic practices within Criminal Justice, Community Corrections, and Policing systems. The public’s attention and work within academic criminal justice programs has led to an increased use of data within these systems. The use of empirical research to shape the culture of the criminal justice system, particularly community corrections, is relatively new. As the use of empirically supported interventions is emerging, behavior analysts may have the opportunity to make large and lasting impacts within these systems. Some states and regions have already sought out behavior analytic support and have seen this support positively impact outcomes. Behavior analysts have also conducted and published research in this area, yet many within these systems have little awareness of the potential use of behavioral principles and methods. This panel will explore various behavior analytic employment opportunities within these systems, discuss the variety of behavioral research that has been conducted, and discuss potential next steps for increasing behavioral influence.
Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience: Practicing behavior analysts looking to expand areas of expertise and practice, graduate students and faculty interested in research and practice in the criminal justice system
Learning Objectives: 1. Describe employment and research opportunities within the criminal justice, community corrections, and policing systems. 2. Discuss recent behavioral research within these systems 3. Identify
Keyword(s): Community Corrections, Criminal Justice, Policing, Recidivism
 
 
Panel #425
CE Offered: BACB
Ethics of Effective Advocacy: Operating on an Island
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Cuvee
Area: CSS/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Amanda N. Kelly, Ph.D.
Chair: Amanda N. Kelly (BEHAVIORBABE (Hawai'i))
VICTORIA M SIMS (Positive Behavior Supports, Corp.)
JENNIFER ROSE LONARDO (Positive Behavior Supports, Corp.)
GOLDEAN LOWE (Positive Behavior Support, Corp.)
Abstract: "At this very moment enormous numbers of intelligent men and women of goodwill are trying to build a better world. But problems are born faster than they can be solved" (B.F. Skinner). In order to achieve the change our world needs to survive, we must continue to work together for a common goal —which becomes increasingly difficult the more isolated you are. On this panel, three behavior analysts who live on three separate islands (literally) will present about their experiences advocating for access to ABA services in the most isolated population center on Earth. Each member of the panel will discuss some common (and not so common) barriers they have faced, as well as some creative solutions identified. Whether you feel like you operate on an island, or you actually do, this discussion on the ethics of effective advocacy is for you.
Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience: Behavior analysts; beginner, intermediate and advanced
Learning Objectives: - Attendees will name at least one common barrier faced by each panelist. - Attendees will name at least one create solution proposed by each panelist. - Attendees will ask questions related to overcoming challenges in their state/country.
Keyword(s): Advocacy, Consultation, Ethics, Telehealth
 
 
Symposium #426
CE Offered: BACB
Further Consideration of Variables Related to Skill Acquisition: A Review of the Literature
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 1-3
Area: DEV; Domain: Theory
Chair: Kimberly Sloman (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment/ Florida Institute of Technology )
CE Instructor: Kimberly Sloman, Ph.D.
Abstract: This symposium includes three literature reviews aimed at identifying critical variables affecting skill acquisition. In the first presentation, Alexandra Knerr will provide a summary of peer-reviewed literature and component analysis of the TAGteach procedure. In the second presentation, Dr. April Michele Williams will provide an overview of stimulus-stimulus pairing procedures and discuss parallels to autoshaping literature. In the third presentation, Hannah MacNaul will summarize the results of a meta-analysis of preference stability over repeated administrations. Presenters will also provide recommendations for practice and future research.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Literature Review, Preference Assessments, Stimulus-stimulus Pairing, TAGteach
Target Audience: The target audience are researchers and practitioners who implement skill acquisition procedures.
 
TAGteach: A Critical Evaluation and Component Analysis of the Peer-Reviewed Research
ALEXANDRA KNERR (Rollins College), April Michele Williams (Rollins College)
Abstract: TAGteach is a systematic procedure for presenting immediate auditory feedback (e.g., via a clicker) to train a new skill or enhance a skill that already exists within an individual’s behavioral repertoire. It is grounded in operant conditioning principles and, according to TAGteach International (https://www.tagteach.com/), is able to be applied in diverse areas including business management, occupational safety, sports, special education, and for teaching animal trainers. Although there are myriad examples of thesis projects and refereed conference presentations describing TAGteach research, only 9 studies utilizing the technique have been published in peer-reviewed journals. Moreover, these studies vary widely regarding the degree to which the researchers adhered to the proscribed method of TAGteach. For this paper we analyzed the procedural components of each of the aforementioned published studies in an attempt to identify which components, if any, are most crucial for success. We also attempted to determine whether adherence to the TAGteach protocol itself is necessary for a successful outcome, or if the apparent success of TAGteach lies in the behavioral principles themselves rather than any single, formalized procedure.
 
Translations in Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing: Autoshaping of Learner Vocalizations
Stephanie P. da Silva (Columbus State University), APRIL MICHELE WILLIAMS (Rollins College)
Abstract: Stimulus-stimulus pairing (SSP) is a procedure used by behavior analysis practitioners that capitalizes on respondent conditioning principles to elicit vocalizations. These procedures usually are implemented only after other, more customary methods (e.g., standard echoic training via modeling) have been exhausted. Unfortunately, SSP itself has mixed research support, likely because certain as-yet-unidentified procedural variations are more effective than others. Even when SSP produces (increased) vocalizations its effects can be short-lived. Although specific features of SSP differ across published accounts, fundamental characteristics include presentation of a vocal stimulus proximal with presentation of a preferred item. In the present paper, we draw parallels between SSP procedures and autoshaping, review factors shown to impact autoshaping, and translate the body of autoshaping research into recommendations for SSP applications. We then call for additional reporting, testing, and extended use of SSP in behavior-analytic treatments. Finally, three translational bridges created by this paper are identified: basic-applied, respondent-operant, and behavior analysis with other sciences.
 

Preference Stability Across Repeated Administrations: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis

HANNAH LYNN MACNAUL (University of South Florida), Shannon Wilson (University of South Florida), Catia Cividini-Motta Cividini (University of South Florida)
Abstract:

A key component to any successful intervention aimed at increasing appropriate behavior for individuals with disabilities is the identification of potential reinforcers to be delivered upon the occurrence of appropriate target responses (Verriden & Roscoe, 2016). It has been noted in the literature that shifts in preferences may occur due to a multitude of reasons and these changes may hinder performance (Hanley, Iwata, Roscoe, 2006). Therefore, the purpose of this meta-analysis was to synthesize results from nine studies that conducted at least two preference assessments, 24 hours or more apart from each other, and analyze the stability of preference across repeated administrations. This paper investigated the impact of the inter-assessment interval (i.e., how often preference assessments are conducted), preference assessment format, and stimulus type (i.e., tangibles, edibles, social interaction) on preference stability. Based on the analysis of correlation coefficients, results suggest that preference is most stable at brief inter-assessment intervals (one week or less) and when using the paired-stimulus format (PS; Fisher et al., 1992). In addition, preference assessments completed with edibles had greater correlation coefficients than those completed with tangible items. Implications for practitioners and future research is discussed.

 
 
Invited Paper Session #427
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

Positive Reinforcement: Not Always "Positive"

Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Instruction Level: Basic
CE Instructor: Christine Hughes, Ph.D.
Chair: Elizabeth Kyonka (University of New England)
CHRISTINE HUGHES (University of North Carolina Wilmington)
Dr. Christine Hughes received her MS and Ph.D. from the University of Florida in behavior analysis and completed a post-doctoral fellowship at the University of North Carolina Chapel Hill. She currently is a Professor in Psychology at the University of North Carolina Wilmington where they have a Ph.D. and a Master’s program in applied behavior analysis. Dr. Hughes conducts translational research in the areas of punishment, schedules of reinforcement, and behavioral pharmacology, specifically the effects of drugs of abuse on impulsive choices and on punished behavior. Dr. Hughes has been program chair for Behavioral Pharmacology and Toxicology for the ABAI, program chair, secretary, and president of the Southeastern Association for Behavior Analysis, and President of Division 25 – Behavior Analysis of the American Psychological Association. She also was an Associate Editor of the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior and was a member of the Society of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior Board and the Science Board of ABAI.
Abstract:

Transitions from favorable to less favorable positive reinforcement conditions (i.e., rich-to-lean transitions) can produce aberrant behavior during the transition before work is initiated, such as disruptive behavior, aggression, and self-injurious behavior. In the laboratory, these type of transitions are studied most often under fixed-ratio schedules, in which extended pausing occurs during rich-to-lean transitions before the ratio is begun. In this presentation, I will discuss a series of experiments in which we systematically analyzed the aversive functions of signals of rich-to-lean transitions and variables that might attenuate the behavior produced during the transitions. I also will discuss the need for further research in this area overall and translational implications.

Target Audience:

Experimental and applied behavior analysts

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the potential aversive aspects of positive reinforcement; (2) describe rich-to-lean transitions; (3) describe post-reinforcement pauses and how they can be viewed as a measure of escape.
 
 
Panel #429
CE Offered: BACB
Breaking Barriers: Creating New Service Models With Behavioral Technology
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich BC
Area: PCH; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Ryan Lee O'Donnell, M.S.
Chair: Jamie Waldvogel (Behave Your Best, LLC)
RYAN LEE O'DONNELL (RYANO, LLC)
TRAVIS BLEVINS (Behavior Services of the Rockies)
TERESA A. COOK-GUERCIO (Washington University School of Medicine)
Abstract:

Autism may be responsible for the explosive growth in behavior analysis and cultivating funding sources for behavior analytic treatments. Paradoxically, could this windfall also mean the end of behavior analysis as it withers from a robust field tackling any and all socially significant behavior, pigeonholed to an albeit noble pursuit of autism treatment providers? Breaking through existing barriers to create new service delivery models requires self-awareness and skill development within and outside behavior analytic skills sets. This panel discussion will lay the foundation for entrepreneurs to break into new service delivery models outside typical funding streams and populations. Topics will include how to design solutions for neurotypical children and their parents, working with technology developers and enthusiasts, and how to obtain skill sets required beyond an ABA grad school program to succeed.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Behavior Analysts looking to expand their area of expertise into areas beyond current models of delivery and funding streams.

Learning Objectives: Identify 3 markets or industries ripe for behavioral technology development. Identify what constitutes a behavioral technology and how to go about collaborating with professionals outside behavior analysis to build one successfully. Identify 3 soft skills shown to affect professional skill sets and service delivery.
Keyword(s): behavioral technology, entrepreneur, neurotypical children, soft skills
 
 
Symposium #430
CE Offered: BACB
Train-the-Trainer: Achieve Best Training Outcomes Using Evidence-Based Procedures for Staff Training
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Rouge
Area: TBA/OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Yendri Diaz (Skillometry Inc.)
Discussant: Yendri Diaz (Skillometry Inc.)
CE Instructor: Yendri Diaz, M.A.
Abstract:

The development and maintenance of an ethical training department within an ABA company is paramount to the successful implementation of ethical ABA interventions. This talk will explore the establishment and maintenance of a training program and examine recruitment, trainers’ training, training curriculum development, training technology, and ongoing support at various ABA programs.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Master's level and doctoral level BCBAs; Graduate Students in Behavior Analysis; Basic Researchers; Applied Researchers; Scientist-Practitioners; Trainers

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the symposium, participants will be able to: 1. Identify and define evidence-based training strategies 2. Identify technologies to reinforce appropriate trainer responses 3. Identify how to measure quality and effectiveness of their training 4. Identify the importance of staff training and increase effectiveness of train-the-trainer programs.
 

Implementation of Behavioral Skills Training in Train-the-Trainer Programs

YENDRI DIAZ (Skillometry Inc.)
Abstract:

Building and maintaining an ethical training company or training department is paramount to the effectiveness and success of any ABA practice. Trainers are responsible for training staff to fluency and mastery and ensuring readiness to work in the field. In this talk, we will discuss the development and growth of a train the trainer program, starting from recruitment of trainers, to the development of trainer skills, behavioral skills training, ongoing supervision, adherence to BACB standards. Also, implementation of evidence-based training methodologies, providing continuous training for all trainers across different levels or credentials, utilizing technology to achieve training goals, and implementing the train-the trainer- program across different agencies.

 

Evaluating the Use of Acoustical Guidance as an Immediate Method of Reinforcement for In-Vivo Staff Training

MARIA BROWN (FLORIDA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY; FLORIDA ASSOCIATION FOR BEHAVIOR ANALYSIS)
Abstract:

Behavioral skills training (BST) is a treatment package used to teach a variety of skills to different populations. Feedback is an essential component of BST. During the rehearsal portion of BST, a real client (trainee) maybe used, delivery of feedback can interrupt sessions or cause confusion. During in vivo training of staff, acoustical guidance can be used to provide reinforcement for correct responses without interrupting session or confusing the learner. We will discuss the results of using acoustical guidance on staff training in a classroom setting with Lead Trainers training Assistant Trainers, and assistant trainers training trainees, and its effect on assistant trainer procedural fidelity.

 
 
Symposium #431
CE Offered: BACB
Model Dependency in Basic Research and Clinical Practice: Why Behavior Analysis Cannot Be the Same Tomorrow as it is Today
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD South
Area: VBC/AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: Caleb Stanley (Southern Illinois University)
Discussant: Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
CE Instructor: Jordan Belisle, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Science is self-correcting, generating quantifiable and testable predictions of events in nature (basic experimental models) and influencing such events to improve the lives of people (applied clinical models). Skinner discussed the importance of understanding the behavior of scientists in his radical behavioral account, and more recent attempts have been made in other fields to develop a self-correcting and evolving science of science. In particular, model dependent realism developed by Hawking and Mlodinow (2010) puts forward contextual and pragmatic criteria for vetting competing scientific models. In the first presentation, Dr. Jordan Belisle (Missouri State University) compares four basic theories of human language learning framed within model dependent realism. He also discusses advances in the quantitative analysis of behavior that could be used to make quantitative predictions about human language. In support of a quantitative approach, the presenter will show new data that support Relational Density Theory as a model for predicting and potentially influencing higher order properties of language. In the second presentation, Dr. James Moore (Canopy Children’s Solutions) extends model dependent realism in the context of comparing applied clinical models from within a pragmatic truth criterion. Traditional models that have emphasized direct contingency control and verbal behavior are compared against contemporary treatment models in relational training and acceptance and commitment training. Finally, the discussant highlights the need for basic experimental and applied clinical models that can generate large-scale outcome research, as only by examining the utility of our models in changing the lives of people, can we move toward a more complete, adaptive, and evolved science of human behavior.

Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): ACTraining, Model Dependency, Relational Density, Relational Framing
Target Audience:

BCBAs

Learning Objectives: Define stimulus equivalence and related research Interpret research on relational training Interpret research on acceptance and commitment training with children with autism
 

Model Dependent Realism in Behavior Science and Higher-Order Relational Behavior

(Basic Research)
JORDAN BELISLE (Missouri State University)
Abstract:

A defining feature of radical behaviorism is the assumption that behavioral principles can be applied to the behavior of the scientist, and indeed, to the science itself (Skinner, 1945, 1956, 1974; Chiesa, 1992). Two model dependent theories of science have been put forward by Kuhn (1962) and Hawking and Mlodinow (2010) that are largely consistent with radical behaviorism. Model dependent realism in particular establishes four criteria that can be used to compare competing models in basic science that may be useful when models are incompatible. The criteria propose that models should (a) be elegant, (b) contain few if any arbitrary or adjustable elements, (c) explain all existing observations, and (d) make quantifiable predictions about future events that are falsifiable. Current models of human language learning (verbal behavior, bidirectional naming, equivalence, and relational frame theory) are compared using these criteria to determine elements of each that are compatible, and when models are incompatible, to determine which models best explain human language. In pursuing the fourth criteria, Relational Density Theory (Belisle & Dixon, in press) is put forward as a model of higher-order and self-emergent properties of relational language that generates quantifiable predictions that can be directly tested. Data are presented that support the predictions made in Relational Density Theory, along with preliminary data in application with children with autism.

 
Model Dependent Clinical Application: Extending the Account to Autism Treatment
(Applied Research)
JAMES MOORE (Canopy Children's Solutions), Breanna Newborne (Canopy Children’s Solutions), Christopher M. Furlow (Canopy Children's Solutions)
Abstract: Contextually controlled relational responding, also referred to as relational framing, has been established as a basic model of complex human learning. Hayes et al. (2001) conceptualized phenomenon as generalized operant behavior that is learned through multiple exemplar training. This behavior appears to emerge spontaneously in typically developing children, as they learn through natural language contexts (e.g., Lipkens, Hayes & Hayes, 1993; Luciano, Gómez & Rodríguez, 2007). However, children with autism spectrum disorders (ASD) do not easily learn this key form of responding and may experience psychological suffering when language emerges (e.g., Rehfeldt, Dillen, Ziomek, & Kowalchuk, 2007). Relational training and acceptance and commitment training provide clinical training models that make use of contemporary advances in relational frame theory. The former emphases derived relational responding and transformations of stimulus function that participate in language development. The latter emphasis the role of experiential avoidance and cognitive fusion in psychological inflexibility in human suffering. In the presentation, we present data demonstrating the efficacy of training relational frames in the early portions of intervention for children with ASD. We also present data suggesting that acceptance and commitment training can effectively influence behavior when language is evident. Whereas prior work has posited that more basic models may be needed developmentally prior to introducing relational training, we review data suggesting that these elementary verbal operants may be accounted for within relational learning, leading to early generative language acquisition, and a necessity for more complete clinical models in autism treatment.
 
 
Symposium #431A
CE Offered: BACB
A Conceptual Analysis of Self-Injurious Behavior Maintained by Automatic Reinforcement in a Clinical Setting
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Lobby Level, Plaza Ballroom AB
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Ken Winn (Firefly Autism)
CE Instructor: Ken Winn, M.S.
Abstract:

This symposium addresses a conceptual framework, using a variety of systematic manipulations and assessments besides descriptive analysis to determine the function and most effective treatment method for self-injurious behavior across 2 subjects in a clinical setting. One subject is a 19-year-old woman diagnosed with ASD, who engages in self-injurious behavior in the form of thumb/hand biting and eye gouging. The other subject is a 17-year-old boy diagnosed with ASD, who engages in self-injurious behavior in the form of finger biting. The assessments used include: pre-cursor functional analysis, stimulus-avoidance assessment, brief punisher assessment, competing items assessment, component analysis, and pair-wise analysis. This symposium provides further direction in the field for self-injurious behaviors maintained by automatic reinforcement. The results of each assessment and the following treatment will be discussed

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Automatic Reinforcement, Component Analysis, Conceptual Analysis, Self-injury
Target Audience:

BCBA's RBT's ABA Therapists

Learning Objectives: 1) Participants will be exposed to a variety of state-of-the art analyses for the subcategories of automatically maintained self-injury 2) Participants will identify best practices when selecting systematic analysis for identifying maintaining variables for self-injury 3) Participants will be able to connect effective treatment strategies for subcategories of automatically maintained self-injury based on selected analyses
 

Use of Protective Equipment as a Behavioral Prosthetic for Self-Biting

HAILEY GOULD (Firefly Autism), Lily Dicker (Firefly Autism), Melissa Marks (Firefly Autism)
Abstract:

Clinicians systematically increased the duration in which protective equipment was tolerated each day. Following the daily tolerance of protective equipment, clinicians evaluated the effectiveness of additional interventions to further decrease rates of the behavior. A Self-Injury Trauma Scale was completed daily to measure evidence of injury.

 

A Component Analysis for Eye-Gouging

LILY DICKER (Firefly Autism)
Abstract:

The researchers compared the components of a treatment package for a 20-year-old girl who engages in severe, longstanding self-injurious behavior in an applied setting. There were four components tested within the component analysis: a fixed-time schedule for accessing competing items, differential reinforcement of other behavior, response-interruption and redirection, and contingent use of protective equipment. In phase 1, inter-response time data was recorded to develop an interval for the fixed-time schedule and differential reinforcement of other behavior. In phase 2, we compared a fixed-time schedule for accessing competing items with differential reinforcement of other behavior. The more effective treatment was used in phase 3 while also comparing response-interruption and redirection and contingent use of protective equipment. Throughout the entire component analysis, response blocking was used to ensure the subject’s safety.

 

Using Stimulus Avoidance and Brief Punisher Assessments for Treatment of Severe Self-Injurious Behavior

MELISSA MARKS (Firefly Autism)
Abstract:

The current study examines the assessments used to determine functions of behavior and treatment methods to reduce levels of automatically maintained self-injury in a clinical setting. Behavioral interventions are supported as the most successful strategy for treatment of self-injurious behavior in individuals diagnosed with developmental disabilities. Previous research indicates that punishment is the most effective treatment for self-injurious behavior and is recommended when other procedures have failed or when self-injury is extremely severe (Favell et al., 1982). Self-injurious behavior is associated with restricted educational, vocational, and community-based opportunities in addition to increased social isolation and carries significant health risks (Minshawi et al., 2014). A precursor functional analysis was used to assess the function of behavior due to the high risk associated with traditional functional analysis methods used for self-injurious behavior. Assessment methods used to evaluate the most effective treatment strategy included a stimulus avoidance assessment, brief punisher assessment, and competing items assessment

 
 
Symposium #432
CE Offered: BACB
Advances in Play Acquisition Research
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom A
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Azure Pellegrino (University of Kansas)
Discussant: Ruth M. DeBar (Mrs.)
CE Instructor: Azure Pellegrino, Ph.D.
Abstract: Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) often display deficits in the area of play skills, which impacts their development throughout childhood. Previous research has identified several interventions that improve the quantity and quality of play within this population. This symposium includes four studies that extend the research on effective interventions to promote play in children with ASD. The first presentation will share the results of a study on increasing the sociodramatic play behavior of young children with ASD with their typically developing peers using group activity schedules. The second presentation will summarize findings of a study on increasing appropriate behavior in children with ASD and typically developing children using a wearable activity schedule. The third presentation will describe a study that compared developmentally-matched and age-matched play targets on play skill acquisition and generalization in children with ASD. The fourth presentation will share the findings of a study on increasing multi-exchange conversations in children with autism using text-message prompts. The symposium will conclude with discussant remarks from Dr. Ruth DeBar.
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Activity Schedule, Autism, Developmental, Play
Target Audience: Researchers, practitioners, and students interested in increasing play skills in children with disabilities.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the symposium, participants will be able to: (1) describe the importance of targeting play within skill acquisition; (2) identify and describe a research-supported play acquisition intervention; and (3) describe the different types of play behavior a play acquisition intervention can increase.
 

Promoting Sociodramatic Play Between Children With Autism and Their Typically Developing Peers Using Activity Schedules

AZURE PELLEGRINO (University of Kansas), Thomas S. Higbee (Utah State University), Lorraine A Becerra (Utah State University), Lyndsay Nix (Utah State University; ASSERT Autism Program), Katelin Hobson (University of Washington), Kassidy Reinert (Utah State University; ASSERT Autism Program)
Abstract:

An activity schedule is a set of words or pictures that cue an individual to complete a series of steps (McClannahan & Krantz, 2010). Previous research has demonstrated the utility of activity schedules in promoting independent play and social game play in children with ASD; however, promoting more dynamic social play in children with ASD using this technology has yet to be investigated. The purpose of this study was to examine the effects of teaching the use of activity schedules with embedded scripts on the sociodramatic play of preschoolers with ASD with their typically developing peers. We also examined the extent to which we could remove scripts and schedule components while continuing to observe sociodramatic play. Two participants with ASD quickly demonstrated high levels of sociodramatic play with their typically developing peers compared to baseline, and an additional participant with ASD demonstrated similar increases with procedural modifications. All three participants continued to engage in sociodramatic play after all scripts and nearly all components of the activity schedules were systematically removed, including during follow-up sessions. In addition, all participants engaged in additional unscheduled yet contextually appropriate social play behaviors.

 
Evaluation of a Wearable Activity Schedule for Promoting Independent Skills in Young Children
KATHERINE HAGGERTY (Florida Institute of Technology), Basak Topcuoglu (Florida Institute of Technology), Corina Jimenez-Gomez (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment, Florida Institute of Technology), Nicole Adriaenssens (Florida Institute of Technology), Kayce Nagel (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: Activity schedules are a series of visual cues, which function as prompts for the completion behavior chains. These typically are arranged in booklets or binders that the individual can check to manage their own behaviors. Although activity schedules are useful, their typical presentation format in binders can be cumbersome and stigmatizing, placing additional barriers for independence and inclusion in less restrictive environments. The purpose of this study was to evaluate the usefulness of a wearable activity schedule and determine whether prompts provided by it would be sufficient to support completion of a complex chain of behaviors by young children diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder. In Experiment 1, the Octopus watch provided prompts to typically developing children to complete a morning routine independently. In Experiment 2, the usefulness of the watch was evaluated in children with ASD engaging in play activities in a clinical setting. In both experiments, children reliably engaged in greater proportion of independent engagement in target behaviors when prompts were delivered by the watch compared to behavior under control conditions.
 

Effects of Development-Matched and Age-Matched Targets on Play Skills of Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

HEATHER PANE (Caldwell University), Tina Sidener (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), April N. Kisamore (Hunter College), Anjalee Nirgudkar (Behavior Analysts of NJ, LLC)
Abstract:

Play is thought to be an important part of human development. Although children of typical development spend the majority of their time engaged in play activities, children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) often present with substantial delays in the development of play. This study compared the acquisition of play skills using play targets that were development-matched (DM) compared to play targets that were age-matched (AM), determined from the results of the Developmental Play Assessment (DPA; Lifter, Edwards, Avery, Anderson, & Sulzer-Azaroff, 1988). The primary intervention was in vivo modeling. The dependent variables included play actions and vocalizations. Generalization was programmed for by teaching to three sets of toys for both the DM condition and the AM condition. In addition, a preference assessment was conducted before, during, and after the intervention to assess participant preference for the toys used in the study. Social validity measures were conducted to assess the goals, procedures, and outcome of the study. The participants demonstrated acquisition with the DM play targets and not the AM play targets. In addition, participants engaged in scripted actions during generalization probes (with novel toys) and during independent probes (experimenter not sitting with participant) in the DM condition. Last, participants maintained the play targets in the DM condition.

 

Teaching Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder to Engage in Reciprocal Conversations Using Text-Message Prompting

VIDA CANESTARO (Baylor University), Jessica Akers (Baylor University)
Abstract:

Individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) often have difficulties initiating and sustaining conversations. Although there are several established interventions which target initiations and responses to questions or comments made by others, there are fewer interventions which target sustaining conversations with multiple exchanges. A review of the literature revealed a variety of methodologies to teach individuals to engage in a multi-exchange conversation. The use of text messaging technology creates an electronic script that is portable, more socially acceptable compared to printed script, and creates a flexible means of prompting within a fast-paced changing social environment. The purpose of the current study is to replicate and extend the findings of Grosberg and Charlop (2017) by ensuring the researcher is not visible to the participants during any of the research sessions. In addition, we have included a pre-measure to better identify appropriate conversation partners and collect data on the conversation partner as well as the participant’s responding during sessions.

 
 
Symposium #433
CE Offered: BACB/NASP — 
Ethics
The Ethics of Functional Analysis: Implementation Challenges and Practical Solutions
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom B
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Michael Weinberg (Amego, Inc)
Discussant: Joshua Jessel (Queens College)
CE Instructor: Michael Weinberg, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Given the current ethical standard to conduct a functional assessment when addressing problem behavior, there are a myriad of challenges for practitioners in applied settings to conduct such an assessment consistent with evidence-based practices. Ethically, we are bound to conduct the most efficient, evidence-based assessment to find the function and other maintaining variables for problem behavior then devise a plan that is most likely to be effective. This symposium will provide an overview of several perspectives by the presenters regarding ethical and legal challenges to conducting functional assessments in applied settings and offer potential practical solutions for practitioners. One potential barrier pertains to acceptance by administrators, funders, parents and others regarding implementation of traditional functional analysis methods in the behavior analysis literature (cf. Iwata et al., 1982/1994). Reliable approaches to functional analysis are currently under development that are promising in addressing acceptability, and thus alleviate ethical and legal challenges (e.gs. Bloom et. al., 2011; Hanley et. al., 2014). Presenters will offer current approaches to functional assessment and functional analysis that may serve as potential solutions to these challenges and permit for evidence-based methods in settings where these are not currently permitted and may serve to address acceptance concerns.

Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): Ethical Considerations, Evidence-Based Methods, Functional Analysis, Practical Solutions
Target Audience:

BCBAs, BCaBAs, School Psychologists, Psychologists,  ABA practice owners and managers, school administrators, others involved with policy and financial roles for provision of ABA services.

Learning Objectives: By the conclusion of the symposium, participants will learn to: 1) identify three barriers to the implementation of FAs in applied settings; 2) identify which FA procedures meet the standard of Evidence Based Practices; 3) discuss which FA procedures should be used in which situations; 4) describe how functional analysis conditions can be altered to use in school settings.
 
The Ethics of Functional Analysis: Implementation Challenges and Ethical Considerations
(Service Delivery)
MICHAEL F. DORSEY (Amego, Inc.), Mary Jane Weiss (Endicott College)
Abstract: Functional assessment and functional analysis technologies have been extant in the field for decades, as has been the mandate to use these tools. One of the historic defining differences between the field of behavior modification and the field of Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) has been the advent of the age of functional analysis (Bailey and Burch, 2005). Unfortunately, as noted by Oliver, A. C., Pratt, L. A., and Normand, M. P. (2015), the utilization of such diagnostic approaches is not commonplace within our profession, which seems to exemplify a disappointing, and somewhat confusing, inconsistency/disparity between the hundreds of functional analysis research publications and that of its clinical application. Addressing concerns by administrators, funders, parents and service recipients, as well as newer approaches to conducting valid and reliable functional analysis methods will be discussed. This presentation will address some of the challenges practitioners face in implementing Functional Analysis across applied settings, and how we might work to overcome these barriers
 
Ethical Challenges to Functional Analysis and Potential Practical Solutions
(Applied Research)
WILLIAM T. MARSH (Brevard Public Schools), Michael Weinberg (Amego, Inc)
Abstract: Conducting Functional Analyses poses legal and ethical dilemmas. Ethically, we are bound to conduct the most efficient, evidence-based assessment to find the function and other maintaining variables for problem behavior then devise a plan that is most likely to be effective. However, there have been legal and ethical challenges to doing so in many settings, such as public schools, and public funded services such as state departments of developmental disabilities. This presentation will review the main concerns regarding functional assessment and how these are presenting ethical and legal challenges to behavior analysts and some possible solutions to these dilemmas. The presenters will offer approaches to functional analysis that may serve as potential solutions to these challenges and permit for ethical, and evidence-based functional analysis methods in settings where these are not currently permitted or are considered an ethical human rights violation. The concept of the approach we refer to as “Molecular Functional Analysis” will be presented along with procedures and results of application of the method. This approach can change how behavior analysts apply and interpret results of functional analyses and gain acceptance from various concerned individuals, consumers, and stake-holders.
 
Ethical Considerations in the Absence of State Regulations: Relying Heavily on the Ethical Code
(Service Delivery)
RON DEMUESY (Dublin City Schools)
Abstract: Like many behavior analysts, as a behavior analyst employed by a school district, one’s role is to lead the completion of functional behavior assessments and writing behavior plans based upon assessment data. Unlike many behavior analysts, in the State of Ohio, there is little guidance surrounding how to complete Functional Behavior Assessments. The state has no current standards in place in public schools regarding acceptable practices for conducting a functional assessment or functional analysis. As a result, school administrators are left to make decisions regarding what will be allowed in their school district or school. Behavior analysts have a responsibility to adhere to the BACB’s™ Ethical and Professional Compliance Code which may pose challenges to the practice of behavior analysis in the school. This situation may open the doors to possible law suits by parents of children receiving special education services, and possibly child advocates as well as other concerned parties in the state. Given these considerations, this presentation will outline how the BACB™ Ethical Code Numbers 3.01–Behavior Analytic Assessment and 2.09 –Treatment Intervention Efficacy, are met using data collection, functional analyses and staff participation within a school district in Ohio.
 
Analyzing Consent: Ethical Practice in Assessment
(Service Delivery)
ANN B BEIRNE (Global Autism Project)
Abstract: Within the clinical practice of behavior analysis, consent is among our primary responsibilities. In this presentation, we will examine the nature of informed consent and the consent of acquiring and maintaining consent through a behavior-analytic framework. Although we as a field acknowledge environmental factors as influential in behavior, we often fail to apply this science in our interactions with stakeholders, leading to frustration, damaged rapport, and possible ethical violations. This is a significant issue in that the public, including parents of children receiving behavior analysis services, and colleagues in other disciplines, are not familiar with our evidence-based practices and methods nor terms. This can be a challenge for behavior analysts who are ethically responsible to provide a reasonable explanation of our services and approaches in a manner that parents and others can understand. Participants will identify the elements of informed consent, and the environmental factors that influence the process of gaining consent, as well as identify potential ethical pitfalls in the acquisition of consent to conduct assessments and ways to avoid them.
 
 
Symposium #434
CE Offered: BACB
Applying Behavioral Economics to Issues of Everyday Importance
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 3/4
Area: CBM; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Rachel Nicole Sobol Foster (University of Kansas, Applied Behavioral Economics Laboratory)
Discussant: Brent Kaplan (Virginia Tech Carilion Research Institute)
CE Instructor: Shawn Patrick Gilroy, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Behavioral economists have made significant advancements in research that have not only greatly impacted the field of behavior analysis, but have also extended to other disciplines. Of note, work in this field has been used to inform public tax policies on commodities with addictive properties, assess the effects of differential price framings and verbal behavior on consumer choice and decision making, and evaluate impulsivity in the context of delay of gratification. This symposium presents a wide range of topics, including studying the effects of delay discounting to inform tornado warnings, examining a reinforcement pathology approach to risky sexual decisions, quantifying demand for food and sugar-sweetened beverages, and examining delay discounting in the context of parents’ choice of treatment for children. Thus, each presentation delivers a unique platform to discuss the multifaceted ways in which behavioral economic research is applied, providing a symposium for which behavior analysts in all specialties can relate.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): behavioral economics, delay discounting, demand, reinforcer pathology
Target Audience:

Master's level behavior analysts

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: 1. Explain basic behavioral economic concepts. 2. Describe applications of delay discounting to issues of everyday importance. 3. Describe applications of operant demand to issues of everyday importance.
 
Temporal Discounting of Tornado Shelter-Seeking Intentions Amidst Standard and Impact-Based Weather Alerts: A Crowdsourced Experiment
BRETT GELINO (University of Kansas), Derek D. Reed (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Tornadoes are atmospheric events capable of massive devastation, involving physical destruction and human casualties. Following the 2011 Joplin, MO tornado that claimed the lives of nearly 160 people, the National Weather Service and National Institute of Standards and Technology concluded that better warning systems would have saved lives. This conclusion prompted the creation of “impact-based warnings” (IBW) which use explicit language that conveys damage threats and potential outcomes. The purpose of the current study was to examine the efficacy of IBW in evoking shelter-seeking in a simulated tornado event. Participants recruited through a crowdsourcing service were stratified into one of four simulated tornado warning conditions, varying with respect to alert content and level of detail (IBW). Participants rated their likelihood of immediate shelter-seeking given increasing delays to the potential tornado strike. Analyses indicated that participants receiving IBW maintained shelter-seeking most across increasing delays. To our knowledge, these data provide the first behavioral economic account of impact-based warning efficacy in tornadic events.
 

Obesity and Behavioral Economics: Examining Sex Differences in Relations Between Delay Discounting, Intensity, Persistence, and Body Mass Index Across Obesogenic Commodities

JONATHAN R. MILLER (University of Colorado School of Medicine / Children's Hospital Colorado), Brent Kaplan (Virginia Tech Carilion Research Institute), Warren K. Bickel (Virginia Tech Carilion Research Institute and Department of Psychology, Virginia Tech), Derek D. Reed (University of Kansas)
Abstract:

Extant research suggests behavioral economic assessments of delay discounting (DD) and demand curve analysis may be useful for understanding behavioral processes related to obesity in adults. To date, hypothetical purchase tasks (HPTs) have primarily assessed demand for food; however, consumption of sugar-sweetened beverages (SSBs) and use of screens that compete with physical activity (screen media use; SMU) can also contribute to an energy imbalance that promotes obesity, yet tasks for these commodities have not been developed. Novel HPTs assessing demand for SSB and SMU, along with an established HPT for fast food and a 5-trial delay discounting task, were administered to over 200 adults via Amazon Mechanical Turk. Relations between body mass index (BMI), delay discounting (ln(k)), demand intensity (log(Q0)), and demand elasticity (log(alpha)) were examined. Results suggest these behavioral economic parameters are differentially related to BMI for men and women, as BMI was related to DD for women only, and elasticity was more consistently related to BMI for men, whereas intensity was more consistently related to BMI for women across commodities. Results are discussed in terms of the Reinforcer Pathology Model and implications for assessment and treatment of obesity.

 
The Economics of Safe Sex: Examining Condom-Use Decisions Within a Reinforcement Pathologies Framework
JOSH HARSIN (University of Kansas), Brett Gelino (University of Kansas), Meredith Steele Berry (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Matthew W. Johnson (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Derek D. Reed (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Negative outcomes of unprotected sex (e.g., sexually transmitted infections, unwanted pregnancies) disproportionately affect young people (i.e., 15-24 y/o) in the United States. The aim of the current study was to assess sexual choice behavior of this population in light of the reinforcer pathology model. According to this framework, commodities with high abuse liability (e.g., drugs, alcohol) are characterized by (1) a preference for immediate availability (i.e., excessive discounting) and (2) a high valuation of the commodity (i.e., elevated demand) within clinical populations. The Sexual Discounting Task (SDT) examines the role of temporal delay in receipt of a condom on safe-sex behavior (i.e., using a condom). A novel condom purchase task (CoPT) was developed in order to study the effect of increasing monetary cost on demand for safe sex. Within the CoPT, participants (M age= 19.7 y/o) were presented with a hypothetical scenario wherein they were able to indicate whether they would become abstinent or engage in unprotected sex at breakpoint. Indices generated from the CoPT suggest one’s willingness to engage in unprotected sex may be a predictor of discounting rates on the SDT. Results are discussed in light of the reinforcer pathology model.
 

Parental Discounting of Delayed Outcomes in Treatment-Related Decision-Making

SHAWN PATRICK GILROY (Louisiana State University), Brent Kaplan (Virginia Tech Carilion Research Institute)
Abstract:

Behavioral treatments seldom have an immediate effect, and for many, the value of behavioral therapies may not be fully observed until after a substantial time commitment. As a result, parent perceptions of the value of behavioral treatments may be discounted because of these delays to treatment outcomes. This study compared the effects of delays on hypothetical outcomes of behavioral treatments in parents recruited from the Amazon Mechanical Turk framework. A novel adaptive hypothetical choice task was designed to evaluate parental preferences for smaller, immediate improvements in behavior over larger ones that include a delay. Results from this task were compared to a similar task measuring hypothetical choices for monetary outcomes. Multi-level modeling across outcomes and individuals revealed that outcomes of behavioral treatments were discounted at levels like those of monetary rewards. These findings suggest that parent perceptions and preferences in treatment-related decision-making warrant further consideration and research. Implications of the discounting of delayed treatment outcomes are discussed in the context of behavioral therapies and the time necessary for therapies to produce noticeable benefits to families.

 
 
Symposium #435
CE Offered: BACB
Callous, Unemotional, and Anti-Social Behaviors: What Applied Behavior Analysis Has to Offer
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 1/2
Area: CBM/CSS; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Jeannie A. Golden (East Carolina University)
Discussant: Willy-Tore Morch (The Arctic University of Norway, Tromsø)
CE Instructor: Jeannie A. Golden, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Callous, unemotional and anti-social behaviors are exhibited by children, adolescents and adults with a variety of diagnoses including oppositional defiant disorder, conduct disorder, autism spectrum disorder and anti-social personality disorder. Behaviors can include: lack of remorse, guilt, and concern for others’ feelings; lack of concern over poor performance at school; and shallow/deficient emotions. Regardless of diagnosis, children and adolescents with these behaviors are often challenging for parents and school personnel and adults for society in general. Because they readily express anger, seek immediate reinforcement, engage in risky behavior, and do not learn from punishing consequences, these children and adolescents may experience problems such as academic failure, office referrals and suspensions/expulsions, and involvement in fighting, bullying, and gangs. Adolescents and adults may engage in domestic violence and abusive relationships, criminal acts, and active shooting incidents. Ways that ABA can assist in recognizing and providing interventions for these individuals will be discussed.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

BCBAs, Psychologists, Psychiatrists, Social Workers, Counselors, Nurses

Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will be able to describe strategies for teaching children who only exhibit anger to exhibit alternative emotional behaviors such as empathy, sorrow and remorse. 2. Participants will be able to describe assessments, intervention strategies, and outcome measures suitable to working with children with CU traits 3. Participants will be able to describe the difficulty with the affective elements of empathy for children with CU traits and a strategy of providing analogies that helps these children with the affective elements of empathy. 4. Participants will be able to describe the motivating operations, reinforcers, punishers, and response effort as variables that influence the active shooter’s behavior.
 

Children and Adolescents Who Exhibit Anger: Teaching Alternate Responses of Empathy, Sorrow and Remorse

JEANNIE A. GOLDEN (East Carolina University), Dottie Dator (East Carolina University), Kathryn Gitto (East Carolina University)
Abstract:

Children and adolescents who only exhibit anger in situations where other negative emotions are more appropriate often have learning histories in which they were only taught to exhibit anger. They were provided with no modeling, instruction and reinforcement for empathic, sorrowful or remorseful behaviors. These children and adolescents often find anger to be more functional and reinforcing than empathy, sorrow or remorse. Traditional psychologists often diagnose these children with oppositional defiant disorder or conduct disorder with callous-unemotional traits. Regardless of diagnosis, children and adolescents with these behaviors are often challenging for parents, school personnel and society in general. Because they readily express anger, seek immediate reinforcement, engage in risky behavior, and do not learn from punishing consequences, these children and adolescents may experience problems such as academic failure, office referrals and suspensions/expulsions, and involvement in fighting, bullying, and gangs. Strategies for teaching alternative emotional behaviors of empathy, sorrow or remorse will be provided.

 

Early Intervention for Children With Callous and Unemotional Traits

Andre Maharaj (Florida International University), JEANNIE A. GOLDEN (East Carolina University)
Abstract:

Early intervention strategies have been successfully employed for prekindergartners with externalizing behavior problems (EBP) such as oppositional defiant disorder, conduct disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, and developmental delays, such as autism spectrum disorder (ASD). Callous and unemotional (CU) traits seem to moderate intervention success for children displaying EBPs, specifically with regard to an oversensitivity to reward and undersensitivity to punishment. These traits are thought to be precursors to an adult diagnosis of antisocial personality disorder. There has been little work done that has utilized the techniques of applied behavior analysis, such as functional assessments and individualized behavior plans, for treatment in this population. Blanketed classroom\at-home approaches, such as the utilization of time-out, have usually been found ineffective for children with CU traits relative to their peers. The lack of sensitivity to punishment at this formative age is thought to influence maladaptive antisocial developmental trajectories. We discuss suggested assessments, intervention strategies, and outcome measures suitable to working with children with CU traits.

 

Distinct Difficulties Expressing Empathy: Children With Autism Versus Children With Callous-Unemotional Traits

LORI STUART (Behavior Consultation & Psychological Services)
Abstract:

Difficulty with empathy for many children with autism is interpreting others’ behavior. Children with CU traits understand how others think, they just don’t care. While children with autism have intact affective elements of empathy, children with CU traits lack this ability. The presenter will operationally define both the cognitive and affective elements of empathy, describe the difficulty with empathy in interpreting the behavior of others for many children with autism and describe how difficulty with empathy in children with autism is often addressed through social cognitive programs. The presenter will then describe the difficulty with the affective elements of empathy for children with CU traits and describe a strategy of providing analogies for children with CU traits. By discussing what they do care about and how other people care about the feelings of others, they can then emphasize the benefits of attending to others’ feelings as an indirect way of helping the children with CU traits meet their own needs or wants.

 
A Behavioral Perspective on Active Shooters
MERRILL WINSTON (Professional Crisis Management, Inc.)
Abstract: The rise in active shooter incidents in schools and other places is boiled down by the media into gun control and mental health issues which prevents looking at the problem from other perspectives. The questions most people ask is “How can people do these things?” but the more important question to ask is “What are the variables that prevent most gun owners from doing the same things?” Most people who own guns do not commit these acts, by why not? This presentation will outline the necessary and sufficient conditions that will greatly increase the chances of someone becoming an active shooter. There are motivating operations (bullying, teasing, being ostracized, being rejected, notoriety motivated by the media, an internet subculture that glorifies shootings, etc.), not valuing one’s own life (nothing to lose), low/selective/no empathy for others and reduced/neutralized aversives (lowered or ineffective aversives, e.g., no fear of death or incarceration). Any one of these variables may figure into a variety of homicidal behavior, but they are all typically present in the active shooter scenarios. Guns do not “create” the active shooter, but they amplify damage and reduce response effort.
 
 
Symposium #436
CE Offered: BACB
Current Research on Refinements to Functional Communication Training Programs
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom A
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Tara Hays (Children's Hospital Colorado )
Discussant: Nathan Call (Marcus Autism Center)
CE Instructor: Tara Hays, M.A.
Abstract:

Using functional analysis to develop functional communication training (FCT) programs is a well-established mode of behavioral assessment and treatment. Broadly, refinements to FCT programs include helping practitioners and researchers make these programs more socially acceptable (Hays & Romani), address multiply maintained problem behaviors (Hardee, Mitteer, Fisher, Briggs, & Greer), and address treatment relapse following FCT (DeRosa, Sullivan, DeBartelo, & Roane; Shpall, Falcomata, Ramirez-Cristoforo, & Londono). Hays and Romani address social acceptability by evaluating procedures to introduce naturally occurring stimuli into FCT conducted within a multiple schedules arrangement. Hardee and colleagues show the effectiveness of using an “omnibus” functional communicative request to rapidly decrease multiply maintained problem behaviors. DeRosa and colleagues and Shpall and colleagues evaluate how the response topography used during FCT affects treatment relapse and the persistence of communication. Taken together, this symposium will provide attendees with an update on the most current research related to applying FCT in a variety of contexts.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Functional communication, Multiple schedule, Resurgence
Target Audience:

Practitioners and researchers studying and implementing functional communication training.

 

Transferring Stimulus Control to Naturally Occurring Stimuli During Functional Communication Training

TARA HAYS (Children's Hospital Colorado), Patrick Romani (University of Colorado, Anschutz Medical Campus)
Abstract:

Therapist-arranged stimuli (e.g., red/green cards) during functional communication training (FCT) conducted within a multiple schedules design can call unnecessary attention to the individual and the stimuli can be lost or forgotten. To address these limitations, the current study evaluated stimulus fading to transfer stimulus control from therapist-arranged to naturally occurring stimuli during FCT. First, we demonstrated stimulus control using a therapist-arranged discriminative stimulus and S-Delta for two children engaging in problem behavior to access attention. Next, within a multiple baseline across contexts design, we gradually reduced the size of the therapist-arranged stimuli in the context of (a) an adult on their phone and (b) an adult looking through cabinets. The size of the cards were reduced until they were eliminated. By gradually decreasing the size of the therapist-arranged stimuli, we transferred treatment effects (i.e., decreased problem behavior, appropriate communication) to naturally occurring stimuli. These data will be discussed in terms of increasing the acceptability and effectiveness of FCT procedures.

 
Evaluation of an Omnibus Functional Communication Response in the Treatment of Multiply Controlled Destructive Behavior
ALEXANDRA HARDEE (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Daniel R. Mitteer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Wayne W. Fisher (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Adam M. Briggs (Eastern Michigan University), Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Abstract: Functional communication training (FCT) is a commonly used and effective treatment for socially reinforced destructive behavior. However, when a functional analysis suggests that destructive behavior is multiply controlled (e.g., by attention, tangibles, and escape), teaching and evaluating separate functional communication responses (FCRs) can be time-consuming or only partially effective when failing to address all establishing operations simultaneously. We evaluated the use of an omnibus FCR that produced access to attention, tangibles, and escape within each functional-analysis test condition for two boys with autism spectrum disorder who displayed multiply controlled destructive behavior. The omnibus-FCR treatment resulted in low rates of destructive behavior and high percentages of independent FCRs within each antecedent condition for both children. We then collaborated with each child’s caregivers to develop an FCT-based intervention that accounted for changes in each reinforcer’s availability (e.g., using a conditional multiple schedule, teaching precise FCRs). Our data suggest that using an omnibus FCR can teach communication skills and reduce destructive behavior quickly prior to introducing other treatment components.
 
Using Progressive-Ratio Schedules to Improve the Efficacy of Functional Communication Training
NICOLE M. DEROSA (SUNY Upstate Medical University), William Sullivan (Upstate Medical University), Jacqueline DeBartelo (Student at Kaplan Universtiy), Henry S. Roane (Upstate Medical University)
Abstract: Functional Communication Training (FCT) is a commonly used reinforcement-based intervention for challenging behavior. Although the majority of FCT research has focused on response-specific variables (i.e., effort) that affect outcomes, additional procedural variables have received increased attention. For example, invariant responding under single-operant arrangements may affect maintenance of therapeutic outcomes during FCT when treatment challenges are introduced (i.e., schedule thinning). Furthermore, researchers have evaluated the presence and impact of treatment relapse (i.e., resurgence) during FCT generalization. The purpose of the current study was threefold. First, we assessed participants’ proficiency and preference across functionally equivalent communication responses. Next, we evaluated the effects of progressive-ratio (PR) schedules of reinforcement, under a concurrent-operant arrangement on varied communication and maintenance of clinically significant reductions in challenging behavior. Finally, we examined the effects of introducing multiple communication responses during FCT on resurgence of challenging behavior during treatment challenges. Clinical implications and areas of future research will be discussed.
 
Further Evaluations of the Effects of Mand Topography Proficiency on Persistence of Communication and Resurgence of Problem Behavior
CAYENNE SHPALL (Student), Terry S. Falcomata (The University of Texas at Austin), Andrea Ramirez-Cristoforo (The University of Texas at Austin), Fabiola Vargas Londoño (University of Texas at Austin)
Abstract: interventions for problem behavior. One element that has been shown to impact treatment outcomes relating to FCT is the proficiency with which individuals can utilize individual mand topographies that are targeted during the treatment. Ringdahl et al. (2009) found that higher proficiency resulted in better outcomes during FCT relative to low proficiency mands. Despite the demonstrated robustness of FCT as a treatment for problem behavior, recent studies have also shown resurgence of problem behavior can ensue during FCT when challenges to the treatment occur. We evaluated the effects of mand proficiency on resurgence of problem behavior during FCT. First, we conducted a mand proficiency assessment (MPA) with children who engaged in problem behavior. Based on the results of the MPA, FCT was implemented with high and low-proficiency mand topographies. Next, we evaluated resurgence (i.e extinction of mands and challenging behavior) across the two-mand topographies as well as persistence of engagement in the respective mands. Resurgence of problem behavior was similar across conditions; however greater persistence in high proficiency mands was observed during extinction phases relative to low proficiency mands. Potential clinical implications of the results will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #437
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Basic and Applied Research on Reinforced Behavioral Variability
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich E-G
Area: EAB/AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: Armando Machado (University of Minho)
Discussant: Allen Neuringer (Reed College)
CE Instructor: Sara Pound, M.A.
Abstract:

In this symposium, presenters will describe basic and applied research in the field of operant variability. This symposium will be chaired by Armando Machado, who will provide brief commentary between presentations. First, Galizio and Odum will share a basic research study on the generalization of reinforced variability across response topographies, levers and nosepokes, in rats. Next, Roberts, Biondolillo, and Yarbrough will show data from a basic research study examining operant variability of timing responses in rats. Next, Falcomata, Bagwell, Ringdahl, McComas, and Shpall will present a translational research study using a human operant resurgence paradigm to determine the effects of using a lag schedule as an alternative response. Lastly, Wolfe, Pound, McCammon, Chezan, and Drasgow will present a systematic review of interventions that promote variability in communication for individuals with autism. They will analyze the existing research on variability interventions for individuals with autism and make recommendations for future research and clinical applications. Finally, Allen Neuringer will serve as the discussant and will discuss theoretical implications of this research.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): FCT, operant variability, relapse, timing
Target Audience:

Basic and applied researchers; practitioners

Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will describe current research on reinforced variability in nonhuman animals. 2. Participants will describe the application of research on variability to mitigating the effects of resurgence during FCT. 3. Participants will describe the current state of the literature on interventions to promote variability in individuals with ASD.
 
Investigating Generalization of Reinforced Variability in Rats
(Basic Research)
ANNIE GALIZIO (Utah State University), Amy Odum (Utah State University)
Abstract: A great deal of research suggests that behavioral variability may be an operant, and can be controlled by reinforcement. If variability is an operant, then variability training should generalize across situations. The present study was designed to determine whether variability training on one response topography would generalize to another response topography. In Phase 1 of this experiment, rats produced four-response sequences across two nosepoke apertures (e.g., LRLR, where L and R indicate left and right responses, respectively). One group of rats (Vary) earned food for producing sequences of nosepokes that differed sufficiently from previous sequences using a threshold contingency, in which only infrequent sequences produced a reinforcer. The other group (Yoke) earned food at the same rate, but was not required to vary. In Phase 1, levels of variability were high for the Vary group and low for the Yoke group. In Phase 2, all rats were exposed to a threshold contingency for lever presses. If rats in the Vary group learned to vary lever presses more quickly than the Yoke group, then it is likely that variability training generalized across response topographies. Such evidence of generalization would support the idea that variability is an operant and inform clinical applications.
 
The Impact of Reinforcement Contingency on Interresponse Time in Rats
(Basic Research)
JAROD CLARK ROBERTS (Arkansas State University), Kris Biondolillo (Arkansas State University), Gary Yarbrough (Arkansas Northeastern College)
Abstract: Current research in the area of operant variability suggests that response variability can be controlled by operant reinforcement; however, there have been few studies of variation in timing of responses. To investigate the latter phenomenon, five female Wistar rats were exposed to a series of contingencies in which subjects were required to vary the times between lever press responses in order to obtain reinforcement. After a baseline condition, rats were exposed to three increasingly demanding variability contingencies with a return to baseline following each, and finally a comparison phase in which reinforcement probability was limited. It was predicted that subjects would vary sequences of responses as a function of variability contingency. The results of the study supported this hypothesis, with high levels of interresponse time variability observed, particularly in the most stringent variability contingency. These results support the notion that reinforcement can control variability in the timing of operant responding.
 

A Comparison of Lag Schedules and a Serial Approach to Training Multiple Responses on Persistence and Resurgence of Responding Within an Analogue of Functional Communication Training

(Applied Research)
Terry S. Falcomata (The University of Texas at Austin), ASHLEY BAGWELL (University of Texas at Austin), Joel Eric Ringdahl (University of Georgia), Jennifer J. McComas (University of Minnesota), Cayenne Shpall (University of Texas at Austin)
Abstract:

Myriad previous studies have demonstrated the efficacy of functional communication training (FCT) for the treatment of problem behavior exhibited by individuals with disabilities. However, resurgence may occur if the treatment is challenged by lapses in fidelity. One strategy for “inoculating” against resurgence of problem behavior involves the teaching of multiple modalities of communication during FCT. In the current human operant-based study serving as an analogue to FCT, we alternated two conditions across a 3-phase resurgence preparation. During Phase A, in both conditions, a target response was reinforced on a variable ratio (VR) 10-s schedule. During Phase B, target responding was on extinction in both conditions; an alternative response was reinforced on sequential (i.e., serial) fixed ratio (FR) 1 schedules in one condition and multiple responses were reinforced on a Lag 3 schedule in the other condition. During Phase C, all responses across both conditions were on extinction and persistence of alternative responding and resurgence of targeting responding was compared across conditions. Results varied with regard to resurgence of target responding while the majority of subjects exhibited higher persistence of alternative responding in the Lag schedule condition. Future avenues of research and potential implications of the current results will be discussed.

 

A Systematic Review of Interventions to Promote Variable Communication Behaviors in Individuals With Autism Spectrum Disorders

(Applied Research)
SARA POUND (SCABA), Katie Wolfe (University of South Carolina), Meka McCammon (University of South Carolina), Laura C. Chezan (Old Dominion University), Erik Drasgow (University of South Carolina)
Abstract:

Abstract: Some individuals with ASD do not acquire vocal language, and those who do may engage in repetitive communicative behaviors that can limit skill acquisition, access to reinforcement, and access to less restrictive settings. Basic and applied research indicate that variability, or the extent to which responses are topographically different from one another, is influenced by antecedent and consequence interventions. Our purpose in this study was to systematically review the literature on interventions to increase variable communication behaviors in individuals with ASD. We identified 31 articles through a database search, and screened them using the What Works Clearinghouse (WWC) Single-Case Design Standards. Twenty studies containing 58 cases met WWC Design Standards. We coded the descriptive characteristics and strength of evidence, based on visual analysis, from each of these 20 studies. Our results indicate that mands and intraverbals were the most frequently targeted verbal operants, and that lag schedules were the most common intervention used to promote variability (65%). Most cases (72%) provide strong evidence of a functional relation between the interventions and varied communicative behavior. We will discuss the implications of our results for practice and for future research on interventions targeting variability with this population.

 
 
Symposium #438
CE Offered: BACB
Diversity submission Why You Are Still Biased, Prejudiced, and Culturally Incompetent: Behavioral Conceptualizations to Possible Solutions
Monday, May 27, 2019
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 1/2
Area: PCH/EDC; Domain: Translational
Chair: Robyn M. Catagnus (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Discussant: Susan Wilczynski (Ball State University)
CE Instructor: Susan Wilczynski, Ed.D.
Abstract:

Every attendee at this conference, including you, is impacted by social and clinical effects of bias, racism, and cultural incompetency; it’s critical to further conceptual and theoretical study of, and practical approaches to, mitigating those effects. This is a local, global, and personal problem. Personal because of our direct experiences of discrimination. Personal, too, because you suffer bias’s negative effects as a clinician, related to client outcomes and career burnout. Locally, communities and schools continue to experience the devastating effects of bigotry and racism. Globally, we are disseminating our science and practice into new cultures but creating extraordinary ethical risk when we replicate ‘what has worked’ without culturally adapting and researching carefully. You are not immune from these concerns if you don’t work internationally. In a global world, diversity is so much more than visible differences, and your assessments, interventions, and interactions require nuanced and practiced cultural competencies: in higher education, in clinical practice, in training and supervision. Behavior science can help ameliorate these clinical and social effects in career, education, community, and international settings. We will share some of what we’ve found to work. Join us as we continue the fight to mitigate bias and increase multi-cultural competencies.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Bias mitigation, Burnout, Cultural competency, Diversity
Target Audience:

This topic of diversity, bias, burnout, and multicultural competency applies to every person living, working, and learning in the field of ABA. The topic is growing in importance, and everyone from students through seasoned doctoral level experts will benefit from exploring how all of us are affected by implicit cognition - and to learn how to culturally adapt our effective behavior analytic practices to cross-cultural, non-Western, and diverse populations of clients and students.

Learning Objectives: Explain racism and prejudice from the perspective of radical behaviorism. Describe two ways RFT and ACT can be utilized to ameliorate the effects of racism, prejudice and discrimination in school settings. Define a behavioral conceptualization of implicit cognition. Specify how to assess bias with a behavior analytic, computer based tool. Discuss two methods to intervene on patterns of behavior related to the construct of burnout. Utilize culturally adapted behavior analytic procedures to enhance outcomes of cross-cultural interventions. List three key methods for teaching multicultural competencies to graduate students while simultaneously accommodating students from different cultural backgrounds.
 
Diversity submission A Brief Behavior-Analytic Conceptual and Applied Review of Racism, Prejudice, and Discrimination
(Theory)
KOZUE MATSUDA (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology, Children Center Inc), Yors A. Garcia (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Robyn M. Catagnus (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Julie A. Ackerlund Brandt (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract: Despite ongoing efforts to eradicate racism, it persists globally, affecting education, health, and employment. The science of behavior analysis aids in understanding human behavior but requires constant evaluation to improve its methods. Recent research on relational frame theory (RFT) and acceptance and commitment theory (ACT), both based on contextual behavioral science (CBS), has helped this evolution. CBS provides new tools for dealing with racism issues in basic and applied studies. The purpose of this paper is to provide a brief conceptual and applied behavior-analytic review of racism, prejudice and discrimination. First, we present an analysis of racism, prejudice and discrimination from the traditional behavior-analytic perspective. Second, we describe the role of CBS in racism research. Third, we explain the roles RFT and ACT can play in ameliorating the clinical and social effects of racism, prejudice and discrimination, and briefly discuss applications in school settings.
 
Diversity submission 

Culturally Focused Caregiver Training to Increase Praise for Ghanaian Students With Autism

(Applied Research)
ASHLEY ELIZABETH KNOCHEL (University of South Florida), Kwang-Sun Cho Blair (University of South Florida)
Abstract:

The effectiveness of behavior-analytic interventions for individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) is well- documented. However, little is known about the contextual appropriateness or translational capacity of those interventions in non-western cultures. ASD treatment centers in majority world countries lack funding for teacher or staff training. Thus, those programs rely heavily on the western community for training supports. Therefore, research on how to best culturally adapt training methods is crucial for increasing training effectiveness and sustainable dissemination of behavior-analytic services around the world. This study examined the impact of self-monitoring with performance feedback on caregivers’ use of culturally adapted praise. We also measured collateral effects on student academic engagement. Four caregivers and four students with autism in Accra, Ghana participated. Results indicated that self-monitoring and performance feedback effectively increased caregivers’ use of praise across phases. Additionally, adaptations to the topography of praise were critical for establishing desired student outcomes. This experiment provides an impetus for further examination of behavior-analytic interventions for children with autism in non-western contexts.

 
Diversity submission Assessing Implicit Cognition Related to Burnout and its Relevance for Behavior Analysts
(Applied Research)
GREGORY SCOTT SMITH (CARD; University of Nevada, Reno School of Medicine), Ramona Houmanfar (University of Nevada, Reno), Nicole Jacobs (University of Nevada School of Medicine), Timothy Baker (University of Nevada School of Medicine), Mary Froehlich (University of Nevada, Reno School of Medicine), Alison Szarko (University of Nevada, Reno), Carolyn Brayko (University of Nevada, Reno School of Medicine), Melissa Patricia Piasecki (University of Nevada, Reno School of Medicine)
Abstract: Although the construct of implicit bias was formulated by researchers of a social-cognitive orientation, contemporary advancements in behavior analysis have allowed for a functional-behavioral conceptualization of implicit cognition and a corresponding computer-based assessment tool. While much of the research on implicit bias has focused on areas traditionally associated with diversity, such as race, ethnicity, and gender, research of implicit cognition is by no means limited to these topics. This paper will present ongoing interdisciplinary research at the University of Nevada School of Medicine which focuses on the assessment of implicit cognition across a broad range of domains, including but not limited to burnout among medical students. Burnout, its sources, its impact on well-being and behavior, and efforts to mitigate its effects are currently top priorities within the field of medical training, but behavior analysts would be remiss if we did not consider the relevance of burnout in our own field, from behavior technicians to BCBAs, administrators, and academicians. Relational Frame Theory and Contextual Behavioral Science provide a useful framework to conceptualize, assess, and ultimately intervene on patterns of behavior related to the construct of burnout, which is of social significance to people in virtually all areas of professional life.
 
Diversity submission 

Sensitivity in Teaching Multicultural Competencies: Developing Frameworks for Teaching Graduate Students From Diverse Cultural Backgrounds

(Service Delivery)
VANESSA PATRONE (Daemen College), Vicki Madaus Knapp (Daemen College)
Abstract:

As the demand for behavior analytic services grow, we can expect to see increased diversity among both people seeking behavior analytic services and people seeking licensure or certification as behavior analysts. We must consider the best methods for teaching multicultural competencies to graduate students while simultaneously accommodating students from different cultural backgrounds. This case study describes a potential framework for a parallel process of remaining culturally sensitive as instructors while teaching students how to maintain their ethical responsibility of cultural sensitivity when practicing as a behavior analyst.

 
 
Symposium #440
CE Offered: BACB
Evaluating Data Collection Procedures During Discrete Trial Teaching
Monday, May 27, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Lobby Level, Plaza Ballroom AB
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Joseph H. Cihon (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College)
Discussant: Robert K. Ross (Beacon ABA Services)
CE Instructor: Robert K. Ross, M.S.
Abstract:

There are several data collection procedures available to the interventionist during discrete trial teaching (DTT). These include, but are not limited to, first trial data collection, probe data, trial-by-trial data collection, and estimation data. This symposium features two comparisons of trial-by-trial and estimation data during DTT in two different instructional formats. The first presentation compared the two data collection procedures while teaching tact relations in a one-to-one instructional format. The second presentation extends the findings of the first by comparing the two data collection procedures while teaching tact relations in a group instructional format. The symposium will close with comments on the relative strengths and limitations of presentations as well as future areas of research and practice.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): data collection, DTT, estimation
Target Audience:

Any individual providing supervision of staff providing ABA-based intervention for individuals diagnosed with autism will benefit from this symposium in addition to those providing direct intervention. Clinical or site directors in charge of making data based decisions and determining data collection systems for use agency wide will also benefit from this symposium.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the symposium, the participants will be able to: 1. identify and describe the conditions under which various data collection systems are more or less preferred within a DTT context 2. identify the strengths and limitations of at least two approaches of data collection within a DTT context 3. describe the methods to collect estimation data when using DTT to train tact relations for individuals diagnosed with autism within group and one-on-one instructional formats
 

A Comparison of Data Collection Procedures Used During Discrete Trial Teaching to Teach Tact Relations

ANNA DOTSON (Autism Partnership Foundation Academy), Julia Ferguson (Autism Partnership Foundation), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), Christine Milne-Seminara (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), Joseph H. Cihon (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), John James McEachin (Autism Partnership), Ronald Leaf (Autism Partnership)
Abstract:

There are many data collection procedures utilized during discrete trial teaching (DTT) including first trial data collection, probe data, trial-by-trial data collection, and estimation data. Continuous, or trial-by-trial, data collection consists of the interventionist collecting data on learner behavior on each trial. Estimation data consists of the interventionist estimating learner performance after a teaching session using a rating scale. The purpose of the present study was to compare trial-by-trial data collection to estimation data collection during DTT to teach children expressive labels. The data collection procedures were examined in terms of accuracy of data collection, efficiency of teaching (i.e., number of trials delivered per session), and rate of child acquisition of targets. Results of the adapted alternating treatment design replicated across three participants and multiple targets will be discussed.

 

Comparing Two Data Collection Procedures When Using Discrete Trial Teaching to Teach Tact Relations Within a Group Instructional Format

ASIM JAVED (Autism Partnership Foundation Academy), Julia Ferguson (Autism Partnership Foundation), Amanda Griffin (Autism Partnership), Tracey Terhune (Autism Partnership), Christine Milne-Seminara (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), Joseph H. Cihon (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation; Endicott College)
Abstract:

Most research comparing data collection procedures has been done during one-to-one discrete trial teaching (DTT; e.g., Cummings & Carr, 2009; Taubman, Leaf, McEachin, Papovich, & Leaf, 2013). This study aimed to extend previous literature comparing continuous methods of data collection to estimation data but this time implementing the data collection procedures within group discrete trial teaching with three individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). Group discrete trial teaching was completed in a classroom setting using relevant academic targets for each child. The data collection procedures were examined in terms of accuracy of data collection, efficiency of teaching (i.e., number of trials delivered per session), and rate of child acquisition of targets. Results of the adapted alternating treatment design replicated across sets and multiple targets will be discussed.

 
 
Symposium #442
CE Offered: BACB/NASP
Behavior Analysis and Restorative Justice: Birds of a Feather?
Monday, May 27, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Fairmont, B2, Imperial Ballroom
Area: CSS/OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Jack Treadway (University of Mississippi)
Discussant: Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana - Lafayette)
CE Instructor: Emily Kennison Sandoz, Please Select...
Abstract: Restorative Justice (RJ) practices have been implemented within the contexts of school, community corrections, and criminal justice systems. These practices provide those directly and indirectly affected by harmful behaviors and perpetrators opportunities to effectively repair harm, leading to the reintegration of the community. Such processes have been adopted by only a few professional USA-based organizations, typically those directly involved in propagating RJ. Additionally, these practices have only recently been the topic of behavior analytic research. This symposium will provide an introduction to the basic features of RJ, highlight the similarities between RJ and behavior-analytic principles, and provide an example of behavior analytic research with RJ. The first paper will also provide recommendations for implementing RJ techniques in professional organizations such as ABAI. The second paper will present methods, findings, and implications from an empirical study within the school system implementing RJ principles using performance feedback techniques. The second paper will also discuss the potential to use Behavioral Skills Training to build competency and fluency with RJ techniques.
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Performance feedback, Professional Organizations, Restorative Justice, Schools
Target Audience: Practicing behavior analysts and counselors; graduate students; faculty; officers in professional organizations
Learning Objectives: Learning outcome 1: Describe the basic assumptions and processes of restorative justice and its overlaps with behavior-analytic principles. Learning outcome 2: Discuss considerations for implementing RJ within the context of professional organizations. Learning outcome 3: Describe behavioral methods of building capacity and fluency among those implementing RJ.
 

Restorative Justice Within the Context of Professional Organizations: Is RJ the Way?

JEFFREY PAVLACIC (University of Mississippi), Karen Kate Kellum (University of Mississippi), Stefan Schulenberg (University of Mississippi)
Abstract:

Restorative Justice (RJ) practices are rarely implemented within the context of professional organizations, despite their effectiveness in reducing recidivism within the Criminal Justice (CJ) system. RJ, broadly, is a theory with roots in CJ traditionally designed to detract recidivism and guide the effective reparation of harm. The overarching goal of RJ is to provide parties affected by harm an opportunity for engagement in the resolution process, thereby enhancing community well-being and reintegrating victims and offenders. Overlap exists between RJ and basic behavior-analytic principles. Behavior is a function of context, where behaviors reinforced are more likely to occur in the future. Unfortunately, traditional correctional systems are punishment-focused, which may lead to eliciting, discriminative, behavior-suppressing, and physiological effects. Thus, implementing RJ practices from a reinforcement-focused, behavior-analytic approach may effectively address misconduct within professional organizations. The current paper reviews RJ principles and their overlap with BA principles. Additionally, we provide recommendations for implementing RJ within the context of professional organizations, such as Applied Behavior Analysis International.

 
Using Single-Subject Design to Evaluate School Restorative Justice Technologies
DARREN AITCHISON (National Louis University)
Abstract: In prior research, Restorative Justice (RJ) has been implemented to reduce conflict and produce positive behavior change in the American school and criminal justice systems. Peace Circes and victim-offender reconciliation programs (VORP) are used in place of traditional, punitive-based systems. These programs specifically are heavily used within the criminal justice system. Performance feedback has been implemented to produce skill improvement at the organizational level. Monitoring, coaching, and feedback on an employee’s performance are given at regular time intervals. In this study, three teachers, one administrator, and three students were each given feedback and coaching on how they managed chronic misbehavior in delayed multiple baseline designs. Results suggested that when exposed to performance feedback and coaching on RJ at full implementation, student discipline referrals decreased significantly, suggesting that the independent variable may have been responsible for the measured behavior change. Implications of these results and the potential to improve fluency and capacity for implementing RJ using other behavioral techniques (e.g., Behavioral Skills Training) will be discussed.
 
 
Invited Paper Session #444
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP

Applied Behavior Analysis for All: Building Systems to Help Children Through Transdisciplinary Behavioral Approach

Monday, May 27, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 1-3
Area: DEV; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Nirvana Pistoljevic, Ph.D.
Chair: R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School of Arts and Sciences)
NIRVANA PISTOLJEVIC (Edus-Education for All)
Nirvana Pistoljevic received her B.A. in Psychology from Rutgers University. Then, from Teachers College she received an M.A. in General and Special Education, Ed.M. in Instructional Practices in Special Education and an M.Phil. in Behaviorsim. In 2008, she received a Ph.D. in Applied Behavior Analysis in Education from Columbia University, where she has been teaching for the past 9 years at the Graduate School of Education. Dr. Pistoljevic has achieved the rank of Assistant Research Scientist through the CABAS® system and is a published researcher and invited lecturer in the fields of education, psychology, behavioral science, e-learning, early childhood development, and language development. Her current research interests include development of early childhood sevices, science of teaching, behavioral approach in assessment, early childhood development, language development, observational learning, inclusion, behavior-environment interactions, teacher training and behavioral systems. Also, Dr. Pistoljevic is committed in helping children with Autism and other developmental disorders in Bosnia and Herzegovina, where she is one of the founders of an NGO “EDUS-Education for All” committed to advancing educational practices in this country. She is currently spending most of her time in Bosnia and Herzegovina, where she is working with the UN agencies (UNICEF and UNDP) and USAID, training her staff of 60 professionals, providing education and services for over 200 children through 4 different EDUS programs, running first Early Intervention program in BiH, conducting research and writing. With the support of a UNICEF grant, she created first B&H developmental behavioral screening and monitoring tool for detection of developmental delays and/or monitoring children’s’ development birth through start of school, also an evaluation and educational program creating tool for children with and without developmental disorders, and curricula for parent education and future parent education. Currently, in partnership with UNICEF in B&H, she is conducting preschool and schoolteachers training, developing early detection and intervention systems, and developing materials for transdisciplinary teams “around the child”.  She is also working with UNICEF- Palestine on different modalities on implementation of National Early Detection and Intervention Policy, creating the early detection and intervention system, and training the professional staff from health, education, higher education and social care sectors. In B&H with the support of an USAID research grant, with the transdisciplinary team of professors form UK and USA, she is work on the validation of the developmental screening and monitoring app, development of protocol for ASD diagnostics, and research on the best model of early intervention services for B&H and low and mid-income countries.  With the Public Health Institute and Ministry of Health of Montenegro, she is working on developing a first Center for Children Diagnosed with Autism, where all children in additoin to diagnostics will be able to receive education and support services. With UNICEF Serbia, she is working on traning preschool and kindergarten teachers on best evidence-based practices for sucessful inclusion of all chidren, and creating a model for development and implementation of Serbian version of IFSP and IEP. She is also a president of a Bosnian-Herzegovinian-American Academy of Arts and Sciences (BHAAAS), and organizes and chairs a largest multidisciplinary scientific conference in Balkans every year. She  is also one of 9 nominees for 2019 Brock International Prize in Education.
Abstract:

EDUS-Education for All is a non-for-profit organization trying to bring science, newest methods and conduct research in the fields of early detection, diagnostics, intervention, and inclusion of children with developmental disorders. EDUS creates systematic approaches and trains transdisciplinary teams of service providers using behavioral principles to advance health, education and social care systems in low resource countries. In partnership with UNICEF, USAID and relevant ministries in Bosnia and Herzegovina, EDUS was able to work on developing Early Detection and Intervention concepts for the country, and to provide services based on a behavioral but transdisciplinary approach for thousands of children through health, education and social care systems. We have created and standardized a behavioral developmental instrument, to detect and monitor early childhood development and tested it on over 2500 children in order to create developmental norms for the country. Now as an easy to use App, this behavioral tool will aid pediatricians in early detection and monitoring. Same process has now been started with UNICEF-Palestine for children in Gaza and West Bank, creating their developmental norms and behavioral approach to screening, monitoring, and advancing development. I will also talk about our research in application of technology and molecular biology to help detect and diagnose children with ASD and other neurodevelopmental disorders, and our research on methodologies for inducing language and other developmental milestones when they do not develop naturally. Our goal is development of reliable and evidence based methods for low and mid-income countries in order to advance health and education practices for children with and without disorders. We focus on transdisciplinary research and projects based on collaboration of medical, technical and social sciences. I will show you how using the science of Applied Behavior Analysis across several mid-income countries with limited resources can promote early childhood development with concrete steps, measures, tools and applications. It’s a showcase of the power behavioral science has for advancement of outcomes for all human kind.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students. 

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) identify critical components of Early Detection and Intervention Systems needed for a country to be able to provide services to children with developmental disorders in early childhood; (2) apply concrete steps in order to create a behavior-based transdisciplinary approach to intervention; (3) communicate with professionals from other fields using behavioral tools; (4) use applied behavior analysis in collaboration with other fields to promote early childhood development.
 
 
Invited Paper Session #447
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP

Why are the Behavioral Sciences Not More Effective: Reprise

Monday, May 27, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: SCI; Domain: Theory
Instruction Level: Basic
CE Instructor: Ruth Anne Rehfeldt, Ph.D.
Chair: Stephanie M. Peterson (Western Michigan University)
RUTH ANNE REHFELDT (Southern Illinois University)
Dr. Ruth Anne Rehfeldt is a Professor in the Rehabilitation Services undergraduate program and an affiliated faculty in the Behavior Analysis and Therapy program. She holds a Ph.D. (1998) and MA (1995) from the Behavior Analysis Program (in Psychology) at the University of Nevada, and a BA (1993) in psychology from the University of Puget Sound. She is also a Board Certified Behavior Analyst at the doctoral level. Dr. Rehfeldt has taught undergraduate and graduate courses in research methods, behavioral assessment, principles of behavior, introduction to behavior analysis, verbal behavior, and radical behaviorism. Dr. Rehfeldt has authored nearly 100 articles and book chapters, primarily in the areas of derived stimulus relations and verbal behavior. Dr. Rehfeldt has served as the editor of The Psychological Record for 12 years and has been an editorial board member for a number of behavior analytic journals over the years.   She has co-edited one textbook with Yvonne Barnes-Holmes, entitled Derived Relational Responding: Applications for Learners with Autism and Other Developmental Disabilities: A Progressive Guide to Change, and is currently co-editing a textbook tentatively entitled, Applied Behavior Analysis of Language and Cognition, with Mitch Fryling, Jonathan Tarbox, and Linda Hayes.
Abstract:

The controversy over whether behavior analysts should not only examine, but intervene on, private events has not ended. Reluctance to incorporate analyses of covert language processes into applied behavior analyses has limited our field’s scope. Moreover, applied behavior analysis continues to focus its energies predominantly on small-scale studies in highly controlled environments while larger societal problems flourish. The purpose of this presentation is to discuss how the concepts encompassed by Acceptance and Commitment Therapy can be applied to several very diverse areas of social concern, including: 1) human service agency staff training; 2) health prevention behaviors; and 3) marine conservation. I will articulate the often underappreciated relationship between relational learning and psychological inflexibility and experiential avoidance, and will describe how concepts such as acceptance, values, and committed actions can have an impact in building the adaptive repertoires needed to resolve a number of small and large-scale issues of social significance.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) explain the relationship between ACT and Relational Frame Theory; (2) discuss an overview of procedures and results from staff training studies on components of ACT; (3) conceptualize possible areas of application of behavioral principles to health-related and conservation behaviors.
 
 
Panel #448
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Easier Said Than Done: Practical Supervision Across Settings
Monday, May 27, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Fairmont, Second Level, International Ballroom
Area: TBA/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Cameron Mittelman, M.A.
Chair: Cameron Mittelman (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
LISA DAVIES (By Your Side)
LAUREN J LESTREMAU (Ivymount School)
ROSIE WARD (Reach ABA)
Abstract:

The quality of the supervision experience for future behavior analysts is assumed to be a factor predictive of the quality of their practice (Turner, Fischer, & Luiselli, 2016). Although the Behavior Analyst Certification Board (BACB) has taken steps to increase the likelihood of effective supervision by mandating completion of an 8-hour supervision training (BACB, 2012), increasing the time period before new behavior analysts may supervise others (BACB, 2017), and adding supervision to the BACB task list (BACB, 2017), there are still variations and disparities as to the frequency, quality, and manner in which supervision is provided. One major reason for such variations is likely the settings in which supervision takes place, with different environments offering different benefits and supervision opportunities, as well as different challenges and considerations (Carr & Nosik, 2017). In this panel, the speakers will describe their experiences providing BACB supervision in three common settings: a private day school, a clinic, and in the home. Speakers will discuss how they have adjusted their supervision practices to best suit their environment and will provide practical recommendations and considerations for new supervisors or those who will begin supervising in the future.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

This panel is geared toward early career BCBAs who (a) provide supervision currently (to behavior analytic supervisees), (b) will provide supervision in the future, and (c) supervise individuals who supervise others, particularly others who are early BCBAs.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe practices for implementing the new BACB supervision standards across training settings, (2) compare and contrast considerations for supervision aligned to different settings, (3) identify training methods for development of supervision skills aligned to setting, and (4) state strategies to address challenges unique to individual training settings.
Keyword(s): BACB Supervision, Clinical Training, Effective Supervision, Supervision Practices
 
 
Symposium #449
CE Offered: BACB
SAFMEDS: Historical Perspectives, State of the Art, and University Course Applications
Monday, May 27, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Rouge
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Donald M. Stenhoff (Arizona State University)
CE Instructor: Donald M. Stenhoff, Ph.D.
Abstract:

SAFMEDS (Say All Fast Minute Every Day Shuffled) is a well-tested and validated learning tool that has evolved with changing technologies. The effectiveness of SAFMEDS has been demonstrated across learners from preschool through college-aged individuals. As the amount of information increases, so does the need for college-aged leaners to acquire information at a high rate and to demonstrate acquisition from testing at universities to national board examinations. Thus, using SAFMEDS in college courses is an ideal way to meet the growing demands placed on students. In this symposium, the evolution of the technology and application of SAMEDS will be discussed. In the first presentation, the past, present, and future of SAFMEDS will be described. In the second presentation, the presenter will describe a study in which two SAFMEDS procedures were assessed and the effect on undergraduate student achievement in an introductory applied behavior analysis course. In the third presentation, the presenter will describe a study in which paper versus digital SAFMEDS were evaluated with master’s students in an applied behavior analysis program. Results will be discussed in terms of participant performance related to SAFMEDS format, and format preference.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): College teaching, Precision teaching, SAFMEDS, Standard celeration
Target Audience:

College instructors, BCBA supervisors, educators

 

SAFMEDS in the Digital Age

Richard Kubina (Penn State), Donald M. Stenhoff (Arizona State University), DOUGLAS E. KOSTEWICZ (University of Pittsburgh)
Abstract:

SAFMEDS offer a well-tested, validated learning tool aimed at generating behavioral fluency in verbal or graphic information. SAFMEDS (Say All Fast Minute Every Day Shuffled) have applicability spanning preschool to college-aged and beyond. From there inception SAFMEDS have appeared in mostly a paper medium. Instructors would create their SAFMEDS on paper or an Excel or Word template. The resulting paper product allowed learners to use practice and learn the targeted content anywhere. As Precision Teaching has evolved through the digital age so too has SAFMEDS. The current presentation will discuss the past, present, and future of SAFMEDS.

 
A Comparison of the Effects of Two Variations of SAFMEDS in an Introductory Undergraduate Behavior Analysis Course
JENNIFER WERTALIK (Armstrong State University), Andrew Bulla (Georgia Southern University - Armstrong), Sal Ruiz (University of West Florida)
Abstract: SAFMEDS (Say All Fast Minute Every Day Shuffled) is a practice and assessment procedure developed to help students learn and build fluency on key facts (Graf & Lindsley, 2002). SAFMEDS is typically used to help students become fluent in definitions and basic concepts, thus making complex learning and later synthesis of concepts more likely. The present study examines the impact of two types of SAFMEDS procedures on student achievement. First, is the use of a traditional whole deck practice. Second, is dividing the deck into segments and practicing each segment to fluency. Participants include two sections of an Intro to ABA course at the undergraduate level. Results are displayed on a digital Standard Celeration Chart. Data demonstrate that students respond at higher rates with smaller deck segments, but make more errors when compared to a full deck practice model. A discussion of the benefits and detriments of each type of practice could guide future practice routines for students.
 
Comparing Paper and Digital SAFMEDS to Increase Masters Students’ Behavioral Terminology Fluency: Does Performance Differ by Format, and Which Format is Preferred?
DONALD M. STENHOFF (Arizona State University), Richard M. Kubina (Penn State)
Abstract: Students of behavior analysis are required to verbally demonstrate knowledge of dozens of behavioral terms and definitions during their programs. Their demonstration becomes more important for academic and career success when asked to overtly respond either vocally in class or answering items on national exams. A Precision Teaching methodology, SAFMEDS (Say All Fast a Minute Every Day Shuffled), was developed in the 1970s by Ogden Lindsey to increase behavioral fluency. SAFMEDS has been used to increase fluency of behavioral terminology with college students. Students typically use SAFMEDS that are printed on cards; however, researchers have also used SAFMEDS in digital format, presented on a computer or a handheld device. In this presentation, we will describe a study in which students in two courses in an on-campus Master of Science in Applied Behavior Analysis program used both paper and digital formats to study behavioral terminology. The participants used both versions of SAFMEDS across three phases, which concluded with students selecting which format they preferred. Correct and incorrect responses were recorded in an online standard celeration chart. Results will be discussed in terms of participant performance related to SAFMEDS format, and format preference.
 
 
Symposium #450
CE Offered: BACB
Evaluating Procedures for Teaching Children With Autism to Communicate Using Speech-Generating Devices
Monday, May 27, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD North
Area: VBC/AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: Christopher A. Tullis (Georgia State University)
Discussant: Wendy A. Machalicek (University of Oregon)
CE Instructor: Wendy A. Machalicek, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Approximately 30% of children with Autism Spectrum Disorder do not develop speech. As a result, there may be benefits from interventions that teach the use speech-generating devices to establish verbal behavior repertoires. Numerous studies have shown the effectiveness of teaching the use of speech-generating devices in the context of basic manding. However, extension of this research is needed to evaluate procedures for teaching advanced verbal behavior for children who use SGDs. This symposium will present empirical data related to teaching verbal behavior to children using speech-generating devices. The first single case study evaluated procedures aimed at teaching two nonvocal children with autism spectrum disorder to use a speech-generating device to mand to their peer and engage in listener responding. The second study replicates the procedures from Frampton, Wymer, Hansen, & Shillingsburg (2016) to teach children who use speech-generating devices tacts of noun-verb combinations using matrix training. Wendy Machalicek will sever as the discussant.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): autism, generalization, speech-generating device, verbal behavior
Target Audience:

Target audience are practitioners, students, and researchers in the field of applied behavior analysis who work with individuals with autism who have limited communication skills.

Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will learn about nonvocal children with autism learning to communicate use SGDs. 2. Participants will learn about two types of intervention smethods to teach communication to children using SGDs. 3. Participants will understand the implications of interventions as they relate to generalization of these skills.
 

Teaching Mands to Peers and Peer Listener Behavior to Children With Autism Using a Speech-Generating Device

(Applied Research)
JOSHUA CHARPENTIER (Butterfly Effects), Amarie Carnett (University of Texas at San Antonio)
Abstract:

Children with autism spectrum disorder with limited speech are often taught to use speech-generating devices as an alternative communication mode. Intervention with speech-generating devices often begins by teaching the child to mand for, or request, preferred objects. To date, research on teaching children to produce mands for actions via a speech-generating device is limited. In the present study, we evaluated procedures aimed at teaching two nonvocal children with autism spectrum disorder to use a speech-generating device to mand to their peer and engage in listener responding. Naturalistic teaching procedures were used to teach both speaker and listener behavior. We also assessed for maintenance of the skill over time. A multiple baseline design across participants design was used to evaluate the effectiveness of this intervention. Both participants acquired the mands to peer and listener responding. These results suggest the feasibility to teaching mands to peers and listener behavior to children who communicate using speech-generating devices.

 

Matrix Training to Promote Recombinative Generalization in Children With Autism Using a Speech Generating Device

(Applied Research)
VIDESHA MARYA (Marcus Autism Center), Sarah Frampton (May Institute, Inc.), M. Alice Shillingsburg (May Institute)
Abstract:

Approximately 30% of individuals diagnosed with autism fail to develop vocal communication. For these individuals, Augmentative and Alternative Communication (AAC) systems such as manual signs, picture exchange communication system (PECS), and speech generating devices (SGD) are often used. Numerous studies have shown the effectiveness of selection-based pictorial systems to promote functional communication. However, there is a dearth of research on strategies to teach advanced verbal behavior using SGDs. The current study presents a replication and extension of previous work conducted with vocal children teaching tacts of noun-verb combinations using matrix training (Frampton, Wymer, Hansen, & Shillingsburg, 2016). Three males diagnosed with autism were exposed to matrix training with mastered tacts of nouns (e.g., “elephant”) and verbs (e.g. “reading”). Two matrices were constructed (Matrix 1 and Generalization matrix), using mastered nouns and verbs. Following baseline of the matrices, diagonal targets within Matrix 1 were trained (e.g., “elephant reading”). Post-tests were conducted for the Generalization matrix followed by post-tests for Matrix 1. Two participants showed recombinative generalization with the Generalization matrix after training of diagonal targets in Matrix 1. For the third participant, correct responding with the Generalization matrix targets was observed after training with four different matrices (Matrix 1 – 4).

 
 
Symposium #451
CE Offered: BACB
Understanding Complex Relational Stimulus Control Does Not Require a Relational Frame Theory
Monday, May 27, 2019
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD South
Area: VBC/EAB; Domain: Translational
Chair: Paul Thomas Thomas Andronis (Northern Michigan University)
Discussant: Darlene E. Crone-Todd (Salem State University)
CE Instructor: T. V. Joe Layng, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Is a Relational Frame Theory (RFT) really required to account for responding to complex relations between stimuli? This symposium will provide alternative accounts not requiring a hypothetical relational operant for relational responding found in both the experimental laboratory and more applied or everyday settings. The emergence of relational responding has been explained by RFT as a product of a history of multiple exemplar training. However, the formation of relational responding might be better characterized by the process of adduction. We will look at an experimental study that explores this idea. This symposium will also review procedures in applied settings that produce responding to relational stimuli that have their origin in research beginning over 60 years ago, and that have routinely been applied to establishing complex “relational responding” for decades. These procedures demonstrate that central to establishing control by relational stimuli is the non-example, and that it is discrepancy as well as sameness that is critical to establishing such control. The contribution of hierarchal and coordinate abstract tacts to understanding the acquisition of complex relational responding in both controlled and everyday settings will be described.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Adduction, abstract-tact
Target Audience:

Basic and applied behavior analysts

 

Equivalence Relations: Emergence or Adduction?

(Basic Research)
JESUS ROSALES-RUIZ (University of North Texas)
Abstract:

When people are taught the conditional discriminations A-B and B-C, untrained conditional discriminations often emerge (e.g, B-A, C-B, A-C, C-A). A, B, and C become interchangeable events in the contingency and are said to be members of an equivalence class. Current explanations of the emergence of stimulus equivalence point to the immediate history of conditional-discrimination training (Sidman, 2000), perhaps to organismic variables (Sidman, 1992, 1994), and to a history of differential reinforcement across multiple exemplars (Hayes, 1991; Hughes & Barnes-Holmes, 2016). In addition to training history, the explanations also include some kind of selection mechanism that occurs during testing. That mechanism could be seen as a context controlling the appropriate relational response (Hayes, 1991) or as a process that screens out alternative stimulus control (Sidman, 1992). These views suggest that equivalence will emerge as a result of the right training history and favorable testing conditions. An alternative to this view is that equivalence classes may be the result of the fusion of two (or more) repertoires (Hineline, 1997), as exemplified by the process of adduction (Andronis, 1983). This presentation will explore this alternative and present an experiment relevant to this question.

 

Responding to Complex Relations Among and Between Stimuli: The Intradiemesional and Interdimensional Abstract Tact

(Theory)
T. V. JOE LAYNG (Generategy, LLC)
Abstract:

Treatments of the tact often do not extend beyond the simple tact. Skinner (1957), however, described the abstract tact where the speaker’s behavior is guided by a subset of stimulus properties. The abstract tact “chair” is guided not by a specific piece of furniture, but by features of that stimulus. Layng (in press) has described such guidance as an “intradimensional” tact. Abstract tacts also include behavior under control of relations between stimuli, such as distant, larger, opposite, same, different, me, you, to believe, etc. Layng (2014; 2016; in press) describes these relations as “interdimentional” tacts. This presentation will describe how these relations may be analyzed and sequences designed for their effective teaching, often without using match-to-sample procedures. It will be argued that these procedures may more closely resemble how these relations are acquired outside the laboratory than do the match-to-sample preparations often found in the laboratory. Further, it will be shown how such interdimensional tacts form the basis of “autoclitic frames,” whereby interdimensional relations can guide both speaker and listener behavior in completely novel situations, such as, “Y believes X will…” No hypothetical arbitrarily applicable relational operant is required to understand or teach these relations.

 
 
Symposium #452
CE Offered: BACB
A Pragmatic Look at Integrating Functional Analysis and Accompanying Function-Based Interventions in Applied Settings
Monday, May 27, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: AUT/PCH; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Morten Haugland (Haugland Learning Center)
Discussant: Jessica Slaton (Nashoba Learning Group)
CE Instructor: Jessica Slaton, Ph.D.
Abstract:

For many people with disabilities, challenging behavior is a significant barrier to learning and full participation at school and at home. Researchers have demonstrated by using functional analysis, it is possible to identify the function of challenging behavior through systematic experimental manipulation of variables, and based upon that function, design an effective intervention. Iwata et al. (1994) introduced the functional analysis to the science of behavior. This in-depth process has inspired myriad adaptations and systematic replications of the functional analysis process evaluating different conditions, settings, and durations. In this presentation we will focus on four issues related to functional analysis and function-based treatments utilized by practitioners. First, we will review data from interviews of experts in functional analysis, and a survey of BCBA’s and BCBA-D’s regarding their use of components of functional analysis. Second, we will review data from researchers examining the Interview Informed Synthesized Contingency Analysis (IISCA). One, studying the effects of function-based intervention, implemented by paraprofessionals in a classroom context. The second researcher will examine the replication of the function-based intervention with parents as implementers. Finally, there will be an examination of function-based intervention on PICA following an adaption of standard functional analysis.

Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): delay tolerance, FCT, functional analysis, IISCA
Target Audience:

BCBAs looking to add functional analysis and function-based intervention to their repertoires. Additionally, practitioners that work in home and clinical settings working with parents and paraprofessionals.

Learning Objectives: The presenters will provide information and discussion on functional analysis in practice across settings, populations and professionals. Instructors will outline simple and pragmatic avenues to using functional analysis and look to describe derived treatments for a variety of response classes. Additionally, the presenters will seek to detail the prevalence of functional analysis in practice and bring awareness to the need to maintain an approach that is empirically verifiable.
 

Evaluating Recommendations Versus Utilization of the Essential Components of a Functional Analysis Procedure

ALISSA CONWAY (Drexel University)
Abstract:

The current dissertation project is a descriptive analysis composed of two interrelated studies. The dissertation proposes an opportunity to identify the essential components deemed necessary by behavior analytic experts in the field to implement and analyze a functional analysis (FA) followed by an examination of which of these components are utilized consistently by practitioners in the field. The project involves one interview and one survey; the interview is directed toward experts in functional analysis in behavior analysis, and the survey is directed toward Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBAs) and Board-Certified Behavior Analysts- Doctoral Level (BCBA-Ds) actively practicing functional analysis in the field of behavior analysis. The outcome data for the expert interview recommendations will be presented in comparison to the survey outcome data for the utilization of functional analysis components by practitioners.

 

The Implementation of Function-Based Intervention by Paraprofessionals Resulting From Interview Informed Synthesized Contingency Analysis

DIMITRIOS V. MAKRIDIS (Haugland Learning Center; The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Eric Anderson (The Ohio State University)
Abstract:

The application of function-based intervention by paraprofessionals in the classroom context, requires extensive training and experience to be effective and impactful. Functional communication training (FCT), specifically mand training, has served as a standard intervention, and has been utilized as a default replacement for problem behavior by practitioners. While mand training is effective in increasing communication responses in contrived and instructional settings, often it does not result in generalization and independence across people and settings. This is mostly related to the extinguishing effects of synthesized contingencies in the natural environment. On the other hand, when FCT is paired with a contingency-based delay and denial tolerance, it is programmed to address these synthesized contingencies by establishing a functional, generalizable, and long-lasting replacement behavior. Three individuals with developmental disabilities and extensive histories of severe problem behavior (e.g., aggression, self-injury, high magnitude disruptive behavior, etc.) participated. FCT with contingency-based delay and denial tolerance was implemented following interview informed synthesized contingency analysis (IISCA) in a classroom setting by paraprofessionals. Results are expected to show variable responding following baseline by front line staff and a decrease following the addition of a behavior skills training (BST) component. The integration of contingency-based delay and denial tolerance, and FCT informed through functional analysis, was demonstrated to be an effective intervention for increasing communication and acceptance of denials, while decreasing the rate and magnitude of severe problem behavior.

 
A Brief Functional Assessment of Pica
CODY MORRIS (Western Michigan University), Kelsey Webster (Western Michigan University), Stephanie M. Peterson (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Pica is a severe behavior involving the consumption of items that are non-edible and/or are non-nutritive. Pica occurs in approximately 6-26% of the population of individuals with developmental disabilities and can be life-threatening in some cases. Due to the challenging nature of this behavior, relevant assessment and treatment practices described in behavior analytic literature are often exceedingly time consuming. The purpose of this presentation is to extend research on pica in two ways. The first is to describe the results of a brief functional analysis conducted in home and hospital settings to address pica with an individual adolescent diagnosed with autism. The second purpose is to describe treatment probes that were conducted after function was determined. Treatments probes included NCR, NCR+ blocking and redirection, and functional communication training. The results of the study indicated that the abbreviated assessments produced differentiated results that led to successful treatment probes. IOA data was collected during all sessions of the study with a mean exact agreement of 94.2%
 
 
Symposium #453
CE Offered: BACB
Mediator Training: Bridging Distance, Settings, and Skills!
Monday, May 27, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Kendra Thomson (Brock University )
Discussant: Amy J. Henley (Western New England University)
CE Instructor: Kendra Thomson, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Effective, evidence-based behavioural interventions are essential to ensure socially significant behaviour change for people with developmental disabilities (e.g., autism spectrum disorder). Training mediators to implement these interventions with fidelity increases the likelihood of successful intervention outcomes. Effective staff training has been associated with more effective staff practices, as well as improved client outcomes. Additionally, training parents using the same evidence-based procedures increases the likelihood that parents will successfully implement in-home behavioural intervention programs. Effective interventions in-home or in-clinic may contribute to clients generalizing target skills across environments, decreased challenging behaviour, and improved learning outcomes. This symposium summarizes results from assessments of behavioural skills training (BST) across different modalities (i.e., in-person, or telecommunication), skills (e.g., in-person mindfulness training or pre-session pairing), and mediators (e.g., parents, staff). Results provide further evidence of how this evidence-based training procedure promotes behaviour change in both mediators and people with developmental disabilities, including children with ASD. Clinical implications will be discussed.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): ASD, BST, mediator training, parent training
Target Audience:

Board Certified Behavior Analysts, graduate students studying behavior analysis

Learning Objectives: 1) Identify strategies to address challenges and barriers with skill maintenance and generalization across training modalities, populations, and varying target skills. 2) Identify barriers to treatment integrity for parent-implemented interventions, and strategies to mitigate these barriers. 3) Describe the recent evidence on the use of behavioural skills training (BST) through telecommunication platforms and for teaching pairing skills. 4) Describe the current evidence to support the effect of mindfulness training on staff behaviour towards individuals with developmental disabilities.
 
Parent Treatment Integrity Across Multiple Components of a Behavioural Intervention
RALUCA NUTA (Brock University), Julie Koudys (Brock University)
Abstract: Children with a diagnosis of autism spectrum disorder (ASD) often present with challenging behaviours such as aggression, tantrums, non-compliance, or self-injury. Behaviour analytic interventions are considered evidence-based practice for decreasing these challenging behaviours; however, most effective, multi-component interventions are implemented in-clinic by trained professionals, and treatment effects do not automatically generalize to the home. The literature is lacking on parent-implemented, multi-component interventions in the home, and little research has reported on the levels of treatment integrity with which such interventions are implemented. Treatment integrity is crucial to both intervention outcomes, as well as confidence in the validity of the results. As such, it is important to select effective training procedures that may enhance treatment integrity, such as behavioural skills training (BST). BST is an evidence-based training procedure that is widely used in behaviour analysis to train complex skills. The present study sought to determine whether BST can be successfully used to train a parent of a six-year old child with ASD to implement a multi-component intervention in the home, while carefully monitoring treatment integrity levels for each treatment component. Results support the use of BST for this purpose, and implications for future research are discussed.
 

Staff Training on Pairing Skills: How Does it Relate to Treatment Outcomes for Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder?

REBECCA ENSOR (Brock University), Priscilla Burnham Riosa (Brock University)
Abstract:

Pairing, a strategy to enhance therapeutic rapport between a therapist and client, is a critical component of behaviour analytic interventions for children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). Despite its importance, few behaviour analytic studies to date have examined the necessary skills required to effectively pair with clients. Of those studies, none have identified the feasibility of training those skills. The purpose of this study was twofold: (1) to teach new instructor therapists to implement six pairing skills and (2) to examine the relation between pairing skills training on treatment outcomes for children with ASD (i.e., challenging behaviour and targeted skill accuracy). Although behaviour skills training was initially effective, consistent feedback on therapist performance was necessary for therapists to maintain pairing skills at mastery level. In terms of clients outcomes, challenging behaviour decreased in the first two participants as pairing was implemented. Skill accuracy; however, did not change as pairing was implemented. A replication of the procedure is currently underway. Implications of the findings and future study directions will be discussed.

 

Telecommunication Training for Early Intervention Staff: An Evaluation of Generalization and Maintenance

JOSEPH ROBERTSON (Brock University), Kendra Thomson (Brock University), Mary Hume (ONTABA), Carly Magnacca (Brock University), Amanda Marcinkiewicz (Brock University), Jessica Cauchi (none)
Abstract:

Telecommunication models (TCMs) have been shown to increase the accessibility of effective behavioural services for children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). Behavioural skills training (BST) delivered via TCM has preliminary support for effectively training individuals to provide support to children with ASD. Further evaluation is needed to assess generalization of trainee outcomes to clinical settings, on untrained procedures, and the corresponding effects of training on child outcome measures. In a concurrent multiple-baseline design across three novice early intervention staff, this study evaluated the effects of BST-TCM on: staff accuracy implementing the target procedure (e.g., errorless learning) and an untrained procedure (e.g., paired stimulus preference assessment). Staff fidelity was assessed in both contrived role-plays with an actor and in a clinical setting with a child. Corresponding child outcomes were measured as percent correct on typical programming taught using the target procedure (i.e., errorless learning). Results to date demonstrate that all three staff showed increased fidelity when implementing the target procedure following BST-TCM, and children showed a corresponding increase in program performance. One participant showed improvements in untrained procedures. The feasibility and efficacy of BST-TCM as an accessible modality for training staff supporting children with ASD will be discussed.

 

Does Mindfulness Training Change Staff Behaviours Toward Persons With Developmental Disabilities?

JESSICA SUMMERS (University of Manitoba), Toby L. Martin (St.Amant Research Centre)
Abstract:

To be mindful means to be in the moment, focusing on your mind, body and surroundings (Kabat-Zinn, 1990). Mindfulness training programs for caregivers of persons with developmental disabilities can benefit the caregivers and their clients (Singh, Lancioni, Karazsia, Chan, & Winton, 2016). Few studies have reported effects on specific caregiving behaviours. In a multiple-baseline-across-participants experiment, a brief mindfulness training session was evaluated by directly observing: announcement of actions prior to contact with client, looking away from the client or caregiving activity, and making contact at the torso prior to touching an extremity. Participants were three adult female staff (two DSPs and one nurse) and one adult male client. Announcements and torso-before-extremity contact increased and looking away decreased for all staff following the training; not all improvements were maintained over an extended period. Client happiness and unhappiness indicators were measured before and after the training, but no clear effects were observed.

 
 
Symposium #454
CE Offered: BACB
Teaching Math and Writing With Typical and Near-Typical Learners, and Children With Autism
Monday, May 27, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: EDC/AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: Kent Johnson (Morningside Academy)
Discussant: Kent Johnson (Morningside Academy)
CE Instructor: Jennifer Holloway, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The four presentations in this symposium illustrate how evidence based practices in instructional design and Precision Teaching can be combined in new ways to provide instruction and practice to fluency with foundational and complex math and writing learning objectives. The first three presentations will demonstrate applications of the Morningside Mathematics Foundations Fluency, progressing in their scope from within a single classroom, to two studies with a large number of participants, to a schoolwide, multi-year implementation. First, Nicole Erickson will describe the synthesis of the conceptual aspects of Singapore Primary Math’s number bond component into the Morningside Math Facts Fluency program, along with a procedure for effective classwide implementation with typical and near-typical learners. Next, Jennifer Holloway will present the results of two studies that examine the effects of Precision Teaching, frequency building, and the Morningside Math Facts Fluency program on the computation repertoires of typical learners in the United Kingdom. Third, Kathy Fox will describe a long-term, schoolwide implementation of the Morningside Model of Generative Instruction with students with autism, with particular focus to moving beyond foundational math skills and computation skills to higher order problem solving involving word problems using Morningside’s Algebra for Beginners program. Lastly, Marianne Delgado will move into the area of writing, describing an even more complex program which assessed the effect of instructional design and Precision Teaching of specific sentence combining repertoires on the syntactical maturity of middle school students’ writing. The chair will make comments on each presentation in turn as the symposium proceeds.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

behavior analysts and other psychology and educational professionals

 

Evidence-Based Practice and Constructivist Curricula: Synthesizing Precision Teaching With Concepts From Singapore Primary Mathematics

(Service Delivery)
NICOLE ERICKSON (Morningside Academy)
Abstract:

In 2016, Morningside Academy began using the popular, constructivist curriculum PrimaryMathematics (a Singapore Math program)as its core mathematics curriculum. Morningside’s team of expert teachers and instructional designers have been thoroughly investigating the application of evidence-based practices in instructional design and Precision Teaching to this curriculum in order to maximize learning outcomes with typical and near-typical learners. Nicole Erickson developed a fluency-based activity, based on Primary Mathematics’ concept of the Number Bond, to help build conceptual understanding of themathfact families taught in MorningsideMathFacts. This program teaches students simple addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division problems, then provides opportunities for students to practice these basic facts to fluency with celeration. During structured fluency blocks, students were first taught to discriminate different error patterns and prescribe appropriate interventions. Then, students learned to analyze performance data from their Standard Celeration Charts, set their personalized daily improvement goals, and construct daily celeration lines that empowered them to make within-session decisions about when academic interventions were needed. Videos of how the Number Bond component was integrated into the daily Morningside Math Facts routine and examples of peer coaching repertoires will be shown.

 
Moderators of Fluency-based Instruction: The Impact of Individual Differences on Outcomes of Intervention
(Applied Research)
Aoife McTiernan (University of South Wales), JENNIFER HOLLOWAY (National University of Ireland, Galway), Olive Healy (Trinity College Dublin), Caroline Leonard (National University of Ireland, Galway)
Abstract: The research investigated the effects of precision teaching (PT), frequency-building (FB) and the Morningside Mathematics Fluency: Math Facts curriculum, as well as exploring the potential individual moderators of FB, across two experimental studies. The first study demonstrated outcomes of PT and the Morningside Curriculum with addition and subtraction computation. Twenty-eight fourth grade children were randomly assigned to experimental and treatment as usual (TAU) conditions. Results demonstrated outcomes similar to previous research and showed the effectiveness of PT, frequency-building, and the Morningside Mathematics Fluency: Math Facts curriculum. The second study explored the potential individual moderators of frequency-building, across an additional 71 participants, who received frequency-building with the Morningside Mathematics Fluency: Math Facts curriculum. Participant age, grade, gender, standardised measures of mathematical ability, and pre-intervention rates of correct responding with instructional materials, were investigated as potential moderating variables. Following correlational analysis, a hierarchical multiple regressesion was employed and showed that participant age and pre-test rates of correct responding demonstrated the greatest moderating factors on intervention outcomes. The current findings are discussed in terms of the contribution to the design and delivery of fluency-based intervention for children to promote lasting positive outcomes in mathematics performance.
 

An Evaluation of The Morningside Model of Generative Instruction on the Mathematics Performance of Students With Autism

(Service Delivery)
KATHY FOX (Haugland Learning Center), Jason Guild (Haugland Learning Center), Morten Haugland (Haugland Learning Center)
Abstract:

For the past eight years, the ASPIRE program at Haugland Learning Center has collaborated with Morningside Academy to replicate the Morningside Model of Generative Instruction (MMGI) with students with autism. This presentation will focus on student growth in the area of mathematics during that time period. Many parents and students of incoming students report math as a primary area of academic need. Students often arrive in the ASPIRE program with minimal classroom participation skills, as well as deficits of two or more years in the areas of math facts fluency and calculation. These areas of concern are addressed via direct instruction programming in coordination with the Morningside Mathematics Foundations Fluency curriculum. In addition to math fact and computation fluency, ASPIRE has recently implemented the newest Morningside Math program: Algebra for Beginners, which uses evidence-based practices in instructional design and Precision Teaching to teach students strategies for solving increasingly complex word problems. The heavy focus on constructing strong academic repertoires, and the use of unique classroom management techniques has led to several years of impressive outcome data. This presentation will discuss practices to facilitate student growth, the collection and evaluation of performance data, and data-based decision protocols. Specific examples of student growth will be presented.

 

Using Curriculum Based Assessment to Evaluate the Application and Adduction of Sentence-Combining Skills and Syntactical Maturity

(Service Delivery)
MARIANNE DELGADO (Morningside Academy), Kent Johnson (Morningside Academy), Geoffrey H. Martin (Morningside Academy)
Abstract:

The presence of 12 sentence combining skills denoting syntactic maturity was tracked, every two weeks, using 13-minute curriculum-based writing assessments (CBAs) with middle school students. Skills tracked, in order of increasing complexity, were usage of: adjectives, compound subjects, and compound predicates; adjectival, adverbial, participial, and infinitive phrases; parenthetical expressions; and adjectival, adverbial, and noun clauses. 15 students from three different classrooms participated, all using Dr. Arthur Whimbey’s Keys to Quick Writing Skills in coordination with Morningside’s Advanced Sentence Combining. Each class started their sentence combining instruction in staggered six to eight week intervals, allowing for a multiple baseline study. Data was recorded on a Standard Celeration Chart, which allowed for phase change lines as instruction on different skills occurred. Skill acquisition was analyzed for application (occurring close to instruction) or adduction (occurring further from instruction in unique combinations). Skills acquisition was compared across skill levels (high, medium, low), classrooms, and periods of instruction. Developing a twice-monthly method of assessing syntactic maturity will provide timely and useful feedback to teachers to help them provide effective instruction.

 
 
Invited Tutorial #455
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP
Best Practices in Treating Repetitive Behavior: From Stereotypy to Social Skills
Monday, May 27, 2019
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom EF
Area: PRA; Domain: Service Delivery
PSY/BACB/NASP CE Offered. CE Instructor: William Ahearn, Ph.D.
Chair: Cynthia M. Anderson (May Institute)
Presenting Authors: : WILLIAM AHEARN (New England Center for Children)
Abstract:

This tutorial will describe the best practices for treating automatically-reinforced repetitive behavior. Intensive behavior analytic intervention for children diagnosed with autism can produce large gains in social, cognitive, and language development. One critical area to address is repetitive behavior such as stereotypy. Some applied research on evaluating and treating stereotypic behavior will be reviewed with a focus on effective interventions for building core adaptive living and social skills, in addition to procedures for treating stereotypic behavior directly. Treatment strategies discussed will include Response Interruption and Redirection (RIRD; noted by The National Professional Development Center on Autism Spectrum Disorder as one of 34 “best practice focused interventions”). A variety of redirection strategies that are contextually relevant in situations in which stereotypic behavior is interfering will be discussed. Additionally, verbal operant training and training social behavior in situations where stereotypy is problematic will be reviewed.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

ABA practitioners.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the function of stereotypic behavior; (2) describe a variety of Response Interruption and Redirection (RIRD) procedures; (3) describe when RIRD procedures are NOT necessary; (4) describe procedures for supporting contextually appropriate behavior in situations in which stereotypy is problematic.
 
WILLIAM AHEARN (New England Center for Children)

William H. Ahearn, Ph.D., BCBA-D, LABA joined The New England Center for Children in August 1996, and serves as the Director of Research. He is also Adjunct Faculty in Western New England University's masters and doctoral programs and the UMass Medical School Department of Psychiatry. Bill was named the 2009 American Psychological Association - Division 25 awardee for Enduring Contributions to Applied Behavioral Research. His work has been published in the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, Behavioral Interventions, Behavior Modification, The Lancet, Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders and has written book chapters on teaching children with autism, pediatric feeding problems in children with autism, and the certification and licensure of behavior analysts. Bill is currently the Editor-in-Chief of Behavioral Interventions and serves on several Editorial Boards. He has also been a federally-funded researcher in collaboration with Bill Dube, Bill McIlvane, Tony Nevin, and others. Bill is a past-President of APBA and BABAT and serves as the chair of the board that licenses behavior analysts in MA being appointed by both a Democratic and Republican Governor.

 
 
Symposium #456
CE Offered: BACB
Factors Affecting Quality of Life for Individuals With Autism Spectrum Disorder
Monday, May 27, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Lobby Level, Plaza Ballroom AB
Area: AUT/CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Thomas L. Zane (University of Kansas)
Discussant: David A. Celiberti (Association for Science in Autism Treatment)
CE Instructor: Jessica Zawacki, M.S.
Abstract:

Quality of Life (QoL) is defined as a term that integrates objective and subjective indicators of a broad range of life domains and individual values and has long been a focus of mainstream society. When it comes to people with disabilities, however, attention to a QoL has historically not been a priority. While educational and civil rights litigation has advanced quality of life for individuals with disabilities and the literature is replete with studies assessing QoL, including happiness, little attention has been given to parental perceptions and priorities for their children when it comes to QoL concerns. The purpose of this symposium is to further the extant research to include information from families regarding what factors they believe are important to obtaining a QoL for their child and whom they perceive is responsible to ensure that their child obtains a QoL, and to present a behavior analytic procedure to assess specific factors that might be highly correlated, if not causally related, to indices of happiness, and to challenge the current staff training model during pairing in order for staff to exceed beyond becoming conditioned reinforcers, but to become primary reinforcers to the individuals they serve.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): autism, happiness, quality
Target Audience:

Clinicians, teachers, human service providers, BCBAs, psychologist, social workers.

Learning Objectives: 1. Orally describe the importance of a QUALITY OF LIFE 2. orally list at least 5 dimensions that make up a quality of life 3. conduct a preference assessment across various staff members
 
Parent Perspectives on the Importance of Quality of Life and its Potential Impact on Programing Decisions Including Staff Training
GLORIA SATRIALE (PAAL)
Abstract: Agencies serving individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder typically focus on teaching academics, social skills, adaptive behavior, and workplace competencies with little attention devoted to what components of programming are necessary to result in an overall quality of life. An emerging area is the importance of happiness and achieving a quality of life (QoL) as the ultimate outcome of support services. This study examined parental perspectives on the importance and priority of individual indices of QoL. Data were gathered through an online survey. Parents reported happiness to be an important component to an overall positive QoL (PQoL). Further, parents placed responsibility for identifying and attaining PQoL on educational and service systems, but believed that educational and service providers are not currently performing services in a manner that addresses QoL concerns. Results from this study established what indices of happiness are important to parents and demonstrated that parental priorities are incongruent with much of the literature discussing and prioritizing indices of happiness necessary for an overall PQoL. The results of this study provide educational professionals and service providers with a deeper understanding of parent perceptions and priorities regarding QoL potentially impacting current service provision models.
 

Staff Preference: Another Dimension of Assessment and its Relation to On-Task and Compliance Behavior

JESSICA ZAWACKI (MECA), Gloria Satriale (PAAL)
Abstract:

This study seeks to investigate the effects of staff preference (highly preferred staff versus less preferred staff) on the affect, compliance, and on-task behavior of adolescents and adults with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) during demand activities that require prompting for on task engagement and task completion. Individual participants who indicate (through a preference assessment) a clear preference for certain staff members when compared to others, will be included in the study. Each participant will engage in the same demand activity conditions while direct-care staff members will be randomly alternated (highly preferred and less-preferred). Data will be evaluated through an alternating treatments design. Post hoc analysis will be conducted in order to identify the specific characteristics of the highly preferred staff (e.g., physical contact, facial expression, praise). Implications for the study include the value of providing choice and assessing preference of staff members and the potential impact for changing traditional staff training models to emphasize training for staff to position themselves as conditioned reinforcers to the individuals they serve.

 
 
Invited Paper Session #458
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP

Evolving Organizationally: Acceptance and Commitment Therapy as Organizational Behavior Management in a School-Based Partial Hospital Program

Monday, May 27, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Stuart Libman, Ph.D.
Chair: Amy Murrell (University of North Texas)
STUART LIBMAN (PLEA)
Stuart Libman, M.D. is a Child, Adolescent and Family Psychiatrist, with further sub-specialization in Sports Psychiatry. After graduating from Ohio University and the School of Medicine at Case Western Reserve University, he completed training in Pediatrics, General Psychiatry, and Child and Adolescent Psychiatry at the University of Pittsburgh. In addition to serving as the Medical Director of the PLEA School Based Partial Hospital Program (SBPHP), he has experience providing executive coaching and organizational consultation in school districts, law firms, hospitals, business corporations, universities and sports teams. He has presented at such conferences as the Annual Meeting(s) of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry and the International Precision Teaching Conference, on topics ranging from a Developmental Framework for Adult Participation in Youth Sports, to a Psychiatric Perspective on ABA as Precision Teaching and ACT, to ACT Workshops for audiences in these as well as various other professional settings.
Abstract:

Acceptance and Commitment Training (ACT) is evolving from clinical intervention into Organizational Behavior Management (OBM) at PLEA, a public sector, non-profit agency in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. PLEA’s School-Based Partial Hospital Program (SBPHP) serves a population of children and adolescents with diagnoses on the Autistic Spectrum. The SBPHP has grown over the past fifty years from a preschool started by parents desperately seeking services for their Autistic children to a program using principles of Applied Behavior Analysis in three main forms: Precision Teaching, Relational Frame Theory, and Acceptance and Commitment Training. ACT’s model of Psychological Flexibility as reflected in the ACT Matrix diagram has undergone progressive transformation from clinical to administrative functions. The “Prosocial” method, an approach integrating the ACT Matrix with the Core Design Principles of Successful Groups for which Elinor Ostrom won the 2009 Nobel Prize in Economics, also has been introduced at various levels within the organization (https://www.prosocial.world/). “Prosocial” is being broadly conceived as providing a platform for studying the evolutionary theory of multilevel selection. The impact of selection by consequences was discerned by B.F. Skinner not only for natural selection but also for operant conditioning of individual behavior as well as cultural evolution. In their recent book, Evolution and Contextual Behavioral Science: An Integrated Framework for Understanding, Predicting and Influencing Human Behavior, David Sloan Wilson and Steven C. Hayes elaborate Evolutionary Science as a multilevel process of variation, selection, and retention. The ACT Matrix will be used throughout this presentation to explicate this multilevel process of ACT evolving into OBM at PLEA.

Target Audience:

Behavior analysts and other mental health professionals working in community-based organizations, particularly if interested in CBM, AUT, OBM, and/or CBS in the forms of RFT, ACT, and/or “Prosocial.”

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, attendees will be able to: (1) define “Psychological Flexibility” as used within Acceptance and Commitment Training (ACT); (2) explain the ACT Matrix in terms of the two key discriminations represented by its horizontal and vertical axes and in term of the questions that accompany each of its four quadrants; (3) explain how ACT can be viewed as an evolutionary model; and (4) describe how ACT can be applied organizationally.
 
 
Symposium #459
CE Offered: BACB
Stepping Outside of Our Comfort Zone: Behavior Analysts Addressing Anxiety and Other Mental Health Challenges in School and Community Settings
Monday, May 27, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 1/2
Area: CBM/AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: Jesse (Woody) W. Johnson (Northern Illinois University)
CE Instructor: Jesse (Woody) W. Johnson, Ed.D.
Abstract:

Historically, applied behavior analysts have focused on the development of interventions to address problematic behaviors that are easily defined and measured. As a result, many behavior analyst have avoided working with individuals with more complex mental health concerns such as anxiety. Mental health diagnoses involve private events and are therefore difficult to operationally define, observe, and measure. Unfortunately, non-behavioral practitioners often view aberrant behaviors in individuals with mental health diagnoses as symptoms of underlying constructs and use the diagnosis as the reason for these behaviors. As a result, these practitioners often propose more global treatments such as therapies or medications. On the other hand, behavior analysts view those behaviors as serving an environmental function that can be replaced with a more acceptable behavior serving the same function. The behavioral perspective also includes an analysis of motivating operations in the form of private events, physiological sensations, bio-behavioral states, psychological feelings, and covert tacts/mands and learning history with particular discriminative stimuli for reinforcement and punishment. The presenters in this symposium will describe tools and strategies for addressing mental health issues from a behavioral perspective.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): anxiety, biomarkers, mental health, wearable devices
Target Audience:

BCBAs working in school and community settings

 

Overview of Wearable Biomarker Devices in Applied Behavior Analysis: Implications for Individuals Who Experience Significant Anxiety

(Service Delivery)
JESSE (WOODY) W. JOHNSON (Northern Illinois University), Toni R. Van Laarhoven (Northern Illinois University), Michael Ackerman (Indian Prairie School District), Natalie Andzik (Northern Illinois University), Maria Wheeler (Indian Prairie School District), Gretta Ward (Northern Illinois University), Heather Kerfoot (Northern Illinois University), Ann Robinson (Northern Illinois University)
Abstract:

Up to 80% of children and youth with ASDs experience clinically significant anxiety (Leyfer, Folstein, Bacalmen, et al., 2006). Individuals with ASDs and comorbid anxiety are at increased risk for displaying externalizing behavior problems, social avoidance, and difficulties establishing/maintaining peer relationships across environments (Davis, Hess, Moree et al., 2011). A number of physiological markers associated with stress have been identified and often involve measurement of electrodermal activity (EDA)/skin conductance level or response (SCL and SCR), heart rate (HR), heart rate variability (HRV), blood pressure (BP), muscle tension, respiration/breathing patterns (Choi & Gutierrez-Osuna, 2009), and other measures such as Error-Related Brain Activity (ERN) (Rosen & Lerner, 2017), and cortisol (Moskowitz, Rosen, et al, 2017). Much of the research involving biomarkers conducted to date has been done by researchers in the medical field in lab settings with participants having various electrodes and wires attached to their bodies; however, many researchers are investigating the effectiveness of using wearable sensors that are unobtrusive and allow for measurement of physiological markers associated with stress over longer periods of time in naturalistic settings (Lakudzode & Rajbhoj, 2016; Moskowitz, Walsh, et al, 2017). New research is beginning to investigate the effectiveness or wearable biosensor devices to measure physiological indicators of stress and anxiety in naturalistic settings (Lakudzode & Rajbhoj, 2016). The purpose of this presentation is to describe a number of commercially available wearable technologies that have the capacity to measure physiological markers (biomarkers) associated with stress and anxiety. The presenters will provide an overview of current research on the use of wearable biomarker devices and discuss the implications for using these devices in applied settings.

 

Integrating Wearable Biomarker Devices Into Behavioral Assessment and Intervention

(Service Delivery)
TONI R. VAN LAARHOVEN (Northern Illinois University), Jesse (Woody) W. Johnson (Northern Illinois University), Lisa Liberty (Northern Illinois University), Beth Collins (Northern Illinois University), Veronica Cornell (Northern Illinois University), Angie Lobdell (Northern Illinois University), NATASHA A RADNOVICH (Core Therapy, Inc), Jennifer Johnson (Northern Illinois University)
Abstract:

Researchers suggest that anxiety-related concerns are among the most common presenting problems for children and adolescents with ASD (White, Oswald, Ollendick, & Scahill, 2009). Up to 80% of children with ASDs experience clinically significant anxiety (Leyfer, Folstein, Bacalmen, et al., 2006). Anxiety is a multi-component construct involving affective states (e.g., subjective fear), cognitions (e.g., thoughts, beliefs) behavioral patterns (avoidance), and associated physiological arousal (e.g., increased heart rate, changes in respiration patterns) (Moskowitz et. al 2017). Assessing anxiety in individuals with ASD and IDD is difficult due to communication deficits, difficulty distinguishing symptoms of anxiety from symptoms of ASD/IDD, and the idiosyncratic behavioral expression of anxiety in individuals with ASD/IDD (Hagopian & Jennett, 2008; While et al., 2009). Behavior analysts frequently rely on direct observation measures to quantify observable behaviors associated with anxiety, agitation, and/or stress for individuals with limited verbal skills (e.g., increased rocking, change in tone of vocalizations) while also attending to environmental variables associated with anxiety or stress. Although direct observation is effective for identifying behavioral manifestations of anxiety, this type of measurement may result in incomplete information as anxiety and stress are internal states that may not be accessible through direct observation. As a result, research on behavioral assessment and interventions for individuals with ASD/IDD has not adequately addressed the role of anxiety as a contributing factor in challenging behavior with these individuals. The purpose of this presentation is to describe how physiological information obtained from wearable devices can be used for behavioral assessment and the development of function-based interventions for anxiety-related challenging behavior. We will also provide case study examples to illustrate how these devices can be used to teach the individuals to self- regulate or use coping and/or relaxation strategies.

 

Treating Children With Complex Behavioral and Mental Health Concerns Across Settings

(Service Delivery)
KATHERINE SAGE (University of Wisconsin- Milwaukee)
Abstract:

Complex cases of behavioral, medical, and social difficulties in adolescents can cause emotional distress for children, adolescents, and their families. Helping individuals to build an understanding of their internal emotional states as well as the motivating operations of their behaviors and emotions can decrease problem behaviors due to emotional distress. The presenter works with adolescents in both medical and school settings in a rural, impoverished area. Many of the individuals in this area lack the resources to seek mental health or behavioral services that are needed to address emotional and behavioral concerns. The presenter will describe how she bridged medical, school, and home settings using behavioral principles to address social skill deficits and anxiety in an adolescent presenting with school refusal and Autism-Spectrum Disorder related deficits.

 
 
Symposium #461
CE Offered: BACB
Increasing Activity Engagement in Older Adults With Intellectual Disabilities and Neurocogntive Disorder
Monday, May 27, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 1-3
Area: DEV/DDA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Sandra Wagner (Western Michigan University)
Discussant: Maranda A Trahan (Trahan Behavioral Services)
CE Instructor: Maranda A Trahan, M.A.
Abstract:

1. Activity engagement is imperative to promoting independence, reducing the number of opportunities to engage in problem behavior (e.g., wandering), and has been associated with increasing quality of life among older adults. Given the benefits of activity engagement, it is imperative to examine how we can effectively increase engagement with preferred activities. With some activities, social attention may be a significant component and may help facilitate engagement. This symposium will include two talks: 1) Assessing Preferences for Care of People with Dementia: A Simultaneous Treatments Design and 2) Promoting Activity Engagement in Older Adults.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Activity engagement, Neurocognitive disorder, Older adults, Preference assessment
Target Audience:

This presentation is tailored to practitioners and researchers in the field of behavioral gerontology; however, practitioners and researchers outside the field of behavioral gerontology are encouraged to attend. Given the importance of activity engagement, practitioners, both in and outside the field of behavioral gerontology, prioritize increasing engagement.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the importance of activity engagement in the older adult population, (2) describe the different treatments to increase activity engagement in older adults with intellectual disabilities and dementia, and (3) describe the issues of faulty stimulus control among older adults with dementia.
 

Promoting Activity Engagement With Older Adults

(Applied Research)
SYDNEY BULOCK (Western Michigan University), Andrea Perez (Western Michigan University), Sandra Wagner (Western Michigan University), Jonathan C. Baker (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

Older adults with intellectual disabilities are likely to have lower levels of engagement. In efforts to increase activity engagement, researchers have implemented various strategies to increase engagement (Engelman, Atlus, & Mathews, 1999; Engstrom, Mudford, & Brand, 2015). Current literature, however, has not directly compared those approaches to one another. The purpose of this study was to use an alternating treatments design to compare the following four strategies: 1) provided access to preferred items with no attention, 2) provided attention every 10 minutes for 60 seconds, 3) provided attention every 10 minutes for 10 minutes, and 4) provided 30 minutes of attention followed by 30 minutes of no attention. The participant was a 63-year old male diagnosed with moderate intellectual disability and attended an adult day program. Prior to implementing those approaches, a paired stimulus preference assessment was conducted to determine the participant’s top preferred activities. Results suggest that providing social attention for 30 minutes followed by no attention produced the greatest level of activity engagement. Implications and suggestions for future research will be discussed.

 

Assessing Preferences for Care of People With Dementia: A Simultaneous Treatments Design

(Applied Research)
ZOE LUCOCK (Bangor University), Rebecca A Sharp (Bangor University)
Abstract:

Stimulus preference assessments have previously been used with people with dementia to determine their preferences for tangible items such as edibles and leisure items. However, to date there is no literature exploring preferences for the type of social interaction that may accompany engagement with preferred activities. We used a rarely-used simultaneous treatments design to measure the preferences of people with dementia who were unable to state vocally their preferences for different contingencies of care. For example, for a participant for whom completing jigsaws was a preferred activity, we investigated whether she preferred to be provided with prompts to complete the activity jigsaw, to be left to complete the jigsaw alone, or to receive non-contingent attention during the activity. We compared simultaneous presentations of the available contingencies to sequential presentations in order to determine whether either presentation format was more effective than the other for measuring preference. Additionally, we took continuous data on engagement and indices of happiness as corollary measures of preference during the delivery of each chosen contingency. We will discuss our findings in relation to supporting people with communication difficulties and dementia, and with regard to issues of faulty stimulus control in the behavior of people with dementia.

 
 
Invited Paper Session #462
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

An Analysis of the Components of Bidirectional Naming, the Naming Experiences to Occasion the Incidental Acquisition of Language and Protocols to Induce Bidirectional and Complex Naming Repertoires

Monday, May 27, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, St. Gallen 1-3
Area: DEV; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Jennifer Longano, Ph.D.
Chair: Jessica Singer-Dudek (Teachers College, Columbia University)
JENNIFER LONGANO (Teachers College, Columbia University)

Dr. Jennifer Longano received her BS in education from the State University of New York at Geneseo. She then earned her MA M.Phil, and Ph.D. in applied behavior analysis from Teachers College, Columbia University. Jennifer Longano is a supervisor of the Early Intervention Program for the Fred S. Keller School located in the suburbs of New York City. She has worked for the Fred S. Keller School, a CABAS® model school, since 2008 supervising both preschool and early intervention classrooms for children with and without disabilities. She also is an Adjunct Assistant Professor for Teachers College and has taught courses in Applied Behavior Analysis, Single-Case Design, and Inclusion for the Health and Behavior Studies Department. She has earned several CABAS® ranks and currently holds a Senior Behavior Analyst and an Assistant Research Scientist rank. Her research has focused on verbal developmental cusps including: the source of reinforcement for naming, procedures to test for and induce naming, pre-foundational verbal developmental cups and capabilities, and conditioned reinforcement related to observing responses.

Abstract:

I will discuss the acquisition of bidirectional naming from the verbal developmental perspective. Observing responses selected out by conditioned reinforcers can set the occasion for the acquisition of verbal developmental cups and capabilities. These observing responses establish a history of stimulus-stimulus pairings, which set the occasion for the listener and speaker repertoires to be joined. Once joined, more complex cusps and capabilities can be acquired allowing for the emergence of incidental language, bidirectional operants, and advanced naming repertoires. For some individuals, listener and speaker repertoires are not joined naturally. Thus, protocols that can arrange the environmental contingencies to occasion the acquisition of bidirectional naming can be implemented. In CABAS® model schools, which are affiliated with Teachers College Columbia University, ongoing research has focused on identifying when bidirectional naming is present or missing, the types of naming repertoires, protocols to induce bidirectional naming, and the best instructional practices to accelerate learning when bidirectional naming is present.

Target Audience:

The following presentation will be for individuals interested in verbal behavior and verbal behavior developmental theory with a heavy focus on the source of reinforcement for incidental language acquisition or bidirectional naming. The presentation will also discuss how to identify when Naming is present or absent, different types of naming experiences, and procedures to induce naming. The audience should have some understanding (intermediate level) of verbal developmental theory and naming.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) discuss the components of bidirectional naming and once acquired how other more complex naming repertoires can emerge; (2) provide detailed descriptions of different types of Naming experiences to test for the presence or absence of naming; (3) review protocols to induce bidirectional naming; (4) discuss best instructional practices once bidirectional naming is present to accelerate learning.
 
 
Panel #463
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Ethics in Organizational Behavior Management: A Discussion of Leadership, Regulation, and a Call to Action
Monday, May 27, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Toronto
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Dennis Uriarte, Ph.D.
Chair: Dennis Uriarte (Florida Institute of Technology)
DARNELL LATTAL (ABA Technologies, Inc.)
MOLLI LUKE (Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
JOSHUA K. PRITCHARD (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract:

As behavior analysts, we are all continuously working to integrate what we as individuals and a field view as ethical into our daily practices. We actively self-evaluate to ensure compliance with our current work and try to be proactive while evaluating potential new work we might be pursuing. For example, if a new job or promotion expands an individual’s scope of competence beyond the direct implementation of a given area of service, then the scope has now shifted from direct-provision of services to managing employee performance. Ethics, in all its forms and extensions (e.g., regulation, credentialing), should be defined and applied to OBM practitioners the same as they do in other areas where behavior analysis is applied. The purpose of this panel is to discuss OBM ethics from various perspectives, including the role of business owners, researchers, consultants, supervisors, and various areas of leadership and the role of OBM ethics in the pursuit of credentialing and licensure.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

The target audience is new and experienced OBM practitioners or those who might eventually become OBM practitioners (e.g., front-line BCBA seeking promotion).

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the panel, attendees will be able to: 1. Describe how the BACB Ethics Code relates to OBM. 2. Describe how credentialing and licensure is applicable to OBM practitioners. 3. Describe various roles OBM practitioners can have in business and how these roles relate to ethical decision making.
Keyword(s): Credentialing, Ethics, Leadership, OBM
 
 
Invited Paper Session #464
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

What Evolutionary Theory Tells Us About Behavior

Monday, May 27, 2019
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: PCH; Domain: Theory
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: William Baum, Ph.D.
Chair: Carsta Simon (Oslo Metropolitan University, Norway)
WILLIAM BAUM (University of California, Davis)
Dr. Baum received his BA in psychology from Harvard College in 1961. Originally a biology major, he switched to psychology after taking courses from B. F. Skinner and R. J. Herrnstein in his freshman and sophomore years. He attended Harvard University for graduate study in 1962, where he was supervised by Herrnstein and received his Ph.D. in 1966. He spent the year 1965–66 at Cambridge University, studying ethology at the Sub-Department of Animal Behavior. From 1966 to 1975, he held appointments as post-doctoral fellow, research associate, and assistant professor at Harvard University. He spent two years at the National Institutes of Health Laboratory for Brain, Evolution, and Behavior and then accepted an appointment in psychology at the University of New Hampshire in 1977. He retired from there in 1999. He currently has an appointment as associate researcher at the University of California, Davis and lives in San Francisco. His research concerns choice, molar behavior/environment relations, foraging, cultural evolution, and behaviorism. He is the author of a book, Understanding Behaviorism: Behavior, Culture, and Evolution.
Abstract:

Why do organisms and behavior exist? Organisms exist because genes that make organisms increase reproductive success. An organism’s behavior is its interactions with its environment. Behavior, on average and in the long run, functions to serve reproducing. Surviving usually serves reproducing, and other activities like maintaining health, maintaining relationships, and gaining resources usually serve surviving and sometimes directly serve reproducing. When phylogenetically important features of the environment vary in ways that can be tracked by physiological mechanisms, selection favors phenotypic plasticity. Part of phenotypic plasticity is behavioral plasticity. Phylogenetically important events (PIEs), such as presence of potential mates, predators, or prey, impact reproductive success and underpin selection for behavioral plasticity. PIEs induce activities that tend to mitigate threats and enhance benefits. Additionally, selection favors phenotypes that respond to covariance in the environment between PIEs and other events and between activities and PIEs. Events that covary with a PIE come to induce the same activities as the PIE, and activities that covary with a PIE come to be induced by the PIE. Induction is the mechanism of the Law of Allocation that governs the allocation of time among an organism’s activities.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) understand why organisms exist; (2) understand why behavior exists; (3) understand why behavior must be extended in time.
 
 
Symposium #467
CE Offered: BACB
Repetitive Responses: Treating Obsessive Compulsive and Stereotypic Behavior in Children With Autism Spectrum Disorders
Monday, May 27, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom A
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Marc J. Lanovaz (Université de Montréal)
Discussant: Mandy J. Rispoli (Purdue University)
CE Instructor: Jennifer Cook, M.S.
Abstract:

Practitioners treating children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder will inevitably encounter the problem of decreasing repetitive behavior. One form of repetitive behaviors are obsessive compulsive behaviors, and the paucity of research in this area leaves practitioners with few options. The first presentation will describe a randomized control trial involving 37 children to evaluate the effects of Functional Behavior-based Cognitive Behavior Therapy. The second presentation will suggest how the role of respondent and operant conditioning on obsessive compulsive behavior, and the implications for assessment and treatment. The third presentation will transition into a discussion on another commonly encountered form of repetitive behavior, stereotypy. Selections for stereotypy treatment may be context-specific; as such 5 children were assessed and treated to the extent necessary within an instructional setting. The fourth presentation extends stereotypy treatment into the home. Researchers in this study designed an iOS app, the iSTIM, and assessed the utility this app as a tool to be used by parents to treat stereotypy of their own children.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): OCD, repetitive behavior, stereotypy, treatment methods
Target Audience:

Psychologists, Board Certified Behavior Analysts, Board Certified assistant Behavior Analysts, graduate students, teaching faculty

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) Discriminate between and identify the different types of repetitive behavior (2) Describe an appropriate assessment method that can be used for a specific type of repetitive behavior (3) Describe an appropriate treatment method that can be used for a specific type of repetitive behavior (4) Search the literature for unique approaches or methodologies for repetitive behavior
 

A Blended Approach of Cognitive-Behavior Therapy and Applied Behavior Analysis for Obsessive Compulsive Behavior

(Applied Research)
TRICIA CORINNE VAUSE (Brock University), Heather Yates (University of Manitoba), Nicole M. Neil (University of Western Ontario), Jan Frijters (Brock University), Grayzna Jackiewicz (Private Practice), Maurice Feldman (Brock University)
Abstract:

Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) frequently experience obsessions and compulsions similar to those specified in DSM-5 for Obsessive Compulsive Disorder (OCD) yet a paucity of research exists on treating these behaviours. Thirty-seven children (7 to 13 years old) received random assignment to a nine-week Functional Behavior-based Cognitive Behavior Therapy (Fb-CBT) or Treatment As Usual (TAU). Fb-CBT combines CBT (e.g., exposure and response prevention) and ABA elements (e.g., extinction, functional communication training and differential reinforcement) derived from functional behavioral assessment. Independent assessors administered measures pre- and post-treatment and at 6-months. Two primary outcome measures including the Repetitive Behavior Scale-Revised and the Children’s Yale-Brown Obsessive Compulsive Scale indicated statistically significant differences between groups, with large corrected effect sizes (Hedge’s g = 1.00 and 1.15, respectively). Time series parent report data corroborated these findings with two-thirds of treated behaviors in Fb-CBT showing a positive treatment response. This is the first known RCT to exclusively treat OCBs in children with high functioning ASD, and suggests that CBT with ABA components may be efficacious in decreasing OCBs and associated functional impairment.

 
A Behavior Analytic Conceptual Framework for the Assessment and Treatment of Obsessive Compulsive Behaviors
(Theory)
EMILY GUERTIN (Brock University), Tricia Corinne Vause (Brock University), Jan Frijters (Brock University), Maurice Feldman (Brock University)
Abstract: A subset of repetitive behaviors in Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) including insistence on sameness, ritualistic behavior, and compulsions overlaps topographically with symptoms characteristic of Obsessive Compulsive Disorder. The overlapping symptoms often present a challenge in the literature for selecting how to assess and treat these behaviors. This presentation discusses the often-complex role that the function of an obsessive compulsive behavior (OCB) serves for an individual. Based on Mowrer’s (1951) two-factor theory of avoidance learning, both classical and instrumental learning processes can be involved in the development and maintenance of repetitive behaviors. Using behavioral models, four case examples from clinical treatment studies illustrate the influence of primary or multiple functions on obsessive compulsive behaviors in ASD, highlighting that the topography of the behavior alone may not indicate the function of the behavior (see Figure 1 for a clinical example of a multiply controlled behavior). Behavioral models describe the role of respondent and operant conditioning and ways that behavioral technologies can be integrated to enhance treatment efficacy. Methods of functional behavioral assessment including informant and observational methods and recommendations for incorporating assessment results in treatment are provided. Limitations and future directions for function-based treatment of OCBs in persons with ASD are discussed.
 

To What Extent Do Practitioners Need to Treat Stereotypy During Academic Tasks?

(Applied Research)
JENNIFER COOK (University of South Florida, Monarch House), John T. Rapp (Auburn University)
Abstract:

Researchers frequently argue that a child’s engagement in stereotypy may compete with his ability to acquire academic skills, engage in appropriate social interactions, or both; however, few studies have directly tested these suppositions. We used a five-phase assessment to evaluate the extent to which behavioral interventions with a progressively greater number of components were necessary to decrease stereotypy and increase correct responding during academic instructions for five children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorders. For one participant, stereotypy decreased when instructors provided standard instruction without specific intervention for stereotypy. For two participants, stereotypy decreased when instructors provided standard instruction plus antecedent intervention for stereotypy with continuous music. For another participant, stereotypy decreased when instructors provided enhanced consequences for correct responding during standard instruction without either antecedent or consequent intervention for stereotypy. For the final participant, stereotypy decreased and correct responding increased when instructors provided standard instruction and consequent intervention for stereotypy.

 

Reducing Stereotypy in Children With Autism

(Applied Research)
LYDIA TRUDEL (Université de Montréal), Marc J. Lanovaz (Université de Montréal), Isabelle Préfontaine (Université de Montréal)
Abstract:

Children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) often engage in stereotypy, which may interfere with social integration, adaptive functioning and learning. Unfortunately, many children with ASD do not have access to behavioral interventions that could effectively reduce engagement in stereotypy while improving appropriate behavior. To address this issue, we developed an iOS app, the iSTIM, designed to support parents in reducing stereotypy in their child with ASD. The purpose of our study was to evaluate the effects of the iSTIM when used by parents. More specifically, we tested the effects of the app with ten children with ASD between the ages of 3 to 12 years old within a noncurrent multiple baseline design. To date, four families have completed their participation in the study. The iSTIM reduced stereotypy in the four participants, but only increased functional engagement in one participant. The preliminary results suggest that the iSTIM may benefit from modifications to improve the clarity of the procedures of the intervention.

 
 
Symposium #469
CE Offered: BACB
Save the Children: Efficient Ways to Teach Safety Skills
Monday, May 27, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 3/4
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Marissa A. Novotny (University of South Florida)
Discussant: Richard Wayne Fuqua (Western Michigan University)
CE Instructor: Marissa A. Novotny, M.A.
Abstract:

This symposium includes four papers that evaluate interventions for efficiently teaching safety skills to children. Novotny and Miltenberger discuss the use of a website to train parents on how to conduct BST to teach firearm safety skills to their children. Maxfield and Miltenberger discuss research using small-scale simulation to teach firearm safety skills to young children. Grill and Leon discuss using social stories to teach a range of safety skills to children. Barchbill and Hurst discuss research using teacher conducted BST to teach preschool aged children appropriate safety skills in the presence of chemical bottles. Wayne Fuqua will serve as discussant.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Safety Skills, Small-Scale Simulation, Social Stories
Target Audience:

BCBA and BCaBA

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe efficient ways to teach safety skills ; (2)assess children's engagement in safety skills; (3) list ways to train others to conduct BST.
 
An Evaluation of Parent Implemented Web-Based Behavior Skills Training for Firearm Safety Skills
MARISSA A. NOVOTNY (University of South Florida), Raymond G. Miltenberger (University of South Florida), Trevor Maxfield (University of South Florida)
Abstract: This study evaluated a web-based manualized intervention implemented by parents for teaching firearm safety skills. A multiple-probe across participants design was used to assess the effectiveness of parent conducted BST. Children aged 4 to 7-years old received BST and firearm safety skills were assessed during in-situ assessments. Any child that does not respond correctly during the in-situ assessment will receive in-situ training. Results demonstrated the parent conducted BST was effective for two participants while an additional two participants required in-situ assessments.
 
Teaching Safety Skills to Preschool Children: An Evaluation of Teacher-Implemented Behavioral Skills Training
Kayla Brachbill (Southern Illinois University), Erica Jowett Hirst (Southern Illinois University), PAIGE BOYDSTON (Southern Illionois University)
Abstract: The present study evaluated the effectiveness of a teacher-implemented behavioral skills training (BST) procedure for teaching preschool students to exhibit an appropriate safety response in the presence of chemical bottles. Students’ safety responses were evaluated during baseline and teacher lessons (before and after BST) for each classroom. Prior to training, teachers were prompted to give a lesson including three safety steps (don’t touch, walk away, tell a teacher). No additional instructions were provided. Next, teachers received training from a researcher on how to implement BST in a classroom setting. Results indicated that the training procedure utilized was effective for increasing the number of BST components used by teachers. Further, teacher-implemented BST resulted in increases in preschool children’s appropriate responses to chemical bottles for two classrooms; however, the increase for one of the two classrooms was only moderate, and no increase was observed for children in a third classroom. Therefore, in-situ feedback was required for these two classrooms. In addition, the procedures resulted in generalized responding to a novel set of chemical bottles, as well as, a novel category of dangerous item (medicine bottles).
 

Evaluating the Utility of Social Stories to Teach Safety Skills to a Child With Autism Spectrum Disorder

NICOLE GRILLE (Florida Institute of Technology), Yanerys Leon (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract:

We evaluated the utility of social stories to teach safety skills to a pre-school aged boy with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD). The safety responses targeted were: a) saying no to a stranger, b) looking both ways before crossing the street, and c) waiting for an adult at the door. During intervention, the participant was read social stories and then asked various questions regarding the safety situations. Prior to baseline and after the social story interventions, in-situ probes were conducted. The participant failed to emit the correct safety response in 2 of the 3 contexts after intervention (i.e., abduction prevention and waiting at the door). Next, behavioral skills training (BST) was implemented to teach the remaining two skills. After BST, in-situ probes were conducted, and the participant emitted the correct safety response in the following in-situ probes. Thus, results suggested that although social stories taught participants how to answer questions about safety, they were not an effective teaching method to produce actual safety skills. These results further highlight the need for in-situ probes to test for skill acquisition in this context.

 
Evaluating Small-Scale Simulation for Training Firearm Safety Skills
TREVOR MAXFIELD (University of South Florida), Raymond G. Miltenberger (University of South Florida), Marissa A. Novotny (University of South Florida)
Abstract: There is limited research using small-scale simulation in applied behavior analysis. We used small-scale simulation to train firearm safety skills to 3 to 5-years-old children and assessed whether the skills generalized to the natural environment through in situ assessment. Three participants completed the training and all participants learned the safety skills from simulation training. Two of the participants acquired the safety skills after the first simulation training and the third participant required one booster training before demonstrating the safety skills in the natural environment.
 
 
Symposium #471
CE Offered: BACB
Toward a Better Understanding of Resurgence in Clinical Settings
Monday, May 27, 2019
11:00 AM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom A
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: William Sullivan (Upstate Medical University)
Discussant: Maggie Sweeney (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
CE Instructor: Ashley Marie Fuhrman, M.S.
Abstract:

Resurgence can be conceptualized as a form of treatment relapse that occurs when a previously extinguished behavior reemerges once a more recently reinforced behavior also contacts extinction. In clinical settings, resurgence of destructive behavior poses a serious threat to the individual, their caregivers, and the longevity of treatment effects. This symposium will describe four studies that examined resurgence of destructive behavior in clinical settings. The first two presentations will be given by Sean Smith and Dr. Valdeep Saini, respectively. Their presentations will describe a two-experiment study that examined the impact of baseline reinforcement rate on the magnitude of resurgence. More specifically, these studies tested a prediction of Behavioral Momentum Theory that suggests higher rates of baseline reinforcement will lead to greater resurgence. The third study will be presented by Dr. William Sullivan. This presentation will illustrate that when a target destructive behavior resurges, other destructive behaviors that are members of the same functional response class may also emerge. In the final presentation, Ashley Furhman will present a study that utilized discriminative stimuli under a multiple-schedule arrangement to mitigate resurgence. Each presentation will provide new insights into clinically meaningful variables that affect the resurgence of destructive behavior. Finally, Dr. Mary Margaret Sweeney will discuss the collective findings and provide directions for future research.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): destructive behavior, resurgence, treatment relapse
Target Audience:

BCBA's, graduate students, clinicians, and researchers

Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will describe a treatment relapse phenomena, known as resurgence. 2. Participants will describe key variables (e.g., baseline rates of reinforcement) that affect the magnitude of resurgence. 3. Participants will describe target response resurgence within the context of a response class. 4. Participants will describe the use of discriminative stimuli under mutliple-schedule arrangements as a mitigation strategy for resurgence.
 
A Preliminary Investigation of Baseline Reinforcement Rate and Resurgence of Destructive Behavior
SEAN SMITH (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Wayne W. Fisher (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Valdeep Saini (Brock University), Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), William Sullivan (Upstate Medical University), Henry S. Roane (Upstate Medical University), Ashley Marie Fuhrman (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Andrew R. Craig (SUNY Upstate Medical University)
Abstract: Although functional communication training (FCT) is a highly effective intervention for destructive behavior, FCT is susceptible to resurgence, a type of relapse that occurs when the functional communication response (FCR) contacts extinction. Behavioral momentum theory predicts that higher rates of reinforcement for destructive behavior during baseline will lead to greater resurgence than lower rates of reinforcement (Nevin & Shahan, 2011). The purpose of the present study was to evaluate the effects of high and low rates of baseline reinforcement on the resurgence of destructive behavior following FCT with four children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. We used a two-component multiple schedule across three phases. During Phase 1, destructive behavior produced reinforcement according to a dense-VI schedule in one component and a lean-VI schedule in the other component. Following FCT pre-training, Phase 2 arranged reinforcement for the FCR according to these same VI schedules in each respective component, while destructive behavior resulted in extinction. During Phase 3, neither the FCR nor destructive behavior produced reinforcement in either component. When resurgence occurred, it was consistently higher in the component associated with the dense schedule of reinforcement during baseline.
 

Clinically-Meaningful Baseline Schedules of Reinforcement and Resurgence of Problem Behavior

Valdeep Saini (Brock University), Wayne W. Fisher (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), BRIAN GREER (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), William Sullivan (Upstate Medical University), Henry S. Roane (Upstate Medical University), Ashley Marie Fuhrman (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Andrew R. Craig (SUNY Upstate Medical University)
Abstract:

Behavioral momentum theory predicts that the magnitude of resurgence of problem behavior, when extinction is introduced, will be greater if the targeted response(s) previously produced a high rate of reinforcement during baseline relative to a low rate of reinforcement during baseline. A number of laboratory and translational investigations of resurgence using children who engage in severe problem behavior as participants have shown this to be accurate when comparing high and low variable-interval (VI) schedules of reinforcement. However, one limitation of these studies has been the use of VI schedules, whereas in most clinical studies evaluating the effects of behavioral interventions for problem behavior use dense fixed-ratio (FR) schedules. As a result, a more clinically relevant comparison would be one that uses a baseline schedule of reinforcement more common to the treatment of problem behavior. With three children who engaged in problem behavior we compared the magnitude of resurgence when participants were exposed to lean-VI schedules of reinforcement during baseline or dense FR-1 schedules during baseline. For all participants we observed greater resurgence of problem behavior in the condition that was associated with FR-1 compared to the condition associated with VI.

 
Resurgence: Examining the Role of the Response Class
WILLIAM SULLIVAN (Upstate Medical University), Valdeep Saini (Brock University), Nicole M. DeRosa (SUNY Upstate Medical University), Andrew R. Craig (SUNY Upstate Medical University), Henry S. Roane (Upstate Medical University)
Abstract: Treatment of severe destructive behavior often involves withholding reinforcement for destructive behavior (i.e., extinction) while simultaneously reinforcing an appropriate alternative behavior (e.g., functional communication training; Carr & Durand, 1985). Research has demonstrated that if reinforcement of the alternative behavior is reduced or eliminated, resurgence of destructive may ensue (Volkert, Lerman, Call, & Trosclair-Lasserre, 2009). The current study evaluated the resurgence of a target destructive behavior while also assessing the emergence of other, non-targeted forms of destructive behavior. Following an initial functional analysis, a response-class analysis was conducted to confirm that various topographies of destructive behavior were functionally equivalent to the target. Next, a three-phase resurgence paradigm was conducted in which one topography of destructive behavior was targeted and reinforced in Phase 1. An alternative functional communication response was reinforced in Phase 2, while the target was placed on extinction. In Phase 3, the target and alternative responses were both placed on extinction. Furthermore, all other non-targeted forms of destructive behavior that were members of the same functional response class as the target were measured but never reinforced throughout the evaluation. Results suggested that when a target destructive behavior resurges, other response-class members may also emerge. These findings will be discussed in relation to the treatment of challenging behavior.
 
Mitigating Resurgence of Destructive Behavior Using the Discriminative Stimuli of a Multiple Schedule
ASHLEY MARIE FUHRMAN (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Wayne W. Fisher (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Daniel R. Mitteer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Cathleen C. Piazza (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
Abstract: Resurgence is a form of treatment relapse that involves the reoccurrence of a previously reinforced response following extinction of a subsequently reinforced alternative response. Results of recent translational studies have suggested that correlating contextual or discriminative stimuli with the delivery or withholding of reinforcement for the FCR may mitigate resurgence of destructive behavior, but none have isolated the effects of those stimuli. In this study, we (a) trained the FCR, brought it under stimulus control of a multiple schedule, and thinned its reinforcement schedule in one stimulus context and then (b) tested the effects of the discriminative stimuli from the multiple schedule during a resurgence sequence (baseline, FCT, extinction) in a novel context relative to an equivalent resurgence sequence in another novel context without the discriminative stimuli. Participants included four children between the ages of 4 and 16 years old. Results showed greater persistence of the FCR and more resurgence of destructive behavior in the context with the discriminative stimuli present relative to the context without those stimuli. We discuss the applied and theoretical implications of these results relative to theories of resurgence that do and do not accommodate the effects of discriminative and contextual stimuli.
 
 
Symposium #475
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Training Care Givers in Applied Behavior Analytic Skills, Part 1: Training Individual Staff and Volunteer Skills
Monday, May 27, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Peter Sturmey (The Graduate Center and Queens College, City University of New York)
CE Instructor: Peter Sturmey, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Training staff in evidence-based practices is a key skill for behavior analysts. Despite the large number of studies in this area, there are still many under-researched and un-researched topics and a need for replication. This symposium, the first of two related symposia on this topic, presents three empirical papers on staff training. The first by Gormley et al., provides an overview by reporting a research synthesis of 156 staff training studies in Intellectual Disabilities including applied behavior analysis, positive behavior supports and other interventions. The second paper, by Gregori et al., evaluates the effectiveness of behavioral skills training to teach direct support staff to implement functional communication training correctly and its effects consumer mands and challenging behavior. The final paper, by Davis et al., reports a component analysis of behavioral skills training to teach volunteers in a university-based physical education program to teach motor skills to individuals with developmental disabilities. These empirical studies contribute to the growing literature on the effectiveness of behavioral skills to teach ta variety of skills in diverse contexts with individuals with autism and / or intellectual disabilities.

Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): Communication Training, Motor Skills, Staff Training, Systematic Review
Target Audience:

BCBAs in training; BCBAs requiring continuing education; applied researchers

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) Describe evidence-based practices that they should train caregiver to implement; (2) Describe how to train staff to conduct functional communication and measure its effects on client mands; and (3) describe the effective components of behavioral skills training and the implications for training caregivers.
 

Synthesizing Research on Staff Training in Intellectual and Developmental Disability Settings

(Applied Research)
Laura Gormley (Trinity College Dublin), Olive Healy (National University of Ireland, Galway), Amanda Doherty (Trinity College Dublin), Darragh O'Regan (RehabCare), MAEVE BRACKEN (Trinity College Dublin)
Abstract:

Front line staff are a valuable asset within an intellectual disability service. Their work dictates the overall standard of care delivered by the organization. This research synthesis examines staff training in practices to support people with intellectual and developmental disabilities. Systematic searches of relevant databases identified 156 papers for inclusion in the review. Practices in which staff were trained were categorized as: a) Positive Behavior Support (PBS) interventions; b) Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) interventions, or c) other interventions. The ABA category was sub-divided into: a) assessment-based; b) antecedent-based; c) consequence-based and, d) “mixed” practices. Results showed that although staff were trained in a range of evidence-based practices, many empirically supported interventions were not utilized (e.g., functional communication training and non-contingent reinforcement). Importantly, this research synthesis also highlighted a continued reliance on individualized training packages, rather than the implementation of empirically supported training models. Finally, future research should prioritize training protocols for front line staff supporting adults with intellectual and developmental disabilities, as well as assessing the impact of staff training on service user outcomes. Findings from the current review provide a potential explanation for the apparent disconnect between theoretical advancements and practice in the applied setting.

 

Training Direct Care Staff to Implement Functional Communication Training Using Behavioral Skills Training

(Applied Research)
EMILY GREGORI (Educational Studies, Purdue University), Mandy J. Rispoli (Purdue University)
Abstract:

Direct service providers (DSPs) are staff who support individuals with developmental disabilities (i.e., consumers) in residential, community, and employment settings. DSPs are responsible for providing a number of services including managing challenging behavior. However, DSPs often lack training in effective behavior management procedures. Behavioral skills training (BST) is an empirically supported method of staff training and has been used to teach DSPs a number of skills. However, to date, no studies have evaluated the efficacy of BST on staff implementation of complex behavioral interventions. Therefore, the purpose of the current study was to examine the effects of BST on staff implementation of functional communication training (FCT). Three DPSs and consumers participated in the current study. The effects of BST on DSP and consumer behavior were evaluated using a nonconcurrent multiple baseline design. Results indicated that BST was effective in increasing DSP fidelity of FCT. However, an additional coaching phase was necessary for some DSPs to reach mastery criteria. Improvements in DSP fidelity corresponded with decreases in consumer challenging behavior and increases in appropriate communication. Findings suggest that BST is an efficient, effective, and socially valid method to train DSPs to implement FCT.

 

A Component Analysis of Behavioural Skills Training With Volunteers Teaching Motor Skills

(Applied Research)
SARAH DAVIS (Brock University), Kendra Thomson (Brock University), Maureen Connolly (Brock University), Leslie Neely (The University of Texas at San Antonio), Catharine Lory (Perdue University), So Yeon Kim (Perdue University), Marie David (Purdue University)
Abstract:

Few physical education programs address motor development challenges for individuals with developmental disabilities (DD). The Special Needs Activity Program is one exception that capitalizes on university student volunteers to assist individuals with DD in developing motor skills. Evaluating efficient and effective ways of training these volunteers may positively impact outcomes and save valuable time and resources. We conducted a component analysis of behavioural skills training for teaching volunteers how to also use the BST framework to support individuals with DD. In an alternating treatment design embedded within a multiple baseline design across five volunteers, we measured the number of BST steps that volunteers completed correctly while teaching four motor skills from the SNAP curriculum. In the initial training phase, each motor skill received a different mode of training (i.e., instructions, modeling, rehearsal, or feedback). In subsequent training phases, modes of training were combined for skills that did not reach mastery criterion. Maintenance was also assessed at a 2-week and 1-month follow-up. Results indicated that instructions, modeling, rehearsal, and feedback alone were sufficient for volunteers to meet a predetermined performance criterion; however, the full BST framework was necessary for skill maintenance. Strengths, limitations, and recommendations for future research will be discussed.

 
 
Symposium #476
CE Offered: BACB
Marijuana and Other Medication Use With Individuals With Autism: Review of Data and Protocols for Successful Consultation With Medical Professionals
Monday, May 27, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom C
Area: AUT/CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Gloria Satriale (Preparing Adolescents and Adults for Life (PAAL))
Discussant: Robert LaRue (Rutgers University)
CE Instructor: Jessica Zawacki, M.A.
Abstract:

Behavior analysis has been shown to be effective in dealing with a wide range of issues related to the support of individuals with autism. For example, behavior analytic principles have been used to improve skill acquisition and decrease behaviors that interfere with learning and independence. However, professionals from other disciplines also provide treatment from their respective worldview orientations. Specifically, medical professions are widely used in the treatment of individuals with autism by prescribing medications that are used for both physical and behavioral issues. The intersection of behavior analysis with medicine is frought with potential problems. Behavior analytic solutions to, for example, behavior problems is often in conflict with a medical solution (i.e, reinforcement plans versus medication). Since both approaches are often used in clinical situations, it is important for behavior analysts to learn how to work most effectively with other disciplines while, at the same time, upholding our ethical code of conduct (by behaving within our conceptual framework). This symposium will discuss two different situations in which behavior analysts collaborate with physicians to plan for, and assess the outcome of, various medications being used with adolescents and adults with autism.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): autism, collaboration, marijuana, medications
Target Audience:

front-line staff and other professionals interested in working in the medication area with their clientel

Learning Objectives: After these presentations, audience members will be able to: 1. orally review the literature on the effectiveness of marijuana products on autism symtomology; 2. orally explain the impact of preferred and nonpreferred staff on behavioral and skill development; 3. conduct preference assessments across staff;
 

A Preliminary Examination of the Influence of Medical Marijuana Products on Aberrant Behavior of Adolescents With Autism Spectrum Disorder

KAITLIN ROSS (PAAL), Gloria Satriale (PAAL), Thomas L. Zane (University of Kansas)
Abstract:

Recently, there has been increasing use of medical marijuana. Coinciding with this trend is the belief that marijuana products can be used to treat symptoms of autism. There are no controlled studies evaluating the effects of marijuana on autism. Advocacy groups have formed to promote use of marijuana to reduce behavioral episodes and increase social behaviors. No scientific evidence exists that this drug is causally related to any improvements in developmental, behavioral or social areas. In contrast, most national organizations related to substance abuse strongly argue that marijuana is potentially dangerous.The purpose of this investigation was to examine the relationship between changes in problem behaviors and the use of the marijuana products. Participants included adolescents diagnosed with autism. Target behaviors for which a marijuana product was prescribed were operationally defined. Staff gathered daily data on the occurrence of these targeted behaviors, and the dates of administration of the marijuana products. Results showed no direct correlation between the use of the marijuana product and positive changes in problem behavior, casting doubt on the efficacy of this intervention. This suggests the need for the involvement of behavior analysis when manipulating medication in order to empirically evaluate the impact of such interventions.

 

Successful Collaboration With Medical Professionals: How to Integrate Medicine and Behavior Analysis

Jessica Zawacki (PAAL PARTNERS), Gloria Satriale (PAAL), DANIEL ALBRAND (The PAAL Program)
Abstract:

The prescription of psychotropic medications is increasingly common as an alternative for supplement to behavior therapy for managing ASD-associated aberrant behaviors In an ideal setting, medication used to decrease challenging behaviors, such as aggression or self-injury, should be considered only after medical diagnoses and comorbid psychiatric disorders have been addressed and behavioral interventions have been tried and, based on data analysis, deemed unsuccessful. It is the clinical responsibility to develop effective interventions using behavior analytic processes, conceptually consistent with behavior analytic theory. The ethical code also requires behavior analysts to evaluate concurrent treatments that individuals may be receiving and their overall impact on the target behavior. However, this is challenging for the behavior analyst working with individuals with more profound disabilities, specifically deficits in communication, as psychiatric disorders are typically measured via self-report. Case studies will be presented demonstrating formal protocols used to operationally define, measure, and track symptoms, diagnoses, and medication changes that are typically measured haphazardly or through self-report, such as anxiety and obsessive compulsive.

 
 
Symposium #478
CE Offered: BACB
Conceptualizing, Developing, and Using Treatments to Prevent and Address Trauma in Veteran and Related Populations
Monday, May 27, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 1/2
Area: CBM; Domain: Translational
Chair: Nicole C Groskreutz (PEAK Behavioral Services, LLC)
CE Instructor: Mark P. Groskreutz, Ph.D.
Abstract: The effects of extreme stressors (e.g., combat-related) and trauma can be severe and persistent in active duty military personnel, veteran, and other populations: the trauma can lead to post traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) and effects can include relationship difficulties, substance abuse, increased rates of suicide, among others (see Cornum, Matthews, & Seligman, 2011). Researchers and practitioners have been challenged to identify consistently effective antecedent and consequence interventions to address these concerns. Using a behavior analytic approach to resilience and treatment may help prevent the effects of and reduce the impacts from trauma. These talks will explore how behavior analysis can support effective treatment for trauma, training of professionals delivering treatment, and prevention of trauma. Because much of the previous work on resilience and trauma treatment has come from non-behavior analytic sources, these talks will also address links between behavioral analyses and other areas of psychology. Discussions will focus on how a behavior analytic approach to resilience and treatment for trauma may enhance research and practice.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): PTSD, Resilience, Trauma, Veterans
Target Audience: Professional behavior analysts
 

Prolonged Imaginal Exposure in Behavior Analytic Terms

(Theory)
KOMLANTSE GOSSOU (Université de Montréal)
Abstract:

Prolonged Imaginal Exposure (PE) is one of the few efficacious treatments for treating combat-related Post Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD; Foa, Hembree, & Rothbaum, 2007; Gros, Tuerk, Yoder, & Acierno, 2011; Resick, Monson, & Gutner, 2007; US Veteran Affair / Department of Defense, 2017). PE has been shown to be an effective manualized treatment in both the civilian and the military populations, and it has been endorsed as a best practice for the treatment of PTSD by the United States Departments of Veterans Affairs and Defense (VA/DoD, 2017), the Institute of Medicine (IOM, 2007), and the International Society of Traumatic Stress Studies (Boa, Keene, Friedman, and Cohen, 2010). Since it works, it must somehow operate via behavioral principles. However, our review of the literature indicates that it is difficult to find a behavior analytic conceptualization of PE, or a behavior analytic explanation of its effectiveness. This paper offers a behavior analytic explanation of why PE is effective and makes recommendations for improving this treatment using ABA strategies.

 

Training a Student to Conduct Acceptance and Commitment Therapy With Active Duty Military and Veterans Using Behavior Skills Training

(Applied Research)
JOHN BORGEN (Oregon Institute of Technology)
Abstract:

Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) is being utilized by Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBAs) to increase the effectiveness of caregiver training, decrease behaviors associated with diagnosed psychological disorders, and augment graduate programs and other organizations. Increasingly, more attention is being given to BCBAs implementing ACT to work with adults, targeting behavioral excesses or deficits associated with mood disorders, anxiety disorders, and chronic pain (American Psychological Association, 2018). This talk will focus on the use of behavioral skills training (BST) to assist a student in gradually increasing proficiency with ACT and in a talk-based therapeutic context in general. We present an evaluation of BST to teach the student to participation and utilization of ACT behaviors by the student in ACT sessions. Specifically, we evaluated client verbal behavior relevant to the six core processes of ACT (e.g., cognitive fusion, experiential avoidance, etc.). We will also discuss the logistics of starting a pro bono practice.

 
Behavioral Resilience in Military Personnel: Implications for Assessment and Intervention
(Theory)
NICOLE C GROSKREUTZ (PEAK Behavioral Services, LLC), Mark P. Groskreutz (Southern Connecticut State University)
Abstract: There is an extensive, multi-disciplinary body of literature exploring resilience within varied populations and across contexts. Yet there is no consensus amongst researchers on how resilience should be operationalized. The American Psychological Association (2018) defines resilience as “the process of adapting well” when faced with “adversity, trauma, tragedy, threats, or significant sources of stress” (para. 4). Defining resilience behaviorally, we might replace ‘adapting well’ with ‘particular patterns of positive behaviors that will persist’ in the presence of behavioral disruptors. Within the context of combat-related trauma, researchers and clinicians have looked to promote resilience as a means of decreasing the risk of soldiers developing post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD). We may be able to enhance these efforts by applying a behavior analytic conceptualization of resilience, as it could result in identification of the particular adaptive behaviors (both overt and covert) that must persist in the face of various behavioral disruptors. Presumably, soldiers could then be trained, targeting increases in behavioral resilience through the application of behavior analytic interventions similar to those used to address other behaviors. We will review research targeting increasing resilience, and discuss the potential benefits of a behavior analytic interpretation of resilience within a military context.
 
 
Symposium #479
CE Offered: BACB
Impacting Others and the Home We Share: Psychological Flexibility, Prosocial Behavior, and Ecological Behavior
Monday, May 27, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Fairmont, B2, Imperial Ballroom
Area: CSS/CBM; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Rebecca Copell (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Discussant: Karen Kate Kellum (University of Mississippi)
CE Instructor: Karen Kate Kellum, Ph.D.
Abstract: Behaving in ways that impact our relationships and physical environment positively is subject to many challenges. Amongst them is one’s willingness to experience the discomfort associated with our impact on each other and our planet such that effective behavior can be shaped. Psychological flexibility involves engagement in personally meaningful behavior, even when doing so increases discomfort. This symposium includes analyses of socially meaningful behavior through the perspective of the psychological flexibility model. Each presentation examines how psychological flexibility and associated repertoires might moderate the impacts of contextual manipulations on socially meaningful behavior. The first presentation will examine how an educational video on climate change might impact ecological behavior differently, depending on participants’ psychological flexibility. The second presentation considers the role of flexible connectedness in explaining relations between parenting and altruistic behavior. Finally, patterns between findings, lessons for future research, and implications for broad scale intervention to improve socially meaningful behavior will be discussed.
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): Altruism, Prosocial Behavior, Psychological Flexibility
Target Audience: Behavior Analysts interested in social issues
Learning Objectives: (1) describe how psychological flexibility and related factors converge with the parenting context to influence altruistic behavior (2) describe how psycholoigcal flexbility influences responsiveness to climate change education in terms of behavior change and behavior change intentions
 
Parenting Prosocial Prodigies: What Matters Most?
CALEB FOGLE (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Abstract: The effects of parenting practices have been of consistent interest to the general public, as current parents and parents-to-be ask researchers and practitioners; “what matters most?” In order to explore the importance of parenting practices, they can be conceptualized either categorically in terms of parenting style, or continuously in terms of the degree care and overprotection they exhibit. The current study focuses on parenting practices effects on altruism and other prosocial behaviors. Altruistic behaviors can be defined in this case as a behavior in which some sort of expended effort or physical cost outweighs any sort of promised or potential reward. The current study investigated if perceived parenting predicted altruistic behavior in a decision making task. Next, components of flexible connectedness (empathic concern, perspective taking, and psychological flexibility) were explored as moderating and mediating factors in the relationship between parenting and altruism. Surprisingly, inflexible parenting styles tended to predict altruistic behavior, and none of the flexible connected factors explained this relationship. Implications for parent training and further research will be discussed.
 
Psychological Flexibility as a Predictor of Ecological Behavior Change After Informational Intervention
JESSICA CRIDDLE (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Meagan Perkins (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Abstract: Climate change is a well-documented phenomenon affecting humankind as a whole, yet a large portion of individuals who understand this fact do not engage in behavior to address it. Avoidance of climate change and the prosocial behaviors needed to halt this condition may be related to psychological inflexibility, defined in the therapeutic approach of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy as dominance of aversive control. Psychological flexibility entails the ability to change behavior to match values even as it increases aversive stimulation. To examine this relationship, over 200 college students completed self-report questionnaires to assess psychological flexibility and attitudes toward humankind's relationship with the environment. Participants were then exposed to three educational videos on climate change and selected a list of behaviors they would be willing to adopt. Finally a subset of participants chose to receive seven daily surveys to assess progress in achieving these behavior changes. Both behavioral intentions and self-reported behavior were predicted from psychological flexibility. Convergence and divergence of these effects will be discussed along with implications for intervention.
 
 
Symposium #481
CE Offered: BACB
Innovations in the Assessment of Challenging Behavior for Individuals With Developmental Disabilities
Monday, May 27, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jessica Akers (Baylor University)
CE Instructor: Jessica Akers, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Assessment is integral to developing effective challenging behavior interventions. This symposium will include three studies related to innovations in the assessment of challenging behavior for children with developmental disabilities. The first study consisted of a systematic literature review of the previous research on the treatment of severe challenging behavior for adolescents with intellectual and developmental disabilities. The second study included an evaluation of the use of demand assessments to individualize functional analysis and treatment of escape-maintained challenging behavior. The third study included the use of a competing items analysis to individualize the intervention to reduce automatically maintained stereotypy. Overall, the symposium will involve a detailed discussion of methods to improve the efficacy of the intervention through the assessment of challenging behavior. Implications for the assessment and treatment of challenging behavior for practitioners who work with individuals with developmental disabilities will be discussed. In addition, the symposium will include specific directions for future research.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): assessment, challenging behavior, developmental disabilities
Target Audience:

Board Certified Behavior Analysts

Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will be able to describe the procedures of a demand assessment 2. Attendees will be able to describe the procedures of a competing stimulus assessment 3. Attendees will be able to match challenging behavior intervention procedures to the results of relevant assessments
 

Systematic Review of Behavioral Interventions for Adolescents With Developmental Disabilities and Severe Challenging Behavior (2001–2016)

CHRISTINE DREW (University of Oregon), Wendy A. Machalicek (University of Oregon), Buket Erturk (University of Oregon)
Abstract:

Individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities (IDD) are more likely to engage in severe challenging behavior which include behaviors that are dangerous to the individual and others. These behaviors are often targeted for intervention because of their impact on educational, social, and health outcomes. However, research on assessment and intervention for adolescents with severe challenging behavior has not been systematically reviewed. Systematic searches of three online databases and ancestral searches of the resulting manuscripts were conducted, and 78 studies met inclusion criteria. The studies where then evaluated for: (a) participant demographic information; (b) behavioral intervention; (c) challenging behavior topography; (d) behavior assessment; (e) experimental standards ratings; and (f) percentage of zero data (PZD) for the final phase of the intervention. Participants were likely to have either an autism spectrum disorder (ASD) or intellectual disability. The vast majority of studies included some form of functional assessment and most included packaged interventions. The most common functions of challenging behavior were escape and automatic. Common combinations of interventions were compiled. Future research recommendations including using other measures such as amount of medications and time spent in less restrictive settings and addressing puberty and hormonal motivating operations in this population.

 
The Use of Demand Assessments in the Assessment and Treatment of Challenging Behavior
SUZANNAH AVERY (Baylor University), Stephanie Gerow (Baylor University), Kristen Williams (Baylor University)
Abstract: Selection of demands without a demand assessment could result in a failure to identify an escape function for escape-maintained challenging behavior. The purpose of this study was to (a) evaluate the effect of immediate help on the rate of challenging behavior during high-aversive, low-accuracy demands and (b) to evaluate the efficacy of an intervention based on the assessment results in reducing challenging behavior. One 3-year-old with autism spectrum disorder participated in this study. A demand assessment was used to identify high-aversive, low-accuracy demands. In a second assessment, high-aversive, low-accuracy demands with immediate help resulted in lower rates of challenging behavior as compared to high-aversive, low accuracy demands without immediate help. We evaluated the efficacy of the subsequent intervention using a reversal design. The results indicated that requesting help with differential reinforcement resulted in a reduction in challenging behavior. Data collection with a second participant is ongoing. Implications for practice and directions for future research will be discussed.
 
Evaluating the Effect of Competing Stimuli on Automatically Maintained Motor Stereotypy
GABRIELA JUANITA RIVERA (Baylor University), Stephanie Gerow (Baylor University), Jessica Akers (Baylor University), Marie Kirkpatrick (Baylor University)
Abstract: Automatically maintained stereotypy, or repetitive behavior, is common among children with autism spectrum disorder. This study described the treatment of automatically maintained stereotypy for a 2-year-old girl with autism. The child’s father implemented all intervention sessions. The initial intervention consisted of prompting for appropriate engagement, differential reinforcement for appropriate engagement, and extinction. The efficacy of the intervention was evaluated using an alternating treatment design. The treatment evaluation indicated the initial intervention was not effective in reducing automatically maintained motor stereotypy. The researchers then conducted a competing stimulus assessment. The initial intervention with a competing stimulus was effective in reducing motor stereotypy. Intervention effects persisted following the removal of the differential reinforcement and extinction components. The results indicated that the use of a competing stimulus with the initial intervention was effective in reducing automatically maintained stereotypy. The findings suggest the importance of identifying items that compete with automatically maintained stereotypy, to the extent possible, in order to effectively reduce stereotypy. Implications for practice and directions for future research will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #482
CE Offered: BACB
Basic and Applied Evaluations in Behavioral Gerontology With Older Adults With Neurocognitive Disorder
Monday, May 27, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 1-3
Area: DEV/EAB; Domain: Translational
Chair: Haley Ciara Hughes (Western Michigan University)
CE Instructor: Andrea Perez, M.A.
Abstract:

As the aging population continues to grow and the prevalence of neurocognitive disorder increases, there is an increased need for behavioral gerontology and opportunities for research with a wide range of empirical questions needing to be answered. This will ultimately inform behavior analytic treatments available and increase the quality of life of older adults diagnosed with neurocognitive disorder (NCD). This symposium includes three talks that will cover wide applications of behavioral gerontology from basic preparations: (a) Stimulus control and Extinction with Older Adults with Neurocognitive Disorder: A Basic Research Study, in which researchers will present data from an ongoing evaluation on reinforcement, extinction and stimulus control; (b) Reinforcer Identification Form- a Tool to Identify Preferred Stimuli for Older Adults with Neurocognitive Disorder. Researchers will present on the development and use of a tool to assist in the identification of preferred stimuli; and (c) Lounge Layout to Facilitate Communication and Engage People with Dementia, which will expand upon previous literature by demonstrating the importance of living arrangement design and the impact of modifications of those arrangements on older adults’ communication and engagement levels.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

graduate students in behavior analysis, board certified behavior analysts, behavioral gerontology practitioners, behavioral gerontology researchers.

Learning Objectives: 1. Determine the impacts of environmental arrangement on communication and engagement levels with older adults with NCD 2. Identify considerations for stimuli selection to inform treatment for engagement with older adults with NCD 3. Identify how stimulus control and extinction may impact responding for older adults with NCD
 

Stimulus Control and Extinction With Older Adults With Neurocognitive Disorder: A Basic Research Study

(Basic Research)
JORDAN BAILEY (Western Michigan University), Sandra Garcia (Western Michigan University), Jonathan C. Baker (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

The effects of extinction have been demonstrated in community dwelling older adults (Plaud, Plaud, & Duvillard, 1999), but to date, there have been limited empirical demonstrations of the the effects of extinction for older adults with neurocognitive disorder. Therefore, the purpose of the study was to examine whether withdrawal of a reinforcer from a previously reinforced behavior would result in behavior change for this population. This study extends a study presented last year with the use of a multielement design rather than a reversal. Preferred stimuli (pictures) were identified prior to implementation through use of a preference assessment followed by reinforcer assessment. The effects of the schedules were assessed with a computer program on a tablet PC. Conditions were signaled by the presentation of various shapes along with the buttons. The effects of reinforcement were compared with extinction and/or non-contingent reinforcement schedules. The experimental arrangement consisted of a presentation of two buttons that (a) would activate a preferred picture; (b) produce nothing (in the extinction condition); or (c) produced nothing (but pictures were available on a time-based schedule). These data will be discussed with respect to the implications for both basic and applied research.

 

Reinforcer Identification Form: A Tool to Identify Preferred Stimuli for Older Adults With Neurocognitive Disorder

(Applied Research)
ANDREA PEREZ (Western Michigan University), Jonathan C. Baker (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

An important line of research within behavioral gerontology has been skill acquisition and activity engagement procedures with older adults with neurocognitive disorder. A critical underlying aspect of such work is to ensure that the stimuli that are being used in these procedures are functioning as reinforcers. Currently, research on preference assessments with older adults appears to involve the arbitrary selection of items informed by existing structured, close-ended and non-individualized tools. This approach is problematic because it may lead to the identification and selection of items that may not be preferred by an individual, and can lead to poor programming. Therefore, the purpose of this study is to evaluate the utility of a new tool, The Reinforcer Identification Form, and to validate the items identified by implementing a stimulus preference assessment and a modified engagement assessment.

 

Lounge Layout to Facilitate Communication and Engagement in People With Dementia

(Applied Research)
REBECCA A SHARP (Bangor University), Emma Williams (Bangor University), Rebecka Rornes (Bangor University), Choo Ying Lau (Bangor University), Carolien Lamers (Bangor University)
Abstract:

Direct measures of indices of happiness, engagement, and communication can serve as proxies for measures of quality of life in people with dementia. The design of care settings for people with dementia is often guided by expert opinion rather than empirical data. We evaluated the effect of arranging lounge furniture in different configurations on communication, engagement with activities, and indices of happiness in people with dementia living on a specialized dementia ward. We found that the common configuration of chairs placed around the outside of the room resulted in the least communication, engagement, and indices of happiness. Communication occurred most when the furniture was arranged in small groups, and engagement occurred most when the furniture was arranged to maximize the salience of the available activities. Our data show that simple antecedent manipulations that do not require extensive staff training or involvement can improve the quality of life of people with dementia in care settings.

 
 
Symposium #483
CE Offered: BACB
Efficient and Resource-Saving Interventions in Middle Schools: Two Empirical Examples
Monday, May 27, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Sarah E. Pinkelman (Utah State University)
Discussant: M. Kathleen Kathleen Strickland-Cohen (Texas Christian University )
CE Instructor: Sarah E. Pinkelman, Ph.D.
Abstract: Middle school teachers struggle to effectively address the behavioral and academic needs of students with disabilities in their classrooms. Research in the fields of behavior analysis and special education provide a wealth of strategies that are likely to be effective with middle school students, however these strategies are often not feasible for teachers to implement in their classrooms. Teachers have limited resources (e.g., time, funding), and do not receive adequate training, coaching, and ongoing support to implement many of the interventions that have been documented as effective in the literature. As such, it is important that researchers identify efficient interventions that are reasonable for implementation in schools. This symposium will include two studies that examine the effects of contextually appropriate interventions, specifically activity schedules and interdependent group contingencies, in improving the behavior of middle school students with disabilities. Both studies used single subject research designs (multiple baseline across students with an embedded reversal and an ABAB) and demonstrate a functional relation between the intervention and student behavior. These strong treatment effects contribute to literature, provide directions for further research, and have important applied implications.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): classroom, middle school, problem behavior, special education
Target Audience: BCBAs working in schools. Faculty doing school-based research
 

Improving On-Task Behavior in Middle School Students With Disabilities: Modified Activity Schedules

STEPHANIE MATTSON (Utah State University), Sarah E. Pinkelman (Utah State University)
Abstract:

Middle school students receiving special education services under specific learning disability and other health impairment often struggle to remain on-task and meet independent work demands. Although a variety of strategies have been documented as effective in improving on-task behavior in students with disabilities, most are not contextually appropriate for public schools. Activity schedules may provide an efficient, minimally intrusive, and low-effort intervention for middle school classrooms. In this study, a concurrent multiple baseline design across participants with an embedded reversal was used to examine the effects of activity schedules on on-task and on-schedule behavior of four middle school students with disabilities in a resource classroom. Results demonstrate increased on-task and on-schedule behavior for all participants in math and language arts settings, and students and teachers both indicated that they enjoyed the activity schedule and that it improved on-task behavior and work completion. Implications for practice and future research are discussed.

 
Effects of an Interdependent Group Contingency and Randomized Reinforcers in a Middle School Classroom
KRISTY PARK (George Mason University), Robert Olberding (Virginia Beach City Public Schools)
Abstract: Middle school students receiving special education services under specific learning disability and other health impairment often struggle to remain on-task and meet independent work demands. Although a variety of strategies have been documented as effective in improving on-task behavior in students with disabilities, most are not contextually appropriate for public schools. Activity schedules may provide an efficient, minimally intrusive, and low-effort intervention for middle school classrooms. In this study, a concurrent multiple baseline design across participants with an embedded reversal was used to examine the effects of activity schedules on on-task and on-schedule behavior of four middle school students with disabilities in a resource classroom. Results demonstrate increased on-task and on-schedule behavior for all participants in math and language arts settings, and students and teachers both indicated that they enjoyed the activity schedule and that it improved on-task behavior and work completion. Implications for practice and future research are discussed.
 
 
Invited Paper Session #484
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

Behavioral Economics of the Marketing Firm: Bilateral Contingency, Metacontingency, and Agency

Monday, May 27, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: OBM; Domain: Theory
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Gordon Foxall, Ph.D.
Chair: Byron J. Wine (The Faison Center)
GORDON FOXALL (Cardiff University; University of Reykjavik)
Gordon R. Foxall is Distinguished Research Professor at Cardiff Business School, Cardiff University (UK), and a Visiting Professor in economic psychology at the University of Reykjavik (Iceland). He holds a Ph.D. in industrial economics and business studies (University of Birmingham); a Ph.D. in psychology (University of Strathclyde); and a higher doctorate (DSocSc) also from the University of Birmingham. He is the author of some 300 refereed papers and chapters and over 30 books. He has held visiting appointments at the Universities of Michigan, Oxford, South Australia and Guelph, and is a Fellow of the Academy of Social Sciences (FAcSS); a Fellow of the British Psychological Society (FBPsS); and a Fellow of the British Academy of Management (FBAM). His principal research interests include consumer behavior analysis, the philosophical implications of the neurophilosophy of consumer choice, and the theory of the marketing firm.
Abstract:

The theme of this talk is the nature of the organizations that meet consumer demand, the susceptibility of their behavior to operant explanation, and the consequences of treating them as operant systems. All firms market. Marketing, moreover, provides the raison d’être of firms. Just as consumers can be shown to maximize the utilitarian and informational reinforcement they receive from commodities, so firms maximize similar sources of reward through the generation and implementation of marketing mixes that influence consumer choice. But over and above the operations involved in marketing functions, firms are compelled by the imperatives of modern economies to engage in customer-oriented management in order to compete within and between traditional industries for the dollars over which customers have discretion. This talk draws on ideas from microeconomics and marketing science, as well as behavior analysis, in a nontechnical exploration of the sensitivity of corporate activity to contingencies of reinforcement. I argue that the concept of metacontingency is central to understanding the behavior of organizations such as marketing firms and that the idea of bilateral contingency is central to understanding why they exist and what their function is.

Target Audience:

All those interested in the behavioral economics of organizations and their publics; organizational management; public policy with respect to business firms; the interaction of operant analysis and other disciplines and the implications of using economics to understand human behavior.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) discuss how organizations that meet consumer demand can be analyzed in operant terms; (2) discuss the economic and marketing imperatives that explain the existence of prevalence of these marketing firms; (3) discuss the concept of bilateral contingency and how the interrelationships of marketing firms and their customers can be analyzed as interlocking contingencies; (4) discuss marketing firms as metacontingencies and the implications of this for their acting as economic and social agents; (5) discuss the policy implications of marketing firms as they interact with different kinds of customer (e.g., other business organizations vs. aggregates of individual consumers.
 
 
Panel #486
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Diversity submission What’s Culture Got to Do With It?: Essentials of Supervision
Monday, May 27, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 1/2
Area: PCH; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Shane Spiker, M.S.
Chair: Shane Spiker (Positive Behavior Supports, Corp.)
JENNY PAGAN (BlueSprig Pediatrics)
SABRINA DE LA FE (Positive Behavior Supports Corporation)
ONAIDA SANCHEZ (Positive Behavior Supports Corporation)
Abstract:

As our field expands our analysts are exposed to various cultures, including work in international markets as well as diverse populations within our own communities. Because of the diversity of individuals we serve, there is a clear need to begin a discussion about the consideration of ethics when navigating the nuances between cultural norms. In addition, we may be missing the opportunity to support a large portion of the population due to our lack of cultural sensitivities. While this overarching discussion is broad and sometimes difficult to operationally define, there are areas of our practice that we can begin developing to create socially significant changes in the culture of our field. In this panel we would like to address how including multi-cultural competencies in our supervision process are crucial and can develop culturally sensitive practitioners. We would also like to address the ethical dilemmas we come across when working with differing cultures. As we are working in the homes of our clients for months sometimes years, and cultural sensitivity is imperative for programing, training of caregivers, and successfully achieving the client’s ultimate outcomes.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

This Panel is developed for current Board Certified Behavior Analysts, and Board Certified Assistant Behavior Analysts.

Learning Objectives: 1) Participants will identify multicultural competencies in behavior analytics. 2) Participants will learn how to navigate difficult cultural challenges in the supervisory role. 3) Participants will learn how to navigate ethics and respecting cultural systems. 4) Participants will learn how to effectively supervise and train their team on cultural competencies
Keyword(s): Culture, Ethics, Supervision, Training
 
 
Invited Panel #487
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP
Science Communication and Behavior Analysis: Correcting Missed Opportunities
Monday, May 27, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: SCI; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Jonathan W. Pinkston (Western New England University)
CE Instructor: Jonathan W. Pinkston, Ph.D.
Panelists: MATTHEW NORMAND (University of the Pacific), RYAN O'DONNELL (RYANO, LLC), MATTHEW CICORIA (Positive Behavioral Outcomes, LLC)
Abstract:

Behavior analysts have long lamented the relative ignorance from the general public regarding our science. While the field has made efforts to address our dissemination, many still believe we have much work to do. On the contrary, other disciplines within the social and behavioral sciences have captured public interest, leveraging social media to garner attention and disseminate to large audience. Many of these audiences include stakeholders and policymakers with the power and authority to bring scientific influences into the mainstream. Despite a relative dearth of behavior analysts on social media platforms, there is a small group of highly effective communicators that have tips and strategies to share. This panel includes three effective behavioral science communicators who will share their experiences and expertise in the hopes of promoting others to more effectively communicate their own work in behavior analysis.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe current limitations in behavior analyst’s science communication, (2) describe contemporary methods of engaging the public with science communication via social media, and (3) operationalize ways behavior analysts can change their dissemination tactics to better communicate science.
MATTHEW NORMAND (University of the Pacific)
Dr. Normand is a Professor of Psychology at the University of the Pacific and serves on the Board of Directors of the Society for the Experimental Analysis of Behavior. His primary scientific interests, broadly defined, are the application of basic behavioral principles to problems of social significance (including obesity and community health issues), verbal behavior, and the philosophy and methodology of science. He is the former editor of The Behavior Analyst, a former associate editor for the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, The Behavior Analyst, The Analysis of Verbal Behavior, and Behavior Analysis in Practice. Currently, he serves as an associate editor for the European Journal of Behavior Analysis and is on the editorial boards of Behavioral Interventions, The Analysis of Verbal Behavior, Behavior and Philosophy, and Behavior Analysis: Research and Practice. Dr. Normand was the 2011 recipient of the B. F. Skinner New Researcher Award from the American Psychological Association (Div. 25).
RYAN O'DONNELL (RYANO, LLC)
Hey, I'm Ryan. I usually go by Ryan O or RYANO. I hail from northern Nevada in the grungy, yet surprisingly classy, (and newly renovated) Reno, Nevada . I like my climate like I like my data: evolving, uncompromising, and progressive. I am a master of science; that is, I have an M.S. in Applied Behavior Analysis, however my interests have grown to include many other interests, including entrepreneurship and capturing perspectives and stories through various mediums. These interests and skills have allowed me to work with a lot of great people. I've started three businesses, started numerous active joint venture agreements, a behavioral think-tank, a podcast, a professional development movement, helped organizations that support people with Intellectual Disabilities, to list a few. Currently I am on a "gap year" creating content about behavior analysis as I ready for my next venture in 2019. I focus outside this role on building a community of thought leaders and doers to create content that increases the transparency of behavior analytic technologies with the hopes of creating a platform that truly saves the world. My interests are all over, from artificial intelligence and machine learning applications to the theory and philosophy behind Why We Do What We Do (wwdwwdpodcast.com). In my spare time you can find me consuming social media, prepping/climbing a giant mountain, or walking around with my camera in my hand (and, occasionally, all simultaneously). Connect with me personally on most all social platforms via @TheDailyBA and @TheRyanoDotCom and let me know what drives you to pursue the Behavior Analysis vision.
MATTHEW CICORIA (Positive Behavioral Outcomes, LLC)
Matt Cicoria is a behavioral and educational consultant in private practice, providing services to school and community settings in New Hampshire and Vermont. Matt earned his B.A. in Psychology at the University of New Hampshire, and then his M.S. in Psychology at Auburn University under the supervision of Dr. Jim Johnston. After graduate school, Matt went to work in the field of Developmental Disabilities, with tenures at large organizations such as AdvoServ and the Institute of Professional Practice. In 2002, Matt earned his BCBA certificate, and in 2007, he started his independent consulting practice, Positive Behavioral Outcomes, LLC. His clinical interests include the assessment and treatment of problem behaviors in public school settings, Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, and Precision Teaching. As a dissemination project, Matt created The Behavioral Observations Podcast, in February of 2016. The podcast publishes long-form interviews with leading behavior analysts, in which current topics in the field are discussed in a casual format. Since its inception, the show has been downloaded over three-quarters of a million times, and has reached audiences in over 100 countries. Matt, along with Dr. Lisa Britton, has co-authored the forthcoming book, Remote Fieldwork Supervision for BCBA© Trainees.
 
 
Symposium #488
CE Offered: BACB
Improving Public Speaking Skills via Expert Speaker Recommendations and Modified Habit Reversal Therapy
Monday, May 27, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, International Ballroom
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Danielle Geierman (California State University, Sacramento)
Discussant: Jonathan J. Tarbox (University of Southern California; FirstSteps for Kids)
CE Instructor: Megan R. Heinicke, Ph.D.
Abstract: Public speaking is paramount to an individual’s professional and career development. Proficient speaking is also an important skill for communicating powerful messages to professional audiences (Friman, 2014). For example, Friman urges behavior analysts to use “front of the room” opportunities to help achieve Skinner’s vision of disseminating our science to mainstream audiences. However, public speaking is one of the most commonly reported human fears; thus “front of the room” opportunities are often avoided. This symposium will focus on identifying barriers to fluent public speaking as well as providing recommendations and interventions to improve speaker credibility and effectiveness while speaking in front of an audience. In the first presentation, Dr. Megan Heinicke will present results from a survey of behavior analysts’ public speaking practices as well as public speaking recommendations pulled from interviewing expert public speakers in our field. In the second presentation, Danielle Geierman will present a series of evaluations of modified habit reversal to decrease speech disfluencies (or “filler words” such as “umm” and the inappropriate use of the word “like”). Dr. Jonathan Tarbox will conclude this symposium by providing his remarks on both presentations as well as the importance of disseminating our science via public speaking.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): expert recommendations, habit reversal, public speaking, speech disfluencies
Target Audience: Board Certified Behavior Analysts or students pursuing the BCBA credential
 
Survey and Interview of Board Certified Behavior Analysts' Public Speaking Practices
MEGAN R. HEINICKE (California State University, Sacramento), Amber Valentino (Trumpet Behavioral Health), Tyra Paige Sellers (Behavior Analyst Certification Board), Jessica Foster Juanico (Trumpet Behavioral Health)
Abstract: In his 2014 paper, Friman makes 15 recommendations for behavior analysts wishing to improve their public speaking skills and encourages the field of ABA to view public speaking as a mechanism through which we can more broadly disseminate our science. However, for more behavior analysts to engage in public speaking, they must overcome the obstacles and fear associated with the task. Although some behavior-analytic research exists in public speaking, this body of literature is small, and many empirical questions remain. Little is known about why behavior analysts fear public speaking, which skills need to be targeted to improve public speaking skills, and what successful public speakers in our field do to be considered effective and entertaining by audience members. In this study, we 1) surveyed behavior analysts to identify barriers and fears associated with public speaking, and 2) identified and interviewed the most frequently invited public speakers at major ABA conferences. Results from 867 respondents to the survey will be summarized according to themes. In addition, themes from the interviews with 10 frequently invited public speaker will be used to generate a list of recommendations that may be helpful to behavior analysts wishing to improve their public speaking skills.
 
Evaluating the Efficiency of Modified Habit Reversal for Reducing Speech Disfluencies
DANIELLE GEIERMAN (California State University, Sacramento), Christina Montes (California State University, Sacramento), Megan R. Heinicke (California State University, Sacramento)
Abstract: Recent literature supports using a multi-component awareness training procedure to decrease speech disfluencies for college students (Montes, Heinicke, & Geierman, in press; Spieler & Miltenberger, 2017). However, this procedure can be time-consuming and is likely not feasible in practical settings such as college classrooms or student support centers. The present study aimed to reduce the time commitment required to decrease speech disfluencies by extending previous research in a series of experiments. In Experiment 1, we conducted a component analysis of awareness training to determine if both components studied in previous investigations are necessary to produce meaningful outcomes. In Experiment 2, we evaluated the efficacy of a contingent vibrating pager to determine if an awareness enhancement device reduces training time. Finally, we evaluated the effects of the vibrating pager in conjunction with specific written feedback and graphic feedback on total training time in Experiment 3. Efficacy and efficiency of the interventions across experiments will be discussed along with preliminary recommendations.
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #489
CE Offered: BACB/NASP

A Public Health Approach to Early Learning

Monday, May 27, 2019
12:00 PM–12:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD South
Area: VBC; Domain: Service Delivery
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Einar T. Ingvarsson, Ph.D.
Chair: Einar T. Ingvarsson (Virginia Institute of Autism)
DANA SUSKIND (University of Chicago)
Dana Suskind, MD, is Co-Director of the TMW Center for Early Learning + Public Health at the University of Chicago. A Professor of Surgery, she is Founder and Director of the Pediatric Cochlear Implant Program, and Founder and Director of Thirty Million Words. She received her MD at the University of Missouri-Kansas City School of Medicine. At the TMW Center, she is working on advancing a novel public health approach to early learning which places parents at the center of their children’s language and cognitive development. Her research focuses on foundational brain development, with an overarching aim to affect a population-shift in the knowledge and the behavior of parents and caregivers in order to reduce the achievement gap and prevent early cognitive disparities at onset. Given the absence of any such tools in the field, she and her team developed a knowledge assessment tool, the Survey of Parent/Providers’ Expectations and Knowledge (SPEAK), which influences all three areas of her research: behavior change interventions, efficacy testing, and implementation scaling. Her research includes numerous peer-reviewed publications, and national and international speaking engagements. Author of the book, Thirty Million Words: Building a Child’s Brain, she has been featured in The New York Times, The Washington Post, Crain’s Chicago Business, National Public Radio, and other national media outlets.
Abstract:

Dr. Dana Suskind is Co-Director of TMW Center for Early Learning + Public Health, Professor of Surgery and Pediatrics, and the Director of the Pediatric Cochlear Implant Program at the University of Chicago. Her research focuses on the role of parents and caregivers in foundational brain development, with an overarching aim to narrow the achievement gap and prevent early cognitive disparities at a population level. Dr. Suskind will share the observations that led her to create the TMW Center for Early Learning + Public Health. The Center develops evidence-based interventions that enable parents, caregivers, practitioners, and researchers to harness the power of language to impact early cognitive disparities particularly among children born into poverty. Dr. Suskind will discuss the science that drives her research and share excerpts of TMW curricula and study results. Additionally, she will highlight the need for a public health approach to early learning as well as the TMW Center’s upcoming community-wide rollout that will utilize existing social and health infrastructures to disseminate our suite of interventions and critical public health information within a single US city.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) discuss the importance of early language exposure for foundational brain development; (2) define the 3 “Ts”: Tune in, Talk More, Take Turns; (3) discuss the importance of parent and caregiver engagement for children’s cognitive and language development.
 
 
Symposium #506
CE Offered: BACB
Playing and Pretending: A Behavioral Approach to Teaching Pretend Play
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Lobby Level, Plaza Ballroom AB
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Nancy J. Champlin (ACI Learning Centers)
CE Instructor: Nancy J. Champlin, M.S.
Abstract:

Play is an integral part of typical development and should be an emphasis in early intervention for children with autism (Lifter & Bloom, 1989). Utilizing behavioral intervention leads to significant increases in play skills (Stahmer, 1995) and decreases inappropriate behaviors including self-stimulatory behaviors (Sani-Bozkurt & Ozen, 2015). The Pretend Play and Language Assessment and Curriculum (PPLAC) is a developmentally-sequenced, behaviorally- based tool designed to establish and expand pretend play in children, ages 2-7. The 5 elements of pretend play, category, agent, object, advanced, and the essential skills to sociodramatic play, are targeted systematically to teach independent and sociodramatic pretend play to children with autism. The studies in this symposium evaluate the effectiveness of the PPLAC when teaching various stages of pretend play. Familiar play actions and corresponding vocalizations from Stage 1: Single Agent were taught across three communication modalities to further assess the correlation between play and language. Object of play, specifically symbolic play, was evaluated to identify preferences in object substitution items. Additionally, the effectiveness of two behavioral interventions, script fading and video modeling, was evaluated when targeting a sequence of play in Stage 3: Play Schemes.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): Pretend Play, Script fading, Symbolic play, Video modeling
Target Audience:

BCBA, BCaBA

Learning Objectives: 1) Participants will identify five elements of pretend play including category, agent, object, advanced play, and the essential skills to sociodramatic play 2) Participants will identify attributes of object substitution items including size, shape, and color to utilize when teaching pretend play 3) Participants will identify how to use a speech generating device when teaching pretend play 4) Participants will identify the systematic approach to introducing and chaining targets in Stage 1 5) Participants will label the social expectations for targets in Stage 1: Single Agent from the Pretend Play and Language Assessment and Curriculum 6) Participants will identify effective interventions to teach a sequence of pretend play actions and corresponding vocalizations 7) Participants will compare rates of acquisition, maintenance, and generalization for two behavioral interventions, script fading and video modeling
 

An Evaluation of Object Substitution Items in the Symbolic Play of Children With Autism

NANCY J. CHAMPLIN (ACI Learning Centers)
Abstract:

Development of symbolic play is indicative of a child's cognitive development (Casby, 2003). Object substitution is the form of symbolic play that has been most systematically related to future language development (Smith & Jones, 2011). Substituted objects initially tend to be ambiguous, simple in shape, have minimal surface details, and are geometrically similar in shape (Smith & Jones, 2011; Ungerer Zelazo, Kearsley, & O’Leary, 1981). When utilizing behavioral interventions children with autism are capable of the same level of symbolic play as typically developing children (Charman & Baron-Cohen, 1997). The purpose of this study was to assess object substitution preferences between household items and alternative toy items for three boys with autism, ages 2-5, across three different play targets. Object substitution items were analyzed for similar size, shape, color, and function. Following acquisition of the play target with the actual item, the adult modeled the play action and corresponding vocalization with the item (e.g., hot dog) immediately prior to presenting the child with two object substitution options to complete the play action. The results comparing the selections were evaluated. The outcome of this study demonstrated that household items were more frequently selected when compared to alternative toy items.

 
Teaching Pretend Play Actions Across Three Communication Modalities
MELISSA SCHISSLER (ACI Learning Centers)
Abstract: Pretend play provides critical learning opportunities for all children in their everyday lives (Ozen, Batu, & Birkan, 2012), and is the primary context to establish and expand social communicative skills (Mathieson & Banerjee, 2010). Sigman and Ruskin (1999) identified a correlation between play and language development. Deficits in functional speech lead to barriers in participation and inclusion during play (Boesch, Wendt, Subramanian, & Hsu, 2013). Utilizing augmentative and alternative communication can address these barriers. The purpose of this study was to teach three children diagnosed with autism, ages 2-5, play actions and vocalizations across 20 targets in Stage 1: Single Agent from the Pretend Play and Language Assessment and Curriculum. Familiar actions and vocalizations were taught across three additional elements of pretend play: agent, object, and essential skills to sociodramatic play. Three communication modalities were utilized in the study including vocalizations, PECS, and a speech generating device. A concurrent multiple baseline across participants was conducted across three actions and vocalizations. The outcome of the study demonstrated the efficacy of the steps identified in Stage 1: Single Agent, to teach all 3 children, across communication modalities, single play actions with corresponding vocalizations incorporating four of the five elements of pretend play.
 
Script Fading or Video Modeling to Teach One Character Role in a Sequence of Play
MOLLIE ANN RICHERT (ACI Learning Centers), Nancy J. Champlin (ACI Learning Centers), Melissa Schissler (ACI Learning Centers)
Abstract: Character roles are an important aspect of pretend play that lead to more successful social play opportunities in the future (Ozen, Batu, & Birkan, 2012). Behaviorally-based interventions have been effective in teaching children with autism appropriate play skills (Palechka & MacDonald, 2010). The purpose of this study was to compare script fading with video modeling when teaching a sequence of independent pretend play actions and vocalizations for one character role to children with autism. Script fading and video modeling have been compared to other interventions in the research such as pivotal response training (Lydon, Healy, & Leader, 2011) and social stories (Dudleston, 2008). Results compiled from studies utilizing video modeling or scripts have been compared (Sng, Carter, & Stephenson, 2014), however, these interventions have not been directly compared in single-subject research. A multiple baseline across participants with an adapted alternating treatment design was implemented. One character role was taught for two play schemes, each consisting of seven scripted play actions and vocalizations. Script fading and video modeling were effective in teaching all 4 participants a sequence of play actions and vocalizations for one character role.
 
 
Symposium #507
CE Offered: BACB
The Use of Technology to Teach Skills to Individuals With Autism Spectrum Disorder
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom C
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Kian Assemi (Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD) )
CE Instructor: Kian Assemi, M.S.
Abstract:

Recent advancements in technology have increased the use of technology to assist and teach individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). Technology-based tools have been used in various capacities, including augmented and alternative communication (AAC), prompting tools, and video modeling. As technologies have become more affordable and accessible, researchers have investigated the efficacy of computer-based interventions (CBIs) and virtual reality (VR) tools to teach a wide range of skills, including academic, language, social, and adaptive skills, to individuals with ASD. VR technology has been of particular interest for teaching prosocial behaviors such as social and safety skills, such that VR allows individuals to actively participate in an immersive environment while simultaneously receiving immediate visual and auditory feedback. Additionally, VR simulations replicate naturalistic settings and increase generalization of skills from the virtual environment to the real world. This symposium presents: 1.) an updated literature review on the technological advances used to teach individuals with ASD, with a focus on VR tools, 2.) a study evaluating the efficacy of CBI to teach receptive language skills, and 3.) a study evaluating the efficacy of VR to teach safety skills.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): autism, technology, treatment, virtual reality
Target Audience:

Researchers and clinicians practicing applied behavior analysis (ABA)

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) discuss recent technological advancements used to teach individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD); (2) discuss the efficacy of a computer-based intervention (CBI) to teach receptive language skills to children with ASD; (3) discuss the efficacy of virtual reality (VR) training to teach safety skills to children with ASD.
 

A Review of Technological Advancements to Teach Individuals With Autism Spectrum Disorder

KIAN ASSEMI (Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD))
Abstract:

Computer-based instruction (CBI) and video-based instruction have become more commonly evaluated variables in applied behavior analytic literature. Recent research has found support for the efficacy of video-based instruction for teaching social skills to children with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD). As CBI technology progresses, so does the potential of different behavior analytic applications that use such technology. Some CBI procedures, such as mobile applications, have incorporated the gamification of learning tasks, which involve presenting educational material in a format that emulates a game. Such gamification procedures have the potential to create motivation for individuals to learn skills that would otherwise remain unlearned. More recently, immersive virtual reality has been used to teach skills to individuals with ASD. Research has found that significant gains can be made for individuals with ASD in areas such as theory of mind, emotional recognition, safety skills, and occupational functioning. Additionally, using virtual reality may offer the ability to teach behaviors that could otherwise result in dangerous natural consequences (e.g., crossing the street, cutting with knives) in a safe manner. Finally, virtual reality may be helpful in practicing behaviors for which the context for learning is rare or difficult to emulate (e.g., desensitization to flying on a plane, practicing safe behavior during an earthquake).

 

The Use of a Mobile Application to Teach Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

ESTHER HONG (Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD)), Marlena Novack (Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD)), Dennis Dixon (Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD)), Doreen Granpeesheh (Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD))
Abstract:

Computer-based interventions (CBIs) have been used in various capacities to assist individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). CBIs are comprised of software developed to provide treatment using built-in mechanisms, such as instructional tools, immediate feedback, and data collection. The current study evaluated the efficacy of a mobile application, Camp Discovery, which was designed to teach receptive language skills to children with ASD based on the principles of applied behavior analysis (ABA). A total of 28 participants (2-8 years old) with ASD were randomly assigned to an immediate treatment group (N = 15) or delayed treatment control group (N = 13). Participants in the treatment group made significant gains, p < .001, M = 58.1, SE = 2.13, following 4 weeks of interaction with the mobile application as compared to the control group, M = 8.4, SE = 2.13. Further, acquired skills were maintained one month after application usage was discontinued. The present findings support the use of CBI to deliver ABA-based treatment to individuals with ASD.

 

The Use of Virtual Reality to Teach Safety Skills to Children With Autism Spectrum Disorder

CHRISTOPHER MIYAKE (Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD)), Dennis Dixon (Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD)), Karen Nohelty (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Marlena Novack (Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD))
Abstract:

Individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) have impairments across a wide range of skills, including safety skills. Teaching safety skills to individuals with ASD is critical, given the potentially dangerous and fatal consequences. Although several methods (e.g., video training, mock simulations, natural environment training) have been used to teach street-crossing skills to children with ASD, these methods have been ineffective in generalizing skills to real-life street-crossing scenarios. Virtual reality (VR) technology may be a solution to teaching safety skills to individuals with ASD, such that VR environments provide immersive, realistic scenarios in a safe, controlled manner. The current study used a multiple baseline design to teach three children with ASD (5-8 years old) street-crossing skills. All natural environment pre-treatment, post-treatment, and probe sessions were conducted in uncontrolled traffic areas. All VR probe and training sessions were conducted using the Oculus Rift headset and sensors. Pre-treatment probes demonstrated that all three participants averaged below 50% accuracy on the identification of safe and unsafe conditions in the natural environment. Following the VR training treatment, all three participants demonstrated 100% mastery of street-crossing skills in the natural environment. The current findings suggest that VR tools may be a safe and viable method for teaching safety skills to individuals with ASD.

 
 
Panel #508
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Addressing the Global Application of Applied Behavior Analysis: The Expansion of an Orphanage to an Applied Behavior Analysis-Based School in China for Children With Multiple Disabilities
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Cuvee
Area: CSS/DDA; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Dorothy Xuan Zhang, Ph.D.
Chair: Dorothy Xuan Zhang (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology; George Mason University; ABA Professional Committee of China Association of Rehabilitation of Disabled Persons (ABA-CARDP)
JESSICA CALIXTO (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology; George Mason University; ABC Behavior)
HELAYNA BANKS (ABC Behavior)
LEAH JOY MADDOX (ABC Behavior; George Mason University)
Abstract:

There is a call for behavior analysts to research and create adaptations for those with multiple disabilities and impairments in all areas of the world. With growing attention to Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) as an approach to assist children with disabilities, ABA methodologies are spreading globally. Popular assessments available in the field, however do not adhere to individuals with multiple disabilities and significant impairments. This session will address the challenges encountered by a group of behavior analysts who spent two weeks introducing ABA to an orphanage in Fuzhou, China, that has had no prior exposure to ABA principles. The treatment plans created, incorporated child-specific adaptations for 25 children in the orphanage that are not easily assessed through common modalities. From this trip, it was ascertained that steps would need to be taken to accurately assess the skills and deficits of these children, many of whom were non-verbal, blind, and/or wheelchair bound. Since this experience, the expansion of the orphanage to include a school specializing in ABA has begun. The successes and challenges of creating an ABA school in a novel setting as well as ways to contribute to the school will be discussed.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

The target audience would be for those interested in continuing their education on the global application of Applied Behavior Analysis.

Learning Objectives: The audience will be able to identify cultural factors that may influence treatment. The audience will gain basic understanding of adaptations possible for children with multiple disabilities and significant impairments. The audience will have an understanding of establishing an ABA-based school in a novel location and global application.
Keyword(s): adaptations, China, global application, multiple disabilities
 
 
Symposium #509
CE Offered: BACB
Filling in the Gaps: Expanding Our Understanding of Automatic or Undifferentiated Functional Analysis Findings for Individuals With Challenging Behavior
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: David R Donnelly (University of Rochester)
CE Instructor: David R Donnelly, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Since first published (Iwata et al., 1982), the process of Functional Analysis (FA) has profoundly changed the process and effectiveness of Applied Behavior Analytical (ABA) treatment for individuals with challenging behaviors. Across ages and diagnoses, ABA has provided empirically validated evidence based treatment for behaviors maintained by attention, escape from demand, or tangibles. Yet in the years that have followed, the identification of automatic (assumed to be sensory) or undifferentiated findings has not kept pace, and this has left Behavior Analysts without a clear approach to treatment. This often results in needing to rely on default technologies that are often controversial, and less effective. In this symposium, we will discuss the potential significance of behavioral history on understanding the individual’s idiosyncratic function(s) of behavior; Looking at biological variables as potential motivating operations in further clarification of the function(s) of behavior; and working toward moving to more environmentally mediated variables informed by fine grained analysis of automatic reinforcement maintaining the behavior. Practical suggestions regarding more effective practice and research to address challenging behavior will be included.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

BCBAs and BCBA-Ds in practice, as well as those providing training for Behavior Analysts

Learning Objectives: 1) Symposium attendees will be able to identify potential benefits to Functional Analysis from including Behavioral History in their assessment. 2) Symposium attendees will be able to identify potential biological contributors to challenging behavior, as well as treatment approaches incorporating this information. 3)Symposium attendees will be aware of the relationship of scheule of automatic reinforcement, and the potential this information has in providing effective treatment for challenging behavior.
 

Expanding the ‘Standard’ Functional Analysis: The Contribution of Behavioral History to Understanding and Treating Challenging Behavior

(Service Delivery)
DAVID R DONNELLY (University of Rochester)
Abstract:

Each individual’s behavior is a result of their own ontogeny, or individual behavioral history, in the environment(s) where the behavior occurred. The concept that future behavior is influenced by past consequences is a cornerstone of the field of Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA). In assessing the function of present behavior, however, most Functional Analysis (FA) approaches place little or no emphasis on this important source of information. Obtaining a behavioral history can shed light on the potential function of behavior that would otherwise seem to be maintained by sensory or undifferentiated (unknown) reinforcement, but may in fact be maintained by idiosyncratic consequences. This presentation will focus on the process and value of analysis of historical information in developing a hypothesis regarding the function of challenging behavior, which is the purpose behind FA. Application of this process can significantly improve the accuracy of a FA, and potentially give rise to treatment that is more effective.

 
Transfer of Behavioral Function: From Automatic Function to Social Function
(Service Delivery)
ZHICHUN ZHOU (Webster University), David R Donnelly (University of Rochester)
Abstract: Prior work in the behavioral field has produced four main functions to explain the exhibition of challenging behaviors. Different variations of socially mediated functions and the schedule programming of these social functions have also been discussed in hopes of developing tools to fully analyze behavioral functions, thereby designing and strengthening function-based behavioral interventions. However, the degree of understanding of automatically-maintained challenging behaviors remains at the beginner stage in the field. This presentation will shed light on the topic that has been barely examined by behavioral researchers; namely, the function of the schedule of automatic reinforcement on challenging behaviors maintained by automatic reinforcement. The presentation will examine how behavior analysts can program the schedule of social functions to compete the effects of the schedule of automatic reinforcement, in order to gradually transfer the function that is unobservable and unmeasurable to the social function that is observable and measurable. Further, potential behavioral intervention that is based on the schedule of automatic reinforcement will be discussed.
 
Toward a Biological Analysis of Self-Injury: A Critical Review of Behavior Analysts' Methods of Analyzing Automatic Functions of Challenging Behavior
(Theory)
ELIZABETH ANDRESEN (Autism Learning Partners), David R Donnelly (University of Rochester)
Abstract: The field of Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) has greatly progressed since Iwata and colleagues (1982/1994) established a method to analyze and understand challenging behavior with the standard functional analysis (FA). However, behavior analysts still continue to face difficulty when analyzing and treating complex behaviors; particularly self-injurious behavior (SIB) maintained by automatic reinforcement. Automatic reinforcement as we know it is defined by the absence of social reinforcement; however, does this really indicate full understanding? Recent data suggest that treatment for automatic reinforcement, especially when indicated by an undifferentiated FA pattern, is significantly less effective than treatments for socially mediated behaviors (Hagopian, Rooker, & Zarcone, 2015). Additionally, despite a significant literature base supporting biological components of these complex behaviors, little research has been done in this area since the late 20th century, and little has been incorporated into functional analysis methodologies. This presentation will serve as a critical review of the literature analyzing behaviors maintained by automatic reinforcement, indicated through functional analysis, citing data from behavior analytic and neurobiological journals. All in all, this presentation will strongly suggest a synthesis of biological and environmental variables when analyzing behavior to promote the most effective treatment.
 
 
Symposium #510
CE Offered: BACB
Aging and the Future: Developmental and Conceptual Analyses
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Montreux 1-3
Area: DEV/PCH; Domain: Translational
Chair: Genevieve M. DeBernardis (University of Nevada, Reno)
Discussant: Frances K. McSweeney (Washington State University)
CE Instructor: Mitch Fryling, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The present symposium considers two socially important topics pertinent to behavioral development; aging and planning for the future. The first presentation will focus on aging specifically. In doing so the presentation especially describes the various aspects of aging, both biological and psychological, as well as how cultural factors impact the aging process. The second presentation will focus on planning for the future, highlighting both conceptual and practical implications of this. Moreover, planning for the future will be considered in developmental perspective, and the difficulty associated with planning for the future across the lifespan is considered. This analysis will consider a number of topics, including time, distinguishing the future from the past, rule-governed behavior, and the vast contextual circumstances that impact all behavior. Given all of this, strengths and limitations of common strategies in planning for the future will be considered, and implications for understanding behavior development over time are highlighted.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Practicing behavior analysts, researchers, graduate students, those interested in behavioral development and conceptual analysis.

 
The Unbecoming of Age
(Theory)
LINDA J. PARROTT HAYES (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Along with changes of a biological sort, and in keeping with them, an individual’s psychological repertoire deteriorates with advancing age. Some changes of the biological sort, such as failing eyesight or hearing loss, may be remediated by eyeglasses or a hearing aid. Bones and joints may be fortified or replaced, and so on. So valuable is the property of youth in culture that the deterioration of biological characteristics is resisted, an intention facilitated by the partially implicit character of perception. And the tendency to resist aging becomes even more pronounced for women who, by virtue of the additional value attached to beauty, aspire to maintain this property in themselves beyond the natural course of its demise. By contrast, the deterioration of the psychological repertoire, as observed in memorial and intellectual difficulties, is not so readily corrected. For the most part, these changes are failures of responding with respect to verbally attributed and substitutive properties of stimuli, coupled with the disruptions to other activities produced by them. This presentation is focused on the psychological aspects of aging including the nature and implications of the repertorial decline, as well as the reasons and means by which it resisted and disguised.
 

Planning for the Future: The Good and the Bad

(Theory)
MITCH FRYLING (California State University, Los Angeles)
Abstract:

As verbal organisms, humans spend a great deal of their time planning for the future. Common sense tells us that this is a good thing, as we may be more prepared for that future when it inevitably arrives. Indeed, developing a general repertoire of planning behavior may be considered a good developmental target during childhood. Of course, the future individuals plan for may or may not ever happen. “Things change”, as the saying goes. One’s behavior is functionally related to number of dynamic factors, it is context dependent. While this is always the case, behavior is increasingly contextual over the course of one’s lifetime. Stimulus functions continue to evolve, and an increasingly large set of setting factors may be present or absent in any given circumstance; planning for the future can become difficult over time. Moreover, such planning may even result in less adaptation to an evolving context. This presentation considers all of this in developmental perspective, while discussing the subject-matter of behavior analysis, the constructs of time and the future, and implications from the literature on rule-governed behavior.

 
 
Symposium #512
CE Offered: BACB
Skill Acquisition Criterion and Its Effects on Maintenance
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: EDC/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Erica Jowett Hirst (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale)
CE Instructor: Erica Jowett Hirst, Ph.D.
Abstract: Few studies have evaluated the effects of mastery criterion on skill maintenance, and evaluating necessary levels of initial acquisition for maintenance of skills is extremely important. This symposium is comprised of a variety of studies evaluating the effects of different mastery criteria on skill maintenance. The first study compared the effects of 80%, 90%, and 100% mastery criteria across three consecutive sessions on the maintenance of tacting skills taught with most-to-least prompting during four weekly follow-up probes. The second study compared the effects of 90% mastery criteria at 1 day versus 3 days on 1-month maintenance probes with four children with developmental disabilities. The third study evaluated the effects of fluency-based mastery criterion using a treatment package consisting of pre-exposure, a wordbank, single-response repetition, and visual feedback on the maintenance of intraverbal skills related to Alabama sex laws for three individuals adjudicated for illegal sexual behavior; mastery criteria included 100% accuracy across three consecutive days in addition to a specific rate of responding. Results of each study are presented and discussed with respect to recommendations for practice.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): mastery criterion, skill maintenance
Target Audience: Board Certified Behavior Analysts
Learning Objectives: Participants will understand best practice for selecting the level of accuracy for mastery Participants will understand best practice for selecting the number of days with accurate responding for mastery Participants will learn how to incorporate fluency into mastery criteria
 

The Effects of Varying Mastery Criteria on Skill Maintenance: A Replication With Most-To-Least Prompting

EMILY BROOK LONGINO (Auburn University), Cassidy McDougale (Auburn University), Sarah M. Richling (Auburn University), Jessica Palmier (Auburn University)
Abstract:

Previous evaluations have compared the effects of varying mastery criteria on the maintenance of skills taught with a least-to-most prompting procedure. Researchers found that 80% and 90% mastery criteria were not always sufficient in promoting maintenance. The present study evaluates the effects of 80%, 90%, and 100% mastery criteria across three consecutive sessions on the maintenance of tacting skills taught with most-to-least prompting during four weekly follow-up probes. The results indicate high levels of correct responding for skills taught to a 100% mastery criterion during follow-ups. For the two participants that mastered the 90% criterion target set, responding maintained above 90% three- and four-weeks following mastery. For all three participants, mastery levels of correct responding were not maintained for target sets taught to an 80% mastery criterion. Results support the use of more stringent mastery criteria in an effort to promote the maintenance of skills. Future research and clinical implications are discussed.

 

A Comparison of 90% Mastery Criterion at One Day Versus Three Days on Skill Maintenance at One Month

MONIQUE BARNETT (The University of Texas at Austin), Anna Budd (Queens College, CUNY), Erica Jowett Hirst (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Daniel Mark Fienup (Columbia University)
Abstract:

Discrete trial teaching (DTT) is a widely used and effective strategy for teaching various skills, and although many components of DTT are well established in the literature, little research exists concerning the criteria set for mastery (i.e., the point at which a skill is considered known and teaching is discontinued). In both research and practice, mastery criteria are commonly set at 80%-100% accuracy for two or three consecutive days or sessions; however, the rationale and necessity of this standard is unknown. Therefore, the current study compared the effects of 3-day and 1-day mastery criterion (with 90% accuracy) on skill maintenance at 1-month following mastery. Across two experiments that included different sets of students and target responses, we observed that both criteria produced skill acquisition and maintenance. The data suggest that some individuals may not need to have a skill tested for accuracy for 3 consecutive days or sessions prior to introducing a new target.

 
Fluency and the Maintenance of Skills Related to Sex Laws for Individuals Adjudicated for Illegal Sexual Behavior
SALLY A HAMRICK (Auburn University), Sarah M. Richling (Auburn University), Kristen Brogan (Auburn University), Will Davis (Auburn University), John T. Rapp (Auburn University)
Abstract: Previous research has evaluated the use of various mastery criteria on skill maintenance. This research has directly manipulated the accuracy component of mastery, as well as, the sessions across which these accuracy levels must be demonstrated. The current evaluation adds to this research by including a speed of responding dimension within the mastery criterion and extending this research to a unique population. Specifically, we evaluated the effects of a fluency treatment package consisting of pre-exposure, a wordbank, single-response repetition, and visual feedback on the maintenance of intraverbal skills related to Alabama sex laws for three individuals adjudicated for illegal sexual behavior. Additionally, we systematically faded both the pre-exposure and wordbank in a subsequent phase prior to mastery. We evaluated the effects of a 100% across 3 consecutive days mastery criterion on maintenance of accuracy across time. In addition, the mastery criterion included a rate of responding per unit of time component based on normative data. We examined the effects of this component on the maintenance of the speed of responding across time. The benefits of including a fluency-based mastery criterion are discussed as well as directions for future research.
 
 
Panel #513
CE Offered: BACB
A Panel Discussion on the Impact of School-Wide Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports and Applied Behavior Analysis on Educational Systems
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Fairmont, Third Level, Crystal
Area: EDC/CSS; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Rose Iovannone, Ph.D.
Chair: Rose Iovannone (University of South Florida/Florida Center for Inclusive Communities)
ASHLEY EDEN GREENWALD (University of Nevada, Reno)
ROBERT F. PUTNAM (May Institute)
JODIE SORACCO (UNR)
Abstract:

This session will be a panel discussion comparing and contrasting the impact School-wide Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports (SWPBIS) and Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) have had on educational systems. Upon entry into the session, audience members will be provided a polling link, accessible via smart phones, tablets, and computers. The polling link will provide potential questions to which participants can rank order based upon what each attendee considers to be of interest. Additionally, each person can contribute a discussion topic or question for the panelists. The five top ranked questions will be addressed by the panel and an additional three to five questions suggested by participants will be randomly suggested. Questions will be presented by the chair and the panelists will alternate in responding or each be given a chance to respond, depending on the nature of the question. Topics the panel intends to cover during the session through audience questions or pre-organized questions prepared by the discussant include (a) impact on current educational laws and regulations, (b) impact on educational funding and initiatives; (c) impact on implementation of evidence-based practices; (d) impact on building system capacity, and (d) impact on social, emotional, and academic outcomes for all students.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Behavior Analysts Graduate Students University Faculty/Staff Educators

Learning Objectives: Participants will: 1. Compare and contrast positive behavior support and behavior analysis contributions to sustainability of implementation of evidence-based practices. 2. Identify how positive behavior support and behavior analysis have contributed to current policies, funding, and research in educational settings. 3. List features of positive behavior support and behavior analysis that are complimentary in improving behaviors of K-12 students.
Keyword(s): behavior supports, capacity building, educational policy, sustainability
 
 
Symposium #514
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Organizational Behavior Management in Autism Service Delivery: A Three Year Review
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Toronto
Area: OBM/AUT; Domain: Translational
Chair: Emily Gallant (Somerset Hills Learning Institute)
Discussant: Paul Shreiber (Somerset Hills Learning Institute)
CE Instructor: Kevin J. Brothers, Ph.D.
Abstract:

In this presentation, we report longitudinal outcomes of two systems-based organizational behavior management strategies to improve staff performance at a private, not-for-profit school for children with autism. Instructional staff at the organization undergo semiannual evaluations assessing clinical and data-analysis skills that directly impact the quality of student outcomes. As a continuing process, the organization’s management team (i.e., classroom supervisors, assistant directors, and executive director) refine measures to increase their sensitivity to specified staff behaviors and permanent products. The longitudinal data presented reflect the effectiveness of this process in improving the quality of staff training over two years as measured via staff’s clinical performance and data notebook assessments. The first part of this presentation will describe the clinical performance evaluation, report related outcome data, and describe organizational strategies for increasing the sensitivity of these evaluation measures. The second part of this presentation will then describe the data notebook evaluation measures and their development, present relevant data, and discuss the relationship between these and third-party reviewers’ findings. In both presentations, the relationship between the time cost and value of these assessments will be discussed in detail.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): behavioral systems, performance evaluation, staff training
Target Audience:

Directors or assistant directors of private organizations serving individuals with autism spectrum disorder; BCBA Supervisors; individuals coaching staff or parents to deliver autism intervention using applied behavior analysis; organizational behavior management professionals and researchers, especially those in the fields of human services or education.

Learning Objectives: 1. Attendees will be able to name and describe at least four staff performance evaluation measures that contribute to optimal outcomes for learners with autism spectrum disorder. 2. Attendees will be able to provide rationales for the number and specificity of clinical skills evaluated for individuals delivering applied behavior analytic intervention to learners with autism spectrum disorder. 3. Attendees will be able to describe features of data analysis that contribute to an improved rate of skill generalization for learners with autism spectrum disorder.
 
Increasing Sensitivity of Staff Performance Evaluation Measures in Autism Service Delivery
(Service Delivery)
PAUL SHREIBER (Somerset Hills Learning Institute), Kevin J. Brothers (Somerset Hills Learning Institute), Emily Gallant (Somerset Hills Learning Institute)
Abstract: This presentation will describe and summarize organizational procedures and outcomes of semiannual clinical skills evaluations. All staff working directly with learners with autism undergo semiannual evaluation of clinical skills from an evaluator who does not directly supervise them. Measures consist of two to five direct observations of three student behaviors, nine staff behaviors, and seven staff behavioral repertoires scored using rating scales. We will discuss efforts to increase the behavioral nature of all measures by transitioning from rating scales to direct observation. Specifically, we will review data from the four most recently-operationalized measures of staff performance (i.e., contingent token delivery, proportion of teaching interactions conducted using errorless teaching procedures, responding to student errors, and prompt fading and/or shaping) alongside student on-task data for the past three years. We will also describe the organization’s decision-making process to add and increase specificity of measures. We will further describe how outcome data describing staff performance are integrated into a comprehensive systems-based approach to organizational behavior management via feedback to staff supervisors and adjustments to training of staff supervisors.
 
Advances in Behavioral Systems to Improve Data Analysis and Generalization of Behavior Change
(Applied Research)
KEVIN J. BROTHERS (Somerset Hills Learning Institute), Paul Shreiber (Somerset Hills Learning Institute), Emily Gallant (Somerset Hills Learning Institute)
Abstract: This presentation will describe and summarize organizational procedures and outcomes of annual evaluations of student performance data. In addition to semiannual clinical skills evaluations, permanent products of staff members’ instructional programming and data analysis activities are evaluated annually for all staff working directly with learners with autism. Efficacious programming ideally produces outcomes of rapid, stable behavior change in the desired direction, that maintains over time, serves as a foundation for more sophisticated skills, and generalizes to desired conditions. We will then discuss our operationalization, assessment, and analysis of this via six key permanent product (i.e., the outcomes of staff members’ graphing and record-keeping activities) indicators, with special emphasis on the improvement of generalization outcomes. In addition, we will describe our approach to efficacy assessment as an iterative process. We will further describe the relationship between these outcome measures and those assessed by an outside reviewer not affiliated with the organization. Finally, we will describe our iterative approach to our data-analysis assessment procedures and how this relates to the broader context of organizational management of staff behaviors.
 
 
Invited Paper Session #515
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

Robots, Artificial Intelligence, and Behavior Analysts: Shaping the Future of Work

Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Instruction Level: Basic
CE Instructor: Judy Johnson, Ph.D.
Chair: Douglas A. Johnson (Western Michigan University)
JUDY JOHNSON (Aspirant)

Judy Johnson received her Ph.D. in Applied Behavior Analysis and Masters in I/O Psychology from Western Michigan University. Judy partners with executives and leadership teams to engage and inspire employees in a way that delivers sustainable strategic results. She brings deep expertise and creative ideas to solve organizational effectiveness issues and closely collaborates in a way that builds internal capabilities. As an independent consultant, and then consultant at The Continuous Learning Group, The Boston Consulting Group and now Aspirant, Judy has spent over 25 years working in a variety of industries from banking to mining. She brings her expertise in behavior to a wide range of organizational issues including organizational behavior change, leadership, change management, culture and engagement.

Abstract:

Today’s workplace is in a state of constant change. By 2030, trends in localization, technology, and engagement will create dramatic shifts in how we approach employment and performance. These trends will change the complexion of organizational effectiveness, creating new and different requirements for companies and opening the door for Behavior Analysts to create change the rules of the workplace. Behavior Analysts can see beyond typical solutions to breakdown the components of organizational effectiveness and build a workplace ready for the future. This presentation discusses the 10 most significant trends affecting the workplace, and behavior analysts’ unique position to help companies prepare for those trends. As part of the discussion, Dr. Johnson will share examples of how the multi-disciplinary team at Aspirant has combined behavioral science, artificial intelligence and new technology solutions to assess and address a company’s organizational effectiveness. This presentation seeks to inspire all OBMers by sharing real world case examples of how behavioral tools and techniques can be applied to the toughest business challenges.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) discuss the developing trends that will impact workplace effectiveness in the next 10-15 years; (2) discuss the role of Behavior Analysts in helping companies prepare for those trends and determine how your work can play a role; (3) discuss new, different ways to apply the principles of behavior analysis to some of the biggest organizational challenges.
 
 
Symposium #517
CE Offered: BACB — 
Supervision
Autism Knows No Borders: The Why and How of World-Wide Dissemination of Applied Behavior Analysis
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom A
Area: AUT/TBA; Domain: Translational
Chair: Maricarmen Hazoury (Global Autism Project)
Discussant: Noor Younus Syed (Lehigh University Autism Services; Global Autism Project)
CE Instructor: Maricarmen Hazoury, M.S.
Abstract:

There are seventy million people in the world with autism. Eighty five percent of those individuals live in developing countries where awareness, acceptance, and access to resources is minimal. Applied behavior analysis is the scientific approach shown to be most effective in improving the lives of those with these diagnoses. There is a pervasive need to increase the number of people with a clear understanding of ABA and proficiency in using this science to work with individuals with ASD around the world. The need for a sustainable way to increase and improve ABA-based education for individuals will be discussed. The model used by the Global Autism Project will be introduced with data about current partner participation and progress of teachers and students. The concerns and challenges of generalizing the code of ethics and conduct of the BACB to training and supervising individuals in other cultures and countries will be considered.

Instruction Level: Advanced
Keyword(s): Dissemination, international ethics, supervision, sustainability
Target Audience:

BCBAs and BCBA-Ds who are training and supervising teachers, RBTs and future BCBAs both within the US and aborad

Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will gain an awareness of the awareness, acceptance and services available to those with ASD utilizing ABA around the world. 2.Participants will be able to discuss at least two ethical challenges to disseminating ABA worldwide. 3.Participants will be able to discuss at least 2 fundamental components to supporting the training of ABA providers abroad.
 

The Need for Sustainable Worldwide Dissemination of Applied Behavior Analysis

(Service Delivery)
AMREEN PANJWANI (Autism Spectrum Therapies; The Global Autism Project)
Abstract:

Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) diagnoses appear across all ages, genders, and races. Unfortunately, there are minimal services for individuals with ASD as a result of insufficient resources, awareness, and understanding in many countries in the world. Often individuals with ASD will be considered a safety concern or ineducable which restricts their access to social environments and without an opportunity to learn social significant behaviors that would improve their lives. In other situations, centers and schools are being created in some places with little to no expertise in working with the autistic population or the principles of applied behavior analysis. As Board Certified Behavior Analysts and other experts reach out to help, many challenges and concerns have been discovered. There is an essential need for ongoing assessment towards this goal to ensure independence and sustainability with ABA teaching practices. Further, statistics about the need in various parts of the world, some of the challenges that have been faced by communities that lack expertise on teaching individuals with autism, as well as ideas on how to spread awareness, support, and training to the people in these communities will be explored.

 

The Ethical Challenges of Worldwide Dissemination of Applied Behavior Analysis

(Service Delivery)
ASHLEY HOGAN (Autism Behavior Consulting Group)
Abstract:

Give a person a fish, they eat for the day; teach them to fish and they are fed for a lifetime. In 1987, the UN Brundtland Commission defined sustainable development as "meeting the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs.” The same is true for international service provision. Doing for others does not help them in the long run. Whether it is attempting to support a struggling country, working with a child with autism, or training an educator to use ABA principles, the goal should always be independence. The Global Autism Project’s mission is to promote acceptance and integration worldwide by training communities in culturally relevant, sustainable practices. This is accomplished by empowering and engaging local people for lasting change in the acceptance of those with autism until there are local credentialed behaviour analysts with the skills necessary to be able to provide clinically sound services. As effective administrators they can then effectively disseminate ABA to their local community and larger geographic region. The challenges of adhering to the BACB Professional and Ethics Compliance Code across countries and cultures will be reviewed.

 

A Model for Sustainable Applied Behavior Analysis Training Where it is Needed Most

(Service Delivery)
CHERYL LYNN GENIESSE (Autism Spectrum Therapies; The Global Autism Project)
Abstract:

There are many training models for international dissemination. The Global Autism Project employs a model rooted in sustainability where the not-for-profit organization will invest in a partnership with an international service provider committed to using the principles of applied behavior analysis. As a partner, the Global Autism Project will provide 3 two-week training trips a year as well as a weekly telehealth call, with a BCBA, to provide ongoing individualized recommendations based on the needs of the partner site. Our sites progress is captured on an internally developed assessment measuring centre-wide level of achievement and data is also collected on weekly telehealth supervision engagement (e.g., completion of assignments, attendance, and “spotchecks”). A report is given after every two-week trip which outlines goals to be accomplished, mastery criteria, and sustainable method for maintenance. In addition, The Global Autism Project works to establish more BCBAs world-wide through creation of alternate pathways in established universities and having our partners establish practicum sites in partnership with the universities promoting sustainable ABA services in the country. Data from some current partner sites will be discussed.

 
A Movement for Change at Home and Abroad: The SkillCorps® Experience
(Service Delivery)
MEGAN HECHLER (Impacting Autism, LLC; Global Autism Project)
Abstract: Hands-on training and support is a key component to any successful training model, including training professionals and parents in the use of applied behavior analysis. Part of the sustainability model of the Global Autism Project ensured this face to face interaction through teams of SkillCorps® volunteers. SkillCorps® team members have expertise working with individuals with autism as Board Certified Behavior Analysts®, Registered Behavior Technicians®, teachers, speech and language pathologists, and other related service providers. These teams collaborate with the on-going clinical supervisor for each partner site to determine necessary goals to focus on as the partners move towards independence. This is not only an opportunity for growth for teachers at the partner site but for team members themselves. The techniques for ensuring independence and maintenance of skills are imperative for teachers as well as their students. The SkillCorps® experience allows volunteers to collaborate with other professionals from different backgrounds and cultures to disseminate best practices for ABA around the world and continue to learn, grow and contribute to the field even after they return home. One SkillCorps® member’s experience will be discussed, as well as feedback from other members and participants at partner sites.
 
 
Symposium #518
CE Offered: BACB
Comprehensive Implementation of Matrix Training in Early Intensive Behavioral Intervention: Results of Complex Generative Language Matrix Program at the Lovaas Institute Midwest
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom C
Area: AUT/OBM; Domain: Translational
Chair: Eric V. Larsson (Lovaas Institute Midwest; University of Minnesota)
Discussant: Jane S. Howard (Therapeutic Pathways/The Kendall Centers)
CE Instructor: Jane S. Howard, Ph.D.
Abstract:

In comprehensive treatment of autism, generative language matrix performance is being developed in a coherent conceptual framework, enabling the organizational management of productive treatment planning, trouble-shooting, and program evaluation. A four-dimensional matrix of social language skills is used to design an overall generative process of language development. The matrix of skills is addressed across generalization modalities, syntax forms, conditional discriminations, and functional communicative relationships. After generative receptive and expressive skills are developed in single-term modes, recombinative generalization is developed through matrix training; folloed by recombinative generalization in comprehension and creative language production matrix training. The organization of the language curriculum is used to control the pacing of both language and related social skills in a systematic manner, in order to result in optimal acceleration. Three studies will present data obtained from children in EIBI over the entire scope and sequence of the language matrix system.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): dynamic programming, generative programming, matrix training, recombinative generalization
Target Audience:

Practitioners of EIBI; Academic Faculty

 

A Comparison of Generative Language Matrix Training Sequences in Young Children With Autism

(Service Delivery)
THOMAS D. R. CURRIER (Lovaas Institute Midwest), Amy Sippl (Lovaas Institute Midwest), Eric V. Larsson (Lovaas Institute Midwest; University of Minnesota)
Abstract:

In intensive early intervention, a basic programming question often is: “how many exemplars should be taught in each program?” In the overall course of comprehensive treatment for autism, behavior therapy is initiated by establishing expressive and receptive single-term labels/tacts. Treatment is continued until the various terms of a sentence become generative response classes. Then matrix training of the individual terms is continued until recombinative multiple-term conditional discriminations are established. Recombinative matrix generalization is a special form of generative response classes. Finally, more complex and abstract comprehension modes are established and training continued until the comprehension forms become recombinative and generalized. Thus the answer to the initial question is that all programs are taught until the exemplars become generative. It is suggested that behavior therapy may more readily progress through higher levels of complexity when thee lower levels are taught until they meet generative criteria. In this investigation, clinical data on two young children’s performances with language matrix programming are presented. A multiple baseline within-subject design including systematic language matrix teaching and probes for generalization was used to document the development of generative response classes and recombinative multiple-term conditional discriminations. The progress of each child was individualized according to their baseline levels, and rates of acquisition. The systematic matrix training resulted in development of generative single-term response classes, recombinative multiple-term conditional discriminations. Generalization was programmed across different stimulus and response modes (e.g., receptive, expressive, written, comprehension) and taught across different sentence terms (e.g. subjects, actions, adjectives, prepositions). Individual programs were taught until generalization occurred to the first presentation of a novel recombination of exemplars embedded with novel distractors.

 

Generative Language Matrix Training With a Young Child With Autism

(Service Delivery)
GAIL H. QUINN (The Lovaas Institute Midwest), Charryse Fouquette Luckey (Lovaas Institute Midwest; St. Cloud State University), Eric V. Larsson (Lovaas Institute Midwest; University of Minnesota)
Abstract:

In the overall course of comprehensive treatment for autism, behavior therapy is initiated by establishing expressive and receptive single-term labels/tacts. Treatment is continued until the various terms of a sentence become generative response classes. Then matrix training of the individual terms is continued until recombinative multiple-term conditional discriminations are established. Recombinative matrix generalization is a special form of generative response classes. Finally, more complex and abstract comprehension modes are established and training continued until the comprehension forms become recombinative and generalized. It is suggested that behavior therapy may more readily progress through higher levels of complexity when thee lower levels are taught until they meet generative criteria. In this investigation, clinical data on a young child’s performances with language matrix programming are presented. A multiple baseline within-subject design including systematic language matrix teaching and probes for generalization was used to document the development of generative response classes and recombinative multiple-term conditional discriminations. The systematic matrix training resulted in development of generative single-term response classes, recombinative multiple-term conditional discriminations. Generalization was programmed across different stimulus and response modes (e.g., receptive, expressive, written, comprehension) and taught across different sentence terms (e.g. subjects, actions, adjectives, prepositions). Individual programs were taught until generalization occurred to the first presentation of a novel recombination of exemplars embedded with novel distractors.

 

Programming for Advanced Social Comprehension Skills Within the Language Matrix Curriculum

(Service Delivery)
ANGELA BROWN (The Lovaas Institute), Eric V. Larsson (Lovaas Institute Midwest; University of Minnesota)
Abstract:

Keene & Larsson (2013) presented a study of training of social comprehension that utilized multiple exemplars to develop generative social comprehension in children with autism. This extension of that study provides further data to show how the generative social comprehension followed prerequisite recombinative generalization through matrix training, and then itself consisted of recombinative generalization. A multiple probe design across five common childhood social concepts (e.g., sharing) was employed for each of the three children who participated in this study. Probes were conducted on the first presentation of novel children’s books as stimuli and the proportion of correct responses to the questions was measured. Training on each social concept continued until a generative mastery criterion was met in which the child responded correctly to at least 14 out of 16 questions on three consecutive novel books. The results showed that all of the children were able to answer an increasing proportion of the questions correctly to novel children’s books as stimuli. Generalization probes across untrained in-vivo social scenarios were also assessed. The children responded to a high percentage of novel questions regarding the social scenarios. In this present extension, data will be presented which shows the sequence of matrix training that preceded the implementation of social comprehension programming, and conclusions will be offered on the appropriate scope and sequence of matrix training curriculums.

 

Managing the Implementation of Generative Language Matrix Programs Within a Comprehensive Treatment System for Autism

(Service Delivery)
CHARRYSE FOUQUETTE LUCKEY (Lovaas Institute Midwest; St. Cloud State University), Lisa Barsness (Lovaas Institute Midwest), Bethani J. Burggraff (Lovaas Institute Midwest), Erin Dietz (Lovaas Institute Midwest), Eric V. Larsson (Lovaas Institute Midwest)
Abstract:

Luckey, Pelletier, Miller, & Larsson (2013) presented the methods and outcomes of the implementation of systematic dynamic programming in a EIBI setting. The present study will present a replication and extension of that study, by demonstrating the use of dynamic programming to manage the implementation of matrix training in a comprehensive treatment program for autism. The use of organizational behavior management is critical to ensuring that all children are receiving the most effective matrix programming, and that treatment is optimally accelerated. Overall program evaluation data will be presented on 54 children undergoing generative language matrix programming in EIBI for autism. In addition, specific within-subject controlled studies of the treatment team performance with two children will show the effects of a system for management of clinical outcomes. During baseline, common non-dynamic management systems were in place to manage the children's language matrix programs. The clinical management system, known as Dynamic Programming was introduced via a multiple baseline design across children. Dynamic Programming is an intervention package that includes: (a) therapist self-monitoring while teaching new program exemplars, (b) therapist public posting of child mastery, (c) probes of child behavior to confirm generative mastery of matrix training, (d) dynamic adjustment of daily treatment targets based upon performance, and (e) dynamic adjustment of monthly objectives criteria based upon performance data. Results suggest that the children's rate of acquisition of generative language was accelerated through the implementation of Dynamic Programming.

 
 
Symposium #520
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
The Right to Effective Treatment in the Crosshairs: Massachusetts Versus Judge Rotenberg Center
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 1/2
Area: CBM/PCH; Domain: Translational
Chair: W. Joseph Wyatt (Marshall University)
Discussant: W. Joseph Wyatt (Marshall University)
CE Instructor: W. Joseph Wyatt, Please Select...
Abstract:

Within a treatment/educational program that is highly positive, is there a place for use of aversives if that mode of treatment advances a client toward his or her full potential and optimizes the client’s quality of life? Is there a small population of clients for whom aversive stimulation falls within the individual’s right to effective treatment? This symposium will examine these issues as they played out in a recent legal case in Massachusetts. The presentations include a review of the research, how aversives (including relevant safeguards) fit into an otherwise highly positive program at the Judge Rotenberg Center and the role of media on public perceptions of JRC. Testimony of experts and legal tactics in the case will reviewed as well. The symposium will show how, following a 44 day trial that included dozens of witnesses and hundreds of pages of exhibits, a judge concluded that there is a place for ethical use of aversives. A parent will describe the impact of aversive programming on the dangerous behaviors, and on the life prospects, of his adult child.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience: The target audience includes graduate students and their professors, professionals who work with clients who exhibit dangerous behaviors or who plan to do so.
Learning Objectives: 1. Acquisition of knowledge of the pros and cons of the use of aversives. 2. Understanding of the ethical issues involved. 3. Working knowledge of the Judge Rotenberg Center's model review process for use of aversives.
 

The Science Informing the Standard of Care for Treating Severe Behavior Disorders

(Service Delivery)
NATHAN BLENKUSH (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center)
Abstract:

In 2013, the Massachusetts Department of Developmental Services (DDS) filed a motion to vacate a settlement agreement that allowed the Judge Rotenberg Center (JRC) to use a skin shock device (the Graduated Electronic Decelerator (GED)), approved by the Massachusetts Probate Court on a case-by-case basis, to treat individuals with severe problem behaviors. To support the motion, DDS initially claimed that positive behavior supports rendered punishment procedures unnecessary. Later, DDS provided expert testimony that psychotropic medications combined with positive behavior supports were sufficiently effective to treat severe problem behaviors. On the other hand, JRC argued that despite the advances in psychopharmacology and behavior analysis, some individuals continued to require treatment that included the GED. Over the course of 44 trial days, hundreds of scientific articles were offered to the court and critically examined by lawyers and experts on both sides. Here, the process of presenting and critiquing the literature pertaining to severe problem behaviors is discussed using transcripts from the trial.

 

“Bad Faith”: The State of Massachusetts Versus the Judge Rotenberg Center

(Service Delivery)
W. JOSEPH WYATT (Marshall University)
Abstract:

In a recent court case, a Massachusetts judge undertook a thorough review of the use of an aversive stimulation method (skin shock) at the Judge Rotenberg Center, the only treatment center in the U.S. to use the controversial method. This presentation will review the judge’s findings after a thorough review of the evidence, pro and con. The judge also described included numerous acts of “bad faith” by individuals within the State Department of Developmental Services in its efforts to undermine and prevent effective treatment at JRC. The presentation will address ethical issues including the likelihood of a future of institutionalization, lived out on high doses of medications that include deleterious side effects, is preferable to the thoughtful and ethical use of aversive stimulation when that treatment modality is carefully and minimally used within a treatment program that is overwhelmingly positive. Is a two-second shock, although painful, an ethical treatment if it opens the door to a life of education, community outings, employment and a quality of life that previously could not have been imagined? Ethics of the use of skin shock will be discussed and audience participation is encouraged.

 

The Effects of Negative Media on a Residential Treatment Center for Students With Severe Behaviors

(Service Delivery)
GLENDA CROOKES (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center)
Abstract:

Since the mid-1980's, the Judge Rotenberg Center has been embroiled in controversy that more often than not has been misrepresented by the media. For decades, we have been fighting for the right to effective treatment as well as parents’ rights to recommend what they feel is the most effective, least restrictive treatment for their children. Often the media have responded to outcries from well-intentioned but misguided individuals who have never worked with clients who exhibit high rates of behaviors that are dangerous to themselves and/or to others. Moreover, those who have most harshly criticized the use of aversives at JRC have refused to visit the Center even when invited to do so. Despite the progress made and the dramatic improvement in many clients’ quality of life, the media has portrayed what happens at the center in a negative light. This presentation will discuss the ramifications of the negative media, including protests, serious threats, and proposed regulatory changes.

 

My Child’s Experience at the Judge Rotenberg Center: His History, Behaviors, and How Aversives Changed Everything

(Service Delivery)
Glenda Crookes (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), NICK LOWTHER (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center)
Abstract:

This parental presentation will trace the history of a child whose high rates of extremely dangerous behaviors had resulted in his placement in, and eventual expulsion from, a number of well-respected residential placements wherein the best efforts of professionals had failed to eliminate or significantly reduce those behaviors. Several of the behaviors were life-threatening and had resulted in extreme, though necessary, restrictions on quality of life. The earlier placements had involved long-term physical restraints as well as heavy doses of psychotropic medications that produced unhealthy side-effects. After several months at the Judge Rotenberg Center during which only positive techniques were employed, there had been little improvement in the dangerous behaviors. Ultimately, I was approached about the use of aversive stimulation, skin shock, with my child. This presentation will review the behaviors, earlier failed efforts to address them, the decision-making process regarding aversives, the treatment and the outcome relative to the dangerous behaviors along with resultant changes in my child’s quality of life and potential

 
 
Symposium #521
CE Offered: BACB
Introduction to Clinical Behavior Analysis for Common Mental Health Presentations: Part Two
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 3/4
Area: CBM; Domain: Theory
Chair: Robert Snyder (Eastern Michigan University)
Discussant: Thomas J. Waltz (Eastern Michigan University)
CE Instructor: Thomas J. Waltz, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Behavior analysis has been applied broadly and has been part of clinical psychology since the 1950’s. Behavior analysts have worked with a wide variety of clinical populations and several contemporary behavior therapies are deeply rooted in functional analytic thinking. This is the second of two symposiums aimed at introducing behavior analysts to clinical behavior analysis for common outpatient mental health presentations. In the service of workforce development, it is important that behavior analysts stay informed on the broad applications of behavioral principles in a wide variety of practice areas. This symposium covers Behavioral Activation (BA), exposure therapies, Integrative Behavioral Couples Therapy (IBCT), and Contingency Management (CM). Each presentation will describe a therapy—its aims, techniques, and methods in functional terms. Outcome data for the treatments will be briefly reviewed. Finally, regulatory frameworks and professional training pathways will be discussed to inform behavior analysts of the training needed for these treatments to fall within their ethical scope of practice.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): anxiety, couples therapy, depression, substance use
Target Audience:

Graduate students in behavior analysis and graduates from graduate programs in behavior analysis.

Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to describe contemporary behavior therapies for mental health presentations in terms of behavioral principles. Participants will be able to describe the evidence base for these treatments. Participants will be able to describe training pathways for having these treatments ethically fall within ones scope of practice.
 
Behavioral Activation for Depression
TORI HUMISTON (Eastern Michigan University), Lillian Ellis (Eastern Michigan University), Thomas J. Waltz (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: Behavioral activation (BA) is a third-wave behavior therapy that is grounded Lewinsohn’s and Ferster’s frameworks for conceptualizing depression. Life events can put into motion a cascade of changes in contingencies that result in social withdrawal and decreases in the effectiveness of reinforcers. Behavioral activation takes steps to reverse this process through values clarification, problem solving, and the scheduling of meaningful activities. Rooted in behavioral principles, BA has a strong evidence base as a treatment for depression. This presentation will introduce behavior analysts to the treatment structure of BA while highlighting the role of a behavioral case formulation during implementation. Potential factors that could interfere with treatment such as interpersonal skills deficits and contexts with coercive contingencies will also be discussed. The evidence base of BA for depression will be briefly reviewed. Finally, guidance will be provided regarding the professional training required for BA to fall within one’s clinical scope of practice.
 

Facing Fears: Exposure Therapy for Anxiety Disorders

TOM BUQO (Hofstra University)
Abstract:

Exposure therapy is an early behavioral intervention for anxiety disorders that continues to play a key role in a number of existing psychotherapies. Of note, it provides a powerful treatment method for phobias and panic (exposure therapy/graduated exposure), obsessive compulsive disorder (Exposure and Response Prevention [ERP]), and posttraumatic stress disorder (Prolonged Exposure [PE]). The method of exposure therapy involves repeated presentation of stimuli that are typically feared or avoided, while not allowing the individual to escape or avoid them. This presentation will discuss the current state of exposure therapy, including theoretical debates that highlight the behavioral principles underlying the treatment. Various models for conducting exposure therapy for a diverse array of presenting problems will be discussed, including recent advances in the area of Virtual Reality Exposure Therapy (VRET). Data regarding efficacy and effectiveness will also be presented. Future directions and current trends in exposure therapy will be elaborated, as will the steps and resources available to individual providers in learning the techniques, nuances, and technicalities of exposure therapy.

 
Integrative Behavioral Couples Therapy
LILLIAN ELLIS (Eastern Michigan University), Qingqing Yin (Eastern Michigan University), Thomas J. Waltz (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: Integrative behavioral couples therapy is based on a functional contextual model that aims to bring about contingency-shaped changes in couples’ behaviors (Benson, Sevier, Christensen, 2014; Sevier, Atkins, Doss, Christensen, 2015). It is a third wave behavioral therapy, integrating change and acceptance strategies (Christensen & Jacobson, 1998). IBCT has evidence to suggest efficacy in increasing relationship satisfaction (Roddy, Nowlan, Doss, Christensen, 2016), with couples maintaining this increase over the next five years (Christensen, Atkins, Baucom, & Yi, 2010). A large-scale role-out of this treatment in the VA health system has demonstrated effectiveness within this healthcare system (Roddy et al., 2015). In contrast to emotion-focused couples therapy, traditional behavioral couple therapy, and cognitive behavioral couples therapy, IBCT emphasizes a cohesive behavioral framework, inclusive of overt behaviors and private events. This presentation provides a review of IBCT, with an emphasis on the behavioral principles embedded in the treatment model, discuss mechanisms of change, and direct listeners to further resources on this approach.
 

Contingency Management for Substance Use

Robert Snyder (Eastern Michigan University), BRANDON MILLER (Eastern Michigan University), Tori Humiston (Eastern Michigan University), Thomas J. Waltz (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract:

In the face of a nationwide opioid epidemic, there is an increased need for behavioral interventions for substance use disorders (SUD). Contingency Management (CM) is an efficacious, non-pharmacological, cost effective treatment for SUD. CM therapists provide individuals with monetary rewards or vouchers, which are then exchanged for tangible rewards upon verified negative drug or alcohol screenings on varying schedules of reinforcement. By increasing the response cost for using and providing competing reinforcers, the rate of substance decreases. CM has been shown to yield positive treatment outcomes across a number of substances, including cocaine, opioids, nicotine, and alcohol (Higgins, Heil, & Sigon, 2013). This presentation will first provide an overview of CM as an application of the differential reinforcement of other behavior and the matching law. A review the evidence base for CM and the contextual considerations for its use will be provided. Finally, the clinical settings and professional training required for using CM clinically will be characterized to identify how behavior analysts can include CM in their scope of practice.

 
 
Symposium #522
CE Offered: BACB
Theoretical Overviews and Practical Implications of Key Concepts and Procedures Related to Problematic Behavior
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom A
Area: DDA/EAB; Domain: Theory
Chair: Megan A. Boyle (Missouri State University)
Discussant: Joel Eric Ringdahl (University of Georgia)
CE Instructor: Megan A. Boyle, Ph.D.
Abstract: One of the strengths of applied behavior analysis is that it is “conceptually systematic” (Baer, Wolf, & Risley, 1968), meaning that its procedures are analyzed and results of procedures interpreted using behavioral principles. Some principles are better understood by applied behavior analysts (and by behavior analysts in general) than others. For example, the processes of reinforcement and extinction are ubiquitous among applied behavior analysts when discussing procedures and results, but others, such as behavioral contrast, momentum, relapse, and the mechanisms responsible for lesser utilized reinforcement-based procedures, such as differential reinforcement of other behavior are less well-known, or at least are less often discussed. This symposium is designed to expose audience members to the theoretical underpinnings of these lesser known concepts and mechanisms, specifically in the context of interventions for problematic behavior. This symposium will be appropriate for behavior analysts at any level and will cover basic theoretical concepts as well as applied implications. Presenters will review basic definitions and key research findings from basic and applied investigations and will explain how to interpret results of relevant research.
Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): behavioral contrast, behavioral momentum, Behavioral relapse, DRO
Target Audience: The target audience will be behavior-analytic researchers and practitioners. We hope the symposium will be relevant to researchers and practitioners at all levels (basic-advanced).
Learning Objectives: 1. Audience members will be able to interpret data displays of advanced behavioral concepts (behavioral contrast, momentum, and behavioral relapse). 2. Audience members will be able to describe discrepancies in research findings regarding advanced behavioral concepts. 3. Audience members will be able to state some of the key variables that research has identified that may influence advanced behavioral concepts. 4. Audience members will be able to describe some of the gaps in knowledge that make it challenging to extend basic research on advanced behavioral concepts to practice or applied research
 

What Do We Really Know About Behavioral Contrast?

MEGAN A. BOYLE (Missouri State University)
Abstract:

Behavioral contrast is a term that is at least familiar to both clinicians and researchers, and to both basic and applied scientists. The definition of “behavioral contrast” is fairly straightforward: a change in behavior in one context in the opposite direction of a change in reinforcement rate in another context. However, a variety of variables have been shown to influence behavioral contrast (e.g., component duration, reinforcement rate, availability of alternative reinforcers, response topography, etc.), and some variables appear to exert an interactive effect (e.g., component duration and reinforcement rate). The vast majority of research on behavioral contrast has been conducted with non-humans in basic-research arrangements, and yet side effects of interventions in applied settings are often attributed to contrast-like phenomena. This tutorial will expose audience members to basic definitions and experimental arrangements, seminal research, and key variables and displays of data that are critical to interpreting research on behavioral contrast.

 
Pavlov, Persistence, and Proportions of Baseline: Making Applied Sense of Behavioral Momentum Theory
JOSEPH MICHAEL LAMBERT (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract: Decades of research have uncovered two related but distinct effects of reinforcement on responding. The first effect is on response rate and is a product of contingencies of reinforcement arranged in an operant paradigm. The second effect is on contextually controlled response persistence and is a product of Pavlovian conditioning. Although examples of the first effect are ubiquitous in intervention research, less has been done to highlight for practitioners the potential applied significance of the second effect. This is unfortunate because the implications of behavioral momentum theory are, at times, counterintuitive and treatment decisions made without consideration for the phenomena highlighted by the theory could lead to suboptimal treatment outcomes. The purpose of this tutorial is to provide audience members with a brief overview of behavioral momentum theory and to highlight a number of ways for practitioners to design interventions which, theoretically, capitalize on every effect offered by the reinforcement process.
 
Why “Eliminated” Behavior Comes Back, and What We Can Do About It
ANDREW R. CRAIG (SUNY Upstate Medical University)
Abstract: Reinforcement-based interventions (e.g., functional-communication training, contingency management) are among the most effective methods for eliminating maladaptive human behavior. The term “eliminating” in the previous sentence, however often it is used in that context, is a misnomer. It is important to acknowledge that reduction of maladaptive behavior does not imply that it has been snipped out of an individual’s repertoire. Indeed, under specific environmental circumstances, behavior is likely to come back. For example, eliminated behavior may recur following: (1) interruption of reinforcement for desirable behavior, (2) a change in the context in which the treatment occurs, (3) exposure to stimuli associated with pre-intervention reinforcement conditions, or (4) an atypically long period of time away from the treatment context. These forms of relapse are termed resurgence, renewal, reinstatement, and spontaneous recovery, respectively, and they all may pose a sizeable challenge to the long-term durability of therapeutic outcomes. In this talk, I will introduce audience members to examples of these relapse phenomena from both the animal laboratory and clinical applications. I also will offer some suggestions on how clinicians may arrange treatment conditions to minimize the likelihood that relapse will occur.
 

Differential Reinforcement of Other Behavior: A Review of the Literature

CATALINA REY (University of Vermont), Alison M. Betz (Behavior Services of the Rockies), Noor Javed (Kennedy Kreiger Institute)
Abstract:

Differential reinforcement of other behavior (DRO) is a reinforcement schedule in which reinforcement is contingent upon a period of time with the absence of a target response. The DRO has become one of the most commonly used procedures for decreasing rates of problem behavior (Matson et al., 2011). Since its introduction, researchers and practitioners have made modifications to and developed variations of the DRO procedure. This presentation will cover a review of those variations in the basic and applied literature in an attempt to identify best practices for clinicians and directions for future research. This presentation will review topics including best practice for setting DRO intervals, thinning DRO intervals, using whole-interval versus momentary DROs, using resetting versus non-resetting DROs, using DRO procedures with and without the use of extinction, and different methods for improving the overall efficacy of the DRO procedure. Research on the underlying mechanisms that result in the decelerative effects of the target response will also be discussed.

 
 
Invited Tutorial #524
CE Offered: BACB/PSY/QABA
A Practitioner's Guide to Mitigating Treatment Relapse
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom EF
Area: PRA; Domain: Service Delivery
BACB/PSY/QABA CE Offered. CE Instructor: Wayne Fisher, Ph.D.
Chair: David Bicard (Great Leaps Learning Center)
Presenting Authors: : WAYNE FISHER (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
Abstract:

Treatment relapse is a common problem after destructive behavior has been successfully treated using differential reinforcement procedures, such as functional communication training (FCT). Three forms of treatment relapse are resurgence, renewal, and reinstatement. These forms of treatment relapse are much more common that previously thought. For example, a recent prevalence study from our research lab showed that resurgence of problem behavior occurred in 75% of cases during reinforcer schedule thinning with FCT. Researcher have identified a number of specific procedures that practitioners can incorporate into FCT treatment packages that can mitigate, and in some cases prevent, resurgence and other forms of treatment relapse. In this presentation, I will discuss translational research on treatment relapse and describe specific and practical treatment procedures that practitioners can readily integrate into their practice.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) define the three major forms of treatment relapse at the completion of this presentation; (2) describe the treatment procedure that reduces two of the three major forms of treatment relapse.
 
WAYNE FISHER (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
Wayne Fisher is the H.B. Munroe professor of behavioral research in the Munroe-Meyer Institute and the Department of Pediatrics at the University of Nebraska Medical Center. He is also the director of the Center for Autism Spectrum Disorders at the Munroe-Meyer Institute, a board certified behavior analyst at the doctoral level (BCBA-D), and a licensed psychologist. He was previously a professor of psychiatry at Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine and served as executive director of the Neurobehavioral Programs at the Kennedy Krieger Institute and the Marcus Behavior Center at the Marcus Institute, where he built clinical-research programs in autism and developmental disabilities with international reputations for excellence. Fisher’s methodologically sophisticated research has focused on several intersecting lines, including preference, choice, and the assessment and treatment of autism and severe behavior disorders, that have been notable for the creative use of concurrent schedules of reinforcement, which have become more commonplace in clinical research primarily as a result of his influence. He has published over 180 peer-reviewed papers in over 30 different behavioral and/or medical journals, including: the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis; Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior; American Journal on Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities; Pediatrics; and The Lancet. Fisher has had near-continuous federal grant support for his research for 19 years.  He is a past editor of the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, a past president of the Society for the Experimental Analysis of Behavior (SEAB), a fellow in the Association for Behavior Analysis International, and recipient of (a) the Bush Leadership Award; (b) the APA (Division 25) Award for Outstanding Contributions to Applied Behavioral Research; (c) the UNMC Distinguished Scientist Award; (d) the University of Nebraska system-wide Award for Outstanding Research and Creativity Activity; and (e) the SEAB, Don Hake Translational Research Award from APA (Division 25).
 
 
Symposium #525
CE Offered: BACB
Teaching Students to Think Like Behavior Analysts: A Discussion on Teaching Philosophy, Theory, and Conceptual Issues to Students of Behavior Analysis
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, International Ballroom
Area: TBA/PCH; Domain: Theory
Chair: Bethany P. Contreras Young (Middle Tennessee State University )
Discussant: Bethany P. Contreras Young (Middle Tennessee State University )
CE Instructor: Bethany P. Contreras Young, Ph.D.
Abstract:

It is important for students of behavior analysis to demonstrate a broad understanding of the underlying philosophy, theory, and concepts that will ultimately guide their decision making. This symposium will present a series of discussions on teaching philosophy, theory, and conceptual issues to graduate students pursuing training in behavior analysis. The general goal of this symposium is to discuss the importance of teaching philosophy and theory at the master’s level, and to identify topics that should be included in master’s coursework. Timothy Slocum will discuss teaching philosophy in the context of applied behavior analysis coursework; Andy Lattal will discuss teaching concepts and philosophy in the context of experimental analysis of behavior coursework; Claudia Drossel will discuss the importance of understanding the philosophy of behavior analysis for clinical practitioners; and Anthony Biglan will discuss functional contextualism as a framework for organizing behavioral science and practice. Bethany Contreras will then end the symposium by identifying information from the four presentations to include in a tentative outline for a master’s level course on philosophy, theory, and conceptual issues that will prepare students to “think like a behavior analyst.”

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): behaviorism, functional contextualism, radical behaviorism
Target Audience:

The target audience is PhD level behavior analysts who are involved in teaching and training both master's and doctoral level students.

Learning Objectives: 1.) Identify and define important philosophical and theoretical issues 2.) Discuss the importance of including philosophical and theoretical issues in master's level training 3.) Discuss methods for incorporating philosophical and theoretical issues into mater's level coursework and clinical training
 
Teaching Philosophy in the Context of Applied Behavior Analysis
TIMOTHY A. SLOCUM (Utah State University)
Abstract: Radical Behaviorism provides a powerful philosophical foundation for developing a science focused on the prediction and control of behavior in applied contexts. Teaching the tenets and application of radical behaviorism to graduate students in the context of a program in applied behavior analysis entails two broad tasks: (a) Teaching students to apply the philosophy effectively to a wide range of situations that are within the current scope of behavior analysis and to communicate effectively with behavior analysts, and (b) teaching students to use radical behaviorism as tool for reaching out – to communicate with diverse audiences that are not radical behaviorists and to understand behavior that has not previously been analyzed in behavioral terms. This second task is concerned with whether radical behaviorism has the effect of broadening or narrowing the scope of curiosity, flexibility of the analysis, and the ability to find value in concepts and procedures that are not framed behaviorally.
 

"The Pigeon Was Able to Discriminate": Conceptual Opportunities and Challenges in Teaching Experimental Analysis of Behavior

KENNON ANDY LATTAL (West Virginia University)
Abstract:

As in teaching other topics in behavior analysis, conceptual opportunities and challenges abound in material related to the basic science. The overriding opportunity/challenge with some students is that of persuading them to suspend the belief system/conceptual framework that they bring with them to the material and open up to what for them is a totally different way of looking at their world. For other students, it is to help refine an already-developing world view. The content of basic science courses lends itself readily to discussions of radical behaviorism’s approach to scientific practices, with such topics as observation and objectivity, data collection and analysis, determinism and causation, and the definitions and use of theory. The scientific content of EAB lends itself equally well to other, perhaps more general, conceptual issues such as mechanism, contextualism, selectionism, agency, intention, privacy, and research ethics. Both the issues and methods for bringing them into focus when teaching EAB, in both the classroom and laboratory, will be the topic of this presentation.

 

Clinical Behavior Analysis and the Importance of Philosophy

CLAUDIA DROSSEL (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract:

Eastern Michigan University’s clinical behavior analysis (CB) master’s program prepares students for both the psychology limited license and the board certification in behavior analysis. In preparation for clinical work with general presentations such as mood or stress disorders, students learn about behavior therapies, such as acceptance and commitment therapy, behavioral activation, or dialectical behavior therapy. Later, they receive practical training and supervision. Becoming a clinical behavior analyst requires that students maintain a behavior analytic stance while entering the vernacular language realm. In session, clinicians dual-task: On the one hand, they explicitly coach the client in the active use of behavior change principles, with practice carried out by the client in between-session assignments. On the other hand, there is the context in which this coaching is taking place, particularly the reciprocal interaction of trainee and client. The trainee’s contingent responding in this interaction, taking a behavior analytic long view and considering the case conceptualization, is most difficult to train and to acquire. Video examples will illustrate that a thorough understanding of philosophy and the flexible application of behavior analytic conceptualizations within one’s own interactions are critical in training.

 

Pending

ERIN B. RASMUSSEN (Idaho State University)
Abstract:

Pending

 
 
Symposium #526
CE Offered: BACB
Clinical Interventions From the Field: Maintaining the Scientist/Practitioner Ideals of Case Management
Monday, May 27, 2019
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom CD North
Area: VBC/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Kalle M Laitinen (1989)
Discussant: April N. Kisamore (Hunter College)
CE Instructor: Sara Polgar, M.Ed.
Abstract:

This symposium will address issues related to the application of Scientist/Practitioner service delivery in contemporary home and school programming models. The four presentations will include discussion of clinical follow up, functional use of speech-generating devices, a clinical replication of naming, and long-term applied behavior analysis services provided to adults with autism spectrum disorder.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): behavioral cusps, naming, social skills, speech-generating device
Target Audience:

BCaBA, BCBA, BCBA-D

 
Revisiting Verbal Behavior Development: A Three Year Follow Up
SHUBHRA GHOSH (Fit Learning Aptos)
Abstract: This presentation continues the annual clinical updates of progress for Shraman. Clinical issues regarding the choice, prioritization, and monitoring of target behavioral cusps will be discussed.
 
Teaching Flexibility of Language in Learners Using Speech-Generating Devices
SARA POLGAR (David Gregory School)
Abstract: Three learners using speech-generating devices (SGD) to communicate, acquired the skill to ask questions about hidden objects using the protocol described in Williams, Donley, & Keller (2000). Observationally, learners using SGDs learn rotate responses and short phrase mands (i.e.“I want iPad.”) The purpose of the current intervention was to investigate if, with the same learners, we could replicate the findings of Williams, Perez-Gonzalez and Vogt (2005) where by changing contingencies to the three formulated questions the learner’s flexibility in responding increased.
 
A Systematic Replication of Teaching Naming as a Behavioral Cusp
JESSICA FERNANDEZ (Fit Learning)
Abstract: The purpose of this intervention was to teach the capacity of naming to a seven year old learner with autism spectrum disorder. He presented with defined listener, echoic, mand and intraverbal repertoires as scored on his VB-MAPP profile. This presentation will describe data on the establishment of naming up to the date of this conference.
 

Practical Approaches to Address the Needs of Adolescents and Adults With Autism Spectrum Disorder

GLADYS WILLIAMS (CIEL, SPAIN)
Abstract:

Ten-year learning history of two 30-year-old males diagnosed with profound cognitive delays at age three. Detailed presentation on the development for the establishment and growth of verbal behavior and ADL repertoires will be presented with discussion of clinical challenges and triumphs over this course of time.

 
 
Symposium #528
CE Offered: BACB
Displacement and Diverse Applications of Preference and Reinforcer Assessments
Monday, May 27, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom D
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Kimberley L. M. Zonneveld (Brock University)
CE Instructor: Kimberley L. M. Zonneveld, Ph.D.
Abstract: Given that reinforcers are integral to the success of behavioral interventions, it is imperative to assess and identify individuals’ preference for and the efficacy of these stimuli used during behavioral interventions. Previous researchers have found that individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities tend to show a preference for certain stimulus classes over others; however, the extent to which this phenomenon generalizes to different populations and to novel stimulus classes remains unclear. In the first presentation, Carter and colleagues will present two studies (a) evaluating typically developing children’s preferences for edible and leisure stimuli and (b) comparing the reinforcing efficacy of the top-ranked stimulus from each class. In the second presentation, Schieber and colleagues will present a study evaluating the preferences of children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) for (a) social and non-social visual images and (b) social and tangible reinforcers followed by an evaluation of the reinforcing potency of the highest-ranked events of each class. In the third presentation, Martin and colleagues will present a study investigating the preferences of children with intellectual and developmental disabilities for electronic leisure and edible stimuli and the social validity of these outcomes.
Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): displacement, preference assessment, reinforcer assessment, social motivation
Target Audience: Researchers and practitioners
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) analyze the results of combined-class preference and reinforcer assessments, (2) discuss the social validity of preference and reinforcer assessment outcomes, and (3) compare the preference for and reinforcer potency of stimuli from various stimulus classes.
 
Displacement of One Stimulus Class Over Another Stimulus Class: A Systematic Replication
ADAM CARTER (Hamilton Health Sciences), Kimberley L. M. Zonneveld (Brock University)
Abstract: Previous researchers have found that individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities tend to prefer edible over leisure stimuli and that, when compared, leisure stimuli tend to function as less effective reinforcers than edible stimuli. This same phenomenon has not yet been investigated with typically developing children. In Study 1, we evaluated the preference for leisure and edible stimuli in a combined-class MSWO assessment with 15 typically developing children. Five of 15 participants preferred edible stimuli over leisure stimuli, 3 of 15 participants preferred leisure stimuli over edible stimuli, and the remaining 7 of 15 participants did not show a preference for one stimulus class over the other. In Study 2, we compared the reinforcer potency of the top-ranked stimulus from each class with 7 of the 8 participants who showed displacement of one stimulus class over the other. Four of 7 participants allocated more responding to the free-operant task associated with the top-ranked stimulus identified in the combined-class MSWO, and 3 of 7 participants showed no differences in responding to the free-operant task regardless of the stimulus rank.
 
Does Selection of a Toy Image Over a Facial Image Predict Insensitivity to Social Reinforcers?
ELIZABETH SCHIEBER (University of Florida), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (University of Florida), Nathalie Fernandez (University of Florida), Kissel Joseph Goldman (University of Florida)
Abstract: In this study, nine children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) first completed a tablet-based preference assessment (PA) for social and nonsocial visual images to replicate a recent study suggesting diminished social motivation in children with ASD. Then, we repeated the PA while providing post-choice access to the reinforcers. Next, children completed separate paired-stimulus PAs for social and tangible reinforcers followed by a combined PA to determine if tangible reinforcers would displace social reinforcers in preference hierarchies. Finally, we used concurrent-schedule reinforcer assessments to measure response allocation among the highest-ranked events of each class. Collectively, the results showed: a) the tablet-based PA most often resulted in indifferent choice patterns; b) choices were more differentiated when we provided post-choice access; c) tangible reinforcers often displaced social reinforcers in combined PSPAs; but d) response rates for the most preferred social reinforcer were higher than the tangible reinforcer (four children), and when they were not (five children), the social reinforcer nonetheless supported response rates above a no-reinforcement control. Overall, the results suggest a relative preference for tangible stimuli does not necessarily indicate that social reinforcers are ineffective.
 

Evaluating Preference for Electronic Compared to Edible Items in Children With Developmental Delays

CLARISSA MARTIN (Marcus Autism Center), Mindy Christine Scheithauer (Marcus Autism Center), Stephanie Trauschke (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract:

Past research has shown displacement of leisure items by edible items in preference assessments with children with developmental delays (e.g., DeLeon, Iwata, & Roscoe, 1997). In recent years, there has been increased use of electronics as reinforcers and caregiver report shows children with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) spend more time with electronics than typically developing siblings (Mazurek, 2013). This study compared preference for electronic leisure to edible items. Participants were children with developmental and intellectual disabilities admitted to a day program for toilet training or challenging behavior. All participants completed separate preference assessments for leisure and edible items as standard of care. When the most preferred leisure item was an electronic, we conducted a combined preference assessment evaluating the top three leisure and edible items. Results for the first 10 participants show that half (n=5) of participants preferred the electronic item over edible items. Compared to past research on displacement by edible items, this suggests that electronic items may be less likely to be displaced. The importance of conducting preference assessments in clinical work and selecting reinforcers considering preference and social validity are discussed.

 
 
Panel #529
CE Offered: BACB
Is a Picture Worth a Thousand Words?: A Case for Parsimony in Conditional Discrimination Using PECS
Monday, May 27, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Lobby Level, Plaza Ballroom AB
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Ken Winn, M.S.
Chair: Mary Howell (Firefly Autism)
KEN WINN (Firefly Autism)
KOREY TAYLOR (Firefly Autism)
MIRANDA FOLEY (Firefly Autism)
Abstract:

The Picture Exchange Communication System (PECS) was developed to teach children with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) a functional way to communicate when they have limited abilities in speech, language and speaking skills. However, there is an underlying assumption that a child does not need to already posses simple or conditional discrimination skills in order to succeed with PECS, but rather those skills will develop later (Bondy and Frost, 2001). In the present study we examine two adolescents with ASD and their slow acquisition of PECS. When examining the assumed prerequisite skills of simple and conditional discrimination neither student is competent. With their severely limited communication skills and deficient discrimination skills we postulated that despite the presumed acquisition of these skills, that they would require the teaching of these fundamentals prior to succeeding in PECS. Utilizing the general procedures for teaching conditional discrimination skills established by Gina Green (2001) we have seen a significant increase in the acquisition of PECS.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

BCBA's RBT's ABA Therapists

Learning Objectives: 1) Participants will learn about conditional discrimination in the use of Picture Exchange Communication System 2) Participants will learn to analyze the gradual effects of visual communication systems for individuals with ASD and severe communication challenges 3) Participants will identify fundamental skills necessary to teach more complicate communication systems, such as PECS
Keyword(s): Communication, Conditional Discrimination, PECS
 
 
Symposium #531
CE Offered: BACB
Behavior Analysts' Use of Evidence-Based Practice: Where We Are and Where We Need To Be
Monday, May 27, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom B
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Ronnie Detrich (Detrich and Associates)
CE Instructor: Susan Wilczynski, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Practitioners of any discipline should use evidence-based practice (EBP) to identify effective treatments for their clients (Wilczynski, 2017). The EBP decision-making model incorporates a practitioner’s use of professional judgment to integrate best available evidence with relevant client variables to make treatment decisions (Wilczynski, 2017). Although use of this decision-making model is recommended, how well do behavior analysts incorporate EBP factors into their everyday practice and how are their efforts perceived by relevant stakeholders including teachers and parents? Online surveys were sent to parents, teachers, and Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBAs) to assess BCBAs’ overall use of EBP. EBP factors related to identifying effective treatments (e.g. past treatment effectiveness, overall health, client repertoire), treatment fidelity, and meaningful changes to the client’s life (e.g. quality of life, client preferences) were analyzed. Parent and teacher perspectives as well as BCBAs self-reported use of EBP will be shared. Parent, teacher, and BCBA collaboration, perceived inattention to relevant treatment selection factors, and proposed areas of growth for behavior analysts will be discussed.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): decision-making model, Evidence-based practice, treatment selection
Target Audience:

Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBAs)

 

Teachers’ Relationship With Behavior Analysts: How are Behavior Analysts Perceived in the School Setting

AMANDA HENDERSON (Ball State University)
Abstract:

Behavior analysts consulting with teachers will find unfavorable outcomes when the evidence-based practice (EBP) decision-making model for treatment selection is not used. Teachers implement (or oversee implementation) of interventions so teacher ‘buy in’ is important. An online survey assessed teachers’ perspectives on the use of EBP by behavior analysts. A total of 75,000 surveys were emailed. A total of 63 teachers completed the survey. Teachers were asked to rate how important EBP factors were to BCBAs when choosing an intervention. We hypothesized most teachers would believe BCBAs consistently used factors related to identifying effective treatments (e.g. past treatment effectiveness, overall health, client repertoire), treatment fidelity, and meaningful changes to client’s life (e.g. quality of life, client preferences) as important. Although this hypothesis was generally supported, 60% of teachers do not believe BCBAs perceive cost of treatment to be a relevant factor in selecting treatments. In addition, 20% of teachers believe treatment acceptability is not being given due consideration and 15-17% of teachers believe BCBAs are not using student preference, student health, treatment fidelity or previous treatment effectiveness in their treatment selection process. The consequences for the BCBA-teacher relationship and outcomes for students that result from these views will be discussed.

 

Hear Our Voice: Parents’ Perspectives on Behavior Analysts Use of Evidence-Based Practice

SHAWNNA SUNDBERG (Ball State University; Hoosier ABA)
Abstract:

Parents play a critical role in the evidence-based practice (EBP) decision-making model because behavior analysts risk selecting treatments that are less feasible or have a lower likelihood of being implemented with integrity if they ignore parent perspectives. An online survey assessed parents’ perspectives on the use of EBP by BCBAs. A total of 22 parents rated how often they believe the BCBAs with whom they have worked consider EBP factors when choosing interventions. These EBP factors include but are not restricted to identifying effective treatments (e.g. past treatment effectiveness, overall health, client repertoire) and making meaningful changes to client’s life (e.g., client preferences). We hypothesized parents would state that most BCBAs considered these factors when selecting treatments for the client. Instead, nearly 2/3rds of parents reported believing that BCBAs considered past treatment effectiveness and overall client health half the time or less when selecting treatments. Further, 59% and 46% of parents reported believing BCBAs considered client repertoire and client preference half of the time or less, respectively. Based on this limited sample, behavior analysts are either insufficiently considering these variables when selecting treatments or are not communicating effectively to parents about their decision-making process when selecting treatments.

 

Behavior Analysts’ Use of Evidence-Based Practice: Where Do We Go From Here

SUSAN WILCZYNSKI (Ball State University)
Abstract:

Practitioners of any discipline should use the evidence-based practice (EBP) decision-making model to identify effective treatments that make meaningful changes in the lives of their clients (Wilczynski, 2017). An online self-report survey was sent to assess Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBAs) use of EBP in their everyday practice. A total of 127 BCBAs completed the survey in its entirety. BCBAs were asked to rate how important EBP factors were when choosing an intervention. Data were coded as either important or unimportant. We hypothesized BCBAs would rate factors related to identifying effective treatments (e.g. past treatment effectiveness, overall health, client repertoire), treatment fidelity, and meaningful changes to client’s life (e.g. quality of life, client preferences) as important. Our data suggest while the majority of BCBAs think identifying effective treatments (past treatment effectiveness, overall health, client repertoire), treatment fidelity, and making meaningful changes in their clients’ lives (quality of life, client preferences) are important to consider when choosing an intervention, they under appreciate the importance of cost of treatments. Does this mean behavior analysis risks being viewed as a concierge industry? The client, family, and societal implications of ignoring the cost of treatment are discussed.

 
 
Symposium #533
CE Offered: BACB
An Exploration of the Role of Behavior Analysis in Skills Teaching for Intervention and Prevention of Problem Behavior Within Irish Preschools
Monday, May 27, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jennifer Holloway (National University of Ireland, Galway)
CE Instructor: Jennifer Holloway, Ph.D.
Abstract:

There are a number of empirically identified barriers to the successful progression of children through the educational system. Such risk factors are increasingly prevalent at the preschool stage with changes in the demographic backgrounds of children, increased language and economic diversity, as well as variance in family circumstances presenting various educational and behavioral challenges for children. Often times failure to teach children important life skills at this point can lead to future failures within educational settings and/or the development of ongoing problem behavior. The symposium will demonstrate the role of behavior analysis in the prevention of and intervention for problem behavior within Irish preschool settings. Across a series of studies, the presenters will discuss the impact of the preschool life skills (PLS; Hanley et al., 2007) in teaching important learning readiness skills, the role of parents in supporting children learn the PLS, and the role of observational learning in acquiring such skills. Furthermore the research presented within the symposium explores the impact of the Class-Wide Function-Related Intervention Teams (CW-FIT, Wills et al., 2010) to target the emergence of problem behavior. Issues of generalisation and maintenance will be discussed within all of the presentations, as well as the specific application of the interventions within Irish preschools.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Practitioners working within preschool educational settings

 
Evaluating the Preschool Life Skills Program in Irish Preschool and Home Settings
CIARA GUNNING (National University of Ireland Galway), Jennifer Holloway (National University of Ireland, Galway)
Abstract: The preschool life skills (PLS; Hanley et al., 2007) program has been developed to mitigate the risk factors for the development of problem behavior which are increasingly evident in preschool populations. The PLS program aims to teach 13 preschool life skills (important school readiness skills and common functionally equivalent skills to preschool problem behaviour) preventively and prepare children for success with later educational transitions. A groups design was used to evaluate the PLS program with 21 preschool children in early education services in Ireland. The study is further extended to demonstrate the role of parental involvement in intervention, within a series of single case research designs, which explore the important potential implications for improving intervention efficacy, acceptability and accessibility of the program within an Irish context. Across the studies, results indicated that teacher and parent-led implementation of the PLS program led to an increase in preschool life skills and a decrease in problem behaviour, and supported generalization of the target preschool life skills across home and preschool settings. The findings of the current research are significant in informing the development of parent training packages to support the delivery of school-based interventions for typically developing preschool children.
 

Implementing Positive Behavior Support Within Preschool Settings: Group Functional Assessment and Class-Wide Function-Related Intervention Teams

Dearbhaile Mahon (National University of Ireland Galway), HELENA LYDON (National University of Ireland Galway), Jennifer Holloway (National University of Ireland, Galway), Ciara Gunning (National University of Ireland Galway)
Abstract:

Pr¬eschool is an important educational setting for child development and problem behavior is a prevalent barrier within this setting. Preschool teachers have expressed the need for evidence-based classroom management interventions to address problem behavior. Class-Wide Function-Related Intervention Teams (CW-FIT, Wills et al., 2010) is an intervention which incorporates social skills training, group contingencies and reinforcement to address problem behavior within classrooms. This intervention has been found to be socially valid by teachers and children, and effective in increasing children’s engagement, decreasing problems/problem behavior in elementary, kindergarten, first and second grade classrooms. The aim of the current study was to evaluate a modified CW-FIT as an effective strategy to address problem behavior within two community-preschools in Ireland across three preschool classes with 32 children. A multiple baseline design across participants was employed to evaluate the outcomes, with measures of generalization and maintenance also taken. Visual analysis of data revealed an increase in the children’s on-task behavior and social skills as well as a decrease in children’s problem behavior within these settings.

 
 
Invited Paper Session #534
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/NASP

A Behaviour Analysis of Theory of Mind: Conceptual and Applied Implications

Monday, May 27, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Swissôtel, Concourse Level, Zurich D
Area: PCH; Domain: Theory
Instruction Level: Advanced
CE Instructor: Francesca Degli Espinosa, Ph.D.
Chair: David C. Palmer (Smith College)
FRANCESCA DEGLI ESPINOSA (ABA Clinic, UK)
I fell in love with behaviour analysis in 1996, when I began working as a tutor for a child with autism. Almost immediately I became interested in interventions that could both define and establish generalised learning: the ability to demonstrate novel responses within an operant class without each individual response having been previously reinforced. I was given the opportunity to explore this question when I worked as the Lead Clinician for the first UK-based EIBI outcome study (Remington et al., 2007) at the University of Southampton. Within that context, I developed the Early Behavioural Intervention Curriculum (EBIC) an intervention framework derived from functional analyses of language, which subsequently formed the principal focus for my Doctoral thesis (2011). My clinical and research interests eventually settled, and continue to be, on advanced applications of contemporary analyses of verbal behaviour (Horne & Lowe, 1996; Michael, Palmer, & Sundberg, 2011) as a basis for teaching generalised verbal repertoires, and, thereby, as a means of minimising the need to teach specific individual verbal responses. Currently, I divide my time between the UK, where I live, and Italy, my home country, where I teach behaviour analysis to postgraduate students at the University of Salerno and support professionals in developing effective interventions.
Abstract:

The term Theory of Mind has come to refer to a collection of responses that involve one’s ability to predict another person’s behaviour based on understanding that person’s perspective. One of the most studied topics in the field of psychology for the past 30 years, Theory of Mind is considered not only an important developmental milestone in childhood, but also a theoretical system to explain additional social and cognitive processes in both typical and atypical children and adults. Despite the importance of the topic, behaviour analysis has yet to provide a satisfactory account of Theory of Mind (i.e., of the variables that control the types of behaviour commonly held to denote Theory of Mind). In this presentation I set out to provide the beginning of such an account. Firstly, I will argue that Theory of Mind is not an “entity” that is either present or absent, but rather, is a developmental verbal process that begins in early childhood with the establishment of tacting public and private events during social interactions. Secondly, I will provide an analysis of the controlling variables of the component verbal skills that are said to denote Theory of Mind. Thirdly, I will illustrate a hierarchical sequence of instructional activities derived from such an analysis to establish perspective taking in children with autism, a syndrome with known deficits in these skills. The application of a teaching technology derived from a conceptual and experimental analysis both validates and extends the basic approach.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe the verbal controlling variables involved in Theory of Mind Tasks; (2) provide a behavioural interpretation of perspective taking; (3) delineate a programme of instruction to establish component Theory of Mind skills.
 
 
Symposium #535
CE Offered: BACB
Why and How Behavior Analysis Can Use Acceptance and Commitment Therapy to Disseminate Applied Behavior Analysis.
Monday, May 27, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 1/2
Area: PCH/DEV; Domain: Translational
Chair: Katherine J. Saint (Fox Valley Autism Treatment Program, The Chicago School of Professional Psychology )
Discussant: Brad Brezinski (Florida Institute of Technology, Fox Valley Autism Treatment Program )
CE Instructor: Katherine J. Saint, M.A.
Abstract:

The dissemination of Behavior Analysis is vital to spreading the impact of behavior analytic strategies. Applied Behavior Analysis is best known for its work with Autism but can be useful in any domain. Dixon (2018) reports that in order to spread Behavior Analysis’ impact the field needs to offer technology that is useful and does not include jargon that is unapproachable to people outside the field. Acceptance and Commitment Therapy meets this criteria and has already been accepted in many fields. For example it’s use for behavioral improvement, medical conditions and staff training has been published in approximately 99 academic journals. Acceptance and Commitment Therapy is based in Relational Frame Theory which has been accepted in the behavior analytic research for over 30 years. Other behavior analytic strategies support the processes of Acceptance and Commitment therapy such as motivating operations, contingency awareness training, and strategies to address the impact of delayed discounting.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): ACT, RFT
Target Audience:

Behavior Analysts and other practitioners

Learning Objectives: 1. Learners will identify the principles of Behavior Analysis used in Acceptance and Commitment Therapy. 2. Learners will identify application methods of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy 3. Learners will identify the history and previous application of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy as well as the domains in which it is currently being used.
 
How Acceptance and Commitment Therapy and Behavior Analysis are Compatible
(Theory)
KATHERINE J. SAINT (Fox Valley Autism Treatment Program, The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract: The mission of Behavior Analysis is to save the world. Dixon (2018) stated that the field has not yet reached this lofty goal created by B.F. Skinner in 1982. Dixon challenges Behavior Analysts to evaluate their own behavior to identify why there hasn’t been a bigger impact. Two examples of obstacles in the dissemination of Behavior Analysis include the amount of work Behavior Analysis has done with Autism and the language that Behavior Analysts use. Because of the amount of attention Behavior Analysis has gotten from the work in Autism treatment many people do not realize Behavior Analysis can be useful in other areas. Additionally people have a hard time implementing Behavior Analytic strategies because they do not understand the field’s jargon. Acceptance and Commitment Therapy is a potential solution to these obstacles. Lack of education on how Acceptance and Commitment Therapy uses Behavior Analytic principles may be limiting its expansion into mainstream Behavior Analytic practice. Acceptance and Commitment Therapy addresses the jargon barrier of the dissemination of Behavior Analysis and the misconception about Behavior Analysis only addressing Autism services because it uses everyday language and has already been accepted in many fields. Step one of addressing the barrier of using Acceptance and Commitment Therapy as a dissemination tool is educating Behavior Analysts on Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, its uses and its application.
 
Application of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy
(Service Delivery)
BRAD BREZINSKI (Florida Institute of Technology, Fox Valley Autism Treatment Program)
Abstract: Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) can be a useful tool for spreading Behavior Analysis. As of October 2018, ACT has been published in 99 journals according Web of Science (2018). These journals include but are not limited to the fields of Behavior Analysis, psychology, OBM, drug and alcohol abuse, sports, forensics, education, and medical fields. PsychInfo lists 1303 peer reviewed articles when searching “acceptance and commitment therapy”. Proquest lists 547 articles, PubMed lists 739 articles and Web of science lists 965 articles. Behavior Analysis is often thought of as only Autism treatment but ACT heavily demonstrates that Behavior Analysis is effective with many populations. Of the peer reviewed articles on ACT, more than 20 mental health diagnoses were addressed, more than 30 medical diagnoses were treated, relationship problems were resolved, attrition was reduced, therapy compliance was increased, extreme drug use was reduced, and behavior problems were eliminated. ACT has been shown to be effective for all ages. Medical doctors are often a referral source and much of the research on ACT includes pain management and other medical diagnoses. Because ACT is accepted by the medical field Behavior Analysts could use it as a referral source by using ACT in behavioral treatment. ACT is also useful to Behavior Analysts for staff training. ACT is accepted in Behavior Analysis because of its roots in Relational Frame Theory and other Behavior Analytic strategies. Because ACT is also accepted by many fields Behavior Analysts educating others on ACT and using act is a useful tool to help spread the use of Behavior Analysis and could potentially open up more funding sources for Behavior Analysis.
 
 
Invited Paper Session #536
CE Offered: PSY/BACB/QABA/NASP

Utility of Operant Conditioning to Address Poverty-Related Health Disparities

Monday, May 27, 2019
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom AB
Area: SCI; Domain: Applied Research
Instruction Level: Basic
CE Instructor: Kenneth Silverman, Ph.D.
Chair: Cynthia J. Pietras (Western Michigan University)
KENNETH SILVERMAN (Johns Hopkins University)
Kenneth Silverman has been in the Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences in the Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine since 1989 and is currently a Professor in the department. His research has focused on developing operant treatments to address the interrelated problems of poverty, drug addiction, and HIV. His primary research has focused on the development and evaluation of abstinence reinforcement interventions for the treatment of heroin and cocaine addiction in low-income, inner city adults; financial incentives to promote adherence to antiretroviral medications and viral suppression in people living with HIV; the development of the therapeutic workplace intervention and the use of employment-based reinforcement in the long-term maintenance of drug abstinence, adherence to addiction treatment medications, and employment; and the development of computer-based training to establish critical academic and job skills that unemployed adults need to gain and maintain employment and escape poverty.
Abstract:

Poverty is a pervasive risk factor underlying poor health, including drug addiction and HIV. This presentation will review research on the utility of operant conditioning to address the interrelated problems of poverty, drug addiction, and HIV. Our research has shown that operant reinforcement using financial incentives can promote abstinence from cocaine and heroin in low-income adults with long histories of drug addiction and adherence to antiretroviral medications in low-income adults living with HIV. Our research has also shown that financial incentives are most effective when high-magnitude incentives are used, and that long-duration abstinence reinforcement can serve as an effective maintenance intervention. The utility of operant conditioning to promote behaviors needed to escape poverty is less clear, but research on an operant employment-based intervention called the therapeutic workplace shows some promise. In the therapeutic workplace, low-income or unemployed adults are hired and paid to work. To promote drug abstinence and/or medication adherence, employment-based reinforcement is arranged in which participants are required to provide drug-free urine samples and/or take prescribed medication to maintain access to the workplace and maximum pay. Because many low-income adults lack skills needed for gainful employment, the therapeutic workplace offers job-skills training and employment phases through which participants progress sequentially. Our research has shown that employment-based reinforcement within the therapeutic workplace can promote and maintain drug abstinence, medication adherence, work, and other adaptive behaviors that people need to move out of poverty. The therapeutic workplace could serve as a model anti-poverty program, particularly for people with histories of drug addiction or other health problems, although more research on the therapeutic workplace is needed that targets poverty directly.

Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts; licensed psychologists; graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants will be able to: (1) describe how operant conditioning can be used to promote drug abstinence and adherence to medications; (2) describe parameters of operant conditioning that are critical to promoting drug abstinence in refractory patients and maintaining drug abstinence over time; (3) describe the main features of the therapeutic workplace; (4) describe how the therapeutic workplace uses contingent access to employment (i.e., employment-based reinforcement) to promote drug abstinence, medication adherence, work, and productivity; (5) describe three models for arranging long-term exposure to employment-based reinforcement in the treatment of drug addiction.
 
 
Panel #538
CE Offered: BACB
Should We Be Selling Out and Commercializing Our Science?: The Stories of PECs, PEAK, and Chartlytics
Monday, May 27, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Ballroom Level, Regency Ballroom C
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Translational
CE Instructor: Matthew Cicoria, M.S.
Chair: Matthew Cicoria (Positive Behavioral Outcomes, LLC)
MARK R. DIXON (Southern Illinois University)
RICHARD M. KUBINA (Penn State)
Abstract:

Research in the science of Applied Behavior Analysis has advanced over the last few decades. Despite our technological advancements, and the increases in certified professionals (BACB, 2018); the dissemination of effective procedures has not been widespread amongst front line workers, schools and service providers. Sharing the effective technologies from our research needs to be at the frontline of our dissemination efforts. The following talk describes the various efforts taken to disseminate effective technologies of the science of behavior through various commercial processes. The use of cutting edge technology and curriculum based programming in disseminating the science of Behavior Analysis will be discussed by this panel.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Board certified individuals, Behavior Analysts in training, teachers, school administrators, and other practitioners.

Learning Objectives: BACB
Keyword(s): Autism, Behavior Analysis, Dissemination, Evidence Based
 
 
Symposium #539
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Delivering Behavior Analytic Consultation Services in Rural and Resource-Restrained Locales: An Exploration of Challenges and Outcomes
Monday, May 27, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 3/4
Area: CBM/CSS; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Patrick E. McGreevy (Patrick McGreevy and Associates)
CE Instructor: Theodore A. Hoch, Ed.D.
Abstract:

Growth of the natural science of behavior analysis, and the credentialing of behavior analytic practitioners has accelerated over the last thirty years. The availability of services, however, has only unevenly kept up with the demand for service, with many areas of the world underserved, and many more unserved. In this symposium, we describe implementation of service provision at a distance in three venues. First, we describe providing distance based behavior analysis services to reach otherwise unserved service participants in largely rural Idaho. Next, we describe a combination of behavior analytic teaching and up-to-date technology to provide services to families of underserved children in urban, suburban, and rural Virginia, using an innovative web-based platform. Finally, we describe providing services from US-based behavior analysts to families of children with disabilities in Pakistan, using easily accessed internet platforms. We present outcome and satisfaction data which speak to the effectiveness of service provision in each ofd these modalities.

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): behavioral consultation, distance, rural, telehealth
Target Audience:

Practicing behavior analysts and behavior consultants. Individuals providing services or supporting those that provide services to rural, unserved, or underserved populations.

 
Delivering Behavioral Coaching and Consultation Services in Rural Idaho
AUDREY ALBERSTADT (Boise State University)
Abstract: With less than 40 certified behavior analysts in Idaho, and less than 20 registered behavior technicians (BACB, 2018) access to behavioral service delivery, coaching, and consultation can be constrained and compromised; especially in rural counties. Rural counties represent at least 80% of the state of Idaho. We examine a model for behavioral coaching and consultation practices. Machalicek, W., O'Reily, M. F. et al. successfully utilized videoconferencing technology to conduct functional analysis and develop classroom behavior supports. Our model also includes the use of video conferencing and telehealth technologies in order to address concerns for access to professional development and behavioral consultation services in the school setting. In utilizing our current model, challenges and concerns have arose. Some of these concerns include implementer and team buy-in for behavior change procedures, pairing procedures and rapport between consultant and team, and teams' access to video conferencing technology. Considerations for further modifications to optimize service delivery are presented.
 
Behavior Analytic Distance Consultation in Pakistan
THEODORE A. HOCH (George Mason University), Adam Dreyfus (Sarah Dooley Center for Autism)
Abstract: As a natural science, behavior analysis transcends cultures and societies. Indeed, it’s these naturally occurring contingencies that underlie cultures and societies. Our experiences in consulting and training in a variety of countries have been that parents of children with behavioral difficulties have the same sorts of questions, regardless of nation in which those parents live. Getting those questions answered, however, and getting help for these children is often difficult when there are few to no qualified behavior analysts in the countries in which these families reside. In this presentation, we discuss distance consultation to families in Pakistan, to include behavioral assessment, instruction, intervention, and parent training. We also discuss overcoming obstacles such as large differences in time zones, using technology that complies with relevant regulations (e.g., HIPAA), and respecting differing cultural and religious customs. Outcome data include measures of parent efficacy and child improvement. Suggestions for conducting this kind of consultation are offered.
 

Helping to Solve the Autism Puzzle With AnswersNow

ADAM DREYFUS (Sarah Dooley Center for Autism)
Abstract:

In 1968, Dr. Skinner laid out an elegant description of how to deliver effective instruction. Fast forward 50 years, and the field of behavior analysis has changed dramatically. There has been a huge proliferation of training programs, and there are more than 90,000 people in the world who are credentialed by the Behavior Analyst Certification Board. Applied behavior analysis has become a widely recognized, mainstream treatment modality for children and adults with a variety of disabilities. Ninety thousand credentialed professionals, however, is not enough to meet the need for behavior analytic services, and many go unserved or underserved, even in locations where behavior analysts may be relatively plentiful. AnswersNow combines Dr. Skinner’s technology of teaching with an innovative technology platform, leveraging technology with good, old-fashioned behavior analysis to deliver a first-of-it’s-kind service dedicated to improving the lives of children diagnosed with disabilities worldwide. We will share the results of early beta testing, parent survey results, ongoing data, and platform design. Implications for future uses of technology will be explored.

 
 
Symposium #540
CE Offered: BACB/QABA/NASP
Behaviorally Based Approaches to Changing Behaviors of Addictions and Recovery: A Symposium to Honor Sherman Yen, Ph.D.
Monday, May 27, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Swissôtel, Event Center Second Floor, Vevey 1/2
Area: CBM/BPN; Domain: Theory
Chair: Kathryn M. Potoczak (Shippensburg University)
CE Instructor: Kathryn M. Potoczak, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Sherman Yen, PhD , founder of the Asian American Anti Smoking Association, student of Fred Keller, and one of the pioneer generation of Applied Behavior Analysts, among many other kudos, dedicated much of his career to applying Applied Behavior Analysis to addressing problems from addictions. We present work applying ABA to smoking cessation and recovery from opioid addiction. To honor that legacy, we present a symposium highlighting work applying ABA to change behaviors of addiction, and recovery, areas about which he cared passionately. Now more than ever opportunities to apply ABA to "mainstream" health behavior change

Instruction Level: Basic
Keyword(s): addiction, smoking cessation
Target Audience:

attendees who would like to apply ABA principles and methodologies to effect behavior change for patients with addictions, recovering from addictions, preventing relapse, as well as targeting behavior changes for family members. this symposium will be useful for those wishing to effect these changes in both professional as well as personal life situations

Learning Objectives: Attendees will be able to apply ABA principles to - behaviors and habits to promote smoking cessation - behaviors and habits of family members of recovering addicts - behaviors and habits of recovering addicts, using behavioral activation to "reanimate" recovering addict
 

A Comparison of Contingency-Management Versus Feedback Alone for Smoking Cessation

JOSEPHINE DRESS (Columbia University; Shippensburg University), Kathryn M. Potoczak (Shippensburg University)
Abstract:

The number of cigarettes smoked over five weeks was measured for four participants to determine if feedback only (FO), in the form of saliva cotinine levels, would be as effective a treatment for smoking cessation as contingency management (CM). After a one-week baseline, all participants were introduced to smoking reduction via a changing-criterion design, in which the allowed daily amount of cigarettes was 25% lower than their baseline level. Throughout the study, participants texted the daily amount of cigarettes smoked to a research associate. They also met with a research associate twice per week to have their saliva cotinine levels evaluated (values ranging from 0 to 6, 6 indicating high levels of nicotine in the saliva). Starting in Week Two, Participant A received one cash lottery draw for attending a meeting and received another draw if saliva cotinine levels were reduced from the previous meeting level (CM). Participants B-D simply received feedback regarding saliva cotinine levels (FO). Treatment continued for the next three weeks, with a 25% reduction targeted for each subsequent week, with a goal of complete cessation during the final week of treatment. While complete smoking cessation did not occur for any of the participants, all participants did reduce the daily number of cigarettes smoked from baseline levels, and results indicate that FO was as effective in producing this result as CM without the associated cost of the cash lottery.

 
A Program Focused on Modification of Behaviors of the Family Members of the Post-Rehab Recovering Addict to Decrease the Likelihood of Relapse
RICHARD COOK (Penn State University; Applied Behavioral Medicine Associates, Hershey, PA; Ruth Pauline Cook Foundation)
Abstract: While the immediate family of the recovering addict is often the primary support system post discharge from a rehabilitation program, programs rarely are found to dedicate time to directly focus on making that home environment more reinforcing (and less likely to irritate the returning recovering addict to the point of leaving the home and relapsing) by deliberately focusing on identifying problematic behaviors of the family members, and modifying them to decrease the likelihood of problem interactions with the recovering addict, and increase the likelihood of continued building of stronger family relationships and patterns of behavior, thus decreasing the likelihood of being irritated by the family environment, and leaving to seek reinforcement elsewhere, possibly involving relapse. This presentation outlines a program in which in a systematic fashion deliberate attention is made to identifying past behavior and interaction problems within the family, and focus directly on changing those family member habits, and similarly, build upon prior family habits previously reinforcing. The applied behavior analyst is uniquely well positioned to apply the principles of behavior change in a robust fashion to the many habits that don’t simply go away by talking about them, thru the systematic application of techniques in the behavioral modification armamentarium including, but not limited to functional assessment, changing factors in the antecedent and consequent states, and directly modifying the topography of family member behaviors, as well as the differential reinforcement/punishment of competing, alternative, or incompatible behaviors.
 
Behavioral Activation for Reanimation of the Recovering Addict
MATTHEW GROSS (Shippensburg University), Richard Cook (Penn State University; Applied Behavioral Medicine Associates; Ruth Pauline Cook Foundation)
Abstract: Patients undergoing recovery from addiction, especially following an acute inpatient rehabilitation experience, often experience a period of time during which they are "spared" from typical daily activities, responsibilities, and reinforcers. During this time, particularly if living "back at home," demands on them are initially reduced, or non existent, but ideally should gradually increase, commensurate with ongoing successfulnhabit development, but too often, they don't do so. Unfortunately, for some patients, their families, their rehabilitation clinicians, their healthcare payers/insurers, the legal system, their friends, and other key stakeholders in their recovery, either in being well intentioned..or simply by not paying attention.., set up an environment sheltering them not only from responsibilities "too much for them to handle" at this time, but unfortunately also from the many natural consequences that would bring life back to them, shaping their behaviors, overt and private, to assist to return them to (ideally, improved versions of) their "normal" lives. While they might participate in some sort of outpatient "program," sadly the absence of a systematically implemented, reevaluated, revised, and increased set of responsibilities and actions expected of them within their family or other living situation, outside of their formal outpatient drug rehab program activities, can allow them, or arguably, cause them, to become "permanent teenagers," returning from their outpatient program activities to their home, where they can isolate themselves into their rooms, pajamas, snack foods, phone, computer, and up all night schedules of internet or video or game controller or tv reruns, often absent even much interaction with other family members in the house. Instead of focusing on "esteem building," behavioral activation robustly employed, with a goal of developing patterns of behavior useful to returning to a (more desirable) day to day life going forward, can get them showered dressed, out of their rooms, out of their houses, and into volunteer or part time job activities which will, if guided well, expose them to natural reinforces that will train them, rehabilitate them, reanimate them, redefine them, and reintegrate them into the (hopefully well chosen) worlds around them, and increase the likelihood they will be fortified against the stimuli, internal and external, that might lead them to emit behaviors of relapse.
 
 
Panel #541
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Applied Ethics: Home and Community, High Risk Behaviors, and Dealing With Your Decision
Monday, May 27, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Fairmont, Lobby Level, Cuvee
Area: CSS/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Lindsay Hauer, M.A.
Chair: Lindsay Hauer (Positive Behavior Supports, Corp. )
AMBER LINDEMAN (TxABA)
AMY SULGER (Positive Behavior Supports, Corp)
LINDA S. MECKLER (Positive Behavior Supports)
Abstract:

Ethical guidelines provide a critical navigational tool for practitioners in order to ensure that they are delivering the highest ethical considerations possible to every client across all settings. In general, ethics and ethical dilemmas are not entirely compulsory, and while a general consensus may exist regarding standards, challenges arise regarding decision-making and application. In clinical practice, identifying ethical dilemmas are often evident to practitioners however; making ethical decisions that benefit all stakeholders across settings tends to be more difficult. In addition, providing highly ethical services for individuals who engage in dangerous behavior in the community provides a unique challenge and tests the limits of a behavior analyst’s decision-making abilities. In this discussion, the panelists will elaborate on their successes and challenges related to actively applying ethical models to uncommon, complex, and even life-threatening scenarios within the home and community based service setting.

Instruction Level: Advanced
Target Audience:

This panel is designed for current BCBAs, BCaBAs, and practitioners who are actively working in challenging situations, or are seeking additional information on aspects of working in the home/community setting.

Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to describe antecedent strategies for determining functions of challenging behavior in a community setting Participants will become familiar with treatment options that match determined functions and ensure safety Participants will become knowledge and applicable literature and research resources to guide future treatment planning and assessment Participants will be able to describe best practices and select most appropriate ethical treatment options based on behavior and contextual variables Participants will be able to describe reasons why behavioral assessment can be challenging in the community
 
 
Panel #542
CE Offered: BACB
Expanding Beyond Autism: Developing Solutions Through Entrepreneurship and Design
Monday, May 27, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Fairmont, B2, Imperial Ballroom
Area: CSS/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Ryan O'Donnell, M.S.
Chair: Ryan O'Donnell (RYANO, LLC)
ANESA DOYLE (8 the Plate)
ERIN LUSBY-DONOVAN (Arrow Health and Wellness)
ADRIENNE FITZER (The Applied Behavior Analysis Center, Inc. (ABAC))
Abstract:

Entrepreneurs are those who create, develop, and improve. The entrepreneur may create an industry or jobs, improve upon current services or develop a product or service that serves a purpose or solves a problem. [Professional] entrepreneurs, like nurse entrepreneurs, pharmacist entrepreneurs or behavior analyst entrepreneurs are those that combine those characteristics with their specialization (Wilson, Whitaker, & Whitford, 2012). Common documented barriers to becoming an entrepreneur, regardless of one's profession, include cultural, ethical, legal, and financial constraints but also include the inability to spot opportunities. During this panel, 4 entrepreneurs will talk about "spotting an opportunity" outside of autism treatment, the development of their ideas, how they utilized their skills as trained behavior analysts in the development of the company, the barriers to implementation they face(d) and resources and supports that have allowed them to be successful. Conversation with the audience will include sharing other opportunities where behavior analyst entrepreneurs may provide a positive impact and discuss the importance of collaborating with other to make large-scale changes toward the greater good.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Behavior Analysts looking to expand their expertise and service delivery into areas outside of autism treatment and EIBI work.

Learning Objectives: Identify 4 areas for expanding outside of autism treatment. Identify 3 models for approaching a new market for service delivery. Identify 3 additional professionals or skill sets required to successfully enter novel industries.
Keyword(s): Design, Entrepreneur, Fitness, Scalable
 
 
Panel #543
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
Risky Business Roundup: Ethics, Interventions, and Consultation in the Area of Sexuality
Monday, May 27, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Hyatt Regency West, Lobby Level, Crystal Ballroom A
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Sorah Stein, M.A.
Chair: Janani Vaidya (Garden Center Services)
NICHOLAS ALEXANDER MAIO (Empowered: A Center for Sexuality, LLC)
SORAH STEIN (Partnership for Behavior Change)
FRANK R. CICERO (Seton Hall University)
Abstract: The field of behavior analysis acknowledges our responsibility to ethically provide services that support the autonomy of and maximize reinforcement for our clients, while also maximizing benefit to the community at large. Perhaps in no arena is this responsibility more pertinent than in that of sexual behavior. Cognizance around ethical issues as well as potential legal implications is of highest importance, especially in situations in which our clients have developmental disabilities. This panel will serve as a sounding board for common issues faced in the field as behavior analysts who address potential behavior change surrounding sexual behavior. Panelists will provide anecdotal information to inform best practices, surrounding the ethics of consultation and intervention, and the ethical considerations of each. Past Risky Business panels will serve as a brief touchpoint for this panel, as our panelists continue to bring us new and relevant information in the realm of sexual behavior.
Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience: BCBA-D, BCBA, BCaBA, RBTs, or those training to be any of these who are interested in building their competence around the topic of sexual behavior and ethical implications of interventons. Teachers, therapists, and other helping professionals are also welcome to attend.
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of this panel, attendees will be able to: (1) state guidelines in the Professional and Ethical Compliance Code for Behavior Analysts (BACB, 2014) that are applicable to ethics of sexual behavior, (2) state one way to assess their competency to intervene on a sexual behavior or behavior that appears sexual (3) state at least one person in the field who is competent to consult on sexual behavior cases
Keyword(s): developmental disabilities, ethics, sexual behavior
 
 
Panel #546
CE Offered: BACB — 
Ethics
When Applied Behavior Analysis Goes to School: Lessons Learned From the Field
Monday, May 27, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, Gold
Area: EDC/DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Jennifer Hamrick, Ph.D.
Chair: Jennifer Hamrick (Texas Tech University)
ALYSSA N. WILSON (Saint Louis University)
KATHERINE WHEELER (Del Valle Independent School District)
JON PETERSON (Norwich Public Schools)
Abstract:

While schools continue to adopt the use of behavior anlaytic principles into their teaching practices when working with students with developmental disabilities, the employment of Board Certified Behavior Analysts (BCBAs) and their job descriptions in the school setting are quite diverse and vary with each school district. Teachers and paraprofessionals can benefit from the guidance and feedback provided by a BCBA but barriers do exist that prevent adequate time and resources for all levels of educators to access quality training. Buy-in from school administrators is sometime directly correlated with costs that includes materials, resources, and substitutes to cover classrooms when teachers and paraprofessionals leave for training purposes. Ethical considerations for BCBAs employed by the public school system will be discussed as well as future directions for providing schools with the education and tools necessary to give teachers and paraprofessionals the ABA training that they need. Representation from school systems across the US will present their schools' basic data and job descriptions for BCBAs in their districts, as well as how they disseminate the use of ABA to all levels of educators who work with individuals with developmental disabilities. This panel will discuss the need for BCBAs in the school system, challenges, and recommendations for job descriptions for districts employing BCBAs in their systems.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Behavior analysts of all levels employed by both schools and private companies that may consult/work in collaboration with public school systems.

Learning Objectives: 1) Participants will be able to describe the specific issues in school districts related to practicing as a BCBA in the public school setting. 2) Participants will be able to discuss potential solutions for job descriptions and job expectations for BCBAs in the public school setting. 3) Participants will be able to discuss potential solutions for everyday challenges BCBAs experience as part of their daily work in public schools. 4) Participants will be able to identify the benefits of BCBAs as part of school district staff for students, educators, school leadership, and parents.
 
 
Symposium #547
CE Offered: BACB/QABA
Understanding Mental Health as a Function of the Relative Fitness of Verbal Behavior
Monday, May 27, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Swissôtel, Lucerne Ballroom Level, Lucerne 1/2
Area: PCH/VBC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Mariana De Los Santos (Bloom Children's Center)
CE Instructor: L L Mason, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The term “mental health” is often used as a mentalistic explanation for aberrant behavior. Individuals who engage in temporally extended patterns of atypical behavior are considered to have a mental health disorder. But where in the body does mental health exist? Of what material is mental health made? And how could mental health, or impairments thereof, cause behavior? The behavior analytic literature has a long record of addressing psychiatric and psychological illnesses. However, the origins of such behavioral patterns still need further explaining, as a better understanding of mental health issues may lead to more efficacious treatments. Here we analyze mental health disorders as a function of the relative fitness of the elementary verbal operants. Using an evolutionary framework, we extend a model of stimulus control proportionality described by Mason and Andrews (2018) to analyze mental health as an issue of disproportionate stimulus control over verbal behavior. Implications for research and practices are discussed.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Keyword(s): mental health, proportionality, relative fitness, Stimulus control
Target Audience:

BCBAs and Psychologists

Learning Objectives: By the end of the session, participants will be able to: - describe "mental health" as a disorder of stimulus control over verbal behavior - identify examples of response prepotency - discuss verbal behavior in terms of response populations
 
Two Types of Verbal Behavior and a Pseudotype
L L MASON (Univ of Texas at San Antonio)
Abstract: The convergence of the organism’s genetic endowment, history of reinforcement, and present context serve as the locus of control over behavior. Over the lifetime of the organism, history is used to describe the population of responses that have led to the present form, which is further susceptible to refinement through contingency shaping. Just as mechanical behavior is selected by the relative ecological fitness of the environment, verbal behavior is also susceptible to relegation by context. Undoubtedly, verbal behavior is governed by ontogenic contingency shaping. However, here we present a phylogenetic framework for functionally analyzing verbal behavior, and argue that the relative fitness of one verbal operant is determined in part by the liminal intensity of other verbal operants. Analogous to competition between individual and group selection in biological evolution, verbal behavior that benefits the individual (i.e., mands) are in competition with verbal behavior that benefits the group (i.e., tacts). A functional speaking repertoire is premised upon the behavioral evolution of each verbal operant in proportionate strength to one another to serve as a measure of relative fitness. Accordingly, verbal behavior functions to extend the speaker’s control over the physical environment across geographically and temporally extended reinforcement relations.
 

The Verbal Operational Analyses of Psychiatric Symptoms of Individuals With Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities

ALONZO ALFREDO ANDREWS (The University of Texas at San Antonio)
Abstract:

Notwithstanding the utility of the Reiss Screen for Maladaptive Behaviors (RSMB) and the Diagnostic Manual- Intellectual Disability (DM-ID) 2, identifying contributing psychiatric factors for the purpose of providing residential and outpatient services for individuals with Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities (IDD) with challenging behavior can be ineffective. While biomedical treatments generally represent primary interventions, this can be at the expense of adaptive functioning and quality of life for this population, particularly when the sedating side effects of some psychotropic medications can potentially further suppress the performance and learning of individuals with IDD. The efficacy of operant conditioning to address psychotic behavior has long since been demonstrated; the analysis of the verbal behavior of psychiatric patients initiated in the 1950s; the investigation of behavioral mechanisms of psychopathology commenced. Relevant to IDD, it is often difficult to determine if challenging behaviors are psychiatric symptoms since diagnosing mental disorder in patients with IDD can be the direct result of deficits of verbal behavior, i.e., mands, tacts, and intraverbal, as well as listener responding. Verbal operant analyses can be particularly significant for the development of behavioral interventions addressing the behavior challenges of individuals with IDD.

 

Identifying Verbal Behavior Patterns Through Programmatic Language Analysis

DON DAVIS (CAST Tech)
Abstract:

This study provides an initial examination of programmatic language analysis tools in identifying patterns of language usage related to the discussion of autism (cf. De Smedt & Daelemans, 2012). Using publicly available data, researchers identified words commonly collocated in discussion of autism, ‘sentiment’ frequency (or 'emotional valence' e.g. Critchfield, Becirevic, & Reed, 2017), and programmatically identifiable relational frames (github.com/ianhussey/simpleNLP). This exploratory study highlights the potential of modern programmatic methods including natural language processing and data visualization for exploring, identifying, and discussing various trends in the verbal behavior surrounding autism and other communicative disorders. This presentation will provide a quick walkthrough of the automated datamining, data cleaning, and data parsing process. Then the automated analyses methodology will be briefly explained with a discussion of locating and utilizing the software tool chain. Findings will be presented with a focused discussion on implications for future research. The presentation will conclude with a next step analysis of how these modern methods will be used to quantify and expand the SCoRE framework (Mason & Andrews, 2018) for categorization of other verbal behavior disorders.

 
 
Panel #548
CE Offered: BACB
PDS: Persistent Productivity: Strategies to Maintain a Work-Life Balance
Monday, May 27, 2019
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Fairmont, Second Level, International Ballroom
Area: TBA/CSS; Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: Lorraine A Becerra, M.A.
Chair: Lorraine A Becerra (Utah State University)
TARA A. FAHMIE (California State University, Northridge)
RUTH ANNE REHFELDT (Southern Illinois University)
KENNETH F. REEVE (Caldwell University)
Abstract:

Across academic and clinical settings, behavior analysts are tasked with completing a wide variety of responsibilities. The number of duties in these settings can make it difficult to prioritize personal well-being. However, if the quality of life is not maintained, then the quantity of productivity may not persist. The purpose of this discussion is to offer insights and experiences to help graduate students and professionals be successful in their careers while preserving personal lives. This professional development series panel will highlight the unique challenge of balancing a productive career, while maintaining a preferred quality of life. The presenters in this panel include prominent leaders in the field of behavior analysis. Across their years of experience, all three panelists have developed flourishing professional careers, while developing personal interests outside of the field. The presenters will offer invaluable insights to achieving professional and personal goals, during graduate school and after.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Graduate students and professionals

Learning Objectives: 1. Describe importance of maintaining work-life balance for behavior analysts. 2. State methods to measure and evaluate achievement of personal and professional goals. 3. Describe factors influencing the difficulties in maintaining a productive professional career.
Keyword(s): Graduate school, Productivity, work-life balance
 
 
Special Event #549
CE Offered: BACB
Presidential Address: The Heart of Behavior Analysis
Monday, May 27, 2019
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
Hyatt Regency East, Ballroom Level, Grand Ballroom A-F
Instruction Level: Basic
Chair: Mark A. Mattaini (Jane Addams College of Social Work-University of Illinois at Chicago)
CE Instructor: Peter Killeen, Ph.D.
 

Presidential Address: The Heart of Behavior Analysis

Abstract:

I begin by thumbnailing the vision statements of the recent presidents of ABAI, where I find important commonalities and consilience with my sense our field, its history and possible futures. All presidents worried about the fractionation of behavior analysis, and believed that productive cross-fertilization among those fractions was decreasing. Many worried about our stature in the larger community of behavioral scientists, and the lack of cross-talk with them; some were concerned about the health of the basic science itself. Several pointed to the importance of developing new research and practice endeavors, extending the reach of behavior analysis to complex interactions among individuals in natural settings, and crafting new analytic tools to capture those. I review the heart of behavior analysis in futures past—those visions that made us a strong and effective scientific and therapeutic force during the 20th century—our Baroque and Classical years—and our Modernist aspirations for the 21st. I ask what we must do to keep our rhythm, to maintain our dynamism—now that that future is upon us. My tentative answers have several parts and action plans, with most addressing the shared concerns of the presidents. They include explorations of both the cities of the interior, and the countryside of the exterior; the development of a science of selection by antecedents to complement that of selection by consequences; and, because much of what researchers and practitioners do is as much art in the service of science and practice as textbook science or technology—finding ways to begin to understand and foster the artistic aspects of our crafts.

 
PETER KILLEEN (Arizona State University)
 

Dr. Peter Killeen is professor emeritus at Arizona State University; he has also been visiting scholar at the University of Texas, Cambridge University, and the Centre for Advanced Study, Oslo. He is a Fellow of the Society of Experimental Psychologists, a Senior Scientist Awardee from NIMH, a president of the Society for the Quantitative Analyses of Behavior (from which organization he received the Poetry in Science Award), held the American Psychological Association F. J. McGuigan Lectureship on Understanding the Human Mind (!), and received the Ernest and Josephine Hilgard Award for the Best Theoretical Paper on hypnosis (!!). Dr. Killeen has made many innovative and fundamental contributions to the experimental and quantitative analysis of behavior. His major work includes the development of incentive theory, culminating in the mathematical principles of reinforcement (Behavioral and Brain Sciences, 1994), and the behavioral theory of timing (BeT: Psychological Review, 1988), and a new theory of ADHD. He is the author of 200 peer-reviewed papers, most of which have been cited; a few ignored; a couple cursed. He has served on the boards of editors of the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, Behavioural ProcessesJournal of Experimental Psychology: Animal Behavior Processes, Psychonomic Bulletin & Review, Psychological Review, Brain & Behavioral Functions, and Comparative Cognition & Behavior Reviews. Dr. Killeen's quantitative and conceptual developments have enriched behavior analysis and the world beyond.

 
Target Audience:

Board certified behavior analysts. 

Learning Objectives:

After enduring this over-hyped but in retrospect amazingly worthwhile hour, you will be able to (or at least be inspired to, and expect me to question you about):

  • Identify the awardees of the 2019 fellows and councilors and what they have accomplished;
    • Say why we so much admire what they have given to our field.
    • Pick one of them and select their virtues to emulate, and describe how you will do that. Heroes are very, very important; not for them, but for you and your community. Please do this real-time as they are presented. Defend your sentiment with the person to the right of you. (If you are left-handed, to the left of you).
  • Argue with peers over:
    • The role of emotions in the science of behavior.
    • How we can begin to formulate a science of selection by antecedents.
    • Whether Art has any place in Science; are they Part and Parcel—or different Magisteria.
  • Contemplate which of the possible futures of behavior analysis is best for your aspirations. Formulate those aspirations in one sentence.  Make them happen.
 
 

BACK TO THE TOP

 

Back to Top
ValidatorError
  
Modifed by Eddie Soh
DONATE
{"isActive":false}